4700L service manual

SERVICE MANUAL

PN: RCFM4700L

H515/H551

®

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

H5

15

/H5

51


®

®

H515H551

SERVICE MANUAL

PN:RCFM4700L

It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within thisdocument to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of RicohCorporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of theirrespective companies.

They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and forthe benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or website is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

The Service Manual contains informatio nregarding service techniques, procedures,processes and spare parts of office equipmen tdistributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of thi smanual should be either service trained o rcertified by successfully completing a Rico hTechnical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizin ginformation contained in this service manual t orepair or modify Ricoh equipment risk persona linjury, damage to property. or loss of warrant yprotection.

Ricoh Corporation

WARNING

LEGEND

PRODUCTCODE

COMPANY

GESTETNER RICOH SAVIN

H515 9768 FAX4700L 3960

H551 9878 FAX4800L 3695

DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS

* 12/95 Original Printing

1 2/98 H551 (FAX4800L) Addition

2 7/98 Reprint

3 9/98 H132 Internet Fax Addition

Table of ContentsOVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2. FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2.1. Features List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment . . . . . . 1-7

1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.3.1. Mechanical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-81.3.2. Electrical Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

2. Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

3. Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

4. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

5. Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

6. Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14

1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.5.1. Transmission (PSTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151.5.2. Reception (PSTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161.5.3. Transmission (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171.5.4. Reception (ISDN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-181.5.5. Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface . . . . . . . . 1-20

1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211.6.1. Distribution Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-211.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

2. DRAM Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.1. Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

1. Document Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3. Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

4. Stamping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.1.2. Image Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 i SM

1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

2. Partial Image Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

3. Scanning Double-sided Documents . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

2.1.3. Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion . . . . . . . . . 2-112.1.5. Process without Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111. Background Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

3. Thresholding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

4. Erasure of irregular dots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

5. OR processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

2.1.6. Process with Halftone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121. Gamma correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2. MTF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. Halftone process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

2.1.7. Data Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-122.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

2.2. PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142.2.1. Printing Process - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142.2.2. OPC Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152.2.3. Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152.2.4. Laser Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

2. Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

3. Error Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

4. Print Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

5. Toner Saving Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.2.5. Toner Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202.2.6. Development . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-232.2.7. Paper Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

2. Paper Lift Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

4. Pick-up and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

5. Drive Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

2.2.8. Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-352.2.9. Transfer and Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-372.2.10. Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402.2.11. Fusing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-412.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Rev. 3/98

SM ii H515/H551

2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing . . . . . . . . . 2-472.2.14. Paper Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-482.3.1. Energy Saver Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode . . . . . . . . 2-51

3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode . . . . . . 2-53

4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode . . 2-55

2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-571. Service Call Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57

2. Excessive Jam Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

3. Periodic Service Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59

4. PM Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

5. Effective Term of Service Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-612.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-632.3.5. Fax On Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-662.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

2.4. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-692.4.1. MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

1. SCP (System Control Peripheral) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F) . . . . . . . . . 2-70

5. ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

6. DRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

7. SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

8. Video SRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

9. Voice A/D converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

10. Oscillators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

11. IC Card Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

2.4.2. MFDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-721. Energy Saver CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

5. DTMF Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 iii SM

6. DC/DC Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

7. DRAM Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

8. Interlock Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

9. Fuse and Test Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

2.4.3. PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-742.4.4. NCU (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

1. Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

INSTALLATION

3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk) . . . . . . 3-23.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.3.3. Fax on Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63.3.4. Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93.3.5. Printer Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103.3.6. Function Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02) . . . . . . . 4-24.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . . . . . . . . . 4-64.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

Rev. 3/98

SM iv H515/H551

4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free Run (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124.1.20. Software Download (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . 4-174.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards . . . . . . . . . 4-18

1. When downloading/uploading software . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

2. When replacing the MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

3. When replacing the MFDU or other components . . . . . . 4-20

4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) . . . . . . . 4-204.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-214.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . 4-214.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-224.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17) . . . . . . . 4-23

4.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244.2.1. System Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-244.2.2. Scanner Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-364.2.3. Printer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-384.2.4. Communication Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-414.2.5. G3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

4.3. NCU PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55

4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . 4-784.4.1. Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-784.4.2. Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79

4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82

4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

4.7. PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

5.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1.1. Document Table and Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.3. Left Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25.1.4. Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35.1.6. Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

5.2. ADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 v SM

5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65.2.4. ADF Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

5.3. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.3.1. Exposure Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85.3.3. Xenon Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-95.3.4. Tx Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105.3.5. Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105.3.6. Stamper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125.4.1. Laser Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor . . . . . . . 5-13

5.5. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145.5.1. Development Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-145.5.2. Transfer Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155.5.3. Main Motor and Gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-155.5.4. Toner End Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-165.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.6. FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205.6.1. Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205.6.2. Fusing Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-205.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225.6.4. Fusing Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-225.6.5. Hot Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-235.6.6. Pressure Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-255.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

5.7. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265.7.2. Paper End Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-265.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed Sensor, and Relay Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-275.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator . . . 5-28

5.8. PCBs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295.8.1. PSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-295.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-305.8.3. Power Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

5.9. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-325.9.2. Speaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Rev. 3/98

SM vi H515/H551

5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL) . . . . . . . . 5-335.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . 5-335.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components . . . . . . . 5-335.10.3. Paper Size Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-355.11.1. Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-355.11.2. Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-355.11.3. Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-355.11.4. Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405.12.1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-405.12.2. Scanner Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

1. Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

2. Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41

5.12.3. Printer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-421. Margins (Main Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-42

2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . 6-16.1.1. Blank Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26.1.2. Black Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36.1.3. Dirty Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46.1.4. Uneven Image Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56.1.5. Vertical Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-76.1.7. Vertical White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86.1.8. Horizontal White Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96.1.9. Black Dots/Spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-106.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas . . . . . . . . . . . 6-116.1.11. Faint Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-126.1.12. Vertical Black Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-146.1.13. Unfused Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156.1.14. Ghost Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-156.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper . . . . . . . . . 6-166.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left) . . . . 6-176.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image 6-17

6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-186.2.1. ADF/Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

1. Non Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 vii SM

2. Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

3. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

4. Multi-feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20

6.2.2. Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-211. Non-feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21

2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

3. Jam - Fusing Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

4. Skew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24

5. Multi-feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25

6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

6.4. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . 6-386.5.1. Defective Sensor Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-386.5.2. Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

ISDN TYPE 140

1. INSTALLATION

1.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1.1. User Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11.1.2. Service Level Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31.2.1. Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31.2.2. Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

2.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . . . 2-12.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02) . . . . . 2-22.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03) . . 2-32.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04) . . . 2-32.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05) . . 2-32.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06) . 2-42.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07) 2-42.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08) . . . . . . . . 2-42.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09) . . . . . . 2-42.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10) . . . . . . . 2-52.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11) . . . . . . 2-52.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12) . . . 2-62.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13) . . . . . . . . 2-6

Rev. 3/98

SM viii H515/H551

2.2. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.2.1. G4 Internal Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15

2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS * . . . . . . . 2-20

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1. ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1.1. D-channel Layer Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.1.3. D-channel Link Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.1.4. D-channel Network Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.1.5. B-channel Link Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.1.6. B-channel Network Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.1.7. Transport Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.1.8. Session Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.1.9. Document Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.1.10. Presentation Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5) . . . . . . 3-83.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5) . . . . . 3-8

3.3. LEDs * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST * . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List

A.1. How to Print the Dump List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

A.2. How to Read the Dump List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2A.2.1. Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4A.2.3. Layer 1 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7

1. Activation Procedure from the TE . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

2. Activation Procedure from the NT . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

3. Termination Procedure from the NT . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

B. G4 Parameter Locations

B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List . . . . . . . . B-1

B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21. Communication Parameter Display . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 ix SM

2. Default Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

3. Network Used for G3 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . B-2

5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

6. Specified Two Step Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission . . . . . . . . . . B-3

8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception . . . . . . . . . . . B-3

C. Conditions for Receiving a Call

PRINTER INTERFACE TYPE 100

1. OVERALL INFORMATION

1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42.2.1. Command and Status Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.3. Print Density Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.2. Main Scan Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.3. Sub Scan Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1.1. Models FAX2700L,FAX2400L,& FAX3700L . . . . . . . 3-13.1.2. Model FAX4700L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.1.3. Operation Panel Decals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

3.2. SIMM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.2.1. Type 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.2.2. SIMM Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

Rev. 3/98

SM x H515/H551

3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items) . . . . . . . . . 3-53.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-63.4.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63.4.2. LocalTalk TM Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63.5.2. DOS ® Based Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

2. Printer Driver for DOS ® Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows ® . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

3.5.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.1. Level 1 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.2. Level 2 Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.3. Dump Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.1.5. Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.1. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.2. Counter Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.3. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

5. TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

6. PARTS CATALOG

6.1. TYPE 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 xi SM



1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.4. POWER DISTRIBUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3


2.1. CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.1. Bi-Centronics Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.1.2. LocalTalk Interface (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2. PIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42.2.1. Command and Status Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42.2.2. Key/Display Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.3. Print Density Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.2.4. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62.3.2. Main Scan Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.3.3. Sub Scan Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.3.4. LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2. OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.2.1. SIMM MEMORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.2.2. PostScript SIMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33.2.3. LocalTalk / Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . 3-53.3.1. Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.3.2. LocalTalk Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53.4.2. DOS Based Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

2. Printer Driver for DOS Applications . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

3.4.3. Apple Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rev. 3/98

SM xii H515/H551


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.1. Controller Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.2. Controller Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.2. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.2.1. Dump Mode+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.2.2. Factory Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.3. Printer Interface Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24.2.4. Counter Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.3. BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

5. TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.3. PRINT QUALITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6. PARTS CATALOG

6.1. TYPE 200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

1. INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . 2

2.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . 2

2.3. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

2.4. TWAIN CAPABILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

3. QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 3 Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

3.1. BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial Prefixes . . . . . . 3

3.2. BASIC RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.3. USING THE FAX MACHINE’S SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . 4

3.4. USING THE FAX MACHINE’S PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . 4

4. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION . . . 54.1. USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

4.2. DIRECT TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

4.3. DIRECT RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

4.4. MEMORY TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 xiii SM

SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Memory TX File Quick Delete (Fax Function 27) . . . . . . 9

4.5. MEMORY RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

SAF Memory Overflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.6. SCANNING (Fax Function 17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

The Scan Auto route Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4.7. PRINTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIX . . . . . . . . . . . 14

5. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . 155.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP

(Service Function 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

5.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE

TESTS (Service Function 18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

DIU Internal Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

DIU External Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

6. PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS AND LISTS . . . . 196.1. TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT - TCR . . . . . . 19

6.2. MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS . . . 20

Result Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Failure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

6.3. USER PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

6.4. SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

7. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228. INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS . . . . . . . . . 248.1. COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

8.2. FAXING APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2


2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Rev. 3/98

SM xiv H515/H551

2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.5. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.6. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH . . 11

4.4. SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140S

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1.2. COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2


2.1. PAPER PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

2.3. PAPER END DETECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.5. JAM RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.6. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

2.7. INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10


4.1. COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH 12

4.4. SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

4.5. OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 xv SM

H551 SERVICE MANUAL

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2.1 Features List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.2.2 Capabilities of Programmable Items . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.2.3 Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment . . . . . . 1-8

1.3 Overall Machine Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1 SEP/SUB Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 Selective Polling (SEP/PWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

2.1.2 Sub-address (SUB/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

2.2 JBIG Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.3 Memory Reception Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

2.4 SG3-V.34 Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.3.1 Hard Disk Unit (80MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23.3.2 ISDN G4 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43.3.3 G3 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73.3.4 Fax On Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113.3.5 Paper Feed Unit (Front Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-123.3.6 Paper Feed Unit (Side Flow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-133.3.7 Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-143.3.8 Printer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-153.3.9 Data Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.A USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-A

4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Rev. 3/98

SM xvi H515/H551

4.1.1 Bit Switch Programming (Function 01) . . . . . . . . . . 4-14.1.2 Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02) . . . . . . . 4-24.1.3 Error Code Display (Function 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.4 Service Monitor Report (Function 04) . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.5 Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05) . . . . . . . . . . 4-44.1.6 RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.7 RAM Dump (Function 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54.1.8 Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07) . . . . . . . . . . 4-64.1.9 Modem Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74.1.10 DTMF Tone Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74.1.11 NCU Parameters (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.1.12 Modem Detection Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . 4-84.1.13 Ringer Test (Function 08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.1.14 Operation Panel Test (Function 09) . . . . . . . . . . 4-94.1.15 Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.1.16 ADF Test (Function 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104.1.17 Printer Test Patterns (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114.1.18 Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free Run (Function 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-114.1.19 RAM Tests (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124.1.20 Software Download (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134.1.21 Software Upload (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154.1.22 SRAM Data Download (Function 12) . . . . . . . . . . 4-174.1.23 Modem Software Upload (function 12) . . . . . . . . . 4-194.1.24 Optional G3 Board Software Download . . . . . . . . . 4-214.1.25 Optional G3 Board Modem Software Download . . . . . . 4-234.1.26 Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards . . . . . . . . . 4-254.1.27 Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) . . . . . . . 4-274.1.28 Serial Number (Function 14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-274.1.29 Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . 4-284.1.30 Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . 4-294.1.31 Hard Disk Test (Function 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-294.1.32 G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17) . . . . . . . 4-304.1.33 Printing Confidential Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.2 BIT SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-314.2.1 System Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-314.2.2 Scanner Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-454.2.3 Printer Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-474.2.4 Communication Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-504.2.5 G3 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58

4.3 NCU PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66

Rev. 3/98

H515/H551 xvii SM

4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS . . . . . . 4-764.4.1 Programming Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76

4.4.2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5.2 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6.2 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

6.4 ROM HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-166.4.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . 6-16

PARTS CATALOG

6. PARTS CATALOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Rev. 7/2000

SM xviii H515/H551

INTERNET FAX OPTION H132

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1.2 FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

1.3 NETWORKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

1.3.2 LAN FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

1.3.3 200-DPI PRINTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

1.3.4 200-DPI SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.3.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.3.6 FORWARDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.3.7 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PAPER) . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

1.3.8 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PC) . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

1.3.9 TRANSFER REQUEST THROUGH THE INTERNET . . . . 1-11

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS H132

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . 2-12.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2.1.2 MAIL RECEPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

2.1.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARE COMBINED) . . . . . . . . 2-6

2.1.4 TRANSFER REQUEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

2.1.5 AUTOROUTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

2.2 LAN FAX TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162.3 IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.3.1 IC FAX MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.3.2 IC VIEWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.4 IMAGE DATA PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.4.1 TIFF-F FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.4.2 DCX FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

2.5 NIC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

INSTALLATION H132

3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13.1 INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Rev. 9/98

H515/H551 xix SM

3.1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3.2 INITIAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2.1 PROGRAMMING ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4

3.2.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

3.3 INITIAL CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.3.1 CHECKING THE LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.3.2 LINK CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

3.3.3 LOOP BACK TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES H132

4. SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES . . . . . . 4-14.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4.1.1 LAN BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 20) . . . 4-1

4.1.2 LINK CHECK (FUNCTION 20) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

4.1.3 LOOP BACK TEST (FUNCTION 20) . . . . . . . . . . 4-3

4.1.4 LAN PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 20) . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

4.2 LAN SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

4.3 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

TROUBLESHOOTING H132

5. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION . . . 5-15.2 LAN TEST FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.2.1 LINK CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.2.2 LOOP BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . 5-105.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . 5-11

5.4 SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . 5-145.4.1 INTERNET FAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

5.4.2 IC FAX MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

5.4.3 COM REDIRECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

APPENDIX A H1321. LAN BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

6.1 LAN CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Rev. 9/98

SM xx H515/H551

6.1.2 BASIC TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

6.1.3 AVOIDING DATA COLLISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2

6.2 ETHERNET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-46.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

6.2.2 ETHERNET FRAME STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . A-4

6.2.3 MAC ADDRESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5

6.3 LAN HARDWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-66.3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

6.3.2 RELAY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6

6.4 TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS . . . . . . A-86.4.1 REPEATERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-8

6.4.2 BRIDGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9

6.4.3 SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10

6.4.4 ROUTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11

6.4.5 GATEWAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12

6.5 NETWORK PROTOCOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-136.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

6.5.2 DATA TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13

6.5.3 NAME SERVICE PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

6.5.4 ROUTING PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

6.5.5 TRANSFER PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14

6.6 TCP/IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-166.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

6.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS WITH IP PROTOCOL . . . . . . . A-16

6.6.3 IP ADDRESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

6.6.4 IP ADDRESS FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16

6.6.5 SUBNET AND SUBNET MASKS . . . . . . . . . . . . A-17

6.6.6 TCP AND UDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18

APPENDIX B H132

1. E-MAIL BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17.1 PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

7.1.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

7.1.2 SENDING AND RECEIVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

7.1.3 E-MAIL NETWORKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2

7.2 INTERNET MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-47.2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

Rev. 9/98

H515/H551 xxi SM

7.2.2 CHARACTER CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

7.2.3 MESSAGE ADDRESS NOTATION . . . . . . . . . . . B-4

7.2.4 DNS AND DOMAINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5

7.2.5 TRANSFER OF INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . B-6

7.2.6 VERIFYING INCOMING MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-7

7.3 MESSAGE HEADERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-87.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

7.3.2 HEADER FORMAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8

7.3.3 HEADER TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-9

7.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

7.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10

7.3.6 DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

7.3.7 MISCELLANEOUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-11

7.4 SMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-127.4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

7.4.2 SMTP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12

7.5 POP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-137.5.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

7.5.2 POP SERVER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . B-13

7.6 MIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-147.6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

7.6.2 MIME FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

7.6.3 MIME HEADER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14

7.6.4 DATA TYPES SUPPORTED WITH MIME . . . . . . . . B-15

7.6.5 MULTIPART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-15

7.6.6 BINARY DATA ENCODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17

7.6.7 BASE 64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-17

APPENDIX C

CONFIGURATION SHEET FOR H132-41 INTERNET FAX . . . C-1

PARTS CATALOGPARTS LIST (H132) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Rev. 9/98

SM xxii H515/H551

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

1TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 2

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

4TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 5

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

6TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 8

TAB

PO

SIT

ION

3TA

BP

OS

ITIO

N 7

H515 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

ISDN TYPE 140

H551 OVERALL INFORMATION

FAX OPTION H132 OVERALL INFORMATION

H515 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS


H551 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

FAX OPTION H132 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

H515 INSTALLATION


H551 INSTALLATION

FAX OPTION H132 INSTALLATION

H515 SERVICE TABLES AND PROCEDURES

PC FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

H551 SERVICE TABLES

FAX OPTION H132 SERVICE TABLES

H515 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT


H551 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

FAX OPTION H132 TROUBLESHOOTING

H515 TROUBLESHOOTING


H551 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX A

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX B

H551 PARTS CATALOG

H132 PARTS CATALOG

FAX OPTION H132 APPENDIX C

Rev. 9/21/98

Important Safety Notices

Laser Safety

WARNING FOR LASER UNITThis machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams can causepermanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or look along the laser beampath while the main power is on.

Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)

CAUTIONThe danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.

H516c502.WMF

OVERALL MACHINEINFORMATION


1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

TypeDesktop type transceiver

CircuitPSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)

ConnectionDirect couple

Document SizeLength: 105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assistedUp to 14 m [46 ft] after adjustmentWidth: 148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]Thickness: 0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils](equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)

Document FeedAutomatic feed, face down

ADF Capacity50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper orA4 size 70 g/m2 paper)25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size 20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)

Scanning MethodFlat bed, with CCD

Scan Width219.5 mm [8.64 ins] ± 1% (A4/Letter)260.1 mm [10.2 ins] ± 1% (B4)308.9 mm [12.2 ins] ± 1% (A3/Double Letter)

Scan ResolutionsMain scan: 200 dpiSub scan:Standard - 100 lpiDetail - 200 lpiFine - 400 lpi

Memory CapacityECM: 128 kbytes

SAF: Standard: 1 Mbytes: 80 pagesWith 2 Mbyte option: 240 pagesWith 4 Mbyte option: 400 pagesWith 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pagesWith 80 Mbyte HDD plus Function Up-grade Card: 3000 pagesMeasured using ITU-T #1 test document(Slerexe letter)

CompressionMH, MR, EFC, MMR, SSC (MMR only withECM and G4)SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and rawdata

ProtocolGroup 3 with ECMGroup 4 (ISDN G4 option required)

ModulationV.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM), V.27ter(PHM), V.21 (FM)

Data Rate (bps)G3: 14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400,Automatic fallbackG4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps

I/O RateWith ECM: 0 ms/lineWithout ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

Transmission TimeG3: 6 seconds at 14400 bps; Measured withG3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T #1 testdocument (Slerexe letter) at standard resolu-tionG4 (option): 3 seconds at 64 kbps; Meas-ured with an ITU-T #1 test document (Sler-exe letter) at standard resolution

Printing SystemLaser printing, plain paper, dry toner

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-1 H515

Paper Size and CapacityStandard Cassette: 250 sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100 sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.

Maximum Printing Width208 mm [8.1 ins]

Print ResolutionsFax and Copy Mode:Main scan: 400 dpiSub scan: 400 dpiPrinter Mode: 300 x 300 dpi

Power SupplyUSA: 115 ± 20 Vac, 60 ± 1 Hz

Power Consumption (Base Machine Only)Standby: Minimum 2 W (see Note)Normal 30 WTransmitting: 60 WReceiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)Copying : 330 W (Maximum: 950 W)

Note: 2W mode is not available if any of thefollowing options are installed. - Printer interface unit - G4 - RS232C interface

Operating EnvironmentTemperature: 17 - 28 °C [63 - 82 °F]Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh

Dimensions (W x D x H)475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]Excluding handset, trays, and optional units

WeightApprox. 42 lbsExcluding CTM, handset, trays, and optionalunits

1.2. FEATURES

1.2.1. Features List

KEY: O = Used, X = Not Used,A = With optional memory 2M/4M onlyB = With optional memory 80M (HDD) onlyC = With optional function upgrade card onlyD = With optional Fax On Demand kit onlyE = With optional 100 sheet cassette onlyF = With optional paper feed unit onlyG = With optional counter onlyH = With optional handset only (US only)I = With optional printer interface unit only J = With optional G4 kit only

EquipmentADF OBook scan XBuilt-in handset XBypass feed: 1 sheet OCabinet XCounter GCutter XHandset HHard disk BManual feed mechanism (ADF) XMarker (Stamp) OMonitor speaker OOptional cassette: 100 sheets EOptional Fax On Demand kit DOptional paper feed unit (up to 2 units)

F

Optional printer interface I

Video Processing FeaturesContrast OHalftone (Basic & Error Diffusion) OMTF OReduction before tx (B4 -> A4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> B4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> A4) OScanning Resolution - Standard OScanning Resolution - Detail OScanning Resolution - Fine O

H515 1-2 SM

Scanning Resolution - Superfine XSmoothing to 400 x 400 dpi when printing O

Communication Features - AutoAutomatic fallback OAutomatic redialing OConfidential reception A or BDual Access OSubstitute reception O

Communication Features - User Selectable

Action as a transfer broadcaster A or BAI Redial (last ten numbers) OAnswering machine interface XAuthorized Reception OAuto-answer delay time XAuto dialing (pulse or DTMF) OAuto Document OAuto image density selection XAuto paper size selection XAutomatic Voice Message XBatch Transmission (max 6 files) A or BBroadcasting OChain Dialing OCommunication Result Display XConfidential ID Override OConfidential Reception A or BConfidential Transmission ODirect Fax Number Entry OEconomy Transmission A or BFax on demand DForwarding A or BFree Polling OGroups (9 groups) OGroup Transfer Station A or BHold XID Transmission OImmediate Redialing OImmediate Transmission OKeystroke Programs OLength Reduction XMemory Transmission OMulti-step Transfer A or BNext Transfer Station XOMR OOn Hook Dial OOrdering Toner XPage Count OPage separation mark O

Communication Features - User Selectable

Parallel memory transmission OPersonal Codes OPersonal Codes with Conf. ID A or BPartial Image Area Scanning CPolling Reception OPolling Transmission OPolling tx file lifetime in the SAF OQuick Dial (Standard: 64 stations)

O

Reception modes (Fax, Tel) ORemote control features XRemote Transfer A or BRestricted Access OSecured Polling OSecured Polling with Stored IDOverride

O

Secure Transmission XSend Later OSilent ringing detection XSpeed Dial (Standard: 100 stations)

O

Telephone Directory OTonal Signal Transmission OTransfer Request OTransmission Deadline (TRD) ATurnaround Polling XTwo-step Transfer XTwo in one OVoice Request (immed. tx only) X

Communication Features - Service Selectable

AI Short Protocol OAuto-reduction override option OBusy tone detection OCable EqualizerPSTNISDN

OJ

Closed Network (tx and rx) OContinuous Polling Reception ODedicated tx parameters OECM OEFC OInch-mm conversion beforetransmission

O

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-3 H515

mm-inch conversion when print-ing

O

Page retransmission times OProtection against wrong conn. OResolutions available for recep-tion200 x 100 dpi200 x 200 dpi200 x 400 dpi400 x 400 dpi

OOXX

Resol’n stepdown override option XShort Preamble XWell log O

Other User FeaturesArea code prefix XAutomatic service call ServiceCenter mark OCheckered mark OClearing a memory file OClearing a polling file OClock OConfidential ID A or BCopy editing (Erase Center/Mar-gin)

X

Copy mode OCopy Mode Restriction OCounters ODaylight Saving Time ODestination Check XDirect entry of names OFile Retention Time OFile Retransmission B, CFunction Programs OHard Disk Filing System B, CID Code OLabel Insertion ("From xxx") OLanguage Selection OLCD contrast control ServiceMemory Lock A or BMemory Lock ID A or BModifying a memory file XMulti Sort Document Reception A or BMulticopy mode OOwn telephone number OEnergy Saver (Night Timer andstandby mode)

O

Other User FeaturesPrint density control OPrinting a memory file ORDS on/off OReception Mode Switching Timer XReception time printing OReduction/Enlargement XRemaining memory indicator ORemote ID A , B,

or DReverse Order Printing A or BRTI, TTI, CSI OSecure ID XService Report Transmission OSpeaker volume control OSpecified Cassette Selection FSubstitute reception on/off OTelephone line type OToner Saving Mode OTTI/CIL on/off OUser Function Keys (5 keys) OUser Parameters OWild Cards O

Reports - AutomaticCharge Control Report XCommunication Failure Report OConfidential File Report A or BError Report OFax On Demand Report DMemory Storage Report OMode Change Report XPolling Clear Report OPolling Reserve Report OPolling Result Report OPower Failure Report OTCR (Journal) OToner Cassette Order Form XTransfer Result Report A or BTransmission Result Report O

Reports - User-initiatedAuthorized Reception List OCharge Control Report XFile List OForwarding List A or BGroup List O

H515 1-4 SM

Reports - User-initiatedHard Disk File List B, CPersonal Code List OProgram List OQuick Dial List OSpecified Cassette Selection List BSpeed Dial List OTCR OTransmission Status Report XUser Function List OUser Parameter List O

Service Mode FeaturesAuto Paper Select test XBack-to-back test OBit switch programming OBook mode test XBuzzer test OCable equalizer OComm. parameter display OCounter check OCountry code ODTMF tone test OEcho countermeasure OEffective term of service calls OError code display OExcessive jam alarm OFile Transfer OHard Disk Utilities (Format etc.) BLCD contrast adjustment OLine error mark OMemory file printout (all files) OModem test ONCU parameters OOperation panel test OPeriodic service call OPM Call OPrinter mechanism test OPrinter test patterns OProgrammable attenuation XProtocol dump list ORAM display/rewrite ORAM dump ORAM test ORinger test OScanner lamp test OScanner mechanism test O

Service Mode FeaturesSensor initialization XSerial number OService monitor report OService station number OSoftware upload/download OSRAM data download OSystem parameter list OTechnical data on the TCR OThermal head parameters XTransmission Status Report XUser data transfer O

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-5 H515

1.2.2. Capabilities of Programmable Items

The following table lists how the capacity of each programmable itemchange after the optional function upgrade card is installed.

Item Standard With functionupgrade card

Maximum number of memory files pluspolling rx files

200 1000

Maximum number of memory files 200 1000Maximum number of destinations per file 200 200Maximum number of destinations overall 500 2000Maximum number of pages overall 1200 3000Number of Quick Dials 64 64Number of Speed Dials 100 1000Number of Groups 9 30Maximum number of destinations per Group 200 200Maximum number of destinations dialedfrom the ten-key pad overall

100 1000

Maximum number of programs64

(programmed in 64Quick Dial keys)

164(programmed in 64Quick Dial keys plus

100 Speed Dialcodes)

Maximum number of destinations perprogram 200 200

Maximum number of destinations used forall programs

300 2000

Maximum number of Auto Documents64

(programmed in 64Quick Dial keys)



Maximum number of communicationrecords for the TCR (Journal) stored in thememory

256 1000

Maximum number of addresses specifiedfor features such as Authorized Receptionand Specified Cassette Selection

30 50

Maximum number of personal codes 50 500

H515 1-6 SM

1.2.3. Possible Combinations of Optional Equipment

The following table indicates which items of optional equipment can be orcannot be installed at the same time.“” indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installed at the same time.“X” indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot be installed at the same time.

IC CardsA B C D E

A: Feature Expander 2M/4M X 4B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD) X 4 4C: Function Upgrade Card 4 X XD: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card 4 X XE: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)

4 X X

OtherA B C D E

A: Paper Feed Unit Type F X 4 4B: Paper Feed Unit Type S X 4 4 4C: 100 Sheet Cassette 4 4D: Printer Interface 4 4

E: G4 4 4 4

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-7 H515

1.3. COMPONENT LAYOUT

1.3.1. Mechanical Components

No. Name Description

1Laser Unit Consists of the LDDR (Laser Diode Driver), focusing

lens, Fθ Lenses, hexagonal mirror motor, and other laseroptic components.

2 SBU Scans the original.3 R2 Roller Feeds the document out of the ADF.4 R1 Roller Feeds the document across the scanner.5 Document Feed Roller Feeds the document into the scanner.6 Separation Pad Allows only one page to the ADF.

7Pick-up Roller Picks up pages of the document from the document table

one at a time.

8CTM (Cleaning TonerMagazine)

Consists of the toner cartridge, cleaning unit, used tonertank, charge corona unit, and quenching lamp.

9 Hot Roller Heat from this roller fuses the toner to the copy paper.10 Hot Roller Strippers Takes the paper off the hot roller after fusing.11 Paper Feed-out Rollers Feeds the paper out of the printer.12 Fusing Pressure Roller Applies pressure to the paper during the fusing process.

13OPC Drum The latent image is written on to the surface of the

organic photoconductor drum.

14Transfer Roller Applies a charge to the paper to pull the toner off the

drum and onto the copy paper.15 Registration Roller performs the registration process.

16Development Unit Consists of the development roller, toner application

roller, toner supply bar, and transfer roller.

17Paper Feed Rollers Pick up the top sheet of paper from the stack in the

cassette and feeds it into the printer.18 Cassette (Standard) Holds up to 250 sheets of paper.

17 18

1

2

34568 7

10

14

9

12

11

13

15 16

H515V001.wmf

H515 1-8 SM

1.3.2. Electrical Components

5

3

7

4

6

2

891011

14

13

12

1

1516

17 18 1920

2122

2324

H515V003.wmf

2730

2928

2631

3233

25

H515V004.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-9 H515

1. PCBs


27MFDU (M-zone FacsimileDriver Unit)

Contains the drivers for the motors, a dc-dc converter,the energy saving mode CPU, and other driveelectronics.

28MFCE (M-zone FacsimileControl Engine)

Controls the machine. It contains the main CPU, flashROM, system RAM, etc.

26NCU (Network ControlUnit)

Contains a relay and switches for interfacing themachine to the network and the handset.

30OPU (Operation PanelUnit)

Controls the operation panel.

25PSU (Power Supply Unit) Supplies power to the machine, and switches the

fusing lamp on/off.

7LDDR (Laser DiodeDriver)

Drives the laser diode.

32Power Pack Supplies the high voltages to the corona wire, transfer

roller, and development rollers.

29SBU The sensor on this board reads and converts the light

reflected from the document into an analog videosignal.

2. Motors

No. Name Description1 Tx Motor Stepper motor, drives the scanner.

23Main Motor Brushless dc motor, drives the drum, fusing unit,

development unit, and CTM.

21Paper Feed Motor Stepper motor, drives the registration roller and the

paper feed mechanisms in the cassettes.

4Hexagonal Mirror Motor High-speed dc motor, drives the hexagonal mirror in

the laser printer optics.

31Ozone Fan Motor Removes the ozone-laden air from the vicinity of the

drum, and filters out the ozone out of the machine.33 Fusing Fan Motor Cools the interior of the machine.

H515 1-10 SM

3. Sensors

No. Name Description5 Document Sensor Detects the presence of a document in the feeder.

9B4-width Sensor Detects the presence of a B4 width document (256mm,

10.1").

10A3-width Sensor Detects the presence of an A3 width document

(297mm, 11.7").

6Scan Line Sensor Detects when a page is approaching the auto shading

position.3 Toner End Sensor Detects when the toner has run out.

17Paper Size Detector Detects the paper size installed in the cassette. The

user must install the correct size actuator.24 Paper End Sensor Detects when the paper cassette is empty.

16Registration Sensor Detects when paper has aproached the registration

roller.19 Fusing Exit Sensor Detects when the paper has been fed out of the printer.18 Fusing Exit Cover Switch Detects whether the fusing exit cover is open or closed.

15

Bypass Feed Sensor Detects when a sheet of paper has been inserted intothe bypass feed slot. The registration roller will thenfeed the paper a short distance into the machine toprepare for printing.

4. Interlock Switches


2022

Interlock Switches:Fusing Unit CoverTop/Front Cover.

If the fusing unit cover is open, the +5VLD powersupply for the laser diode will be interrupted. If the topand/or front covers are open, the interlock switch willinterrupt the +5VLD power supply for the laser diodeand the +24VD power supply for the power pack,motors, and other components.

5. Others


8Stamper Ass’y Stamps a red circle on each page that has been

successfully fed through the scanner.

12Thermostat Interrupts the ac power to the fusing lamp if the

temperature of the thermostat surface exceeds 400°C.14 Thermistor Monitors the temperature at the hot roller surface.

13Fusing Lamp Heat from the lamp will heat the fuser roller to fuse the

toner to the paper.

11Monitor Speaker Allows the user to listen to the condition of the

telephone line.

2Zener Diode Ensures that the charge given to the drum by the

charge corona wire does not exceed -750 volts.

6. Optional Equipment

No. Name Description40 Counter Counts the number of prints.

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-11 H515


37

Printer Interface Allows the machine to be connected to a computer asa laser printer. The following components are part ofthe printer interface unit. (Refer to the PrinterInterface’s service manual for details.)38 - Controller Board39 - Interface Board

42IC Card (Upper Slot) An IC card inserted into this slot will increase the SAF

memory capacity. Either a 2 MB or 4 MB DRAM card,or an 80 MB hard disk (41) can be installed.

43IC Card (Lower Slot) Either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand

Card can be installed.

44

100 Sheet Cassette Increases the paper capacity by 100 sheets.The following components part of the 100 sheetcassette.45 - Paper Size Detector46 - Paper End Sensor47 - Paper Feed Clutch

34Paper Feed Units The machine can have up to two paper feed units.

Each unit will increase the paper capacity of themachine by 500 sheets.

35 G4 Interface (CiG4) This interfaces the machine with an ISDN network.

36Microphone jack for theFax On Demand kit

Allows the users to record their own voice messagesfor Fax On Demand applications.

RS232C Interface Board Allows the machine to be connected to a computer asan external fax device.This option may not be available in some countries.

36

35

37

34

383940

41

4647

45

43

42

44

H515V510.wmf

H515 1-12 SM

MFCE

SCPCG ROM(512kB)

Flash ROM(2MB)

SRAM(128kB)

LPCR144EFXL

Modem

DRAM(2MB)

Video SRAM(24kB) VPP4F

VoiceA/D

Converter

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

IC Card(Type A)

Lower Slot

CiG4-SVG4 Interface

RS232CInterface

IC Card(Type B)

Upper Slot

MFDU

NCU

DTMFReceiver

PowerSaver CPU

Hybrid IC

EXIO1EXIO2

MFPD

DC/DCConverter

LDDRLaser Synch.

SBU Microphone(FOD)

PSU

Sensors

Speaker

Clutches

OperationPanel

Scanner MotorPaper Feed Motor

PFUs

100 SheetCassette

Power PackCTM

Fan MotorsMechanical

Components

Hexagonal MirrorMotor

Main Motor

PrinterInterface

MechanicalCounter

Fax OnDemand

Card

FunctionUpgrade

Card

FeatureExpander

4M

FeatureExpander

2M

HDDInterface 80MB HDD

Bus Interface

Paral lel Interface

Serial Interface

H515V501.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-13 H515

1.4. OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

The MFCE (M-zone Facsimile Control Engine) contains most of the logicalcomponents for overall system control, and direct interfaces to the IC cards,an RS232C interface*, and a G4 interface (CiG4-SV). The MFDU (M-zoneFacsimile Drive Unit) contains the interfaces to the power supply, sensors,drive components, and optional equipment.* The RS232C interface may not be available in some countries.

There are two CPUs in the machine: the main CPU (SCP) on the MFCEboard and the energy saver CPU on the MFDU board. In energy savermode, the main CPU will be switched off and the energy saver CPU is used.

The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can beupdated through either an IC card slot or from the remote control centerusing RDS (Remote Diagnostic System).The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fontsused on the display and in reports.

The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, workarea, and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80MB with the installation of either an IC memory card or a hard disk.

The 128 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. The capacitycan be increased by an additional 512 kB with the installation of the FunctionUpgrade card. The SRAMs are battery backed-up.

The MFCE board has two IC card slots.The upper IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:

• Feature Expander Type 140 - 2M (2 MB DRAM)• Feature Expander Type 140 - 4M (4 MB DRAM)• Feature Expander Type 140 - 80M (Hard disk interface with 1 MB

DRAM and 32kB SRAM*)The lower IC card slot can have any of the following items installed:

• Fax On Demand Card (512 kB SRAM*)• Function Upgrade Card (256 kB Flash ROM and 512 kB SRAM*)• Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)

* The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turned off or themachine goes into the 2-watt energy saver mode (referred to as Level 2 energy saver modein section 2-3). However, the data in the SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is discon-nected from the machine. Whenever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card isremoved for the use of the service tool, perform the instructions listed in section 4-1 to avoidany data loss.

H515 1-14 SM

1.5. VIDEO DATA PATH

1.5.1. Transmission (PSTN)

Immediate Transmission:The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data will undergo theanalog/digital video processing, the data is then sent to the DCR block in theSCP through the DCMMR for compression.The compressed data will then be sent to either the FIFO memory or theECM memory, before it is sent to the telephone line through the modem.

Memory Transmission:The processed video data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block inthe SCP, where the data is compressed into MMR format or kept as rawdata. The data is then stored in the SAF memory.At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress thedata from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress the data againfor transmission. The compressed data will be passed to either the FIFOmemory or the ECM memory, then to the telephone line through the modem.

Parallel Memory Transmission:This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memoryand to send the same document simultaneously.The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and willsend a copy of the data through the modem at the same time.Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.

Scanner

N C U

PrinterInterface

Printer(LDDR)

CiG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

M F C E

M o d e m

SAFMemory

Line Buffer

VPP4F

LPCPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

FIFO

S C P

D C M M R

D C R

ToPSTN

H515V502.wmfVPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F LDDR: Laser Diode DriverMFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine SAF: Store & ForwardDCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified ReadSCP: System Control Periheral ECM: Error Correction ModeDCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction FIFO: First In First OutLPC: Laser Printer Control NCU: Network Control Unit

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-15 H515

1.5.2. Reception (PSTN)

Data from the line will pass through the NCU to the modem. After the modemdemodulates the data, it will pass through either the FIFO memory or theECM memory. The data is then sent to the DCR block of the SCP chip to bedecompressed.

At the same time, the demodulated data is also sent to the SAF memory asa backup, in case of a mechanical failure during printing. (This is known assubstituted reception.)

The decompressed data will then be sent to the page memory for printing.After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent tothe LDDR through the LCP for printing.

VPP4F: Video Processing Peripheral 4F LDDR: Laser Diode DriverMFCE: M-zone Facsimile Control Engine SAF: Store & ForwardDCMMR: Data Compression Modified Modified ReadSCP: System Control Periheral ECM: Error Correction ModeDCR: Data Compression & Reconstruction FIFO: First In First OutLPC: Laser Printer Control NCU: Network Control Unit

CiG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

Scanner

N C U

PrinterInterface

Printer(LDDR)

MFCE

Modem

SAFMemory

Line Buffer

VPP4F

LPCPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

FIFO

SCP

D C M M R

D C R

F r o mP S T N

H515V503.wmf

H515 1-16 SM

1.5.3. Transmission (ISDN)

G4 Immediate Transmission:The scanned data is sent to the VPP4F, where the data undergoes theanalog/digital video processing, and is there sent to the DCR block in theSCP through the DCMMR for compression.The DCR block will then compress the data into MMR format, and will besent to the CiG4-SV board for G4 transmission.

G4 Memory Transmission:The video processed data from the VPP4F is sent to the DCMMR block inthe SCP, where the data is compressed into the MMR format or kept as rawdata, it will then be stored in the SAF memory.At the time for transmission, the DCMMR block will decompress thedata from the SAF memory, then the DCR block will compress it again intothe MMR format. The MMR compressed data will then be sent to theCiG4-SV board for transmission.

G3 Transmission over an ISDN:The analog data is converted into PCM (Pulse Coded Modulation) format inthe codec, it is then sent over the ISDN.

Parallel Memory Transmission:This feature allows the machine to scan a document into the SAF memoryand to transmit the same document simultaneously.The machine will store the processed video data in the SAF memory and willsend a copy of the data through the CiG4 board. Refer to section 2.3.3 for more details about this feature.


Scanner

N C U

PrinterInterface

Printer(LDDR)

CiG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

M F C E

M o d e m

S A FMemory

Line Buffer

VPP4F

L P CPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

FIFO

S C P

D C M M R

D C R

ToISDN

G 3

G 4

H515V504.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-17 H515

1.5.4. Reception (ISDN)

G4 Reception:Data from the ISDN line is first sent to the SAF memory. The data will thenbe decompressed at the DCR block in the SCP, and will be sent to the pagememory.After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent tothe LDDR through the LCP for printing.

G3 Reception from the ISDN:Data from the ISDN line first will be sent to the modem through the codec,where it is converted into an analog signal. After the modem demodulatesthe data, the DCR block in the SCP will decompress the data from either theFIFO or the ECM memory.At the same time, a copy of the demodulated data is backed up in the SAFmemory, in case of mechanical problems during printing (this is known assubstitute reception).

The decompressed data is then passed to the page memory for printing.After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data is sent tothe LDDR through the LCP for printing.


Scanner

N C U

PrinterInterface

Printer(LDDR)

CiG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

MFCE

Modem

SAFMemory

Line Buffer

VPP4F

LPCPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

FIFO

SCP

D C M M R

D C R

F r o mI S D N

H515V505.wmf

H515 1-18 SM

1.5.5. Copying

Single copy

The scanned data is sent to the page memory after video processing in theVPP4F. After a page of data has been stored in the page memory, the data issent to the LDDR through the LIF block.

Multi-page copy

The scanned data will be sent to the SAF memory after video processing(VPP4F) and compression (DCMMR). After all the pages have been storedin the SAF memory, the data is sent to the DCMMR block again fordecompression, then it is sent to the page memory for printing.


Scanner

N C U

PrinterInter face

Printer(LDDR)

C iG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

M F C E

M o d e m

S A FMemory

Line Buffer

V P P 4 F

L P CPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

F I F O

S C P

D C M M R

D C R

H515V506.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-19 H515

1.5.6. Printing from the Optional Printer Interface

After a page of data has been stored in the printer interface’s page memory,the data is sent to the LDDR through the LCP.The page memory on the MFCE is not used when printing from the optionalprinter interface.


Scanner

N C U

PrinterInter face

Printer(LDDR)

C iG4-SV

CiG4

C O D E C

BufferMemory

M F C E

M o d e m

S A FMemory

Line Buffer

V P P 4 F

L P CPage

MemoryE C M

Memory

F I F O

S C P

D C M M R

D C R

H515V507.wmf

H515 1-20 SM

1.6. POWER DISTRIBUTION

1.6.1. Distribution Diagram

The PSU supplies +24V dc power to the FDU, and supplies ac power to thefusing lamp directly.

The FDU converts the +24V dc power supply to the following supplies.

MFDU

+ 5 V L D +5V

+ 2 4 V D + 2 4 V MTop/Front

CoverF1

D C / D C

D C / D C

D C / D C

D C / D C

+24V

+ 1 2 V P

-9V+ 5 V E

+12.4V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+ 5 V E

Power SaverC P U

W A K E U P

+2

4V

MO

N

PSU

AC Swi tch ingCircuit

Fus ing LampContro l

F1

F2

MainSwi tch

AC In let

+24V

+5V+ 5 V D

+ 5 V B A T

+24V+ 1 2 V P

-9V

MFCE

S C P(CPU)

PrinterI/F

+24V+5V

Sensors

+5V

L D D R

+ 5 V L D

Operat ionPanel

+5V+ 5 V E-9V

S B U

+12.4V

N C U

+24V+ 5 V E

Polygonal Mirror MotorMain Motor

Scanner MotorPaper Feed MotorOzone Fan Motor

Power PackClutches

+ 2 4 V M

Lamp Stabi l izerS tamper

Quench ing LampFusing Fan Motor

Machanica l Counter

+ 2 4 V D

P F U

P F U

+ 2 4 V M+5V

+ 2 4 V M+5V

+ 2 4 V M+5V

100 SheetCasset te

Memory Card /HDD Inter face

+5V+ 5 V D

+ 1 2 V P

+5V(HDD I /F only)

FOD/Funct ion Upgrade

Card

+5V+ 1 2 V P

C iG4 +24V-9V

R S 2 3 2 CI/F +5V

+ 2 4 V D

OptionalEqu ipment

AC L Ine

Fusing Exi tCover

Inter lockSwi tches

Mechanical Counter

H515V508.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-21 H515

Power Supply Description+24V Normally on when the main switch is on.

+24VDSupplies +24V to the fusing unit on/off switching circuit. It is interruptedif the top/front cover interlock switch opens.

+24VMSupplies the motors and power pack. This is interrupted by the mainCPU while the machine is in energy saver mode. It is also interrupted ifthe top/front cover interlock switch opens.

+12.4VSupplies the SBU. It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down bythe energy saver CPU.

+12VP

Supplied to the Flash ROMs on the MFCE and the optional IC cards,and it is used only when rewriting the contents in the Flash ROM.It is interrupted when the +5V supply is shut down by the energy saverCPU.

+5VInterrupted by the energy saver CPU when the machine is in Level 2(2-watts) energy saver mode.

+5VEUsed when the machine monitors activation signals from the NCU,document feeder, or operation panel when the machine is in energysaving mode.

+5VLDSupplies the laser diode. It is interrupted if the fusing exit cover interlockswitch or the top/front cover interlock switch opens.

+5VD

Supplies the DRAM and the optional SAF memory card on the MFCE toback up the stored data for one hour, if the power is switched off (if datais stored). A rechargeable battery on the MFDU is used to generate+5VD while the machine is turned off.

+5VBAT

Supplies the system RAM and the real time clock inside the SCP on theMFCE while the machine is turned off. A lithium battery is used togenerate +5VBAT while the machine is turned off. See section 1.6.2 fordetails.

-9VSupplies the CiG4 board through the MFCE. It is interrupted when the+5V supply is shut down by the energy saver CPU. See section 1.6.2for details.

H515 1-22 SM

1.6.2. Memory Back-up Circuit

1. SRAM/Real Time Clock (RTC) Backup

+5VBAT supplies the SRAM, which contains system parameters andprogrammed telephone numbers, and the real time clock (RTC) inside theSCP.

While the machine is on, even in an energy saver mode, the +5VBAT supplyis generated from the +5VE signal [B].

While the machine is turned off, the lithium battery (BAT1 on the MFCE [A])is used as the +5VBAT supply.

The signal 5RTCCS informs the main CPU whether the back-up power(+5VBAT) is being supplied from the battery or from the +5V power supply. Ifthe power is coming from the battery, the main CPU is disabled.

MFDU MFCE

CN1-17

CN1-13

CN1-16

+ 5 V E

+ 5 V D

+5V

+ 5 V E

+ 5 V

1 S A F F L G

1 V D E T

BAT1

Q7/Q25

D C / D C

S C P

R T C

C P U

S R A M

+5V

Vol tageDetector

+ 5 V B A T

DRAM (SAF)IC Memory Card

BAT1

S W 2

1 S A F F L G1 V D E T

5 R T C C S

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

H515V509.wmf

OV

ER

ALL

MA

CH

INE

INF

OR

MAT

ION

SM 1-23 H515

2. DRAM Backup

While the machine is on, the +5VD supply, which generated from the +5Vsignal, supplies the DRAM.

In energy saver mode level 2, the energy saver CPU will disable the +5Vsupply if there is no data in the DRAM. However, if there is data in theDRAM, the +5V supply will not be disabled, and +5VD will continue to supplythe DRAM. If the machine has a hard disk, the +5V supply will only be killedif there are no received fax messages or fax messages for transmission onthe disk.

While the machine is turned off, the rechargeable battery ([D] BAT1 on theMFDU) will supply the voltage to the SAF memory. It can back up the DRAMfor an hour.

The battery [D] will generate about 3 volts (max. 3.2 volts). The dc/dcconverter will pump up this voltage to 5 volts so it can be used for DRAMbackup. The CPU will monitor the voltage of the +5VD supply with the1VDET signal. When the battery has run down to 4.4 volts, the CPU will stopthe dc/dc converter by dropping 1SAFFG to low, stopping the DRAM backup.

Note that recharging the battery [D] takes one or two days after it has beendischarged.

Cross-referenceEnergy Saver Modes: Section 2.3.1

H515 1-24 SM

DETAILED SECTIONDESCRIPTIONS


2.1. SCANNER

2.1.1. Mechanisms

1. Document Detection

The machine will detect when a document has been placed in the ADF andthe document’s width is monitored by the document sensor [A], the B4 widthsensor [B], and the A3 width sensor [C].

The sensors will determine the document width as shown in the table below.

DocumentSize

DocumentSensor

B4-widthSensor

A3-widthSensor

Actual Document WidthRange

A4/Letter On Off Off

Less than 235 mm(Less than 9.25")

B4On On Off

235 mm to 268 mm(9.25" to 10.55")

A3/Double Letter On On On

More than 268 mm(More than 10.55")

The fold-down extension [D] is used to support longer documents.

[B] [C][A]

H515D002.wmf

[D]

H516D500.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-1 H515

2. Pick-up and Separation

Plate [A] will align the leading edges of the pages of the document. Whenthe tx motor starts rotating, the mechanical clutch mechanism in the ADFroller unit will lift up the pick-up roller [B] to feed the bottom sheet of the docu-ment. Then, the feed roller [C] will feed the sheet into the scanner. Theseparation rubber plate [D] will prevent the feed roller from feeding morethan one sheet at a time.

Because the line speed of the R1 roller [E] is 3 times faster than the feedand pick-up rollers, the release mechanism [F] will release the feed and pick-up rollers from the motor drive. This will cause the rollers turn at the samespeed as the R1 roller, because they are still gripping the paper.

Cross reference ADF mechanical clutch mechanism: Group 3 Facsimile Manual, page 2-2-8

After all the pages have been scanned, the tx motor [G] will reverse directionto move the ADF roller unit [H] down into the standby position.

[D]

[C][B]

[A]

[F]

[E]

H515D003.wmf

[H][G]

H515D005.wmf

H515 2-2 SM

3. Drive Mechanism

The tx motor [A] drives the pick-up roller [B], feed roller [C], R1 roller [D], andR2 roller [E] through the timing belt [F].

The scanning speed for each resolution mode is as follows.

Resolution Scan speed (/A4)Standard - Storage to SAF (Memory Tx or Multi-copymode) 1.47 s

Standard - Immediate Tx or Single copy mode 2.95 sDetail 2.95 sFine 5.90 s

The maximum acceptable document width is 304 mm (12.0") wide.

The maximum acceptable document page length can be adjusted to 0.6 m(23.6"), 1.2 m (47.2"), or 14 m (46 ft). The default setting is 1.2 m.

Cross referenceMaximum document length: Scanner Switch 00, bits 2 and 3.

[D]

[B]

[A][C]

[E]

[F]

H515D004.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-3 H515

Error Conditions

The machine detects a document jam if any of the following conditions occurs.

Jam Condition Description ErrorCode

Non-feedThe scan line sensor did not turn on within 3seconds of the start of pre-feeding.

1-00Incorrect sensor

conditionsThe scan line sensor switches on while thedocument sensor is off.

Maximum documentlength exceeded

The scan line sensor did not turn off after themaximum document length had been fed.

1-01

Error at power on The machine detected a document at power up. 1-10

Error during feed-out

The machine detected a document placed in theADF while the machine was feeding out the finalpage of the document, or while attempting to feeda jammed document just after the machine wasswitched on.

1-17

Cover openThe ADF cover and/or printer cover was openedwhile the machine was working.

No errorcode

Manual interruptionThe machine detected that the Stop key waspressed during scanning.

No errorcode

H515 2-4 SM

4. Stamping

The original will stop at the stamping position after the page was transmitted(immediate transmission) or scanned into memory (memory transmission)was successfully or unsuccessflully.

If the Stamp LED is on, the CPU will drop the voltage at CN10-5 for 500 msto activate the stamper solenoid [A]. Then, the original is fed out of the scan-ner.

If the Stamp LED is off, the machine will feed out the original without stamp-ing.

This feature can be switched on or off by the user.

MFDU

EXIO-1

+24VD

24CN10-5

CN10-6

MFCES C P

(CPU)

LPC

Serial InterfaceBus Interface

[A]

H515D501.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-5 H515

2.1.2. Image Scanning *

The scanner consists of a xenon lamp [A], exposure glass [B], mirrors ([C],[D] and [E]), lens [F], and SBU [G].

The light reflected from the document is focused onto the CCD (Charge Cou-pled Device) on the SBU [G] through mirrors ([C], [D] and [E]) and lens [F].

1. Sub Scan Resolution Conversion

Standard: The machine will feed the document in 7.7 line/mm steps. In textmode, it will scan in accordance with the setting of scanner bit switch 00 - bit4. In halftone mode, it will skip every other line.

Scanner bit switch 00Bit 4 = 0 Bit 4 = 1

Immediate tx/ Copying Scan - 3.85 l/mmTx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm

(Every other line is skipped)

Scan - 7.7 l/mmTx/Copy - 3.85 l/mm

(OR processed)

Scanning to memoryOR processing is always

disabled.

Detail: The machine will feed and scan the document in 7.7 line/mm steps.The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion.

Fine: The machine will feed and scan the document in 15.4 line/mm steps.The scanned lines are transmitted without any conversion. In memory trans-mission, if the other terminal cannot receive a message at Fine resolution,alternate lines (even-numbered lines) are deleted before transmission.

[C]

[F]

[E]

[G][A]

[B]

[D]H515D006.wmf

H515 2-6 SM

2. Partial Image Scanning *

When partial image scanning is enabled, the machine will only scan the area"L2 "after the machine skips the area "L1".

• L1 - Scan skip length• L2 - Scan length

Error Condition (Error Code 1-00)If the scan line sensor turns off before the machine starts scanning thedocument (the document is too short), the machine will detect an error.

Note: This function cannot be used with copying, immediate transmission, orscanning an OMR sheet.

Cross ReferencePartial image scanning on/off - User parameter 06, bit 5Programming the scan skip length and scan length - User function 74

Sca

n S

kip

Leng

th(L

1)S

can

Leng

th(L

2)Scann ing Area

Top Margin (2 mm)

Bot tom Margin (2 mm)

Scan Sk ip Area

H515D504.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-7 H515

3. Scanning Double-sided Documents

When this feature is enabled, the machine will scan all of the odd-numberedpages first, then will scan the even-numbered pages. (The user has 60 sec-onds to prepare the even-numbered pages after the odd-numbered pageshave been scanned.)After all pages have been scanned, the machine will sort the scanned pagesinto the correct sequence inside the SAF memory.

In the example, if the last page of the original is a blank page, the machinewill send 6 pages if the user scans the last page, or will send 5 pages if theuser does not scan the last page (the machine will warn the user that thenumbers of odd and even pages do not match in this case).The transmitted page sequence will be correct in each case.

1 3 5 6 4 2

1 3 5 642

Original Document Odd-numbered PagesEven-numbered Pages

Sort ing

5

6

3

4

1

2

①

②

H515D505.wmf

1 3 5

Blank

6 4 2

1 3 542

Original Document Odd-numbered PagesEven-numbered Pages

Sort ing

5

6

3

4

1

2

①

②

Blank

6

H515D506.wmf

H515 2-8 SM

The error conditions are listed below.

Condition Machine’s Action Error CodeMemory overflows duringscanning.

Asks the user whether themachine can send the scannedpages, or erase them.

5-21

60 seconds has passed afterscanning all of the odd-numberedpages.

Erases all the scanned pages andprints a File Reserve Report withan error message.

None

Numbers of odd andeven-numbered pages weredifferent.

Asks the user whether themachine can send the scannedpages, or erase them.

None

The Stop key was pressed duringscanning.

Stops scanning and returns tostandby mode.

None

Note: This function cannot be used with copying or immediate transmission.

NoteScanning double-sided documents on/off can only be selected with a User Function Key.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-9 H515

2.1.3. Video Processing

MFDUSBU MFCE

CN71-2

+12 .4V

CN71-7

CN71-5

CN71-4

CN71-3

V I D E O

P H 1 B

R S B

S H B

CN1-36

CN1-37

CN1-38

CN1-35C C D

Driver

A m p .

V P P 4 F

VideoS R A M

AnalogProcess

A/DConvers ion

DigitalProcess

h515d502.wmf

Half tone ?

C C D

A/D Conversion/Shading Correct ion

OR Processing

Erasure of IrregularDots

Thresholding

M T F

BackgroundDetect ion Image/Text

Separat ion

Halftonin gDither

or Error Diffusion

M T F

Gamma Correct ion

Output

Half toneImage

Text

Yes

No

H515D503.wmf

H515 2-10 SM

2.1.4. Shading Correction and A/D Conversion

Before scanning a page, the machine will scan the shading plate and keepthe peak voltage for each pixel of the CCD. The VPP4F will first convert theanalog data into an 8-bit digital data. At the same time, the VPP4F performsthe shading correction using the peak voltage that was detected when scan-ning the shading plate.

Cross-referenceGroup 3 Facsimile Manual, section 2-3

2.1.5. Process without Halftone

1. Background Detection

• Each pixel is tested in relation to its neighbors to determine whether itis background noise and should be deleted.

2. MTF

• MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thinlines, points, and complex characters.

3. Thresholding

• Each video data element is compared against the threshold level,which depends on the contrast selected by the user. If an element islighter than the threshold level, it is compared to a white (0) , otherwiseit will become a black (1).

4. Erasure of irregular dots

• After being converted to white or black by the above thresholding, if anelement is irregular as compared to the surrounding pixels, it isoutputed in the opposite color. The central pixel is compared with thesurrounding eight pixels to determine whether this process isnecessary. There are ten cases, as shown below, in which conversionis done. This will result in a noise-free and clean image.

5. OR processing

H515D647.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-11 H515

• When the user selects Standard or Detail resolution, the VPP4F willperform the OR processing to convert the scanned resolution into theresolution required for transmission.

2.1.6. Process with Halftone

1. Gamma correction

• Gamma correction corrects the response of the image sensor to thevarious shades in the gray scale from black to white. Also, it convertseach pixel into a 6-bit data (64 levels) for the halftone process.

2. MTF

• MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) can reproduce details such as thinlines, points, and complex characters.

3. Halftone process

• Each pixel is converted to six-bit data (0 - 63) using either the dither orthe error diffusion formula. At the same time, if the pixel is on a edge ofa image pattern, it is enhanced to provide a sharp outline.

• Then, each pixel is thresholded with the corresponding threshold in adither matrix or error diffusion matrix.

2.1.7. Data Switching

When halftone is used and image/text separation is enabled, the VPP4F willperform both the halftoning procedure and the image/text separation proce-dure to each pixel in parallel. At the end of these processes, the VPP4F willchoose the data from one of these processes.

Cross ReferenceScanner switches 00 to 08 for video processing parameters

H515 2-12 SM

2.1.8. Inch-mm Conversion

The machine’s scanner is designed in inch units, but can convert thescanned data into mm-format, if the other terminal does not have an inch-based printer.

The following tables show the actual transmitted data resolution units in vari-ous cases.

G3 Immediate Transmission

Rx terminal’s resolutionunits Unknown inch mm inch and mm

inch-mmconversion

ON mm inch mm inchOFF inch inch inch inch

G3 Memory Transmission

If the message was scanned in inch resolution units.

Rx terminal’s resolutionunits

Unknown inch mm inch and mm

inch-mmconversion

ON mm inch mm inchOFF inch inch inch inch

If the message was scanned in mm resolution units.(e.g., Messages for transfer and forwarding scanned by another terminal)

Rx terminal’s resolutionunits Unknown inch mm inch and mm

inch-mmconversion

ON mm inch mm mmOFF mm mm mm mm

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-13 H515

2.2. PRINTING

2.2.1. Printing Process - Overview

This machine uses a "write to black" system, using negative toner.• The charge corona wire supplies the drum surface a negative charge

of about -750 V.• The exposed area (latent image) on the drum lowers the voltage to

about -100 V.• The development roller carries toner to the latent image on the drum

surface. The bias voltages during printing are as follows:Toner application roller : -700 VDevelopment roller: -400 V

• The transfer roller pulls the toner from the drum onto the paper.A constant current of +4 µA is applied. The antistatic brush is used tohelp separate the paper from the drum.

• The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum after theimage is transferred to the paper.

• The quenching lamp reduces the negative charge on the drum to about-50 V.

H515D550.wmf

H515 2-14 SM

2.2.2. OPC Drum

An organic photoconductor drum [A] is used in this machine. The diameter ofthe drum is 30 mm. It is driven by the main motor [B] through a gear train.The toner application roller [C], development roller [D], and transfer roller [E]are also driven by the same gear train. The drum unit can be replaced by theuser.

2.2.3. Charge

The CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) contains a charge corona unit. Thecorona wire [A] generates negative ions when the power pack [B] applies aconstant current of -305 ± 5 µA (the voltage is about -5.3 kV). The grid plate[C] ensures that the charge is uniformly spread out. The zener diode [D]ensures that the charge on the drum does not exceed -750 ± 50 V.

The charge corona unit contains a wire cleaner [E] for user maintenanace.

The ozone fan on the left hand side of the machine provides air flow to thecharge corona unit. The ozone filter (a paper filter coated with carbon)decomposes the ozone that is generated around the drum by the coronadischarge.

[B]

[C]

[A]

[E]

[D]

H515D604.wmf

[E]

[D]

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515D605.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-15 SM

Charger Leak Detection:The machine detects a charger leak error when MFDU CN21-8 stays low for3 seconds or more (6 seconds or more at power on) during either in standbymode or while the corona wire is being charged. When this occurs, themachine will warn the customer by lighting the Call Service indicator (errorcode 9-17).

Charge Control

In this machine, a higher corona wire current is used to counter black bandson copies. The charge on the drum will exceed the zener diode voltagebecause of this higher current.

The leak signal is sent if the power pack is on, and the drum is not beingproperly charged.

M F C EM F D U

L P C

S C P(CPU)

PowerPack

Drum

-698V


+ 2 4 V M O N+24VM

CN21-1

Driver(QA1)

EXIO-1(IC3)

CN21-3

EXIO-2IC4

CN21-8L E A K

+24V

O N

H515D510.wmf

H515 2-16 SM

2.2.4. Laser Exposure

1. Overview

The components of the laser section are basically the same as thosedescribed in section 4-3-3 in the Group 3 Facsimile manual. The drum [A] ispositioned in the same plane as the laser unit, so there is no need of asecond mirror to change the optical path.

POINTS TO NOTE:• The focusing lens [B] is a barrel toroidal lens.• The shield glass [C] is used to prevent toner and dust from entering the

laser optics area.• An optical fiber [D] passes the reflected laser beam to the laser sy-

chronization detector circuit in the MFDU.• The speed of the hexagonal mirror motor [E] depends on the printing

resolution:

Mode SpeedFax - mm mode (16 x 15.4 dots/mm) 10436.45 rpmCopy and fax - inch mode (400 x 400 dots/inch) 10636.45 rpmPrinter mode (300 dpi) 7977.8 rpm

• The strength of the beam emitted from the LD unit [F] is 5 mW at awavelength of 780 nm.

• The dimensions of the dot on the drum are 85 µm by 85 µm.

The charge on the exposed areas of the drum drops to about -100 V, whileon non-exposed areas it remains at about -750 V.

Cross referenceGroup 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-3-3

[E]

[D]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[A]

H515D606.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-17 SM

2. Block Diagram

The LPC on the MFCE board monitors and controls the laser diode timing(MFDU CN26-2) and transfers data for printing to the laser diode (MFDUCN26-4).

Cross referenceGroup 3 Facsimile Manual: page 4-3-13

3. Error Conditions

LD Failure:The machine will detect a LD failure when the Laser Synchronization signalis not detected within 10 ms of the LD ready signal. When this occurs, themachine will warn the customer by displaying the Call Service indicator(error code 9-20). Refer to section 6.3: Service call conditions.

Mirror Motor Failure:The machine will detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 does notgo low within 10 seconds of the hexagonal mirror motor being turned on.The machine will also detect a mirror motor error when MFDU CN15-4 goesback to a high for 3 seconds or more during mirror motor operation. Wheneither error occur, the machine will warn the customer by displaying the CallService indicator (error code 9-23). Refer to section 6.3: Service callconditions.

M F D U

M F C E

LaserSynch.

Detector1-42

15-4

15-3EXIO-1

(IC3)

Optical Fibre

LD Enable

D A T A

Control

LaserDiode Hexagonal

MirrorMotor

Mirror Motor Lock

Mirror Motor Enable

26-6

26-4

26-2

EXIO-2(IC4)

P D 1

1-39

1-40

1-41

L P C

S C P(CPU)

LDDR

LaserD iode

Control ler

1-2

1-4

1-6

Serial InterfaceBus Inter face

Fiber

H515D511.wmf

H515 2-18 SM

4. Print Density Adjustment

The SCP chip controls the print image density by changing the laser pulsewidth to adjust the width of the dots across the page. The beam strength isnot adjusted in this model. The following table shows the relationshipbetween the pulse width and the image density.

Mode Print Image Density (User parameter 12, Bits 3 and 4)Normal Lighten Darken

Copy ModeNormal 80 % 40 % 160 %Halftone 80 % 40 % 160 %

Fax Mode Normal 100 % 40 % 160 %Halftone 20 % 20 % 100 %

To change the pulse width, (duration) the duty cycle of the laser pulse ischanged. For example, to make the print density 40% of normal, the laser isonly kept on for 40% of the normal duration for each pixel.

5. Toner Saving Mode

Toner saving is done by reducing the number of dots actually printed, not byvarying the development bias. In toner saving mode, the image data isfiltered through the following four-line matrix.

1st line 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 . . . . . 2nd line 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . . . . . 3rd line 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 . . . . . 4th line 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . . . . .

(1: Actual data printed, black or white; 0: Always a white pixel)

[G]

[E] [D]

[F]

H515D649.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-19 SM

Note: • Toner saving mode is only used when printing fax messages andreports. (However, toner saving is disabled when receiving a half-tone mode message in NSF/NSS mode.)

• When toner saving mode is selected, the print image density isautomatically set to "Normal"; because in some cases, the imagemay become invisible if the Lighter setting is used.

Cross ReferenceToner Saving Mode: User parameter 12, bit 2

Edge Enhancement

In toner saving mode, the machine will print a black pixel whenever the datachanges from white to black in the main scan direction, to ensure that theedges on the image are printed more clearly.

2.2.5. Toner Supply

This machine uses monocomponent toner, which is composed of resin andferrite. The toner mixing bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner supplyroller [B]. The toner supply roller supplies the toner to the development unit.The main motor [C] drives the toner supply mechanism through a gear train.

Toner is supplied to the development unit from the outer openings [D, E] inthe CTM. The spiral mechanism [F] on the toner supply bar distributes tonerthrough the development unit.

The openings in the central area of the CTM [G] allows the toner to circulateupwards from the development unit. This circulation prevents an excessivetoner supply to the development unit and ensures that the toner remainsfresh. This helps to prevent blurred images.

[C]

[A]

[B]

H515D617.wmf

H515 2-20 SM

Initial Toner Supply Mode

When the first CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) is installed in a newmachine, the machine will automatically supply toner to the development unitfor 90 seconds. This function will be automatically performed after a RAMreset level 1 or 2 is performed.

The initial toner supply mode must be executed by a technician when thedevelopment unit is replaced.

Cross ReferenceInitial Toner Supply: RAM address 4805C8(H) (See sections 4.5 and 5.5.5 for more details)

CTM (Cleaning Toner Magazine) Detection

At the following times, the machine will detect if a CTM is installed bychecking the power supply to the quenching lamp (this is part of the CTM).

• At power-up.• When the machine comes back to normal mode from the Level 2

Power Saver Mode.• When the cover is opened and then closed.

The machine will disable all printing processes if a CTM is not installed.

Toner End Detection

Toner near-end is detected by the toner end sensor [A], which is locatedbelow the toner tank.

While the main motor is rotating, the machine will detect the toner endcondition by monitoring the output voltage from the toner end sensor . Thevoltage from the sensor is close to 5 V when the toner tank is full andbecomes low when toner is almost empty.

[A] H515D624.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-21 SM

Toner near-end condition: When the CPU detects a low output from thetoner end sensor for more than 30 seconds, the CPU will start to blink theAdd Toner indicator. This is the toner near-end condition.

Toner end condition: After the toner near-end condition is detected, themachine can print 100 more sheets, then the CPU will disable all printingoperations. This is the toner end condition.

The machine will clear the toner near-end or toner end condition when thepower is switched off and back on, or when the cover is opened and closed,and if the output from the toner end sensor goes back high again.

However, when the machine is turned off/on or when the cover is openedand then closed, the machine requires about 30 seconds to check for a tonernear-end condition again. So, if the user prints something within this 30seconds period without changing the CTM, the machine will allow theprintout to be made, but the print quality may be poor.

If the cover is opened and closed without installing a new toner supply, theaddional 100 sheet counter will not be reset. The counter will remain at itsprevious count.

Toner Tank

Toner End Sensor

MFDU MFCE

LPC7-10

7-9

+5V


EXIO-2(IC4)

SCP(CPU)

H515D512.wmf

H515 2-22 SM

2.2.6. Development

Overview

There are two rollers in the development unit: the Toner Application Roller [B]and the Development Roller [D]. The transfer roller [F] is used to transfertoner from the drum onto the paper.

The toner supply bar [A] stirs and carries the toner to the toner applicationroller [B]. Toner is attracted to the toner application roller because it has amagnetic layer. As the toner application roller turns past the toner meteringblade [C], only a thin coating of negatively charged toner particles staysadhered. (Refer to section 4-4-2 of the Group 3 Facsimile manual.)

During printing, a bias voltage of -700 V is applied to the toner applicationroller and another bias voltage of -400 V is applied to the development roller.The toner is carried from the toner application roller to the development roller[D] by the potential difference between these two rollers.

The exposed area (latent image) on the drum surface [E] is at -100 V. Thedevelopment roller applies toner to these exposed areas on the drum as thedrum turns past the development roller.

The development roller is made of a soft rubber to ensure that it does notdamage the surface of the drum. The development roller can be ordered asa separate spare part because it always contacts the toner application roller.

The speed ratio between the drum, development roller, and the tonerapplication roller is about 1 : 1 : 3. The toner application roller rotates threetimes faster than the development roller, so it deposits a layer of toner threetimes as thick onto the development roller. This provides a clearer image.Also, the toner application roller rotates in the opposite direction to thedevelopment roller, which helps to keep the toner level constant on thedevelopment roller.

[C]

[A][B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

H515D616.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-23 SM

Development Bias

The power pack [A] supplies the voltages to the toner application roller [B],toner metering blade [C], and bias brush [D], and the development roller [E].

Bias Control (During Printing)

A charge of -700 ± 40 V is applied to the toner application roller, and -400±10 V is applied to the development roller. Toner transfers from the tonerapplication roller to the development roller and on to the laser exposed areason the drum, based on the voltage differences between the rollers and thedrum, as shown below.

[D]

[B][C]

[A]

H515D618.wmf

[E][A]

H515D619.wmf

Development Rol le r

Toner Appl icat ion Rol ler

G N D

- 750V

- 400V

- 700V

- 100V

Print Data Whi te Black

Drum Sur face Vo l tage

Toner

Drum Exposed Area

H515D655.wmf

H515 2-24 SM

Bias Control (After Each Page)

After each page, the machineremoves toner from thedevelopment roller and returns it tothe development unit. To do this,-400V is applied to thedevelopment roller, but no bias isapplied to the toner applicationroller.

Toner does not transfer to thedevelopment roller at “A”, but willremain on the toner applicationroller when the toner passesbetween the two rollers.

The remaining toner on thedevelpment roller does not transferto the drum at “B”, but transfers tothe toner application roller at “C”.

In some cases, positively chargedtoner may transfer to the drum inthis condition. So, a positivecurrent is applied to the transferroller after each page, so that the positively charged toner on thedrum does not transfer to the transfer roller. (not shown).

- 750 V

- 400V

G N D

- 400V

Drum

Develo p mentRoller

TonerApp lication

Roller

A

B

C

H515D651.wmf

Development Rol ler

Toner Application RollerG N D

- 750 V

- 400V

Drum Surface Voltage

Toner

H515D656.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-25 SM

Bias Control (Other)

At the start and the end of any print process (including the cleaning andinitial toner supply modes), -50 ± 50 V is applied to the toner applicationroller, and +250 ± 15 V is applied to the development roller. This is to preventtoner from transferring to the drum.

Note that the voltage difference between the toner application anddevelopment rollers is kept the same as in printing, at 300 V. This will keepthe same amount of toner on the development roller at all times during thecomplete print run.

Development Rol le r

Toner Appl icat ion Rol ler

G N D

- 50V

+250V

Drum Sur face Vol tage

Toner

H515D650.wmf

H515 2-26 SM

Bias Control Circuit

The CPU controls the voltages to the toner application and developmentrollers using the Bias 0 and Bias 1 signals as shown in the following table.

In Bias 0 Low High Low HighBias 1 Low Low High High

OutToner Application

Roller- 700 V - 50 V Off Off

Development Roller -400 V + 250 V -400 V Off

M F D U

DriverQA1

Toner Appl icat ionRol ler

Deve lopmen tRol ler

TransferRol ler

PowerPack

21-6

21-7

21-4

21-5Transfer 1

Bias 1

Transfer 0

Bias 0

EXIO-1(IC3)

M F C E

L P C

S C P(CPU)


H515D513.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-27 SM

2.2.7. Paper Feed

1. Overview

The standard cassette [A] holds 250 sheets and the bypass feed slot [B]feeds 1 sheet at a time. An optional 100 sheet cassette [C] and two types of500 sheet optional paper feed units are also available.

This machine can have up to 2 optional 500 sheet paper feed units. Refer tothe separate paper feed unit service manuals for details on the optionalpaper feed units.

The registration roller [D] will rotate counter-clockwise direction when thestandard cassette is used. The registration roller will rotate in the clockwisedirection when the bypass feed slot [B] or the 100 sheet cassette is used.

When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feedsensor [E] is turned on, and the machine will prefeed the paper into themachine until the registration sensor [F] is turned on.

Note: The bypass feed slot can only be used for copying or for printing froma PC (Personal Computer), when using the optional printer interface.

[A]

[D]

[B]

[F][E]

[C]

H515D514.wmf

H515 2-28 SM

2. Paper Lift Mechanism

Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassette

When the cassette is installed after paper is loaded, the slide lock [A] ispushed by the projection [B] and will become unlatched from the bottomhook [C].

Once the slide lock is unlatched, the bottom plate is raised by the pressuresprings and the top sheet of the paper stack is pushed upward against thecorner separators [D]. This will ensure that the stack of paper is kept at thecorrect height.

[D]

[D]

[B]

H515D608.wmf

[C]

[B]

[A]

H515D609.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-29 SM

3. Paper Size and Paper End Detection

Standard Cassette/Optional Universal Cassette

The paper size detector [A] is locatedat the front of the cassette. Themachine will determine the size ofthe paper in the cassette bymonitoring the three microswitches inthe detector. The machine will informthe customer with the Add Paperindicator if the paper size cannot bedetected.

When the cassette runs out of paper,the paper end sensor actuator [B] willdrop through a slot in the bottomplate.

Selectable cassette paper sizes:• USA model: Letter, Legal• Europe model: A4, A5 sideways• Asia model: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4

The following diagram shows the relationship between the activatedmicroswitches and the selected paper size.

Microswitch USA Model Europe Model

Asia Model

000 ----- ----- -----

001 Legal ----- -----010 ----- ----- -----011 Letter ----- -----100 ----- ----- F/F4101 ----- A4 A4110 ----- ----- -----111 ----- A5 sideways A5 sideways

Note: "-----" indicates that the machine detectsthat a cassette is not installed.

Microswitches

: 0: High

: 1: Low

Example: Letter size paper

H515D658.wmf

[B]

[A]H515D610.wmf

H515 2-30 SM

Bypass Feed Slot

This machine cannot detect paper width when the bypass feed slot is used.The maximum feed length for bypass feed is 600 mm. The mimimum feedable paper width is 191 mm.

Optional 100 Sheet Cassette

The paper size detector [A] is located atthe left hand side of the 100 sheetcassette. The microswitches operate inthe same manner as in the standardcassette.

When the 100 sheet cassette runs outof paper, the paper end sensor actuatorwill [B] drop through a slot .

The microswitches in the cassette areconnected to the machine by connectorCN20, Located in the lower left cornerof the machine.

Paper Size/Paper End Detection

M F D U

EXIO-2(IC4)

M F C E

LPC

SCP(CPU)


Paper End SensorStandard Cassette 20-5

Paper Size DetectorStandard Cassette 25-4

25-6

25-3

Paper Size Detector 100Sheet Cassette

7-1

7-2

7-4

Paper End Sensor100 Sheet Cassette 7-1

Paper End

Paper End

1st Paper Feed Uni t2nd Paper Feed Uni t

H515D515.wmf

[B]

[A]

H515D611.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-31 SM

4. Pick-up and Separation

Standard and Optional 100 Sheet Cassettes

The pick-up and separation mechanism is a corner separator type. Thecorner separators and the paper feed rollers allow only one sheet to feed ata time.

Cross referenceGroup 3 Facsimile Manual: section 4-5-4

The paper feed motor will start to rotate when the printer is ready for printing.

By-pass Feed Slot

There is no pick-up or separation system in the by-pass feed slot, becauseonly one sheet can be fed from this slot.

5. Drive Mechanism

Standard Cassette

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanism. When thestandard cassette is used, the paper feed motor will rotate in the clockwise(CW) direction, driving the paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller[C], as shown in the diagram.

The clutch gear box assembly [D] will only allow the semi-circular paper feedrollers to rotate once for each sheet of paper.

While the registration roller is rotating counter-clockwise (CCW), papercannot be fed into the machine from the optional 100 sheet cassette orbypass feed slot. This means that if a sheet of paper is placed in the bypassfeed slot during printing from the standard cassette, this sheet will not be fedinto the machine.

[D]

[B]

[C] [A]

H515D612.wmf

H515 2-32 SM

Bypass Feed Slot

When a sheet of paper is placed in the bypass feed slot, the bypass feedsensor [A] is turned on. The machine will rotate the paper feed motor in thecounter- clockwise (CCW) direction to prefeed the paper until the registrationsensor is turned on, or for 1 second, whichever is first. (See section 2-2-8 fora diagram of the registration sensor.)

When the paper feed motor rotates counter-clockwise, the projection [B] willdisengage the gear [C] inside the clutch gear box assembly as shown in thediagram. This will prevent any drive from being transmitted to the paper feedrollers for the standard cassette.

If a sheet of paper remains in the bypass feed slot for longer than the AutoReset Time (System Switch 0B), the machine will automatically feed it out.The default time is three minutes. The machine cannot print incoming faxmessages while there is a sheet of paper in the bypass feed slot. Feedingthe page out after the Auto Reset time allows incoming faxes to be printedeven if someone had left paper in the by-pass feed slot.

Sheets of paper longer than 600 mm cannot be fed from the bypass feedslot, or a paper jam will occur (error code 9-81).

Note: The bypass feed slot can be used only for copying and for printingfrom a PC (Personal Computer) using the optional printer interface.

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515D613.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-33 SM

Optional 100 Sheet Cassette

When the machine feeds a sheet of paper from the 100 sheet cassette, thepaper feed motor [A] rotate in the counter-clockwise (CCW) direction to drivethe paper feed rollers [B] and the registration roller [C] as shown in thediagram.

The paper feed clutch [D] in the optional 100 sheet cassette ensures that thesemi-circular paper feed rollers rotate only once for each sheet of paper.

The bypass feed slot can be used with the optional 100 sheet cassette.

Paper Feed Priority

If there is an optional cassette and/or paper feed unit installed in themachine, the priority for paper feed is decided in accordance with thefollowing rules.

• The paper in the bypass feed slot has the first priority (for copying andprinting from a PC only).

• If the machine has optional 500 sheet paper feed units and all the cas-settes contain paper of the same size, the machine will use the lowerpaper feed unit first, the upper paper feed unit second, the paper in theoptional 100 sheet cassette third, and the paper in the standard cas-sette last.

• If the cassettes contain different sizes, the machine will select the pa-per size as explained in section 2-2-13.

[B][C]

[A]

[D]H515D614.wmf

H515 2-34 SM

2.2.8. Registration

The registration sensor [A] is positioned above the registration roller [B].

When a cassette (Standard, Paper Feed Unit, or 100 Sheet Cassette) isused, the machine will stop the paper feed motor for a few moments after theregistration sensor is initially turned on.

When the bypass feed slot is used, the machine will prefeed the paper intothe machine until the registration sensor is turned on (or for 1 second,whichever comes first).

The paper feed motor start rotating immediately after laser scan starts.

When the leading edge of the paper touches the pressure rollers, themomentum of the paper will correct any skew.

[A]

[B]

H515D615.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-35 SM

Jam Detection

Condition Error CodeWhen thestandardcassette is used

When the registration sensor is not turned on within2.0 seconds of the paper jam timing signal. 9-07

When any of thepaper feedstations or thebypass feed slotis used.

When the paper feed-out sensor is not turned onwithin 2.6 seconds after the paper feed motor starts tofeed paper for printing (not for prefeed).

9-08

When the registration sensor is not turned off within Xseconds after it turned on.X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds

(67.546 mm/ s : paper feed speed)

9-08

When the upperpaper feed unit isused.

When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit isnot turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feedclutch in the upper paper feed unit was switched on.

9-50

When the registration sensor in the fax machine is notturned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feedmotor started.

9-51

When the lowerpaper feed unit isused.

When the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit isnot turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feedclutch in the lower paper feed unit was switched on.

9-52

When the relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit isnot turned on within 2.0 seconds after the paper feedmotor in the lower paper feed unit started.

9-53

When the bypassfeed slot is used

When the registration sensor is not turned on within 2seconds after the paper feed motor starts rotating forprinting.(This error is not generated during prefeed, to allowthe users to change their minds after putting paper inthis slot. When the bypass feed sensor is turned on,the machine will prefeed the paper for up to 1 secondand will stop feeding even if the registration sensor isnot turned on. If the registration sensor did not turn onduring prefeed, the machine will check for the aboveerror when printing starts.)

9-80

When the bypass feed sensor is not turned off within11.9 seconds after it is turned on.Using the same formula as above (error code 9-08), itworks out that individual sheets cannot be longer thanabout 60 cm.

9-81

When the 100sheet cassette isused.

When the registration sensor is not turned on within2.0 seconds of the paper feed clutch turning on. 9-82

H515 2-36 SM

2.2.9. Transfer and Separation

Instead of using a transfer corona wire, this machine uses a transfer roller,which comes in contact with the drum surface of the drum.

A constant current of +4 ± 0.2 µA is applied to the transfer roller [A] from thepower pack [B]. The positively biased transfer roller pulls negatively chargedtoner off the drum. The combination of the curvature of the drum and theantistatic brush are used to cause the paper to drop away from the drum forpaper separation.

Temperature and humidity have less effect on the supply of ions when thetransfer current is held constant. With a constant voltage, ions may dissipatein some conditions.

[B]

[A]

H515D620.wmf

H515D653.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-37 SM

Cleaning Mode

If the paper size is smaller than the printed image, or if a paper jam occursduring printing, toner may be transferred onto the surface of the transferroller. To prevent this toner from transferring onto the back side of copies, thetransfer roller has to be cleaned before the next printing run.

While the machine is in the cleaning mode, the power pack will supply-1000V ± 50 V to the transfer roller, and will charge the drum to -750 V. Thenegatively charged toner on the transfer roller is then transferred back ontothe drum.

The machine will automatically perform the cleaning mode procedure in thefollowing conditions:

• At power on (when the fusing temperature reaches half of the standbytemperature).

• When the cover is opened and then closed during the printing process.• After a printer jam has been cleared.• After the bypass feed slot has been used (each page). This will only be

done if printer switch 00 bit 3 is set to 1.

The CPU controls the transfer roller voltage through the power pack usingthe Transfer 0 and Transfer 1 signals as shown below (for a circuit diagram,see Bias Control Circuit in section 2-2-6).

In Transfer 0 Low High Low HighTransfer 1 Low Low High High

Out Transfer Roller + 4 µA - 1000 V Off Off

H515 2-38 SM

Timing Chart: Cleaning Mode

Before the cleaning mode starts, the main motor, charge corona, andquenching lamp are turned on.

T1. Cleaning bias of -1000V is applied to the transfer roller.

T2. A positive constant current of + 4 ± 0.2 µA is applied to the transfer rollerto transfer back to the drum any toner which is positively charged by thetransfer roller.

Corona

H515D663.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-39 SM

2.2.10. Cleaning

The cleaning unit and the used toner tank are contained in the CTM,(Cleaning Toner Magazine).

The cleaning blade [A] removes any toner remaining on the drum after theimage is transferred to the paper. A magnetic roller [B] will transfer the usedtoner into the used toner tank [D]. The mylar blade [C] will scrape the toneroff the magnetic roller and into the used toner tank [D].

When the CTM is removed from the machine, the cleaning roller cover [E] isclosed by a spring. This will prevent the removed toner from falling out of theunit.

There is no used toner overflow detection mechanism because the usedtoner tank is large enough for the lifetime of the installed CTM.

[A]

[B]

[E]

[D]

[C]

H515D621.wmf

H515 2-40 SM

2.2.11. Fusing

Fusing Lamp Control

When the main switch is turned on, the machine will turn on the fusing lampto raise the fusing temperature to 80 °C in about 4 seconds. For printing, themachine raises the fusing temperature to 190 °C.

When the Energy Saver Key is pressed or the energy saver timer expires,the machine will go into a energy saver mode. In the Level 2 Energy SaverMode the fusing lamp is turned off. The user can select to keep the fusinglamp off or at 80°C during Energy Saver Mode Level 1.

Cross Reference: Energy Saver Modes: Section 2-3

If the printing operation continues for more than 3 minutes, the machinekeeps the fusing temperature at 180°C.

Points to Note:• Standby temperature: 80 °C• Printing start temperature: 165 °C• Printing temperature: 190 °C• Thermistor maximum: 250 °C (monitored by a comparator)• Thermostat maximum: 150 °C (the temperature of the hot roller would

be about 400 °C)

80°C

165°C = Print ready

190°C

180°C

Room temp.

175°C

Rin gDetectionorCopy Start

FusingO N

OFF

Print Start

3 minutes

5 minutes (= Power saver timer )

80°Cor

Room Tem p

Power ON

Tem

pera

ture

H515D654.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-41 SM

Fusing Control

During normal operation, the CPU controls the fusing lamp based on inputfrom the thermistor using the above circuit.

When the machine is turned on, or when it comes back from the Level 2Energy Saver Mode, it will determine if the thermistor circuit is intact bytemporarily closing the initial detect switch circuit on the MFDU. If thethermistor is connected properly, the machine will begin its normal operation.If it is not, an Auto Service Call (error code 9-22, sub-code 09) will begenerated.

As a backup safety measure, when the temperature of the hot roller reachesabout 400 °C, the thermostat will open.

The machine will turn on the cooling fan when the fusing temperaturereaches 120 °C. It is turned the cooling fan off when the fusing temperaturedrops below 120 °C.

M F D U

Compara to r

AD

CH

AD

CL

EX IO-1(IC3)

1H

TS

AF

E

The

rmis

tor

Out

put

Ser ial InterfaceBus Inter face

M F C E

L P C

S C P(CPU)

V P P 4 F(A/D Conver ter )

CN

1-23

CN

1-24

CN

1-22

CN

1-27

CN

1-26

P S U

Fus ing LampContro l

Thermofuse

Thermosta t

Fus ing Lamp

Thermis tor

EXIO-2(IC4)

CN12 -2

CN12 -1

Ini t ia l Detect ion On/Off

H515D516.wmf

H515 2-42 SM

Fusing Unit Drive

The main motor [A] drives the fusing unit through a gear train. The paperfeed-out sensor [B] detects when the paper has been fed out of the unit.

Jam Detection - Paper Feed Out

The machine will detect a paper jam when the paper feed-out sensor is notturned off within X seconds or more after it is turned on (Error Code 9-09).

X seconds = (paper length / 67.546) + 3 seconds(67.546 mm/s is the paper feed speed)

[A]

[B] H515D622.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-43 SM

Fusing Unit Service Call Conditions

Conditions Error Code(9-22)

At power on If there is any problem with the thermistor.(This detection is also done when the machine comesback to the normal mode from Energy Saver ModeLevel 2.)

Sub-code 09

Standby mode If the fusing temperature stays below the standbytemperature for more than 18 seconds when fusinglamp ON is selected in Energy Saver Mode Level 1.

Sub-code 05

If the fusing temperature takes more than 40 seconds toreach 165°C from the standby temperature.

Sub-code 02

During printing

If the fusing temperature stays above 190°C for morethan 60 seconds.

Sub-code 01

If the fusing temperature stays below 140 °C for morethan 1 seconds during printing.

Sub-code 07

After printing If the fusing temperature takes more than 20 minutes togo down to 100°C when the machine goes into EnergySaver Mode Level 1.• When fusing lamp OFF is selected for Energy Saver

Mode Level 1.Sub-code 03

• When fusing lamp ON is selected for Energy SaverMode Level 1.

Sub-code 04

At any time If the fusing temperature reaches 250°C. Sub-code 08

H515 2-44 SM

2.2.12. Page Separation and Data Reduction

Incoming pages that are only slightly longer than the copy paper may bereduced in the sub-scan direction. Whether or not this occurs, depends onthe settings of printer switches 04 and 05. (Refer to section 4.2.3)

Reduction Enabled

If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 1 (Enabled), the data will be reduced in thepage memory to fit on the copy paper. However, data will only be reduced ifthe length of the incoming page is between 5 mm shorter and the selectedmaximum length. This maximum incoming page length that can be reducedis depended on the copy paper size and on the reduction ratio that is storedin printer switches 04 and 05.

Each paper size can be programmed with a separate reduction ratio. In eachof the two bit switches, there is one bit for each possible paper size. Thecombination of the bit settings determines the ratio for that paper size.

Bit No.

Switch No.

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

Notused

Notused Legal

F, F4 A4

Letter

Notused

A5sideways

Sw 04 0: 4/3 1: 4/3 0: 8/7 1: 12/110: 0: 1: 1:Sw 05

The following table shows the maximum incoming page length that can bereduced for each copy paper size. All length are in millimeters. The factorysetting of the reduction ratio is 4/3.

Lines/mm mode

Copy TypePrintable

Page LengthMaximum reducible incoming page length.

Ratio = 4/3 Ratio = 8/7 Ratio= 12/11Letter 279.2 mm 365.2 mm 313.0 mm 298.7 mmLegal 355.6 mm 467.0 mm 400.3 mm 382.1 mm

Lines/inch mode

Paper TypePrintable

Page LengthMaximum reducible incoming page length.

Ratio = 4/3 Ratio = 8/7 Ratio= 12/11Letter 279.4 mm 365.8 mm 313.4 mm 299.2 mmLegal 355.6 mm 467.4 mm 400.6 mm 382.3 mm

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-45 SM

Incoming pages that are longer than the maximum length will not bereduced, but will be printed on two pages and treated in accordance with thesetting of bit 1 of printer switch 00. If this bit is 1, the bottom few lines of thepage will be repeated onto the top of the second page.

Reduction Disabled

If bit 0 of printer switch 03 is at 0 (Disabled), the data will not be reduced.However, if the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, theexcess portion will not printed. The value of x can be from 0 to 15 mm. It isdetermined by the setting of bits 4 to 7 of printer switch 03.

Hex value Value of X0 00 1

and so on untilF 15

Messages that are more than x mm longer than the copy paper will beprinted on two pages in accordance with the setting of bit 1 of printer switch00 as explained earlier.

H515 2-46 SM

2.2.13. Resolution Unit Selection for Printing

The machine can use both inch and mm resolution units for printing. If theresolution unit detection is enabled, the machine will choose the rightresolution unit for printing, as requested by the remote terminal, during theexchange of protocol signals. (Refer to the table.)

Tx terminal’s resolution unit Unknown inch mmResolution unit

detectionON mm inch mmOFF inch inch inch

Cross referenceResolution unit detection on/off - Printer switch 00, bit 7

2.2.14. Paper Size Selection

If the machine has the optional 100 sheet cassette and/or an optional 500sheet paper feed unit installed, the paper size to use is decided using thefollowing rules.

• If all the cassettes contain paper of the same size, the machine will usethe paper in the lower paper feed unit first, the paper in the upper paperfeed unit second, the paper in the 100 sheet cassette third, and the pa-per in the standard cassette last.

• If the received page has to be split up and printed on two pages, bothpages will be the same size.

• If the cassettes contain different sizes, the paper size chosen for print-ing the received fax message is selected in accordance with the follow-ing table of priorities. The table assumes that reduction is enabled andthat the reduction ratio is 4/3.

Received FaxMessage Size

Selected Paper SizeA5 sideways Letter A4 F, F4 Legal

A5 Sideways 1 2 3 4 5Letter 5(SR) 1 2 3 4

A4 5(SR) 4(R) 1 2 3F, F4 5(SR) 4(R) 3(R) 1 2Legal 5(SR) 4(R) 3(R) 2(R) 1

• The paper size priority is graded from 1 to 5.• S: The data has to be separated and printed on more than one

page.• R: The data is reduced to fit on the printer paper.• Some of the reports can be printed on A5 paper without page

separation. However, if only A5 paper is in the cassettes, reportsthat need larger paper sizes will require page separation.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

H515 2-47 SM

2.3. SYSTEM FEATURES

2.3.1. Energy Saver Modes

The machine has three levels of energy saver mode as shown below.

Normal Level 0 Level 1 Level 2Main CPU ON ON ON OFFEnergy Saver CPU OFF OFF OFF ONEnergy Saver LED OFF ON ON ONLCD/LED ON OFF OFF OFF+5V Power Supply ON ON ON OFF+24VM Power Supply ON ON ON OFFFusing Lamp ON 80 °C or OFF 80 °C or OFF OFF+24VM Power Supply ON ON ON OFF

In energy saver mode levels 0 and 1, the main CPU monitors and controlsthe system. The fusing lamp is either turned off or kept at the standby tem-perature, depending on the setting of User Parameter Switch 05, bits 6 and7.

In energy saver mode level 2 (also known as the 2-watt energy saver mode),the main CPU and dc power supplies are shut down. The energy saver CPUmonitors the energy saver key, incoming calls, and the document sensor.When the energy saver CPU detects an activity at any one of the conditions,it activates the +5V supply with the WAKEUP signal to start up the mainCPU and other power supplies (+5VLD, +12.4V, +12VP, and -9V).

The following sections will explain how the machine uses these threemodes. Note: Energy saver mode will not operate if a printer interface, a G4interface, or an RS232C interface is installed.

NCU

MFDU

Operat ion Panel

Ene

rgy

Sav

er K

ey

Ene

rgy

Sav

erL

ED

Do

cum

en

t S

en

sor

Rin

g D

etec

tion

Cir

cuit

Cur

rent

Sen

sor

(Eur

ope/

Asi

a)

MFCE

SCP(Main CPU)

LPC

PSU

Top

/Fro

nt C

over

Inte

rloc

k S

wit

ch

+ 2 4 V D

+ 2 4 V M

Q6 and Q13

D C / D CConver te r(+24/+5V) Q2, Q3 and Q14

+ 5 V+ 5 V E

5

+24VMON5

5

24

RESET

COMMAND

STATUS

EX

RIN

G

+ 5 V E

+ 5 V

+24

VM

+5VE

Motors,Clu tches

andPower Pack

W A K E U P

Ener gy SaverCPU(IC1)

EXIO--2(IC4)

+5V

E

ON

/OF

F

HO

OK

0/1

H515D520.wmf

H515 2-48 SM

1. Entering an Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page will explain how the machine goes into a en-ergy saver mode, depending on parameter settings and other machineconditions.

Entering Energy Saver Mode from Standby

- Energy Saver Timer -When the energy saver timer expires (default value - 5 minutes) since thelast time a condition #1 operation was detected (see the flow chart), the ma-chine will automatically go into a Energy Saver Mode. See the pointsmarked 1 on the flow chart.

Cross ReferenceEnergy saver timer initial setting: System Switch 0B, bits 2 and 3 (1 minute, 3 minutes, 5 minutes, or Unlimited: Timer disabled)

- Energy Saver Key -When the energy saver key is pressed, the machine will check if there areany background operations in progress (these are the condition #2 opera-tions on the flow chart). If there are none, the machine will automatically gointo a Energy Saver Mode. See point 2 on the flow chart.

Which Energy Saver Mode is Selected?

If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to maintain the fusing lamp at the standby tem-perature during Energy Saver Mode, the machine will enter Energy SaverMode Level 1. See point 3 on the flow chart.

If User Switch 05, bit 6 is set to keep the fusing lamp off during Energy SaverMode, the machine checks for events listed on the flow chart as condition #3events (see point 4 on the flow chart). If none exist, the machine will go to En-ergy Saver Level 2. If one or more condition exist, the machine will enterEnergy Saver Level 1 until all of the conditions are cleared. Then it will go tothe Energy Saver Level 2.

See the next flow chart for more details on how the machine changes fromLevel 1 to Level 2.

Cross ReferenceFusing lamp control during Energy Saver Mode: User Switch 05, bit 6(On at standby temperature, or Off)

NoteThe "optional equipment" in condition #3 is either a Printer Interface, a G4 interface, or aRS232C Interface.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-49 H515

Timer=0

Standby Mode

Energy Saver ModeLevel 1


L C D = O F FL E D = O F F

Fus ing=OFFM a i n C P U = O F F

Ene rgy Save r CPU=ON

User SW 05Bit 6

Condit ion #1

Timer=T

Condit ion #3

N o

Yes

N o

Standby Temperature

Fus ing Lamp=OFF

N o

Energy SaverKey ?

N oO R

Condit ion #2

O R

Yes

Condit ion #4

Yes

N o

System SW 0BBit 2,3

Other

Mechanical Errors (Jam, Tonerend, Paper end, etc.)Original detectedCommunicat ion ErrorNCU Off HookOptional Equipment Instal ledMemory 100%Tx File/Poll ing Rx File Exists

Condit ion #3 allcleared.

Machine is in operation.Machine is in a service callcondit ion.Machine is in a servicemode operat ion.

T=1, 3, or 5 minutes

N o

Yes

Unl imited

Energy SaverKey ?

Yes

N o

Key pressedOriginal detectedHandset of f-hook

If key was pressedin the abovecondit ion.



Fus ing=User Sw 05 Set t ingM a i n C P U = O N

Energy Save r CPU=OFF

Yes

Yes

2

1

3

4

1

1

H515D626.wmf

H515 2-50 SM

2. Going into Level 2 Mode from Level 1 Mode

The flow chart on the next page shows in more detail how the machine goesfrom Energy Saver Mode Level 1 to Level 2.

The machine will not go into Level 2 energy saver mode if any of the follow-ing conditions exists.

• Either a tx/rx/polling file is stored in the memory.• SAF memory not empty• Mechanical error(s)• NCU off-hook• Optional equipment installed (a printer interface, a G4 interface, or an

RS232C interface)

If there is a tx file in the memory

The machine will stay in Energy Saver Mode Level 1 until the programmedtime to send the message. The machine will then enter Level 0 while themessage is being sent. See point 1 on the flow chart.

When the Energy Saver timer expires

When the energy saver timer expires after the machine entered Level 1 forthe first time (or, if a tx file was present, after the message was transmitted),the machine will enter Level 2 if both of the following conditions are met:

• User Switch 05, bit 6 specifies Fusing Lamp Off• No condition #1 restrictions exist.

See point 2 on the flow chart.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-51 H515

Tx t ime ?

Yes

Yes



Fusing=User SW 05 Set t ingM a i n C P U = O N

Energy Saver CPU=OFF

Message Transmiss ion

No



Fusing=User SW 05 Set t ingM a i n C P U = O N

Energy Saver CPU=OFF

Tx fi le inmemory ?

No



Fus ing=OFFMa in CPU=OFF

Energy Saver CPU=ON

Timer=0

Timer=T

System SW 0B Bi t 2 ,3T=1, 3, or 5 minutes

User SW 05Bit 6

Fus ing Lamp=OFF

Yes

No

Condi t ion #1

No

O RNo

Yes

Mechanical ErrorsOriginal detectedCommunicat ion ErrorNCU Of f -HookOpt ional Equipment Instal ledMemory 100%Tx Fi le/Pol l ing Rx Fi le Exists

1 2

H515D627.wmf

H515 2-52 SM

3. Receiving a Fax Message in Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine receives a faxmessage while it is in a energy saver mode.

Ring Detection

While the machine is in a Energy Saver mode, the energy saver CPU moni-tors ringing signals from the line. When the energy saver CPU has detectedtwo consecutive ringing signals, it activates the +5V supply to the main CPUand will pass the ring detection process to the main CPU.

After the main CPU has detected a ringing signal, the machine will go to En-ergy Saver Mode Level 0 and receive the fax into memory. Level 0 modelooks the same as the previous mode for users, but all of the system compo-nents are active in the background for receiving a fax message.


Printing

If either of the following conditions is not met (condition #1 on the flow chart),the machine will print out the fax message and then return to the EnergySaver Mode in the manner described in the previous two flow charts at thissection.

• Energy Saver mode is activated during the Night Timer period• The machine is currently in the Night Timer period.

If both conditions are met, the machine will return to the Energy Saver Modeas described at the previous two flow charts at this section. It will print the faxmessage after the Night Timer expires.


Cross ReferenceNight Timer On/Off: User Function 62Programming the Night Timer period: User Function 72

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-53 H515



F u s i n g = O F FM a i n C P U = O F F

E n e r g y S a v e r C P U = O N

Ring Detect ion

Condi t ion #1

Yes



F u s i n g = O F FM a i n C P U = O N

E n e r g y S a v e r C P U = O F F

Memory Recept ion

Energy SavingMode Program

N o

N o



Fus ing=User SW 05 Se t t i ngM a i n C P U = O N


Energy Saver Mode is enabled byUser Funct ion 62, and the machineis in a Night Timer period.

Yes

Fusing Heat-upMessage Pr in tout

1

2

H515D628.wmf

H515 2-54 SM

4. Sending a Fax Message or Copying in Energy Saver Mode

The flow chart on the next page explains how the machine wakes up from en-ergy saver mode upon a manual operation, and how it will return back to aenergy saver mode.

Manual Wakeup Conditions

While the machine is in a energy saver mode, either the energy saver CPU(Level 2) or the main CPU (Level 1) monitors signals from the following (con-dition #1 on the flow chart).

• Energy saver key• Document sensor• Off-hook detector on the NCU

When a signal from any one of the listed conditions have been detected, theCPU will wake up all of the components and the machine will enter its nor-mal operating mode, even during the Night Timer period.

After operations have been finished, the machine will return back to a energysaver mode as explained in the previous sections.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-55 H515

Condi t ion #1

Yes

N o



F u s i n g = O F FM a i n C P U = O F F

E n e r g y S a v e r C P U = O N

Normal ModeL C D = O NL E D = O N

F u s i n g = O NM a i n C P U = O N


Message Pr in tout

Phone communica t ionFax t ransmission

Making cop iesetc.

Energy SavingMode Program

Standby Mode

Yes

Yes

Message rece ivedin memory ?

Operat ionFin ished ?

N o

N o

Energy Saver key pressedDocument set in ADFNCU of f -hook



Fus ing=User SW 05 Se t t i ngM a i n C P U = O N


H515D629.wmf

H515 2-56 SM

2.3.2. Automatic Service Calls

1. Service Call Conditions

The machine makes an automatic service call when any of the following con-ditions occurs.

Service Call Conditions Error Code Sub-code(8003B5H)

Charge corona unit failure 9-17 11 or 12Laser diode failure 9-20 21Fusing lamp failure 9-22 01 to 09Hexagonal mirror motor failure 9-23 31 or 32Main motor failure 9-24 41 or 42Excessive jams in the ADF/scanner None NoneExcessive jams in the printer None NoneThe PM counter has reached the threshold (60,000prints)

None None

The PM interval has expired None None

Cross referenceService station number: Service Function 13Troubleshooting: Chapter 6

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-57 H515

2. Excessive Jam Alarms *

The excessive jam alarm will automatically notify the service station whenthe machine’s scanner or printer has frequently jam problems.

Both types of jams (scanner & printer) has three counters allocated to eachcalled JAM, NO-JAM1, and NO-JAM2. Each of the counters have a set ofthreshold values called CALL, DEC, and CLR respectively. (the values canbe adjusted.) The machine will use these counters to monitor both types ofjams as follows.

Each time a jam occurs: The JAM counter is increased by 1, and both theNO-JAM1 and NO-JAM2 counters are set to zero. When the JAM counterreaches CALL value (6 by default), the machine will send an Auto ServiceReport with a System Parameter List to the programmed service station.

If a sheet of paper is fed without a jam occuring: Both the NO-JAM1 andNO-JAM2 counters are incremented by 1. When the NO-JAM1 counterreaches the DEC value (16 by default), the NO-JAM1 counter is set to zero,and the JAM counter is decremented by 1. When the NO-JAM2 counterreaches the CLR value (48 by default), both the NO-JAM2 and JAM count-ers are reset to zero.

The CALL, DEC, and CLR threshold values can be adjusted for each type ofjam by rewriting RAM data. The addresses of these thresholds are listed onthe following page. The listed default values above are examples only.

6

1

2

3

4

5

03224168 64564840 72

16

8

03224168 64564840 72

4

12

48

16

32

03224168 64564840 72

JAM

NO-JAM1

NO-JAM2

CALL Threshold (=6)

DEC Threshold (=16)

CLR Threshold (=48)

O R

16 pages fed without jam 16 pages fed without jam 16 pages fed without jam

48 pages fed without jam

Decrement

DecrementReset to

zero

H515D635.wmf

H515 2-58 SM

ParametersAddress (H) Initial

SettingsSys. Para.

ListADF PrinterDEC (1 - 255; 0 = Disabled) 48027E 480282 10 (H) XCALL (3 - 15; 0 = Disabled) 48027F 480283 06 (H) YCLR (Low)

(High)480280 480284 30 (H)

—480281 480285 00 (H)

Counters Address (H) Sys. Para. ListADF Printer

JAM: Jam counter used to place aservice call

480277 48027B Z

NO-JAM1: Counter used for JAMcounter decrement

480276 48027A —

NO-JAM2: Counter used forclearing the JAM counter

480278 (Low) 48027C (Low)—

480279 (High) 48027D (High)

The System Parameter List shows a complete list of jam counters.The system parameter list gives the current setting for the values of the DECand CALL thresholds and the JAM counter values are listed as X, Y, and Z re-spectively. (Refer to section 4.1.2, System Parameter List.

The Call Service indicator will not light for an excessive jam alarm and themachine can be operated normally after the automatic service call has beenmade. Also, the counters related to the jam location are automatically resetto zero after the call. The alarm is then disabled until either bit 3 (ADF jams)or bit 4 (printer jams) of address 4805B0(H) is reset to zero.

3. Periodic Service Call

The periodic service call will notify the condition of the machine to the pro-grammed service station. If this feature is enabled, the call is madeperiodically, at a time interval programmed in the following RAM addresses.

Parameters Address (H)Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD)

00: Periodic Service Call Disabled480379

Date and time of the next call Year: last two digits of the year (BCD) 48037AMonth: 01 through 12 (BCD) 48037BDay: 01 through 31 (BCD) 48037CHour: 00 through 23 (BCD) 48037D

To change the settings after programming, change the call interval. The ma-chine will automatically change the remaining parameters by referring to theinterval and the current date and time.

The Call Service indicator will not light for a periodic service call and the ma-chine can be operated normally after the service call had been sent.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-59 H515

4. PM (Periodic Maintenance) Call

If PM call featue is enabled, the machine will make an automatic service callwhen the PM counter reaches the PM threshold.

Program the PM call interval at the following RAM addresses. (Default setting: 60,000 sheets)

Address (H) Bits 7 - 4 Bits 3 - 048021C Tens Units48021D Thousands Hundreds48021E Hundred thousands Ten thousands

Cross referencePM call enable/disable: System switch 01, bit 0

The Call Service indicator will not light for a PM service call, and the ma-chine can be operated normally after it has made the service call.

5. Effective Term of Service Calls

If a time limit for the effectiveness of service calls is programmed, the ma-chine stops making automatic service calls after the time limit.

Program the time limit at the following addresses. This function is disabledwhen all of these addresses are 00(H).

Address (H)Year: last two digits of the year (BCD) 480383Month: 01 through 12 (BCD) 480384Day: 01 through 31 (BCD) 480385

H515 2-60 SM

2.3.3. Parallel Memory Transmission

When using the memory transmission, normally the machine will start dial-ing after the document has been completely scanned. When using theParallel Memory Transmission, the machine will start to dial at the same timethe machine starts scanning. If the document has multiple pages, the ma-chine will scan the pages into memory and at the same time will send them.

The following table shows the differences between normal memory transmis-sion and parallel memory transmission.

Memory tx Parallel memory txFile Reserve Report Printed, if automatic report

printout is enabled.Not printed.

If the other terminal is busy Tries to resend themessage later.

Continues scanning thedocument into memory, andtries to resend it later.

If transmission failed Tries to resend theremaining pages later.

Tries to resend theremaining pages later.

If memory overflows duringscanning

Stops scanning and erasesall the scanned pages frommemory, if the user agreesto erase them.

Stops scanning and hangsup the communication whenmemory overflow isdetected. Then erases allthe scanned pages frommemory without notice.

If a document jam occurredduring scanning

Stops scanning and deletesall the scanned pages frommemory.

Stops scanning and hangsup the communication whena document jam is detected.

How and when the scannedmessage is erased frommemory

The complete message iserased after all the pageshave been sent.

Each page is erased afterthe page has beensuccessfully sent.

Memory threshold to startscanning into memory

Depends on the setting ofcommunication switch 0D.Default setting - 24kB

Depends on the setting ofsystem switch 10.Default setting - 512 kB

Meaning of the stamp mark Successfully scanned. Successfully scanned.Batch numbering (P. x/x) Enabled Not available unless the

number of pages isprogrammed manually.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-61 H515

In the following cases, the machine will use normal memory transmissioneven if parallel memory transmission is enabled.

• Send later transmission• Broadcasting• Transmission of an Auto Document only• File re-transmission from the hard disk filing system• Double-sided document transmission• Partial image transmission (if parallel memory tx is enabled, partial im-

age scanning cannot be used)• Transfer request transmission• If the other terminal is busy• If an external telephone connected to the machine is in use• When communication switch 0A, bit 0 is set to 0 (See section 4.2.4.)• When remaining memory space is less than the threshold (default =

512 kB)

Using G4 transmission, parallel memory transmission is normally disabledbecause the transmission speed is much faster than the scanning speed.Transmission using parallel memory transmission is about twice as long asnormal memory transmission (using an ITU-T #1 test chart).

However, if the document contains pages with complicated images or whensending a photo document using halftone, using parallel memory transmis-sion may be faster than normal memory transmission.

If the user commonly sends this type of fax message, enable parallel mem-ory transmission for G4 transmission by changing system switch 11, bit 7 to1.

Cross ReferenceParallel memory tx (G3) On/Off - User parameter 07, bit 2Parallel memory tx (G4) On/Off - System switch 11, bit 7Memory threshold for enabling parallel memory tx - System switch 10, bits 0 to 7Point of resumption of memory transmission upon redialing - Communication switch 0A, bit 0

H515 2-62 SM

2.3.4. Transfer Broadcasting

This machine will use a new algorithm to identify the requester’s fax numberto send back the transfer result report, because the transfer result reportsometimes did not reach the requester with the algorithm used in previousmodels.

In a transfer broadcasting operation, the transfer requester informs its ownfax number to the transfer station. The transfer station uses that number toidentify the requester’s fax number, which the transfer station must dial tosend the transfer result report back to the requester.

Transmission of the transfer result report and selection of the number to dialdepends on the following three settings.

Setting SwitchConditions required for transfer resultreport transmission

Communication switch 0B, bit 30: Always1: If there is an error

Action when there is no fax number in theprogrammed Quick/Speed dials whichmatches the requester’s own fax number

Communication switch 0B, bit 50: Transfer cancelled1: Transfer continued

Number of digits compared to find therequester’s fax number from theprogrammed Quick/Speed dials.

Communication switch 0C, bits 0 to 4(default setting = 5 digits)

The requester’s fax number format is normally as follows.[ International access code ] [ Country code ] [ Area code ] - [ Local tel. no.]A Pause (“-”) must be programmed between area code and local tel. no.

Before the machine transfers the message, the machine compares the lastfew digits of the requester’s own fax number with all the programmedQuick/Speed Dials as shown in the diagram on the next page, starting fromQuick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dial codes. (The default setting for thenumber of digits compared is 5; see the above table.)

If the machine finds a number in which the compared digits match those ofthe requester’s own fax number, the machine will choose the number as thedestination for sending the report back. However, depending on the numberof digits compared, the machine may choose the wrong destination, asshown in the example diagram on the next page.

Note that the machine does not compare the following:• Pause (“-”)• ISDN sub-address (“/aaaa”, “aaaa” is a sub-address number)

With a G4 transfer request, the G4 and G3 own fax numbers are informedfrom the requester, then the machine compares the G4 number first, and theG3 number second.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-63 H515

Example

In the above example:• If the requester is within the same area, Quick Dial 05 or Quick Dial 08

is the correct destination, depending on the required dialing method fornumbers in the same country or area. The machine will select QuickDial 05 if it compares from 5 to 7 digits, and will select Quick Dial 08 if itcompares from 8 to 10 digits.

• Or, if the requester is in another country, Speed Dial 07 is the correctdestination. The machine will select this number if it compares 11 digits.Any setting higher than this will result in no match, due to the differentinternational access codes at the start of the numbers.

• If the machine compares less than 4 digits, it will select Quick Dial 01.• If the number of digits to compare is set to zero, the machine will send

the report to the first Quick or Speed Dial number which a fax numberhas been programmed in.

Note that the result can be changed depending on the locations where thecandidates are programmed. For example, if “00-12012223456” is pro-grammed in Quick Dial 01, the machine always selects this number forsending back the report, even if the transfer request is from within the samecountry.So, when programming the machine to act as a Transfer Station, the bestcombination of the communication switch 0C setting and the programmed lo-cation of the requester’s fax number has to be considered carefully.

Q 0 1

Q 0 2

Q 0 3

Q 0 4

Q 0 5

Q 0 6

Q 0 7

Q 0 8

Q 0 9

Q 1 0

Q 6 4

3456

020-4773456

020-4776666

00-81454771748

2223456

00-4961969063456

0569723456

201-2223456

00-31204564569

013453456

0875558888

Requester 's Own Fax No.0111201-2223456

2223456S100

S00

S01

S02

S03

S04

S05

S06

S07

S08

S09

S99

1223456

5413654

00-4126567878

0454771748

0634558989

07474125899

00-85226356541

00-12012223456

02212301564

6524555

00-496158756452

S999 0454771759

Wi thFunct ion Upgrade Card

No. of d ig i ts to compare

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

Resul t

Q 0 1

Q 0 5

Q 0 5

Q 0 5

Q 0 8

Q 0 8

Q 0 8

S07

No match

No match

H515D521.wmf

H515 2-64 SM

If the machine can not find the destination for the report, either:• The machine will stop the transfer operation and will print a report lo-

cally (if bit 5 of communication switch 0B is 0).• The machine will continue the transfer operation and will print a result

report locally after finishing all the transfer operations (if bit 5 of commu-nication switch 0B is 1).

Cross Reference to other parametersID code programming - User function 61Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to end receivers - Communication switch 0B, bit 0Use of economy transmission during a transfer operation to next transfer stations - Communication switch 0B, bit 1Use of label insertion for the end receivers in a transfer operation - Communication switch 0B, bit 2Printout of the message when acting as a transfer station - Communication switch 0B, bit 4

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-65 H515

2.3.5. Fax On Demand

Fax On Demand is a polling application with pre-recorded voice assistance.

The machine can have up to 100 fax messages in the SAF memory for theFax On Demand application. Anyone who can access the machine can getup to 5 fax messages in one polling operation using a DTMF tone sequence.A password (Remote ID) can be used to secure the information fromunauthorized access.

The machine can have up to seven voice messages to instruct the callerabout the procedure (each message must be shorter than 30 seconds). Thevoice messages are recorded using the microphone. The Voice A/D Con-verter on the MFCE will convert the messages into a digital format and storethem in the SRAM inside the Fax On Demand card. When playing back amessage or transmitting it to a caller, the Voice A/D Converter will convertthe digitized message back into an analog voice message and will send it tothe speaker or the NCU through the HIC on the MFDU.

The SRAM in the Fax On Demand card is backed up by a battery in the cardwhen the machine is turned off or when the machine is in the 2-watt (level 2)energy saver mode.

Cross ReferenceFax On Demand On/Off - User parameter 07, bits 6 and 7Storing Fax On Demand messages - User function 38Voice message recording and playback - User function 75Refer to the Operator’s Manual for more details.

MFCEMFDU

Voice A/DConver ter

S C P

L P CEXIO-2

(IC4)

H IC

D T M FReceiver

Mic rophone

Speaker

M o d e mN C U

FOD CardS R A M

(512kB)


Message Record

Playback Message P layback / Transmiss ion

H515D522.wmf

H515 2-66 SM

Protocol Sequence

After ringing detection, the machine will send a pre-recorded message, andat the same time, will start to detect CNG signals or DTMF tones from the re-mote caller. The dedicated DTMF receiver on the MFDU is used to detectboth the CNG signals and DTMF tones.

If the machine detects CNG signals, the machine will go into the fax recep-tion mode. If the machine detects the DTMF tone signals, the machine willthen send a voice prompt messages to instruct the caller what to do. Afterthe last message has been sent to the remote caller, the machine will go intothe fax transmission mode.

Sometimes the machine might not detect DTMF signals while the ma-chine is transmitting a voice message. To avoid this, the messagesshould instruct the caller to send DTMF signals after the message hasbeen finished.

While Fax On Demand is enabled, the machine will disable receiving Trans-fer Request using DTMF tones, because it may use the same key sequence.

C N G

C N G

C N G

C E D

N S F

DIS

Message"This is a fax service ... "

Tx R x

Dial Ring Detect ion

Message"This is a fax service ... "

Tx R x

Dial Ring Detect ion

" 1 "

" 5 "

" # "

Box No.Speci f ied

Message

" # "

" # "

No Box No.Speci f ied

Message"Press Start . . ."

C E D

N S F

DIS

DIS or NSF

CN

G/D

TM

F D

etec

tion

CN

G/D

TM

F D

etec

tion

H515D523.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-67 H515

2.3.6. Hard Disk Filing System

If the machine has the hard disk option and a function upgrade card, thehard disk can be used as a kind of document filing system.

The feature can be implemented in either of two ways:• Enable for specified parties only• Enable for all parties except those specified

The machine will keep fax messages that have been sent to enabled partiesand fax messages received from those parties in the hard disk.

Each filed message is given a unique cabinet number. Using this number,the messages can be printed or resent later. Refer to the Operator’s Manualfor more details.

For transmission, the machine can file fax messages that were sent usingnormal memory transmission. Messages that were sent using the followingfeatures cannot be filed in the hard disk.

• Immediate transmission• Parallel memory transmission• Confidential transmission• Auto document

• Messages sent from polling standby

Note that the machine cannot file messages that were sent using parallelmemory transmission. So, parallel memory transmission should be disabledwhen using this function.

For reception, the machine can file any fax messages that were received, ex-cept the following.

• Messages with a confidential ID• Messages received while Memory Lock was enabled• Messages for Transfer

If the total amount of filed messages exceeds the threshold (40 MB is the de-fault), if the total number of filed pages exceeds 3000, or if the number offiles exceeds 500, the machine will delete files, starting from the oldest one.

Also, if a message takes up more than the 95% of the threshold (40 MB x95% = 38 MB at default), the machine will not file it.

Cross ReferenceHard disk filing system on/off - User function 62Programming specified parties - User function 85Usage of specified parties - User parameter 09, bits 2 and 3Filed message retransmission on/off - System switch 13, bit 2Threshold memory space for this function - System bit switch 13, bits 0 and 1Printing filed messages - User function 58Deleting filed messages - User function 24

H515 2-68 SM

2.4. PCBs

2.4.1. MFCE

1. SCP (System Control Peripheral)

• CPU• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)• MMR + raw data compression for SAF storage (DCMMR)• DMA controller• Clock generation• Stepper motor control• DRAM backup control• Ringing signal/tone detection• Fusing lamp control

2. LPC (Laser Printer Controller)

• Laser interface (LIF)• Voice A/D converter control• Serial interface to MFDU (EXIO and energy saver CPU)• Parallel interface to MFDU

3. Modem (Rockwell R144EFXL)

• V.21, V.27ter, V.29, V.17, and V.33 modems

MFCE

SCP CG ROM(512kB)

Flash ROM(2MB)

SRAM(128kB)

LPC R144EFXLModem

DRAM(2MB)

Video SRAM(24kB) VPP4F

VoiceA/D

Converter

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

IC Card(Type A)

Lower Slot

CiG4-SVG4 Interface

RS232CInterface

IC Card(Type B)

Upper Slot

Fax OnDemand

Card

FunctionUpgrade

Card

FeatureExpander

4M

FeatureExpander

2M


MFDU

Par

alle

l I/F

Ser

ial I

/F

H515D530.wmf

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-69 H515

4. VPP4F (Video Processing Peripheral 4F)

• Video signal and thermistor output A/D conversion• Digital video processing

5. ROM

• 2MB (16 Mbit) flash ROM for system software storage• 512 kB (4 Mbit) mask ROM for LCD and report font storage (CGROM)

6. DRAM

• 2 MB DRAM shared between the Line Buffer (32 kB), ECM Buffer (128kB), Page Memory (768 kB), and SAF memory (1 MB)

• 1 MB SAF memory, backed up by the battery on the MFDU

7. SRAM

• 128 kB SRAM for system and user parameter storage, backed up bythe battery on the MFCE

8. Video SRAM

• 8 kB SRAM for video processing

9. Voice A/D converter

• Digital encoding of analog voice messages• Analog voice generation

10. Oscillators

• 42.20545 MHz oscillator for system clock generation• 32.768 MHz oscillator for the real time clock. This is backed up by the

battery on the MFCE• 38.00053 MHz oscillator for the VPP4F and R144EFXL modem

11. IC Card Slots

• Upper slot for an optional Feature Expander (SAF memory)• Lower slot for an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand

Card

12. Jumpers, Switches, and Test Points

Item DescriptionSW2 Switches the backup battery ON/OFF

H515 2-70 SM

Item DescriptionCN6 Test connector for scanner adjustment

Pin 1 - Data enable clockPin 2 - Analog video signalPin 3 - Line synchronization clockPin 4 - GroundRefer to section 5.11 for how to adjust the scanner.

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-71 H515

2.4.2. MFDU

1. Energy Saver CPU

• 4 bit CPU for controlling the machine during energy saver mode.

2. FPD (Facsimile Power Driver)

• Stepper motor driver.

MFCE

MFDU

NCU

DTMFReceiver

Ener gySaver CPU

Hybrid IC

EXIO1EXIO2

MFPD

DC/DCConverter

LDDRLaser Synch.

SBU Microphone(Fax on Demand)

PSU

Sensors

Sp eaker

Clutches

Op erationPanel

Scanner MotorPap er Feed Motor

PFUs

100 SheetCassette

Power PackCTM


Com p onents

Hexa g onal MirrorMotor

Main Motor

PrinterInterface

MechanicalCounter

Paral lel Interface

Serial Interface

+5VLD +5V

+24VD +24VM

+24V

Interlock Switches

H515D531.wmf

H515 2-72 SM

3. EXIO1, EXIO2 (External I/O)

• Serial interface to the MFCE, operation panel, FPD, DTMF receiver,and optional paper feed units

• Parallel interface to the motors, clutches, sensors, and other electricalcomponents

4. Analog circuit with HIC (Hybrid IC)

• 2-4 wire switching• Filters and amplifiers• Monitor speaker driver

5. DTMF Receiver

• DTMF signal detection for Transfer Request using DTMF and Fax OnDemand operations

• Serial interface to the EXIO

6. DC/DC Converters

• +5V, +12.4V, +12V, and -9V generation

7. DRAM Backup

• +5VD generation for DRAM (SAF memory) backup

8. Interlock Switches

• The top/front cover interlock switch disables the power supply to thedrive components, the laser diode, and the power pack.

• The fusing exit cover interlock switch disables the laser diode poweronly.

9. Fuse and Test Points

Item DescriptionF1 250V/5A fuse for the +24VD power supplyTP1 -9VTP3 COM1 groundTP2 +5VETP4 +5VLD from both interlock switchesTP5 +24VD from the top/front cover interlock switchTP6 Laser synchronization signalTP7 +24V input from the PSU

DE

TAIL

ED

SE

CT

ION

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

NS

SM 2-73 H515

2.4.3. PSU

• +24Vdc generation

• Fusing lamp ac power supply and control

2.4.4. NCU (USA)

1. Jumpers

Item DescriptionJP5 These jumpers should be shorted when the machine is being tested in

back-to-back mode. Also set G3 switch 00 bit 7 to 1. (See section 4.2.5.)Be sure to return these setting to default after testing is completed.

JP6

PSU

A C N

A C L

H T N

H T L

F1

SurgeProtect ion

SurgeProtect ion

F2

Fus ingContro l

SwitchingCircuit

+24V

C O M 3

ACInput

Fusing LampOutput 1HTORON

1HTON

+ 2 4 V D

G N D

Inter lockSwi tch

MainSwitch

H515D532.wmf

Ring Detect

OHDISW

TIP

RING

T1

R1

T1

R1

TRXD

CurrentSensor

ExDI

Hook1

Hook0

24V

OHDISW

24V

Ext. TelDP/Off -Hook

DetectionRelay

NCU

JP5

JP6

ExRing

H515D633.wmf

H515 2-74 SM

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

3.1. INSTALLING THE MACHINE

Refer to the Operator’s manual for the installation environment and how toinstall and set up the machine.

3.2. INITIAL PROGRAMMING

Items to Program (Service Level) Function No.Country code (NCU parameter 00) Function 08Country code (System switch 0F) Function 01Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B) Function 01PABX access code (RAM address 4800BB) Function 06PABX access method (RAM address 4800AD) Function 06Machine’s serial number Function 14Service station’s fax number Function 13PM call (System switch 01 - bit 0) Function 01Periodic service call (RAM address 480379) Function 06

Items to Program (User Administrator Level) Function No.Clock Function 91Initial programming items (IDs) Function 61On/off switches Function 62Display/report language Function 93Fusing power control during energy saver mode

(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)Function 63

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-1 H515

3.3. INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

+CAUTIONBefore installing optional units, perform the following:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the systemparameter list.3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.

3.3.1. Feature Expander Type 140 (80MB Hard Disk)

Notes• Before installing the Hard Disk Unit, remove the optional Printer Inter-

face Unit, if previously installed, Refer to service manual, section 3.3.5.“Printer Interface”. On completion, re-install the printer interface unit.

• After the hard disk unit is installed (steps 1 to 5 below) and the poweris initially turned on (step 6), the machine will give the appearance ofbeing dead. The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED in-dicators will be off and the machine will not accept key entries. This isthe correct condition for a newly installed hard disk unit .

Installation Procedure

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4screws), the left cover [B] (3screws and the connectorcover), and the IC card slotcover [C] as shown.

2. Attach the bracket [D] to thehard disk unit [E] (4 screws).Hook the grounding plate [F]onto the bracket [D] and securethe hard disk unit as shown.

[F] [E]

[D]

H515I502.wmf

[A]

[B] [C]H515I501.wmf

H515 3-2 SM

3. Set the battery switch [G] on the hard disk interface card to the ONposition.

4. Connect the harness [J] to thehard disk interface card (red wiretowards the connector end) andthe hard disk unit (red wiretowards the top of the unit).Insert the hard disk interface cardinto the upper card slot.

Note: The top four (4) pins (two perrow) on the hard disk unit arenot used.

5. Connect the harness [K] (2 pins)from the hard disk interface cardto the connector CN77 on the MFDU board.

6. Turn on the power switch. The machine will appear to be dead. The display panel will remain completely blank, all LED indicators Willbe off and the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correctcondition for a newly installed hard disk unit.

Wait a full minute to allow the machine to properly initialize the harddisk. DO NOT turn the power off or depress a key.

7. A. If after the one minute delay, the display panel is properly lit, proceed directly to step 9. B. If after a full minute has passed and the display panel remains blank,

proceed to step 8.

8. A. Turn the machine off and disconnect the hard disk connector, CN77 (Blue Connector) from the MFDU board and turn the machine back on. B. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Hard Drive.

Initialization Procedure (Function 16). Refer to the service manual,section 4.1.26.

C. Turn the machine off and re-connect the hard disk connector, CN77 (Blue Connector).

D. Turn the machine on and proceed to step 9.

9. Enter the Service Level Functions and perform the Bit SwitchProgramming Procedure (Function 01). Set the System Switch 05, bit 4to a “1”. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.

10. Turn the Power switch off and after several seconds, turn the power switch on.

Note: The hard disk was pre-formatted at the factory. It is not necessary toperform Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16, section4.1.27).

[J]

[I][H]

[G]

[K]

H515I503.wmf

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-3 H515

11 Perform the following checks to ensure that the hard disk was properlyinstalled and initialized:

A. With the machine is the Standby Mode, ensure that the displayedmemory indicator on the Operation Panel is 100%.

B. Enter the Service Level Functions and print a copy of Group 3System Parameter List (Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual,section 4.1.2.

Ensure that “HD” (Hard Disk) is listed under PARAMETER (installedoptions) and System Switch 05, bit 4 is set to a “1”.

C. Print a RAM Dump (Function 06) of the address range of 700000(H)to 7000FF(H). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.7. Notethe title on the printout is “Memory Dump” not “RAM Dump”.

Ensure that the following address locations contains the values listedbelow. If any of the listed address locations contain a different value,perform the Hard Disk Formatting Procedure (Function 16). Refer tothe Service Manual, section 4.1.27

70001E(H) - 50(H) 700022(H) - 00(H)

70001F(H) - 00(H) 700023(H) - 50(H)

700020(H) - FF(H) 700024(H) - 00(H)

700021(H) - FF(H) 700025(H) - 80(H)

12. Re-install the rear cover and the left cover.

13. Re-install the Printer Interface Unit, if removed. Refer to the Service Manual, section 3.3.5.

+CAUTIONThe hard disk interface card contains a lithium battery. The danger ofexplosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended bythe manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with themanufacturer’s instructions.

H515 3-4 SM

3.3.2. ISDN G4 Interface

Note : Before installing the ISDN G4 interface, remove the printer interfaceunit, if precioulsy installed. Refer to the Service Manual section 3.3.5,"Printer Interface"


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4screws), and the left cover [B] (3screws and the connector cover).Then, remove the small cover [C]from the rear cover as shown.

2. Connect the ISDN board [D] tothe MFCE through the interfaceconnector [E] as shown.

3. Secure the ISDN board [D] to themachine with 2 screws and thesupport holder [F] (1 screw).

4. Re-install the rear cover and theleft cover. Connect the phoneline cable.

5. .Plug in the machine and turn onthe main switch.

6. Program the items required forISDN G4 communication withuser function 61 and servicefunction 17. Refer to the ISDN Option Type140 Service Manual for details.

[A]

[C]

[B]

H515I504.wmf

[E] [F]

[D]

H515I505.wmf

H515I506.WMF

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-5 H515

3.3.3. Fax on Demand

CAUTION: Before installing the Fax on Demand option, review all of the precautions listed below.

1. The Fax on Demand card can only be inserted into the lower slotbecause thepin configuration of the slots are not compatible.

The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are locateddirectly under each other. Example:o o o o o o o ------ o o o

o o o o o o o ------ o o o

The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pinsare adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o

o o o o o o o ----- o o o

2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install the batteryand turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting the cardinto the machine.

3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to “1”.

4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to “0”, each time that the card is removed andre-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased. When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), thenpower off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform ainitialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.

5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to “1”, during the procedure listedabove, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The storeddata will not be erased.

6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - removecard - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be offand the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correctcondition of turning on the machine without the card installed.

With System 16, bit 0 set to "1", at power on, the machine will look forthe installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, themachine will lock up (appear to be dead).

Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.

H515 3-6 SM

7. The Fax on Demand card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT beused in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the ServiceManual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.

The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the samemachine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine willrecognize that a different card was installed and will perform ainitialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.

Example: The Fax on Demand card initially installed and data is stored inthe card. The operator removes the Fax on Demand card and in-serts a previously loaded the Function Upgrade card (power off -remove Fax on Demand card - insert Function Upgrade card -power on).

With System 16, bit 0 set to “1”, at power on, the machine willlook for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card butwill recognize that it is not the original card. The machine willperform an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored datain the new card to allow the operator to load new data.

When the operator inserts the original Fax on Demand card intothe machine (power off - remove Function Upgrade card - insertFax on Demand card - power on). As indicated above, the ma-chine will look for a card in the lower slot but again will recognizethat is a different card. Again, the machine will perform an initiali-zation procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new cardto allow the operator to load new data.

At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of thestored data in both the Fax on Demand and the Function Up-grade cards.

8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and theFlash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. Themachine will not perform the initialization procedure. When the originalFax on Demand card is re- inserted, the stored data will not be erased.

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-7 H515


1. Turn the main switch off.

2 Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws and the IC card slot cover [B].

3. Remove the NCU cover [C] (1 screw) and install the FAX on Demandfeature cover [C]. Connect the harness [D] to CN73 on the MFDU boardas shown.

3. Install the battery into the IC cardand turn the battery switch to theon position.

4. Insert the IC card [E] into thelower slot and re-install the rearcover. Connect the microphonesocket [F] into the NCU cover asshown.

5. Turn on the main switch.

6. Enter the Service Level Functionand perform the Bit SwitchProgramming Procedure(Function 01). Set the SystemBit Switch 16, bit 0 to a “1”.Refer to the Service Manual,section 4.1.1.

7. Perform the following checks toensure that the Fax on Demandfeature was properly installedand initialized. Enter the ServiceLevel Functions and print a copyof the Group 3 SystemParameter List (Function 02).Refer to the Service Manual,section 4.1.2.

Ensure that “FOD” (Fax on Demand) is listed under PARAMETER(installed options) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a “1”.

8. Refer the Operator’s Manual, page 226 for the programming proceduresfor the Fax on Demand feature.

+CAUTIONThe IC card contains a lithium battery.The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectlyreplaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries inaccordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

[A]

[C] [D][B]

H515I507.wmf

[F]

[E]

H515I508.wmf

H515 3-8 SM

3.3.4. Counter

Note: Before installing the counter, remove the printer interface unit, ifpreviously installed. Refer to theService Manual, section 3.3.5. "PrinterInterface"


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws) and the small cover [B]as shown.

2. Install the counter [C] as shown.

3. Connect the harness [D] to theMFDU board, then re-install therear cover [A] (2 screws).

4. Plug in the machine and turn onthe main switch.

5. Make some copies and confirmthat the counter advances. If not,check the harness connectionfrom the counter to the MFDUboard.

[B][A]

H515I509.wmf

[C][D]

H515I510.wmf

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-9 H515

3.3.5. Printer Interface

Note: Before installing the Printer Interface Unit, remove any other optionalunits, if previously installed.


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4screws) and two small covers [B](1 screw) and [C] as shown.

2. Attach the ground wire [D] (1screw) to the machine andre-install the rear cover [A] (1screw at the lower left corner).

3. Install two brackets [E] (2screws) and [F] (2 screws) -bottom screw of bracket [F] alsosecures the rear cover as shown.

4. Remove brackets [G] and [H] asshown and install the newbrackets included in the kit.

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]H515I511.wmf

[E]

[F]H515I512.wmf

[G]

[H]

H515I513.wmf

H515 3-10 SM

5. Connect the harness [I] to theMFDU board through the lowerwindow in the rear cover andsecure the ground wire [J] to theprinter interface unit [K]. Hookthe printer interface unit onto thebrackets [G] and [H].

6. Secure the unit [K] to themachine (3 screws).

7. Connect a parallel printer cable from the printer interface unit to the PC.

8. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.

9. Confirm that the On Line indicator on the operation panel is lit. If not,check the harness connection from the Printer Interface Unit to theMFDU board.

10. Enter function 39 and print astatus sheet.

11. Apply decals 4 and 5 from thedecal sheet to the operationpanel as shown.

Note: If installation of additional SIMM memory is desired, refer to the PrinterInterface Service Manual.

ResetInitalize

Copy End Cont inue Feed

ResetInitialize Copy End Cont inue Feed

Level 1 Level 2 ExitOn L ine



1

2

4

3

5

Engl ish

H515I515.wmf

[I]

[K][J] H515I514.wmf

5

4

H515I516.wmf

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-11 H515

3.3.6. Function Upgrade

CAUTION: Before installing the Function Upgrade, review all of the precautions listed below.

1. The Function Upgrade card can only be inserted into the lower IC cardslot because the pin configuration of the upper and lower slots are notcompatible.

The connector in the upper slot contains 68 pins and the pins are locateddirectly under each other. Example: o o o o o o o ------ o o o

o o o o o o o ------ o o o

The connector in the lower slot contains more pins (88 pins) and the pinsare adjacent to each other. Example: o o o o o o o ----- o o o

o o o o o o o ----- o o o

2. The data stored in the card is held by a Lithium battery. Install thebattery and turn the battery switch to the on position before inserting thecard into the machine.

3. After the option is installed, System Switch 16, bit 0 MUST be set to “1”.

4. If System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to “0”, each time that the card is removed andre-installed in the machine, all of the stored data in the card will be erased.

When the card is re-installed, (power off - remove card - power on), then(power off - insert card - power on), the machine will perform ainitialization procedure which will erase all of the stored data in the card.

5. When System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to “1”, during the procedure listedabove, the machine will not perform the initialization routine. The storeddata will not be erased.

6. If after the proper installation, the card is removed (power off - removecard - power on), the machine will give the appearance of being dead.The display panel will remain blank, all of the LED indicators will be offand the machine will not accept key entries. This is the correctcondition of turning on the machine without the card installed.

With System 16, bit 0 set to “1”, at power on, the machine will look forthe installed card in the lower slot. When the card is not found, themachine will lock up (appear to be dead).

Turn the power off and re-insert the card. If the card is not available,insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool.

H515 3-12 SM

7. The Function Upgrade card and the Function Upgrade card CANNOT beused in the same machine. As illustrated on page 1-14 of the ServiceManual, both cards can only be inserted into the lower slot.

The problem occurs when the cards are interchanged in the samemachine. Each time that the opposite card is installed, the machine willrecognize that a different card was installed and will perform ainitialization procedure to erase the stored data in the card.

Example: The Function Upgrade card initially installed and data is stored inThe card. The operator removes the Function Upgrade card andinserts a previously loaded the Fax on Demand card (power off -remove Function Upgrade card - insert Fax on Demand card -power on).

With System 16, bit 0 set to “1”, at power on, the machine willlook for a card in the lower slot. The machine will find a card butwill recognize that it is not the original card. The machine will per-form an initialization procedure to erase all of the stored data inthe new card to allow the operator to load new data.

When the operator inserts the original Function Upgrade cardinto the machine (power off - remove Fax on Demand card - in-sert Function Upgrade card - power on). As indicated above, themachine will look a card in the lower slot but again will recognizethat is a different card. The machine will again perform an initiali-zation procedure to erase all of the stored data in the new cardto allow the operator to load new data.

At this moment, the operator had inadvertently erased all of thepreviously stored data in both the original Function Upgrade andthe Fax on Demand cards.

8. During the servicing, the original card can be removed and theFlash/SRAM Copy Tool can be inserted into the lower slot. The machinewill not perform the initialization procedure. When the original FunctionUpgrade card is re-inserted, the stored data will not be erased.

INS

TALL

ATIO

N

SM 3-13 H515


1. Turn the main switch off.

2. Remove the IC card slot cover.

3. Install the battery into the IC card and turn the battery switch to the onposition.

4. Insert the IC card [E] into the lower IC card slot.

5. Turn on the main switch.

6. Enter the Service Level Function and perform the Bit SwitchProgrammingProcedure (Function 01). Set the System Bit Switch 16, bit0 to a “1”. Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.1.

7. Perform the following checks to ensure that the Function Upgradefeature was properly installed and initialized. Enter the Service levelFunctions and print a copy of the Group 3 System Parameter List(Function 02). Refer to the Service Manual, section 4.1.2.

Ensure that “Function Card” listed under PARAMETER (installedoptions) and System Switch 16, bit 0 is set to a “1”.

8. Refer the Operator’s Manual, page 299 for the Function Upgradeprogramming procedure.

H515 3-14 SM

SERVICE TABLES ANDPROCEDURES

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-A H515

H515 4-B SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-C H515

H515 4-D SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-E H515

H515 4-F SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-G H515

H515 4-H SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-I H515

4. SERVICE TABLES & PROCEDURES

4.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS *

In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the followingsymbols. - Start key - Stop key - Function key - Yes key - No key - Up arrow key - Down arrow key - Right arrow key - Left arrow key

4.1.1. Bit Switch Programming (Function 01)

Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the unit’selectronic DIP switches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2. currentand default settings are listed on the system parameter list. (section4.1.2.)

1.

then immediately

2.

3. To see the system bit switches: To see the scanner switches: To see the printer switches: To see the G3 switches:

To see the communication switches: Example: Press

4. Scroll through the bit switches.

Increment bit switch:

Decrement bit switch: Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3

5. Adjust the bit switch. Example: To change the value of bit 7,

press

SERVICE SET NO: OR NO

01BIT SW. 02PARA.LIST

03ERROR CODE 04SVC MONITOR

_

BIT SWITCH NO:

0.SYSTEM 1.SCANNER 2.PRINTER

3.G3 4.COMMUNICATION

_

PLOTER

COMMUNICATE

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH00: 00000000

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 00000000

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 10000000

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-1 H515

6. Either:• Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.

• Finish -

4.1.2. Group 3 System Parameter List (Function 02)

The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and serviceprogrammed setting of the machine. The listing includes the ID’s settings,the counters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BITSwitches. Refer to the sample printout in section 4.8.1 and 4.8.2.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.

Name Meaning Name MeaningSCN Scanned page counter PRT Printed page counterTX Transmitted page counter RX Received page counterPM PM counter PM Default Default setting for the PM

service call intervalPCU Printed page counter using

the current master drumCOPY Copied page counter

ADF Scanned page counterusing the ADF

TONER Printed page counter usingthe current CTM

MAINCassette

Paper feed counter(Standard cassette)

Cassette 2 Paper feed counter(First paper feed unit)

Cassette 3 Paper feed counter (Second paper feed unit)

OPENCassette

Paper feed counter(100 sheet cassette)

BY-PASS Paper feed counter(By-pass feeder)

DOC. JAM Document jam counter

COPY JAM Paper jam counter (total) EJECT JAM Fusing exit jam counterPAPER JAM Paper jam counter (Jams at

the registration area)MAIN CSTJAM

Paper jam counter(Standard cassette)

CST 2 JAM Paper jam counter(First paper feed unit)

CST 3 JAM Paper jam counter(Second paper feed unit)

OPEN CSTJAM

Paper jam counter(100-sheet cassette)

BY-PASSJAM

Paper jam counter(By-pass feeder)

PRN Printed page counter fromthe PC printer interface

PPC1 Reserved for future use.

PPC2 Reserved for future use. PPC3 Reserved for future use.PPC4 Reserved for future use.




_

G3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL

H515 4-2 SM

A sample system parameter list is given below.

(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings

SWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)

(SWG3) - G3 Bit Switch Settings

(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings

(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings

(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings

FUNCTION CARD or FOD - Optional function upgrade card or Fax on demand kit installed

* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) * * *

SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)

ID CODEC S IT T IR T IROM NO. [Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]ROM VER. [Version] [Software release no.] [Software release date]

CONFIDENTIAL ID

COUNTER

NCU PARAMETERSERVICE NUMBER

OWN NUMBERNUMBERMEMORY LOCK ID

(SWUSR) - User Parameter SettingsSWITCH (UPPER:DEFAULT LOWER:CURRENT)

PARAMETER

TTI

SCAN THRESHOLD2MB, 4MB or HD - Optional memory card or Hard Disk installedCASSETTE 2 - Optional paper feed unit installed

OWN NUMBER(ISDN G4)OWN NUMBER(ISDN G3)

CASSETTE 3 - Optional paper feed unit installed

PRINTER INTERFACE - Optional printer interface installedG4 - Optional ISDN G4 kit installed

H515M550.wmf

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-3 H515

4.1.3. Error Code Display (Function 03)

This function will allow the technician to display and scroll through the errorcodes, if any, that had occured in the machine. The displayed message willalso include the time and date that each error had occured.

1. ,

then immediately

2.

3. Either:

Scroll through the error codes - or

Finish -

4.1.4. Service Monitor Report (Function 04)

This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occured inthe machine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report willinclude the time and date that each error had occurred.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4.1.5. Group 3 Protocol Dump (Function 05)

This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that wereexchanged during the last communication. Refer to the sample printout insection 4.8.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.




_

ERROR CODE

CODE=0-14 JAN 1 3:15PM




_

SERVICE MONITOR REPORT

PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL




_

G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST

PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL

H515 4-4 SM

4.1.6. RAM Display/Rewrite (Function 06)

This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selectedaddress location and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data isdisplayed in hexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed inthe RAM dump printout, refer to section 4.8.2. The function of each address isdescribed in sections 4-3 and 4-5.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Input the address that you wish to see. Example: Address 480020

5. If you wish to change the data, move the

cursor to the data field: press .

6. Type in the new data.

Example: 80, press

7. Either:

• View the previous address - press .

• View the next address - press .

• Finish -

4.1.7. RAM Dump (Function 06)

This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in theselected address location. The function of each address is described insections 4-3 and 4-5. The current listing of each setting can be printed byperforming the RAM Dump Procedure. Refer to the sample printout insection 4.8.2. Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, notRAM Dump.

1.

then immediately

2.




_

RAM NO:

0.MEMORY R/W 1.MEMORY DUMP

_

MEMORY R/W

ADDRESS= DATA=2E000000

MEMORY R/W

ADDRESS= DATA=00480020

MEMORY R/W

ADDRESS= 480020 DATA= 00

MEMORY R/W





_

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-5 H515

3.

4. Enter the first four digits of the start and end addresses.

Example: Start at 480000, end at 4801FF.

5.

4.1.8.4.1.8. Counter Display/Rewrite (Function 07)

This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. Thecurrent totals of the counters are also listed on the system parameter list.Refer to the sample printout. in section 4.8.1.

1.

then immediately

2.

3. Either: Check the transmitted, received,

scanned and printed page counters, andthe printer and scanner jam counters -

press

Check the PM counter - press

Check the CTM counter - press

Check the OPU counter - press Example: Press

4. To change the contents of a counter,

input the new value, then press .

5. To finish:

RAM NO:


_

MEMORY DUMP

ADD. 00H - ADD. FFH0000

MEMORY DUMP

ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH




_

COUNTER R/W NO:

0.COUNTER 1.PM COUNTER

2.CTM COUNTER 3.PCU COUNTER

_

COUNTER

TX : SCN: 000000

RX : 000000 PRT: 000000

000000

H515 4-6 SM

4.1.9. Modem Test (Function 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modemsignals.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the available tests using

or .

5. To start a test:

6. To stop the test:

7. To finish:

4.1.10. DTMF Tone Test (Function 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten key pad.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the available tests using

or .

5. To start a test:


7. To finish:




_

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

MODEM TEST

NO.01=V21 300BPS

PRESS "START"




_

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

DTMF TEST

NO.01=TONE [0]

PRESS "START"

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-7 H515

4.1.11. NCU Parameters (Function 08)

This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parametersfor such as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and thenumber of rings before the machine will answer an incoming call. Thecurrent value of each address is listed on the system parameter list. Refer tothe sample printout in section 4.8.1.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the parameters using

or . If you want to change a value, enter the new value at the keypad,

then press .

5. To finish : .

Note: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level. Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.

4.1.12. Modem Detection Test (Function 08)

This function is not available in U.S. models.




_

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

NCU PARAMETER SET

C.C =019

PRESS "YES/NO"

H515 4-8 SM

4.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08)

This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the test:

6. To stop :

7. To finish:




_

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

RINGER TEST

PRESS START

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-9 H515

4.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09)

The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel andall of the LED indicatiors.

1.

then immediately

2.

3. To start the test, press . The screen should turn black.

4. To stop the test, press 5. To finish:

4.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Function 10)

This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the test, press

5. To stop the test, press

6. To finish:




_

LED.LCD

PRESS START




_

SCANNER NO:

0.Xe LAMP 1.ADF TEST

_

Xe LAMP

PRESS START

H515 4-10 SM

4.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10)

The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) testprocedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted intothe ADF without perfoming an actual FAX, or copy operation.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Place a document in the feeder,

then press .

5. To stop the test, press .

6. Finish:

4.1.17. Printer Test Patterns (Function 11)

The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer sectionon the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section ofthe machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Press a key from to .

5. Press .A test pattern is printed.

6. To finish:




_

SCANNER NO:


_

ADF TEST

PRESS START




_

PRINTER NO:

0.PATTERN 1.AGING TEST

_

PATTERN ENTER CODE

CODE:

NO TO CANCEL SCROLL

_

PATTERN

CODE: VERTICAL

PRESS START

0

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-11 H515

4.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test - Free Run (Function 11)

The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, themachine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, thexenon lamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print athin diagonal line on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test,depress the STOP key.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the free run, press .


6. To finish:

4.1.19. RAM Tests (Function 12)

The RAM test will allow the technician to verify the operation of the SRAMand DRAM.

1.

then immediately

2.

3. Either:

Test the SRAM: Press Test the DRAM: Press

If test is successful, the display shows "OK!!".If test is unsuccessful, the display shows "ADDRESS=".

4. To finish: .




_

PRINTER NO:


_

MECH. TEST

PRESS START




_

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515 4-12 SM

4.1.20. Software Download (Function 12)

Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machine’s software, use thisprocedure to update the software in the machine’s Flash ROM. This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROMon the machine’s MFCE. The external medium for the new software can bean MFCE or an EPROM board.

+CAUTION: DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optionalFax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23. Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

1. Turn the machine off.

2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], thenconnect the MFCE [C] or EPROM board [D] with new software to theopposite side of the tool.

Note: The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.

The EPROM board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet the followingspecifications.

Size: 4 Mbits Data width: 8 bits Number of pins: 32 Access speed: Faster than 150 ns

Socket 1: ROM0, D15 - D8 Socket 2: ROM1, D15 - D8 Socket 3: ROM0, D7 - D0 Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0

3. Turn on the machine.

Please read the note following step 11, if ROM upgrade includes rewritingBoot Block.

[B] [A]

[D]

[C]

[E] = ON

H515M551.wmf

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-13 H515

4.

then immediately

5.

6.

7.

8. If the software is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of the displaydisplay shows "OK". If the software download fails, the bottom line shows "NG".

9. To finish, press .

10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.

11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version on it.

Note: In rare cases, the boot block will have to be rewritten. In such cases,you must do the following in addition to the above procedure.• After step 3, set bit 5 of system switch 02 to 1.• After step 11, reset bit 5 of system switch 02 to 0.




_

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

COPY NO:

0.ROM COPY 1.RAM COPY

_

COPY

FLASH ROM -> MACHINE

PRESS START

H515 4-14 SM

4.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12)

This procedure copies the software from the machine’s installed MFCE to anexternal MFCE.

+CAUTION DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optionalFax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23. Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

1. Turn the machine off.

2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], thenconnect the external MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

Note:

The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.

3. Turn the machine on.

4.

then immediately

5.




_

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

[B][A]

[D] = OFF

[C]H515M552.wmf

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-15 H515

6.

7.

8. If the software is successfully uploaded, the bottom line of the displayshows "OK".If the software upload fails, the bottom line shows "NG".

9. Finish :

10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

COPY NO:


_

COPY

MACHINE -> FLASH ROM

PRESS START

H515 4-16 SM

4.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12)

This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCEto the machine’s MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to saveany previous settings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.

+CAUTION DO NOT PROCEED BEFORE READING!If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optionalFax On Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.23. Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

NOTE: Prior to performing this function, program the same country code inthe Fax machine as the external FCE. If this cannot be done, con-duct the download process twice.

1. Turn the machine off. 2. Insert the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then

connect the damaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.

Note: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


4.

then immediately




_

Rev. 9/96

[B][A]

[D] = OFF

[C]H515M552.wmf

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-17 H515

5.

6.

7.

8. If the SRAM data is successfully downloaded, the bottom line of thedisplay shows "OK".If the SRAM download fails, the bottom line of the display shows "NG".

9. Finish :

10. Turn the machine off, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.

4.1.23. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On DemandCard, the card must be removed from the IC card slot before performing anyof the following procedures:

• Downloading/uploading software• Replacing the MFCE• Replacing the MFDU or other components

Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 asexplained in section 3.3.6, to prevent the data inside the IC card from beingaccidentally initialized.

Perform the procedures as explained below, to prevent data from beingerased from the card.

Note: • Refer to section 1.2.2 for the type of data that can beprogrammed in the Function Upgrade Card. The data in the FaxOn Demand Card are voice messages.

• The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased ifthe card or the hard disk interface is removed from the machine.

1. When downloading/uploading software

1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the batteryswitch on the IC card is at the ON position.

2. Turn the machine off, and remove the IC card.

3. Connect the data copy tool and ROM board or MFCE, and perform therequired procedure as explained in section 4.1.20 or 4.1.21.

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

COPY NO:


_

COPY

MACHINE -> RAM

PRESS START

H515 4-18 SM

4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off themachine and disconnect the tool.

+CAUTIONIf the machine is turned on without the card being put back in thelower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has beenremoved and all the data programmed in the card will not beaccessable.

5. Re-insert the IC card, then turn the machine on.

6. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.

2. When replacing the MFCE

When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in themachine must have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had,before the IC card is put back.

1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the batteryswitch on the IC card is at the ON position.

2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.Do not turn the machine on at this point.

3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained insection 4.1.22, then turn the machine on.

4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCEinside, as explained in section 4.1.22.

5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn the machine onand disconnect the tool.

6. Re-insert the IC card, and turn the machine on.Note: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at

this point, go back to step 3 again.

7. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-19 H515

3. When replacing the MFDU or other components

When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other componentsinside the machine, follow the procedure below.

1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the batteryswitch on the IC card is at the ON position.

2. Turn the machine off, remove the IC card, and replace the requiredcomponents inside the machine.

+CAUTIONIf the machine is turned on without the card being put back in thelower IC card slot, the machine recognizes that the card has beenremoved and all the data programmed in the card will not beaccessable any more.

3. After replacement has been completed, re-install the MFCE and the IC card, then turn the machine on.

4. Ensure that all the programmed data in the IC card can still be used.

4.1.24. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13)

1.

then immediately

2.

3. Input the telephone number of the serv-ice station that will receive Auto Servicecalls from this machine.

To use a G4 number, press the “G4” key.To erase the telephone number: press

4. If the display is correct:

Cross ReferenceUsing a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input - Function 36, Code No = 10




_

S.S.NO. ENTER FAX NUMBER

<G3> NO TO CANCEL

_

S.S.NO. YES OR CLR . NO

<G3>

212-555-1234

H515 4-20 SM

4.1.25. Serial Number (Function 14)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of themachine into the RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used duringthe feature of placing an auto service call. The entered serial number is listedon the System Parameter List.

1.

then immediately

2.

3. Enter the machine’s serial number at thekeypad.

To correct a mistake:


4.1.26. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16)

This procedure may be performed when installing the optional hard disk.(Refer to section 3.3.1.)

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.




_

SERIAL NO.

_

SERIAL NO.

64997244292




_

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

FILE INITIAL

PRESS START

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-21 H515

4.1.27. Hard Disk Formatting (Function 16)

NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation. The diskwas pre-formated at the factory.

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. Formatting the hard disk takes more than 30 minutes.If the format was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.

4.1.28. Hard Disk Test (Function 16)

1.

then immediately

2.

3.

4. If the test was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.




_

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

HD FORMAT

PRESS START




_

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

HD TEST

PRESS START

H515 4-22 SM

4.1.29. G4 Parameter Programming (Function 17)

1.

then immediately

2.

Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details ofthe G4 parameter programming procedures.




_

G4 NO: OR NO

01G4_ISW 02G4_PSW

03ISDN_IP 04G4_SN1

_

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-23 H515

4.2. BIT SWITCHES

+WARNINGDo not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this maycause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that isnot accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in otherareas, such as Japan.

Note: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer tothe System Parameter List printed by the machine. (Refer to section4.1.2 for the System Parameter List printout procedure).

4.2.1. System Switches

System Switch 00

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 1

RAM Reset

Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Level 0 0 No reset 0 1 Reset Level 2 1 0 Reset Level 3 1 1 Not used

Reset Level 3: Erases all image data files stored inthe SAF memory and communciation files (e.g. pollingrx file). This setting is recommended for use when it isnecessary to clear the SAF.Reset Level 2: In addition to those items erased byReset Level 3, the following items are erased: owntelephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI, reportdata, programmed telephone numbers (Quick/Speed/Groups, service station, etc.), NCU parameters,personal codes.

After erasing, the machine will automaticly change thetwo bits 0 and 1 back to "0".

No reset: Normal operation

Cross referenceRAM Reset Level 1 (Factory reset):Change the data in RAM address 480000(H) to FF(H),then turn the machine off and on. In addition to thoseitems erased by Reset Level 2, the clock andscan/print registration settings are erased.

NoteAfter a RAM reset level 1 or 2, initial toner supply willautomatically be cycled for 90 seconds.

H515 4-24 SM

System Switch 00


2

Technical data printout onTCR (Journal)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal code, the following data arelisted on the TCR for each analog G3 communication.

e.g. V33 14 01 03 00 02First set of numbers: Final modem type usedSecond set of numbers: Final modem rate (forexample, 14 means 14.4 kbps)Third and fourth numbers: Line quality data. Either ameasure of the error rate or the rx level is printed,depending on the bit 3 setting below. (An M on thereport indicates that it is error rate, and an L indicatesRx level.) The left hand figure is the low byte and theright hand figure is the high byte (refer to the followingnote for how to read the rx level). If it is a measure ofthe error rate; a larger number means more errors.Fifth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total numberof error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.Sixth set of numbers (rx mode only): Total numberof burst error lines that occurred during non-ECMreception.The fifth and sixth numbers are fixed at 00 fortransmission records and ECM reception records.

How to calculate the rx level listed on the TCR (Journal)

Example: V29 96 L 01 A0 00 00

The four-digit hexadeimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by-16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB

3

Line quality data outputmethod0: Measure of error rate(during image datatransmission only)1: Rx level

This bit determines the data type to be printed on theTCR (Journal) when the technical data printout isenabled by bit 2 above.

4

Line error marks onreceived pages0: Disabled1: Enabled

If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the left edge ofthe page at any place where a line error occured in thedata. Such errors can be caused by a noisy line.

5

G3/G4 Communicationparameter display0: Disabled1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD will show the keyparameters (see the next 2 pages). This is normallydisabled because it will cancel the CSI display for theuser.Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6

Protocol dump list outputafter each communication0: Off 1: On

This is only used for communication troubleshooting. Itwill show the content of the transmitted facsimileprotocol signals. Always reset this bit to 0 afterfinishing testing.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-25 H515

System Switch 00


7

Amount of protocol dumpdata in one protocol dumplist printout operation0: Up to the limit of thememory area for protocoldumping1: Last communication only

Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocoldump list of the last communication only.

G3 Communication Parameters

Mode DCS: ITU-T standard NSS: Non-standard G3Modem rate 144: 14400 bps

120: 12000 bps96: 9600 bps72: 7200 bps48: 4800 bps24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)

Compressionmode

MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compression

Communicationmode

ECM: With ECMSSC: Using SSCEFC: Using EFCNML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC

Width andreduction

A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line25: 2.5 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line10: 10 ms/line20: 20 ms/line40: 40 ms/line

H515 4-26 SM


Compressionmode

MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compression

Resolution 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)

Width andreduction

A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)

Transfer T: Transfer- : Other

Confidential C: Confidential- : Other

Otherparameters

The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is the first bitfrom the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.Bit 1 - Smoothing 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled (Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)Bit 2 - CIL printing 0: Enabled, 1: DisabledBit 3 - 1: Not usedBit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5 - Engine type 0: mm, 1: inchBit 6 - Resolution unit 0: mm, 1: inch

System Switch 01


0

PM call0: Disabled1: Enabled

This bit switch will determine whether the machine willsend an Auto Service Call to the service station whenit is time for PM.Cross referenceAuto service calls: Section 2.3.2

1-7 Not used Do not change the settings.

System Switch 02


0

Memory file transfer0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: All messages in the memory (including confidentialrx messages) are sent to the fax number which isprogrammed as the service station.Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.Cross referenceService station number programming: Function 13

1

Programmed data transfer(Back-to-back)0: Disabled1: Enabled

Do the following steps to transfer the data.1. Connect two machines of the same type back toback and enable back-to-back communication on bothmachines. (For this machine, set bit 7 of G3 bit switch00 to 1.)2. Set this switch (System Switch 02, bit 1) to 1 on thereceiving machine.3. Insert a sheet of paper in the ADF, and press Starton both machines. The data is transferred.4. Disable back-to-back communication and return thisbit to 0 after finishing.

2 Not used Do not change the setting.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-27 H515

System Switch 02


3Memory file printout0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: All SAF files, including confidential messages, canbe printed using Function 54 or 55.Always reset this bit after printing the messages.


5

Software download area0: All except the boot block1: All areas, including theboot block

Keep this bit at 0 except forthe rare cases when theFlash ROM boot block hasto be rewritten.

0: This is the normal setting. For normal softwaredownloads, do not change this bit switch. 1: Set this bit to 1 only when you need to rewrite theboot block in the Flash ROM using Function 12.Cross referenceSoftware Download: Section 4.1.20

6

7

Memory read/write by RDSBit 7 6 Setting 0 0 Always disabled 0 1 User selectable 1 0 User selectable 1 1 Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allowRDS operations to take place. RDS will automaticallybe locked out again after a certain time, which isstored in System Switch 03 (see below). Note that ifan RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switch offuntil this time limit has expired.(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access themachine.

System Switch 03


0

to

7

Length of time that RDS istemporarily switched onwhen bits 6 and 7 ofSystem Switch 02 are set to"User selectable"

00 - 99 hours (BCD).

This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch02 are set to "User selectable".The default setting is 24 hours.

System Switch 04


0

1

2

LCD contrastBit 2 1 0 Contrast 0 0 0 Brightest 0 0 1 ↓ ↓ ↓ 1 1 0 ↓ 1 1 1 Darkest

Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast of theLCD on the operation panel.

3Dedicated transmissionparameter programming0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit must be set to 1 before changing anydedicated transmission parameters.

4

Inclusion of the Start key inKeystroke Programs0: Not needed1: Needed

0: The user does not need to press the Start key whenoperating a keystroke program.

H515 4-28 SM

System Switch 04


5

Master drum replacementlevel0: User1: Service

0: The machine will ask the user to replace the drumat 30,000 print intervals (default interval).After the user replaces the drum, the machine will askthe user if the drum has been replaced. If the useranswers yes, the machine will reset the OPC counterto zero. The drum replacement interval is programmedat addresses 480228 to 48022A(H). Refer to section4.5 for more details.1: The machine will not ask the user to replace thedrum.

6

G3 CSI/G4 Terminal IDprogramming level0: User level1: Service level

1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be programmedusing a service function.The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a Group 4option is installed.

7

Telephone line typeprogramming mode0: User level1: Service level

1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulsedial) can only be programmed using a service function.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-29 H515

System Switch 05



1G4 Terminal ID length limit0: No limit1: Limited

1: The length of the terminal ID is limited to 7characters.

2Display of both RTI and CSIon the LCD0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of theprotocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayed afterphase C.


4Hard disk option0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard diskoption.

5 Not used Do not change the settings.

6

7

System Switch 06


0

Use of the Stop key duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Memory transmissions can be stopped by pressingthe Stop key. However, users might accidentallycancel another person’s memory transmission inprogress.


7On-screen function list0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the most frequently usedfunction numbers will be displayed for quick referencewhenever the user presses the Function key.

System Switch 07


0

to

7

Date of monthly Fax OnDemand report printout

00 - 31 (BCD).[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)][01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).

System Switch 08


0

to

7

Time of monthly Fax OnDemand report printout

00 - 23 hours (BCD).00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)01 (BCD) - 1 am ↓23 (BCD) - 11 pmThis setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter 04is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printout enabled).

H515 4-30 SM

System Switch 09


0

Addition of part of theimage data fromconfidential transmissionson the transmission resultreport0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first pageof confidential messages will be printed ontransmission result reports.

1

Inclusion ofcommunications on theTCR when no image datawas exchanged.0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications which reached phase C (messagetx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR(Journal).1: Communications which reached phase A (callsetup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the TCR (Journal).This will include telephone calls.

2Automatic error reportprintout0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed.1: Error reports will be printed automatically after eachfailed communication.

3Printing of the error code onthe error report0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

4Listing of Confidential IDson the Personal Code List0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Confidential IDs registered with Personal Codes bythe users will appear on the Personal Code List.

5

Power failure report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: A power failure report will be automatically printedafter the power is switched on if a fax messagedisappeared from the memory when the power wasturned last off.


7

Priority given to varioustypes of remote terminal IDwhen printing reports 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >Tel. number 1: Dial label > Tel. number> RTI > CSI

This bit will determine which set of priorities themachine will use when listing remote terminal nameson reports.

Dial Label: The name stored with the Quick/SpeedDial number by the user.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-31 H515

System Switch 0A


0 Not used. Keep this bit at 0.

1

Default communicationmode0: G31: G4

These bits determine the machine’s standby defaultcommunication mode if a G4 option has been installed.


3Continuous polling reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This feature will allow a series of stations to be polledin a continuous cycle.

4

Dialing on the ten-key padwhen the externaltelephone is off-hook0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while theexternal telephone is off-hook. Use this setting whenthe external telephone is not by the machine or awireless telephone is connected as an externaltelephone. 1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key padwhen the handset is off-hook.

5On hook dial0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.

6Line used for G3transmission0: PSTN 1: ISDN

If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bit will determinewhether G3 transmissions go out over the PSTN orthe ISDN.

7

Line used when themachine falls back to G3from G4 if the other end isnot a G4 machine0: PSTN 1: ISDN

This bit switch has no effect if Communication Switch07 bit 0 is set to 0.

System Switch 0B


0

1

Automatic reset timerBit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting 0 0 1 minute 0 1 3 minutes 1 0 5 minutes 1 1 No limit

(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.(Other): The machine will return to the standby modewhen the timer expires after the last operation.

2 3

Energy Saver mode timer Bit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit 0 0 1 minute 0 1 3 minutes 1 0 5 minutes 1 1 No limit

(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.(Other): The machine will go into an Energy Savermode when the timer expires after the last operation.Cross referenceEnergy Saver modes: Section 2.3.1

4to7

Not used Do not change the settings.

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the settings.)

System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the settings.)

Rev. 5/96

H515 4-32 SM

System Switch 0F


0to7

Country code for functional settings(Hex)

00: France 10: Not used01: Germany 11: USA02: UK 12: Asia03: Italy 13: Japan04: Austria 14: Hong Kong05: Belgium 15: South Africa06: Denmark 16: Australia07: Finland 17: New Zealand08: Ireland 18: Singapore09: Norway 19: Malaysia0A: Sweden 1A: China0B: Switz. 1B: Taiwan0C: Portugal 20: Turkey0D: Holland 21: Greece0E: Spain0F: Israel

The country code will determine the factorysettings of bit switches and RAMaddresses. However, it has no effect on theNCU parameter settings andcommunication parameter RAM addresses.

Cross referenceNCU country code: Function 08, parameterC.C.

System Switch 10


0to7

Threshold memory level forparallel memorytransmission

Threshold mount = N * 64 kbytes + 256 kbytesN can be between 00 - FF(H)Default setting: 04(H) = 512 kbytes

System Switch 11


0

TTI printing position0: Superimposed on thepage data1: Printed before the dataleading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints informationthat the customer considers to be important (G3transmissions).

1

CIL printing position0: Printed before the dataleading edge1: Superimposed on thepage data

Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprints informationthat the customer considers to be important (G4transmissions).

2Label Insertion position0: Left end 1: Right end

Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprintsinformation that the customer considers to beimportant.

3to6


7

Use of parallel memorytransmission with G4transmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

This bit will determine whether parallel transmissioncan be used with a G4 transmission.Refer to section 2.3.3 for details.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-33 H515

System Switch 12


0to7

TTI/CIL printing position inthe main scan direction

CIL: Command InformationLine (Group 4)

08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.This setting will determine the print start position forthe TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. If theTTI is moved too far to the right, it may interfere withthe file number which is on the top right of the page.On an A4 page, if the CIL is moved over by more than60 mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13


0

1

Remaining memorythreshold for activating thehard disk filing systemBit 1 Bit 0 Threshold 0 0 25% 0 1 50% (default) 1 0 75% 1 1 Not used

If the remaining hard disk space is below the thresholdvalue, the hard disk filing system cannot be used.Adjust the threshold value to meet the customer’srequirements.

2

Document retransmissionfrom the hard disk filingsystem0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Enables retransmission of filed documents from thehard disk.

3to7

Not used Do not change the settings

System Switch 14


0to7

Wait time between pages inprinter mode (with theoptional printer interfaceunit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting will determinethe machine’s wait time between pages in printermode.A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait untilthe end of printer interface output before printing anyincoming fax message.A shorter setting allows the fax machine to printincoming fax messages while printing from acomputer. If the controller takes more than thespecfied time to process a page of data from the hostcomputer, the fax machine will release the printerresources for fax output. Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s

System Switch 15 - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515 4-34 SM

System Switch 16


0

Function Upgrade Card orFax On Demand Card0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 after installing a Function UpgradeCard or a Fax On Demand Card in the machine’slower IC card slot.0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax OnDemand Card is installed in the machine’s lower ICcard slot before power-off, all the data in these cardswill be initialized if the machine does not detect thecard at the next power-on.1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax OnDemand Card is installed in the machine’s lower ICcard slot before power-off, the machine will not startup unless the machine detects the IC card or the datacopy tool at the next power-on. This will prevent thedata inside the card from being initialized whilereplacing PCBs or downloading software.

1to7

Not used. Do not change the setting.




System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-35 H515

4.2.2. Scanner Switches

Scanner Switch 00


0MTF0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1Text/photo separation inhalftone mode0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftonequality.

2 3

Maximum transmittabledocument length Bit 3 2 Setting 0 0 600 mm 0 1 1200 mm 1 0 14 m 1 1 Not used

If the user wants to send very long documents such aswell logs, select 14 m.

4

OR processing forimmediate tx and copying(Standard resolution)0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The machine will scan the document in 3.85line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.1: The machine will scan the document in 7.7 line/mmsteps. Each pair of lines is OR processed beforetransmission or making copies. Toner may be used upearlier if OR processing is enabled.

5

OR processing forimmediate tx and copying(Detail resolution)0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The machine scans the document in 7.7 line/mmsteps, then transmits or makes copies.1: The machine scans the document in 15.4 line/mmsteps. Each pair of lines is OR processed beforetransmission or making copies. Toner may be depletedquicker if OR processing is enabled.

6to7


Scanner Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 02


0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Normalsetting

The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0E(H)

Scanner Switch 03


0 to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Lightensetting

The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 10(H)

Scanner Switch 04


0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Darkensetting

The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0C(H)

H515 4-36 SM

Scanner Switch 05


0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Normalsetting


Scanner Switch 06


0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Lightensetting

The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0D(H)

Scanner Switch 07


0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Darkensetting


Scanner Switch 08


0to7

Contrast threshold for textareas when halftone isenabled

The value can be between 00 to 0F. This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1 is at0.Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-37 H515

4.2.3. Printer Switches

Printer Switch 00


0

Page separation mark0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: No marks are printed.1: If a received page has to be printed on two sheets,an "x" inside a small box is printed at the bottom righthand corner of the first sheet, and a "2" inside a smallbox is printed at the top right hand corner of thesecond sheet. This will help the user to identify pagesthat have been split up.

1

Repetition of data when thereceived page is longerthan the printer paper0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where the previouspage left off.1: The final few mm of the data on of the previouspage are printed at the top of the next page.See section 2.2.12 for details.


3

Cleaning mode after bypassfeed0: Disabled1: After each page is fedfrom the bypass feed slot

0: Cleaning mode function is not performed if thebypass feed is used.1: Cleaning mode function is performed every timeafter a sheet of paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.

4to6


7

mm-inch conversion whenprinting0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Printing is always done in inch format.1: If the other end has scanned the document in mmformat, the machine will convert the data to inchformat before printing.Refer to section 2.2.13 for details.

Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)


Printer Switch 03


0

Length reduction ofreceived data0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without lengthreduction. Cross referencePage separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4 to 7.1: Incoming pages are reduced in the length directionwhen printing.Cross referenceReduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05Page separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12


2

3

H515 4-38 SM

Printer Switch 03


4

to 7

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)

If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portion willnot be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copy paper,the excess portion will be printed on the next page.The value of x is determined by these four bits.

Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm) 0 0 1 1and so on until F 15

Cross referencePage separation and data reduction: section 2-2-12Length reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

Printer Switches 04 and 05


0

to 7

Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch 03-0above)

If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction before printing.These switches determine the maximum reduction ratio for each paper size.

Cross referencePage separation and data reduction: section 2.2.12.

Switch 04/05 US Europe AsiaBit 0 Not used A5 sideways A5 sidewaysBit 1 Not used Not used Not usedBit 2 LT lengthwise Not used Not usedBit 3 Not used A4 lengthwise A4 lengthwiseBit 4 Not used Not used F/F4 lengthwiseBit 5 LG lengthwise Not used Not usedBit 6 Not used Not used Not usedBit 7 Not used Not used Not used

The available paper sizes depend on the machine’s country version.

Sw.04Sw.05

:

00

= 4⁄3,

10

= 4⁄3,

01

= 8⁄7,

11

= 12⁄11

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-39 H515





Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515 4-40 SM

4.2.4. Communication Switches

Communication Switch 00


0

1

Compression modesavailable in receive modeBit 1 0 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 Not used

These bits determine the compression capabilities tobe declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30protocol.

2

3

Compression modesavailable in transmit modeBit 3 2 Modes 0 0 MH only 0 1 MH/MR 1 0 MH/MR/MMR 1 1 Not used

These bits determine the compression capabilities tobe used in the transmission and to be declared inphase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.Cross referenceEFC compression during transmission:Communication Switch 01, bit 1.

4to6


7

Closed network (reception)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of theother terminal does not match the ID code of thisterminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSSmode.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-41 H515



0ECM0: Off 1: On

If this bit is 0, ECM is switched off for allcommunications.

1EFC during transmission0: Off 1: On

If this bit is 0, EFC is switched off during transmission.

2 3

Wrong connectionprevention methodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 8 digit CSI 1 0 4 digit CSI 1 1 CSI/RTI

(0,1) - The machine will not transmit if the last 8 digitsof the received CSI do not match the last 8 digits ofthe dialed telephone number. This does not work formanual dialing.(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last 4digits are compared.(1,1) - The machine will not transmit if the other enddoes not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will always goahead.

4

Operator call if no responseis received in reply toNSF/DIS0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 if the user expects to receive phonecalls at the same number which the machine isconnected to.


6 7

Maximum printable pagelength availableBit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 No limit 0 1 B4 and A4 1 0 A4 1 1 Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informed to thetransmitting terminal in the pre-message protocolexchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

H515 4-42 SM



0

Burst error threshold0: Low 1: High

If there are more consecutive error lines in thereceived page than the threshold, the machine willsend a negative response.The Low and High threshold values depend on thesub-scan resolution, and are as follows.Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpiLow settings 3 6High settings 6 12

1Acceptable total error lineratio0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio of a page exceeds the acceptableratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

2

Treatment of pagesreceived with errors duringG3 reception0: Deleted from memorywithout printing1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

3

Hang-up decision when anegative code (RTN or PIN)is received during G3immediate transmission0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN isreceived.1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if itreceives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECMis being used.

4to7




0to7

Maximum number of pageretransmissions in a G3memory transmission

00 - FF (Hex) times.This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)S

ER

VIC

ETA

BLE

S &

PR

OC

ED

UR

ES

SM 4-43 H515



0Dialing requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

These switches are automatically set to the settingsrequired by each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.

1Dialing requirements:Austria0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2Dialing requirements:Norway0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3Dialing requirements:Denmark0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4Dialing requirements:France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5Dialing requirements:Switzerland0: Disabled 1: Enabled


7



0

Fallback from G4 to G3 ifthe other terminal is not aG4 terminal0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Also see System Switch 0A bit 7.Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual (G4Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B, and 1C) for the CPScode set (Cause Value set) to determine G4 to G3fallback.


2

Use of date and timeprovided from the networkfor the CIL (ISDN Only)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The date and time programmed in the receivingterminal is used in the CIL.1: The date and time informed in the document layerfrom the remote terminal (through the network) is usedin the CIL (Command information line).

3to7


Communication Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings.)


Communication Switch 0A


0

Point of resumption ofmemory transmission uponredialing0: From the error page1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page wheretransmission failed the previous time.1: Transmission begins from the first page.

H515 4-44 SM

Communication Switch 0A


1to6


7Emergency calls using 9990: Enabled 1: Disabled

If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you to dial999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTT requirement in theUK and some other countries.

Communication Switch 0B


0

Use of EconomyTransmission during aTransfer operation to EndReceivers0: Disabled 1: Enabled

These bits determine whether the machine will use theEconomy Transmission feature when it is carrying outa Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.

1

Use of EconomyTransmission during aTransfer operation to theNext Transfer Stations0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2

Use of Label Insertion forthe End Receivers in aTransfer operation0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit will determine whether the machine will usethe Label Insertion feature when it is carrying out aTransfer operation as a Transfer Station.

3

Conditions required forTransfer Result Reporttransmission0: Always transmitted1: Only transmitted if therewas an error

0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine willalways send a Transfer Result Report back to theRequesting Station after completing the TransferRequest, even if there were no problems.1: The machine will only send back a Transfer ResultReport if there were errors during communicationindicating that one or more of the End Receivers couldnot be contacted.

4

Printout of the messagewhen acting as a TransferStation0: Disabled 1: Enabled

When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, thisbit will determine whether the machine prints the faxmessage coming in from the Requesting Terminal.

5

Action when there is no faxnumber in the programmedQuick/Speed dials whichmeets the requestingterminal’s own fax number.0: Transfer is Disabled 1: Transfer is Enabled

After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine will compare the last N digits of therequesting terminal’s own fax number with all theQuick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (N isthe number programmed in communication switch 0C.)0: If there is no matching number programmed in themachine, the machine will reject the transfer request.1: Even if there is no matching number programmed inthe machine, the machine will accept the transferrequest. The result report will be printed at the transferterminal, but will not be sent back to the requestingterminal.Refer to section 2.3.4 for more details.


7

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-45 H515

Communication Switch 0C


0to4

Number of digits comparedto find the requester’s faxnumber from theprogrammed Quick/SpeedDials when acting as aTransfer Station

00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine will compare the "own telephone number"sent from the Requesting Terminal with allQuick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of the SpeedDials. This number determines how many digits from the endof the telephone numbers the machine will compare.If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report to thefirst Quick/Speed Dial that the machine compared. IfQuick Dial 01 is programmed, the machine will sendthe report to Quick 01. If Quick Dial 01 through 04 arenot programmed and Quick Dial 05 is programmed,the machine will send the report to Quick 05.Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digitsRefer to section 2.3.4 for more details.

5to7


Communication Switch 0D


0to7

The amount of remainingmemory below whichringing detection (andtherefore reception intomemory) is disabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 kbytes(e.g., 0C(H) = 24 kbytes)One page is about 24 kbytes. If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detectringing signals and go into receive mode even if thereis no memory space left. This will result incommunication failure.

Communication Switch 0E


0to7

Minimum interval betweenautomatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 seconds(e.g., 06(H) = 12 seconds)This value is the minimum time that the machine willwait before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F


0to7

Minimum number of timesthat a destination will dialedwhen TRD is being used

01 - FF (Hex) times



0to7

Memory transmission:Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FF (Hex) times

H515 4-46 SM



0to7

Immediate transmission:Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FF (Hex) times



0to7

Memory transmission:Interval between dialingattempts to the samedestination

00 - FF (Hex) minutes



0to7

Immediate transmission:Interval between dialingattempts to the samedestination




0

Inch-to-mm conversionduring transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Transmitting is always done in inch format.1: If the other end only has mm-based resolution forprinting, the machine will convert the scanned data tomm-format before transmission.Refer to section 2.1.8 for details.

1to5


6

7

Available unit of resolutionin which fax messages arereceivedBit 7 Bit 6 Unit 0 0 mm 0 1 inch 1 0 mm and inch (default) 1 1 Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factorysettings.




0to7

Available resolution forreceiving fax messagesBit 0 1: 200 x 100/8 x 3.85Bit 1 1: 200 x 200/8 x 7.7Other bits: Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factorysettings.


SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-47 H515





Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515 4-48 SM

4.2.5. G3 Switches

G3 Switch 00


0

1

Monitor speaker duringcommunication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Up to Phase B 1 0 All the time 1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through thecommunication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in theT.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on allthrough the communication. Ensure that you resetthese bits after testing.

2Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.

3to6


7

Back to back test0: Disabled1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back to backtest. 115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5 andJP6 on the NCU before doing the test.

G3 Switch 01


0to3


4

DIS frame length0: 6 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The 5th and 6th bytes in the DIS frame will not betransmitted (set to 1 if there are communicationproblems with PC-based faxes which cannot receivethe extended DIS frames).


6

7

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-49 H515

G3 Switch 02


0

G3 protocol mode used0: Standard andnon-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can onlycommunicate with machines that send T.30-standardframes only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used innon-standard mode communication)

1to4


5

Use of modem rate historyfor transmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials willalway start at the highest modem rate.1: The machine will refer to the modem rate history forcommunications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6AI short protocol(transmission and reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manualfor details about AI Short Protocol.

7Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manualfor details about Short Preamble.

G3 Switch 03


0

DIS detection number (Echo countermeasure)0: 1 1: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the sameDIS frame twice.1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for thesecond DIS which can be caused by echo on the line.


2

3ECM frame size0: 256 bytes1: 64 bytes

1: ECM reception is disabled, which enlarges the SAFmemory.

4

CTC transmission conditions0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)

When using ECM, the machine will choose a slowermodem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode) orfour times (ITU-T mode). ITU-T: New acronym for the CCITT.

5

Modem rate used for thenext page after receiving anegative code (RTN or PIN)0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back beforesending the next page if a negative code is received.This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.


7

H515 4-50 SM

G3 Switch 04

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Training error detectionthreshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bitsIf the number of error bits in the received TCF is belowthis threshold, the machine will inform the sender thatthe training has succeeded.

4to7


G3 Switch 05

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Initial Tx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 kOther settings - Not used

These bits set the initial starting modemrate for transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parametersif you need to change this for specificreceivers.

4to 5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 kbps.Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 V.29 0 1 V.17 1 0 Not used 1 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6and 7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is setat these speeds.

6to7


SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-51 H515

G3 Switch 06

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Initial Rx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 1 2.4 k 0 0 1 0 4.8 k 0 0 1 1 7.2 k 0 1 0 0 9.6 k 0 1 0 1 12 k 0 1 1 0 14.4 kOther settings - Not used

The setting of these bits is used to informthe transmitting terminal of the availablemodem rate for the machine in receivemode. Use a lower setting if high speedspose problems during reception.

The machine will automatically willdetermine whether to use TCM or not.

4to7

Modem types available for receptionBit 7 6 5 4 Setting 0 0 0 1 V.27ter 0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29 0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33 0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.33, V.17Other settings - Not used

The setting of these bits is used to informthe transmitting terminal of the availablemodem type for the machine in receivemode.

G3 Switch 07

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

PSTN cable equalizer(tx mode)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire between themodem and the telephone exchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more ofthe following symptoms occurs.

• Communication error

• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

2

3

PSTN cable equalizer(rx mode)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire between themodem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more ofthe following symptoms occurs.

• Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.


4to7


G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515 4-52 SM

G3 Switch 09

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

ISDN cable equalizer(tx mode)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire between themodem and the telephone exchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of thefollowing symptoms occurs.

• Communication error


2

3

ISDN cable equalizer(rx mode)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire between themodem and the telephone exchange. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of thefollowing symptoms occurs.

• Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.


4to7


G3 Switch 0A

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Maximum allowable carrierdrop during image datareceptionBit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms) 0 0 200 0 1 400 1 0 800 1 1 Not used

These bits will set the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.


3

4

Maximum allowable frameinterval during image datareception.0: 5 s 1: 13 s

This bit will set the maximum intervals between eachEOL signal (end-of-line) or intervals between eachECM frame from the other end.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.


6

Reconstruction time for thefirst line in receive mode0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by acomputer, there may be a delay in receiving page dataafter the local machine accepts set-up data and sendsCFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation. But, ifthis delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the sendingmachine more time to send data.Refer to error code 0-20.

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line shouldcome within 5 s of CFR.


SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-53 H515

G3 Switch 0B

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0Protocol requirements:Europe0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine will not automatically reset these bits foreach country after a country code (System Switch 0F)is programmed. Change the required bits manually at installation.

1Protocol requirements:Spain0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3Protocol requirements:France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled


7

G3 Switch 0C

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 1

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Normal (P=N) 0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N) 1 0 Sweden (N+1) 1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.

2to7


G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

H515 4-54 SM

4.3. NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and units of calculation of theparameters that the machine will use for ringing signal detection andautomatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Mostof these must be changed by RAM read/write (Function 06), but some canbe changed using NCU Parameter programming (Function 08); if Function08 can be used, this will be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM isprogrammed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

Address Function Unit Remarks

480400

Country code for NCU parameters

Use the Hex value to program thecountry code directly into this address,or use the decimal value to program itusing Function 08 (parameter 00). Country Decimal Hex France 00 00 Germany 01 01 UK 02 02 Italy 03 03 Austria 04 04 Belgium 05 05 Denmark 06 06 Finland 07 07 Ireland 08 08 Norway 09 09 Sweden 10 0A Switzerland 11 0B Portugal 12 0C Spain 14 0E Israel 15 0F USA 17 11 Asia 18 12 Hong Kong 20 14 South Africa 21 15 Australia 22 16 New Zealand 23 17 Singapore 24 18 Malaysia 25 19

480401 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current is not detectedif 480401 contains FF.480402 Line current wait time

480403 Line current drop detect time

480404PSTN dial tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)

Hz (BCD) If both addresses containFF(F), tone detection isdisabled.

480405PSTN dial tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480406PSTN dial tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


480407PSTN dial tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-55 H515

Address Function Unit Remarks480408 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 480408 contains FF, the

machine will pause for thepause time (address48040D / 48040E). See Note 2 (Italy). Refer topage 4-63.

480409 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)48040A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)

48040BPSTN dial tone continuous tonetime

48040CPSTN dial tone permissible droptime

48040D PSTN wait interval (LOW)48040E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)

48040FPSTN ringback tone detectiontime

20 ms Detection is disabled if thiscontains FF.

480410PSTN ringback tone off detectiontime

20 ms

480411PSTN detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (LOW)

20 ms

480412PSTN detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (HIGH)

20 ms

480413PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480414PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480415PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


480416PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

480417PABX dial tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480418PABX dial tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480419PABX dial tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


48041APABX dial tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

48041B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 48041B contains FF, themachine will pause for thepause time (480420 /480421).

48041C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)48041D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)

48041EPABX dial tone continuous tonetime

48041FPABX dial tone permissible droptime

480420 PABX wait interval (HIGH)480421 PABX wait interval (LOW)

480422PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled if this

contains FF.

480423PABX ringback tone off detectiontime

20 ms

480424PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (LOW)

20 ms

H515 4-56 SM


480425PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (HIGH)

20 ms

480426PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480427PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480428PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


480429PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

48042A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms48042B Busy tone OFF time: range 148042C Busy tone ON time: range 248042D Busy tone OFF time: range 248042E Busy tone ON time: range 348042F Busy tone OFF time: range 3480430 Busy tone ON time: range 4480431 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

480432Busy tone continuous tone detection time

480433

Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cyclesrequired for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON orOFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detectionBits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bits at 0.Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance (±) Bit 1 0 0 0 75% 0 1 50% 1 0 25% 1 1 12.5%

480434International dial tone frequencyupper limit (high byte)


480435International dial tone frequencyupper limit (low byte)

480436International dial tone frequencylower limit (high byte)


480437International dial tone frequencylower limit (low byte)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-57 H515


480438International dial tone detectiontime

20 ms If 480438 contains FF, themachine will pause for thepause time (48043D /48043E).

See Note 2 (Belgium).Refer to page 4-63.

480439International dial tone reset time(LOW)

48043AInternational dial tone reset time(HIGH)

48043BInternational dial tone continuoustone time

48043CInternational dial tone permissibledrop time

48043DInternational dial wait interval(HIGH)

48043EInternational dial wait interval(LOW)

48043FCountry dial tone upper frequencylimit (HIGH)


480440Country dial tone upper frequencylimit (LOW)

480441Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (HIGH)

If both addresses containFF(F), tone detection isdisabled.

480442Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (LOW)

480443 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 480443 contains FF, themachine will pause for thepause time (480448 /480449).

480444Country dial tone reset time(LOW)

480445Country dial tone reset time(HIGH)

480446Country dial tone continuous tonetime

480447Country dial tone permissibledrop time

480448 Country dial wait interval (LOW)480449 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

48044ATime between opening or closingthe DO relay and opening theOHDI relay

1 ms See Notes 3 and 6. Referto page 4-63. Function 08(parameter 11).

48044BBreak time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3. Refer to page

4-63. Function 08(parameter 12).

48044CMake time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3. Refer to page

4-63. Function 08(parameter 13).

48044DTime between final OHDI relayclosure and DO relay opening orclosing

1 ms See Notes 6. Refer to page4-63. Function 08(parameter 14).

48044EMinimum pause between dialeddigits (pulse dial mode)

20 ms See Note 3. Refer to page4-63. Function 08(parameter 15).

48044FTime waited when a pause isentered at the operation panel

Function 08 (parameter 16).

480450 DTMF tone on time 1 ms Function 08 (parameter 17).480451 DTMF tone off time Function 08 (parameter 18).

H515 4-58 SM


480452Tone attenuation level of DTMFsignals while dialing

-dBm x0.5

Function 08 (parameter19). See Note 5. Refer topage 4-63.

480453

Tone attenuation value differencebetween high frequency tone andlow frequency tone in DTMFsignals

-Nx0.5(dB)

Function 08 (parameter20). See Note 5. Refer topage 4-63.

480454PSTN: DTMF tone attenuationlevel after dialing

-dBm x0.5

Function 08 (parameter21). See Note 5. Refer tosection 4-63.

480455ISDN: DTMF tone attenuationlevel after dialing

-dBm x0.5

See Note 5. Refer tosection 4-63.

480456 Not used Do not change the setting.480457 Not used Do not change the setting.480458 Not used Do not change the setting.

480459Grounding time (ground startmode)

20 ms The Gs relay is closed forthis interval.

48045ABreak time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open for

this interval.

48045BInternational dial access code(High)

BCD For a code of 100: 48045B - F1 48045C - 00

48045CInternational dial access code(Low)

48045D

PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for eachpause input after the PSTNaccess code. Up to 7pauses can be inputed. Ifthis address containsFF[H], the pause timestored in address 48044F isused.

48045E

Bits 7 to 5 - Progress tone detection level Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm 0 0 0 -25.0 0 0 1 -35.0 0 1 0 -30.0 1 0 0 -40.0 1 1 0 -49.0Bits 4 and 3 - Not usedBit 2 - International dial tone detection method 0: Detect by time parameters 1: Detect by cadence parameters (Belgium - See Note 3) Refer to page4-63.Bit 1 - Not usedBit 0 - PSTN dial tone detection method 0: Detect by time parameters 1: Detect by cadence parameters (Italy - See Note 3) Refer to page 4-63.

48045F

Bit 7 and 6 - Not usedBit 5 1: Polarity detection enabled for rx (detection time = 500 ms)Bit 4 1: Polarity detection enabled for tx (detection time = 500 ms)Bits 3 to 0 - Not used

480460 Not used Do not change the setting.480461 Not used Do not change the setting.480462 Not used Do not change the setting.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-59 H515

Address Function Unit Remarks480463 Not used Do not change the setting.480464 Not used Do not change the setting.480465 Intercity dial prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

480465 - FF 480466 - F0480466

Intercity dial prefix (LOW) BCD

480467to

480471


480472Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 1, upper limit

1000/ N(Hz).


480473Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 1, lower limit


480474Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 2, upper limit


480475Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 2, lower limit


480476Number of rings until a call isdetected

1 Function 08 (parameter 06).

480477Minimum required length of thefirst ring

20 ms See Note 4. Refer to page4-63. Function 09(parameter 07).

480478Minimum required length of thesecond and subsequent rings

20 ms Function 08 (parameter 08).

480479Ringing signal detection resettime (LOW)


48047ARinging signal detection resettime (HIGH)


48047Bto

480480


480481

Interval between dialing the lastdigit and switching the Oh relayover to the external telephonewhen dialing from the operationpanel in handset mode.

20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

480482

Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection timeBit 1 0 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection timeBit 3 2 Setting 0 0 200 ms 0 1 800 ms Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

480483

Bits 7 to 5 - Not usedBit 4 - DTMF detection 0: Disabled 1: EnabledBits 3 to 0 - Not used

Do not change the setting.If bit 4 is set to 0, Fax OnDemand and Transferoperation using DTMF aredisabled.

H515 4-60 SM


480484

Bits 7 to 5 - DTMF On detection time Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting 0 0 0 30 ms 0 0 1 40 ms 0 1 0 80 ms 0 1 1 140 msBits 4 to 2 - DTMF Off detection time Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 0 30 ms 0 0 1 40 ms 0 1 0 80 ms 0 1 1 140 msBits 1 and 0 - Not used.

480485to

4804A0


4804A1Acceptable CED detectionfrequency upper limit (high byte)

BCD (Hz) If both addresses containFF(F), tone detection isdisabled.

4804A2Acceptable CED detectionfrequency upper limit (low byte)

4804A3Acceptable CED detectionfrequency lower limit (high byte)


4804A4Acceptable CED detectionfrequency lower limit (low byte)

4804A5CED detection time 20 ms

± 20 msFactory setting: 200 ms

4804A6Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency upper limit (high byte)


4804A7Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency upper limit (low byte)

4804A8Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency lower limit (high byte)


4804A9Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency lower limit (low byte)

4804AACNG detection time 20 ms

± 20 msFactory setting: 200 ms

4804AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms4804AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms

4804AD

CNG On/Off time tolerance, and number of cycles required for detection (asetting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must bedetected twice).Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detectionBits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bit at 0.Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance (±) Bit 1 0 ON time tolerance OFF time tolerance 0 0 150% 75% 0 1 100% 50% 1 0 50% 25% 1 1 25% 12.5%

4804AE Not used Do not change the setting.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-61 H515


4804AFAcceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequencyupper limit (high byte)


4804B0Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequencyupper limit (low byte)


4804B1Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequencylower limit (high byte)

Hz(BCD) If both addresses containFF(F), tone detection isdisabled.

4804B2Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequencylower limit (low byte)


4804B3Detection time for 800 Hz AI shortprotocol tone


4804B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem - dBm Function 08 (parameter 01).

4804B5PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B5 (dB)

4804B6PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804B4 - 0.5N 4804B6 (dB)

4804B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm

4804B8PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B8 (dB)

4804B9PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804B7 - 0.5N 4804B9 (dB)

4804BAISDN: Tx level from the modem - dBm The setting must be

between -12dBm and-15dBm.

4804BBISDN: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BB (dB)

4804BCISDN: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 4804BA - 0.5N 4804BC (dB)

4804BD

Modem turn-on level (incomingsignal detection level)

-37-0.5N(dBm)

N must be between 0(00(H)) to 31 (1F(H)).Modem turn-off level isautomatically set at -3dBmfrom the turn-on level.

4804BEto

4804D9


4804DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s

H515 4-62 SM

Notes 1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 48045E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.Bit 2 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)Bit 1 Not usedBit 0 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addressesare changed.480408 (if bit 0 = 1) or 480438 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as inaddress 480433.48040B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20ms)48040C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48043C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48044A to 48044F) are the values for10 pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine will automatically compensate.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after thetime specified by this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:High frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480452/480454 dBmLow frequency tone: - 0.5 x (N480452/480454 + N480453) dBmNote: N480452, for example, means the value stored in address480452(H)

6. 48044A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France -Between Ds closing and Di opening48044D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - BetweenDs opening and Di closing

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-63 H515

Default Settings

The factory settings are quoted either in hexadecimal code (the actualcontents of the RAM address) if there is a H after the value in the table, or indecimal (converted from the actual hex contents of the RAM address) ifthere is no H after the value.

Some RAMs must be stored using BCD; see the NCU Parameter definitiontable for details.

Note that the default settings may change after each country’s PTT tests.

Address 480401 480402 480403 480404 480405France FFH FFH FFH 04H 80HGermany FFH FFH FFH 04H 98HUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly FFH FFH FFH 04H 71HAustria FFH FFH FFH 05H 30HBelgium FFH FFH FFH 05H 20HDenmark FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HFinland FFH FFH FFH 05H 36HIreland FFH FFH FFH 04H 50HNorway FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HSweden FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HSwitzerland FFH FFH FFH 06H 08HPortugal FFH FFH FFH 04H 60HHolland FFH FFH FFH 05H 63HSpain FFH FFH FFH 04H 90HIsrael FFH FFH FFH 04H 98HUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH FFH 04H 50HNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

H515 4-64 SM

Address 480406 480407 480408 480409 48040AFrance 04H 00H 75 F4H 01HGermany 03H 70H 105 E8H 03HUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly 03H 91H 21H 21H 02HAustria 03H 70H 40 F4H 01HBelgium 03H 00H 30 150 00HDenmark 03H 40H 65 F4H 01HFinland 03H 15H 205 F4H 01HIreland 02H 00H 105 F4H 1Norway 03H 40H 55 E8H 03HSweden 03H 40H 40 00H 01HSwitzerland 03H 38H 40 21H 02HPortugal 02H 90H 105 F4H 01HHolland 00H 76H 55 EEH 02HSpain 03H 10H 75 80H 02HIsrael 03H 40H 105 E8H 03HUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia 01H 30H 150 2CH 01HNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 48040B 48040C 48040D 48040E 48040FFrance 50 2 0 0 FFHGermany 105 4 200 00H FFHUK FFH FFH 200 00H FFHItaly 30 50 200 00H FFHAustria 40 4 200 00H FFHBelgium 30 4 200 00H FFHDenmark 65 4 200 0 FFHFinland 205 4 200 0 FFHIreland 105 4 200 0 FFHNorway 55 4 200 0 FFHSweden 40 3 200 0 FFHSwitzerland 40 2 200 0 5Portugal 105 4 200 0 FFHHolland 55 4 200 0 FFHSpain 36 5 150 0 FFHIsrael 105 4 200 0 FFHUSA FFH FFH 100 0 FFHAsia FFH FFH 100 0 FFHHong Kong FFH FFH 100 0 FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH 100 0 FFHAustralia 100 8 150 0 FFHNew Zealand FFH FFH 100 0 FFHSingapore FFH FFH 100 0 FFHMalaysia FFH FFH 100 0 FFH

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-65 H515

Address 480410 480411 480412 480413 480414France FFH FFH FFH 04H 98HGermany FFH FFH FFH 05H 10HUK FFH FFH FFH 04H 30HItaly FFH FFH FFH 05H 29HAustria FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HBelgium FFH FFH FFH 04H 71HDenmark FFH FFH FFH 04H 60HFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland FFH FFH FFH 04H 30HNorway FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HSweden FFH FFH FFH 05H 12HSwitzerland 50 F4H 01H 06H 08HPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland FFH FFH FFH 05H 63HSpain FFH FFH FFH 04H 60HIsrael FFH FFH FFH 04H 98HUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH FFH 04H 50HNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 480415 480416 480417 480418 480419France 03H 96H 09H 00H 03HGermany 03H 50H FFH FFH FFHUK 03H 60H FFH FFH FFHItaly 03H 29H 05H 12H 03HAustria 03H 80H FFH FFH FFHBelgium 04H 05H 05H 20H 03HDenmark 03H 90H 05H 12H 03HFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland 03H 70H FFH FFH FFHNorway 03H 40H FFH FFH FFHSweden 03H 40H 05H 12H 3Switzerland 03H 38H 06H 08H 03HPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland 03H 20H 05H 63H 00HSpain 03H 80H FFH FFH FFHIsrael 03H 70H 05H 63H 03HUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia 03H 90H 04H 50H 03HNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

H515 4-66 SM

Address 48041A 48041B 48041C 48041D 48041EFrance 00H 100 58H 02H 50Germany FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly 91H 100 F9H 01H 9Austria FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHBelgium 00 30 150 0 30Denmark 40H 65 F4H 01H 65Finland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNorway FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden 40H 40 00 01H 40Switzerland 38H 40 EFH 01H 40Portugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland 76H 55 EEH 02H 55Spain FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIsrael 70H 105 E8H 03H 105USA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia 90H 150 2CH 01H 100New Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 48041F 480420 480421 480422 480423France 02H 00H 00H FFH FFHGermany FFH 200 00H FFH FFHUK FFH 200 00H FFH FFHItaly 4 200 00H FFH FFHAustria FFH 200 00H FFH FFHBelgium 4 200 00H FFH FFHDenmark 4 200 00H FFH FFHFinland FFH 200 00H FFH FFHIreland FFH 200 00H FFH FFHNorway FFH 200 00H FFH FFHSweden 3 200 00H FFH FFHSwitzerland 4 200 00H FFH FFHPortugal FFH 200 00H FFH FFHHolland 4 200 00H FFH FFHSpain FFH 150 00H FFH FFHIsrael 4 200 00H FFH FFHUSA FFH 200 00H FFH FFHAsia FFH 200 00H FFH FFHHong Kong FFH 200 00H FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH 200 00H FFH FFHAustralia 1 150 00H FFH FFHNew Zealand FFH 200 00H FFH FFHSingapore FFH 200 00H FFH FFHMalaysia FFH 200 00H FFH FFH

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-67 H515

Address 480424 480425 480426 480427 480428France FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHGermany FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly FFH FFH 06H 00 01HAustria FFH FFH 05H 12H 03HBelgium FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHDenmark FFH FFH 04H 60H 03HFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNorway FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSwitzerland FFH FFH 06H 08H 03HPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSpain FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIsrael FFH FFH 05H 63H 03HUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH 04H 50H 03HNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 480429 48042A 48042B 48042C 48042DFrance FFH 25 25 FFH FFHGermany FFH 12 12 24 24UK FFH 19 19 20 17Italy 00H 15 15 FFH FFHAustria 80H 10 10 15 15Belgium FFH 25 25 8 8Denmark 90H 12 12 8 23Finland FFH FFH FFH FFH 37Ireland FFH 25 25 27 37Norway FFH 10 0 25 0Sweden FFH 12 12 12 37Switzerland 38H 24 30 15 22Portugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland FFH 12 12 25 25Spain FFH 8 8 FFH FFHIsrael 70H 12 12 24 24USA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia 90H 12 12 25 25New Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

H515 4-68 SM

Address 48042E 48042F 480430 480431 480432France FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHGermany 7 24 FFH FFH FFHUK 11 26 FFH FFH 100Italy FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustria 20 20 FFH FFH FFHBelgium FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHDenmark FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland 18 18 FFH FFH 35Norway FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSwitzerland 11 11 8 30 FFHPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSpain FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIsrael FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 480433 480434 480435 480436 480437France 42H 04H 74H 04H 06HGermany 31H FFH FFH FFH FFHUK 42H FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly 40H FFH FFH FFH FFHAustria 41H FFH FFH FFH FFHBelgium 43H 11H 60H 11H 10HDenmark 42H FFH FFH FFH FFHFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland 43H FFH FFH FFH FFHNorway 40H FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden 43H FFH FFH FFH FFHSwitzerland 51H FFH FFH FFH FFHPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland 41H 05H 63H 00H 76HSpain 41H 06H 20H 05H 80HIsrael 41H FFH FFH FFH FFHUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia 41H FFH FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-69 H515

Address 480438 480439 48043A 48043B 48043CFrance 75 58H 2 75 2Germany FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustria FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHBelgium 41H E8H 03H 17 33Denmark FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNorway FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSwitzerland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland 55 EEH 02H 55 4Spain 75 80H 02H 36 5Israel FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 48043D 48043E 48043F 480440 480441France 0 0 FFH FFH FFHGermany 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHUK 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHItaly 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHAustria 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHBelgium 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHDenmark 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHFinland 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHIreland 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHNorway 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSweden 00H 00H 05H 12H 03HSwitzerland 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHPortugal 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHHolland 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSpain 150 0 FFH FFH FFHIsrael 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHUSA 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHAsia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHHong Kong 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHAustralia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSingapore 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHMalaysia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFH

H515 4-70 SM

Address 480442 480443 480444 480445 480446France FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHGermany FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUK FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHItaly FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustria FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHBelgium FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHDenmark FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHFinland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIreland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNorway FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSweden 40H 40 00H 01H 40Switzerland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHPortugal FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHolland FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSpain FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHIsrael FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHUSA FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAsia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHHong Kong FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHAustralia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHSingapore FFH FFH FFH FFH FFHMalaysia FFH FFH FFH FFH FFH

Address 480447 480448 480449 48044A 48044BFrance FFH 0 0 67 65Germany FFH 00H 00H 50 60UK FFH 00H 00H 252 66Italy FFH 00H 00H 58 60Austria FFH 00H 00H 53 62Belgium FFH 00H 00H 61 67Denmark FFH 00H 00H 53 67Finland FFH 00H 00H 61 60Ireland FFH 00H 00H 255 67Norway FFH 00H 00H 61 59Sweden 3 200 0 100 60Switzerland FFH 00H 00H 60 60Portugal FFH 00H 00H 61 66Holland FFH 00H 00H 58 62Spain FFH 00H 00H 75 60Israel FFH 00H 00H 61 61USA FFH 00H 00H 77 62Asia FFH 00H 00H 61 66Hong Kong FFH 00H 00H 61 66South Africa FFH 00H 00H 61 66Australia FFH 00H 00H 255 68New Zealand FFH 00H 00H 61 66Singapore FFH 00H 00H 61 66Malaysia FFH 00H 00H 61 66

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-71 H515

Address 48044C 48044D 48044E 48044F 480450France 35 50 40 0 70Germany 41 44 46 46 90UK 35 44 27 33 100Italy 40 44 40 150 70Austria 39 50 44 46 80Belgium 33 50 43 26 70Denmark 33 50 26 26 90Finland 42 50 40 60 70Ireland 33 50 30 33 70Norway 41 50 33 33 70Sweden 40 70 18 26 70Switzerland 40 60 26 00H 70Portugal 34 50 33 33 70Holland 40 42 33 33 70Spain 33 75 32 100 70Israel 39 50 46 101 90USA 40 74 46 101 100Asia 34 50 36 101 100Hong Kong 34 50 36 101 100South Africa 34 50 36 101 100Australia 32 70 36 101 100New Zealand 34 50 36 101 100Singapore 34 50 36 101 100Malaysia 34 50 36 101 100

Address 480451 480452 480453 480454 480455France 70 12 4 34 34Germany 90 14 6 34 34UK 100 18 4 34 34Italy 70 12 4 34 34Austria 80 7 4 34 34Belgium 70 12 4 34 34Denmark 90 18 4 34 34Finland 75 18 4 34 34Ireland 70 18 4 34 34Norway 70 18 4 34 34Sweden 70 18 4 34 34Switzerland 70 12 4 34 34Portugal 70 18 4 34 34Holland 70 18 4 34 34Spain 140 12 4 34 34Israel 90 12 4 34 34USA 100 14 4 34 34Asia 110 12 4 34 34Hong Kong 110 12 4 34 34South Africa 110 12 4 34 34Australia 110 20 4 34 34New Zealand 110 12 4 34 34Singapore 110 12 4 34 34Malaysia 110 12 4 34 34

H515 4-72 SM

Address 480459 48045A 48045B 48045C 48045DFrance 0 0 FFH 19H FFHGermany 15 90 FFH 00H FFHUK 15 90 FFH 00H 50Italy 15 90 FFH 00H FFHAustria 15 100 FFH 00H FFHBelgium 100 90 FFH 00H FFHDenmark 15 90 F0H 09H FFHFinland 15 90 F9H 90H 100Ireland 15 90 FFH 16H FFHNorway 25 90 FFH 00H FFHSweden 15 90 F0H 09H FFHSwitzerland 15 90 FFH 00H FFHPortugal 15 90 FFH 00H FFHHolland 15 90 FFH 00H FFHSpain 100 90 FFH 07H FFHIsrael 15 90 FFH 00H FFHUSA 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHAsia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHHong Kong 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSouth Africa 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHAustralia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHNew Zealand 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHSingapore 00H 00H FFH FFH FFHMalaysia 00H 00H FFH FFH FFH

Address 48045E 48045F 480465 480466 480472France 80H 10H FFH 16H 17Germany C0H 10H FFH FFH 17UK C0H 10H FFH FFH 20Italy D1H 10H FFH FFH 18Austria C0H 10H FFH FFH 13Belgium 44H 10H FFH FFH 21Denmark 40H 10H FFH FFH 33Finland 40H 10H FFH FFH 16Ireland 80H 10H FFH FFH 36Norway 40H 10H FFH FFH 16Sweden 40H 10H FFH FFH 17Switzerland 80H 10H FFH FFH 16Portugal 40H 10H FFH FFH 30Holland 00 10H FFH FFH 16Spain 80H 10H FFH FFH 25Israel C0H 10H FFH FFH 16USA C0H 10H FFH FFH 13Asia C0H 10H FFH FFH 17Hong Kong C0H 10H FFH FFH 17South Africa C0H 10H FFH FFH 17Australia C0H 10H FFH FFH 14New Zealand C0H 10H FFH FFH 17Singapore C0H 10H FFH FFH 17Malaysia C0H 10H FFH FFH 17

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-73 H515

Address 480473 480474 480475 480476 480477France 23 FFH 00H 2 15Germany 48 FFH 00H 01H 10UK 84 FFH 00H 1 10Italy 77 FFH 00H 2 10Austria 54 FFH 00H 1 9Belgium 72 FFH 00H 2 5Denmark 50 16 24 1 10Finland 56 FFH 00H 2 25Ireland 67 FFH 00H 1 10Norway 56 FFH 00H 1 10Sweden 51 FFH 00H 1 5Switzerland 51 FFH 00H 3 1Portugal 78 16 24 1 10Holland 52 FFH 00H 2 15Spain 50 FFH 00H 2 10Israel 83 FFH 00H 2 5USA 83 FFH 00H 1 10Asia 83 FFH 00H 1 10Hong Kong 83 FFH 00H 1 10South Africa 83 FFH 00H 1 10Australia 83 FFH 00H 3 10New Zealand 83 FFH 00H 3 10Singapore 83 FFH 00H 1 10Malaysia 83 FFH 00H 1 10

Address 480478 480479 48047A 480481 480482France 5 04H 01H 25 00HGermany 10 90H 01H 25 00HUK 10 90H 01H 25 00HItaly 10 90H 01H 25 00HAustria 10 90H 01H 25 00HBelgium 10 90H 01H 25 00HDenmark 10 90H 01H 25 00HFinland 25 90H 01H 25 00HIreland 10 90H 01H 25 00HNorway 10 90H 01H 25 00HSweden 5 90H 01H 25 00HSwitzerland 1 90H 01H 25 00HPortugal 10 90H 01H 25 00HHolland 15 90H 01H 25 00HSpain 10 2CH 01H 25 00HIsrael 5 90H 01H 25 00HUSA 10 90H 01H 25 00HAsia 10 90H 01H 25 00HHong Kong 10 90H 01H 25 00HSouth Africa 10 90H 01H 25 00HAustralia 10 90H 01H 25 00HNew Zealand 10 90H 01H 25 00HSingapore 10 90H 01H 25 00HMalaysia 10 90H 01H 25 00H

H515 4-74 SM

Address 480483 480484 4804A1 4804A2 4804A3France 11H 24H 22H 00 20HGermany 11H 24H 22H 00 20HUK 11H 24H 22H 00 20HItaly 11H 24H 22H 00 20HAustria 11H 24H 22H 00 20HBelgium 11H 24H 22H 00 20HDenmark 11H 24H 22H 00 20HFinland 11H 24H 22H 00 20HIreland 11H 24H 22H 00 20HNorway 11H 24H 22H 00 20HSweden 11H 24H 22H 00 20HSwitzerland 11H 24H 22H 00 20HPortugal 11H 24H 22H 00 20HHolland 11H 24H 22H 00 20HSpain 11H 24H 22H 00 20HIsrael 11H 24H 22H 00 20HUSA 31H 24H 22H 00 20HAsia 11H 24H 22H 00 20HHong Kong 11H 24H 22H 00 20HSouth Africa 11H 24H 22H 00 20HAustralia 11H 24H 22H 00 20HNew Zealand 11H 24H 22H 00 20HSingapore 11H 24H 22H 00 20HMalaysia 11H 24H 22H 00 20H

Address 4804A4 4804A5 4804A6 4804A7 4804A8France 00H 30 12H 00H 10HGermany 00H 10 12H 00H 10HUK 00H 10 12H 00H 10HItaly 00H 10 12H 00H 10HAustria 00H 10 12H 00H 10HBelgium 00H 10 12H 00H 10HDenmark 00H 10 12H 00H 10HFinland 00H 10 12H 00H 10HIreland 00H 10 12H 00H 10HNorway 00H 10 12H 00H 10HSweden 00H 10 12H 00H 10HSwitzerland 00H 10 12H 00H 10HPortugal 00H 10 12H 00H 10HHolland 00H 10 12H 00H 10HSpain 00H 10 12H 00H 10HIsrael 00H 10 12H 00H 10HUSA 00H 10 12H 00H 10HAsia 00H 10 12H 00H 10HHong Kong 00H 10 12H 00H 10HSouth Africa 00H 10 12H 00H 10HAustralia 00H 10 12H 00H 10HNew Zealand 00H 10 12H 00H 10HSingapore 00H 10 12H 00H 10HMalaysia 00H 10 12H 00H 10H

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-75 H515

Address 4804A9 4804AA 4804AB 4804AC 4804ADFrance 00H 10 19H 96H 32HGermany 00H 10 19H 96H 32HUK 00H 10 19H 96H 32HItaly 00H 10 19H 96H 32HAustria 00H 10 19H 96H 32HBelgium 00H 10 19H 96H 32HDenmark 00H 10 19H 96H 32HFinland 00H 10 19H 96H 32HIreland 00H 10 19H 96H 32HNorway 00H 10 19H 96H 32HSweden 00H 10 19H 96H 32HSwitzerland 00H 10 19H 96H 32HPortugal 00H 10 19H 96H 32HHolland 00H 10 19H 96H 32HSpain 00H 10 19H 96H 32HIsrael 00H 10 19H 96H 32HUSA 00H 10 19H 96H 32HAsia 00H 10 19H 96H 32HHong Kong 00H 10 19H 96H 32HSouth Africa 00H 10 19H 96H 32HAustralia 00H 10 19H 96H 32HNew Zealand 00H 10 19H 96H 32HSingapore 00H 10 19H 96H 32HMalaysia 00H 10 19H 96H 32H

Address 4804AF 4804B0 4804B1 4804B2 4804B3France 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Germany 08H 80H 07H 20H 10UK 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Italy 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Austria 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Belgium 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Denmark 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Finland 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Ireland 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Norway 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Sweden 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Switzerland 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Portugal 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Holland 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Spain 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Israel 08H 80H 07H 20H 10USA 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Asia 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Hong Kong 08H 80H 07H 20H 10South Africa 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Australia 08H 80H 07H 20H 10New Zealand 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Singapore 08H 80H 07H 20H 10Malaysia 08H 80H 07H 20H 10

H515 4-76 SM

Address 4804B4 4804B5 4804B6 4804B7 4804B8France 10 0 0 10 0Germany 6 3 FEH 6 3UK 8 2 0 8 2Italy 6 0 0 6 0Austria 6 0 0 6 0Belgium 6 0 0 6 0Denmark 10 0 0 10 0Finland 10 0 0 10 0Ireland 10 0 0 10 0Norway 9 02H 0 9 02HSweden 10 0 0 10 0Switzerland 5 1 FFH 5 1Portugal 6 0 0 6 0Holland 7 0 0 7 0Spain 10 0 0 10 0Israel 6 0 0 6 0USA 9 0 0 9 0Asia 6 0 0 6 0Hong Kong 6 0 0 6 0South Africa 6 0 0 6 0Australia 11 2 0 11 2New Zealand 8 0 0 8 0Singapore 6 0 0 6 0Malaysia 6 0 0 6 0

Address 4804B9 4804BA 4804BB 4804BC 4804BDFrance 0 15 0 0 0BHGermany FEH 15 0 0 18HUK 0 15 0 0 0BHItaly 0 15 0 0 0BHAustria 0 15 0 0 0BHBelgium 0 15 0 0 0BHDenmark 0 15 0 0 0BHFinland 0 15 0 0 0BHIreland 0 15 0 0 0BHNorway 0 15 0 0 0BHSweden 0 15 0 0 0BHSwitzerland FFH 15 0 0 0BHPortugal 0 15 0 0 0BHHolland 0 15 0 0 0BHSpain 0 15 0 0 0BHIsrael 0 15 0 0 0BHUSA 0 15 0 0 0DHAsia 0 15 0 0 0DHHong Kong 0 15 0 0 0BHSouth Africa 0 15 0 0 0BHAustralia 0 15 0 0 0BHNew Zealand 0 15 0 0 0BHSingapore 0 15 0 0 0BHMalaysia 0 15 0 0 0BH

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-77 H515

Address 4804DAFrance 53Germany 53UK 53Italy 53Austria 59Belgium 59Denmark 53Finland 53Ireland 53Norway 53Sweden 53Switzerland 92Portugal 53Holland 53Spain 80Israel 59USA 53Asia 47Hong Kong 53South Africa 53Australia 53New Zealand 53Singapore 53Malaysia 53

H515 4-78 SM

4.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has four bytes of programmableparameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine oftenexperience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial orSpeed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the four bytes willbe described.

4.4.1. Programming Procedure

1. Set bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 1. Refer to secion 4.1.1.

2. Either use Function 31 (for a Quick Dial number) or Function 32 (for aSpeed Dial number) Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.

3.

4. Press Quick Dial key 10.

Note: When selecting Speed Dial 10 with Function 32, press atthe ten key pad.

5. Press four times. (speed dial press five times)

6. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7corresponding to the bit that you wish to change. Example: Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7

7. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:

Select the next byte: or

Select the previous byte: until the correct byte is displayed. Then go back to step 6.

8. After the setting is changed, press .


10. After finishing, reset bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 0.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-79 H515

4.4.2. Parameters

The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all theparameters are disabled.

Switch 01

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

CCITT T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting ,adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1second.Range:1 to 127 s (01h to 7Fh)00h or FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.Do not program a value between 80h and FEh.

Switch 02

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to4

Tx levelBit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 -1 0 0 0 1 0 -2 0 0 0 1 1 -3 0 0 1 0 0 -4 : : 0 1 1 1 1 -15 1 1 1 1 1 Disabled

If communication with a particular remoteterminal often contains errors, the signal levelmay be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level forcommunications with that terminal until theresults are better.

When disabled, NCU parameter 01 setting isused.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed onthe left.

5to7

Cable equalizer Bit 7 6 5 Setting 0 0 0 None 0 0 1 Low 0 1 0 Medium 0 1 1 High 1 1 1 Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length ofwire between the modem and the telephoneexchange when calling the number stored inthis Quick/Speed Dial. Also, try using the cable equalizer if one ormore of the following symptoms occurs. •Communication error with error codes suchas 0-20, 0-23, etc. •Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed onthe left.

H515 4-80 SM

Switch 03

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Initial Tx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 0 Not used 0 0 0 1 2,400 0 0 1 0 4,800 0 0 1 1 7,200 0 1 0 0 9,600 0 1 0 1 12,000 0 1 1 0 14,400

1 1 1 1 Disabled Other settings: Not used

If training with a particular remoteterminal always takes too long, theinitial modem rate may be too high.Reduce the initial Tx modem rateusing these bits.

Note: Do not use settings other thanlisted on the left.

4to7


Switch 04

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Inch-mm conversion before tx Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Inch-mm conversion available 0 1 Inch only 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled

The machine will use inch-based resolutionsfor scanning. If ”inch only” is selected, theprinted copy may be slightly distorted at theother end if that machine uses mm-basedresolutions.

2

3

DIS/NSF detection method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 First DIS or NSF 0 1 Second DIS or NSF 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line areinterfering with the set-up protocol at the startof transmission. The machine will then wait forthe second DIS or NSF before sending DCS orNSS.


5

Compression modes available intransmit mode 0: MH only 1: All available compression modes

This bit will determine the capabilities that areinformed to the other terminal duringtransmission.

6

7

ECM during transmission Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled 1 0 Not used 1 1 Disabled

For example, if ECM is switched on but is notwanted when sending to a particular terminal,use the setting of (0, 0).

Switch 05 - Optional ISDN G4 kit required

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Data rateBits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 64 kbps 0 0 0 1 56 kbps 1 1 1 1 Disabled

When disabled, the setting of G4parameter switch 2 (bits 0 and 1)setting is used.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-81 H515


FUNCTION COMMENTS

4to7



FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Link ModulesBits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Module 8 0 0 0 1 Module 128 1 1 1 1 Disabled

When disabled, the setting of G4parameter switch 3 (bit 0) setting isused.

4to7



FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Layer 3 protocolBits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 ISO 8208 0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL 1 1 1 1 Disabled


4to7

Packet modulesBits 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Module 9 0 0 0 1 Module 128 1 1 1 1 Disabled


Switch 08 - Not used

H515 4-82 SM

4.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

+CAUTIONDo not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Readonly.”

004003 to 00400B(H) - ROM part number and suffix (ASCII)Example: The part number is H5157210A 004003(H) - 48(H) 004004(H) - 35(H) 004005(H) - 31(H) 004006(H) - 35(H) 004007(H) - 37(H) 004008(H) - 32(H) 004009(H) - 31(H) 00400A(H) - 30(H) 00400B(H) - 41(H)

344F28 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed Dial #100 - #999, when a Func-tion Upgrade Card is used.As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes. 344F28 to 344F2F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #100 344F30 to 344F37(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #101 344F38 to 344F3F(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #102 Ø 346B40 to 346B47(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #999

480000(H) - RAM Reset Level 1Change the data at this address to FF(H), then switch the machine off and on to reset all thesystem settings.Caution: Before using this RAM, print the settings of all the system parameters (System Pa-rameter List) and RAM settings (RAM dump list) for scanner/printer registration settings.Note: Initial toner supply will be carried out automatically after the reset. This should takeabout 90 seconds.

480001 to 480004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 480001(H) - Revision number (BCD) 480002(H) - Year (BCD) 480003(H) - Month (BCD) 480004(H) - Day (BCD)

480006 to 480015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

480018(H) - Total program checksum (low)480019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

48001A(H) - Boot program checksum (low)48001B(H) - Boot program checksum (high)

48001C(H) - Main program checksum (low)48001D(H) - Main program checksum (high)

48001E(H) - RDS program update counter

480020 to 48003F(H) - System bit switches480040 to 48004F(H) - Scanner bit switches480050 to 48005F(H) - Printer bit switches480060 to 48007F(H) - Communication bit switches480080 to 48008F(H) - G3 bit switches

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-83 H515

4800A0(H) - User parameter switch 00Bit 0: Stamp home position 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 1 and 2: Scanning contrast home position Bit 2 1 Setting 0 0 Normal 0 1 Lighten 1 0 DarkenBit 3: Do not adjustBits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position Bit 5 4 Setting 0 0 Standard 0 1 Detail 1 0 FineBit 6: Transmission mode home position 0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate txBit 7: Halftone home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800A1(H) - User parameter switch 01 Bits 0 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Settings return to home position after transmission 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800A2(H) - User parameter switch 02Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Center mark printing on received copies 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 2: Reception time printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 3: TSI included in transmitted messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 4: Checkered mark printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 7: Not used

4800A3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (Automatic report printout)Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not usedBit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: TCR (Journal) 0: Off, 1: On

4800A4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (Automatic report printout)Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Fax On Demand report output 0: Off, 1: OnBits 2 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On

4800A5(H) - User parameter switch 05Bit 0: Substitute reception 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received 0: Possible, 1: ImpossibleBits 2 and 3: Not usedBits 4 and 5: Restricted Access Bit 5 4 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled at all times 1 0 Enabled during Night Timer periods only 1 1 Not usedBit 6: Fusing lamp control during energy saver mode 0: Lamp off, 1: Standby temperature (80 °C)Bit 7: Not used

H515 4-84 SM

4800A6(H) - User parameter switch 06Bit 0: TTI/CIL printing (CIL is used with ISDN option) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not usedBit 2: Closed network for transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Not usedBit 4: Batch transmission (memory card required) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Partial image scanning during memory tx 0: Off, 1: OnBits 6 to 7: Not used

4800A7(H) - User parameter switch 07Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Reduction before transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBits 4 and 5: Not usedBits 6 and 7: Fax On Demand Bit 7 6 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 Enabled without password (Remote ID) 1 0 Enabled with password (Remote ID) 1 1 Not used

4800A8(H) - User parameter switch 08Bit 0 and 1: Multi-copy reception (optional memory card required) Bit 1 0 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are multicopied. 1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are multicopied.Bits 2 and 3: Authorized reception Bit 3 2 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted. 1 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.Bits 4 and 5: Specified cassette selection Bit 5 4 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette. 1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette.Bits 6 and 7: Forwarding (optional memory card required) Bit 1 0 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are forwarded. 1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are forwarded.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-85 H515

4800A9(H) - User parameter switch 09Bits 0 and 1: Memory lock (optional memory card required) Bit 1 0 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered. 1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID is entered.Bits 2 and 3: Hard disk filing system (optional hard disk and the function upgrade card required) Bit 3 2 Setting X 0 Disabled 0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified are for this feature kept in the hard disk for filing. 1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are kept in the hard disk for filing.Bits 4 to 7: Not used

4800AA(H) - User parameter switch 10Bit 0: Reverse order printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: 2 into 1 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 2 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Halftone type 0: Error diffusion, 1: Dither

4800AB(H) - User parameter switch 11Bit 0: Transfer request using DTMF tone signals 0: Not accepted, 1: AcceptedBit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the "Tone" mark over an ISDN line

0: UUI, 1: ToneBits 2 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit

4800AC(H) - User parameter switch 12Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Toner saving mode 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 3 and 4: Printout image density (Fax mode) Bit 4 3 Setting 0 0 Normal 0 1 Lighten 1 0 Darken 1 1 Not usedBits 5 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Copy operation 0: Possible, 1: Prohibited

4800AD(H) - PSTN access methodBits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 PSTN 0 1 Loop start 1 0 Ground start 1 1 Flash start

4800B8(H) - User function 62 settingsBits 0 and 1: File retention time Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled 0 1 24 hours 1 0 Disabled 1 1 72 hoursBits 2 to 7: Not used

H515 4-86 SM

4800B9(H) - User function 62 settingsBit 0: Night timer 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 1 to 3: Not usedBit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable

1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03

Bits 5 and 6: Not usedBit 7: Daylight saving time 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800BA(H) - User function 62 settingsBit 0: Not usedBit 1: Dialing type 0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialingBits 2 to 7: Not used

4800BB(H) - PSTN access number for loop start Access number Hex value to program (BCD) 0 F0 Ø Ø 0 F0 00 00 Ø Ø 99 99

4800C0 to 4800CF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches (Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)

4800D0 to 4800EF(H) - G4 Internal Switches (Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)

4800F0 to 480103(H) - RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.480104 to 480117(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)480118 to 800137(H) - TTI (Max. 32 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.480138(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex)

Note : If the number of characters are less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add astop code (FF[H]) after the last character.

480139 to 480147(H) - Service station’s fax number (Service function 13) See 48018F(H) for the type of network used for this number.

480157 to 480165(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) (User function 61)480166 to 480174(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (User function 61)480175 to 480183(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G3) (User function 61)

480184(H) - ID code (low - Hex)480185(H) - ID code (high - Hex)

480186(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)480187(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)

480188(H) - Memory lock ID (low - Hex)480189(H) - Memory lock ID (high - Hex)

48018C(H) - Remote ID (low - BCD)48018D(H) - Remote ID (high - BCD)

48018F(H) - Network type used for the service station number00(H) - G3 (PSTN)01(H) - G4 (ISDN)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-87 H515

480198 to 48019F(H) - Last power off time (Read only) 480198(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock(PM) 480199(H) - Year (BCD) 48019A(H) - Month (BCD) 48019B(H) - Day (BCD) 48019C(H) - Hour 48019D(H) - Minute 48019E(H) - Second 48019F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

4801AC(H) - Optional equipment (Read only) Bit 0: Memory card 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 1: Hard disk 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 2: Function upgrade card 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 3: Not used Bit 4: 100 sheet cassette 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 5: 1st paper feed unit (type F) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 6: 2nd paper feed unit (type F) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 7: Not used

4801AD(H) - Optional equipment (Read only) Bit 0: 1st paper feed unit (type S) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 1: 2nd paper feed unit (type S) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 2: Not used Bit 3: Not used Bit 4: Printer interface 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 5: Not used Bit 6: G4 0: Not installed, 1: Installed Bit 7: Fax On Demand 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

4801C0 to 4801C2(H) - Tx counter

Address High Low4801C0(H) Tens digit Unit digit4801C1(H) Thousands digit Hundrets digit4801C2(H) Hundred thousands digit Ten thousands digit

Note: The following counters have the same data format as above.

4801C4 to 4801C6(H) - Rx counter

4801C8 to 4801CA(H) - Scan counter

4801CC to 4801CE(H) - Print counter

4801D0 to 4801D2(H) - Printer interface output counter

4801D4 to 4801D6(H) - ADF counter

4801D8 to 4801DA(H) - Paper feed counter (standard cassette)

4801DC to 4801DE(H) - Paper feed counter (1st optional paper feed unit)

4801E0 to 4801E2(H) - Paper feed counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)

4801E4 to 4801E6H) - Paper feed counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)

4801E8 to 4801EA(H) - Paper feed counter (bypass feed)

4801F0 to 4801F2(H) - Scanner total jam counter

4801F4 to 4801F6(H) - Printer total jam counter

4801F8 to 4801FA(H) - Paper jam counter (standard cassette)

4801FC to 4801FE(H) - Paper jam counter (1st optional paper feed unit)

H515 4-88 SM

480200 to 480202(H) - Paper jam counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)

480204 to 480206(H) - Paper jam counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)

480208 to 48020A(H) - Paper jam counter (bypass feed)

480210 to 480212(H) - Fusing exit jam counter

480214 to 480216(H) - Registration jam counter

480218 to 48021A(H) - PM counter

48021C to 48021E(H) - PM call interval (default 60,000)

480220 to 480222(H) - Copy counter

480224 to 480226(H) - OPC (master drum) counter

480228 to 48022A(H) - OPC (master drum) replacement interval (default: 30,000 prints)If bit 5 of system bit switch 04 is 0, the machine will ask the user to replace the drum at thisinterval.

48022C to 48022E(H) - CTM counter

480276 to 480285(H) - Excessive jam call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details.)

4802A2 to 4802AD(H) - G4 NSC code

4802AE to 4802C5(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)

4802C6 to 4802D9(H) - ISDN G3 CSI (ASCII - Max. 20 digits)

4802DA(H) - Number of digits programmed in the ISDN G3 CSI (Hex)

4802DB to 4802DE(H) - ISDN IP

4802DF to 4802E2(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address

4802E3 to 4802E6(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address

4802E7 to 4802EB(H) - CiG4 board ROM information 4802E7(H) - Suffix 4802E8(H) - Version (BCD) 4802E9(H) - Year (BCD) 4802EA(H) - Month (BCD) 4802EB(H) - Day (BCD)

480300(H) - Number of copies for multi-sort document reception (User function 83)

480301(H) - Daylight saving time settings (User function 62)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-89 H515

480302 to 48032B(H) - Night timer period (User function 72) 480302 to 480304(H) - Setting #1 for Monday 480305 to 480307(H) - Setting #2 for Monday 480308 to 48030A(H) - Setting #1 for Tuesday 48030B to 48030D(H) - Setting #2 for Tuesday 48030E to 480310(H) - Setting #1 for Wednesday 480311 to 480313(H) - Setting #2 for Wednesday 480314 to 480316(H) - Setting #1 for Thursday 480317 to 480319(H) - Setting #2 for Thursday 48031A to 48031C(H) - Setting #1 for Friday 48031D to 48031F(H) - Setting #2 for Friday 480320 to 480322(H) - Setting #1 for Saturday 480323 to 480325(H) - Setting #2 for Saturday 480326 to 480328(H) - Setting #1 for Sunday 480329 to 48032B(H) - Setting #2 for Sunday

Program format First byte - Hour (BCD) Second byte - Minute (BCD) Third byte - 00(H): Timer start time, 01(H): Timer end time

480356(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)480357(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)

480358 to 48035C(H) - Last RDS operation (Read only) 480358(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM) 480359(H) - Year (BCD) 48035A(H) - Month (BCD) 48035B(H) - Day (BCD) 48035C(H) - Hour 48035D(H) - Minute 48035E(H) - Second 48035F(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

480364 to 48036B(H) - Last Fax On Demand report printout (Read only) 480364(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour clock (PM) 480365(H) - Year (BCD) 480366(H) - Month (BCD) 480367(H) - Day (BCD) 480368(H) - Hour 480369(H) - Minute 48036A(H) - Second 48036B(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

48036E to 48036F(H) - Length (mm) of the non-scanning area from the leading edge for par-tial image scanning 48036E(H) - Low byte (BCD) 48036F(H) - High byte (BCD)In the US, the user input value is in inch format. The machine will convert this into mm for-mat and store the converted value here.

480370 to 480371(H) - Length (mm) of the scanning area for partial image scanning 480370(H) - Low byte (BCD) 480371(H) - High byte (BCD)

480372(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)480373(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)480374(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)480376(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)480377(H) - Key acknowledgement tone volume 00 - 07(H)

480379 to 48037D(H) - Periodic service call parameters (Refer to section 2.3.2 for details)

H515 4-90 SM

480383 to 480385(H) - Effective term of automatic service calls (Refer to section 2.3.2 for de-tails)

480400 to 4804DA(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)

4804EA(H) - Print top margin (standard cassette)4804EB(H) - Print top margin (1st optional paper feed unit)4804EC(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)4804EF(H) - Print top margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)4804F0(H) - Print top margin (bypass feeder)Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.

4804F5(H) - Print left margin (standard cassette)4804F6(H) - Print left margin (1st optional paper feed unit)4804F7(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)4804FA(H) - Print left margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)4804FB(H) - Print left margin (bypass feeder)Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.

480586(H) - Print bottom margin when bypass feeder is used.Refer to section 5.12 for details about these parameters.

4805AF(H) - Fusing unit failure details01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 °C while printing.02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 °C before starting printing.03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standby mode (whenfusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standby mode (whenfusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 °C while in standby mode (when fus-ing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 °C during printing08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 °C09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected

When a service call was caused by a fusing unit failure (codes 01 - 09):After fixing the problem, reset the data at this address to 00(H), then restart the machine toclear the service call. (Refer to address 4805B1(H) for other hardware failures.)

4805B0(H) - Excessive jam alarmBit 3: Scanner excessive jam alarm 1: An alarm has occurredBit 4: Printer excessive jam alarm 1: An alarm has occurredEither or both of these bits will change to 1 when an excessive jam alarm occurs. Reseteach bit to 0 when you have solved the problem. The machine will not be able to detect ex-cessive jams in future if you do not reset these bits.

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-91 H515

4805B1(H) - Details of the service call (hardware error)01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 °C while printing.02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 °C before starting printing.03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standby mode (whenfusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standby mode (whenfusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 °C while in standby mode (when fus-ing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature came below 140 °C while printing08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 °C09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected11(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was activated12(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was not activated21(H) - The laser synchronization signal was not detected during printing31(H) - Polygonal mirror motor startup error32(H) - Polygonal mirror motor error during printing41(H) - Main motor startup error42(H) - Main motor error during printing

When a service call was caused by a fusing lamp failure (codes 01 - 09):The same code is stored at address 4805AF(H). After fixing the problem, reset the data at address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then restart the ma-chine to clear the service call.

When a service call was caused by another hardware failure (codes 11 - 42):If the problem remains after restarting the machine (power off/on), fix the hardware problem.The service call condition is cleared after power up.

4805C8(H) - Initial Toner SupplyBit 3: Initial toner supply 0: Off, 1: OnWhenever the development unit is replaced, do the following procedure.1. Ensure that the drum, CTM, and the new development unit are correctly installed.2. Turn the machine on and change this bit to 1.3. Turn the machine off.4. Turn the machine on. The machine starts filling up the empty development unit hopperwith new toner. (This bit is reset to zero automatically.)5. Make test copies or test patterns to check the print quality.

4805E5(H) - Sensor status (standard cassette and internal printer mechanism)Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)

Bit 0Bit 1Bit 2Bit 3

=

1000

: Cassette

not installed

0100

: A5

sideways

0010

: LT

lengthwise

1010

: A4

lengthwise


=

0110

: F ⁄ F4

lengthwise

1110

: Legal

sideways

1001

: Cassette

not installed

1111

: Cassette

not installed

Bit 4: Paper end sensor 1: Paper endBit 5: Registration sensor 1: Paper presentBit 6: Fusing exit sensor 1: Paper presentBit 7: Standard cassette availability 0: Available, 1: Not available

(1: Jam, paper end, etc.)

H515 4-92 SM

4805E6(H) - Sensor status (1st Optional Paper Feed Unit)Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)


=

1000

: Cassette

not installed

0100

: A5

sideways

0010

: LT

lengthwise

1010

: A4

lengthwise


=

0110

: F ⁄ F4

lengthwise

1110

: Legal

sideways

1001

: Cassette

not installed

1111

: Cassette

not installed

Bit 4: Paper end sensor 1: Paper endBit 5: Relay sensor 1: Paper presentBit 6: Not usedBit 7:Cassette availability 0: Available, 1: Not available


4805E7(H) - Sensor status (2nd optional Paper Feed Unit)Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)


=

1000

: Cassette

not installed

0100

: A5

sideways

0010

: LT

lengthwise

1010

: A4

lengthwise


=

0110

: F ⁄ F4

lengthwise

1110

: Legal

sideways

1001

: Cassette

not installed

1111

: Cassette

not installed

Bit 4: Paper end sensor 1: Paper endBit 5: Relay sensor 1: Paper presentBit 6: Not usedBit 7:Cassette availability 0: Available, 1: Not available


4805EA(H) - Sensor status (optional 100 sheet cassette)Bit 0 to 3: Paper size sensor(Note: Available paper sizes depend on the country for which the machine is designed.)


=

1000

: Cassette

not installed

0100

: A5

sideways

0010

: LT

lengthwise

1010

: A4

lengthwise


=

0110

: F ⁄ F4

lengthwise

1110

: Legal

sideways

1001

: Cassette

not installed

1111

: Cassette

not installed

Bit 4: Paper end sensor 1: Paper endBit 5: Not usedBit 6: Not usedBit 7: Cassette availability 0: Available, 1: Not available


SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-93 H515

4805EB(H) - Sensor status (bypass feed)Bit 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: Paper in the bypass feed slot 1: Paper not presentBit 5: Bypass feed sensor 1: Paper presentBit 6: Not usedBit 7: Bypass feed availability 0: Available, 1: Not available

(1: Jam, no paper, etc.)

48061C(H) - Scanning top margin adjustment480620(H) to 480624(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustmentRefer to section 5.12 for details.

492716 to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 64 and Speed Dial #00 -#99.As explained in section 4.4, each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 8 bytes. 492716 to 49271D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 01 49271E to 492725(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 02 492726 to 49272D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03 Ø 49290E to 492915(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 64 492916 to 49291D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #00 49291E to 492925H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #01 492926 to 49292D(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #03 Ø 492C2E to 492C35(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99

49A709(H) - Selection of the other cassette for printer interface output (User Function 62) 01(H) - 1st optional paper feed unit 02(H) - 2nd optional paper feed unit 03(H) - Optional 100 sheet cassetteNote: The standard cassette and the cassette selected using function 62 are used for printerinterface output.

49A79C to 49A91B(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)

One error record consists of 6 bytes of data.

First error record start address - 49A79C(H)Second error record start address - 49A7A2(H)Third error record start address - 49A7A8(H) : : :64th error record start address - 49A916(H)

The format is as follows:1st byte - Minute (BCD)2nd byte - Hour (BCD)3rd byte - Day (BCD)4th byte - Month (BCD)5th byte - Error code (low) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]6th byte - Error code (high) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]

49D71C to 49DDFB(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)

One error communication record consists of 88 bytes. The format is as follows:

H515 4-94 SM

1st byte - HeaderBit 0: Communication result 0: OK, 1: NGBit 1: Document jam 1: OccurredBit 2: Power down 1: OccurredBit 3: Not usedBit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: YesBit 5: Type of technical data 0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rateBit 6: Error report 0: Not printed, 1: PrintedBit 7: Data validity 0: Not valid, 1: Valid

2nd byte - Not used

3rd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started3rd byte - Month (BCD)4th byte - Day (BCD)5th byte - Hour (BCD)6th byte - Minute (BCD)

7th and 8th bytes - Communication time7th byte - Minutes (BCD)8th byte - Seconds (BCD)

9th and 10th byte - Number of pages transmitted or received9th byte - Low byte (Hex)10th byte - High byte (Hex)

11th and 12th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error linesIf bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0:

11th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)12th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)

If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1:11th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)12th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)

13th byte - File number (low - Hex)14th byte - File number (high - Hex)

15th and 16th bytes - Rx level or measure of error rateIf bit 5 of the 1st byte is 0:

15th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)16th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)

If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1:15th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)16th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)

17th byte - Final modem rateBits 0 to 2: Final modem speed

Bit 0Bit 1Bit 2

=

100

: 2.4k

010

: 4.8k

110

: 7.2k

001

: 9.6k

101

: 12.0k

011

: 14.4k

Bit 3: Not usedBits 4 to 6: Final modem type

Bit 4Bit 5Bit 6

=

100

: V.27ter

010

: V.29

110

: V.33

001

:

V.17(Long)

101

:

V.17(Short)

Bit 7: Not used

18th to 20th byte - Not used

21st to 44th byte - Remote terminal’s ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-95 H515

45th byte - Communication mode #1Bits 0 - 1: Resolution used

Bit 0Bit 1

=

10

: Standard,

01

: Detail,

11

: Fine

Bit 2: Communication Protocol 0: G3, 1: G4Bit 3: ECM 0: Off, 1: OnBits 4 to 7: Communication mode used


=

0000

: Normal

1000

: Confidential

0100

: Polling

1100

: Transfer


=

0010

: Forwarding

1010

: Automatic

Service Call

1110

:

Transferusing

DTMF⁄UUI

0001

: Fax

On Demand

46th byte - Communication mode #2Bit 0: Tx or Rx 0: Tx, 1: RxBit 1: Reduction in Tx 0: Not reduced, 1: ReducedBit 2: Batch transmission 0: Not used, 1: UsedBit 3: Send later transmission 0: Not used, 1: UsedBit 4: Transmission from 0: ADF, 1: MemoryBit 5: Not usedBits 6 and 7: Network type used

Bit 6Bit 7

=

10

: PSTN,

01

: ISDN

47th byte - Not used

48th byte - Number of errors duing communication (Hex)

49th to 52nd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)51th byte - Error code (low - BCD)52st byte - Error code (high - BCD)

53th to 56th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred57th to 60th byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred61st to 64th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred65th to 68th byte - 5th error code and page number where the error occurred69th to 72nd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred73rd to 76th byte - 7th error code and page number where the error occurred77th to 80th byte - 8th error code and page number where the error occurred81st to 84th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred85th to 88th byte - 10th error code and page number where the error occurred

70001E to 700025(H) - Hard disk informationIf the data in these addresses do not match the following values after installing an optionalhard disk, format the hard disk and check these addresses again. 70001E(H) - 50(H) 70001F(H) - 00(H) 700020(H) - FF(H) 700021(H) - FF(H) 700022(H) - 00(H) 700023(H) - 50(H) 700025(H) - 00(H) 700026(H) - 80(H)

H515 4-96 SM

4.6. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS• Flash/SRAM data copy harness (P/N: H5159100)• EPROM board (universal EPROM PCB)• Scan line adjustment chart (P/N: H5159300)• 200 dpi test chart (P/N: H0829020)• Test harness (P/N: H5159301)• SBU adjustment knobs (P/N: H0129300)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-97 H515

4.7. PM TABLEScanner

Item 30K 60K 90K 1 year NotesExposure Glass C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterR1 and R2 Rollers C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterWhite Shading Plate C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterMirrors C CADF Roller Assy R (user) R (user) R (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterSeparation Pad R (user) R (user) R (user) C (user) Soft cloth and water

Printer

Item 30K 60K 90K 1 year NotesPaper Feed Roller C Soft cloth and waterRegistration Roller C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterThermistor RHot Roller Strippers RHot Roller RPressure Roller(Fusing) R

Cleaning Pad R (user)Replaced when a new CTM is installed.

A cleaning pad isenclosed in the CTM.

Transfer Roller RDevelopment Unit ROzone Filter R

100 Sheet Cassette (Optional)

Item 10K 30K 60K 1 year NotesFeed Roller C (user) Soft cloth and water

Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Item 10K 30K 60K 1 year NotesRelay Roller C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterFeed Roller C (user) Soft cloth and water

C: Clean, R: Replace

H515 4-98 SM

4.8. SYSTEM PRINTOUTS

4.8.1. System Parameter List (page 1 of 2)

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-99 H515

System Parameter List (page 2 of 2)

H515 4-100 SM

4.8.2. Ram Dump

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-101 H515

REPLACEMENT ANDADJUSTMENT

5. REPLACEMENT & ADJUSTMENT

+WARNINGThe machine contains a laser beam generator. Laser beams cancause permanent eye damage. Do not open the laser unit or lookalong the laser beam path while the main power is on.

+CAUTIONBefore starting disassembly, be sure to print all message files in theSAF memory. Then, turn off the main switch and disconnect thepower cord for safety.

Lithium Battery: The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this typeis incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent typerecommended by the manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordancewith the manufacturer’s instructions.

5.1. COVERS

5.1.1. Document Table and Tray

[B]

[A]

H515R601.wmfA: Document TableB: Document Tray

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-1 H515

5.1.2. Rear Cover Assembly

5.1.3. Left Cover

[A]

H515R008.wmfA: Rear Cover (4 screws, 3 hooks)

[B]

[A]

H515R603.wmfA: Cover (1 screw)B: Left Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks, 1 connector)

H515 5-2 SM

5.1.4. Right Cover

5.1.5. Operation Panel Assembly

First, remove the operation panel from the assembly by pushing the op-eration panel release button [C], then remove the assembly.

Note: • It is not necessary to remove the connectors.• During reassembly, ensure that the harness is replaced in the hooks [D]

as shown.

[A]

[B]

[C]

H515R501.wmfA: Small Cover A (1 screw)B: Small Cover B (1 screw)C: Right Cover (2 screws, 3 hooks)

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

H515R009.wmfB: Bracket (1 tapping screw)A: Operation Panel Assembly (1 screw with grounding wire, 1 connector)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-3 H515

5.1.6. Top Cover

Note for reassembly : Thread the ground wire through the recess [B], asshown.

[A]

[B]

H515R010.wmfA: Top Cover (1 tapping screw with grounding wire, 1 white clip)

H515 5-4 SM

5.2. ADF

5.2.1. ADF Roller Assembly

5.2.2. Separation Rubber Plate

[A]

[B]

H515R609.wmfA: ADF Roller CoverB: ADF Roller Assembly

[A]

H515R610.wmfA: Separation Rubber Plate

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-5 H515

5.2.3. Separation Pressure Adjustment

To match the paper type that theuser will be scanning, adjust theposition of lever [A] as shown inthe following table.

PaperThickness Pressure Position

Thin Low 1Normal Normal 2Thick High 3

To correct document feed prob-lems, adjust the position of lever[A] as shown in the following ta-ble.

Problem PositionMulti-feed - Thin pages 1Multi-feed - Thick pages 3

Jam 1Non-feed 3

5.2.4. ADF Sensors

2

[A]

13

H515R611.wmfA: Separation Pressure Adjustment Lever

[A]

[B]

H515R504.wmfA: Operation Panel (4 tapping screws, 5 connectors)B: ADF Upper Unit

H515 5-6 SM

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

H515R508.wmfC: Bracket (7 tapping screws, 1 grounding wire)D: Document Width Sensor (B4)E: Document SensorF: Scan Line SensorG: Document Width Sensor (A3)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-7 H515

5.3. SCANNER

5.3.1. Exposure Glass

5.3.2. R1/R2 Rollers

[A]

H515R003.wmfA: Exposure Glass (2 white clips)

[A]

[B]

[C]

H515R016.wmfRemove the scanner lower unit first.B: Scanner Side Cover A (1 screw)C: Scanner Side Cover B (1 screw)A: Scanner Lower Unit (5 screws, 1 grounding wire, 3 connectors)

H515 5-8 SM

Note: If the rollers are removed, the gears and the belt will come off easily.

5.3.3. Xenon Lamp

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R503.wmfC: Plate (2 screws)A: R1 Roller (1 E-ring)B: R2 Roller (1 E-ring)

[A]

[B]

[C]

h505r506.wmfB: Shading Plate (1 tapping screw)C: Lens Cover (2 screws)A: Xenon Lamp (2 clips, 1 connector)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-9 H515

5.3.4. Tx Motor

5.3.5. Mirrors

[A]

H515R505.wmfFirst, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then remove the motor.A: Tx Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]

H515R017.wmfFirst, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2), then turn it over.D: Lower Scanner Unit Cover A: 1st Mirror (2 clips)E: Bracket (1 tapping screw) B: 2nd Mirror (2 clips)

C: 3rd Mirror (2 clips)

H515 5-10 SM

5.3.6. Stamper

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

H515R018.wmfFirst, remove the scanner lower unit (refer to section 5.3.2).A: StamperD: Lower Scanner Unit CoverB: Bracket A (2 tapping screws with grounding wire)C: Bracket B (1 tapping screw)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-11 H515

5.4. LASER PRINTING COMPONENTS

5.4.1. Laser Unit

First, remove the clip [A] and disconnect harnesses [B], [C], and [D], then re-move the Laser Unit [E].

[B]

[A][C]

[E][D]

H515R619.wmfE: Laser Unit (1 clip, 3 connectors, 4 positioning pins)

H515 5-12 SM

5.4.2. Laser Diode Unit and Hexagonal Mirror Motor

+WARNINGLaser beams can cause permanent eye damage. Do not open thelaser unit or look along the laser beam path while the main power ison.

[A]

[B]

[C]

H515R620.wmfA: Laser Unit CoverB: Laser Diode (LD) Unit (2 tapping screws)C: Hexagonal Mirror Motor (3 tapping screws)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-13 H515

5.5. DEVELOPMENT

5.5.1. Development Unit

[A]

[B, C][D]

H515R621.wmfRelease the clips [B] and [C] and remove the main motor cover [D], then remove thedevelopment unit [A].A: Development Unit (2 clips, 1 connector)

[A]

[B]

[A’ ]

[B’ ]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[E]

H515R655.wmfNote for reassembly1. Place the pins [A] and [B] under the hooks [A’ ] and [B’ ].2. Insert the pins [C] and [D] into the openings in the base, then push [E] and [F] down to lock the development unit onto the base.

H515 5-14 SM

5.5.2. Transfer Roller

5.5.3. Main Motor and Gears

First, remove the zener diode [A], then remove the main motor assembly [B].Note: Once the main motor assembly is removed, the gears and the shafts will come off the unit easily.

[A]

H515R622.wmfA: Transfer Roller (1 gear, 2 spacers)

[A]

[B]

H515R623.wmfA: Zener Diode (1 screw)B: Main Motor Assembly (2 tapping screws, 1 connector, 1 spring)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-15 H515

5.5.4. Toner End Sensor

[A]

H515R507.wmfA: Toner End Sensor (1 connector)

H515 5-16 SM

5.5.5. Replacing the Development Unit

After every 60,000 prints, the following parts have to be replaced.

• Development unit [A]• Development roller [B] (A development roller comes with the parts [C]

through [F]. Check for the assembly part number of [B] through [F] inthe parts catalog.)

• Transfer roller (refer to section 5.5.2)• Zener diode (refer to section 5.5.3)

The transfer roller unit, main motor and gears, development roller [B], andthe parts labelled [C] to [F] in the above illustration are not included with anew development unit [A].

To install a new development unit, perform the following:

1. Install a new development roller as shown in the above illustration.

2. Install a new transfer roller, a new zener diode, a main motor, and gearsas described in sections 5.5.2 and 5.5.3.

Continued on the next page

[A]

[F][D]

[B]

[C]

[E]

H515R646.wmfA: Development UnitE, F: BushingsD: Development Roller GearC: PinB: Development Roller (Rubber)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-17 H515

3. Check the electrical resistance of the following.

Charge bias terminals/Zener diode

Toner application roller bias terminals

Development roller bias terminals

Transfer roller bias terminals


[D][C]

[A]

[B]

H515R656.wmfA: Bias terminal to the CTMB: Bias terminal from the power packC, D: Zener diode terminals

CriteriaA - B: 0 ΩC - D: The resistance varies dependingon the voltage applied between the ter-minals.

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

H515R657.wmfA: Bias terminal from the power packB: Toner application roller shaftC: Toner metering bladeD: Bias brush

CriteriaA - B: Less than 1 k ΩA - C: Less than 1 k ΩA - D: Less than 1 k Ω

[A]

[B]

H515R658.wmfA: Bias terminal from the power packB: Development roller shaft

CriteriaA - B: Less than 1 k Ω

[A]

[B]

H515R659.wmfA: Bias terminal from the power packB: Transfer roller shaft

CriteriaA - B: Less than 10 k Ω

Note:Check the resistance while pushingthe roller shaft down onto the rollerholder.

H515 5-18 SM

4. Install the new development unit into the machine.

5. Install the drum and CTM, and ensure that the following points areconnected to the frame ground.

• Drum shaft• Main motor bracket• Antistatic brush on the transfer roller unit

Initial Toner SupplyAfter installing a new development unit, perform the following: 1. Set bit 3 of RAM address 4805C8 to 1. (Refer to section 4.5) 2. Turn off the machine and wait for 10 seconds. 3. Turn on the machine. 4. The machine will supply new toner to the development unit.

Bit 3 will be automatically reset to zero at the end of the procedure, which willtake about 90 seconds.

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-19 H515

5.6. FUSING

5.6.1. Thermistor

5.6.2. Fusing Unit

Preparation - Right hand sideFirst, open the fusing exit cover, then remove the sensor assembly [A],bracket [B], and gear [C].

+CAUTIONDuring re-assembly, be sure that the fusing exit cover [D] is openbefore inserting the sensor assembly [A].

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

H515R625.wmfB: Bracket (1 screw)C: GearA: Feed-out Sensor/Exit Cover Switch Assembly (2 tapping screws, 2 connectors)

[B][A]

H515R624.wmfB: Thermistor (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)A: Thermistor Cover (6 hooks)

H515 5-20 SM

Preparation - Left hand side

First, remove the ground wire [A], harness cover [B] and cover [C], 1 connector.

Note: Put back the bracket [D] after removing the ground wire [A].

Fusing Unit Removal

[B]

[C] [F][E]

[D]

[A]

H515R626.wmfD: Ground Wire (1 screw)B: Harness Cover A (1 tapping screw)C: Harness Cover B (1 tapping screw)A: Fusing Left Cover (1 tapping screw)E: Fusing Unit Fulcrum (1 tapping screw)F: Thermistor Harness

[A]

H515R627.wmfA: Fusing Unit (3 screws, 1 connector)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-21 H515

5.6.3. Hot Roller Strippers

Remove the cleaning felt if it is still in the unit, then remove the strippers.

+CAUTIONBe careful not to lose the springs.

5.6.4. Fusing Lamp

+CAUTIONBe careful not to touch the glass surface.

[A]

H515R652.wmf

[B]

[A]

H515R628.wmfA: Cleaning Felt B: Hot Roller Strippers (1 spring each)

[A]

H515R629.wmf115V Models A: Fusing Lamp (2 screws)

H515 5-22 SM

5.6.5. Hot Roller

First, remove the tapping screw [A], then remove the tapping screws [B] and[C]. The fusing upper and lower units come apart after the ground plate [D] isreleased from the upper unit [E].

+CAUTIONDo not bend the ground plate too much.


[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[E]

H515R630.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-23 H515

Remove the bracket [A], then remove the hot roller [B].

[B]

[A][C]

H515R631.wmf115V ModelsA: Bracket (3 screws)B: Hot Roller C: Fusing Lamp Connector (1 screw)

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R653.wmf220V ModelsA: Bracket (3 screws)B: Hot Roller

H515 5-24 SM

5.6.6. Pressure Roller

5.6.7. Thermostat and Thermofuse

[C][A]

[B]

H515R632.wmfA: Bracket (2 screws)B: Bracket (1 tapping screw)C: Pressure Roller

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

H515R654.wmfA: Thermostat (2 screws)B: Thermofuse (2 screws) - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)C,D: Terminal Plates for the Thermofuse - 220V models only (Not in U.S. models)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-25 H515

5.7. PAPER FEED

5.7.1. Paper Feed Motor and Clutch Box

5.7.2. Paper End Sensor

First, remove the bracket [A], then remove the sensor [B].

[B]

[A]

H515R634.wmfA: Paper Feed Motor (2 screws)B: Paper Feed Clutch Box (1 clip, 2 screws)

[A]

[B]

H515R635.wmfA: Bracket (1 screw)B: Paper End Sensor

H515 5-26 SM

5.7.3. Paper Feed Rollers, Paper Size Sensor, By-pass Feed Sensor, and Relay Connector

Paper feed rollers [A]: Turn the roller shaft as shown in the diagram untilthe screw heads can be seen from the front. Then remove the rollers.The relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette [C] should beinstalled as shown in the diagram (the triangle mark must be at the left handside of the connector.

By-pass feed sensor: See below.

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R636.wmfA: Feed rollers (1 screw each)B: Paper size sensor (2 hooks, 1 connector)C: Relay connector to the optional 100 sheet cassette (1 screw, 1 connector)

h515r022.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-27 H515

5.7.4. Registration Roller and Bypass Feed Sensor Actuator

Registration RollerRemove the guides ([A], [B]) and springs ([C], [D]) first, then remove theroller [E].

Bypass Feed Sensor ActuatorRemove the bracket [F] and the guide plate [G], then remove the actuator[H].

[B][F]

[C][A]

[E]

[D]

[G]

[H]

H515R637.wmfF: Bracket (2 tapping screws)H: Bypass Feed Sensor ActuatorG: Guide Plate (5 hooks)A: Paper Guide A (4 hooks)B: Paper Guide B (4 hooks)C,D: SpringsE: Registration Roller (1 E-ring, 1 gear)

H515 5-28 SM

5.8. PCBs

5.8.1. PSU

[A]

H515R026.wmfA: Heat Sink (4 screws)

[B]

H515R027.wmfB: PSU (4 screws, 2 connectors)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-29 H515

5.8.2. NCU, MFDU, and MFCE

If the machine has a Function Upgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card in-stalled, the SRAM data in the defective MFCE can be copied to the newMFCE. Otherwise, all the data stored in the card will be initialized the firsttime that the power is switched on after replacement.In such a case, perform the following procedure.

1. Ensure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is "1", and the battery switch of thecard is ON, before removing the IC card from the MFCE. Then, turn themachine off.

2. Disconnect the optional IC cards.

3. Replace the old MFCE with the new MFCE (ensure that the batteryswitch in the new MFCE is on).

Do not turn on the machine at this point.

4. Connect the Flash/SRAM Copy Tool into the lower slot of the new MFCE,then connect the old MFCE to the Copy Tool (refer to section 4.1.22).


6. Transfer the SRAM data from the old MFCE using service function12 (refer to section 4.1.22).

7. At the complettion of the data transfer, turn the machine off anddisconnect the tool.

8. Re-insert the optional IC card(s).

9. Turn the machine on and check if the IC cards can be used as before.

Harness Connections from the MFDU

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R639.wmfA: NCU (3 screws) B: MFDU (2 screws) C: MFCE (2 screws)

H515 5-30 SM

5.8.3. Power Pack

C N 1 3C N 2 3

C N 7 6 C N 7 5 C N 2 5

C N 1 5 C N 1 4 C N 1 7 C N 7 4 C N 1 8

C N 7

C N 7 0

C N 2 0

C N 2 6

C N 7 1

C N 5 C N 4 C N 7 8C N 3

C N 7 3 C N 7 2 C N 7 7

C N 2 1

CN

12C

N10

CN

1

Interlock Switch(+24V)

PSU

Not UsedInterlockSwitch(+5V)

O P USensors-Paper Exit-Fusing Exit Cover

Sensors-Registration-Bypass Feed-Paper End-Toner End

PFU(Optional)

Paper Size Sensor,Thermistor

FCE

Fan MotorMain MotorQuench ing LampMechanical Counter

PolygonalMirror Motor Tx Motor

Paper Feed Motor

StamperOzone FanSpeaker

Power Pack

L a m pStabil izer

100 Sheet Cassette(Optional)

SBU L D D R

Not Used N C U Not usedPrinter I/F(Optional)

Microphone(Optional)

Not UsedH D D(Optional)

CN

11P

D1 Lazer

SynchronizedDetector

H515R502.wmf

[A]

Do not touch the dials onthe power pack duringreplacement.

H515R640.wmfA: Power Pack (1 tapping screw, 1 connector)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-31 H515

5.9. OTHERS

5.9.1. Ozone Filter and Fan Motor

5.9.2. Speaker

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]H515R641.wmf

A,B: Ozone Filter Holder (2 screws)C: Ozone FilterD: Fan Motor (1 connector)

[A]

H515R050.wmfA: Speaker (2 screws)

H515 5-32 SM

5.10. 100 SHEET PAPER CASSETTE (OPTIONAL)

5.10.1. Relay Connector and Gear Cover

5.10.2. Paper End Sensor and Drive Components

Paper End SensorFirst, remove the stay [A] and the cover [B], then remove the sensor [C].

Paper Feed Clutch and RollersFirst, remove the gears [D], then remove the clutch [E] and rollers [F].

[B]

[A]

[C]

H515R642.wmf

C: Gear Cover (1 screw)A: Harness Cover (2 screws)B: Relay Connector (2 clips)

[E]

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[F]

H515R643.wmfA: Sensor Stay (1 hook)B: Sensor Cover (2 hooks)C: Paper End Sensor (3 hooks)E: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)F: Feed Rollers (2 bushings, 1 clip)

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-33 H515

5.10.3. Paper Size Sensor

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

H515R644.wmfA: Paper GuideB: Bottom Plate (2 springs)C: Paper Size Dial (1 clip, 1 spring)D: Paper Size Sensor (2 hooks)

H515 5-34 SM

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT

5.11.1. Replacement

Remove the rear cover, then remove the NCU [A], the rear bracket [B], andthe SBU [C].

Note: After the SBU is replaced, perform the following adjustment procedure.

5.11.2. Tools Required

• Scan line adjustment chart: P/N H5159300• 200 dot-per-inch test pattern: P/N H0829020• Test lead: P/N H5159301• SBU adjustment knobs: P/N H0129300

5.11.3. Preparation

1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 0.2 V/unit (vertical) and 0.5 ms/unit(horizontal).

2. Connect the test lead to H515-CN 6 or to H551-CN8 on the MFCE.

3. Connect the oscilloscope probe to pin 2 (blue wire) and the ground to pin4 (black wire)

4. Clean the white pressure plate with a soft cloth and alcohol.

5. Light the xenon lamp (see section 4.1.15)

⇒

Rev.11/16/98

[C]

[A]

[B]

H515R509.wmfA: NCU (3 screws)B: Rear Bracket (3 screws)C: SBU (2 screws)

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

T&

A

DJU

ST

ME

NT

SM 5-35 H515

5.11.4. Adjustment

1. White Level

• Fit the adjustment knobs [A] through the SBU slots as shown.• Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].• Remove any test charts that are on the exposure glass.• Ensure that the complete white level waveform can be seen on the os-

cilloscope.• Adjust the waveforms until A and B in the oscilloscope display meet

the requirements.• Carefully tighten the SBU securing screws.

The waveform may have irregular patches if the lens, mirror, exposureglass, white pressure plate, or CCD is dirty.The xenon lamp may be wearing out if the waveform level is lower at theends than in the middle.The CCD may be defective if the waveform has sharp peaks or dropouts.

H515R552.wmf

A≤ 1.26 V

B≥ 0.46 V

(A-B)/A≤ 0.3

[A]

[B]H515R043.wmf

H515 5-36 SM

2. Focusing (MTF)

• Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.• Remove the lens cover [A] (2 screws).• Loosen the lens securing screw [B].• Focus the lens [C] untill B in the oscilloscope display is maximized (see

the diagram on the upper right)• Tighten the lens securing screw.

3. Reduction

• Place the 200 dpi test pattern on the exposure glass.

• Loosen the lens block securing the screws [A].• Focus the lens block [B] until the signal has 8 or fewer crosspoints (see

the diagram on the right.• Tighten the lens block securing screws.

Note: Alternately tighten each screw a little at a time.

H515R553.wmf

H515R554.wmf

[A][B]

[C][A]

H515R044.wmf

[A]

[B][A]

H515R045.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-37 H515

4. Scan Line

• Place the scan line test chart [A] on the exposure glass as shown.• Loosen the SBU securing screws [B].• Adjust the waveform with the adjusting knobs until it appears as shown

in the diagram on the right.

[B]H515R043.wmf

[A]

H515R047.wmf

H515R555.wmf

H515 5-38 SM

5. Scan Start Position

• Place the scan line test chart on the exposure glass as shown on theprevious page.

• Connect the oscilloscope to the test leads as follows:Channel 1 to VIDEO (pin 2 - blue wire), channel 2 to VADJ (pin 1 - redwire), and connect the ground to pin 4 (black wire)

• Set the oscilloscope scales as follows:Vertical - CH 1: 0.2 V/unit, CH 2: 2 V/unit; Horizontal - 20 µs/unit.

• Adjust the waveform until it appears as shown in the right-hand dia-gram. Do this by gently tapping the SBU as shown in the left-hand dia-gram.The peak of the VIDEO signal must be within 4 bits of the peak VADJsignal.

• Reset the oscilloscope to the original settings and repeat procedure 4(Scan Line) on the previous page. It may be necessary to recheck pro-cedures 4 and 5 until the scan line is perfectly positioned.

• Tighten the SBU securing screws.

H515R556.wmfH515R046.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-39 H515

5.12. IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

5.12.1. Overview

This section will explain how to adjust various scanning and printing parame-ters. Among these are the margin parameters as shown in the diagrambelow, which are named in accordance with the chart below the diagram.

Parameters Description Adjustable byFax - Tx Fax - Rx Copying

W1 Left margin Not adjustable Printer PrinterW2 Print/Scan width Not adjustable Not adjustable Not adjustableL1 Top margin Scanner Printer Scanner/PrinterL2 Print/Scan length Not adjustable Not adjustable Not adjustableL3 Bottom margin Scanner Not adjustable Scanner

+CAUTIONThe factory settings may not be the same as the “Initial settings”described in the following procedures. RAM reset level 0 will reset allthe scan and print margin parameters to the “Initial settings.”

W 1 W 2

L1L2

L3

H515R650.wmf

H515 5-40 SM

5.12.2. Scanner Parameters

1. Contrast

Text Mode Halftone ModeBit Switch Initial Setting Bit Switch Initial Setting

Normal Scanner 02 0E(H) Scanner 05 09(H)Lighten Scanner 03 10(H) Scanner 06 0D(H)Darken Scanner 04 0C(H) Scanner 07 02(H)

Text Area - - Scanner 08 08(H)

2. Margins

ParameterFormula

RAMAddress

UnitInitial

SettingW1, W2 Not adjustable

L1

This parameter will change the number of txmotor steps after the scan line sensor isactivated.To increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + 15.4xTo decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - 15.4xInitial setting of L1: 2 mm

48061C(H)1

15.4mm

9A(H)[154(D)]

L2 Not adjustable (Original length - L1 - L3)

L3

This parameter will change the number of txmotor steps after the scan line sensor isdeactivated.To increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - 15.4xTo decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + 15.4xInitial setting of L3: 2 mm

480620(H)(standard)

480622(H)(detail)

480624(H)(fine)

115.4

mm

79(H)[121(D)]

93(H)[147(D)

AF(H)[175(D)]

H515R651.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-41 H515

5.12.3. Printer Parameters

1. Margins (Main Scan Direction)

Parameter FormulaRAM

AddressUnit

InitialSetting

W1

1. Fax and Copy ModeTo increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + x/0.5To decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - x/0.5Initial setting of W1: 2 mm

Standardcassette:

4804F5(H)

1st paperfeed unit:

4804F6(H)

2nd paperfeed unit:

4804F7(H)

100 sheetcassette:

4804FA(H)

Bypassfeed:

4804FB(H)

0.5 mm 0A(H)

W2 Not adjustable

H515R648.wmf

H515 5-42 SM

2. Margins (Sub Scan Direction)

Parameter FormulaRAM

AddressUnit

InitialSetting

L1

Standard and 100 sheet cassette:To increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + x/0.68To decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - x/0.68Initial setting of L1: 2 mm

Other:To increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + x/0.34To decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - x/0.34Initial setting of L1: 2 mm

Standardcassette:

4804EA(H)

1st paperfeed unit:

4804EB(H)

2nd paperfeed unit:

4804EC(H)

100 sheetcassette:

4804EF(H)

Bypassfeeder:

4804F0(H)

0.68mm

0.34mm

0.34mm

0.68mm

0.34mm

00(H)

0D(H)

0D(H)

05(H)

00(H)

L2 Not adjustable

L3

This is only adjustable in bypass feed mode.

To increase the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting - x/0.34To decrease the margin by x mm:New setting = Current setting + x/0.34

Example: To increase the margin by 5 mm.5/0.34 ≈ 14.7 ≈ 15(D) = F(H)New setting = 3B - F = 2C(H)

480586(H)0.34mm

4A(H)

H515R651.wmf

RE

PLA

CE

ME

NT

&

AD

JUS

TM

EN

T

SM 5-43 H515

TROUBLESHOOTING

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING

If there is a copy quality problem that cannot be solved easily, try using thefollowing troubleshooting procedures, while referring to the point-to-pointdiagram. The procedures may not be exhaustive, but they may help you tofind the problem.

First, distinguish whether the problem is caused by the remote terminal or byyour machine. If the problem is caused by your machine, distinguish whetherit is due to a scanner problem or a printer problem.

Is the print imageO K ?

OK

NG

Is the imagereceived by fax

O K ?

OK

Is the print imageO K ?

OK

NGNG

Make a copy

Print a test pattern

Check the remoteterminal

Check the symptom again Check the scanner

Check the pr inter

or a report

H515t614.wmf

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-1 H515

6.1.1. Blank Copies

Possible Cause (Printer):• Poor drum sensitivity.• Laser optic components are out of position.• The proper bias voltages are not applied to the toner application roller

and/or the development roller.• The proper current is not applied to the transfer roller.

Action: 1. Print a test pattern or a report, and open the cover in the middle of

printing.

2. Check if there is toner adhered to the drum surface.If yes, do the following. If not, go to step 3.

• Check if the transfer roller is installed correctly.• Check if the development unit is installed correctly.• Check if the resistance between the transfer bias terminal on the devel-

opment unit and the transfer roller shaft is less than 10 kOhm, whilepushing the roller shaft down to the roller holder. Refer to page 5-18.

• If the resistance is OK, check the connections behind the power packand the power pack itself.

3. Check if there is toner on the surface of the development roller.If yes, do the following. If no, go to step 4.

• Check if all the laser optic components are properly positioned.• Try replacing the drum.

4. Check if the toner cartridge is empty. If yes, do the following. If no, go tostep 5.

• Check or replace the toner end sensor.

5. Do the following.• Check that the development unit is correctly installed.• Check if the resistance between the development roller bias terminal on

the development unit and the development roller shaft, the toner meteringplate, and the bias brush are less than 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.

• Check if the resistance between the toner application roller bias termi-nal on the development unit and the toner application roller shaft is lessthan 1 kOhm. Refer to page 5-18.

• If all the resistances are OK, check the connections behind the powerpack and the power pack itself.

H515 6-2 SM

6.1.2. Black Copies

Possible Cause (Scanner)• The scanner lamp, lamp stabilizer, or SBU is not connected or defective.

Action: 1. Check if the scanner lamp is connected properly.

2. Check if the scanner lamp or lamp stabilizer is not defective. If one orboth of them is (are) found defective, replace both items.

3. Check if the SBU is connected properly, or it is not defective.

4. Check if the SBU is defective.

Possible Cause (Printer)• The charge is not properly applied.

Action: 1. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and the

CTM, and the charge wire are properly connected. • If yes, go to step 2.• If no, fix the connections.

2. Check if the zener diode is not shorted.• If the zener diode is shorted, replace the zener diode.• If no, go to step 3.

3. Check the connections behind the power pack.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-3 H515

6.1.3. Dirty Background

Possible Cause (Scanner)• Scanner shading correction error or wrong threshold.

Action:

1. Clean the shading plate. 2. Adjust the scanner contrast threshold settings.

Possible Cause (Printer)• Poor drum sensitivity.• The charge is not properly applied.• The hot roller is dirty.

Action: 1. Try replacing the drum.

2. Check if the hot roller surface is dirty.• If yes, clean the roller or replace the cleaning pad.• If no, go to step 3.

3. Check if all the charge bias terminals on the development unit and theCTM, and the charge wire are properly connected.

• If yes, check or replace the power pack.• If no, fix the connections.

H515t612.wmfH515t607.wmf

H515 6-4 SM

6.1.4. Uneven Image Density

Possible Cause (Scanner) • Dirty exposure glass or mirrors• SBU position is not aligned to the scan line properly.

Action• Clean the scanner exposure glass or mirrors.• Adjust the SBU position (refer to section 5.11 for details).

Possible Cause (Printer) • Poor drum sensitivity.• Dirty laser optic components.• The toner metering blade is deformed, or incorrectly positioned.• Uneven toner supply in the development toner hopper.• Quenching lamp defect.

Action: 1. Print a solid black test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of

printing.

2. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the development roller.• If no, check the toner metering blade, and the toner supply mechanism

in the toner hopper. If yes, go to step 3.• If the image is lighter in the center of the image, toner may be low. Re-

place the CTM and supply more toner. 3. Check if the toner is evenly distributed on the drum.

• If no, check the drum sensitivity, the laser optic components, and thequenching lamp on the CTM.

• If yes, check if there is any dirt on the transfer roller surface.

H515t608.wmf H515t612.wmf

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-5 H515

6.1.5. Vertical Black Lines

Possible Cause (Scanner)• Dirt or dust on the exposure glass or mirrors.• Defective CCD element(s) on the SBU.• Dirty shading plate.

Action: 1. Clean the exposure glass, the mirrors, or the shading plate.

2. Replace the SBU.

Possible Cause (Printer)• Damaged cleaning blade.• Dirty hot roller stripper(s).

Action: 1. Replace the CTM.

2. Clean the hot roller strippers.


H515 6-6 SM

6.1.6. Horizontal Black Lines

Possible Cause (Printer)• The drum surface is scratched or damaged.• Replace corona leak failure.

Action:

1. Check that the surface of the drum is not damaged.• Replace the drum if it is damaged.

2. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Clean the charge wire.• Replace the CTM.


TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-7 H515

6.1.7. Vertical White Lines

Possible Cause (Printer)• The laser optic components are dirty.• The hot roller stripper scraped the toner off from the print paper.

Action:• Clean the laser optic components.• Check the hot roller stripper mechanism. Clean the strippers and re-

place them if they are damaged.


H515 6-8 SM

6.1.8. Horizontal White Lines

Possible Cause (Printer)• The surface of the development roller is damaged or deformed.• The development bias is not stable.• Transfer current is not stable.

Action: 1. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.

2. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear onthe drum surface.

• If yes, go to step 3.• If no, check the transfer roller surface and the transfer bias terminals

connections. If they are OK, check or replace the power pack.

3. Check if horizontal white lines (where toner is not adhered) appear onthe development roller surface.

• If yes, check if the development roller surface is not deformed. If it isOK, check or replace the power pack.

• If no, check for damage on the drum surface.


TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-9 H515

6.1.9. Black Dots/Spots

Possible Cause (Scanner)• Dust on the exposure glass.

Action:• Clean the exposure glass.• Try disabling MTF.

Possible Cause (Printer)• The drum surface is damaged (the interval X = approx. 94.2 mm).• Toner on the hot roller (the interval X = approx. 63 mm).

Action:• Replace the drum.• Clean the hot roller surface.

H515t602.wmf

H515 6-10 SM

6.1.10. White Spots in Black Image Areas

Possible Cause (Printer)• The drum surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots appear at 94.2

mm intervals).• The development roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots ap-

pear at 62.8 mm intervals).• The toner application roller surface is damaged (this is likely if the dots

appear at about 16.75 mm intervals).

Action:• Replace the drum.• Clean the surface of the development roller or replace the roller if it is

damaged.• Replace the development unit.

H515t601.wmf

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-11 H515

6.1.11. Faint Copies *

Possible Causes (Scanner)• Dirty shading plate and/or exposure glass• Incorrect scan threshold setting• Defective scanner lamp or SBU

Action:• Clean shading plate.• Adjust the scan threshold settings.• Replace the scanner lamp or the SBU.

Possible Causes (Printer)• Poor drum sensitivity.• Dirty laser optic components.• Incorrect development/ transfer bias• Defective quenching lamp• Low toner• Low fusing temperature


H515 6-12 SM

Action: 1. Check whether the toner saving feature has not been selected with the

user parameters. (If it has been selected, there is no problem.)

2. Print a test pattern, and open the cover in the middle of printing.

3. Check if the toner on the paper at the entrance of the fusing unit looksfaint.

• If yes, check or replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, and PSU.• If no, go to step 4.

4. Check if the toner on the drum looks faint.• If yes, go to step 5.• If no, check the contacts between the transfer bias terminals and power

pack.

5. Check if the toner on the development roller looks faint.• If yes, check all the contacts between the development and toner appli-

cation rollers’ bias terminals.• If no, try replacing the CTM and drum.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-13 H515

6.1.12. Vertical Black Band

Possible Cause (Printer)• Dirty charge corona wire.• The toner metering blade is deformed, damaged, or incorrectly posi-

tioned.

Action:• Clean the charge corona wire. The wire cleaner is on the CTM.• Replace the CTM.• Check the toner metering blade and replace if damaged.

H515t605 H515t612

H515 6-14 SM

6.1.13. Unfused Copies

Possible Cause (Printer)• The thermistor is defective.• The fusing pressure roller spring mechanism is defective.• The wrong type of toner is being used.• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.

Action: 1. Check if the correct type of paper and toner are being used.

• If yes, go to step 2.• If no, use recommended types of paper and toner.

2. Try replacing the fusing lamp and the roller.

6.1.14. Ghost Image

Possible Cause (Printer)• Poor drum sensitivity.• The cleaning blade is deformed or incorrectly positioned.• Dirty hot roller

Action:• Clean the cleaning blade.• Replace the CTM.• Clean the hot roller surface and/or replace the cleaning pad.• Replace the drum.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-15 H515

6.1.15. Toner on the Back of the Printer Paper

Possible Cause (Printer)• Dirty transfer roller• Dirty fusing pressure roller

Action:

1. Check if the transfer roller is dirty with toner.• If yes, clean the roller surface. 1) Take the roller off the machine.

2) Gently tap the roller shaft to remove the toner.

3) Turn the roller against a clean sheet of paper to let the toner transferonto the paper.

• If no, go to step 2.

2. Check if the fusing pressure roller is dirty with toner or not.• If yes, clean the fusing pressure roller.• If no, check for any other dirty rollers and clean them.

H515 6-16 SM

6.1.16. Misaligned Output (Data shifted to the right or left)

Possible Cause (Scanner)• Incorrect setting of the document guide.

Action:• Align each side of the document to the document guides.

Possible Cause (Printer)• The laser optics are misaligned.• Improper print margin setting (main scan direction).

Action:• Adjust the main scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)• Check that the laser optics are aligned correctly.

6.1.17. Misaligned Output (Image shifted vertically)/Reduced Image

Possible Cause:• Improper print margin (sub scan direction).• Dirty registration roller.

Action:• Adjust the sub scan print margin. (Refer to Section 5-12.)• Clean the registration roller.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-17 H515

6.2. MECHANICAL PROBLEMS

6.2.1. ADF/Scanner

1. Non Feed

Possible Cause:• An incorrect type or size of document is used. • The operation panel is not properly closed.• The pick-up and feed rollers are dirty or worn out.• The mechanical clutch mechanism for document pick-up is defective.• Incorrect positioning of the separation pad, or the pad is missing.• Inappropriate separation pressure setting.• The Tx motor is defective.

Action: 1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.

2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed.

3. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Clean the pick-up and feed rollers with a soft cloth and water, and re-

place them if they are damaged.• Check the spring mechanism of the pick-up roller and replace it if it is

damaged.• Adjust the separation pressure to the appropriate setting.• Check the connection between the MFDU (CN17) and the Tx motor.• Replace the Tx motor.

H515 6-18 SM

2. Jam

Possible Cause:• An incorrect type or size of document is used.• The document is too long.• The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.• Obstruction in the document paper path.• The scan line sensor is defective.• Defective tx motor

Action: 1. Check that a correct type of document is being used, and that the

document length is within the maximum setting.

2. Check for obstructions in the paper path.

3. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, or replace if damaged.• Check that the scan line sensor is working correctly.• Replace the Tx motor.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-19 H515

3. Skew

Possible Cause:• An incorrect type or size of document is used.• The document guide are not properly set.• The operation panel is not properly closed.• The scanner rollers (pick-up, feed, R1, and R2 rollers) are dirty.• Obstruction in the document paper path.• The separation pad is out of position.

Action: 1. Check that a correct type of document is being used.

2. Check that the operation panel is securely closed and also check thatthe document guide are properly set.


4. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Check that the separation pad is properly set. Replace if damaged.• Clean the rollers with a soft cloth and water, and replace if damaged.

4. Multi-feed

Action:• Adjust the separation pressure to the proper setting.• Clean or replace the separation pad.

H515 6-20 SM

6.2.2. Printer

1. Non-feed

Possible Cause:• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.• The paper cassette end fence are not properly set.• The paper lift mechaninsm (slide lock) are not working properly.• Malfunction in the paper feed clutch.• The paper feed roller(s) is not properly set.• The paper feed motor is defective.• The registration sensor is defective.

Action: 1. Check that a correct type of paper is being used.

2. Check that the paper cassette end fence is correctly set and check thepaper lift mechanism (slide lock and the springs).

3. Check that the feed clutch for the cassette that was used is workingproperly.

4. Check that the paper feed roller(s) were properly installed. Clean orreplace if necessary.

5. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace ifnecessary.

6. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.

7. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Check the connections between the MFDU (CN74) and the paper feed

motor.• Replace the paper feed motor.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-21 H515

2. Paper Jam - Inside the Printer

Possible Cause:• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.• The paper end fence and/or the paper guides in the cassette are not

properly set.• The registraton roller is dirty.• The registration sensor is defective.• Obstruction in the paper path.• The main motor is defective.

Action: 1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used, and check that the paper

end fence and the paper guides are correctly set.


3. Check the registration roller and its mechanism. Clean or replace, ifnecessary.

4. Check that the registration sensor is working properly.

5. If the problem still remains, do the following.• Check the connections between the MFDU (CN15) and the main motor.• Replace the main motor.• Check the MFDU output of power and drive signals to the main motor

(CN15-1, 3). If signals are not output, replace the MFDU or MFCE.• Check the fusing unit drive mechanism. Check that all the gears are

properly installed.

H515 6-22 SM

3. Jam - Fusing Exit

Possible Cause:• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.• Obstruction in the paper path.• The registration sensor is defective.• Malfunction in the fusing drive mechanism.• The paper feed out sensor is defective.• Malfunction in the hot roller stripper(s) mechanism.• Malfunction in the pressure mechanism in the fusing unit.

Action: 1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.


3. Check that the registration sensor is working correctly.

4. Check all the gears in the fusing drive mechanism.

5. Check that the paper feed out sensor is working correctly.

6. Check the hot roller strippers and the pressure mechanism in the fusingunit.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-23 H515

4. Skew

Possible Cause:• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.• Incorrect positioning of the paper guides in the paper cassette.• The corner separators are out of position.• The paper feed rollers are worn out or damaged.• Obstruction in the paper path.• Malfunction in the registration mechanism.

Action: 1. Check if a correct type of paper is being used.

2. Check that the paper guides and the corner separators in the papercassette are correctly set.

3. Check that the paper feed rollers are correctly installed and clean orreplace them if necessary.


5. Check the registration mechanism and clean or replace the rollers ifnecessary.

H515 6-24 SM

5. Multi-feed

Possible Cause:• A non-recommended type of paper is being used.• Incorrect positioning of the paper guides and/or end fence in the paper

cassette.

Action:• Check if a correct type of paper is being used.• Check that the paper guides and the end fence are correctly set.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-25 H515

6.3. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

If the Call Service indicator is lit, any of the following conditions has occurred.

Symptom Error Code Sub-code SC-codeCharge leak current detected while the chargecorona unit was activated.

9-17 11 1-11

Charge leak current detected while the chargecorona unit was not activated.

9-17 12 1-12

Laser diode failure 9-20 21 2-21Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at hightemperature during printing)

9-22 01 0-01

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp not at printingtemperature after warm-up)

9-22 02 0-02

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at hightemperature in power saver mode)

9-22 03 0-03


9-22 04 0-04

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperaturein power saver mode)

9-22 05 0-05

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at low temperatureduring printing) 9-22 07 0-07

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at an extremelyhigh temperature)

9-22 08 0-08

Fusing unit failure (thermistor error) 9-22 09 0-09Hexagonal mirror motor startup error 9-23 31 3-31Hexagonal mirror motor error while printing 9-23 32 3-32Main motor startup error 9-24 41 4-41Main motor error while printing 9-24 42 4-42

To determine which problem has occurred, either:• See the Auto Service Call report that was sent to the service station by

the machine. This report will list a sub-code, as well as the error mes-sage; the sub-code may help you locate the problem.Or, check the sub-code stored at RAM addresses 4805AF(H) and4805B1(H).

• Check the error code history using service function 03.• Try to clear the service call condition (for failures which are not related

to the fusing unit): switch the power off, wait 10 seconds, then switchback on.

• An SC-code is displayed on the LCD panel when the error occurs.

If the problem remains, work through the appropriate troubleshootingprocedure, from the following pages.

After each troubleshooting attempt, reset the machine and try to operate it. Ifthe machine still does not work, continue troubleshooting.

H515 6-26 SM

Symptom: Charger Leak (Error Code 9-17) This error will occur in either of the following conditions:• If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is on (sub-

code 11)• If MFDU CN21-8 stayed low for 3 seconds or more while the charge corona is off (sub-

code 12)Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. Clean the charge corona wire and unit. Check if the charge wire is cut off, replace theCTM if it is broken.2. If the sub-code is 11, do the following. If the sub-code is 12, go to step 5.3. Are all of the charge biasterminals connected ?

Go to step 4. Secure the connectionsand/or replace the CTM ordevelopment unit.

4. Replace the power pack.Does the problem stillremain?

Replace the MFDU orMFCE.

5. If the sub-code is 12, do the following.6. Does CN21-3 stay lowwhile in standby mode ?

Replace the MFDU orMFCE.

Go to step 7.

7. Does CN21-8 stay lowwhile in standby mode ?

Replace the power pack.

Symptom: LD Failure (Error Code 9-20) This error occurs in the following condition:• The laser synchronization signal was not detected within 10 ms of the start of printing

(sub-code 21)Check Action if Yes Action if No

Check that all the laser optic components are aligned correctly and clean them ifnecessary.Check that the optical fibre is properly set.Check the connection between the MFDU (CN26) and the LDDR.Check that the polygonal mirror motor and LDDR are correctly positioned.If the problem still remains, replace the LDDR, MFDU or MFCE.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-27 H515

Symptom: Fusing Unit Failure (Error Code 9-22) This error occurs in any of the following conditions:• During printing: If the fusing lamp stays above 190 °C for more than 60 seconds (sub-

code 01)• Before start printing: If the fusing lamp takes more than 40 seconds to reach 165 °C

(sub-code 02)• Power saver mode (fusing lamp OFF selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than 20

minutes to fall back to 100 °C. (sub-code 03)• Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp takes more than

20 minutes to fall back to 100 °C. (sub-code 04)• Power saver mode (fusing lamp Standby selected): If the fusing lamp stays below 80

°C for more than 18 seconds (sub-code 05)• During printing: If the fusing lamp stays below 140 °C for more than 1second (sub-

code 07)• At any time: If the fusing lamp temperature reaches 250 °C (sub-code 08)• At power on: If the thermistor is defective (disconnection) (sub-code 09)

Check Action if Yes Action if NoBefore checking anything, do the following.Reset the RAM address 4805AF(H) to 00(H), then switch the power off, wait for a few sec-onds, then switch back on. If the problem remains, check the following points.

Sub-code 01, 03, 04: 1. Replace the fusing lamp, thermistor, PSU, MFDU and/or MFCE.

Sub-code 02, 05, 07: 1. Check if the fusing lamp, thermostat, and/or the thermofuse is(are) open or not.

- If yes, replace the defective component(s).- If no, go to step 2.

2. Check if ac power is supplied to the lamp from the PSU or not.- If yes, go to step 3.- If no, replace the PSU.

3. Check if MFDU CN12-1 and/or MFDU CN12-2 stays low during printing.- If yes, replace the MFDU, or MFCE.- If no, check the connection from the PSU to the lamp.

Sub-code 08: 1. Check for any defects in the machine, and replace the defective parts.

If any damage could not be found, go to step 2. 2. Check if the thermistor is shorted or not.

- If yes, replace the thermistor.- If no, try replacing the MFDU and/or MFCE

Sub-code 09: 1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN25) and the thermistor.

H515 6-28 SM

Symptom: Polygonal Mirror Motor Failure (Error Code 9-23) This will error occur in either of the following conditions:• If MFDU CN14-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the polygonal mirror motor be-

ing switched on (sub-code 31)• If MFDU CN14-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during polygonal mirror mo-

tor operation (sub-code 32)Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. Check the connection between the MFDU (CN14) and the polygonal mirror motor. 2. Check that +24VM from

the MFDU (CN14-1) issupplied to the polygonalmirror motor.

Replace the polygonalmirror motor.

Replace the MFDU.If the problem still remains,replace the MFCE.

Symptom: Main Motor Failure (Error Code 9-24)This error occurs in either of the following conditions:• If MFDU CN15-4 does not go low within 10 seconds of the main motor being switched

on (sub-code 41)• If MFDU CN15-4 goes back to high for 3 seconds or more during main motor operation

(sub-code 42)Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. Check that the main motor drive mechanism is not obstructed.2. Check that all the main motor drive gears are correctly installed.

3. Replace the main motor.Does the problem still re-main?

Replace the MFDU.If the problem still occurs,replace the MFCE.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-29 H515

6.4. ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problemoccurs, try to fix the problem as suggested below. Note that error codes4-00, 01, 02, and 10 only appear in the error code display and on the servicereport.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-00 DIS/NSF not detected

within 40 seconds ofStart being pressed

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.The machine at the other end may be incompatible.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.

0-01 DCN receivedunexpectedly

The other party is out of paper or has a jammedprinter.The other party pressed Stop during communication.

0-03 Incompatible modem atthe other end

The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not receivedafter modem training

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the MFCE or NCU.The other terminal may be faulty; try sending toanother machine.If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be abad line.Cross referenceTx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 807FB7(PABX)Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch08 (PABX)Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4

0-05 Unsuccessful aftermodem training at 2400bps

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.Replace the MFCE or NCU.Check for line problems.Cross referenceSee error code 0-04.

0-06 The other terminal didnot reply to DCS

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may be defective or incompatible; trysending to another machine.Check for line problems.Cross referenceSee error code 0-04.

H515 6-30 SM

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-07 No post-message

response from the otherend after a page wassent

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may have jammed or run out of paper.The other end user may have disconnected the call.Check for a bad line. The other end may be defective; try sending toanother machine.

0-08 The other end sent RTNor PIN after receiving apage, because therewere too many errors

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may have jammed, or run out of paperor memory space.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other end may have a defectivemodem/NCU/MFDU; try sending to another machine.Check for line problems and noise.Cross referenceTx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN), RAM 4804B4(PABX)Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3 Switch08 (PABX)Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4-4

0-14 Non-standard postmessage response codereceived

Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Incompatible or defective remote terminal; trysending to another machine.Noisy line: resend.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Cross referenceSee error code 0-08.

0-15 The other end does nothave the confidential ortransfer function

The other terminal does not have the confidential rxor transfer function, or the other terminal’s memory isfull.

0-16 CFR or FTT not detectedafter modem training inconfidential or transfermode

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other end may have disconnected, or it may bedefective; try calling another machine.If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a lineproblem.Cross referenceSee error code 0-08.

0-17 Communication wasinterrupted by pressingthe Stop key.

If the Stop key was not pressed and this error keepsoccurring, replace the operation panel or OPU.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-31 H515

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-20 Facsimile data not

received within 6 seconds of retraining

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Check for line problems.Try calling another fax machine.Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first lineand/or rx cable equalizer setting.Cross referenceReconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)

0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line)from the other end notreceived within 5seconds of the previousEOL signal

Check the connections between the MFDU, NCU, &line.Check for line noise or other line problems.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The remote machine may be defective or may havedisconnected.Cross referenceMaximum interval between EOLs and ECM frames -G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

0-22 The signal from the otherend was interrupted formore than theacceptable modemcarrier drop time (default:0.2 s)

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Defective remote terminal.Check for line noise or other line problems.Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Cross referenceAcceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A,bits 0 and 1

0-23 Too many errors duringreception

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU, MFDU or MFCE.Defective remote terminal.Check for line noise or other line problems.Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rxerror criteria.Cross referenceRx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0and 1

0-24 Printer failure occurredwhile the memory wasfull during non-ECMreception; negativeresponse returned

There is no memory space available, or substitutereception is disabled.Try asking the user to add optional extra memory.

0-30 The other terminal didnot reply to NSS(A) in AIshort protocol mode

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other terminal may not be compatible.Cross referenceDedicated tx parameters - Section 4-4

H515 6-32 SM

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-52 Polarity changed during

communicationCheck the line connection.Retry communication.

1-00 Document jam Incorrectly inserted document or unsuitabledocument type.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.Cross referenceADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1

1-01 Document lengthexceeded the maximum

Try changing the maximum acceptable documentlength.Divide the document into smaller pieces.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.Cross referenceMax. document length - Scanner switch 00, bits 2and 3ADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1

1-10 Paper at the scan linewhen the power wasturned on.

Remove the paper.Check the scan line sensor.Cross referenceADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1

1-17 Document jam in thefeed-out area

Clear any debris from the sensor actuator.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.Cross referenceADF mechanical problems - Section 6-2-1

1-20 Paper did not reach thefusing exit at the end ofprinting

Remove the paper.Check the printer drive components and sensors.Cross referencePrinter mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

1-21 Paper present at thefusing exit after printing

Remove the paper.Check the printer drive components and sensors.Cross referencePrinter mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

1-30 Paper ran out duringprinting

Add paper in the cassette.

1-34 Paper ran out afterprinting


1-71 The cover was openedor the cassette waspulled out during printing

Close the cover or re-insert the cassette.

2-10 The modem cannot entertx mode

Replace the MFCE.

2-11 Only one V.21connection flag wasreceived

Replace the MFCE.

2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the MFCE.2-20 Abnormal

coding/decoding (cpu notready)

Replace the MFCE.

2-50 The machine reset itself If this is frequent, replace the MFCE.3-00 G4 interface board reset Replace the G4 interface board or MFCE.3-10 Disconnection during

ISDN G3 communicationCheck the other terminal and the ISDN line.The other terminal may dialed a wrong number.

3-11 Disconnection duringISDN G4 communication

Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-33 H515

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action3-20 A SAC signal was

received during ISDN G4communication

The operator at the other terminal may haveinterrupted the communication.

3-21 A CSA was sent duringISDN G4communication, becausethe Stop key waspressed

The local operator has interrupted thecommunication.

3-30 Mismatchedspecifications (rxcapability)

Check the receive capabilities requested from theother terminal.

4-00 One page took longerthan 8 minutes totransmit

Check for a bad line.Try the communication at a lower resolution, orwithout halftone.Change the MFCE.

4-01 Line current was cut Check the line connector.Check the connection between MFDU and NCU.Check for line problems.Replace the MFDU or the NCU.

4-02 The other end cut thereceived page as it waslonger than themaximum limit.

Split the page into smaller pieces, or ask the otherend to change their maximum receive length setting,then resend.

4-10 Communication failedbecause of ID Codemismatch (ClosedNetwork) or Tel. No./CSImismatch (Protectionagainst WrongConnections)

Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIsprogrammed correctly, then resend.The machine at the other end may be defective.

4-80 Start mark not detectedat the top of the OMRsheet

Check the ADF/scanner mechanisms.Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.Check if the document guide was not adjustedcorrectly.Check if the sheet was dirty.Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.

4-81 OMR sheet placed in theADF the wrong way

Place the sheet in the correct way.

4-82 Skew detection mark notdetected

Same as 4-80.

4-83 Skew was detectedbefore scanning theOMR data field

Check the ADF mechanisms.Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.

4-84 Guide mark not detectedwhile scanning an OMRsheet

Same as 4-80.

4-85 Skew was detectedwhile scanning the OMRdata field

Same as 4-83

4-89 End mark not detectedat the bottom of theOMR sheet

Same as 4-80.

H515 6-34 SM

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action4-90 Reduction rate in the

main scan direction notacceptable whilescanning an OMR sheet

Check if a reduced photocopy was used.Adjust the scanner correctly (refer to section 5.11).

5-00 Data reconstruction notpossible

Replace the MFCE.

5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the MFCE.5-20 Storage impossible

because of a lack ofmemory

Temporary memory shortage.

Test the SAF memory.Replace the MFCE or optional IC card.5-21 Memory overflow

5-22 Mode table overflowafter the second page ofa scanned document

Wait for the messages which are currently in thememory to be sent or delete some files from memory.

5-23 Print data error whenprinting a substitute rx orconfidential rx message

Test the SAF memory.Ask the other end to resend the message.Replace the MFCE or IC memory card.

5-24 Memory overflow afterthe second page of ascanned document

Try using a lower resolution setting.Wait for the messages which are currently in thememory to be sent or delete some files from memory.

5-25 SAF file access error Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, or the harddisk.

5-30 Mode table for the firstpage to be printed wasnot effective

Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, the functionupgrade card, or the hard disk.

6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signalwas received

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.

6-02 G3 ECM - EOR wasreceived

6-03 G3 ECM - non-standardV.21 code received

The other terminal may be defective.

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC notdetected

Check the line connection.Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.

6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile dataframe not received within18 seconds of CFR, butthere was no line fail

Check the line connection.Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.Try adjusting the rx cable equalizerCross referenceRx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)

6-06 G3 ECM -coding/decoding error

Defective MFDU.The other terminal may be defective.

6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PINreceived in reply toPPS.NULL

The other end pressed Stop during communication.The other terminal may be defective.

6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Check for a noisy line.Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.See code 6-05.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-35 H515

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action6-10 G3 ECM - error frames

still received at the otherend after allcommunication attemptsat 2400 bps

Check for line noise.Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or thededicated tx parameter for that address).Check the line connection.Defective remote terminal.

6-11 G3 ECM - printingimpossible because of amissing first line in theMMR coding

Check for problems in the printer mechanism.

6-21 V.21 flag detected duringhigh speed modemcommunication

The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.

6-39 V.21 signal not stoppedwithin 6 seconds

Replace the MFCE.

9-07 Paper non-feed or jamat the cassette entrance

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referencePaper non-feed - Section 6-2-2Jam at the cassette entrance - Section 6-2-2

9-08 Paper jam inside thedevelopment area

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referencePaper jam - Section 6-2-2

9-09 Paper jam in the fusingexit area

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referencePaper jam - Section 6-2-2

9-10 Toner end detected Replace the CTM.9-12 Cover open detected

during printingClose the cover, or check the cover sensors.

9-17 Charge corona unitfailure

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referenceCharge corona failure - Section 6-3

9-20 Laser diode failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referenceLD failure - Section 6-3

9-22 Fusing lamp failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referenceFusing lamp failure - Section 6-3

9-23 Hexagonal mirror motorfailure

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referenceMirror motor failure - Section 6-3

9-24 Main motor failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.Cross referenceMain motor failure - Section 6-3

9-30 Hard Disk Drive Error9-31 Disk Controller Error9-32 Disk Memory Error9-40 CRC error while

receiveing a frameCheck and adjust the host PC’s RS232C portsettings.Check if a proper cable is used and connectedsecurely.Check if the application is working correctly.If the problem persists, replace the MFCE.

Note: The optional RS232C interface may not beavailable in some countries.

9-41 Command 3rd try failed9-42 DCN received

unexpectedly9-43 Unexpected frame

received9-44 Response time over9-45 Frame transmission error

Rev. 6/97

H515 6-36 SM

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action9-50 Paper non-feed or jam

inside the upper paperfeed unit

Check if the recommended types of paper is used.Check if the paper guides are aligned to the papercorrectly.Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.

9-51 Jam at the paper exit ofthe upper paper feed unit.

Check if any blockage in the paper feed path.Check the paper feed mechanisms inside the unit.Check if the sensor is defective.

9-52 Paper non-feed or jaminside the lower paperfeed unit

Check if the recommended types of paper is used.Check if the paper guides are aligned to the papercorrectly.Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.

9-53 Jam at the paper exitfrom the lower paperfeed unit.


9-80 Bypass feed - paper non-feed or jam at theentrance

Check the registration roller and sensor.Cross referencePrinter mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

9-81 Bypass feed - paperlength exceeds themaximum limit (600 mm)

Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.Cross referencePrinter mechanical problems - Section 6-2-2

9-82 Optional 100 sheetcassette - paper non-feed or jam at thecassette entrance


9-83 Optional 100 sheetcassette - paper lengthexceeds the maximumlimit (600 mm)


TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-37 H515

6.5. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

6.5.1. Defective Sensor Table *

Sensor Symptoms if DefectiveDocument sensor

closed"CLEAR ORIGINAL" or "DIAL FAX NO" isdisplayed at power-up.

open"SET DOCUMENT" is still displayed after adocument is placed in the feeder.

Scan line sensorclosed

"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed at power-up.

open"CLEAR ORIGINAL" is displayed soon afterthe start of copying.

B4-width sensor * open The machine cannot scan B4 width.A3-width sensor * open The machine cannot scan A3 width.Interlock switches

closedThere is no alarm on opening the cover, and"CLOSE COVER" is not displayed.

open "CLOSE COVER" is displayed at power-up.Registration sensorFusing exit sensor

closed "CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.

open"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after thestart of copying.

Bypass feed sensor open Bypass feed cannot be used.Toner end sensor open Toner end is not indicated.Paper size sensor - Standard cas-sette

open "ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.

closedPage separation may be done even if theoriginal is the same size as the copy paper.

Paper end sensor - Standard cas-sette

closedThe Add Paper indicator lights even if paperis remaining.

openThe Add Paper indicator does not light whenthe paper has run out.

Paper size sensor - 100 sheetcassette

closed "ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.

openPage separation may be done even if theoriginal is the same size as the copy paper.

Paper end sensor - 100 sheetcassette closed

The Add Paper indicator on the lowercassette’s operation panel lights even ifpaper is remaining.

openThe Add Paper indicator on the lowercassette’s operation panel does not lightwhen the paper has run out.

Paper size sensor - Paper feedunit

open "ADD PAPER" is displayed at power-up.

closedPage separation may be done even if theoriginal is the same size as the copy paper.

Paper end sensor - Paper feedunit

closedThe Add Paper indicator lights even if paperis remaining.

openThe Add Paper indicator does not light whenthe paper has run out.

Relay sensor - Paper feed unit closed "CLEAR COPY" is displayed at power-up.

open"CLEAR COPY" is displayed soon after thestart of copying.

Jam release cover switch - Paperfeed unit type S

closed Cover open is not detected.open ”CLOSE COVER” is displayed.

H515 6-38 SM

6.5.2. Fuses

The only service-replaceable fuses are the following.

Fuse Symptoms if DefectivePSU - F1/ F2 No power to the machineMFDU - F1 No power to the drive components and

lamps.

TRO

UBLE

SHO

OTI

NG

SM 6-39 H515

ISDN OPTION TYPE 140

SERVICE MANUAL

1. INSTALLATION

1.1. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Install the hardware as described in secion 3.3.2. Then program the followingitems.

1.1.1. User Level Programming

The following items can be programmed with user function 61. Ensure thatthe items are programmed correctly.

Item ISDN PSTN RemarksG4 G3 G3

Own analog number

Used for transfer operations inPSTN G3 communication

Own ISDN-G4 number

Used for transfer operations inISDN G4 communication.

Own ISDN-G3 number

Used for transfer operations inISDN G3 communicaiton.

Polling ID 4

Used for secured polling, transferoperations, and closed network.

Confidential ID 4 4

Used for confidential reception.Optional SAF memory required.

Memory lock ID 4 4

Used for memory lock. OptionalSAF memory required.

Remote ID

4 4

Used for fax on demand operationsor transfer request using DTMFtones. Optional SAF memory orFax On Demand kit required.

RTI 4

Used to identify the terminal in G3NSF/NSS communications.

TTI 4

Printed on each transmitted page inG3 communicaitons.

G4_TID (Terminal ID)

Used to identify the terminal in G4communications.

CSI4

Used to identify the terminal in G3DIS/DCS communications overPSTN.

IG3_CSI (ISDN G3 CSI)

Used to identify the terminal in G3communications over an ISDN.

ISD

N T

ype

140

SM 1-1 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

1.1.2. Service Level Programming

Item Function No. RemarksSystem Switches

01 - 0System Switch 0A- Network used for G3 transmission- Network used for G4-to-G3 fallback

Communication Switches01 - 4

Communication Switch 07- G4-to-G3 fallback On/Off

G4 internal switches17 - 01

Change the country code, and reset themachine first. Then change any of thelocally required settings and/or thefollowing.Internal Switches 17, 18, 1A, 1B and 1C- G4 to G3 automatic fallback parametersParameter Switch 01, bits 4 to 6- Codec attenuation level

G4 parameter switches

17 - 02

ISDN international prefix 17 - 03 Program the international access code.G4 subscriber number - 1

17 - 04

When not using MSN* service:Program the ISDN subscriber numberhere. If an another terminal is on the samebus from the DSU, identify the terminalsusing a sub-address.When using MSN* service:Program the dedicated ISDN number forthe terminal as the 1st ISDN subscribernumber. If the customer wishes themachine to answer the calls to a differentnumber, program it as the 2nd subscribernumber.

G4 subscriber number - 2

17 - 05

ISDN G3 subscribernumber - 1

17 - 06When not using MSN* service:Program the ISDN subscriber numberhere. If an another terminal is on the samebus from the DSU, identify the terminalsusing a sub-address.When using MSN* service:Program the dedicated ISDN number forthe terminal as the 1st ISDN subscribernumber. If the customer wishes themachine to answer the calls to a differentnumber, program it as the 2nd subscribernumber.

ISDN G3 subscribernumber - 2

17 - 07

G4 subaddress17 - 08

Program a subaddress to identify theterminal, if two or more terminals answerthe call to the subscriber number for G4 fax.

ISDN G3 subaddress17 - 09

Program a subaddress to identify theterminal, if two or more terminals answerthe call to the subscriber number for G3 fax.

* MSN = Multiple Subscriber Number; This is also referred to as “Direct Dialing In” in somecountries

H515 ISDN Option Type 140 1-2 SM

After changing any setting, turn the machine off, wait for 5 or more seconds,then turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.1.2. SWITCH SETTINGS

The following tables show the default settings of the Internal Switches andthe Parameter Switches for each country setting.

1.2.1. Internal Switches

Switch No. USA Europe Asia Germany(1TR6)

France(CNET)

00Country code 11(H)

Europeancountry

code setting

Asiancountry

code setting01(H) 00(H)

01 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)02 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)03 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)04 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 20(H) 00(H)05 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)06 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)07 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)08 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)09 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 02(H) 00(H)0A 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0B 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0C 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0D 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0E 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0F 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)10 10(H) 10(H) 10(H) 10(H) ??(H)11 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 01(H) 00(H)12 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) ??(H)13 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)14 01(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)15 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)16 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 01(H) 02(H)17 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)18 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)19 01(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1A 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1B 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1C 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1D 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1E 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)1F 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)

ISD

N T

ype

140


1.2.2. Parameter Switches

Switch No. USA Europe Asia Germany(1TR6)

France(CNET)

00 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)01 30(H) 21(H) 21(H) 30(H) 30(H)02 01(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)03 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)04 07(H) 07(H) 07(H) 07(H) 07(H)05 02(H) 02(H) 02(H) 06(H) 02(H)06 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 01(H) 00(H)07 0B(H) 0B(H) 0B(H) 0B(H) 0B(H)08 07(H) 07(H) 07(H) 07(H) 07(H)09 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0A 01(H) 01(H) 01(H) 01(H) 01(H)0B 0B(H) 0B(H) 0B(H) 07(H) 0B(H)0C 01(H) 01(H) 01(H) 01(H) 01(H)0D 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)0E B2(H) B2(H) B2(H) B2(H) B2(H)0F 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H) 00(H)



2.1. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

To enter G4 service mode, press the following sequence of keys:

then immediately .

Then press .

After completing a G4 service mode operation, you must reset the machineby switching it off, waiting for more a few minutes, then switching back on.There is no need to do this for any of the G3 service modes.

2.1.1. G4 Internal Switch Programming (Function 01)

1. After entering G4 service mode, press .

Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settings areshown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.

2. Increment bit switch: ↓ Decrement bit switch: ↑ Example: Display bit switch 3: ↓ x 3

3. Adjust the bit switch.Example: To change the value of bit 7, press .




_

G4 NO: OR NO

01G4_ISW 02G4_PSW

03ISDN_IP 04G4_SN1

_

G4_ISW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH00: 00000000

G4_ISW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 00000000

G4_ISW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 10000000

ISD

N T

ype

140


4. Either:

• Adjust more bit switches - go to step 2.

• Finish -

2.1.2. G4 Parameter Switch Programming (Function 02)


Bit 7 is displayed at the left, and bit 0 at the right. The default settingsare shown on the top line, and the current settings on the bottom.

2. Increment bit switch: ↓ Decrement bit switch: ↑ Example: Display bit switch 3: ↓ x 3

3. Adjust the bit switch.Example: To change the value of bit 7, press .

4. Either:

• Adjust more bit switches - go to step 2.

• Finish -

G4_PSW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH00: 00000000

G4_PSW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 00000000

G4_PSW

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 10000000


2.1.3. Storing the ISDN International Access Code (Function 03)


2. Input the ISDN International Prefix (ISDN-IP).

Example:

2.1.4. Storing the First G4 Subscriber Number (Function 04)

Program the Second Subscriber Number when you have two units con-nected to the same line. Program the number of the other unit as the SecondSubscriber Number. When a call comes in, if the other unit is busy, your ma-chine will answer the call. Also, note the following:

• When calling, the first subscriber number will be added to the Setup sig-nal as the Calling ID.

• When receiving, the Called ID will be compared with the first and sec-ond subscriber numbers.


2. Input the number in the following format.Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number

Then press .

2.1.5. Storing the Second G4 Subscriber Number (Function 05)


2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.

Then press .

ISDN_IP

_

G4_SN1

_

G4_SN2

_

ISD

N T

ype

140


2.1.6. Storing the First ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 06)

The function of this is similar to the G4 Subscriber Number, except that it op-erates for G3 communications on the IDSN. 1. After entering G4 service mode,

press .

2. Input the number in the following format.Area Code Pause (-) Local Subscriber Number

Then press .

2.1.7. Storing the Second ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Function 07)


2. Input the number as explained in the previous section.

Then press .

2.1.8. Storing the G4 Subaddress (Function 08)

1. After entering G4 service mode,press .

2. Input the subaddress. Then press .

2.1.9. Storing the ISDN G3 Subaddress (Function 09)


2. Input the subaddress. Then press .

IG3_SN1

_

IG3_SN2

_

G4_SA

_

IG3_SA

_


2.1.10. Printing a G4 Memory Dump (Function 10)

Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list. Refer to the Appendix Afor more details.


2. Input the range of addresses that you wish to print.Example: Addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:

Input % % .

2.1.11. Printing a G4 Protocol Dump List (Function 11)

1. After entering G4 service mode, set parameter switch E bit 1 to 1 (useG4 function 02). Then make a test communication.

2. From the G4 service mode menu, press .

3. Either:

• Print a protocol dump list for the B and D channels:

• Print a protocol dump list for the D channel:

• Print a protocol dump list for the B channel link layer:

• Print a protocol dump list for the D channel link layer:

4. Reset parameter switch E bit 1 to "0" after you have finished.

G4 MEMORY DUMP


G4_DMP2

D+Bch1

PRESS START

0

ISD

N T

ype

140


2.1.12. Printing the G4 System Parameter List (Function 12)


2.

2.1.13. Modem/DTMF Tone Tests (Function 13)

This is only for use during PTT approval tests.


PRESS START


2.2. BIT SWITCHES

WARNINGDo not adjust a bit switch that is described as "Not used", as this maycause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is notaccepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,

such as Japan.

Note: After changing any of the switches below, turn off the machine, wait for5 seconds or more, and turn it back on, so that the new settings take effect.

2.2.1. G4 Internal Switches

Bit Switch 00

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to7

Country code

Bit 4 3 2 1 0 Country 0 0 0 0 0 France 0 0 0 0 1 Germany (1TR6 mode) 0 0 0 1 0 UK 0 0 0 1 1 Italy 0 0 1 0 0 Austria 0 0 1 0 1 Belgium 0 0 1 1 0 Denmark 0 0 1 1 1 Finland 0 1 0 0 0 Ireland 0 1 0 0 1 Norway 0 1 0 1 0 Sweden 0 1 0 1 1 Switzerland 0 1 1 0 0 Portugal 0 1 1 0 1 Netherlands 0 1 1 1 0 Spain 0 1 1 1 1 Israel 1 0 0 0 1 USA 1 0 0 1 0 Asia 1 0 0 1 1 Japan 1 0 1 0 0 Hong Kong 1 0 1 0 1 South Africa 1 0 1 1 0 Australia 1 0 1 1 1 New Zealand 1 1 0 0 0 Singapore 1 1 0 0 1 Malaysia

Note: In Germany, use the UK setting for the EuroISDN lines.

Bit switches 01 and 02 are not used.

ISD

N T

ype

140


Bit Switch 03

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Amount of protocol dumpdata in one protocol dump list0: Last communication only1: Up to the limit of thememory area for protocoldumping

Change this bit to 0 if you want to have a protocoldump list of the last communication only.This bit is only effective for the dump list #2 (D +Bch1).

1to7

Not used Do not change the factory settings.

Bit Switch 04

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to4


5

RCBCTR0: Not valid 1: Valid

This bit is used in Germany; set it to 1 for German PTTapproval tests.1: RCBCTR counts consecutive R:RNR signals. If thecounter reaches the value of N2, the link is disconnected.

6 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

7

Bit Switch 05

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Not used Do not change the factory setting.

1

Logical channelnumber (LCN)0: Not controlled1: Fixed at 01

This bit is normally 0. However, some networks may requirea fixed LCN. In such cases, this bit should be 1, and youmay have to set a different value for the LCN using G4Parameter Switch A.

2Protocol ID check0: Yes 1: No

The Protocol ID is in the CR packet.

3to7



Bit Switch 06

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Inclusion of the DTEaddress in the S:CRpacket0: No 1: Yes

When the CR packet format matches ISO8208 protocol,some networks may require this bit to be set at 1.This bit is only effective if bit 0 of G4 Parameter switch 6 isat 0.

1Calling and calledDTE addresses0: Not used 1: Used

This is only for packet networks. The CR packet shouldcontain the rx side’s DTE address, but does not have toinclude the tx side’s; it can include it as an option.

2to7

Not used Do not change the factory setting.

Bit switch 07 and 08 are not used.

Bit Switch 09

FUNCTION COMMENTS


1

New session withinthe same call0: Not accepted1: Accepted

0: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends backS:RSSN.1: If a new R:CSS is received, the machine sends backS:RSSP. Set this bit to 1 for German PTT approval tests.

2to7


Bit switches 0A to 0F are not used.

Bit Switch 10 (Dch. Layer 1)

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0Connection detector0: Disabled 1: Enabled

In most countries (including Europe), this should bedisabled.

1

2

Layer 1 T3 timerBit 2 1 Time 0 0 5 seconds 0 1 29 seconds 1 0 10 seconds 1 1 Not used

This should be kept at 5 seconds (both bits at 0) fornormal operation. However, you may have to change thisduring PTT approval tests.

3Layer 1 T4 timer0: Not used 1: Used

Set this bit to 1 for French PTT approval tests.


5

6

INFO1 signal resend0: Resend1: No resend

0: Some DSUs may not reply to the INFO1 signal withINFO2, if there is noise in the INFO1 signal accidentally.Try changing this bit to 0, to resend INFO1 before themachine displays “CHECK INTERFACE”.

7Loop back 4 mode0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This is normally kept at 0. However, set it to 1 for BritishPTT approval tests.

ISD

N T

ype

140


Bit Switch 11 (Dch. Layer 2)

FUNCTION COMMENTS


1

Type of TEI used0: Dynamic TEI1: Static TEI

This is normally fixed at 0. However, some networks suchas the Northern Telecom ISDN may require this bit to be setat 1 (see below). In this case, you may have to change thevalues of bits 2 to 7.

2to7

Static TEI value This is used in the USA with the DMS100 (NorthernTelecom ISDN) exchanger.Store the lowest bit of the TEI at bit 7 and the highest bit ofthe TEI at bit 2.Example: If the static TEI is 011000, set bits 3 and 4 to 1and bits 2, 5, 6, and 7 to 0.

Bit switch 12 is not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.

Bit Switch 13: D channel layer 3 (Attachment IE in S: SETUP)

FUNCTION COMMENTS


1

2

Attachment of callingID0: No 1: Yes

Normally, this bit should be at 0, because most networksadd the calling ID to the SETUP signal to the receiver.However, some networks may require the machine to addthis ID. Only in this case should this bit be at 1.

3

Attachment of theLower LayerCapabilities0: No 1: Yes

This bit determines whether Lower Layer Capabilities areinformed in the [SETUP] signal or not.Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.

4

Attachment of theHigher LayerCapabilities0: Yes 1: No

This bit determines whether Higher Layer Capabilities areinformed in the [SETUP] signal or not.Keep this bit at 0 in most cases.

5to7



Bit Switch 14: D channel layer 3 (Selection IE in S: SETUP)

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

ISDN G3 informationtransfer capability0: 3.1 kHz audio1: Speech

In tx mode, this determines the information transfercapability informed in the [SETUP] message.In rx mode, this determines the information transfercapability that the machine can use to receive a call.Refer to Appendix C for more details.Set this bit to 1 if the ISDN does not support 3.1 kHzaudio. This bit is only used in the USA and the UK.


2

3

4

Channel selection in[SETUP] in tx modeBit 4 3 Setting 0 0 Any channel 0 1 B1 channel 1 0 B2 channel 1 1 Not used

Any channel: When this is informed to the exchanger,the exchanger will select either B1 or B2.

5Called ID mapping0: Called party number1: Keypad facility

0: Called ID is mapped to the called party number.1: Called ID is mapped to the keypad facility.On the 5ESS network (USA), set it to 1.

6

Numbering plan for thecalled party number0: Unknown1: E.164

E.164: This may be used in Sweden if an AXE10exchanger is fitted with old software, and in Australia.Unknown: This is the normal setting.

7Subaddress coding type0: IA5 (NSAP)1: BCD (ISO8348)

This is normally kept at 0. However, some networksrequire this bit to be at 1.

Bit Switch 15: D channel layer 3 (Judgement R: MSG)

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Action when receiving[SETUP] signal containingno called subaddress, if thesubaddress wasprogrammed in the dialednumber0: A reply is sent1: No reply is sent

This bit depends on user requirements. If it is at 1,communication will be halted if the other terminal hasnot input the subaddress.Refer to Appendix C for more details.

1to4

Not used Do not change the factory settings

5

Global call reference0: Ignored1: Global call number isused

Global call reference means ’call reference value = 0’.This bit determines how to deal with such an incomingcall if received from the network.Keep this bit at 1 in France and Germany (1TR6), alsoin countries where the global call reference is used.


7

ISD

N T

ype

140


Bit Switch 16: D channel layer 3 (Approval)

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Answer delay timeBit 1 0 Setting 0 0 No delay 0 1 1.0 seconds delayed(1TR6) 1 0 0.5 seconds delayed(CNET) 1 1 Not used

In Germany (1TR6) and France (CNET), a timedelay to answer a call is required.In other countries, use this switch as follows:If the machine is connected to the same bus fromthe DSU as a model K200 is connected, themachine receives most of the calls because theresponse time to a call is faster than the K200.If the customer wants the K200 to receive most ofthe calls, adjust the response time using these bits.If the customer does not want one machine toreceive most of the calls, use subaddresses toidentify each terminal.

2

Action when receiving[SETUP] signal containinguser-specific callrd partysubaddress0: Ignores the call1: Receives the call

Normally, the 3rd octet of called party subaddressinformation in the [SETUP] signal is set to NSAP.However, some networks may add “user-specific”subaddress to the [SETUP] signal (UK), and theresult of this is that the machine won’t answer thecall if a subaddress is specified.So, change this bit to 1 to let the machine receivethe call if the machine is connected to such anetwork.


4

5

Indicated bearer capabilities0: 56 kbps 1: 64 kbps

1: 64 kbps calling is indicated in the BearerCapabilities, but communication is at 56 k. Use thisbit if the machine is connected to a network whichdoes not accept a 56 kbps data transfer rate as abearer capability.


7

Bit Switch 17: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 1

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to6

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3Bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17 contain a CPS code, and bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 18contain another CPS code. If a CPS code is received which is the same as either ofthese, communication will fall back from ISDN G4 mode to ISDN G3 mode.The CPS codes must be the same as those specified in table 4-13 of CCITTrecommendation Q.931.Examples: Bit 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 1 CPS code 651 0 1 1 0 0 0 CPS code 88

For the codes in bits 0 to 6 of bit switches 17 and 18 to be recognized, bit 7 of bitswitch 17 must be 1. Also, bit 0 of the Communication Switch 07 must be at 0, orFallback from G4 to G3 will be disabled.



FUNCTION COMMENTS

7

This bit determines whether fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt of one of theCPS codes programmed in bit switch 17 or 18, or on receipt of a certain standardcode.0: Fallback occurs on receipt of any of the following CPS codes:

UK (EuroISDN mode) - #3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65, #79, #88, and #127Germany (1TR6 mode) - #3, #31, #53, #58, #62, #89, and #90France - #3, #65, #88, and #113

Others - #3, #65, and #88 1: Fallback from G4 to G3 occurs on receipt any of above CPS codes or one of theCPS codes programmed in bit switch 17, 18, 1A, 1B, or 1C


FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to6

Condition for fallback from G4 to G3See the explanation for bits 0 to 6 of bit switch 17

7

This bit helps to choose the CPS code set for G4 to G3 fallback.0: Fallback occurs on receipt of the CPS code set which is specified by the countrycode setting.1: Fallback occurs on receipt of the UK CPS code set (#3, #18, #57, #58, # 63, # 65,#79, #88, and #127) even if another counry code is programmed.

ISD

N T

ype

140


Bit Switch 19

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Permanence of the link0: Set/released eachLAPD call1: Permanent

Keep this at 1 in the USA. In other areas, this bit is normally0, depending on network requirements.

1Channel used in ISDNL2 (64k) mode0: B1 1: B2

When making an IDSN L2 back-to-back test, you can selecteither the B1 or B2 channel with this bit switch.

2to7


Bit Switch 1A: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 3

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to6


7 Not used. Do not change the setting.

Bit Switch 1B: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 4

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to6



Bit Switch 1C: CPS Code Used for G4 to G3 Fallback - 5

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to6



Bit switches 1D to 1F are not used. Do not change any of the factory settings.


2.2.2. G4 Parameter Switches

Parameter Switch 00

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

Network typeBit 2 1 0 Type x 0 0 Circuitswitched ISDN Other settings:Not used

Do not change the default setting.

3to7

Not used Do not change the default settings.

Parameter Switch 01

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0Voice coding0: µ law1: A law

0: This setting is used in Japan, Taiwan, and the USA.1: This setting is used in Europe and Asia.

1

Action when [SETUP]signal without HLC isreceived0: Respond to the call1: Not respond to thecall

If there are several TEs on the same bus and the machineresponds to calls for another TE, the call may be withoutHLC information.Identify the type of calling terminal and change this bit to 1if the caller is not a fax machine.

2 Not used Do not change the default settings.

3

456

Signal attenuation level for G3 fax signals received from ISDN line.If an analog signal comes over an digital line, the signal level after decoding by theTE is theorically the same as the level at the entrance to the digital line. However,this sometimes causes the received signal level to be too high at the received end. Inthis case, adjust the decoded signal’s attenuation level using these switches.The values in the “Codec” column below show the attenuation level at the G4interface board. The values in the “Modem” column show the actual attenuation levelat the modem, because the signal is attenuated again on the MFCE by -6dB.

Bit 6 5 4 Codec Modem (Actual attenuation level) 0 0 0 -4.5dB -10.5dB 0 0 1 -2.5dB -8.5dB 0 1 0 -0.5dB -6.5dB 0 1 1 +1.5dB -4.5dB (default setting) 1 0 0 +3.5dB -2.5dB 1 0 1 +5.5dB -0.5dB 1 1 0 +7.5dB +1.5dB 1 1 1 +9.5dB +3.5dB

7 Not used Do not change the default setting.

ISD

N T

ype

140


Parameter Switch 02

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Data rate (kbps)Bit 1 0 Setting 0 0 64 kbps 0 1 56 kbps

Other settings: Not used


3

4

5

Transmission modeBit 5 4 Mode 0 0 CS

Other settings: Not used


7

Parameter Switch 03

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Link modulus0: 8 1: 128

This setting determines whether protocol frame numberingis done using 3 bits (0 to 7 then start again at 0) or 7 bits (0to 127 then start again at 0). Set this bit switch to match thenetwork’s specifications.

1to7


Parameter Switch 04 is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.

Parameter Switch 05

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

3

Link timer (D-channellayer 2 T1 timer)Bit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 0 0 0 0 s 0 0 0 1 1 s 0 0 1 0 2 s and so on until 1 0 1 0 10 s

The link timer is the maximum allowable time betweensending a protocol frame and receiving a response framefrom the remote terminal.

4to7


Parameter Switch 06

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Layer 3 protocol0: ISO82081: T.70NULL

Set this bit to match the type of layer 3 signalling used bythe ISDN.The dedicated parameters have the same setting forspecific destinations.


Parameter Switch 06

FUNCTION COMMENTS


2

3

4Packet modulus0: 8 1: 128

Do not change the default setting, unless the machine isexperiencing compatibility problems.


6

7

Parameter Switch 07

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

3

Packet sizeBit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 1 1 1 128 1 0 0 0 256 1 0 0 1 512 1 0 1 0 1024 1 0 1 1 2048

This value is sent in the CR packet. This value must matchthe value stored in the other terminal, or communication willstop (CI will be returned). If the other end returns CI, checkthe value of the packet window size with the other party.Note that this value must be the same as the valueprogrammed for the transport block size (G4 ParameterSwitch B, bits 0 to 3).Normally, do not change the default setting.

4to7


Parameter Switch 08

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

3

Packet window sizeBit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 and so on until 1 1 1 1 15

This is the maximum number of unacknowledged packetsthat the machine can send out before having to pause andwait for an acknowledgement from the other end.

This should be kept at 7 normally.

If the packet modulus (G4 Parameter Switch 6, bit 4) is 8,the packet window size cannot be more than 7. However, ifthe packet modulus is 128, the window size can be up to15. Also, if the layer 3 protocol setting (G4 ParameterSwitch 6, bit 0) is at IS8208, the packet window size cannotbe more than 7.

4to7


ISD

N T

ype

140


Parameter Switch 09

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

3

LCGNBit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 2 and so on until 1 1 1 1 15

Keep the value of the LCGN at 0.

4to7


Parameter Switch 0A

FUNCTION COMMENTS

01234567

LCNBit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 3 and so on until 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255

Keep at the value of the LCN at 1.

Parameter Switch 0B

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

2

3

Transport block sizeBit 3 2 1 0 Value 0 1 1 1 128 1 0 0 0 256 1 0 0 1 512 1 0 1 0 1024 1 0 1 1 2048

This value must match the value set in the other terminal.Note that this value must be the same as the valueprogrammed for the packet size (G4 Parameter Switch 7,bits 0 to 3). Also, the transport block size is limited by theamount of memory in the remote terminal.

4to7


Parameter Switch 0C is not used. Do not change any of the default settings.


Parameter Switch 0D

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Back-to-back test modeBit 1 0 Setting 0 0 Off 0 1 Not used 1 0 ISDN L2 test mode (TE mode) 1 1 ISDN L2 test mode (NT mode)

When doing a back-to-back test or doinga demonstration without a line simulator,use these bits to set up one of themachines in TE mode, and the other inNT mode. After the test, return both bitsto 0.See "Back-to-back Testing" in theTroubleshooting section for full details.

2to7


Parameter Switch E

FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Troubleshooing mode -real time status codesdisplay0: Off 1: On

If this is switched on, the status codes will be displayed inthe lower two lines of the LCD. These codes are explainedin the Troubleshooting section (G4CCU Status Codes).Change this bit back to 0 after testing.

1Saving frames to theprotocol dump list0: Off 1: On

Keep this bit at 1 normally.

2to7


ISD

N T

ype

140


2.3. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS *

The following G4 communication parameter bytes have been added for eachQuick Dial and Speed Dial. For how to program Dedicated Transmission Pa-rameters, refer to the Service Manual for the base machine.

Switches 01 to 04 are for use with Group 3 communication and are ex-plained in the Service Manual for the base machine. Switch 08 is not used.

Switch 05

FUNCTION

0123

Data rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 64 kbps 0 0 0 1 56 kbps 1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 2, bits 0 and 1 Other settings: Not used

4 Not used

5

6

7

Switch 06

FUNCTION

0123

Link modulus Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Modulo 8 0 0 0 1 Modulo 128 1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 3, bit 0 Other settings: Not used

4 Not used

5

6

7

Switch 07

FUNCTION

0123

Layer 3 protocol Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 IS.8208 0 0 0 1 T.70 NULL 1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 6, bit 0 Other settings: Not used

4567

Packet modulus Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting 0 0 0 0 Modulo 8 0 0 0 1 Modulo 128 1 1 1 1 As in Parameter Switch 6, bit 4 Other settings: Not used


3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1. ERROR CODES

The tables on the following pages show the error codes that will be printedon the Service Monitor Report. See the Service Manual for the base ma-chine for instructions on how to print this report.

The meaning of the numbers in the Action column is as follows. 1. Check Layer 1 signalling with a protocol analyzer to determine the cause

of the problem. This may require assistance from a G4 specialist.

2. Repeat the communication. If the problem does not repeat itself, theproblem was a temporary one caused by the user connecting the ma-chine to another interface. However, if the problem remains, there is anetwork problem.

3. There is a network problem.

4. There is a network problem. Do the following:• Check the error bit rate of the network. If it is high, contact the network

and ask them to improve the line.• Check the network speed (is it 56 or 64 kbps), and make sure that the

bit switch setting is correct. You may also use the dedicated transmis-sion parameters if this problem only occurs when dialing certain num-bers.

• Check that the user dialed the correct number.

5. There is a network problem, or a problem in the machine at the other end.

6. There is a problem in the machine at the other end; ask a technician tocheck it.

7. The machine at the other end is not a Group 4 fax terminal.

8. The machine is not compatible with the machine at the other end. A com-patibility test is needed.

Error codes related with the errors detected by the FCU are listed in the Serv-ice Manual of the main body.

ISD

N T

ype

140


3.1.1. D-channel Layer Management

Code Probable Cause Action7-00 Link reset 27-01 Link set-up failed because of time-out. 27-02 Link release failed because of time-out. 27-03 Link set-up parameter error 2

3.1.2. D-channel, Layer 1

Code Probable Cause Action7-10 T3 timeout (layer 1 activation error) 17-11 No connection on the S0 interface 17-12 Deactivated 1

3.1.3. D-channel Link Layer

Code Probable Cause Action

7-20At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited S(F=1).

2

7-21At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM(F=1).

2

7-22 At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=1). 2

7-23At the start of link set-up, the machine received an unsolicited DM(F=0).

2

7-24 At TEI release, the machine received an unsolicited UA (F=0). 27-25 SABME received at the start of network link set-up No error7-26 N200 retransmission error for SABME 27-27 N200 retransmission error for DISC 27-28 N200 retransmission error for situation enquiry (RR) 27-29 N(R) sequence number error 37-30 N(S) sequence number error 37-31 FRMR received 37-32 Non-standard frame received 37-33 Abnormal frame length 37-34 N201 error; information field N in the I frame exceeded N201 37-35 T201 timeout; timeout while waiting for checking 37-36 T202 timeout; timeout while waiting for ID assignment 3


3.1.4. D-channel Network Layer

Code Probable Cause Action7-40 Insufficient mandatory information elements 37-41 Abnormal LI for a mandatory information element 37-42 T301 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN 37-43 T303 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc. 37-44 T304 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CALL-PROC etc. 37-45 T305 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL 37-46 T308 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:REL-COMP 37-47 T310 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:ALERT etc. 37-48 T313 timeout; timeout while waiting for R:CONN-ACK 37-49 Internal error 37-51 Release call reference during communication 3

3.1.5. B-channel Link Layer

Code Probable Cause Action7-60 T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for flag 47-61 T3 timeout; timeout while waiting for SABM during an incoming call 47-62 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for UA after sending SABM 5

7-63T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to a transmittedS frame (P=1)

5

7-64T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for SABM or DISC aftersending FRMR

5

7-65 T1 timeout x N2; timeout while waiting for a response to DISC 57-66 RNR x N2 (other end busy, RCB counter error) 57-67 Invalid (Ad) frame received 57-68 Invalid short frame received 57-69 Link reset error 57-70 FRMR received 57-71 Non-standard (Cn) frame received 57-72 An S or U frame having an information field was received 57-73 A frame longer than the maximum N1 length was received 57-74 An S or I frame having an N(R) error was received 57-75 CRC error 3

ISD

N T

ype

140


3.1.6. B-channel Network Layer

Code Probable Cause Action7-80 A packet having an abnormal GFI was received 6

7-81A packet was received that had a logical channel number differentfrom the logical channel being used for the communication

6

7-82 A packet containing a format error was received 67-83 A packet containing an LI error was received 77-84 A CN packet was received that had a PID different from 02 77-85 Unsupported packet type received 77-86 Abnormal or unsupported facility received 77-87 P(s) sequence number error 67-88 P(r) sequence number error 67-89 A reset using S:RQ or R:RI occurred 67-90 A restart using S:RQ or R:SI occurred 6

7-91Call set-up error; in reply to S:CR, R:CI was received to indicaterejection of the call

7

7-92 T20 timeout; timeout while waiting for an SF packet 67-93 T21 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CC packet 67-94 T22 timeout; timeout while waiting for an RF packet 67-95 T23 timeout; timeout while waiting for a CF packet 67-96 T10 timeout; timeout while waiting for the first frame 6

3.1.7. Transport Layer

Code Probable Cause Action8-00 Invalid block received 88-01 TCC block received 88-02 TBR block received 88-05 TCR block; block format error 88-06 TCR block; block size parameter LI error 88-07 TCR block; extended addressing LI error 88-08 TCR block; block size length error 88-10 TCA block; block format error 8

8-11TCA block; Tx origin reference data in TCR disagreed with theaddress reference data in TCA

8

8-12 TCA block; octet 7 did not equal 0 88-13 TCA block; extended addressing LI error 88-14 TCA block; block size exceeded that set by TCR 88-15 TCA block; block size parameter LI error 88-20 TDT block; block format error 88-21 TDT block; octet 3 did not equal either 00 or 80(H) 8

8-22TDT block; the end indicator was "Continue" even though there wasno field data

8

8-23TDT block; an end block with no field data was received after an endindicator of "End"

8

8-26 Timeout during state 0.2 88-27 Timeout during state 1.1 88-28 Timeout during state 0.3 8


3.1.8. Session Layer

Code Probable Cause Action8-30 Invalid frame received 88-31 RSSN received 88-32 CSA received 88-34 Calling terminal identification error in CSS 88-35 Date and time error in CSS 88-36 Window size error in CSS 88-37 Service identification error in CSS 88-38 Session user data error in CSS 88-39 CSS rejected (new session rejected) 88-40 Called terminal identification error in RSSP 88-41 Date and time error in RSSP 88-42 Date and time in RSSP was not the same as that in CSS 88-43 Window size error in RSSP 88-44 Service identification error in RSSP 88-45 Session user data error in RSSP 88-47 Message synchronization error inside the CCU 88-48 Document task busy 88-50 Ti timeout; non-communication surveillance timer (T.62) 88-51 T2 timeout; timeout while waiting for a response (T.62) 88-52 T3 timeout; CSA timer timeout (T.62) 8

8-53G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for a newsession

8

8-54G4 board load timer timeout; calling side waited too long for transportprobability

8

8-55 G4 board load timer timeout; called side waited too long for S:RSSP 8

8-56G4 board load timer timeout; document transmission surveillancetimer timeout

8

8-57G4 board load timer timeout; timeout while waiting for a user abortrequest after a provider fail

8

3.1.9. Document Layer

Code Probable Cause Action8-60 T.62 coding format error (LI error) 88-61 A mandatory PI was absent, or the LI for a mandatory PI was 0 8

8-62Calling/called terminal identification LI was different from thatspecified by F.184 (LI = 24)

8

8-63 The LI for session user data exceeded the maximum value (512) 88-64 The LI for CDUI was not 0 8

8-65Checkpoint and document reference numbers LI error, or they werenot in T.61 (ASCII) coding

8

8-66 The checkpoint reference number differed from the expected value 88-70 RDGR received 88-71 A non-standard PDU was received while in calling mode 88-72 A non-standard PDU was received while in called mode 88-73 Abnormal PDU received while in calling state ds1 88-74 15 consecutive CDCL signals received 88-75 Session window size control error (size not equal to 0) 88-76 Internal error 8

ISD

N T

ype

140


3.1.10. Presentation Layer

Code Probable Cause Action8-80 X.209 coding error in session user data (LI error) 88-81 PV error in session user data 88-82 PI error in session user data 8

8-83The capabilities in the session user data of CDS/CDC were not thesame as those in RDCLP

8

8-84 X.209 coding error in the DP (LI error) 8

8-85X.209 coding error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)(LI error)

8

8-86 SLD object type absent 88-87 PI error in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor) 8

8-88The capabilities in the SLD (document descriptor/page descriptor)are duplicated or are not the same as those in RDCLP

8

8-89 No document descriptor at the start of the document 88-90 No page descriptor at the start of the page 88-91 Page descriptor PV error 88-92 X.209 coding error in the TU (LI error) 88-93 The TU was absent 88-94 PV error in the TU 88-95 TI error 88-96 X.209 coding nest level > 8, or an LI form error 8

8-97CDPB/CDE received while TU/TI not yet completed, or anunexpected PDU was received while analyzing an SLD

8


3.2. G4CCU STATUS CODES *

The display of G4CCU status codes is affected by the Real Time DisplayOn/off setting (G4 Parameter Switch E, bit 0).

• If Real Time Display is off (the bit is 0; this is the default setting), thereis no indication on the operation panel.

• If Real Time Display is on (the bit is 1), the codes are fully displayed onthe operation panel.

The codes are defined in the following pages.

3.2.1. Layer 1 (Physical Layer)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status10 Ready E0 R: [DISC]01 S: [SETUP] E1 S: [REL]02 R: [CALL_PROC] E3 R: [REL_COMP]03 R: [CONN] E4 R: [STAT]04 S: [CONN_ACK] E5 R: [STAT_ENQ]05 R: [SETUP ACK] F0 S: [DISC]06 R: [ALERT] F1 R: [REL]11 R: [SETUP] F2 S: [REL_COMP]12 S: [CALL_PROC] F3 S: [STAT]13 S: [CONN]14 R: [CONN_ACK]

3.2.2. Layer 2 (Link Layer)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status20 S: SABM, or R: SABM D0 S: DISC, or R: DISC21 S: UA, or R: UA D1 S: DM, or R: DM22 S: FRMR, or R: FRMR28 S: SABME, or R: SABME

ISD

N T

ype

140


3.2.3. Network Layer (Layer 3)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status30 S: CR C2 S: SQ31 R: CC C3 R: SF38 R: CN CA R: SI39 S: CA CB S: SF32 S: GF C4 S: RQ3A R: GQ C5 R: RF3B R: GF CC R: RIC0 S: CQ CD S: RFC1 R: CF C6 R: ITC8 R: CI C7 R: IFC9 S: CF CE R: DIAG

3.2.4. Transport Layer (Layer 4)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status40 S: TCR, or R: TCR 42 S: TBR, or R: TBR41 S: TCA, or R: TCA 43 S: TCC or R: TCC

3.2.5. Session Layer, Session Control Layer (Layer 5)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status50 S: CSS, or R: CSS 56 S: RSUI, or R: RSUI51 S: RSSP, or R: RSSP A0 S: CSA, or R: CSA52 S: RSSN, or R: RSSN A1 S: RSAP, or R: RSAP53 S: CSCC, or R: CSCC A2 S: CSE, or R: CSE54 S: RSCCP, or R: RSCCP A3 S: RSEP, or R: RSEP

3.2.6. Session Layer, Document Control Layer (Layer 5)

Code (H) Status Code (H) Status60 S: CDCL, or R: CDCL 90 S: CDE, or R: CDE61 S: RDCLP, or R: RDCLP 91 S: RDEP, or R: RDEP62 S: CDS, or R: CDS 92 S: CDD, or R: CDD63 S: CDC, or R: CDC 93 S: RDDP, or R: RDDP64 S: CDPB, or R: CDPB 94 S: CDR, or R: CDR65 S: RDPBP, or R: RDPBP 95 S: RDRP, or R: RDRP

70S: CDUI, or R: CDUI (Dataphase - layer 6 and facsimiledata)

96 S: RDGR, or R: RDGR

97S: RDPBN, or R: RDPBN


3.3. LEDs *

There are six LEDs on the G4 Interface board, as shown below.

LED 5 LED 6LED 1 LED 2 LED 3 LED 4

These LEDs give the following information about the status of the machine.

Initial SettingsPower-up/Reset O O

-- -- -- --

Initial setting request from FCU -- O-- -- -- --

Initial setting confirmation to FCU -- ---- -- -- --

CommunicationLayer 1 activated -- --

O -- -- --

Layer 2 set -- --O O -- --

B channel connected (ISDN G4) -- --O O O --

B channel connected (ISDN G3) -- --O O -- O

B channel released -- --O O -- --

Layer 2 released -- --O -- -- --

Layer 1 deactivated -- ---- -- -- --

The following will be displayed if bit 1 of G4 parameter switch E is at 1.B channel: send I frame (A blinks at this time if bit 1 of -- AG4 parameter switch E is at 1) O O O --

B channel: receive I frame (B blinks at this time if bit 1 of B --G4 parameter switch E is at 1) O O O --

O = ON, -- = OFF

Note: At the start and end of communication, both A and B will blink.

ISD

N T

ype

140


3.4. BACK-TO-BACK TEST *

To perforom a back-to-back test, you need:• Two machines (both of them must have CiG4 board)• Cross rosette

The procedure is as follows. 1. Switch off the machines

2. Connect two machines back-to-back using the cross rosette as follows.

3. Make the following bit switch adjustments:• In the machine acting in NT mode, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter

switch 0D to 1.• In the machine acting in TE mode, set bit 0 of G4 parameter switch 0D

to 0 and bit 1 to 1.

4. Reset the machine by switching it off, waiting a few seconds, then switch-ing back on.

5. Place a document in one of the machines, dial a number, then pressStart.

6. After you have finished the test, set bits 0 and 1 of G4 parameter switch0D back to 0. then reset the machine.

Note: The following cannot be tested using this procedure:• ISDN G3 communication• P to M

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Cross Rosette

Machine B

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Machine A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Both resistorsmust be between50 and 100 Ω.

h143t501.gem


A. D-Channel Layer 1 Dump List

A.1. How to Print the Dump List

Use this function to print the D-ch. Layer 1 dump list.


2. Input the addresses 03B000 to 03B1FF:

Input % % .

List Sample

Refer to “How to Read the Dump List” later in this chapter.

* * * G4 CCU MEMORY DUMP LIST (SEP. 25.1995 4.05PM) * * *

03B010 11 22 00 F6 10 36 00 F7 02 00 08 F7 20 A6 08 F7

03B020 03 81 00 F7 07 34 60 F7 10 32 00 F7 02 00 03 F7

03B030 20 29 03 F7 02 00 18 F7 20 A9 04 F7 20 AB 0B F7

03B040 02 00 04 F7 20 AB 0C F7 02 00 04 F7 02 00 08 F7

03B050 20 A9 04 F7 20 AB 0E F7 02 00 04 F7 02 00 08 F7

03B060 20 A9 04 F7 20 00 03 F7 20 29 03 F7 10 02 7C F3

03B070 10 3E 40 F3 10 1E 00 F3 FF FF FF FF 00 00 FF FF

03B080 FF FF 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF 00 00 00 00 FF FF

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

03B000 00 00 00 F2 10 1E 00 F3 01 1C 64 F4 10 12 00 F5

03B090 FF FF 00 00 00 00 FF FF

H143X501.wmf

ISD

N T

ype

140

SM A-1 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

A.2. How to Read the Dump List

A.2.1. Data Format

The machine logs the details of layer 1 communication whenever a eventhas taken place. The event can be either a request from the machine, a re-quest from the DSU, a transmission of a signal, or a reception of a signal.

Each log consists of 4 bytes. The first byte indicates the type of event, thesecond and the third bytes for optional data, which depends on the type ofevent, and the fourth byte indicates the layer 1 status. The following table ex-plains all types of data formats.

1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte00(H): TE modeinitialization request

00(H) 00(H) Layer 1 status

TE modeF1(H): F1 statusF2(H): F2 statusF3(H): F3 statusF4(H): F4 statusF5(H): F5 statusF6(H): F6 statusF7(H): F7 statusF8(H): F8 status

NT modeC1(H): G1 statusC2(H): G2 statusC3(H): G3 statusC4(H): G4 status

Refer to the “Layer1 Activation/DeactivationProcedure” later inthis chaper.

01(H): Layer 1activation request

See note 1 See note 2

10(H): Layer 1status has changed02(H): Frametransmission request

00(H) Number oftransmitted databytes(Max. 255 bytes)

20(H): Framereception indication

See note 3 Number of receiveddata bytes(Max. 255 bytes)

03(H): TEIassignment request

Assigned TEI value 00(H)

04(H): Layer 1de-activation request

See note 4 See note 2

05(H): Loop backmode request

00(H) 00(H)

06(H): NT modeinitialization request

00(H) 00(H)

EE(H):Communicationerror

See note 5 00(H)

The data “FF FF FF FF” indicates the end of the data.

H515 ISDN Option Type 140 A-2 SM

Notes

1. Status Register ValueData (Hex) Description

1E or 1C Deactivated or standby02 or 00 INFO0 signal received0E or 0C Not connected1A or 18 Error status12 or 10 Non-synchronized signal received22 or 20 INFO2 signal received32 or 30 Priority high36 or 34 Priority low3E or 3C Terminated

2. Command Register ValueData (Hex) Description

00 No command requested40 Standby request44 Reset request60 Priority change requset (High priority)64 Priority change request (Low priority)7C Termination request

3. Received Frame Status RegisterBit 7 - Not usedBit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Received data overflowBit 5 - 0: Normal, 1: CRC errorBit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Received frame abortedBits 3 to 0: Not used

4. Interrupt Status RegisterBit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame receivedBit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Receive buffer fullBit 5 - Not usedBit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission buffer fullBit 3 - Not usedBit 2 - 0: Normal, 1: Layer 1 status has changedBit 1 - Not usedBit 0 - 0: Normal, 1: Communication error

5. Communication Error Status RegisterBit 7 - 0: Normal, 1: Frame resendBit 6 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission underrunBit 5 - Not usedBit 4 - 0: Normal, 1: Transmission pool overflowBits 3 to 0 - Not used

ISD

N T

ype

140


A.2.2. Reading the Sample Dump List

Line #1

Line #2

Line #3

03B000 00 00 00 F2 10 1E 00 F3 01 1C 64 F4 10 12 00 F5

TE mode in i t ia l izat ion request

Layer 1 s tatus changed to F3

Layer 1 act ivat ion request

Non-synchronized s ignal received,and the s tatus changed to F5

H143X502.wmf

INFO2 signal received,and the status changed to F6

Priori ty class low indicat ion, andthe status changed to F7

8 bytes data f rame transmissionrequest for TEI assignament

8 bytes of data frame received forTEI ass ignment

03B010 10 22 00 F6 10 36 00 F7 02 00 08 F7 20 A6 08 F7

H143X503.wmf

TEI "81" ass igned

Prior i ty change request f rom lowto high

Prior i ty changed to high

S : SABME

03B020 03 81 00 F7 07 34 60 F7 10 32 00 F7 02 00 03 F7

H143X504.wmf


Line #4

Line #5

Line #6

R: UA

S: SETUP

R: RR

R : C A L L _ P R O C

03B030 20 29 03 F7 02 00 18 F7 20 A9 04 F7 20 AB 0B F7

H143X505.wmf

S: RR

R : C O N N

S: RR

S: DISC

03B040 02 00 04 F7 20 AB 0C F7 02 00 04 F7 02 00 08 F7

H143X506.wmf

R: RR

R: REL

S: RR

S : R E L _ C O M P

03B050 20 A9 04 F7 20 AB 0E F7 02 00 04 F7 02 00 08 F7

H143X507.wmf

ISD

N T

ype

140


Line #7

Line #8

R: RR

S: disc

R: UA

INFO0 received for terminat ion

03B060 20 A9 04 F7 20 00 03 F7 20 29 03 F7 10 02 7C F3

H143X508.wmf

Terminated

Deact ivated

Data End

03B070 10 3E 40 F3 10 1E 00 F3 FF FF FF FF 00 00 FF FF

H143X509.wmf


A.2.3. Layer 1 Status

The ITU-T I.430 recommendation (the basic user-network interface - Layer 1specification) specifies layer 1 activation/deactivation procedures.

Before understanding the procedures, the status and INFO signals should benoted.

TE (Terminal Equipment) StatusStatus Description

F1 TE is turned off.F2 TE is turned on, but no signal is exchanged.F3 TE is stopped. No signal is exchanged between TE and NT.F4 TE is waiting for the response to INFO1 signal from NT.F5 TE is checking if the signal from the NT is INFO2 or INFO4.F6 TE is waiting for signals from NT after receiving INFO2 signal.F7 TE and NT are in synchronized condition.

F8TE has failed to synchronize to NT, and waiting for the stop request fromNT

NT (Network Termination) StatusStatus Description

G1 NT is stopped.G2 NT is sending INFO2 signal.G3 TE and NT are in synchronized condition.G4 NT is terminating itself.

INFO SignalsNT to TE Direction TE to NT direction

INFO0No signal(11111111...) INFO0

No signal(11111111...)

INFO2Activation signal insynchronized condition(B=0, D=0, E=0, A=0)

INFO1Activation signal innon-synchronized condition(+0-0111111+0-0)

INFO4 Synchronized frame INFO3 Synchronized frame

ISD

N T

ype

140


1. Activation Procedure from the TE

In idle “F3” status, the TE send theINFO1 signal to the NT and changes to“F4” status. The NT then changes to“G2” status and sends INFO2 signal tothe TE.The TE changes to “F5” status andstops sending signals to synchronize it-self to the signal from the NT.After the TE has synchronized to thesignal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NTand changes to the “F6” status.The NT then changes to “G3” statusand sends INFO4 signal back to theTE to inform that a physical link hasbeen established.The timers T1, T2 and T3 are used toreset the TE or NT if a correct re-sponse has not received before thetimers expire.

2. Activation Procesure from the NT

The procedure starts from the NT bysending INFO2 signal to the TE.

After the TE has synchronized to thesignal, it sends INFO3 signal to the NTand changes to the “F6” status.The NT then changes to “G3” statusand sends INFO4 signal back to theTE to inform that a physical link hasbeen established.The timers T1 and T2 are used to resetthe NT if a correct response has not re-ceived before the timers expire.

TE NT

F3

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

G 1

G 1

G 4

G 3

G 2

G 1

INFO1

INFO0

INFO0

INFO3

INFO0

INFO2

INFO0

INFO0

INFO4

T1

T2

T3

H143X510.wmf

TE NT

F3

F7

F6

G 1

G 1

G 4

G 3

G 2

G 1

INFO0

INFO3

INFO2

INFO0

INFO0

INFO4 T1

T2

H143X511.wmf


3. Termination Procedure from the NT

The termination procedure starts from synchronized status (“F7”status for theTE and “G3” status for the NT).

To terminate the physical connection,the NT just stops sending signals andchanges to “G1” status. (The INFO0signal means no signal is sent fromthe NT.) Then, the TE also stops send-ing signals and changes to “F3” status.

TE NT

F7 G 3

G 1

G 4

G 1

INFO0

INFO0

T2F3

H143X512.wmf

ISD

N T

ype

140


B. G4 Parameter Locations

B.1. Initial Programming Items Comparison List

Note: The model ”CGO” is only for the US and Taiwan markets.

Item CFO LHO/CGO FX4Country code U: F-61 U: F-61Own analog number U: F-61 U: F-61 U: F-61Area code prefix U: F-61 U: F-61Own ISDN-G4 number U: F-61 U: F-61 U: F-61Own ISDN-G3 number U: F-61 U: F-61 U: F-61Next transfer station U: F-61 U: F-61G4 internal switches S: F-18-01 S: F-18-01 S: F-17-01G4 parameter switches S: F-18-02 S: F-18-02 S: F-17-02Data network international prefix S: F-18-03 S: F-18-03ISDN international prefix S: F-18-04 S: F-18-04 S: F-17-03G4 subscriber number 1 S: F-18-05 S: F-18-05 S: F-17-04G4 subscriber number 2 S: F-18-06 S: F-18-06 S: F-17-05IG3 subscriber number 1 S: F-18-07 S: F-18-07 S: F-17-06IG3 subscriber number 2 S: F-18-08 S: F-18-08 S: F-17-07Internal Access Unit 1 S: F-18-09 S: F-18-09Internal Access Unit 2 S: F-18-10 S: F-18-10G4 subaddress S: F-18-11 S: F-18-11 S: F-17-08IG3 subaddress S: F-18-12 S: F-18-12 S: F-17-09G4 terminal ID S: F-18-13 S: F-18-13 U: F-61IG3 CSI S: F-18-14 S: F-18-14 U: F-61G4 dump 1 (RAM dump) S: F-18-15 S: F-18-15 S: F-17-10G4 dump 2 (Protocol dump) S: F-18-16 S: F-18-16 S: F-17-11G4 parameter list S: F-18-17 S: F-18-17 S: F-17-12Service level password 1991 1991 1995

U: User level function (Function - 60 - 2222)S: Service level function (Function - 60 - 1991 or 1995)

ISD

N T

ype

140

SM B-1 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

B.2. Switch Locations Comparison List

Note: The model ”CGO” is only for the US and Taiwan markets.

1. Communication Parameter Display

Model Switch Location SettingCFO Bit switch 00, bit 7 0: Off, 1: OnLHO/CGO Bit switch 00, bit 7 0: Off, 1: OnFX4 System switch 00, bit 5 0: Off, 1: On

2. Default Communication Mode

Model Switch Location SettingCFO 000153(H), bit 2 0: G3, 1: G4LHO/CGO 080053(H), bit 2 0: G3, 1: G4FX4 System switch 0A, bit 0 0: G3, 1: G4

3. Network Used for G3 Transmission

Model Switch Location SettingCFO 000153(H), bit 3 0: PSTN, 1: ISDNLHO/CGO 080053(H), bit 3 0: PSTN, 1: ISDNFX4 System switch 0A, bit 6 0: PSTN, 1: ISDN

4. Network Used for G3 transmission in G4-to-G3 Fallback

Model Switch Location SettingCFO 000153(H), bit 3 0: PSTN, 1: ISDNLHO/CGO 080053(H), bit 3 0: PSTN, 1: ISDNFX4 System switch 0A, bit 7 0: PSTN, 1: ISDN

5. Automatic G4-to-G3 Fallback

Model Switch Location SettingCFO 00015C(H), bit 0 0: Enabled, 1: DisabledLHO/CGO 08005C(H), bit 0 0: Enabled, 1: DisabledFX4 Communication switch 07, bit 0 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

H515 ISDN Option Type 140 B-2 SM

6. Specified Two Step Transfer

Model Switch Location SettingCFO 00015C(H), bit 1 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledLHO/CGO 08005C(H), bit 1 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledFX4 Function not available

7. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Transmission

Model Switch Location SettingCFO Bit switch 08, bits 6 and 7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

LHO/CGO

FX4 G3 switch 09, bits 0 and 1 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

8. Cable Equalizer for ISDN Reception

Model Switch Location SettingCFO Bit switch 0A, bits 6 and 7 Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

LHO/CGO

FX4 G3 switch 09, bits 2 and 3 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting 0 0 None 0 1 Low 1 0 Medium 1 1 High

ISD

N T

ype

140

SM B-3 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

C. Conditions for Receiving a Call

BC: Bearer CapabilityHLC: Higher Layer CompatibilitySA: Subaddress

TxTerminal

SetupResponse Condition

BC HLC Called No./Called SA

G4 Fax

Digital G4 Not included G4 reception

Digital G4 Included

G4 reception If called no. and calledsubaddress match the G4subscriber no.

No response If called no. and calledsubaddress do not match the G4subscriber no.

Digital N/A Not included

G4 reception If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1= 0.

No response If G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit 1= 1.

Digital N/A Included

G4 reception If called no. and calledsubaddress match the G4subscriber no.

No response If called no. and calledsubaddress do not match the G4subscriber no.

G3 Fax

3.1k G2/G3 Not included G3 reception

3.1k G2/G3 Included

G3 reception If called no. and calledsubaddress match the IG3subscriber no.

No response If called no. and calledsubaddress do not match the IG3subscriber no.

3.1k N/A Not included



3.1k N/A Included



ISD

N T

ype

140

SM C-1 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

TxTerminal



G3 Fax

Speech G2/G3 Not included G3 reception

Speech G2/G3 Included



Speech N/A Not included

No response If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 0,and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit1 = 0.

G3 reception If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit1 = 0



Speech N/A Included



Telephone

Speech TEL Not included No responseSpeech TEL Included No response

Speech N/A Not included


G3 reception If G4 Internal Switch 14, bit 0 = 1,and G4 Parameter Switch 01, bit1 = 0



Speech N/A Included



H515 ISDN Option Type 140 C-2 SM

TxTerminal



Telephone

3.1k TEL Not included No response3.1k TEL Included No response

3.1k N/A Not included



3.1k N/A Included



ISD

N T

ype

140

SM C-3 H515 ISDN Option Type 140

PRINTER INTERFACETYPE 100

SERVICE MANUAL

Trademark NoticesEpson and Epson ESC/P are registered trademarks of Seiko Epson Corporation.Epson LQ-2500, Epson FX-800/1000, Epson FX-86e/286e, Epson GL, Epson LQ, EpsonFX, Epson LQ-1050/850, Epson LQ-500, Epson LQ-1500, EpsonFX-85, Epson FX-80, Ep-son GL Identity Card, Epson Roman T, and Epson Sans Serif U are are registered trade-marks of Epson America Inc. Action Laser and SelecType are trademarks and EPSON Connection is a service mark of Ep-son America, Inc.EpsonScript and EPSON Talk are trademarks of Epson America Inc.IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HPLaser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and Hewlett-Packard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of AppleComputer, Inc.Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.ITC Zapf Dingbats, ITC Avant Garde, ITC Bookman, ITC Zapf Chancery are registered trade-mark of International Typeface Corporation.Bookman and Cantury Schoolbook are registered trademarks of Kingsley-ATF TypeCorporation.Bitstream is a registered trademark of Bitstream Inc.Speedo and FaceLift are trademarks of Bitstream Inc.CG Times is a product of AGFA Compugraphic, a division of AGFA Corporation.Univers, Times, Helvetica Narrow and Palatino are U.S. registered trademarks of LinotypeAG and its subsidiaries.Phoenix, PhoenixPage, and Phoenix MultiGray are registered trademarks of Phoenix Tech-nologies Ltd.MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.


1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS

Item SpecificationsResolution 300 x 300 dpiRAM Capacity 1.0 MB (Standard)

Upgradable to 2, 3, or 5 MBEmulation Standard:

HP LaserJet 4L TM emulation (LJ4L mode)ESC/P ® 24-pin printer emulation (LQ ® mode)ESC/P ® 9-pin printer emulation (LX ® mode)HP GL/2 TM emulation (EPSON GL/2 ® mode)Optional:PostScript TM Level 2

Resident Fonts 21 scalable fonts and 3 bitmap fonts(Refer to the Operator’s Manual for additionalinformation.)

Paper Size

Note: All the acceptable sizesmust be in portrait orientation.

A4A5B5LT (Letter)HLT (Half letter)LGL (Legal)GLT (Government letter)GLG (Government legal)EXE (Executive)F4MON (Monarch)C10 (Commercial 10)DLC5IB5 (International B5)C6

Host Interface Standard:Bi-Centronics TM parallel interface x 1Optional:LocalTalk TM Interface x 1

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Item SpecificationsResolution 300 x 300 dpiPrint Speed (Engine Speed) Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4) Warm-up Time 20 seconds or less at normal temperaturePaper Size The available paper sizes are not the same as those

available with the controller. The selected paper sizedepends on the machine’s hardware specifications.Refer to the Operator’s Manual for additionalinformation.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 1-1 PIF100

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH

The printer interface unit consists of a controller board and an interface board (PIF-L).

The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called theController Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual asthe PIF-L Board).

The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, PageMemory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) HostInterface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.

The PIF-L Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate thecommands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed messagein the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machinecan not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L board will modifythe displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayedselection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is notdisplayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.

Data Path

The Controller’s CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computerand will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on theController Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the PageMemory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to theCPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the LaserUnit for printing.

FDUFCE

Modem

Pag eMemor y

CPU

Laser Unit

PSTN

Fax

NCU

Printer Interface

Controller PIF-L

FirmwarePag e

Memor yCPU CPU

ADDRESS/DATA BUS

MacintoshPC-ATCompat ib le

Bi-

Cen

tron

ics

I/F

Font

or

Pos

tScr

ipt

Car

trid

ge(O

ptio

nal)

Loca

lTal

k I/

F

(Opt

iona

l)

Video/Command Interface

H144V501.wmf

PIF100 1-2 SM

The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAXmachine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface isto specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.

Dual Access

Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed toperform multiple tasks.

If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data fromthe computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will betemporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completionof the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX messagethat was stored in the SAF Memory.

If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busyreceiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from thecomputer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the ControllerBoard. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switchthe printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. Ifthe print data exceeds the Controller’s memory size, the print data will bespooled in the computer (if the computer’s operating system or theApplication Program contains the Print Spooler Function).

The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect itto a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data willthen be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is thatby diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating itwith the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completedbefore moving to another task.


The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interfacefrom the FAX machine. The PIF-L board will then generate a different +5volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L and Controller boards.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 1-3 PIF100


2.1. CONTROLLER2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface

The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of theinterface signals are shown in the table below.

SignalPin

ReturnPin

Signal Direction Description

1 19 STROBE INThe STROBE pulse for reading data.The pulse width of the signal must be atleast 0.5 µs at the receiving terminal.

23456789

2021222324252627

DATA1DATA2DATA3DATA4DATA5DATA6DATA7DATA8

ININININININININ

The signals represent the parallel databits 1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGHlevel when the data is a logical 1 andLOW when it is a logical 0.

10 28 ACKNLG OUT

About a 10 µs pulse width. A LOWsignal indicates that data has beenreceived and the printer is ready toaccept more data.

11 29 BUSY OUT

A HIGH signal indicates that the printercannot receive data. The signal will goHIGH in the following cases:1. During printing2. When off line3. During a printer-error state

12 30 PE OUTA HIGH signal indicates that the printer isout of paper.

13 — SLCT OUT Available only for bidirectional use.

14 — AUTO IN

Available only for bidirectional use.A LOW signal enables an automatic linefeed upon receiving a CR signal. Thissignal is only detected when the machinehas just been turned on, or when theprinter interface is initialized.In ESC/P ® mode, this signal effects a CRoperation in accordance with theSelecType TM setting.In HP TM mode, this signal will be ignored.

15 — NC — Not used16 — GND — Logic ground level

17 —CHASSIS

GND—

Chassis ground, which is connected tothe signal ground.

18 — NC — Not used19~30 — GND — Twisted-pair return signal ground level.

31 — INIT INWhen this signal goes LOW, the printercontroller will ignore the STROBE signal.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 2-1 PIF100

SignalPin

ReturnPin


32 — ERROR OUT

This signal will go LOW when the printeris:1. Out of paper2. In an error state3. Off line

33 — GND — Same as for Pins 19~3034 — NC — Not used

35 — +5V — Pulled up to +5V through a 1KΩ resistor.36 — SLCTIN IN Available only for bidirectional use.

Note: • All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise andfall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.

• Data transfer is carried out by observing the ACKNLG or BUSYsignal.(Data transfer to the printer interface can only be carried out afterthe receipt of the ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSYsignal is LOW.)

• The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow asviewed from the printer interface.

• Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signalground level.For the interface wiring, use a twisted-pair cable for each signaland to complete the connection on the return side.

• The pulse width of the ACKNLG signal will vary.

PIF100 2-2 SM

To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printerand computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:

2.1.2. LocalTalk TM Interface (Optional)

Specifications

Compatibility Phase 1 and phase 2Baud rate 230.4 kbpsTopology Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating

ground.Signaling standard EIA standard RS422, balanced voltageSignal encoding FMO (bi-phase) spaceFrame format SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)Node identification AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user

action required.Cabling AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

17

•

31

32

36

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18—25

Printer Interface Computer

Chass is GND

• 16, 19—30, 33 connected to GNDH144d501.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 2-3 PIF100

2.2. PIF

The CPU on the PIF-L board acts as a interpreter (emulator) between theprinter controller board and the FAX machine.

2.2.1. Command and Status Signals

The controller board will send various command signals to the FAX machinethrough the CPU on the PIF-L board requesting hardware status (e.g.,cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette forprinting. The FAX machine will respond to each command signal with astatus signal.

The CPU on the PIF-L board emulates the commands for FAX machine’shardware specifications (e.g, some models can have only one cassette).

FDU/FCEon the

Fax Machine

Controller PIF-L

Printer Interface Unit

IC4

S W I N T

C T B S Y

S T S B S Y

P P R D Y

SERIAL CLOCK

C O N N E C T

R E S E T

SERIAL CLOCK

S T A T U S

C O M M A N D SERIAL DATA

LIGH

T

NO

RM

AL

DA

RK

5 L G A T E

1 INTPR

Print Densi ty AdjustmentCircuit

5 L S Y N C

5 V S Y N C

5 P R R D Y

VIDEO S IGNALVIDEO S IGNAL

SERIAL DATA

5PRINT

5PIFRESET

LCD/KEY DATA

5 C P R D Y

C P U

F A XH144D502.wmf

PIF100 2-4 SM

2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation

When the operator is using the printer function of the FAX machine, the FAXmachine’s keys and LCD panel are connected to the printer controller board.through the CPU on the PIF-L board.

Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not thesame (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but notwith the FAX machine), the PIF-L board will emulate the user key operationsfor the controller board and the display message to the FAX machine, so thatthe user cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable ofperforming.

2.2.3. Print Density Control

The controller controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2 menu.Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, the PIF-Lboard will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.

2.2.4. Printer Interface Reset

If the FAX machine’s CPU chip activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the resetcircuit on the PIF-L board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on thewill shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.

The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described inSection 4.

FDUPIF-LController

5 P I F R E S E T

CPU

CPU

Reset CircuitR E S E T

CN1-2

DC/DCConverter

+ 2 4 VCN1-20

+ 5 VCN5-1,2

+ 5 V

+5V

+5V +5V

FCE

CPU

H144D504.wmfP

rinte

rIn

terf

ace

Type

100

SM 2-5 PIF100

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE

2.3.1. Overview

The video interface specifies the print timing between the printer interfaceand the FAX machine.

2.3.2. Main Scan Direction

L1

W3W2W1

L3

L2T

4

T3T2

T1LSYNC

VID

EO

VS

YN

C

V IDEO

H144D503.wmf

PIF100 2-6 SM

The LSYNC signal will go low for T1 time before the printer interface sendseach line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.

Parameter SettingT1 2.36 µs

T2 9.44 µsT5 1.253 msT6 295 ns

The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W2) are set at 4 mm.

2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction

The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sendseach page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.

Parameter SettingT3 22.55 msT4 varies with paper length

The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L2) are set at 4 mm.

T2

T1 LSYNC

VIDEOT6

T5

H144D506.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 2-7 PIF100

3. INSTALLATION

CAUTIONBefore installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform thefollowing: 1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory. 2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system pa-

rameter list. 3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.1.1. Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L, & FAX3700L

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws),and two small covers [B] (1 screw)and [C].

2. Re-install the rear cover [A] on themachine (1 screw at the lower leftcorner), and install two brackets [D](2 screws) and [E] (2 screws - onescrew secures the rear cover as well,and a ground wire [F]).

3. Connect the harness [G] to the FDUthrough the lower window in the rearcover, hook the Printer Interface Unit[H] onto the brackets [D] and [E].Secure the unit [H] (3 screws).

4. Connect a parallel printer cable to thePrinter Interface Unit.

5. Plug in the machine and turn on themain switch.

6. Confirm that the On Line indicator onthe operation panel is lit. If not, checkthe harness connection from thePrinter Interface Unit to the FDU.

[A]

[C]

[B]

H144i520.wmf

[D]

[E][F]

H144i521.wmf

[H]

[G]

H144i522.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 3-1 PIF100

3.1.2. Model: FAX4700L

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws), and two small covers [B] (1 screw) and [C].

2. Attach the grounding wire [D] (1 screw) to the machine andre-install the rear cover [A] (1 screwat the lower left corner).

3. Install two brackets [E] (2 screws)and [F] (2 screws - one screwsecures the rear cover as well).

4. Remove the hooks [G] (1 screweach) from the unit and install thehooks. [H] (1 screw each). Thehooks are included, but screws arenot. Use the screws that originallysecured the hooks [G].

5. Connect the harness [I] to the FDUthrough the lower window in therear cover and secure thegrounding wire [J] to the PrinterInterface Unit [K]. Then, hook thePrinter Interface Unit onto thebrackets [H].

6. Secure the unit [K] (3 screws) to themachine.

7. Connect a parallel printer cable tothe Printer Interface Unit.


9. Confirm that the On Line indicatoron the operation panel is lit. If not,check the harness connection fromthe Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.

[A]

[B] [C][D]

H144i510.wmf

[H]

[G] H144i511.wmf

[E]

[F]

H144i513.wmf

[J]

[K][I]

H144i512.wmf

PIF100 3-2 SM

3.1.3. Operation Panel Decals

Refer to the illustration in figure 1 toidentify each numbered decal.

Models FAX2700L, FAX2400L & FAX3700L

Adhere the decal labels numbered 1 &3 onto the operation panel as illustratedin figure 2.

Model FAX4700L:

Adhere the decal labels numbered 4 &5 onto the operation panel as illustratedin figure 3.

ResetInitalize

Copy End Cont inue Feed





1

2

4

3

5

Engl ishFig.1

h144i550.wmf

5

4Fig.3

h144i552.wmf

1

3

Fig.2

h144i551.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 3-3 PIF100

3.2. SIMM MEMORY

Note: The SIMM memory upgrade is not included in the kit.

3.2.1. Type 100

1. Remove the cover [A] (2 screws).

2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to theRAM SLOT (lower slot).

3. Re-install the cover [A] (2 screws).

4. Turn on the machine, and enterprinter mode. Refer to theOperator’s Manual, Page 3.

5. Print the status sheet. The“Installed Memory” should haveincreased to the new SIMMmemory capacity plus 1 Mbyte. Ifthe “Installed Memory” is still 1Mbyte or an error is indicatedwhile in printer mode, ensure thatthe SIMM was correctly installed.Refer to the Operator’s Manualpage 4 .

3.2.2. SIMM Requirements

1. Number of pins 722. Access speed 70 ns or faster3. Capacity 1, 2 or 4 MB4. Parity N/A

[A] h144i540.wmf

[B]h144i541.wmf

PIF100 3-4 SM

3.3. OTHER OPTIONS (User Installable Items)

3.3.1. PostScript TM Cartridge

Install the cartridge [A] as shown in the diagram.

Note: A minimum of 2 MB of memory is required to use the PostScript TM

emulation.

3.3.2. LocalTalk TM Interface

1. Remove the cover [A] (2screws).

2. Install the interface board [B] asshown in the diagram (2screws).

Notes: • The optional PostScriptTM cartridge is requiredfor printing from Macin-tosh TM computers.

• A minimum of 2 MB ofmemory is required touse the LocalTalk TM in-terface and the Post-Script TM emulation.

h144i543.wmf

[A]

[A]

[B]h144i544.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 3-5 PIF100

3.4. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.4.1. Parallel Interface

A Bi-Centronics TM parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pinassignments.


Connect a LocalTalk TM cable from a Macintosh TM PC to the LocalTalk TM

port on the interface card.

Notes: • The optional PostScript TM cartridge is required to print from aMacintosh TM PC.

• 2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk TM inter-face and the PostScript TM cartridge.

3.5. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS

3.5.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection

1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface optionshould light at power on.

2. Enter the printer function. Refer to the Operator’s Manual, page 3.

3. Print the status sheet from the SelecType SM Level 1 menu. If the statussheet is not printed, check the harness connection between the printerinterface and the FAX machine. Refer to the Operator’s Manual, page 4.

4. Press the On Line key to exit SelecType SM mode.

PIF100 3-6 SM

3.5.2. DOS ® Based Computers

ImportantTo avoid any damage to the customer’s data files, it is not recommendedthat the service technicians operate the customer’s computer, The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.

1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection

1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.

2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.

3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.

4. After DOS ® is initialized, type the following at the C:\> prompt:PRINT AUTOEXEC.BAT

The computer will display the following:NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);

Type the following:LPT1

The autoexex.bat file will be printed from the fax machine.

If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable was used andconnected securely to both the computer and the printer interface. Refer tothe Operator’s Manual, page 6.

2. Printer Driver for DOS ® Applications

Printer drivers for DOS ® applications are not provided with the printerinterface unit, select one of the following printers in the order of preferencelisted below.

• EPL-5200+ ®

• EPL-3000 ®

• EPL-5200 ®

• EPL-9000®

• HP LaserJet 4L TM

• HP LaserJet 4 TM

• HP LaserJet IIISi TM

• HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID TM

If an emulation other than HP TM PCL5E is required, select EPSON GL/2 ®,LQ ®, or FX ® emulation mode. However, the emulation setting of the printerinterface should be changed from the default (HP LaserJet 4L TM), if one ofthese is selected.

Since each application program differs in its setup procedure, there is nostandard method to select the printer driver. Refer to the application softwaremanual for the proper procedure to select the printer driver.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 3-7 PIF100

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows ®

1. Insert the Windows ® driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).

2. Choose “Run” in the “File” menu of the Program Manager, then type thefollowing:A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)

3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.

4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to theOperator’s Manual, page 7.

3.5.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers

ImportantTo avoid any damage to the customer’s data files, it is not recommendedthat the service technicians operate the customer’s computer. The following procedures are explained for testing purpose only.

1. Install the printer driver as explained in the Operator’s Manual of the PScartridge.

2. Ensure that the “LocalTalk" TM is selected in the control panel.

3. Choose “Printer I/F T100“ as an active printer in the Chooser.

4. Open an document for a test print. Choose the paper size, orientation(and options if necessary) in the PageSetup.

5. Choose Print from the file menu.

PIF100 3-8 SM


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.1. Level 1 Menus

To access Level 1 menus, press theLevel 1 key (the third Quick dial keyfrom the bottom right). To exit from the Level 1 menus,press On Line (the last Quick dialkey).Refer to the Operator’s Manual for details about the menus.

4.1.2. Level 2 Menus

To access Level 2 menus, press theLevel 2 key (the second Quick dialkey from the bottom right). To exit from the Level 2 menus,press On Line (the last Quick dialkey).Refer to the Operator’s Manual for details about the menus.

4.1.3. Dump Mode

1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turnedoff.

2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer tothe Operator’s Manual, page 3.

3. If “RAM CHECK x.x MB” is still displayed, hold down the Level 2 keyuntil “READY P:DUMP” is displayed. If the controller has finished RAMcheck, turn off the machine and return to step 1.

4. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All theprint data will be printed in hexadecimal.

5. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or byINITIALIZE the printer controller. Refer to section 4.1.4.

On LineLevel 1 Level 2

h144m501.wmf


h144m502.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 4-1 PIF100

4.1.4. Controller Reset and Initialize

1. Enter the printer mode.

2. Hold down the left arrow key until the message “RESET” appears, orkeep holding down the key until the message “INITIALIZE” appears inthe display.

RESET - Resets the controller to the previously saved settings, can-cels the print job now in progress, and clears all the received data inthe controller’s memory.

INITIALIZE - Resets the controller to the power-on default settings.The received data will be cleared.

4.1.5. Factory Reset

1. Ensure that the machine is not out of paper, and the machine is turnedoff.

2. Turn on the machine, then immediately enter the printer mode. Refer tothe operator’s manual, page 3.

3. If the message “RAM CHECK x.x MB” is still displayed, hold down theLeft Arrow key until “FACTORY RESET” is displayed. All the controllersettings will be returned to the factory settings.If the controller has finished the RAM check, turn off the machine andreturn to step 1.



The controller and the PIF boards can be reset using the followingprocedure, without turning off the machine’s main power.

1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the Operator’s Manual, page 3)

2. Press the following keys simultaneously.- All the arrow keys- On Line- Level 1- Level 2


h144m503.wmf

PIF100 4-2 SM

4.2.2. Counter Reset

The controller board has its own print counter, which is independent from theFAX machine’s print counter. The counter value can be checked by using theLevel 2 menu.

To reset this counter to zero, Perform the following procedure.

1. Reset the printer interface as described in section 4.1.5.

2. While the controller is checking memory, press the following keyssimutaneously.- Right arrow- Down arrow- On Line

The Message “STARTUPERROR” will appear on thedisplay.

3. Press the right arrow and down arrow keys simultaneously.

4. Enter the Level 2 menu andconfirm that the counter hasbeen reset to zero. Refer to the Operators Mamual, page 17 and 18.

Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter(PRN) of the fax machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting the RAMaddresses for this counter. Refer to the service manual for the procedure.


h144m504.wmf


h144m505.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 4-3 PIF100

4.3. BIT SWITCHES

The system bit switch 14 is dedicated to printer interface operations.

System Switch 14


0to7

Wait time between pages inprinter mode (with anoptional printer interfaceunit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines themachine’s wait time between pages in printer mode.A longer setting will force the fax machine to wait untilthe end of printer interface output before printing anincoming fax message.A shorter setting will allow the fax machine to print anincoming fax messages while printing from acomputer. If the controller takes more than thespecfied time to process a page of data from the hostcomputer, the FAX machine will release the printerresources for fax output.

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES

Printer interface output counter (PRN)

ModelMillions and tenthousands digits

Thousands andhundreds digits

Unit and tens digits

FAX2700L 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)FAX4700L 4801D2 (H) 4801D1 (H) 4801D0 (H)FAX3700L 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)FAX2400L 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)

PIF100 4-4 SM

5. TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS

Symptom: The machine does not go into printer mode.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The On Line and DataLEDs light at power up ?

Replace the FAX machine’sFCE or FDU board.

Go to step 2.

2. Is the cable from theprinter interface con-nected to the FAX ma-chine’s FDU correctly ?

Replace the cable. Fix the cable connection.

Symptom: “SERVICE REQ. Exxxx” is displayed while in printer mode.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The FAX machine dis-play SERVICE CODE x-xx ?(Refer to the table belowfor details.)

There is a hardware errorinside the machine.Follow the troubleshootingprocedure as described inthe FAX machine’s servicemanual.

Reset the printer interfaceunit as explained in secton4.2.1, then go to step 2.

2. Is the SERVICE REQ.code still displayed whilein printer mode ?

Replace the controllerboard.

The problem has beensolved.

Error Code Error ConditionE0003 Fusing unit errorE0004 Main motor errorE0006 Polygonal mirror motor errorE0009 Laser diode errorE0014 Comminication error between the controller and the FAX machine.

Symptom: “SERVICE REQ. Cxxxx” is displayed while in printer mode.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. Reset the printer inter-face unit as explained insection 4.2.1.Does the machine stillshow a SERVICE REQ.code ?



Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 5-1 PIF100

Symptom: “RAM ERROR” is displayed while in printer mode.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The error message ap-pear after installing an op-tional SIMM memory ?

Go to step 2. Reset the printer interfaceunit as explained in section4.2.1, then go to step 3.

2. Is the SIMM memory in-stalled correctly ?

Replace the SIMM memory. Reinstall the SIMM memory.

3. Does the message ap-pear again while inprinter mode ?

Replace the controllerboard or the SIMM memory.


Symptom: “STARTUP ERROR” is displayed while in printer mode.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The error message ap-pear after resetting theprinter interface ?

The error message shouldbe “STARTUP ERROR>A4 (paper size)”.This is not a problem. Press> (right arrow key) to goback to standby mode.

Reset the printer interfaceunit as explained in section4.2.1, then go to step 2.

2. Does the message ap-pear again while in theprinter mode ?



PIF100 5-2 SM

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES

Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The Check Display LEDblink ?

Enter printer mode, andcheck the display.Go to step 2.

Remove and reseat thecassette.

2. “PAPER SET AUTO xx”displayed ?

The paper size requesteddoes not match the papersize in the cassette.Replace the paper with thesize requested by themachine, or press the rightarrow key (Feed) to print onthe current paper.Tip: If AUTO CONT. isenabled in the Level 2menu, the data will beprinted on paper, even if thepaper size does not matchwith the paper size of thedocument to be printed.

Go to step 3.

3. Is “MANUAL FEED” dis-played ?

The controller is set for thebypass feed mode.Press the right arrow key(Feed) to print each page.Disable MANUAL FEED inthe Level 2 menu, if bypassfeeder is not being used.

Reset the printer interfaceby one of the followingmethods, and print thedocument again.Try each method in theorder given.1. Remove and reseat thecassette.2. Press the left arrow keyuntil “RESET” is displayed.3. Press the left arrow keyuntil “INITIALIZE” isdisplayed.4. Reset the printerinterface as explained insection 4.2.1.5. Turn off the machine andturn it back on.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 5-3 PIF100

Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. The paper size and orien-tation settings of the ap-plication, printer driver,and the printer controlleragree ?

Adjust the paper position inthe cassette or in thebypass feed slot.If the problem remains,adjust the FAX machine’sprint registration settings.

Change any incorrectsettings as shown below.

Telephone

ModemComputer Laptop computer

Publ ic Switch

Radio Tower

Mobile Com putin g

Printer Setting = Portrait Printer Setting = Landscape

Telephone

Modem

Com

puterLaptop com

puter

Public S

witch

Radio T

ower

Mobile

Com

puting

Telephone


Publ ic Switch

Radio Tower

MobileCom p utin g

Printed Area

H144T501.wmfExample: Print orientation error.

PIF100 5-4 SM

Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.Check Action if All Action if Partial

1. All of the data appear asstrange characters ?Some of the symbols ap-pear strange ?

The controller’s emulationsetting does not match theprinter driver.Change the emulationsetting or the printer driverto match each other.

The wrong symbol set isselected.Choose an appropriatesymbol set in the Level 1menu.

Symptom: PostScript TM is not available even if an optional PostScript TM cartridge isinstalled.

Check Action if Yes Action if No 1. Is OPT set to CAR-

TRIDGE in the Level 2menu ?

If the cartridge is correctlyinstalled, replace thecartridge.

Change the OPT setting toCARTRIDGE.

5.3. PRINT QUALITY

Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer driver’s setup, and/orif Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settingsor refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machine’s service manual.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 5-5 PIF100

6. PARTS CATALOG

6.1. TYPE 100

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

910

11

12

13

14

15

16

21

22

2324

25

26

17 18

19

20

101

100

100

100100

100

100

100

14

13

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

100

10

100

100

100

100

100

H144A501.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe10

0

SM 6-1 PIF100

Parts ListIndex Part No. Description

1 H1443625 Bracket - PIF - 42 H1443626 Bracket - PIF - 33 H1443420 Hook - H5154 H1443618 Cover - Right5 H1443623 Side Plate Right6 H1443640 Cover - SIMM Slot7 H1443619 Cover - Font Cartridge8 H1443616 Cover - Upper9 H1443620 Spring - Font Cartridge10 H1443624 Hook11 H1443610 Base - Frame12 H1443621 Guide - Font Cartridge13 H0202318 Rivet - NRP34514 H1443627 Insulating Sheet15 H1443611 Side Plate16 11050321 Edge Saddle - EDS25L17 H1443615 Spring Plate18 H1443612 Side Plate - Left19 H1443617 Cover - Left20 H1443622 Cover - Optional I/F21 H5155355 Harness: PIF - Controller22 H1444429 Guide Rail23 H5156075 PCB - Controller - A124 H5156060 PCB - PIF - L25 16070841 Ferrite Core26 H5155351 Harness: FDU - PIF100 03530060Z Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 6101 03530160Z Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 x 16

* H1443438 Decal - Operation Panel* H1444335 Operator’s Manual - English* H1444336 Operator’s Manual - German* H1444337 Operator’s Manual - French

PIF100 6-2 SM

PRINTER INTERFACETYPE 200

SERVICE MANUAL

For the H515

Trademark NoticesArial and Times New Roman are registered trademark of the Monotype Corporation plc.Bitstream and Fontware are registered trademarks and Swiss, Dutch, and FaceLift are trade-marks of Bitstream Inc.CG is a registered trademark of Miles Inc.CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, isa product of Miles, Inc.IBM and IBM PC are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.HP Laser Jet, HP Laser Jet+, HP Laser Jet 500, HP Laser Jet series II, HP Laser Jet IIP, HPLaser Jet series III, HP Laser Jet IIIP, HP Laser Jet IIISi are trademarks, and Hewlett-Packard and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.LocalTalk, TrueType, AppleTalk, Macintosh, and LaserWriter are trademarks of AppleComputer, Inc.MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.Centronics is a trademark of Centronics Data Computer Corporation.PostScript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Inc.Times and Univers are registered trademarks of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only andmay be trademarks of their companies.


1.1. CONTROLLER SPECIFICATIONS

Item SpecificationsResolution 300 x 300 dpiRAM Capacity 1.0 MB (Standard)

Upgradable to 2, 4, 8, 16, or 32 MBEmulation Standard:

HP LaserJet 4 emulation (LJ4 mode)HP GL/2 emulation (EPSON GL/2 mode)Optional:PostScript Level 2

Resident Fonts 22 scalable fonts and 1 bitmap fonts(Refer to the operator’s manual for more details.)

Paper Size

Note: All the acceptable sizesmust be in portrait orientation.

A4A5B5LT (Letter)HLT (Half letter)LGL (Legal)GLT (Government letter)GLG (Government legal)EXE (Executive)F4MON (Monarch)C10 (Commercial 10)DLC5IB5 (International B5)C6

Host Interface Standard:Bi-Centronics parallel interface x 1Optional:LocalTalk Interface x 1

1.2. ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

Item SpecificationsResolution 300 x 300 dpiPrint Speed (Engine Speed) Up to 10 ppm (Letter or A4) Warm-up Time 20 seconds or less at normal temperaturePaper Size The available paper sizes are not the same as those

available with the controller. They depend on themachine’s hardware specifications.Refer to the operator’s manual for details.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 1-1 H515 PIF200

1.3. BLOCK DIAGRAM AND DATA PATH

The Printer Interface Unit consists of two (2) logic boards called theController Board and the Interface Board (identified in the Service Manual asthe PIF-L2 Board).

The Controller Board contains a CPU chip, ROM for the firmware, PageMemory, an optional Font or Postscript Interface Connector and two (2) HostInterface Connectors ( a standard Bi-Centronic or an optional Local Talk).Refer to the Controller Board Specifications for additional information.

The PIF-L2 Board also contains a CPU chip which is used to emulate thecommands from the Controller Board and to modify the displayed messagein the display panel of the FAX machine. For example, if the FAX machinecan not use Legal size paper, the CPU chip on the PIF-L2 board will modifythe displayed message in the FAX machine to eliminate the displayedselection of the Legal size paper. If the option of the legal size paper is notdisplayed, the operator can not choose the legal size paper.

Data Path

The Controller’s CPU chip will interpret the print data from the host computerand will write an imaginary page of data in the Page Memory on theController Board. After a page of print data has been stored in the PageMemory, the Controller CPU chip will transfer the page of print data to theCPU chip in the FAX machine will then pass the data directly to the LaserUnit for printing.

FDUFCE

Modem

Pag eMemor y

CPU

Laser Unit

PSTN

Fax

NCU

Printer Interface

Controller PIF-L

FirmwarePag e

Memor yCPU CPU

ADDRESS/DATA BUS

MacintoshPC-ATCompat ib le

Bi-

Cen

tron

ics

I/F

Font

or

Pos

tScr

ipt

Car

trid

ge(O

ptio

nal)

Loca

lTal

k I/

F

(Opt

iona

l)

Video/Command Interface

2

H144V501.wmf

H515 PIF200 1-2 SM

The interface between the CPU chips on the Controller board and the FAXmachine is known as "Video Interface". The function of the Video Interface isto specify the handshaking procedure and the timing of the data transfer.

Dual Access

Since the printer resources are shared, the FAX machine was designed toperform multiple tasks.

If a FAX message is received while the machine is busy printing data fromthe computer, the FAX message will be received and the data will betemporary stored in the SAF memory of the FAX machine. At the completionof the computer print task, the machine will print the received FAX messagethat was stored in the SAF Memory.

If the computer attempts to initiate a print task while the FAX machine is busyreceiving a FAX message or printing a report, the print data from thecomputer will be received and stored in the Page Memory on the ControllerBoard. At the completion of the FAX machine task, the machine will switchthe printer resources of the Controller board to the computer printing task. Ifthe print data exceeds the Controller’s memory size, the print data will bespooled in the computer (if the computer’s operating system or theApplication Program contains the Print Spooler Function).

The term "Spooler" is an acronym for Simultaneous Print Operation On Line.Print Spooler is a computer software program that, when the printer is busy,will intercept the print data that is on the way to the printer and will redirect itto a disk or memory. When the printer is no longer busy, the print data willthen be sent to the printer. An advantage of the Print Spooler feature is thatby diverting the entire print job to disk or memory and then coordinating itwith the printer, frees the user from waiting until the print task is completedbefore moving to another task.


The required +24 volts and the +5 volts are supplied to the Printer Interfacefrom the FAX machine. The PIF-L2 board will then generate a different +5volts for the CPU chips located on the PIF-L2 and Controller boards.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 1-3 H515 PIF200


2.1. CONTROLLER

2.1.1. Bi-Centronics TM Interface

The parallel interface connector pin assignments and a description of theinterface signals are shown in the table below.

SignalPin

ReturnPin


1 19 STROBE INThe STROBE pulse for reading data.The pulse width must be at least 0.5 µsat the receiving terminal.

23456789

2021222324252627

DATA1DATA2DATA3DATA4DATA5DATA6DATA7DATA8

ININININININININ

These signals represent parallel data bits1 to 8. Each signal is at the HIGH levelwhen the data is a logical 1 and LOWwhen it is a logical 0.

10 28 ACKNLG OUT

About a 10 µs pulse width. LOWindicates that data has been receivedand the printer is ready to accept moredata.

11 29 BUSY OUT

A HIGH signal indicates that the printercannot receive data. The signal goesHIGH in the following cases:1. During printing2. When off line3. During a printer-error state

12 30 PE OUTA HIGH signal indicates that the printer isout of paper.

13 — SLCT OUT Available only for bidirectional use.

14 — AUTO IN

Available only for bidirectional use.A LOW signal enables automatic linefeed upon receiving a CR signal. Thissignal is detected only when themachine has just been turned on, orwhen the printer interface is initialized.

15 — NC — Not used16 — GND — Logic ground level

17 —CHASSIS

GND—

Chassis ground, which is connected tothe signal ground.

18 — NC — Not used19~30 — GND — Twisted-pair return signal ground level.

31 — INIT INWhen this signal goes LOW, the printercontroller ignores the STROBE signal.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 2-1 H515 PIF200

SignalPin

ReturnPin


32 — ERROR OUT

This signal goes LOW when the printeris:1. Out of paper2. In an error state3. Off line

33 — GND — Same as for Pins 19~3034 — NC — Not used

35 — +5V — Pulled up to +5V through a 1KΩ resistor.36 — SLCTIN IN Available only for bidirectional use.

Note: • All interface conditions are based on TTL levels. Both the rise andfall times of each signal must be less than 0.2 microseconds.

• Data transfer must be carried out by observing the ACKNLG orBUSY signal.(Data transfer to this printer can be carried out only after receipt ofthe ACKNLG signal or when the level of the BUSY signal is LOW.)

• The "Direction" column refers to the direction of signal flow asviewed from the printer.

• Return denotes the twisted-pair return to be connected at signalground level.For the interface wiring, be sure to use a twisted-pair cable foreach signal and to complete the connection on the return side.

• The ACKNLG pulse width varies.

H515 PIF200 2-2 SM

To enable bidirectional parallel interface communications between the printerand computer, set the connector pin assignments as follows:

2.1.2. LocalTalk TM Interface (Optional)

Specifications

Compatibility Phase 1 and phase 2Baud rate 230.4 kbpsTopology Parallel bus, low-resistance transformer isolated, floating

ground.Signaling standard EIA standard RS422, balanced voltageSignal encoding FMO (bi-phase) spaceFrame format SDLC (Synchronous Data Link Control)Node identification AppleTalk TM logical address is self-configuring; no user

action required.Cabling AppleTalk TM 8-pin mini DIN

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

17

•

31

32

36

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18—25

Printer Interface Computer

Chass is GND

• 16, 19—30, 33 connected to GNDH144d501.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 2-3 H515 PIF200

2.2. PIF

The CPU on the PIF-L2 works as a interpreter (emulator) between the printercontroller and the fax machine.

2.2.1. Command and Status Signals

The controller will send various command signals to the FAX machinethrough the CPU on the PIF-L2 for requesting hardware status (e.g.,cassette paper size, jam, toner end) and for specifying a cassette forprinting. The FAX machine will respond to a command signal with a statussignal.

The CPU on the PIF-L2 emulates the commands for FAX machine’shardware specifications (e.g, some models can only have one cassette).

FDU/FCEon the

Fax Machine

Controller PIF-L2

Printer Interface Unit

IC4

S W I N T

C T B S Y

S E T B S Y

P P R D Y

SERIAL CLOCK

R E S E T

SERIAL CLOCK

S T A T U S

C O M M A N DSERIAL DATA

LIGH

T

NO

RM

AL

DA

RK

5 L G A T E

1 INTPR

Print Densi ty AdjustmentCircuit

5 L S Y N C

5 V S Y N C

5 P R R D Y

VIDEO S IGNALVIDEO S IGNAL

SERIAL DATA

5PRINT

5PIFRESET

LCD/KEY DATA

5 C P R D Y

C P U

F A X

H144D511.wmf

H515 PIF200 2-4 SM

2.2.2. Key/Display Emulation

While the operator is using the printer function from the FAX machine, theFAX machine’s keys and LCD are connected to the printer controller boardthrough the CPU on the PIF-L2 board.

Because the capabilities of the controller and the FAX machine are not thesame (for example, Monarch paper is available with the controller, but notwith the FAX machine), the PIF-L2 will emulate the user key operations forthe controller board and the display messages to the FAX machine, so thatthe operator cannot select settings that the FAX machine is not capable ofperforming.

2.2.3. Print Density Control

The controller board controls the print density adjustment using the Level 2menu. Depending on the density setting sent from the controller board, thePIF-L2 board will adjust the pulse width of each pixel.


If the FAX machine’s CPU activates the 5PIFRESET signal, the reset circuiton the PIF-L2 board will reset its CPU, and the DC/DC converter on thePIF-L2 board will shut down the +5V supply to the Controller board.

The procedure for totally resetting the printer interface is described in section 4.

FDUPIF-L2Controller

5 P I F R E S E T

CPU

CPU

Reset CircuitR E S E T

CN1-2

DC/DCConverter

+ 2 4 VCN1-20

+ 5 VCN2-16, 18

+ 5 V

+5V

+5V +5V

FCE

CPU

H144D510.wmfP

rinte

rIn

terf

ace

Type

200

SM 2-5 H515 PIF200

2.3. VIDEO INTERFACE

2.3.1. Overview

The video interface specified between the printer interface and the FAXmachine controls print timing.

L1

W3W2W1

L3

L2

T4

T3T2

T1LSYNC

VID

EO

VS

YN

C

V IDEO

H144D503.wmf

H515 PIF200 2-6 SM

2.3.2. Main Scan Direction

The LSYNC signal goes low for T1 time before the printer interface sendseach line of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data(T2) after the falling edge of LSYNC was detected.

Parameter SettingT1 2.36 µs

T2 9.44 µsT5 1.253 msT6 295 ns

The left margin (W1) and the right margin (W3) are both 4 mm.

2.3.3. Sub Scan Direction

The VSYNC signal will go low for T3 time before the printer interface sendseach page of print data. Then, the printer interface will send the video data(T4) after the falling edge of VSYNC was detected.

Parameter SettingT3 22.55 msT4 depends on paper length

The top margin (L1) and the bottom margin (L3) are both 4 mm.

T2

T1 LSYNC

VIDEOT6

T5

H144D506.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 2-7 H515 PIF200

2.3.4. LEDs

The LEDs on the control panel indicates the status within the PIF.Please note that the On Line LED is always on when the PIF is installed.

Button LED LED (Red) (Green)

LEDs on theOperation Panel

LEDs on the Control Panel Condition

On Line LED On Line LED is always on when thePIF is installed.

Data LED Fast flashing of the green LED Print data is being received to thecontroller.Data is being printed.

Slow flashing of the green LED Print data has been received to thecontroller.

Check DisplayLED and"Check Printer"on the LCD

Lighting of the red LED Paper jam, cover open, no paper, orno toner.

Fast flashing of the red LED The manual feed mode is on.Slow flashing of the red LED Software error.

H515 PIF200 2-8 SM

3. INSTALLATION

CAUTIONBefore installing the printer interface unit and its options, perform thefollowing: 1. Print out all the messages stored in the memory. 2. Print out the list of user-programmed items and the system pa-

rameter list. 3. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.

3.1. PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

Model: FAX4700L

1. Remove the cassette cover [A] from therear cover [B].Note: The cassette cover is not installedin some models.

2. Remove the rear cover [B] (2 screws) andtwo small covers [C] (1 screw) and [D].

3. Install the rear cover [B] back on themachine (1 screw at the lower leftcorner), and install two brackets [F] (2 screws) and [G] (2 screws - one ofthese screws also secures the rear cover).

[B]

[A]H144i564.wmf

[B]

[C]

[D]H144i510.wmf

[G]

[F]

H144i513.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 3-1 H515 PIF200

4. Attach the brackets [H] and [I] ontothe bracket plate [J] (2 screws). Note : For the brackets [H] and [I],used the ones which have the letter"B" stamped on them.

5. Attach the bracket plate [J] (4screws) and the side bracket [L] (1screw) to the Printer Interface Unit.

6. Remove the side covers [M] and [N].

7. Connect the harness [O] to the FDUthrough the lower window in the rearcover. Hook the Printer InterfaceUnit onto the machine by thebrackets [G] and [H], then securethe unit (3 screws).

8. Reinstall the side covers [M] and [N].

9. Connect a parallel printer cable tothe Printer Interface Unit.


11. Check if the On Line indicator on theoperation panel is lit. If not, checkthe harness connection from thePrinter Interface Unit to the FDU.

12. Print a status sheet by pressing thebutton [P] at the top of the printerinterface unit.

13. Place the mylar as shown in thediagram.

[L][H]

[I]

[J]

[Letter "B"]H144i568.wmf

[O]

H144i569.wmf

[M]

[P]

[N]H144i570.wmf

[Mylar sheet]

H144i580.wmf

H515 PIF200 3-2 SM

3.1.

3.2. OPTIONS

3.2.1. SIMM MEMORY


2. Install a SIMM memory [B] to theRAM SLOT (lower slot).

3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).

4. Turn on the machine, and print thestatus sheet to verify that theamount of memory shown on thestatus sheet is correct.

SIMM RAM Requirements1. Type PC-AT2. Number of pins 723. Access speed 70 ns or faster4. Capacity 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 MB5. Parity Don’t care6. Dimensions Size within 108 mm x 26 mm (4.25" x 1.02")

Thickness within 10 mm (0.4 ")

3.2.2. PostScript TM SIMM


2. Install a PostScript SIMM [B] to theROM SLOT (upper slot).

3. Reinstall the cover [A] (4 screws).

4. Turn on the machine, and print thestatus sheet to verify that thePostScript SIMM was correctlyinstalled.

[B]

[A]

H144i573.wmf

[B]

[A]

H144i573.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 3-3 H515 PIF200

3.2.3. LocalTalk TM /Serial Interface

1. Change the slide switches and jumper settings for the required type ofinterface as shown in the diagram on the left. The default setting is“LocalTalk”

Note: The “Current Loop” is a special type of serial interface, whichtransfers binary data by closing and opening the current loop.

2. Remove the cover [A] (4 screws), and the rubber cap [B].

3. Install the interface board [C] as shown in the diagram (2 screws), thenreinstall the rear cover [A].

4. Turn on the machine, and print the status sheet to verify that theinterface board is correctly installed.

[C]

[A]

[B]

H144i573.wmfH144i573.wmf

H515 PIF200 3-4 SM

3.3. CONNECTING UP THE PRINTER INTERFACE UNIT

3.3.1. Parallel Interface

A Bi-Centronics parallel cable is required to connect the unit to a host PC.Refer to section 2.1 for the interface specifications and cable pin assign-ments.


Connect a LocalTalk cable from a Macintosh PC to the LocalTalk port on theinterface board.

Notes: • The optional PostScript board is required to print from a Macin-tosh PC.

• 2 MB or more of memory is required to use the LocalTalk TM inter-face and the PostScript board.

3.4. TESTING THE CONNECTIONS

3.4.1. Printer Interface to Fax Connection

1. Turn on the machine. All LEDs dedicated for the printer interface optionshould light at power on.

2. Print the status sheet by pressing the button on the control panel of theprinter interface. If the status sheet is not printed, check the harnessconnection between the printer interface and the FAX machine.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 3-5 H515 PIF200

3.4.2. DOS ® Based Computers

ImportantIt is not recommended for service technicians to operate the customer’scomputer to avoid any damage to the customer’s data files.The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.

1. Checking the Printer Cable Connection

1. Ensure that the printer cable is properly connected.

2. Turn on the machine, then turn on the computer.

3. Ensure that the printer interface is on line.

4. After DOS has started, type the following at the C:\> prompt:PRINT CONFIG.SYS

The computer displays the following:NAME OF LIST DEVICE (PRN);

Then, type the following:LPT1

The config.sys file will be printed from the FAX machine.

If nothing is printed, ensure that the proper printer cable is used and con-nected securely to both the computer and the printer interface.

2. Printer Driver for DOS ® Applications

Printer drivers for DOS applications do not come with the printer interfaceunit, select one of the following printers in the order of preference listed be-low.

• EPL-5500• EPL-3000• EPL-5200/5200+• HP LaserJet III/IIIP/IIID• HP LaserJet IIISi• HP Laser Jet 4L• EPL-5600• EPL-9000• HP LaserJet 4

If an emulation other than HP PCL5 is required, select EPSON GL/2 emula-tion mode. The emulation setting of the printer interface should be changedfrom the default (HP LaserJet 4), if this is selected.

H515 PIF200 3-6 SM

3. Printer Driver for Microsoft Windows ®

1. Insert the Windows driver disk in the A-drive (or B-drive).

2. Choose “Run” in the “File” menu of the Program Manager, then type thefollowing:A:\INSTALL (OR B:\INSTALL)

3. Follow the instructions which appear on the computer screen.

4. After the driver installation is finished, set up the driver referring to theOperator’s Manual.

3.4.3. Apple Macintosh TM Computers

ImportantIt is not recommended for servise technicians to operate the customer’scomputer to avoid any damage to the customer’s data files.The following procedures are explained only for testing purpose.

1. Install the printer driver as explained in PS option operator’s manual.

2. Ensure that the “LocalTalk" is selected in the control panel.

3. Choose “Printer I/F” as an active printer in the Chooser.

4. Open an document for a test print. Choose a paper size, orientation (andoptions if necessary) in the PageSetup.

5. Choose Print from the file menu.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 3-7 H515 PIF200


4.1. USER LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4.1.1. Controller Reset

Press and hold the button on the control panel for a few seconds until bothLEDs are flashing alternately on and off.This will reset the controller to the previouslysaved settings, cancel the print job now inprogress, and will clear all the received data in thecontroler’s memory.

4.1.2. Controller Initialize

Press and hold the button on the control panel for about 8 seconds until bothLEDs are flashing together. This will reset the controller to the power-on default settings. Any receiveddata will be cleared.


4.2.1. Dump Mode

To enter the PIF service mode, turn the main switch off, hold down the buttonon the control panel, then turn the main switch back on. The flashing of theLEDs on the control panel changes as follows.

Button LED LED (Red) (Green) : Start up : Pattern 0 : Pattern 1 : Pattern 2 : Pattern 3

1. Ensure that the paper is loaded and the machine is turned off.

2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch backon. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 1.

3. Start the application on the host computer and print a document. All ofthe print data will be printed in hexadecimal dump.

4. Turn off the dump mode by either turning off the machine or by initializingthe printer controler.

Button LED LED (Red) (Green)

Controll Panel

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 4-1 H515 PIF200

4.2.2. Factory Reset


2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch backon. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 3. Press the but-ton again within 2 seconds.


The controler and the PIF can be reset using the following procedure,without turning off the machine.

1. Enter the printer function. (Refer to the operator’s manual for the functionnumber. This number is different for each model.)

2. Press the following keys at the same time.- All the arrow keys- The last Quick Dial Key- The second Quick dial key form the bottom right- The third Quick dial key from the bottom right

4.2.4. Counter Reset

The controler has its own print counter, which is independent from the FAXmachine’s print counter. The counter value can be checked by printing outthe status sheet. (Described as the "PAGE COUNT" in the CONFIG column.)

To reset this counter to zero, perform the following.


2. Hold down the button on the control panel and turn the main switch backon. Release the button when the LEDs flash at pattern 2. Press the but-ton again within 2 seconds.

3. Print out the status sheet and confirm that the counter has been reset tozero.

Note that this procedure does not reset the printer interface output counter(PRN) of the FAX machine. Reset this counter manually by rewriting theRAM addresses for this counter.

h144m510.wmf

H515 PIF200 4-2 SM

4.3. BIT SWITCHES

This bit switch is dedicated to printer interface operations.

System Switch 14


0to7

Wait time between pages inprinter mode (with anoptional printer interfaceunit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determines themachine’s wait time between pages in printer mode.A longer setting forces the FAX machine to wait untilthe end of printer interface output before printing anyincoming FAX message.A shorter setting allows the FAX machine to printincoming FAX messages while printing from acomputer. If the controler takes more than the specfiedtime to process a page of data from the hostcomputer, the FAX machine releases the printerresources for FAX output.

4.4. RAM ADDRESSES

Printer interface output counter (PRN)

ModelMillions and tenthousands digits

Thousands andhundreds digits

Unit and tens digits

H516 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)H521 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)H515 4801D2 (H) 4801D1 (H) 4801D0 (H)H526 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)H527 800166 (H) 800165 (H) 800164 (H)

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 4-3 H515 PIF200

5. TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1. HARDWARE ERRORS

Symptom: The machine does not go into the printer mode.

Action:

1. Check if the On Line and Data LEDs light at power up. If not, replace theFAX machine’s FCE or FDU.

2. Check if the On Line LED is on. If not, check the connection between theprinter interface and the FAX machine’s FDU. If the problem still remains,replace the cable.

Symptom: The green LED and the red LED on the control panel repeatedlyflashes alternately and then simultaneously (an error indication).

Action:

1. There is a hardware error inside the machine. Follow the troubleshootingprocedure as described in the FAX machine’s service manual.

2. Reset the printer interface unit as explained in section 4.2. If the problemstill remains, replace the controller.

3. If the error indication appears after installing an optional SIMM memoryboard, check if the SIMM board is correctly installed. If the problem stillremains, reinstall or replace the SIMM memory board.

5.2. SETUP MISTAKES

Symptom: Nothing is printed after the controller receives the data.

Action:

1. Check if the red LED on the PIF is blinking. If so, the controller is set forbypass feed mode. Press the button on the control panel to print eachpage. If not, pull out the cassette and put it back.

2. Check if the paper size requested matches the paper size in the cas-sette. Replace the paper with the correct size, or change the paper sizesetting using the printer driver or the Remote Control Panel.Refer to the printer interface operation manual for how to use the Re-mote Control Panel utilities.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 5-1 H515 PIF200

3. Reset the printer interface by one of the following methods, and print thedocument again.

• Pull out the cassette and put it back.• Reset the controller as explained in section 4.1.• Reset the printer interface as explained in section 4.2.• Turn off the machine and turn it back on.

H515 PIF200 5-2 SM

Symptom: The printed image does not fit on the paper.Check Action if Yes Action if No

1. Does the paper size andorientation settings of theapplication, printer driver,and the printer controlleragree ?

Adjust the paper position inthe cassette or in thebypass feed slot.If the problem remains,adjust the FAX machine’sprint registration settings.

Change any incorrectsettings as shown below.

Telephone


Public Switch

Radio Tower

Mobile Computin g

Printer Settin g = Portrait Printer Sett in g = Landsca p e

Telephone

Modem

Com

puterLaptop com

puter

Public S

witch

Radio T

ower

Mobile

Com

puting

Telephone


Public Switch

Radio Tower

MobileComputin g

Printed Area

H144T501.wmfExample: Print orientation error.

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 5-3 H515 PIF200

Symptom: Printed data appears as strange characters.Check Action if All Action if Partial

1. Does all the data appearas strange characters ?Do some of the symbolsappear strange ?

The controller’s emulationsetting does not match theprinter driver.Change the emulationsetting or the printer driverto match each other.

The wrong symbol set isselected.Choose an appropriatesymbol set in the Level 1menu.

5.3. PRINT QUALITY

Check if the Toner Save Mode is selected in the printer driver’s setup, and/orif Print Image Density is set at Dark or Light. Change any unsuitable settingsor refer to the Troubleshooting section in the FAX machine’s service manual.

H515 PIF200 5-4 SM

6. PARTS CATALOG

6.1. TYPE 200

H144A050.wmf

Prin

ter

Inte

rfac

e Ty

pe20

0

SM 6-1 H515 PIF200

Parts List(TYPE200)Index Part No. Description

1 H5156076 PCB - EPL-55002 H5156077 PCB - PIF963 H5156078 PCB - CONTROLLER4 H1443332 COVER - RS232C5 H1443809 COVER - TYPE B6 H1443811 COVER -HOOK7 H1443812 COVER - L/T8 H1443820 COVER - PIF2 - UPPER9 H1443821 COVER - PIF2 - FRONT10 H1443826 COVER - PIF2 - LEFT11 H1443823 COVER - PIF2 - REAR12 H1443311 BRACKET - UPPER13 H1443313 BRACKET - RIGHT14 H1443325 BRACKET - LEFT15 H1443420 HOOK - H51516 H1443624 HOOK17 H1443625 BRACKET - PIF-418 H1443626 BRACKET - PIF-319 H1443801 BASE FRAME20 H1443802 FRAME - FRONT21 H1443804 FRAME - REAR22 H1443807 BRACKET - PCB23 H1443808 BRACKET - HOOK24 H1443810 BRACKET - PIF25 H5155349 HARNESS - PIF96 - 5P26 H5155350 HARNESS - PIF96 - 20P27 H5155351 HARNESS : FDU - PIF(20P)28 11050334 EDGE - 17100 03130060Z PAN HEAD SCREW - M3X6101 03530060Z SCREW - M3X6102 04523008Z BIND TAPPING SCREW - M3 x 8

* H1448600 OPERATOR’S MANUAL - ENGLISH* H1448602 OPERATOR’S MANUAL - GERMAN* H1448605 OPERATOR’S MANUAL - FRENCH

H515 PIF200 6-2 SM

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140SERVICE MANUAL

This product is to be used with the RICOH FAX4700L. Users of this document shouldbe either service trained or certified by successfully completing a Ricoh TrainingProgram in English.

Standards Applied

• EIA/TIA RS-232 (up to 19.2k bps internal speed)• EIA/TIA-SP2388A (Class 2)

Installation Method

• Service Installation• Program is downloaded with SROM copy tool from EPROM board

Agency Approvals

• FCC part 15, Class A (USA)• IC Class A (CANADA)• UL, cUL

Compatiblility

PC/AT Hardware:OS:FAX Applications:

80486DX2-66MHz, 80586-150MHzDOS 6.X, Windows 3.11, Windows 95Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MS-FAX Win95WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95),

Fax Applications forNetworks

Cheyenne FAXserve for NetWare 3.0WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0

Networks: Windows For Workgroups 3.11,

Software Bundling

• PC–FAX application : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh• TWAIN Driver : Ricoh CFM TWAIN

All copyrights, trademarks, and tradenames are the property of their respective owners.

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140PARTS CHECKLIST

1. Installation Guide

2. User’s Guide

3. DIU PWA Assembly

4. EPROM FCE F/L Type 140

5. Grounding Strap

6. Harness, Internal DIU-FCE

7. Bracket

8. Screws, M3 x 6, (5)

9. Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, Diskette

10. Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, User’s Manual

11. Ricoh CFM TWAIN, Diskette

12. Ricoh CFM TWAIN Supplement (User’s Guide)

Additional Requirements:

RS-232 Shielded Serial Cable, User SuppliedFlash/SRAM Copy Tool, Ricoh Part No. H5159100Universal EPROM PCB, Ricoh Part No. H5159500Loop Back Connector, Purchased Locally

RICOH RS232 PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 SERVICE MANUAL

1SM PC-FAX Expander Type 140

FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

1. INTRODUCTION

The Ricoh RS232 PC-Fax Expander Type 140 is a service-installed fax option kitthat will add an RS-232 serial interface - the Digitial Interface Unit (DIU) - to the RicohFAX4700L fax machine. With a shielded serial transmission cable provided by thecustomer, the DIU is connected from the fax machine to a personal computer serialcommunication port. When installed, it will allow the PC to use the fax machine to:

• transmit and receive fax messages from the PC through the fax machine,direct and through fax memory

• scan documents from supporting applications using the TWAIN driver,• scan documents from the fax into the PC• use the fax machine to print PC file documents

The PCFE has been satisfactorily tested with some network applications.

The PC-Fax Expander is designed to work with the 300 dpi Printer Interfaceoption (PIF Type 100 and Type 200) for improved print quality.

The option’s software will load a new User Parameter Switch (14) to the faxmachine’s parameter switches. It will add fax Function 17 to enable scanning fromthe fax machine and fax Function 27 will be added specifically to delete PC faxingmemory files. It will not have OCR capability – no OCR software has been provided.

The Type 140 option is one of the requirements for the Scan Autoroute option.It will permit the connection to the network File Server. It is used with the NEST cardoption.

The option kit includes:

• a pre-programmed EPROM which is used to modify the System Flash ROMin the fax machine,

• a faxing application (Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh) to be installed in the PC,• a TWAIN driver (Ricoh CFM TWAIN) to be installed in the PC.

Not included in the option are:

• the RS-232 shielded serial cable that is used to connect the fax machine withthe PC,

• a null modem adapter (the null function is built into the DIU),• a loop back connector,• OCR software.

FAX4700L Base Machine Changes

• An OMR sheet for programming the User Parameter Switch 14 will not beavailable.


2PC-FAX Expander Type 140 SM

2. FUNCTIONS

2.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FUNCTIONS

• Direct transmission and reception• Fax SAF memory transmission and reception• Local printout

PC-Fax Expander modem emulation200 x 200 dpi with Super Smoothing1 ppm

• Local scanningPC-Fax Expander modem emulation200 x 200 dpi1 ppm

2.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 FEATURES

• Class 2 communication• G4 for PC (with ISDN G4 Type 140 option and memory tx selection)• Autoroute scanning (with NEST option

2.3. FAXING APPLICATION

The PC must have a faxing application. The Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh disketteand manual are included in the PC-Fax Expander kit.

NOTE : To avoid communication failures, Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 requires thechange of the default communication port from TAPI to the same COM port selected forthe PC–FAX EXPANDER. See section 8.2.

2.4. TWAIN CAPABILITY

When the TWAIN driver is installed, scanning parameters such as contrast,resolution and halftone can be set at the PC. Also, the PC will work with TWAINcompatible scanners. The Ricoh CFM TWAIN diskette and manual are included in thekit.



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

3. QUICK LOOK AT THE PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140

Comparison

Basic Feature Type 140 Type 100/130 FAX2500L, FAX2600L, FAX3500LModem Class Class 2 Class 1, Class 2 Class 2Null Modem Built into DIU Built into DIU Additional hardware requirementMemory File Deletion Function 27 Function 24 Function 21User Parameter Switch Switch 14 Switch 14 Switch 7Scanning Function Function 17 Function 16 Function 17TWAIN Compatible Compatible NoPC Protocol Dump Service 05 Service 05 NoDIU Hardware Tests Service 18 Service 15 Service 8

3.1. BASIC TRANSMISSION PROCEDURE• Check the settings.

DIRECT TRANSMISSION FAX MEMORY TRANSMISSION

• PC is on and running the faxing application, and modem is Class 2.

• Fax machine is on.

• FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.Bit 5 is 0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MS–FAX (Win3.1) 1 : WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), WinFax 7.0a(Win95), WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0Bit 6 is 0 : Off (Default) 1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0

• FAX: User Parameter Switch 14Bit 0 : 0 Direct Transmission

FAX: User Parameter Switch 14Bit 0 : 1 Memory TransmissionBit 2 : 0 No TTIBit 2 : 1 TTI

1. PC: Prepare file or message for sending.

2. PC: Call up dialing (or sending)

3. PC: Enter recipient’s name. Select options.

4. PC: Dial recipient’s fax number PC: Dial the full fax number (for G3 only), or use codeddial numbers : # (Quick Dial Number), G3/G4b

# * (Speed Dial Number), G3/G4b

# * * (Group Number) G3/G4b

5. PC: Click Start (Send).a Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to same COM port selected for thePCFE. See section 8-2. b G4 requires ISDN G4 Interface Type 140 Option.

Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group Dial PrefixesFax numbers programmed at the fax machine as Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group

numbers can be dialed from the PC by prefixing the numbers with the symbols #. #*, #**.For example :

TO DIAL FROM PC ENTER FORQUICK DIAL 01 # 0 1 G3/G4

SPEED DIAL 0 1 # * 0 1 G3/G4

GROUP 01 (stored in Quick Dial 02) # * * 01 (or # 0 2) G3/G4



3.2. BASIC RECEPTION• Check the settings.

DIRECT RECEPTION FAX MEMORY RECEPTION

• PC is running the faxing machine and set for automatic answering.

• PC modem is Class 2.


• FAX: User Parameter Switch 14 fax application selection.Bit 5 is 0 : Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, MS–FAX (Win95) 1 : Delrina WinFax 4.0 (Win3.1), Delrina WinFax 7.0 (Win95)a, WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0Bit 6 0 : Off (Default) 1 : Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0.

• FAX: User Parameter Switch 14Bit 1 : 0 Direct Reception

FAX: User Parameter Switch 14Bit 1 : 1 Memory ReceptionBit 3 : 0 Bit 4 : 0 Print at FAXBit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 0 Send to PCBit 3 : 1 Bit 4 : 1 Print at FAX and Send to PC

a Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to sameCOM port selected for the PCFE. See section 8-2.

3.3. USING THE FAX MACHINE’S SCANNER• Check the settings.

• PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answeringa.

• PC modem is Class 2.


• FAX: Check for Contrast, Resolution (Standard or Detail). Halftone

1. FAX: Place document in the machine.

2. FAX: Press Function key.

3. FAX: Type 1 7 at the ten-key pad.

4. FAX: Press Yes.

5. FAX: Press Start .a If TWAIN can’t be loaded, turn off auto answer.

3.4. USING THE FAX MACHINE’S PRINTER• Check the settings.

• PC is running the faxing application and set for automatic answering.


1. PC: Change the printer selection to faxing software option.

2. PC: Select the file to print.

3. PC: Select the print command and print options. Click OK.

4. PC: Dialing or sending dialog box appears. Dial 0 0 0 0.

5. PC: Click Start (Send).



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

4. PC-FAX EXPANDER TYPE 140 DESCRIPTION

4.1. USER PARAMETER SWITCH 14

The PCFE Type 140 is compatible with the Class 2 modem communication mode. Class1 is not supported. BFT is not supported.

The DIU is connected directly to the fax machine’s data/address bus at CN5 on theMFCE PWA. The signal flow through the system is controlled by a special PCFE Type 140 faxbitswitch, User Parameter Switch 14. The fax machine switch can :

(1) route the PC fax data directly to and from the fax machine’s modem, bypassing theusual PSTN data path through the MFCE. This is PCFE DIRECT transmission and reception(Note : This is not fax immediate transmission.),

(2) or route the data to include the MFCE system control (DCR, DCMMR), SAF Memoryand ECM to and from the modem. This is PCFE MEMORY transmission and reception,

(3) suppress the fax machine’s TTI to avoid conflicting with the PC faxing application’sheader,

(4) direct the output to specific locations,

(5) or select specific faxing applications (to overcome speed problems).

BIT FUNCTION DEFAULT

0PCFE TRANSMISSION0 : DIRECT TX1 : MEMORY TX

0

1PCFE RECEPTION0 : DIRECT RX1 : MEMORY RX

0

2FAX TTI MEMORY TRANSMISSION (BIT 0 IS 1)0 : NO FAX TTI1 : FAX TTI

0

OUTPUT DESTINATION FOR MEMORY RECEPTION (BIT 1 IS 1)

34

PRINT AT FAX00

SEND TO PCa

10

SEND TO PC AND PRINT AT FAX11

00

5FAX APPLICATION SELECTION0 : CHEYENNE BITWARE FOR RICOH; MS–FAX (Win95)1 : WINFAX PRO 4.0 (Win3.1), WINFAX PRO 7.0 (Win95)b WinFax PRO For NETWORKS4.0

0

6FAX APPLICATION SELECTION0 : OFF1 : CHEYENNE FAXSERVE FOR NETWARE

0

7 DO NOT CHANGE THE FACTORY SETTING. 0a Substitute Receptionb Delrina WinFax PRO 7 users : Change COM port from TAPI to COM port selected for the PCFE. Seesection 8-2.

The Switch settings are changed with fax Function 63. FAX4700L Optical MarkReader (OMR) is not supported for User Parameter Switch 14.



4.2. DIRECT TRANSMISSION

Direct PCFE transmissions will bypass the fax machine DCR/DCMMR and otherfax resources. The fax machine will be used as an external faxmodem, exchangingprotocols with remote devices. The communications have the characterstics providedby the PC faxing application. The operation is governed from the PC by the faxingapplication.

Compression will be MH or MR, dpending on the faxing application; MMRcompression will not be available. ECM will be available only if the faxing softwareprovides it. The fax machine’s pre-programmed Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Groupnumbers cannot be used to dial when the fax machine is set for Direct Transmission.ISDN G4 dialing is not available in Direct Transmission.

Direct transmissions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PCfaxing application.

DIU : The Digi ta l Inter face Uni t , or RS232 PortDCR : The Data Compress ion/Reconst ruct ion Uni tDCMMR : Data Compress ion Modi f ied Modi f ied Read

MODEMDIU(RS232 Port)

MEMORY

DCR/DCMMR

FAX4700L WITH PC-FAX EXPANDERType 140



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

4.3. DIRECT RECEPTION

Direct PCFE receptions use the fax machine as an external faxmodem toexchange communication protocols. The data route will bypass the fax machineprocesses such as DCR/DCMMR and ECM/SAF memory.

To receive the communication, the PC must be turned on, and the PC faxingapplication must be running and set for Auto Receive. The fax machine will notify thePC when it detects an incoming call. The PC will then have control of the reception.

If the PC is unable to receive, the fax data will be sent to the DCR as in a normalG3 reception. The message will then be reconstructed and printed by the fax machine.

Direct receptions are reported in the fax machine TCR as well as by the PCfaxing application.


MODEM

MEMORY


DIU(RS232 Port)

PRINT

OR

DCR/DCMMR

SUB RX



4.4. MEMORY TRANSMISSION

A PCFE memory transmission occurs in two stages.

(1) PC to FAX : The PC will send the image data in compressed form, MH orMR, to the fax machine. The data is passed through the DCR where errors can bedetected and reported back to the PC for retransmission. The data will be routed to andaccumulated in SAF memory. This is reported in the TCR as a reception by the faxmachine.

(2) FAX to REMOTE : When all the information has been accumulated, the faxmachine will send it to the destination as a normal FAX4700L fax transmission.Depending on the capabilities of the receiver, the data will be sent as MR, MH, or MMRfiles and will be passed to either FIFO or ECM memory on its way to the modem. Thistransaction is reported as a transmission in the fax machine’s TCR. The fax machinecan also generate a Communication Result Report or a Communication Failure Reportfor PCFE memory transmissions.

Fax TTI is normally added to fax transmissions. Switch 14 allows the TTI to beturned off to avoid conflicting with the faxing application header.

PCFE adds prefixes similar to the Transfer Request notations (Operator’sManual, page 59) so that Quick Dial, Speed Dial, and Group numbers programmed withFunctions 31, 32, and 33 can be used to dial from the PC :

• # Quick Dial• #* Speed Dial• #** Group number

ISDN G4 addresses can be dialed with Quick Dials, Speed Dials and Groupsstored in the fax with G4 destinations. ISDN G4 dialing requires the ISDN InterfaceType 140 option.


MODEM

MEMORY


DIU(RS232 Port)

DCR/DCMMR



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

SAF Memory Overflow

If the SAF reaches its memory capacity during transmission, the dataaccumulated to that point will be sent to the destination as a file. An error report will beissued by the fax machine.

Memory PC TX File Delete (Fax Function 27)

The PCFE option introduces fax Function 27 specifically to delete PCFE memorytransmission files. (Fax Function 21 deletes standard fax memory files.)

A file can be deleted while being sent as a memory transmission or during anautomatic redialing operation. The deletion will end the redialing. (The standardFAX4700L redialing default of 4 times every 5 minutes remains unchanged.)



4.5. MEMORY RECEPTION

When set for memory reception, the fax machine governs the reception, sendingthe demodulated data to SAF or to page memory. PCFE adds the ability to direct thedata to different output locations with User Parameter Switch 14.

• to the fax machine printer• to the PCa

• to the fax printer and the PCa

a When the PC is selected as an output location, the PC must be on and runningthe faxing application, which should be set for automatic receive or auto answer.

If the output location is the fax machine printer, the image data will follow thereception path described in the Service Manual section 1.5.2. (including either FIFO orECM memory). The demodulated, decompressed data will be sent to page memory forprinting and the demodulated data will be stored in SAF for Substitute Reception, ifSubstitute reception is on (User Parameter Switch 05-0).

If the PC is specified as an output location, the path is the same except that thedata stored in SAF will be recompressed with MH or MR technique before it is sent tothe PC. If the PC is unable to receive the data, it will be printed by the fax machine anddeleted from SAF (Substitute Reception).

The fax machine will attempt to resend the message to the PC according toCOMSW 10 and COMSW 12 settings for memory transmission redials. The defaultsettings are 5 attempts every 5 minutes (05H, 05H).

The PC may be unable to receive the incoming message because the PC has nopower, the faxing application is not activated, or the faxing application is not set toreceive faxes.


MODEM


DIU(RS232 Port)

MEMORY

PRINT

DCR/DCMMR

SAF Memory Overflow

If SAF reaches its memory capacity while receiving a message, the dataaccumulated to that point will be sent to the PC as a file. An error report will be issuedby the fax machine.



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

4.6. SCANNING (Fax Function 17)

PCFE adds fax Function 17 to the set of FAX4700L fax functions. With Function17, the fax machine will scan a document and send it to the PC, where it will bereceived by the faxing application.

Scanning from the fax machine is similar to sending an immediate fax messagefrom the fax to the PC, except that all basic transmission options (OPTIONSf) aredisabled during the scanner operation. For example, there will be no TTI. Also, the Fineresolution mode is not available (the setting will default to Detail resolution). Resolutionis not adjustable during multi-page scanning. And, SAF memory will be bypassed.

Scanning will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3T*S, or G3T*D). See TransmitFile 002 in TCR, page 19. An error will terminate the process and generate an errorreport.

For the PC, receiving the scanned image is the same as receiving a fax asdescribed in the faxing application manual.


MODEM


DIU(RS232 Port)

MEMORY

DCR/DCMMR

PRINT



Notes on Ricoh CFM TWAIN Scanning

The PCFE Type 140 option provides the customer with a TWAIN scanner driver,RICOH CFM TWAIN. Scanning can be activated from a PC application supporting TWAIN,for example, Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh, or CFM ScanWork. The procedure isdescribed in documentation supplied with the software.

If the TWAIN driver can’t be activated the faxing application’s Auto Receiveshould be turned off.

Basically, the document is set in the fax machine document feeder. Theapplication is opened, the source is selected from the scan feature, and RICOH CFM

TWAIN is acquired. When the module is opened, the scan parameters, such as line orhalftone mode, page size format, resolution, brightness are set and scanning can beperformed. The details and limitations are described in the documentation.

The Scan Autoroute Option

When the NEST option is installed, Function 17 will allow dialing network clientswith the autoroute code (#...#). The fax machine must be set for immediatetransmission.

Press Memory key if indicator light is on. IMMEDIATE TX JUL.30.02:45PM SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO. MEMORY100%

Set the document in the document feeder.

Press Function 1 7 Yes SCANNER MODE DIAL AUTOROUTE CODE OR START

Dial Autoroute number with codeFor example, # 1 2 3 4 # Yes

SCANNER MODE PRESS START #1234#

Press Start TRANSMITTING A4 -> A4

When finished, the display returns to thedefault transmit mode.

MEMORY TRANS. JUL.30.02:45PM SET DOC. OR ENTER FAX NO. MEMORY100%



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

4.7. PRINTING

The PC-Fax Expander can use the fax machine as a printer for the PC. Usingthe special four-digit fax number, 0 0 0 0, as a destination number, the faxingapplication can send a document to the PC-Fax Expander for printing.

The fax machine will receive the data from the PC and send it to the DCR to bedecompressed. It will then be sent to page memory for printing. The memory file will bedeleted when printing is completed.

Unless Substitute Reception is switched off (User Parameter Switch 05-0), thedata will also be routed to the SAF memory. If the fax machine is out of paper or a jamoccurs, the document will be stored in SAF memory and will be printed out after theproblem has been corrected.

Printing will be identified in the TCR (Mode G3R*S or G3R*D). See Receive File003 in the TCR, page 19.

MODEM

DIU : The Digi ta l Inter face Uni t , or RS232 PortDCR : The Data Compress ion/Reconst ruct ion Uni t


DIU(RS232 Port)

MEMORY

PRINT

DCR

(SUB RX)



4.8. DUAL ACCESS OPERATION MATRIXRef. : Operator’s Manual Ricoh FAX4700L, page 169.

When the PC–FAX EXPANDER Type 140 option (PCFE) is installed, additionsare made to Dual Access table shown in the Fax4700L Operator’s Manual. This matrixindicates which simultaneous operations may be possible.

JOB : 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 191 Store Original 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

2 Memory Printout 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

3 Copy 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

4 Report Printout 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9

5 G3 Immediate Tx 9 9

6 G3 Memory Tx 9 9 9 9 9

7 G3 Immediate Rx 9

8 G3 Memory Rx 9 9 9 9

9 Report Tx 9 9 9 9

10 G4 Immediate Tx 9 9

11 G4 Memory Tx 9 9 9 9 9

12 G4 Immediate Rx 9

13 G4 Memory Rx 9 9 9 9

14 PCFE Scan 9 9

15 PCFE Direct Tx 9 9 9 9

16 PCFE Direct Rx 9 9 9 9

17 PCFE Memory Tx 9 9 9 9 9 9

18 PCFE Memory Rx 9 9 9 9

19 PCFE Printout 9



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

5. SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

For PC-Fax Expander maintenance purposes,

• A PC Protocol Dump has been added to Service Function 05, the Group 3Protocol Dump.

• DIU Diagnostics, Service Function 18, are two tests added for the DIUhardware.

5.1. PC-FAX EXPANDER PROTOCOL DUMP

Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes SERVICE SET NO. :__ OR NO 01BIT SW. 02PARA. LIST

03ERROR CODE 04SVC MONITOR v

Press 0 5 PROTOCOL DUMP 0–PSTN 1–PC

Press 1 START PC PROTOCOL DUMP

Press StartList is printing.

PC PROTOCOL DUMP

List has printed START PC PROTOCOL DUMP

Press Function when finished.



5.2. PC-FAX EXPANDER DIU HARDWARE TESTS

PCFE adds service Function 18 for two hardware inspection tests:

• an internal test,• an external test.

DIU Internal Test

An internal DIU LSI loop back test does not require additional hardware.

TXD

R T S

D T R

C T S

RXD

D S R

TXCLK

RXCLK

MB89371A RS232CDRIVERS

RECEIVERS

INT

RI

D C D

DIU

T OFCU RS232C

RI

D C D

LOOP BACK SIGNAL HERE

Press Function 6 0 1 9 9 5 Yes SERVICE SET NO. :__ OR NO 01BIT SW. 02PARA. LIST

03ERROR CODE 04SVC MONITOR v

Press 1 8 DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE NO._ 0.DIU 1.LOOP BACK

DIU Test :

Press 0 TEST RUNNING WAIT ABORT PRESS STOP

DIU test is OK DIU TEST COMPLETED

DIU Test Error Messages :



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

FCE–DIU connection problem DIU NOT FOUND

DIU board failure DIU ERROR

Press Function or Stop DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE NO._ 0.DIU 1.LOOP BACK

DIU External Test

A Loop Back connector is installed before selecting this test mode.

T X D

R T S

D T R

C T S

R X D

D S R

T X C L K

R X C L K

M B 8 9 3 7 1 AR S 2 3 2 C

D R I V E R SR E C E I V E R S

INT

RI

D C D

DIU

T OF C U

2

3

4

5

20

6

2

3

4

5

20

6

8

22

L O O P B A C KC O N N E C T O R

R S 2 3 2 C

RI

D C D

Loop Back Test :

DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE NO._ 0.DIU 1.LOOP BACK

Press 1 TEST RUNNING WAIT ABORT PRESS STOP



Test is OK L.B. TEST COMPLETED

Loop Back Test Error Messages :

FCE–DIU connection problem DIU NOT FOUND

DIU board failure LOOP BACK ERROR

Press Function or Stop DIU DIAGNOSTICS MODE NO._ 0.DIU 1.LOOP BACK



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

6. PC-FAX EXPANDER REPORTS

6.1 TRANSMISSION CONFIRMATION REPORT – TCR

PCFE transmissions and receptions are recorded on the TCR. They areidentified with two new symbols.

* : PC Fax Application% : Direct PC TX or RX

“PCFAX” is the PC faxing application’s CSI.

* * * TCR (JUL. 23. 1996 5:00PM) * * *TTI XYZ COMPANY

<TX>DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT PERS. NAME FILE

JUL 23 9:00AM10:21AM 1:00PM 3:05PM 4:57PM 5:10PM

NEW YORK OFFICEPCFAXTOKYO OFFICEPCFAXNEW YORK OFFICENEW YORK OFFICE

G3TSG3T*DG4T*SMG3T*S@MG3T%SG3T*SM

0’40”0’32”0’02”0’58”0’58”0’28”

P. 1P. 1P. 1P. 1P. 1P. 1

OK OK OK OK OK E

001002004005007008

<RX>DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT PERS. NAME FILE

JUN 10 11:30AM12:58PM 3:03PM 4:30PM

PCFAXPCFAXLONDON OFFICENEW YORK OFFICE

G3R*SG4R*SMG3RSMG3R%S

0’44”0’02”0’30”0’30”

P. 1P. 1P. 1P. 1

OKOKOKOK

003004005006

5:08 PCFAX G3R*SM 1’18” P. 1 OK 008

TX 000005 RX 000004

# : BATCH C : CONFIDENTIAL $ : TRANSFER P : POLLINGM : MEMORY L : SEND LATER @ : FORWARDING E : ECMS : STANDARD D : DETAIL F : FINE > : REDUCTION!S : REMOTE TRANSFER B : FAX ON DEMAND * : PC % : PC DIRECT

Transmit Files for July 23

File 1 (9:00AM) G3 immediate transmission from fax to New YorkFile 2 (10:21AM) Scanning in detail resolution to PC–Function 17 or C FM TWAINFile 4 (1:00PM) G4 memory transmission of Receive File 004 from PC to TokyoFile 5 (3:05PM) Receive File 005 forwarded from fax memory to PCFile 7 (4:57PM) G3 direct transmission from PC to New YorkFile 8 (5:10PM) G3 memory transmission of Receive File 008 failure

Receive Files for June 10

File 3 (11:30AM) Printing in standard resolution–Dial 0000 from PCFile 4 (12:58PM) G4 memory reception of Transmit File 004 from PCFile 5 (3:03PM) G3 memory reception from London to be forwarded to PCFile 6 (4:30PM) G3 direct reception from New York to PCFile 8 (5:08PM) G3 memory reception from PC for New York



6.2. MEMORY TRANSMISSION COMMUNICATION REPORTS

“PC MEMORY TX” is a new mode name for PC-Fax Expander memorytransmissions appearing on the following reports.

Result Report

* * * COMMUNICATION RESULT REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1996 1:01PM ) * * *TTI XYZ COMPANY

FILE MODE OPTION ADDRESS (GROUP) RESULT PAGE

004 PC MEMORY TX TOKYO OFFICE OK 1

REASON FOR ERRORS1)HANG UP LINE FAIL 2)BUSY3)NO ANSWER 4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION

Failure Report

* * * COMMUNICATION FAILURE REPORT ( JUL. 23. 1995 5:11PM ) * * *TTI XYZ COMPANY

FILE MODE OPTION ADDRESS (GROUP) RESULT PAGE

008 PC MEMORY TX NEW YORK OFFICE E-2)2)2)2)2) P. 1

REASON FOR ERRORS1)HANG UP LINE FAIL 2)BUSY3)NO ANSWER 4)NO FACSIMILE CONNECTION



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

6.3. USER PARAMETER LIST

PCFE Switch 14 appears below SW12 on the User Parameter List (Function 63).

* * * USER PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995 10:00AM ) * * * TTI XYZ COMPANY

••• COUNTER SCN 000001 PRT 000005•USER SWITCH•(SW12) ECONOMY PRINTING MODE ON * OFF PRINT DENSITY LIGHTEN * NORMAL DARKEN COPY MODE ON * OFF(SW14) PC–FAX MEMORY TX MODE ON * OFF MEMORY RX MODE ON * OFF PRINT TTI ON * OFF RECEPTION MODE * FAX PC FAX+PC

6.4 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST

The ROM version line is modified to show the software version for the PCFE,and the PCFE is added to the Parameter list .

* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST ( JUL. 23. 1995 10:00AM ) * * * TTI XYZ COMPANY

SERIAL NO.ROM VER. F14-USA[PCFE] IC 96 06 11 REV: A VER: 1.04ROM NO. H5157210F 8579 2AD4 5AA5R T IT T IC S I••PARAMETER SCN THRESHOLD (L, M, H) PC–FAX EXPANDER



7. INSTALLATION

NOTE : Before installing this option read the warnings and cautions in sections3.3 and 5 of the FAX4700L Service Manual.This product is to be installed in a FAX4700L facsimile machine. The installation mustbe done by qualified service personnel only, with the aid of the Service Manual (SM).With a customer-provided double shielded serial cable, the RICOH RS232 PC–FAXEXPANDER Type 140 connects the fax machine to a PC that has a faxing applicationinstalled.Tools Required : Philips metric screwdriver set; FlashS/RAM copy tool, EPROM board.Additional Part Required : Customer-provided RS232 shielded serial cable fitted witheither DB25-pin and DB25-socket connectors, or DB25-pin and DB-9 socketconnectors.Procedure :1. Turn off the fax machine and disconnect it from its power source.2. Remove the Printer Interface unit if one is installed. Disconnect harness from

MFDU CN13. (SM section 3.3.6.)3. Remove the rear cover. Remove the RS232 cover and replace it with DIU cover.4. Remove the ISDN G4 Interface if one is installed. Disconnect harness from MFCE

CN4. (SM section 3.3.2.)5. Detach and pull out the MFCE/MFDU subassembly, following the SM replacement

procedure. (SM section 5.8.2.)6. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to MCFE CN5.7. Mount the DIU bracket onto the chassis.8. Fasten the DIU board onto the bracket.9. Connect the FAX EXPANDER harness to DIU CN2.10. Re-install the ISDN G4 Interface if one was removed.11. Replace the rear cover, fitting it over the DIU RS232 connector.12. Re-install the Printer Interface unit if one was removed.13. Turn off the PC and disconnect it from its power source.14. Connect the fax machine from the DIU port to the PC 25-pin or 9-pin COM port with

the serial cable.

CAUTION : Make sure all connections have been made before going on to thenext step. See Service Manual section 4.1.20. for Download procedure.

15. Insert the Copy Tool into the lower IC slot. Put EPROM 28648-001 into socket 1,28648-002 into socket 2, etc., of the EPROM board. Turn Tool switch ON.Turn onthe power and download the software to the MFCE. (SM section 4.1.20.)

16. Reprogram the fax machine as necessary.

The MS-DOS diagnostics program should be run on the PC to check COM portavailability and IRQ status. See also CSG F.L. 84 and 86.



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

RS232 Cover



8. INSTALLATION SUGGESTIONS

If the faxing application has a difficulty in locating the modem, check the faxmachine to ensure that it is on and ready : Turn it off, wait a few seconds, then turn itback on. Run the MS-DOS diagnostics to review the COM ports and IRQs for possibleconflicts. Review the faxing application’s manual for possible solutions.

8.1. COMMUNICATION PORTS

The PC’s serial ports are usually configured as COM1 and COM2. These areassigned the Interrupt Request numbers (IRQs). IRQs are used to establish prioritieswhich will prevent conflicts from occurring when two devices want to use the sameresources at the same time.

To determine the availability of COM ports and their IRQs, Windows usersa canthe MS-DOS diagnostics program. Change the directory to the root and type msd :

C:\WIN> cd\C:\>msd

When the diagnostics menu appears, choose “COM Ports... ”. The nextscreen will indicate if the COM ports (1 through 4) are enabled or available. ChooseIRQ to indicate the Interrupt Request status of each COM port. The COM ports mustnot have the same IRQ. The PC’s serial ports are usually configured with IRQ4 andIRQ3. For example.

IRQ Status

IRQ Address Description Detected Handled By

34

F000:EF6FCE29:0096

COM2: COM4:COM1: COM3

COM2:COM1: SERIAL MOUSE

BIOSBIOS

The installation of an internal modem may cause an IRQ conflict to occurbetween two ports even if no device is using the second port. The second port mayhave to be disabled to overcome this problem.

One solution is to remove the internal modem and re-enable the COM port forPCFE use. Another solution is to install a third serial port.

a MS–DOS Version 5.0 and higher; Windows 95



FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

8.2. FAXING APPLICATION NOTE

The PCFE Type 140 has been tested with the following Class 2 faxingapplications :

• Cheyenne Bitware for Ricoh• MS–FAX (Win95)• Delrina WinFax PRO 4.0 (Win3.1)• Delrina WinFax PRO 7.0 (Win95)• Delrina WinFax PRO for Networks 4.0• Cheyenne FAXserve for Netware 3.0

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR DELRINA WINFAX PRO 7.0 USERS : To avoidcommunication failures, the application’s default communication port should be thesame as the communication port selected for the PC–FAX EXPANDER Type 140,(COM2, COM3, or other).

The application’s original default port is TAPI. To change it, pull down theapplication’s Setup menu.

1. Select “Modem”.2. Select “Properties”.3. Pull down the list of communication port settings and select the PC–FAX

EXPANDER communication port : COM 2, COM 3, or other.4. Close.

F

APPENDIX A

PC-FAX Expander Type 140 SM26

Appendix A

PC-FAX EXPANDEROVERVIEW

(includes NEST)

Components of the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander Overview

• The Ricoh PC-Fax Expander (PCFE) Guide is a convenient compilation of the mostimportant information regarding the PCFE optionn. The information has been extracted fromvarious PCFE sources, including the PCFE Product Information Book and respectivesoftware user manuals.

Topics covered include:

⇒ A brief introduction to the Ricoh PC-Fax Expander

⇒ An overview of Ricoh's strategic partners, Cheyenne Software and Novell

⇒ An easy-to-follow explanation of the software installation process

⇒ Hands-on exercises to show the PCFE in action

⇒ A brief introduction to NEST

⇒ And a glossary of key terms associated with the PCFE

SM PC FAX Expander Type 14027

FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

What is a Ricoh PC-Fax Expander?

RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax Wi thRS232 PC-FAX

E X P A N D E R

PC Wi thCheyenne

Bi tWare for Ricoh

• It is the physical connection between a Ricoh facsimile machine and a personal computer,linking the optional RS232 serial port on the fax to the RS232 port on the PC.

• With appropriate software, it expands the functionality of both devices, providing thefollowing features:

⇒ PC-Faxing (send and receive)*⇒ Printing⇒ Scanning⇒ Windows TWAIN Scanning⇒ Unlimited autodialing capacity⇒ Can integrate a standalone fax into a Local Area Network (LAN)

• It is compatible with IBM PC AT (non PS/2) computers that employ either MicrosoftDOS or Microsoft Windows operating platforms.

• Can be integrated into or onto a local area network (LAN) so that all network userscan share the PCFE.

• There are two series of Ricoh PC-Fax Expanders available:⇒ Type 80 Series

Includes only the Type 80 interface⇒ Type 100 Series

Includes the Type 100, Type 130, Type 130E, Type 140, and Type 174 interfaces

*In addition to PC compatibility, the Type 100 Series can connect to a Macintosh computer forsingle user applications via a serial cable.


Distinguishing Factors Between theType 80 Series & Type 100 Series

Feature Type 80 Series Type 100 Series

PC Fax Yes Yes

EIA Class 2 support Yes Yes

Scan with fax software Yes Yes

TWAIN Scanning No Yes

Includes Cheyenne BitWarefor Ricoh Yes Yes

Includes WindowsTWAIN driver &scanning software No Yes

LAN connectivity No Yes

• In addition to minor installation differences, the Type 80 Series does not include thefollowing features that come standard with the Type 100 Series:

⇒ TWAIN Scanning - An industry standard that allows users to scan a document with awide variety of compatible scanning software and hardware. TWAIN is an acronym forTechnology Without Any Important Name.

⇒ Windows TWAIN driver/Scanning software - Since the Type 80 does not support theTWAIN standard, there is no reason to include the respective driver and software.

⇒ LAN Connectivity - The Type 100 can be integrated into a local area network, which isfast becoming a popular means for businesses of many sizes to allow employees to sharedifferent office devices, including printers, files, and fax functions. It is estimated that85% of corporate PCs are on LANs.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Benefits of a PCFE over a Modem

Feature PC-Fax Expander vs. Modem

TX/RX faxes Yes Yes

Error CorrectionMode (ECM) Yes No (Class 2)

Compression MMR MH only

Scan to PC Yes No

Send data files No Yes

Print fax messages Yes No

• A RICOH PC-Fax Expander provides different solutions than a fax modem does.

⇒ An Error Correction Mode (ECM) that automatically corrects corrupted streams of databefore they are received. With this, the receiving unit will check the data for errors priorto printing the document. If errors are found, it will request that the data be retransmitted.This process continues until the data is sufficiently received.

⇒ The more effective Modified Modified Read compression method versus the morearchaic and less effective Modified Huffman method. Published findings indicate thatModified Modified Read (MMR) can transmit a document approximately 25% faster thanModified Huffman (MH) can.

⇒ The ability to Scan and "recognize" (also known as Optical Character Recognition)fax messages and convert them into text documents that the PC can edit andmanipulate. Optional software is required.

⇒ Because the RICOH PC-Fax Expander is based on a fax machine with a laser printerengine and printing capabilities, it can print out received faxes.


RICOH PC-FAX EXPANDER

Fax Machine Compatibility by Model

Type 80 Type 100

FAX5600LMV715

FAX2400LFAX2700LFAX3700L

Type 130

MV310

Type 140

FAX4700L

Type 130E

MV310E

Type 174

MV74

• Not all Ricoh fax machines use the same PC-Fax Expander.

• While all of the operating functions of the Type 100 Series are identical, the design of eachspecific model in the series may differ, as well as the way each are installed.

• RICOH PC-Fax Expanders cannot work with fax machines other than Ricoh fax machines.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software

Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh

• PC-Faxing• Fax Forwarding• Printing• TWAIN Scanning (from a PC)• Broadcasting

• Who is Cheyenne Software?

⇒ A leading-edge developer of software solutions for problems associated with data andnetwork management.

⇒ It provides powerful, yet easy-to-use software with advanced features that answer theneeds of both stand-alone and LAN environments.

• What is Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH fax software?

⇒ It is a single user-friendly Windows interface for a standalone PC that fullyintegrates fax capabilities, supporting such features as PC-faxing, faxforwarding, printing, and scanning.

⇒ BitWare was recently recognized by the American Facsimile Association as the topperformer in its extensive evaluation of fax/data/voice products. BitWare was cited for,among other areas, ease of use, installation, documentation, and speed and reliability.


Cheyenne FAXserve Software

• Cheyenne FAXSERVE Software

⇒ Offers facsimile management service for Novell Netware LAN environments.⇒ Provides customers with a cost-effective means of centralizing fax services on network

servers.⇒ Network users can create, send, receive, and print faxes right from their desktop PCs.⇒ Also, because it uses the existing network infrastructure, there are no costs for additional

hardware or telephone lines.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Computer Installation Procedure

Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software

The following installation procedure is a generic listing. Later versions of thesoftware may slightly vary the procedure. The installation procedure isprovided as a reference only. It will allow you to further understand thefunction and operation of the program. It is NOT provided for you to loadthe program in the customer’s computer.

The PC Fax Expander is a User Installable Option It is the responsibilityof the users to install the software on thier PCs. It is NOT recommendedthat the service technician install software on, or operate, the customer’s PC.


Installing the Cheyenne BitWare for RICOH Software

• Before you attempt to install the Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software, you first must makesure that the computer on which the software will be loaded accommodates all therequirements:

386, 486 or Pentium microprocessor

Minimum 4 megabytes of random access memory (RAM)

Windows 3.1 or later

DOS 3.1 or higher (DOS 5.0 or higher is preferred)

A hard disk drive with 5 megabytes of free disk space

A mouse is optional

• The PC-Fax Expander must be installed, and then the serial cable connected, prior toinstalling the Cheyenne software. Also, the fax machine must be turned on. The customermust obtain a "Straight Through Serial Cable" separately. The port on a PC is either 9-pinor 25-pin. There are two cable configurations available:

DB25 male DB9 female DB25 male DB25 female

For Apple/Macintosh applications, there are different cable configurations depending on the

model of the computer. Advise the customer to contact an Apple Computer reseller aboutobtaining a straight through serial cable terminating in a DB25 connector.

• Once you are sure that the computer is equipped with the above items, you can proceed toinstall Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh by inserting your BitWare diskette into either Drive Aor Drive B.

• Then choose "Run" from Windows' Program Manager.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

OPENING MENUS

"Run"

• After inserting the Cheyenne Bitware floppy disk into a floppy drive, click on "Run" fromthe Windows Main menu.

In the Command Line text-entry box, type: A (or B): \SETUP

Click "OK" The "Install Dialogue Box" will appear.

"Destination Directory"

The Destination Directory will appear, telling you that it will automatically create a BitWaredirectory on your hared drve (c:\).

(continued)


"User Information"

• The "User Information" box will ask you to enter the appropriate information. Please do soand click "OK".

• Copying Files (?)

"Group Name”

• Now the software is asking you to provide a group name for your BitWare software whichwill appear in the Program Manager. Please type in whatever name you desire, or accept thedefault name of Ricoh BitWare by Cheyenne.

• Click "OK"

(continued)


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

"Independent Program Icons"

• The "Independent Program Icons" is a function that will automatically create icons for youto drag and drop into a application for quick access.

• Click "OK"

"Default Driver"

• Now you are being asked if you want the Cheyenne BitWare Fax Driver, which is thedriver you will choose when transmitting a document, to be your default driver. If yourespond "Yes", then every time you want to print something you must manually change theprint driver to back your existing PC printer.

• Choose either "Yes" or "No"


Installing Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

FINAL MENUS

"Copying Macros"

• The software will now ask if you want to create macros for a "Send fax" command to becopied into various software packages. The benefit is that users can create "shortcuts" toinstalled software packages, reducing the number of steps required to send a fax.

• Select "Copy" or "Don't Copy"

"Modem Detection"

• The software will now look for COM port 1 (or COM 1) to make sure it can detect a modemconnected to that port.

• And the final installation box you will see is asking you to simply review the information thatthe software will be using to run effectively. Please review the information for accuracy.

• Click "OK"


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

If the software was installed successfully, a message will appear telling you so. If it does, thenyou are ready to begin using Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software. If it does not, then considerthe following troubleshooter areas:

1. Check that the fax machine is turned on.2. Check the serial cable for a secure connection.3. Try installing the software again.4. If it was sold by a dealer, then the customer should call the dealer.5. If it was sold through a direct sales representative, then have the customer call the service

hotline.


Sending A Fax with Cheyenne BitWare For Ricoh

The BitWare Tool Bar

• When you are not in the application from which you want to fax a document, you can easilyfax directly from the Cheyenne BitWare Tool Bar. Of course, you must know the file nameyou want to fax.

• Each icon on the Tool Bar represents a different function, giving you quick access and theflexibility of running only the function you need.

• Each icon can be dragged and dropped into any Windows program group for conveniencepurposes. For instance, you can drag and drop the Receive Log icon into the Startup groupin Windows. This way, the Receive Log will run every time you start Windows, allowingyou to see if you have received any faxes. You can also customize the desired means ofnotification on either the fax machine or on the PC.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Faxing From Within An Application

Print Menu

• You can fax from any Windows application, such as Microsoft Word . When you have adocument opened which you want to fax . . .

⇒ Click "File" . The File Menu will appear.⇒ Then click "Print" . The Print Menu will appear.⇒ If you didn't install the BitWare Fax driver as the default driver during installation,

change the print driver in the Print Menu to BitWare fax driver.⇒ Click "OK" . The Dial fax box will appear.

Dial Fax Box


⇒ Enter the recipient's name, the company name, and the fax number.⇒ In that same Dial fax Box you can set any desired variables, including a cover page or

to dial an outside line if your telephone network requires you to.⇒ Click "Start/Fax" when you are done.⇒ The Transmission Status Box will appear. Here you can check to see at which baud

rate (speed) your document is being transmitted, the connection time, and the success orfailure of your transmission.

⇒ After your document has been successfully transmitted, the Response will indicate"OK" .


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Broadcasting a Document with Cheyenne Bitware

Bitware Phonebook

• With Cheyenne BitWare, you can send a document to an unlimited number of destinations.

⇒ Begin sending a fax as you learned earlier. When the "Dial Fax" dialog box appears,chose "Phone Book". The Phone Book dialog box appears.

⇒ Select the desired fax numbers.⇒ When you are finished, choose "OK".⇒ A text box will display all the selected fax numbers. If you want to remove one or more

of the fax numbers, use the "Remove Phone" button.⇒ If you are transmitting to both local and long distance fax destinations, include the area

code in all numbers. When BitWare dials, it will automatically check the area code. Ifit matches the one you entered previously, it will not dial the "1".

⇒ Click on "Start/Fax".⇒ If you included a cover page, BitWare will automatically address each cover page

appropriately.


Receiving a Fax With Cheyenne BitWare for Ricoh

Receive Manager Window

• When you want to set your computer to receive a fax, simply click the Receive Managericon in the BitWare Tool Bar, and . . .

⇒ the Receive Manager window will appear.⇒ When you see "Waiting for a call" in the Operation field, your computer is ready to

receive a fax. Then it can be minimized to icon size.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Receive Status Dialog Box

⇒ After the fax is received, the Receive Manager will notify you by displaying theReceive Status dialog box.

⇒ To view your fax, simply click "View" . The "View Fax" window will appear andshow you the fax it received.

• If you want your computer to automatically load Receive Manager when you boot it up,select "Automatically load the Receive Manager when Windows starts" in the ReceiveSetup dialog box.


Transmit & Receive Logs

• The Cheyenne BitWare Transmit Log and Receive Log automatically maintain a detailedrecord of each fax that was sent or received. The information they contain can be configuredby the user's preferences.

Transmit Log

The Transmit Log . . .

⇒ Indicates whether the transmission was successful⇒ Shows the number of pages sent⇒ Shows where it was sent to⇒ Shows forwarded faxes⇒ Allows the user to search and sort by any field⇒ And automatically deletes listings after a specified time


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Receive Log

The Receive Log . . .

⇒ Indicates when each fax was received⇒ The number of pages received⇒ Where it was received from⇒ Allows the user to search and sort by any field⇒ And automatically deletes listings after a specified time

Both logs allow users to choose what information each will display and in what order.


Scanning with the PCFE: Manual Scanning

If you want to get a hard copy document into your PC, the Ricoh PCFE can easily scan it in at200 dpi resolution, using the scanner of the Ricoh fax machine with a PCFE to get the dataentered. This saves much time-consuming keyboarding and allows the hard copy information tobe manipulated before being forwarded.

• What is a manual scan?

⇒ Although it falls under the category of scanning, the PC-Fax Expander is essentiallysending a fax directly into the Bitware software of the PC, where it can be saved as afile, manipulated, or faxed.

• Before performing a manual scan, you must make sure that you have the Cheyenne Bitwarefor Ricoh software program opened and that the "Receive Manager" is activated. The"Receive Manager", which can be left on permanently, allows for reception of a fax either inthe background (for uninterrupted fax reception while working on the PC) or in theforeground. An icon at the bottom of the screen will inform you whether it is activated ornot.

• To perform a manual scan, press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.

• Press "Yes" on the fax.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

• Place the document in the ADF.

• Press "Start" on the fax. The document will be scanned just like a document to being faxed.

• When completed, click on "View" on the PC screen.

• Click on "View fax".

• Now, if you want to fax the document out (perhaps broadcast it to multiple sites), you cancreate a custom cover page at this point. Or, you can elect to save the document as a file. Ifit is a graphical image, you can save it either as a TIF file, PCX file, or Bitmap file. At thispoint you can also reduce or enlarge the image.


TWAIN Scanning

• The TWAIN scanning driver enables you to scan from each Windows application that isequipped with a TWAIN interface.

Here's how to perform TWAIN scanning:

⇒ Open Ricoh Bitware software.⇒ Choose "View" and then "File".⇒ Choose "Scan Page".⇒ Click on "Scan". This activates the TWAIN driver.⇒ Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder of the Ricoh

fax machine.⇒ At this point, from your PC, you must select either "Line art" or Halftone".⇒ Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax. On the

PC screen, Bitware will measure the size of the document, in bytes, as it is being scanned.⇒ After the scanning is completed, you can either save the document as a file, fax it, or edit

it.

• Note: The Ricoh fax machine with the PCFE is a page scanner only, which means that youcan only scan a single page at a time even though the Ricoh fax is equipped with a multiple-page ADF.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

CFM TWAIN Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware

• CFM TWAIN Scanning is similar to conventional TWAIN scanning though with limitedfunctionality. For instance, you can only save an image as a Bitmap file, while with TWAINscanning it can be saved in a number of different formats.

To perform a CFM TWAIN scan:

⇒ From your main window, choose Ricoh CFM TWAIN.⇒ Choose CFM Scanwork.⇒ Select "File" and then "Acquire". This will open the CFM TWAIN driver.⇒ Place the hard copy document face-down in the automatic document feeder

of the Ricoh fax machine.⇒ Click on "Scan" on the PC screen. The document will begin scanning into the fax.⇒ After the scanning is completed, click "Okay".⇒ CFM TWAIN scanning only allows you to save the image as a Bitmap file.


Local Printing: Faxing to Yourself

See what happens when you fax from a PC to the number "0000"!

It's an alternate way to print without changing the printer driver!

• Instead of changing the printer driver every time you want to print a document from a clientor PC, you can save yourself those extra steps by faxing the document from the PC to yourRicoh fax machine equipped with a PCFE. Instead of faxing it out, though, the fax will printit as if it were receiving an incoming fax.

Here's what you do:

⇒ While in an opened application, click "File".⇒ From the File menu, click "Print". The Bitware driver will appear in the "Printer"

typeline.⇒ Click "Okay".⇒ When the Fax Send box appears, type the numbers "0000" in the fax number typeline.⇒ Click "Send".

The document will be sent from the PC to the Ricoh fax machine.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help

BitWare's On-Line Help Menu Search command menu

• Cheyenne BitWare's On-Line Help provides instant reference and instructions for commandsand dialog boxes. Here, however, there is a greater amount of useful information than in thehard copy user's guide, and the on-line help can never be misplaced like the guide can. Also,the on-line help is simply easier to use than the hard copy guide as it gets you to the neededtopics and answers faster.

There are various ways to use the help function:

⇒ For a description or explanation of a BitWare command, highlight the commandand press the F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.

⇒ For description or explanation of a BitWare dialog box, open the box and pressthe F1 key. The respective information will be automatically displayed.

⇒ To find a general topic quickly, use the Help menu's Table of Contents. To do this,simply choose "Contents" from the Help menu in any BitWare Window. The On -Line Help will be displayed, listing all of the major help topics.

⇒ Underline a topic and click on it or use the Tab key until the topic desired ishighlighted.

⇒ If you do not see the topic desired, use the Search button. The Search dialog boxwill be displayed, listing subjects alphabetically.


NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology)Autoroute Option

Ricoh FaxWi th NEST

File ServerWith Cheyenne

FAX SERVE

NEST AutorouteSoftware

CLIENT C

Nov

ell B

ackb

one

CL IENT B

CLIENT A

Ricoh Fax WithRS232 PC-FAX

EXPANDER

R S 2 3 2L INE

R S 2 3 2L INE

Ricoh Fax WithNEST & RS232

PC-FAXEXPANDER

PC UsingCheyenne

Bi tWareWith

NEST

• What is NEST?

⇒ NEST is an acronym for Novell Embedded Systems Technology, which is a Novellpatent.

⇒ It is an alternative routing methodology that lets users route faxes directly to a recipient'sworkstation, through a Novell 3.12 or 4.x server, running Cheyenne FaxServe. With this,the receiving party is always assured of receiving the information.

⇒ It uses a numeric code (Nest Autoroute code), typically four digits. The customer entersthe code at the end of the telephone number (preceded and followed by the “# “). It istransmitted attached to the end of the transmitting machine’s TSI. Its purpose is similarto that of a post office box number.

⇒ The NEST Autoroute code is given to the network during the handshake process. TheFaxServe software directs the information to the appropriate workstation on the LAN.

⇒ The benefits include minimizing the number of lost faxes, reducing the possibility of aconfidential fax being read by an unauthorized person(s), and the elimination of dedicatedtelephone lines to be installed for direct routing of incoming documents.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

The RICOH PC-Fax Expander Software (Nest)

• Cheyenne FAXSERVE with NEST

⇒ Automatically and accurately routes incoming faxes to the appropriate recipients on anetwork, whether the device is a PC, printer, copier, or a fax machine.

⇒ When FAXserve receives an incoming fax, it interprets the identification number androutes the fax directly to the recipient's PC or other device according to thepreprogrammed ID number.

⇒ Its automatic routing of incoming documents minimizes the number of lost faxes andreduces the possibility of a confidential fax being seen by unauthorized personnel.

The Various Applications With Autoroute Technology

• For the different means of sending information via Autoroute, there are specificconfigurations:

⇒ Standalone PC - The customer, with a Ricoh fax machine and Cheyenne Bitware withNEST, should be using the fax machine as an external modem. The fax does not have tohave NEST to send Autoroute faxes from the PC, just Bitware with NEST. However, ifthe customer is going to fax from the fax machine and not from the PC, then the faxmachine must have the NEST option.

⇒ Peer-to-Peer LAN - There is no NEST Autoroute solution. However, by recommendingCheyenne Bitshare to your customer and connecting a Ricoh fax machine with a PCFEto a COM port (via an RS232 cable) on one of the client PCs, you would be providingthem with a solution. The fax is seen as an external modem which can then be shared byall of the PCs on the Peer-to-Peer network to send out faxes. Any incoming faxes will bereceived by the fax machine and printed out as a conventional fax.

In the future, Ricoh expects Bitshare to be upgraded to NEST for fax transmission,allowing a fax machine to support NEST for walk-up use as well as from a PC.

⇒ Local Area Networks - With Cheyenne FAXserve with NEST, users will be able tosend and receive Autoroute messages. The LAN can send or receive via a modem or aRicoh fax machine with a PCFE, neither of which needs to have NEST. The telephonenumber and subaddress are forwarded to the network by the modem or fax machine. Thedecoding of the Autoroute address, which takes place during the fax handshake period, is


performed by the LAN fax software. The software forwards the fax to the respectiveclient. The fax transmission takes place as if it were occurring between two faxmachines.

In a Netware LAN application, an autoroute fax can be forwarded to e-mail. Faxesreceived can be viewed on the Bitware viewer or the e-mail viewer. This can be verybeneficial to customers who want only one user interface. The fax machine with a PCFEcan connect, via the RS232 cable, to a com port on the file server. This is a viablesolution for small offices with perhaps 20 to 30 people on the network where the fileserver is in the immediate work area. In a corporate setting, the file server is generallyfarther away. To connect multiple fax machines, a multiport serial board and fax serverare required. Because of the close proximity of the fax server, long serial cables runningthroughout the work area are eliminated.

Scan Autoroute - With NEST incorporated into Ricoh's fax products, users can scan a document into a fax machine and have it automatically routed to an address on a network. Now users can send hard-copy documents via a fax machine and take advantage of NEST autorouting features. This function can be supported by a stand-alone configuration or in a LAN configuration.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Transmitting with NEST

Ricoh FaxW i t h N E S T

Fi le ServerWi th Cheyenne

F A X S E R V E

NEST Au to rou teSof tware

CL IENT C

Nov

ell

Bac

kbon

e

CL IENT B

CL IENT A


E X P A N D E R

RS232 LINE

RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax Wi thN E S T & R S 2 3 2

PC-FAXE X P A N D E R

PC Us ingCheyenne

B i tWareW i t h N E S T

The procedure for transmitting a document using the NEST Autoroute option is verysimilar to the conventional means of transmitting a document. Just follow these steps:

⇒ You must first know the respective passcode or subaddress (again, it's usually fourdigits) of the intended recipient. Let's say the subaddress is 1234.

⇒ Whether you are faxing from within an application or not, the dialing procedure is thesame. You dial the intended recipient's fax number. Let's say it is 555-1515.

⇒ Then you dial a star (*), which is typically found on the lower left-hand corner of atelephone keypad.

⇒ Now dial the subaddress. In this case, it is 1234.

⇒ Once again, dial the star (*), so that two stars frame the subaddress.

⇒ Now send your document by either pushing the "Start" key on the fax machine or byclicking on "Send" on your PC.

Your document will now be faxed to the dialed fax number and then automatically ontothe assigned subaddress, being received directly into the recipient's PC, printer, or fax.


LAN Connectivity Without NESTThe Benefits of Shared Usage

Ricoh FaxWith NEST

File ServerWith Cheyenne

FAX SERVE

NEST AutorouteSoftware

CLIENT C

Novell Backbone

CLIENT B

CLIENT A

Ricoh Fax WithRS232 PC-FAX

EXPANDER

RS232 LINE

TelephoneCompany

Multiple users can benefit from a RICOH PC-Fax Expander as it can be used as a shareddevice within a Local Area Network (LAN). Here are some of those benefits:⇒ Multiple users can fax directly from a PC and, utilizing the modem of the Ricoh fax

machine, out to the intended recipient. This eliminates the need for the user to leavethe desk and walk over to the fax machine, as well as eliminating the extra step ofprinting the document in order to fax it via the automatic document feeder.

⇒ All users have access to an unlimited number of remote fax locations to transmit orbroadcast to, thanks to the memory storage capacity of their PCs. Included in thisstorage are Quick Dial keys, Speed Dial keys, and Group Dial keys. This is in contrastto the limited memory capacity typically found on most standalone fax machines.

⇒ Multiple users now have access to a departmental scanner for fast and convenientinput of hard-copy documents.

⇒ All users have access to a primary or secondary laser printer. This is beneficialshould any alternate standalone printer be out of service or busy printing a large job.

All users also have convenient access to a secondary plain-paper copier within theirdepartment. This is beneficial should the primary copier be out of service or engagedin a large copying job. Users can even make multiple copies if required, just as aconventional copier would allow.

⇒ If a company was to purchase all of these office tools separately for each individualon a LAN, the cost would be astronomical and the required office and desk spacewould be overwhelming. With the RICOH PC-Fax Expander, though, all users shouldshare one multifunctional tool that would effectively serve their daily business needs.

In-Bound Routing With NEST


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Ricoh FaxWi th NEST


FAX SERVE

NEST AutorouteSof tware

CLIENT C

Nov

ell B

ackb

one

8 888

CLIENT B

CLIENT A


E X P A N D E R

RS232 LINE

RS232 LINE

Ricoh Fax Wi thNEST & RS232

PC-FAXE X P A N D E R

PC UsingCheyenne

Bi tWareWi th NEST

123-4567#8888#

Te lephoneCompany

123-4567#8888#

123-4567#8888#

8888

In-Bound Routing with NEST Autoroute gets an incoming document directly to theintended recipient. To receive documents routed to the appropriate recipient, thefollowing steps must be taken:

⇒ All clients on the LAN must be assigned a four-digit passcode or subaddress by theProgram Administrator.

⇒ Any party sending a fax must be informed of this assigned passcode for the documentto be automatically routed on the receiving end.

⇒ In the PC Setup Dialog Box on the PC, select automatic answering, so that incomingfaxes will be received without operator assistance.

The benefits of receiving incoming documents directly to the appropriate recipientinclude:

• Keeping the received document from lying stray on a fax machine catch tray where itis open for all eyes to see. This can prove detrimental in an environment wheresensitive information is communicated.

• Should the fax machine itself run out of toner or paper, and the fax memory be filledto capacity, there will always be sufficient memory in the PC to successfully receivethe document. This is especially true for environments where documents consistingof high graphical content are communicated. With this, no important incomingdocuments will ever be lost.


Autoroute Scanning with Cheyenne Bitware


F A X SERVE

NEST AutorouteSof tware

CLIENT C

Nov

ell

Bac

kbon

e

CL IENT B

CLIENT A


E X P A N D E R

RS232 L INE

Autoroute Scanning is essentially the same as Manual Scanning except that the autoroutecapability allows the document being scanned to be sent directly to an assigned client on a localarea network via a four-digit address.

To perform an Autoroute Scan:

⇒ Press Function 16 on the Ricoh fax machine.

⇒ Press "Yes".

⇒ Enter the assigned four-digit autoroute code.

⇒ Click on "Scan" on the PC screen.

• The client receives the document as a fax but now has annotation tools available.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

The Various Applications forSending Faxes

Application Components Required

Without Autoroute:To... You need...

Fax from a fax to another fax Fax machines

Fax from a PC to a fax PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE

FAX from a PC to a PC TX1 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFERX2 =PC with BitWare, fax w/PCFE

Fax from a client on a LAN to a fax TX=LAN with LAN fax softwareRX=fax machine

Fax from a client on a LAN to a TX=LAN with LAN fax softwarestandalone PC RX=PC with Class 2 fax software, Ricoh fax with PCFE

With AutorouteTo... You need...

Autoroute Fax from a fax to a client TX=fax with NEST optionon a LAN RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST

Autoroute Fax from a client on a TX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NESTLAN to another client on a LAN RX=LAN with LAN fax software that has NEST

Scanning:To... You need...

Autoroute scan to a client on a LAN Ricoh fax with PCFE and NEST optionLAN with LAN fax software that has NEST

Scan to a PC Ricoh fax with PCFEPC with Class 2 fax software

TWAIN scan to a PC Ricoh fax with PCFEPC with TWAIN-compliant software

1 TX=Transmit2 RX=Receive


Glossary of Terms

The following list will introduce you to some of the most common terms you will encounterduring the selling process and use of a RICOH PC-Fax Expander and its correspondingCheyenne BitWare for Ricoh software.

Application Software - A program or software group of programs used for a specific task, suchas word processing, accounting, desktop publishing, etc.

Background Operation - The ability to transmit or receive a fax form a PC while the usercontinues -- without interruption -- working on the PC.

Binary File Transfer - The ability of two equally-equipped computer systems to transmit dataand image files in their original format rather than a series of digitized dots.

Emulation - A printer operational mode in which one type and brand of printer connected ornetworked with a PC mimics the operation of another type and brand of printer. This allows it toprint data form an application compatible with the printer it is emulating.

Fax Server - A dedicated PC that provides other PCs on a network with fax capabilities. It is theonly PC directly connected to the department fax machine.

Inbound Routing - The process of relaying a fax received at a LAN fax server past the server tothe specific intended recipient's mailbox or output device (copier, printer, fax, etc.).

Modem - An abbreviation for MOdulator/DEModulator. A communication device which altersdata in digital form suitable for transmission over telephone lines. It then carries out the sameprocess in reverse when receiving data.

Multitasking - The ability to perform two or more functions simultaneously. For example, scanan image into a PC while that same PC is printing a job.

NEST (Novell Embedded System Technology) - Novell's response to Microsoft's MS At-Workoperating system. It is an alternative routing method that lets users route faxes and otherinformation across telephone lines, local area networks and wide area networks directly to arecipient's workstation environment.

Network Loadable Module (NLM) - Software that follows Novell guidelines to run as a serviceon top of a Novell file server.

Sub-addressing - Intentional extra digits (usually four) added to the end of a fax number tofurther direct information to a specific destination, such as a PC. Serves a similar function as aPost Office box number.


FA

X E

xpan

der

Typ

e 14

0

Optical Character Recognition (OCR) - A method of scanning a hard-copy document of textinto a PC for digital storage or editing.

Parallel Input - A method of sending the data to be printed from a PC to a printer into acontinuous stream of sets of 16 or more data bits.

Printer Driver - Software that translates the data generated by an application into the formatneeded by the specific type and brand of printer connected to a network or PC.

RS232 (Serial Input) - A method of sending data to be printed in a continuous stream of databits. RS232 is a standard that defines the physical, electrical and control parameters for this typeof input.

Remote Retrieval - From a remote site (a PC or fax machine), fax recipients canhave access to received documents that are stored in individual fax mailboxes.However, the received documents which the user is attempting to retrievemust be received into memory at the original point


APPENDIX B

Class 1 and Class 2 modem operation.

Class 1 and Class 2 are EIA (Electronics Industry Association) standards which specifythe condition of communications between PCs and facsimile machines.

How do they affect operation?In this model, the practical difference is that Class 2 operation allows memorytransmission and reception, while Class 1 operation allows only direct transmission andreception.

If the machine is set up for Class 1 communication, the customer will not be able to usethe fax machine’s SAF memory capabilities.

In receive mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, the customer can choose to:• print a received fax message,• store it in SAF (Store and Forward) memory, then print it or• store it in SAF memory then send it to the PC.

In transmit mode, when Class 2 operation is selected, memory transmission isavailable.

For more details, see Memory Transmission, section 4.3 and Memory Reception,section 4.4 in this manual.

Additional background informationThe Class 1 and Class 2 interfaces are standards for PC-fax adapters. They definewhich Group 3, T.30 protocol functions the PC-facsimile device is capable ofperforming.

In Class 1 operation, the PC-fax adapter provides an interface between the PC and thePSTN, allowing basic capabilities such as modem functions for sending fax data,handshaking, tone generation and tone detection. In Class 1 operation, data is sentthrough the fax machine’s modem, but cannot be stored in its SAF memory, so memorytransmit and receive features are not available.

In Class 2 operation, the fax expander hardware has more functionality. Additionalprotocol signals are exchanged between the PC the fax adapter. This allows access tothe SAF memory in the fax machine.


1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

Paper Capacity: 500 sheets

Acceptable Paper Sizes:

ModelPaper Size US Europe Asia

Letter

Legal

Half LetterA4

A5 sideways

F/F4

B4B5

B5 sideways

Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.

Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 g⁄m2 [16~24 lb.]

Dimensions (W x D x H): 427 x 549 x 153 mm [16.8 x 21.6 x 6.0 ins]

Weight: 7.5 kg [17 lbs]

PF

U T

ype

140F

SM 1 H515 PFU TYPE 140F


Index Name Description

1Paper End Sensor Detects when the paper in the cassette has run

out.

2Relay Sensor Detects when the paper is at the exit point of

the paper feed unit.

3Paper Size Sensor (switches) Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.

The user must install the correct size actuator.

4LEDs The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a

jam condition has been detected in the paperfeed unit.

5Paper Feed Clutch Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed

motor to the paper feed roller.

6Paper Feed Motor Stepper motor, drives the paper feed

mechanisms in the unit.

7

Interface Board The board interfaces the control signals andsensor outputs between the host fax machineand the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.It also relays the signals between the host faxmachine and another paper feed unit (ifinstalled).

1

2

34

56

7

H110D001.wmf

H515 PFU TYPE 140F 2 SM


2.1. PAPER PATH

The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper fromthe optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machine’s registration areathrough the entrance.

If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paperfeed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.

[A]

[B]

H110D002.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140F


2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The machine will detect paper sizeby monitoring the output signalsfrom the three microswitches in thepaper size sensor [A].

The following table shows the com-binations of the sensor’s output andthe paper size detected.

MicroswitchL C R US Europe Asia

Off Off OffOff Off On LegalOff On OffOff On On LetterOn Off Off F/F4On Off On A4On On OffOn On On A5 sideways

Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded condi-tions.

[A]

H110D003.wmf


2.3. PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor actuator [A]will drop through a slot in the bot-tom plate when the cassette hasrun out of paper. The machine willthen detect a paper end condition.

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK

When the cassette is installed in the paper feed unit, the lock pins ([A] and[B]) enter the slots at each side of the cassette.

The pin [C] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [D] from thelock [E] when the cassette is installed in the unit.

[A]

H110D006.wmf

[A]

[B]

H110D005.wmf

[C]

[D]

[E]

H110D004.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140F


2.5. PAPER FEED

The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper fromthe cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feedroller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].

If only one paper feed unit is installed:The host machine’s paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printermechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host ma-chine’s registration sensor.

If two paper feed units are installed:The feed motor in the upper paper feed unit will feed the paper to the faxmachine’s registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passedthe feed unit’s relay sensor. The fax machine’s paper feed motor will thenfeed the paper into the printer mechanism.

Jam Conditions

A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:

1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed clutchwas turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].

2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2 secondsafter the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated [error code9-51].

3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was activated(when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].

[A][B]

[C]

[D][E]

H110D007.wmf


2.6. INTERFACE BOARD

IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by con-trol signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor thesensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2is the motor driver.

The host fax machine will control the paper feed unit(s) through a serial inter-face. The fax machine sends the control signals to the installed paper feedunits one by one. Each paper feed unit will then control its drive componentsand/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.

Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paperfeed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assign aunique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table andas illustrated on the next page.

INSL1 INSL0 DEF1 DEF0 Cassette ID1st optional PFU High High Low Low 002nd optional PFU Low Low Low High 013rd optional PFU Low High High Low 104th optional PFU High Low High High 11

Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installedis limited by the host fax machine’s specifications. As an example, FAX4700Lcan only have up to two optional paper feed units.

IC2

IC1

(CN6-6) BB

(CN6-3) AB

(CN6-2) +24V

(CN6-1) A

(CN6-4) B

(CN6-5) +24V

M

Paper Feed Motor

24V

24V

Paper Feed Clutch

(CN5-2) +24V

(CN5-2) Clutch On [W24V] C L

+5V

+5V

Relay Sensor

Paper End Sensor

Paper Size Sensor

(CN3-2) Paper End [W5V]

(CN3-3) Paper Present [W5V]

(CN3-5) +5V

(CN3-4) COM1

(CN3-1) COM1

(CN3-7) COM1

(CN3-9) Paper Size 0 [W5V]



Casset teID

Creat ion

(CN1-11)INSL1(CN1-12)INSL0

(CN2-2) OUTSL1

(CN2-1) OUTSL0

(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)

(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)

(CN1-7) Serial Clock

(CN1-9) Latch Signal

(CN2-5)

(CN2-4)

(CN2-6)

(CN2-7)

+5V(CN4-1) +5V

(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [W5V] LEDs

+5V

+24V

H110D501.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140F


1st Paper Feed Unit

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = LowDEF1 = Low

2nd Paper Feed Unit+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = H ighDEF1 = Low

3rd Paper Feed Station

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = LowDEF1 = H igh

4th Paper Feed Station

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = H ighDEF1 = H igh

HighHigh

LowLow

HighLow

HighLow

H110D502.wmf


3. INSTALLATION


CAUTIONPerform the following before installing the optional unit:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.


1. Remove the connector cover [B].Place the fax machine onto thepaper feed unit [A].

2. Secure the fax machine to thepaper feed unit with the bracket[C] (2 screws). Connect theharness [D] to the machine.

3. Install the harness cover [E] (1screw), and re-install theconnector cover [B] (which wasremoved in step 1).

4. Remove the bottom plate holderbracket [F] as shown.

5. Load paper into the paper feedunit and turn the fax machine on.Make a test print using the paperfeed unit.

[C]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

h110i502.wmf

[F]

h110i503.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140F



4.1. COVERS

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR

[A]

[B]

[C]

H110R001.WMFA: Left Side Cover (3 screws)B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)C: Right Side Cover (2 screws)

[A]

[B][C]

[D]

h110r002.wmfA: Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)B: Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)C: Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)D: Gear


4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY/PAPER FEED CLUTCH

4.4. SENSORS

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C] H110R003.WMFA: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)B: Gear (1 clip)C: Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)D: Relay Roller (1 clips, 2 bushings)

[A]

[B]

[C]

H110R004.wmfA: Paper End Sensor (1 connector)B: Relay Sensor (1 connector)C: Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)

PF

U T

ype

140F



1.1. SPECIFICATIONS

Paper Capacity: 500 sheets

Acceptable Paper Sizes:

ModelPaper Size US Europe Asia

Letter

Legal

Half LetterA4

A5 sideways

F/F4

B4B5

B5 sideways

Note: The machine will not accept a paper size indicated by a shaded box.

Paper Weight: 60.0~90.0 g⁄m2 [16~24 lb.]

Dimensions: 540 x 427.3 x 157.7mm (W x D x H) [21.3 x 16.8 x 6.2 ins]

Weight: 9kg [19.8lbs]

PF

U T

ype

140S

SM 1 H515 PFU TYPE 140S


Index Name Description

1

Interface Board The board interfaces the control signals andsensor outputs between the host fax machineand the paper feed mechanisms in the unit.It also relays the signals between the host faxmachine and another paper feed unit (ifinstalled).

2Paper End Sensor Detects when the paper in the cassette has run

out.

3Paper Feed Motor Stepper motor drives the paper feed

mechanisms in the unit.

4Paper Feed Clutch Clutch, transfers drive from the paper feed

motor to the paper feed roller.

5Relay Sensor Detects when the paper is at the exit point of

the paper feed unit.6 Cover Switch Detects whether the cover is open or closed.

7LEDs The LEDs indicate whether a paper end or a

jam condition has been detected in the paperfeed unit.

8Paper Size Sensor (switches) Detects the paper size installed in the cassette.

The user must install the correct size actuator.

12

34

5

6

78

H110D008.wmf

H515 PFU TYPE 140S 2 SM


2.1. PAPER PATH

The host fax machine has a paper entrance [A] at the bottom. Paper fromthe optional paper feed unit(s) enters into the fax machine’s registration areathrough the entrance.

If the machine has two optional paper feed units, paper from a lower paperfeed unit enters through the slot [B] to the host fax machine.

[A]

[B]

H110D009.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140S


2.2. PAPER SIZE DETECTION

The machine will detect the papersize by monitoring the output sig-nals from the three microswitchesin the paper size sensor [A].

The following table shows the com-binations of the sensor’s outputand the paper size detected.

MicroswitchL C R US Europe Asia

Off Off OffOff Off On LegalOff On OffOff On On LetterOn Off Off F/F4On Off On A4On On OffOn On On A5 sideways

Note: The machine will not detect the presence of paper in the shaded condi-tions.

[A]

H110D010.wmf


2.3. PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor actuator [A]will drop through a slot in the bot-tom plate when the cassette hasrun out of paper. The machinethen detect a paper end condition.

2.4. CASSETTE LOCK

The rotary catch on the base of the unit [A] is used to lock the cassette to thepaper feed unit when the cassette is installed.

The guide block [B] on the base of the unit will release the bottom plate [C]from the lock [D] when the cassette is installed in the unit.

[A]

H110D012.wmf

[C]

[D]

[B]

H110D011.wmf

[A]

H110D013.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140S


2.5. JAM RELEASE

The cover on the right side of the unit can be opened to remove a jammedpaper. The microswitch [A] detects when the cover is open. The LED will in-dicate to the user when the cover is open.

2.6. PAPER FEED

The paper feed motor [A] drives the feed roller [B] and the relay roller [C].The paper feed clutch [D] turns on when the unit feeds a sheet of paper fromthe cassette. The paper feed clutch will transfer the motor drive to the feedroller until the paper reaches the relay sensor [E].

[A]

h110d014.wmf

[A][B]

[C]

[D][E]

H110D007.wmf


If only one paper feed unit is installed:The host machine’s paper feed motor will feed the paper into the printermechanism after the leading edge of the paper had passed the host ma-chine’s registration sensor.

If two paper feed units are installed:The feed motor in the upper paper will feed unit will feed the paper to the faxmachine’s registration area after the leading edge of the paper had passedthe feed unit’s relay sensor. The fax machine’s paper feed motor will thenfeed the paper into the printer mechanism.

Jam Conditions

A jam condition is detected when any of the following conditions occurs:1. The relay sensor does not activate 2 seconds after the paper feed clutch was turned on [error code 9-50 or 9-52].2. The registration sensor in the fax machine does not activate 2 seconds after the relay sensor in the paper feed unit was activated [error code 9-51].3. The relay sensor in the upper paper feed unit does not activate 2 seconds after the relay sensor in the lower paper feed unit was activated (when two paper feed units are installed) [error code 9-53].

2.7. INTERFACE BOARD

IC1 on the interface board controls the drive components as directed by con-trol signals received from the host fax machine. It will also monitor thesensors in the unit and control the LEDs to notify the users of any errors. IC2is the motor driver.

IC2

IC1

(CN6-6) BB

(CN6-3) AB

(CN6-2) +24V

(CN6-1) A

(CN6-4) B

(CN6-5) +24V

M

Paper Feed Motor

24V

24V

Paper Feed Clutch

(CN5-2) +24V

(CN5-2) Clutch On [W24V] C L

+5V

+5V

Relay Sensor

Cover Sensor

Paper End Sensor

Paper Size Sensor

(CN3-11) Cover Open [W5V]

(CN3-2) Paper End [W5V]

(CN3-3) Paper Present [W5V]

(CN3-5) +5V

(CN3-4) COM1

(CN3-1) COM1

(CN3-10) COM1

(CN3-7) COM1




Casset teID

Creat ion

(CN1-11)INSL1(CN1-12)INSL0

(CN2-2) OUTSL1

(CN2-1) OUTSL0

(CN1-6) Serial Data (Incoming)

(CN1-8) Serial Data (Outgoing)

(CN1-7) Serial Clock

(CN1-9) Latch Signal

(CN2-5)

(CN2-4)

(CN2-6)

(CN2-7)

+5V(CN4-1) +5V

(CN4-2,3,4) LED On [W5V] LEDs

+5V

+24V

H110D601.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140S


The host fax machine controls the paper feed unit(s) through a serial inter-face. The fax machine will send the control signals to the installed paperfeed units one by one. Each paper feed unit then control its drive compo-nents and/or responds with sensor status signals to the host fax machine.

Two logical signals (DEF0 and DEF1) are used to identify how many paperfeed stations the unit is assigned. The cassette ID creation circuit assigns aunique number to each paper feed unit as shown in the following table andas illustrated on the next page.

INSL1 INSL0 DEF1 DEF0 Cassette ID1st optional PFU High High Low Low 002nd optional PFU Low Low Low High 013rd optional PFU Low High High Low 104th optional PFU High Low High High 11

Up to four optional paper feed stations can be identified using these signals.However, the number of optional paper feed stations which can be installedis limited by the host fax machine’s specifications. As an example, theFAX4700L can only have up to two optional paper feed units.


1st Paper Feed Unit

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = LowDEF1 = Low

2nd Paper Feed Unit+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = H ighDEF1 = Low

3rd Paper Feed Station

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = LowDEF1 = H igh

4th Paper Feed Station

+5V

C N 1 - 1 1C N 1 - 1 2C N 2 - 2C N 2 - 1

IC1

DEF0 = H ighDEF1 = H igh

HighHigh

LowLow

HighLow

HighLow

H110D602.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140S


3. INSTALLATION


CAUTIONBefore installing an optional unit, perform the following:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of User-Programmed items and the System Parameter List.3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.


1. Remove the connector cover [B]. Place the Fax machine onto the paperfeed unit.

2. Secure the fax machine to the paper feed unit with the bracket [C] (2 screws). Then connect the harness [D] to the fax machine.

3. Install the harness cover [E] (1 screw), and reinstall the connector cover [B] (which was removed in step 1).

4. Load the paper into the paper feed unit and turn on the fax machine on. Make a test print using the paper feed unit.

[C]

[B]

[E]

[D][A]H110I501.WMF

PSU Type 140S 10 SM


4.1. COVERS

A: Left Side Cover (3 screws)B: Right Front Cover (2 screws, 1 connector)

4.2. PCB AND PAPER FEED MOTOR

A: Interface PCB (3 screws, 6 connectors)B: Paper Feed Motor (2 screws, 1 connector)C: Paper Motor Bracket (2 screws)D: Gear

[B]

[A]

H110R005.WMF

[A]

[B][C]

[D]

h110r002.wmf

PF

U T

ype

140S


4.3. PAPER FEED ROLLER ASSEMBLY AND PAPER FEEDCLUTCHA: Paper Feed Clutch (1 clip)B: Gear (1 clip)

C: Paper Feed Roller (2 clips, 1 bushing)D: Relay Roller (1 clip, 2 bushings)

4.4. SENSORS

A: Paper End Sensor (1 connector)B: Relay Sensor (1 connector)C: Paper Size Sensor (1 connector)D: Cover Open Sensor (1 connector)

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

H110R006.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D]

[C]

H110R007.WMF


4.5. OTHERS

A: Pressure RollerB: Magnet Locks (2 screws each)C: Spring Plates (1 screw each)

Note: When opening the front cover, carefully disconnect the Spring Hooks [D].

During re-assembly, ensure that the spring hooks are installed as illustratedabove.

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[D]

H110R008.WMF

PF

U T

ype

140S


H551

SERVICE MANUAL

OVERALL INFORM ATION

SPECIFICATIONS

1-1SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion


1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

TypeDesktop type transceiver

CircuitPSTN, PABX, ISDN (optional)

ConnectionDirect couple

Document SizeLength:105 - 420 mm [4.1 - 16.5 ins]Up to 1.2 m [47.2 ins], manually assistedUp to 14 m [46 ft] after service adjustmentWidth:148 - 304 mm [5.8 - 12.0 ins]Thickness:0.05 to 0.2 mm [2 to 8 mils](equivalent to 50 - 80 g/m2)

Document FeedAutomatic feed, face down

ADF Capacity50 sheets (using Letter size 20 lb paper orA4 size 70 g/m2 paper)25 sheets (using Legal/Double Letter size20 lb paper or B4/A3 size 70 g/m2 paper)

Scanning MethodFlat bed, with CCD

Scan Width219.5 mm [8.64 ins] ± 1% (A4/Letter)260.1 mm [10.2 ins] ± 1% (B4)308.9 mm [12.2 ins] ± 1% (A3/DoubleLetter)

Scan ResolutionsMain scan: 200 dpiSub scan:Standard - 100 lpiDetail - 200 lpiFine - 400 lpi

Memory CapacityECM: 128 kbytes

SAF:Standard: 1.5 Mbytes: 126 pagesWith 2 Mbyte option: 294 pagesWith 4 Mbyte option: 462 pagesWith 80 Mbyte HDD option: 1200 pagesWith 80 Mbyte HDD plus FunctionUpgrade Card: 3000 pagesMeasured using ITU-T #1 test document(Slerexe letter)

CompressionMH, MR, MMR, SSC (MMR only with ECMand G4),JBIG (G3 interface option required)SAF storage for memory tx: MMR and rawdata

ProtocolGroup 3 with ECMGroup 4 (ISDN G4 option required)

ModulationV.34 (TCM), V.33/V.17(TCM), V.29 (QAM),V.27ter (PHM), V.21 (FM)

Data Rate (bps)G3:33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400, Automatic fallbackG4 (option): 64 kbps/56 kbps

I/O RateWith ECM: 0 ms/lineWithout ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line

Transmission TimeG3: 3 s at 28800 bps;Measured with G3 ECM using memory foran ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter)at standard resolutionG4 (option): 3 s at 64 kbps;Measured with an ITU-T #1 test document(Slerexe letter) at standard resolution

Printing SystemLaser printing, plain paper, dry toner

SPECIFICATIONS

1-2H551 SM

Paper Size and CapacityStandard Cassette: 250 sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4100 Sheet Cassette (Optional): 100sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F, F4Paper Feed Unit (Optional): 500 sheetsUSA: Letter, LegalEurope: A4, A5 sidewaysAsia: A4, A5 sideways, F/F4Note: Up to two PFUs can be installed.

Maximum Printing Width208 mm [8.2 ins] (Letter)202 mm [8.0 ins] (A4)

Print ResolutionsFax and Copy Mode:Main scan: 400 dpiSub scan: 400 dpiPrinter Mode: 300 x 300 dpi

Power SupplyUSA: 115 ± 20 Vac, 50 ± 1 HzEurope/Asia: 187 - 276 Vac, 60 ± 1 Hz

Power Consumption (Base MachineOnly)Standby:Minimum 2 W (see Note)Normal 30 WTransmitting: 60 WReceiving: 220 W (Maximum: 900 W)Copying : 300 W (Maximum: 950 W)

Note: 2W mode is not available if one of thefollowing options is installed.

- Printer interface unit- G4- RS232C interface

Operating EnvironmentTemperature: 17 - 28°C [63 - 82°F]Humidity: 40 - 70 %Rh

Dimensions (W x D x H)475 x 520 x 260 mm [18.7 x 20.5 x 10.2 ins]Excluding handset, trays, and optional units

WeightApprox. 19 kg [50.9 lbs]Excluding CTM, handset, trays, andoptional units

1-3SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.2 FEATURES

1.2.1 FEATURES LIST

KEY:O = Used, X = Not Used,A = With optional memory 2M/4M onlyB = With optional memory 80M (HDD)

onlyC = With optional function upgrade

card onlyD = With optional Fax On Demand kit

onlyE = With optional 100 sheet cassette

onlyF = With optional paper feed unit onlyG = With optional counter onlyH = With optional handset only (US

only)I = With optional printer interface unit

onlyJ = With optional G4 kit only

EquipmentADF OBook scan XBuilt-in handset XBypass feed: 1 sheet OCabinet XCounter GCutter XHandset HHard disk BManual feed mechanism(ADF)

X

Marker (Stamp) OMonitor speaker OOptional cassette: 100 sheets EOptional Fax On Demand kit DOptional paper feed unit(up to 2 units)

F


Video Processing FeaturesContrast OHalftone(Basic & Error Diffusion)

O

Video Processing FeaturesMTF OReduction before tx (B4 -> A4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> B4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> A4) OScanning Resolution -Standard

O

Scanning Resolution - Detail OScanning Resolution - Fine OScanning Resolution -Superfine

X

Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpiwhen printing

O


Communication Features -User Selectable

Action as a transferbroadcaster

O

AI Redial (last ten numbers) O

Answering machine interface XAuthorized Reception OAuto-answer delay time XAuto dialing (pulse or DTMF) OAuto Document OAuto image density selection XAuto paper size selection XAutomatic Voice Message XBatch Transmission (max 6files)

O

Broadcasting OChain Dialing OCommunication Result Display XConfidential ID Override OConfidential Reception OConfidential Transmission ODirect Fax Number Entry OEconomy Transmission OFax on demand DForwarding O

⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇐

⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇐⇐⇐⇐

Rev.11/12/98

FEATURES

1-4H551 SM


Free Polling OGroups (7 groups) OGroup Transfer Station OHold XID Transmission OImmediate Redialing OImmediate transmission OKeystroke Programs OLength Reduction XMemory transmission OMulti-step Transfer ONext Transfer Station XOMR OOn Hook Dial OOrdering Toner XPage Count OPage separation mark OParallel memory transmission OPersonal Codes OPersonal Codes with Conf. ID OPartial Image Area Scanning CPolling Reception OPolling Transmission OPolling tx file lifetime in theSAF

O

Quick Dial(Standard: 64 stations)

O

Reception modes (Fax, Tel,Auto)

O

Remote control features XRemote Transfer ORestricted Access OSecured Polling OSecured Polling with Stored IDOverride

O

Secure Transmission XSend Later OSilent ringing detection XSpeed Dial(Standard: 100 stations)

O

Telephone Directory OTonal Signal Transmission OTransfer Request OTransmission Deadline (TRD) OTurnaround Polling X


Two-step Transfer XTwo in one OVoice Request (immed. txonly)

X

Communication Features -Service Selectable


OJ


O

mm-inch conversion whenprinting

O

Page retransmission times OProtection against wrongconn.

O

Resolutions available forreception200 x 100 dpi200 x 200 dpi200 x 400 dpi400 x 400 dpi

OOXX

Resol’n stepdown overrideoption

X

Short Preamble XWell log O

Other User FeaturesArea code prefix XAutomatic service call ServiceCenter mark OCheckered mark OClearing a memory file OClearing a polling file OClock OConfidential ID O ⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

Rev.11/12/98

FEATURES

1-5SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

Other User FeaturesCopy editing(Erase Center/Margin)

X

Copy mode OCopy Mode Restriction OCounters ODaylight Saving Time ODestination Check XDirect entry of names OFile Retention Time OFile Retransmission OFunction Programs OHard Disk Filing System B, CID Code OLabel Insertion (“ From xxx” ) OLanguage Selection OLCD contrast control ServiceMemory Lock A or BMemory Lock ID OModifying a memory file XMulti Sort DocumentReception

O

Multicopy mode OOwn telephone number OEnergy Saver (Night Timerand standby mode)

O

Print density control OPrinting a memory file ORDS on/off OReception Mode SwitchingTimer

X

Reception time printing OReduction/Enlargement XRemaining memory indicator ORemote ID OReverse Order Printing ORTI, TTI, CSI OSecure ID XService Report Transmission OSpeaker volume control OSpecified Cassette Selection FSubstitute reception on/off OTelephone line type OToner Saving Mode OTTI/CIL on/off OUser Function Keys (5 keys) OUser Parameters O

Other User FeaturesWild Cards O

Reports - AutomaticCharge Control Report XCommunication Failure Report OConfidential File Report OError Report OFax On Demand Report DMemory Storage Report OMode Change Report XPolling Clear Report OPolling Reserve Report OPolling Result Report OPower Failure Report OTCR (Journal) OToner Cassette Order Form XTransfer Result Report OTransmission Result Report O

Reports - User-initiatedAuthorized Reception List OCharge Control Report XFile List OForwarding List OGroup List OHard Disk File List B, CPersonal Code List OProgram List OQuick Dial List OSpecified Cassette SelectionList

B

Speed Dial List OTCR OTransmission Status Report XUser Function List OUser Parameter List O

Service Mode FeaturesAuto Paper Select test XBack-to-back test OBit switch programming OBook mode test XBuzzer test OCable equalizer O

⇒⇒⇒⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒⇒

⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇐⇐⇐⇐

⇐⇐⇐⇐

Rev.11/12/98

FEATURES

1-6H551 SM

Service Mode FeaturesCable equalizer OComm. parameter display OCounter check OCountry code ODTMF tone test OEcho countermeasure OEffective term of service calls OError code display OExcessive jam alarm OFile Transfer OHard Disk Utilities(Format etc.)

B

LCD contrast adjustment OLine error mark OMemory file printout (all files) OModem test ONCU parameters OOperation panel test OPeriodic service call OPM Call OPrinter mechanism test OPrinter test patterns OProgrammable attenuation XProtocol dump list ORAM display/rewrite ORAM dump ORAM test ORinger test OScanner lamp test OScanner mechanism test OSensor initialization XSerial number OService monitor report OService station number OSoftware upload/download OSRAM data download OSystem parameter list OTechnical data on the TCR OThermal head parameters XTransmission Status Report XUser data transfer O

1-7SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.2.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capability of each programmable item changesafter the optional function upgrade card is installed.

Item Standard With functionupgrade card

Maximum number of memory files pluspolling rx files

200 1000

Maximum number of memory files 200 1000Maximum number of destinations per file 200 1000Maximum number of destinations overall 500 2000Maximum number of pages overall 1200 3000Number of Quick Dials 64 64Number of Speed Dials 100 1000Number of Groups 9 30Maximum number of destinations perGroup

200 200

Maximum number of destinations dialedfrom the ten-key pad overall

100 1000

Maximum number of programs 64(programmed in 64

Quick Dial keys)



Maximum number of destinations perprogram

200 200

Maximum number of destinations usedfor all programs

300 2000

Maximum number of Auto Documents 64(programmed in 64

Quick Dial keys)



Maximum number of communicationrecords for the TCR (Journal) stored inthe memory

256 1000

Maximum number of addresses specifiedfor features such as AuthorizedReception and Specified CassetteSelection

30 50

Maximum number of personal codes 50 500

FEATURES

1-8H551 SM

1.2.3 POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS OF OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

The following table shows which items of optional equipment can be or cannot beinstalled at the same time.“ ” in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment can be installedat the same time.“ X” in the table indicates that the two items of optional equipment cannot beinstalled at the same time.

IC CardsOption/Equipment IC Card

SlotA B C D E

A: Feature Expander 2M/4M X

B: Feature Expander 80M (HDD)UpperSlot X

C: Function Upgrade Card X XD: Fax On Demand (FOD) Card X XE: Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool

(Service Tool)

LowerSlot X X

OtherA B C D E F

A: Paper Feed Unit Type F X

B: Paper Feed Unit Type S X

C: 100 Sheet Cassette

D: Printer Interface

E: G4 Unit XF: G3 Unit X

OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

1-9SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.3 OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

MFCE

SCPCG ROM(512kB)

FlashROM(2MB)

LPCMN195003

MFLModem

DRAM(2MB)

SRAM(256kB) VPP4F

VoiceA/D

Converter

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

IC Card(Type A)

Lower Slot

G4Interface

RS232CInterface

IC Card(Type B)

Upper Slot

SG3 V.34Interface

FlashROM

(512kB)

DualPortDCR

M o d e m R O M

Sys tem ROM

MFDU

NCU

DTMFReceiver

PowerSaver CPU

Hybrid IC

EXIO1EXIO2

MFPD

DC/DCConverter

LDDRLaser Synch.

SBU Microphone(FOD)

PSU

Sensors

Speaker

Clutches

OperationPanel

Scanner MotorPaper Feed Motor

PFUs

100 SheetCassette

Power PackCTM


Components

Hexagonal MirrorMotor

Main Motor

PrinterInterface

MechanicalCounter

Fax OnDemand

Card

FunctionUpgrade

Card

FeatureExpander

4M

FeatureExpander

2M


Bus Inter face

Paral lel Interface

Serial Interface

OVERALL MACHINE CONTROL

1-10H551 SM

The MFCE contains most of the logical components for overall system control, anddirect interfaces to the IC cards, an RS232C interface, a G4 interface (CiG4-SV)and a optional G3 interface (SG3-V.34).The MFDU has interfaces to the power supply, sensors, drive components, andoptional equipment.The RS232C interface may not be available in some models.

There are two cpus in the machine: the main cpu (SCP) on the MFCE and theenergy saver cpu on the MFDU. In energy saver mode, the main CPU switches offand the energy saver CPU takes over.

The 2 MB (16Mbit) flash ROM contains the system software, which can be updatedthrough an IC card slot or from the remote control center using RDS.The CGROM (Character Generation ROM) contains all the character fonts used onthe display and in reports.

The Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used for all the communications (V.34,V.17, V.29, V.27ter., and V.21). The 512kB flash ROM contains the modemprogram.

The 2 MB DRAM is used for the SAF memory, ECM buffer memory, work area,and page memory. The SAF memory can be extended by 2, 4, or 80 MB with an ICmemory card or a hard disk.

The 256 kB SRAM contains the user and system parameters. This can beupgraded by 512 kB with the function upgrade card. These SRAMs are batterybacked-up.

• The SRAMs in the IC cards are battery backed up, in case the machine is turnedoff or the machine goes into the 2-watt energy saver. However, the data inthese SRAMs are not guaranteed if the card is disconnected from the machine.

CAUTIONWhen ever the Fax On Demand card or Function Upgrade Card needs to beremoved for using the service tool, follow the instructions in section 3.3.9to avoid any data loss.

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

SEP/SUB CODING

2-1

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

SM H551

2.1 SEP/SUB CODING

OVERVIEW.

ITU-T introduced the following protocol signals in the T.30 recommendation in 1996. These signalsenable confidential transmission and secured polling between machines produced by differentmanufacturers.

SEP (Selective Polling): This signal informs the other terminal of the polling ID to enable secured(ID) polling.

PWD (Password): This signal informs the other terminal of the password to enable stored IDoverride.

SUB (Sub-address): This signal informs the other terminal of the confidential ID to enableconfidential transmission.

SID (Sender ID): This signal informs the other terminal of the sender ID to enable confidential IDoverride.

The ITU-T recommendation only clarifies the requirements for the transmitting terminal, and doesnot specify the requirements for the receiving terminal. How the receiving terminal should treatthese signals depends on the manufacturer.

Note: Up to 20 digits or characters can be sent in a SEP, PWD,SUB or SID Frame.⇒⇒⇒⇒

Rev. 11/98

SEP/SUB CODING

2-2H551 SM

2.1.1 SELECTIVE POLLING (SEP/PWD)

SEP Signal:When the Rx terminal receives the SEP signal with the NSC or DTC signal, the Rxterminal switches over to secured polling transmission using the SEP ID. The SEP(Selective polling) signal must contain four digits as an ID.

The Rx terminal automatically disconnects the line when any of the followingconditions occurs (error code 0-15).

• When the SEP ID is other than four digits.• When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.

The communication becomes free polling when the SEP ID programmed is 0000.

PWD Signal:When the PWD (password) signal is transmitted together with the SEP signal, thePWD programmed is used as an ID code for stored ID override.However, PWD reception is disabled for this machine at the factory setting.NOTE: The machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a PWD

signal. To enable PWD reception, the communication bit switch 17 bit 2must be switched on.

Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switchesCommunication bit switch 17 bit 0: SEP signal reception.Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID reception.

Tx Rx

C E D

N S F

DIS

SEP

NSC or DTC

NSS or DCS

C F R

TCF

H551D501.wmf

SEP/SUB CODING

2-3

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

SM H551

2.1.2 SUB-ADDRESS (SUB/SID)

SUB Signal:The SUB (sub-address) signal transmitted from the Tx terminal contains aconfidential ID. A stored message can be printed using the SUB ID as confidentialID override.

The SUB ID must contain four digits. The receiving terminal automaticallydisconnects the line when any of the following conditions occurs (error code 0-15).

• When the SUB ID is other than four digits.• When anything other than numbers is included in the ID.• When a confidential ID is not programmed in the Rx terminal and when the

transmitted SUB ID is 0000.A stored message can be printed using the (normal) confidential ID stored in themachine when the SUB ID sent from the transmitter is 0000.

SID Signal:SID reception is disabled for this machine.NOTE: This machine automatically disconnects the line when it receives a SID

signal. To enable SDI reception, communication bit switch 17 bit 2 must beswitched on.

Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switchesCommunication bit switch 17 bit 1: SUB signal reception.Communication bit switch 17 bit 2: PWD/SID signal reception.

Tx Rx

C E D

N S F

DIS

SUB

NSS or DCS

C F R

T C F

H551D502.wmf

JBIG COMPRESSION

2-4H551 SM

2.2 JBIG COMPRESSION

JBIG (Joint Bi-Level Image Coding Expert Group) is a working group whichconsists of members of ITU-T and ISO. The JBIG compression method allows datacompression of approximately 1.2 to 1.3 times the MMR method in text mode, and2 to 10 times in halftone mode.

JBIG compression is only available in the optional G3 unit.

JBIG compression is disabled when any of the following conditions occurs.

• When JBIG compression is turned off by communication bit switch 00.• When ECM is turned off by communication bit switch 01.• When the receiving terminal does not have the JBIG feature.• When the receiving terminal does not have the ECM feature.

There are two modes for JBIG compression;

• Standard mode: the transmitted data block consists of 128 lines.• Optional mode: the transmitted data block consists of one page (transmission

speed with this mode is faster).This machine supports both modes for transmission and reception. Which mode touse for communication is determined during handshaking.

Cross reference: Section 4.2 Bit switchesCommunication bit switch 00 bit 5: JBIG reception mode

0: Standard mode only 1: Standard mode and optional mode (default)

Communication bit switch 00 bit 6: Priority of JBIG mode used for transmission0: Standard mode 1: Optional mode (default)

Data Compression

JBIG compressed data is called the Bi-level Image Entity (BIE).The BIE consists of a header frame (BIH: Bi-level Image Header) and compresseddata frame (BID: Bi-level Image Data).The BIH frame contains information such as main scan width (pixels), sub scanlength, and compression mode (standard/optional) used.The BID frame contains the actual data.

H551D503.wmf

BIH(Bi-Level Image

Header)

BID(Bi-Level Image Data)

BIE: Bi-level Image Entity

ImageData

Header

Page Data

MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS

2-5

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

ns

SM H551

2.3 MEMORY RECEPTION CONDITIONS

User parameter switch 05 bit 1 allows the user to select how to treat an incomingmessage that is without RTI or CSI.

User parameter switch 05 bit 1:Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received 0: Possible, 1: Impossible

If 0 is selected, the machine receives all message regardless of RTI and CSI.When this is set to 1 (default setting), the following bit switch works in combinationwith the user parameter setting.System bit switch 11 bit 6:

Conditions for memory reception if no RTI or CSI is received.0: Memory reception is available only when RTI or CSI is received.1: Memory reception is always available unless there is a mechanical (printer)

error.

The default setting is set to 1.The default setting means that if the printer is working, all messages will bereceived, regardless of the user parameter setting. But the user can decidewhether or not to print messages that have no RTI or CSI. However, when there isa mechanical error in the printer, the machine rejects such a message because notrace of the sender will be stored in the machine.

This switch has been added from the LFO model.

SG3-V.34 BOARD

2-6H551 SM

2.4 SG3-V.34 BOARD

The SG3-V.34 board enables full dual G3 communication with the standard NCU.The CCP (Communication Control Processor) contains a CPU, and it controls theentire board.

1. CCP (Communication Control Processor)• CPU (RU8)• DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the MFCE is done through this

block.• DMA controller• JBIG interface

2. ROM• 512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the system program• 512kB (4 Mbit) flash ROM for the modem program

Both programs can be updated using the Flash/SRAM data copy board.

3. DRAM• 512kB DRAM shared between the line buffer, ECM buffer, and working RAM.

4. Modem• A Panasonic MN195003MFL modem is used.

5. JBIG LSI• JBIG compression LSI

6. DTMF Receiver

Standard NCU

DRAM(4MB)

JBIGM65761

Flash ROM(4MB)

Pro g ram

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

MN195003MFLModem

Flash ROM(4MB)Modem

DTMFReceiver

Hybrid IC

C P U( R U 8 )

D M A C JBIGIF T O N ED P R A M

C C P

SG3-V.34

MFCE

H551D504.wmf

INSTALLATION

INSTALLING THE MACHINE

SM H5513-1

Inst

alla

tion

3. INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLING THE MACHINE

Refer to the Operator's Manual for the installation environment and how to installand set up the machine.

Refer to section 2.4.5. of the FX4 service manual for how to set up the NCUhardware in each country.

3.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

Items to Program (Service Level) Function No.Country code (NCU parameter 00) Function 08Country code (System switch 0F) Function 01Protocol requirements (G3 switch 0B) Function 01PSTN access code (RAM address 4800DB) Function 06PSTN access method (RAM address 4800CD) Function 06Machine's serial number Function 14Service station's fax number Function 13PM call (System switch 01- bit 0) Function 01Periodic service call (RAM address 480401) Function 06

Items to Program (User Administrator Level) Function No.Clock Function 91Initial programming items Function 61On/off switches Function 62Display/report language Function 93Fusing power control during energy saver mode

(User parameter switch 05 - bit 6)Function 63

INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

H551 SM3-2

3.3 INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

CAUTIONDo the following before installing an optional unit:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.

NOTE: • Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the user installable options.• For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card, be sure to read

section 3.3.9. after installation.

3.3.1 HARD DISK UNIT (80MB)

NOTE: If the optional G3 unit is also to be installed, install this option beforeinstalling the G3 unit.


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4screws), left cover [B] (3 screws andthe connector cover), and the IC cardslot cover [C].

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the harddisk unit [E] (4 screws). Hook thegrounding plate [F] on the bracketand secure the hard disk unit to themachine (2 screws).

H130i501.WMF

H130i504.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]

FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III

SM H5513-3

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.3 FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M IIIThis option can be installed in the following models:- H551 series

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MAY DO THIS INSTALLATION.

!CAUTIONDo the following before installing an optional unit:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the System Parameter List.3. Turn off the Main Switch, and disconnect the power plug.

NOTE: • Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the user installable options.• For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax on Demand Card, be sure to read section

3.3.9, after installation.


1. Remove the Rear Cover [A] (4 screws),Left Cover [B] (3 screws and theconnector Cover), and the IC Card slotCover [C].

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the Hard DiskUnit [E] (4 screws). Hook the GroundingPlate [F] on the bracket and secure theHard Disk Unit to the machine (2screws).

H130i501.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]

Rev. 11/2000

!


H551 SM3-4

3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCUbracket [G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asiamodels, 1 screw for USA model.)NOTE: The Grounding Plate [H] is not

installed in the USA models.

4. Connect the HDD Harness [I] and theHarness [J] to the Hard Disk InterfaceCard [K].

5. Turn on the Battery switch [L] on the HardDisk Interface Card. Then insert the HardDisk Interface Card into the upper CardSlot [M].

NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin Harness [J] to the FDU at this time.

6. Lead the Harness containing the core with theblack marking [N] behind the NCU bracket [G].Important:This is to avoid the Hard Disk Data Bus frominterfering with the Hard Disk Drive Signal.

7. Connect the HDD harness to the InterfaceBoard [O], then connect the InterfaceBoard to the Hard Disk Unit [P].

8. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode. Then do the following:• Set the System Bit Switch 05 bit 4 to “1”, and System Bit Switch 00 bit 1 to “1”, then

exit the Service Mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.• Enter service function 16 and select “0” (INITIALIZE) to initialize the Hard Disk.

If “OK” is displayed, exit the Service Mode and turn off the Main Switch.

9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the Hard Disk Interface Card to CN73 on theFDU.

10. Replace the screws, which were removed in step 3.(3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw for USA model.)

[G]

[H]

[O]

[N]

[P][G]

Rev. 11/2000

[L]

[I][J]

[K]


SM H5513-5

Inst

alla

tio

n

11. Keep the Core [Q] and the Harness as shown and replace the Rear Cover and the LeftCover.

12. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode.Print the Memory Dump List (service function 06) for the following addresses and data.

70001E(H) - 50(H) 700022(H) - 00(H)70001F(H) - 00(H) 700023(H) - 00(H)700020(H) - FF(H) 700024(H) - 00(H)700021(H) - FF(H) 700025(H) - 80(H)

If any of these addresses contain a value different from the above list, format the Hard Disk(service function 16).

CAUTIONThe Hard Disk Interface Card contains a Lithium Battery. The danger of anexplosion exists if a Battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

[Q]

Rev. 11/2000


H551 SM3-6

6. Reinstall the rear cover and the left cover.Affix the “ISDN” decal [P] to the small coveras shown. Connect the ISDN cable so thatthe core is closer to the machine.NOTE: Make sure that the grounding plate

does not come off when replacingthe rear cover.

7. Plug in the machine and turn on the mainswitch.Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 2 to“1.” Then turn the machine off and on toenable the ISDN unit.

8. Input the initial settings with user function61 and service function 17.Please refer to the ISDN option service manual for details.

Make the following settings if necessary.• System bit switch 0A bit 1: Default communication mode.

Bit 1 0: G3 1: G4• System bit switch 0A bit 6: Line used for G3 transmission.

Bit 6 0: PSTN 1: ISDN• System bit switch 0A bit 7: Line used when the machine falls back to G3 from

G4Bit 7 0: PSTN 1: ISDN

• System bit switch 18 bits 0 and 1: Default communication line fortransmission

Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting) 0 1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit) 1 0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit must be installed) 1 1 ISDN (Optional G4 Unit)

NOTE: Make sure that you input the following subscriber numbers when youconnect the machine under the US National ISDN network.

• Subscriber number: G4 Subscriber No.1 (Main)/ G3 Subscriber No.1 (Main)• SPID Number: G4 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)/ G3 Subscriber No.2 (Sub)

H551i013.wmf

[P]


H551 3-6A SM

When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed with phonenumbers in Quick Dials and the Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN, thecommunication port for all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to ISDN G3.

This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored numbers atonce.

Procedure:1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.

4B5846(H) - Current line type setting.4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after this procedure.

The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).2) Turn the main switch off and on.

Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, SpeedDials, AI Redial, and Forwarding Stations. If the communication mode and theport setting for a number is the same as specified for the “current setting” inthe above address, the machine changes these to the new setting.

3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).

Setting:Bit 0 and 1: Communication modeBit 1 0 Setting

0 0 G30 1 G41 0 Not used

Bit 2 to 4: Communication portBit 4 3 2 Setting

0 0 0 PSTN1 (Standard G3)0 0 1 PSTN2 (Optional G3 unit)0 1 1 ISDN1 0 0 Any available port

(This setting can be used only when an optional G3 or G4 unit is installed inthe machine.)

Other settings - Not usedBit 5 to 7: Not used

Example:If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN G3 to ISDN G3,change the data to 00(H) (0000 0000) in the address 4B5846(H)change the data to 0C(H) (00001100) in the address 4B5847(H)

NOTE: Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memoryawaiting transmission.

Rev. 11/16/98


SM H5513-7

Inst

alla

tion

3.3.3 G3 INTERFACE


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), andthe left cover [B] (3 screws) and the PFUconnector cover. Then, remove the smallcover [C] from the rear cover as shown.

2. Remove the PIF brackets [D] and [E].Bend the flat cable [F] as shown andconnect it to the FCE (CN4) and the G3interface board [G].NOTE: Make sure that the core [H] is

placed by the FCE as shown.Make sure that the marksface each other at each end.

3. Attach the inner bracket [I] (3 screws)and the grounding plate [J] (3 screws) asshown.

H143i501.WMF

H551i001.WMF

H551i002.wmf

[A]

[I]

[B]

[J]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G][H]


H551 SM3-8

4. Secure the SG3 (V.34) board [K] (3screws) and the optional NCU board [L](4 screws).

5. Connect the harness [M] between theSG3 (V.34) board and the optional NCUboard.Also connect the G3 interface board [G]to the SG3 (V.34) board.NOTE: The core is not installed on the

harness [M] in the USA models.

6. Install the PIF brackets [D] and [E] whichwere removed in step 2.Attach the grounding plate [N] to theouter bracket [O]. Then attach the outerbracket to the machine.Align the grounding plate with the leftedge of the outer bracket.

H551i003.wmf

H551i004.WMF

H551i005.WMF

[D]

[E]

[K]

[N]

[L]

[O]

[M]

[G]


SM H5513-9

Inst

alla

tion

7. Set the phone line harness [P] in thebracket [Q]. Then attach it to the smallcover [R] (1 tapping screw).

8. Install the small cover and connect the phoneline harness to the connector [S] as shown.

9. Install the rear cover and the left cover. Affixthe “Line 2” decal [T] on the small cover.Make sure that the grounding plate does notcome off when replacing the rear cover.

H551i006.wmf

H551i007.wmf

H551i008.wmf

[P]

[Q]

[R]

[S]

[T]


H551 SM3-10

10. Wrap the phone line around the core [U] asshown and connect it to the machine.NOTE: Make sure that the core is placed near

the machine.

11. Plug in the machine and turn on the mainswitch.Set Communication Bit Switch 16 bit 1 to “1.”Then turn the machine off and on to enable theoptional G3 unit.

12. Input the optional G3 CSI by user function 61.Make the following settings if necessary.• Default communication line for transmission:

System Bit Switch 18 bit 0 and 1Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 2 (Default setting) 0 1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3 Unit) 1 0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 Unit) 1 1 ISDN (Optional G4 unit must be installed)

• PSTN 2 (optional G3) access code (RAM address 4800D7).• PSTN 2 (optional G3) access method (RAM address 4800CD)

H551i504.WMF

[U]


SM H5513-11

Inst

alla

tion

3.3.4 FAX ON DEMAND

NOTE: Perform the procedures in the section 3.3.9 after installation.


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), andthe IC card slot cover [B].

2. Remove the NCU cover (1 screw) andreplace it with the cover for the Fax onDemand feature [C], then connect theharness [D] to CN73 on the FCE as shown.

3. Install the battery on the IC card and turnon the battery switch.

4. Install the IC card [E] into the lower slot,and put back the rear cover [A]. Then,connect the microphone socket [F] to theNCU cover as shown.

5. Plug in the machine and turn on the mainswitch. Then perform the following.• Print the system parameter list and make

sure that "FOD" is listed as an option onthe list.

• Check that the functions related to theFax on Demand feature can beaccessed.(Please refer to the operator's manual.)

CAUTIONThe IC card contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if abattery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.

H132I501.WMF

H132I502.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]


H551 SM3-12

3.3.5 PAPER FEED UNIT (FRONT FLOW)


1. Put the machine on the paper feedunit [A], and remove the connectorcover [B] (1 screw).

2. Secure the machine and the paperfeed unit with the bracket [C] (2screws). Then connect theharness [D] to the machine.

3. Install the harness cover [E](1 screw), and install theconnector cover [B] (which wasremoved in step 1).

4. Remove the bottom plate holder bracket[F] as shown.

5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.Make a test print using the paper feedunit.

H110I502.WMF

H110I503.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]


SM H5513-13

Inst

alla

tion

3.3.6 PAPER FEED UNIT (SIDE FLOW)


1. Put the machine on the paper feed unit [A], and remove the connector cover [B](1 screw).

2. Secure the machine and the paper feed unit at the front side with the panelscrew [C], spacer [D], and the collar [E].NOTE: This step is not required for the H515 models.

3. Secure the rear side with the bracket [F] (2 screws). Then connect the harness[G] to the machine.

4. Install the harness cover [H] (1 screw), and install the connector cover [B](which was removed in step 1).

5. Load the paper and turn on the machine.Make a test print using the paper feed unit.

H110I501.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]


H551 SM3-14

3.3.7 COUNTER


1. Remove the rear cover [A] and the smallcover.

2. Install the counter [B] as shown.

3. Connect the harness [C] to the FDUinterface harness, then install the rearcover [A].

4. Plug in the machine and turn on the mainswitch.

5. Make some copies and check whether thecounter works or not. If it doesn't, checkthe harness connection from the counter tothe FDU.

H165I505.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]


SM H5513-15

Inst

alla

tion

3.3.8 PRINTER UNIT


1. Remove the cassette cover from therear cover [A].NOTE: The cassette cover is not

installed in the Europe models.

2. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws)and two small covers [B] (1 screw) and[C].

3. Attach the grounding plate [D] to themachine (2 screws).

4. Install the rear cover back on themachine (1 screw at the lower leftcorner), and install two brackets [E] (2screws) and [F] (2 screws - one ofthese screws also secures the rearcover) as shown.

H144I510.WMF

H144i523.WMF

H144I513.WMF

[A]

[B][C]

[D]

[E]

[F]


H551 SM3-16

5. Attach the brackets [G] and [H] onto thebracket plate [I] (2 screws).NOTE: For the brackets [G] and [H], used

the ones which have "B" marked.

6. Attach the bracket plate [I] (4 screws) andthe side bracket [J] (1 screw) to the PrinterInterface Unit.

7. Remove the side covers of the PrinterInterface Unit.

8. Connect the harness [K] to the FDUthrough the lower window in the rearcover. Hook the Printer Interface Unitonto the machine by the brackets [G] and[H], then secure the unit (2 screws). Donot tighten the screw at the side bracket[J].

9. Install the side covers [L] and [M].

H144I565.WMF

H144i566.wmf

H144I567.WMF

[G]

[H]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[L]

[M]


SM H5513-17

Inst

alla

tion

10. Place the spacers [N] on top of the PrinterInterface Unit and secure the top cover [O] withtwo long screws [P] (M3 x 10 mm) and one shortscrew [Q] (M3 x 6 mm).

11. Attach a core at both ends of a parallel printercable, then connect it to the Printer Interface Unit.

12. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.Check if the On Line indicator on the operationpanel is lit. If not, check the harness connectionfrom the Printer Interface Unit to the FDU.

13. Print a status sheet by pressing the button [R] atthe top of the printer interface unit.

H144i541.WMF

[N]

[O]

[P]

[Q]

[R]


H551 SM3-18

3.3.9 DATA PROTECTION

Important notice for the Function Upgrade Card and Fax On Demand Card:

The Function Upgrade Card holds data that has been programmed, and the FaxOn Demand card holds the voice messages that have been recorded.

CAUTIONThe following procedure must be avoided because it erases all the datastored in the card.1. Turning off the machine with the card installed.2. Disconnecting the card.3. Turning on the machine without the card installed.

To prevent accidental data erasure, change the System Bit Switch 16 - bit 0 to “1”whenever a new card is installed.

When this bit switch is enabled, the machine will not start up unless one of thefollowing cards is detected at power up, so that the machine will not reinitializeitself to a “without-the-card” configuration.

• Function Upgrade Card• Fax On Demand Card• FCE Data Copy Tool (Service Tool)

SERVICE TABLES

4. A. USER PARAMETERS

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

SM 4-A FAX4800L

FAX4800L 4-B SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

SM 4-C FAX4800L

FAX4800L 4-D SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

SM 4-E FAX4800L

FAX4800L 4-F SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

SM 4-G FAX4800L

FAX4800L 4-H SM

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

SM 4-I FAX4800L

SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

4-1

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the following symbols. - Start key - Stop key - Function key - Yes key - No key - Up arrow key - Down arrow key - Right arrow key - Left arrow key

4.1.1 BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 01)

Enables Bit Switch Programming, to change the settings of the unit's electronic DIPswitches. Bit switch functions are listed on section 4.2 current and defualt settingsare listed on the system parameter list. (section 4.1.2)

1. then immediately

2.

3. To see the system bit switches: To see the scanner switches: To see the printer (plotter) switches: To see the G3 switches: To see the communication switches: Example: Press

4. Scroll through the bit switches.Increment bit switch: Decrement bit switch: Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3

5. Adjust the bit switch.Example: To change the value of bit 7,

press

6. Either:• Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.• Finish -




_

H515M501.WMF

H515M502.WMF

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH00: 00000000

H515M503.WMF

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 00000000

H515M504.WMF

SYSTEM SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH03: 10000000

H515M505.WMF


4-2H551 SM

4.1.2 GROUP 3 SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (FUNCTION 02)

The printout provides the techician with a copy of the operator and serviceprogrammedc setting of the machine. The listing includes the ID's settings, thecounters, NCU parameters and the default and current setting of the BIT Switches.Refer to the sample printout.

1. then immediately

2.

3. Refer to the following table for the meaning of each counter in the list.

Name Meaning Name MeaningSCN Scanned page counter PRT Printed page counterTX Transmitted page

counterRX Received page counter

PM PM counter PM Default Default setting for thePM service call interval

PCU Printed page counterusing the current masterdrum

COPY Copied page counter

ADF Scanned page counterusing the ADF

TONER Printed page counterusing the current CTM

MAIN Cassette Paper feed counter(Standard cassette)

Cassette 2 Paper feed counter(First paper feed unit)

Cassette 3 Paper feed counter(Second paper feed unit)

OPENCassette

Paper feed counter(100 sheet cassette)

BY-PASS Paper feed counter(By-pass feeder)

DOC. JAM Document jam counter

COPY JAM Paper jam counter (total) EJECT JAM Fusing exit jam counterPAPER JAM Paper jam counter (Jams

at the registration area)MAIN CSTJAM

Paper jam counter(Standard cassette)

CST 2 JAM Paper jam counter(First paper feed unit)

CST 3 JAM Paper jam counter(Second paper feed unit)

OPEN CSTJAM

Paper jam counter(100-sheet cassette)

BY-PASS JAM Paper jam counter(By-pass feeder)

PRN Printed page counterfrom the PC printerinterface

PPC1 Reserved for future use.

PPC2 Reserved for future use. PPC3 Reserved for future use.PPC4 Reserved for future use.




_

H515M501.WMF


PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL

H515M506.WMF


4-3

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

A sample parameter list is given below.

* * * SYSTEM PARAMETER LIST (Date and Time) * * *

SERIAL NO. - Serial number programmed by function 14)

ID CODE

C S I

T T I

R T I

ROM NO. [Software part no.] [Check sum values (total) (boot) (main)]

ROM VER. [Version] [Software release no.] [Software release date]

CONFIDENTIAL ID

COUNTER

NCU PARAMETER

SERVICE NUMBER

OWN NUMBER

NUMBER

MEMORY LOCK ID

(SWUSR) - User Parameter Settings


PARAMETER

TTI

SCAN THRESHOLD

2MB or 4MB - Optional memory card capacity installed

CASSETTE 2 - Optional paper feed unit installed

(SWSYS) - System Bit Switch Settings


(SWG3) - G3 Bit Switch Settings

(SWCOM) - Communication Bit Switch Settings

(SWPLT) - Printer Bit Switch Settings

(SWSCN) - Scanner Bit Switch Settings


4-4H551 SM

4.1.3 ERROR CODE DISPLAY (FUNCTION 03)

This function will allo9w the technician to displayh and scroll through the errorcodes, if any, that had occurred in the machine. The displayed message will alsoinclude the time and date that each error had occurred.

1. ,then immediately

2.

3. Either:Scroll through the error codes - or Finish -

4.1.4 SERVICE MONITOR REPORT (FUNCTION 04)

This function will print a listing of the error codes, if any, that had occurred in themachine. As in the displayed listing, the Service Monitor Report will include thetime and date that each error had occurred.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4.1.5 GROUP 3 PROTOCOL DUMP (FUNCTION 05)

This function will print the contents of the protocol signals that were exchangedduring the last six communications.

1. then immediately

2.

3.




_

H515M501.WMF

ERROR CODE

CODE=0-14 JAN 1 3:15PM

H515M507.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

SERVICE MONITOR REPORT

PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL

H515M508.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

G3 PROTOCOL DUMP LIST

PRESS START

NO TO CANCEL

H515M509.WMF


4-5

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.6 RAM DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 06)

This function will allow the technician to display the RAM data in a selected addresslocation and if required, allow the data to be rewritten. The data is displayed inhexadecimal format. The current value of each address is listed in the RAM dump printout.The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Input the address that you wish to see.Example: Address 480020

5. If you wish to change the data, move thecursor to the data field: press .

6. Type in the new data.Example: 80, press

7. Either:• View the previous address - press .• View the next address - press .• Finish -

4.1.7 RAM DUMP (FUNCTION 06)

This function will print a listing of the current information that is stored in the selectedaddress location. The function of each address is described in sections 4-3 and 4-5. Thecurrent listing of each settiong can be printed by performing the RAM Dump Procedure.Note that the title of the report is called Memory Dump, not RAM Dump.

1. then immediately .

2.

3.




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM NO:


_

H515M510.WMF

H515M512.WMF

MEMORYR/W ADDRESS= 480020DATA=

00

H515M513 WMF




_

H515M501.WMFRAM NO:


_

H515M510.WMFMEMORY DUMP


H515M515.WMF

MEMORY R/W

ADDRESS= DATA=2E000000

MEMORY R/W

ADDRESS= DATA=00480020

MEMORY R/W



4-6H551 SM

4. Enter the first four digits of the start andend addresses.Example: Start at 480000, end at

4801FF.

5.

4.1.8 COUNTER DISPLAY/REWRITE (FUNCTION 07)

This function allows the technician to read and reset the counters. The currenttotals of the counters are also losted on the system parameter list.

1. then immediately

2.

3. Either:Check the transmitted, received, scannedand printed page counters, andthe printer and scanner jam counters -press Check the PM counter - press Check the CTM counter - press Check the OPU counter - press Example: Press

4. To change the contents of a counter,input the new value, then press .

5. To finish:

MEMORY DUMP

ADD. 480000H - ADD. 4800FFH

H515M516.WMF




_

COUNTER R/W NO:

0.COUNTER 1.PM COUNTER

2.CTM COUNTER 3.PCU COUNTER

_

H515M517 WMF

COUNTER

TX : SCN: 000000

RX : 000000 PRT: 000000

000000

H515M518.WMF


4-7

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.9 MODEM TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each of the modemsignals.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the available tests using or .

5. To start a test:


7. To finish:

4.1.10 DTMF TONE TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test allows the technician to hear the audio tone of each key of the ten keypad.

1. then immediately

2.

3.


5. To start a test:


7. To finish:




_

H515M501.WMF

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

H515M519.WMFMODEM TEST

NO.01=V21 300BPS

PRESS "START"

H515M520.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

H515M519.WMFDTMF TEST

NO.01=TONE [0]

PRESS "START"

H515M521.WMF


4-8H551 SM

4.1.11 NCU PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 08)

This controls the Network Control Unit (NCU) automatic dialing parameters forsuch as the auto-answering frequencies, length of the pause and the number ofrings before the machine will answer an incoming call. The current value of eachaddress is listed on the system parameter list.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the parameters using or . If you want to change a value,enter the new value at the keypad,then press .

5. To finish : .NOTE: Parameter CC is the Country Code, Parameter 01 is the Tx level.

Refer to section 4.3 for full details on NCU parameters.

4.1.12 MODEM DETECTION TEST (FUNCTION 08)

NOTE: This function can be used only when G3 bit switch 0B bit 5 (French PTTrequirements) is 1 in European models. It cannot be used in USA models.

1. then immediately

2.

3.




_

H515M501.WMF

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

H515M519.WMF

NCU PARAMETER SET

C.C =019

PRESS "YES/NO"

H515M522.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

H515M519.WMF

DETECT TEST READY

NO.01=V29 9600BPS

PRESS START

H515M523.WMF

C.C =017


4-9

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


5. To start a test:


7. To finish:

4.1.13 RINGER TEST (FUNCTION 08)

This test will output the audio tone of the ring signal.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the test:

5. To stop :

6. To finish:

4.1.14 OPERATION PANEL TEST (FUNCTION 09)

The operation panel test will light all of the segments in the display panel and all ofthe LED indicators.

1. then immediately

2.

3. To start the test, press .The screen should turn black.


5. To finish:




_

H515M501.WMF

NCU NO:

0.MODEM 1.DTMF

2.NCU PARA 3.RINGER

_

H515M519.WMFRINGER TEST

PRESS START

H515M524.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

LED.LCD

PRESS START

H515M525.WMF


4-10H551 SM

4.1.15 XENON LAMP TEST (FUNCTION 10)

This test will illuminate the xenon lamp in the scanning section.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the test, press


6. To finish:

4.1.16 ADF TEST (FUNCTION 10)

The machine will perform the service mode automatic document feed (ADF) testprocedure. The test consists of feeding the documents that were inserted into theADF with out performing an actual FAX, or copy operation.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Place a document in the feeder,then press .


6. Finish:




_

H515M501.WMF

SCANNER NO:


_

H515M526.WMFXe LAMP

PRESS START

H515M527.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

SCANNER NO:


_

H515M526.WMF

ADF TEST

PRESS START

H515M528.WMF


4-11

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.17 PRINTER TEST PATTERNS (FUNCTION 11)

The service test will allow the technician to test the operation of the printer sectionon the machine by printing the test patterns that are stored in the RAM section ofthe machine. The machine will print one copy of each selected test pattern.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Press a key from to .

5. Press .A test pattern is printed.

6. To finish:

4.1.18 SCANNER AND PRINTER MECHANISM TEST - FREE RUN(FUNCTION 11)

The aging test will continuously cycle the machine. During the aging test, themachine will light all of the operation panel indicators, the display panel, the xenonlamp and the ADF unit will cycle. In addition, the machine will print a light graypattern on each sheet of paper. To terminate the aging test, depress the STOPkey.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. To start the free run, press .


6. To finish:




_

H515M501.WMF

PRINTER NO:


_

H515M529.WMFPATTERN ENTER CODE

CODE:

NO TO CANCEL SCROLL

_

H515M530.WMF

PATTERN

CODE: VERTICAL

PRESS START

0

H515M531.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

PRINTER NO:


_

H515M529.WMF

MECH. TEST

PRESS START

H515M532.WMF


4-12H551 SM

4.1.19 RAM TESTS (FUNCTION 12)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine intothe RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placingan auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System ParameterList.

1. then immediately

2.

3. Either:Test the SRAM: Press Test the DRAM: Press If test is successful, the display shows"OK!!".If test is unsuccessful, the display shows"ADDRESS=".

4. To finish:




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF


4-13

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.20 SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

Instead of replacing EPROMs to update the machine's software, use thisprocedure to update the software in the machine's Flash ROM.This procedure copies software from an external medium to the Flash ROM on themachine's MFCE. The external medium for the new software can be an MFCE oran EPROM board.NOTE: Both H5159100 and A1939353 data copy tools can be used for this model.

Both H5159500 and A1939351 data copy boards can be used for thismodel.

1. Turn off the machine.

2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect theMFCE [C] or data copy board [D] with new software to the opposite side of thetool.

CAUTIONIf the machine has an optional Function Upgrade card or an optional FaxOn Demand card, follow the instructions in section 4.1.26.Otherwise, the programmed data in the IC card may all be erased.

NOTE: The switch [E] on the tool [A] must be at the ON position.

NOTE: The data copy board uses four 4Mbit EPROMs. Each EPROM must meet thefollowing specifications. Size: 4 Mbits Data width: 8 bits Number of pins: 32 Access speed: Faster than 150 ns Socket 1: ROM0, D15 - D8 Socket 2: ROM1, D15 - D8 Socket 3: ROM0, D7 - D0 Socket 4, ROM1, D7 - D0NOTE: The assigned ROM sockets are the same for both H5159500 and A1939351

data copy boards.

H515M551.CDR

= ON

[A][B]

[C]

[D]

[E]


4-14H551 SM


4. then immediately

5.

6.

7.

8. If the software download is successful, the display shows "OK".If the software download fails, the display shows "NG".

9. To finish, press .10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.

11. Print out the system parameter list and check the ROM version.




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY

FLASH ROM -> MACHINE

PRESS START

H515M535.WMF


4-15

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.21 SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies the software from the machine's built-in MFCE to anexternal MFCE.


2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect theexternal MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.


NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.3. Turn on the machine.

4. then immediately

5.

H515M552.CDR




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

= OFF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]


4-16H551 SM

6.

7.

8. If the software is successfully uploaded,the display shows "OK".If the software upload fails, the displayshows "NG".

9. Finish : 10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY


PRESS START

H515M536.WMF


4-17

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.22 SRAM DATA DOWNLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies all the data stored in the SRAM on an external MFCE to themachine's MFCE. Use this after replacing a damaged MFCE to save any previoussettings that were programmed in the damaged MFCE.


2. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect thedamaged MFCE [C] to the opposite side of the tool.


NOTE: The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


4. then immediately

5.

H515M552.CDR




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

= OFF

[A][B]

[C]

[D]


4-18H551 SM

6.

7.

8. If the SRAM data is successfullydownloaded, the display shows "OK".If the SRAM download fails, the dispalyshows "NG".

9. Finish : 10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine back on.

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY

RAM -> MACHINE

PRESS START

H515M537.WMF


4-19

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.23 MODEM SOFTWARE UPLOAD (FUNCTION 12)

This procedure copies the V.34 modem software from the data copy board to themachine's MFCE.


3. Insert the data copy tool [A] into the lower IC card slot [B], then connect thedata copy board [C] to the opposite side of the tool.


NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6 .The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


5. then immediately

6.

H515M551.CDR




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

= ON

[A][B] [C]

[D]


4-20H551 SM

7.

8.


11. Finish : 10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY


PRESS START

H515M536.WMF


4-21

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.24 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.This procedure copies the V.34 program software of an optional G3 unit from thedata copy board to the machine's MFCE.




NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in socket 6 .The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


4. then immediately

5.

H515M551.CDR




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

= OFF

[A][B] [C][D]


4-22H551 SM

6.

7.


9. Finish :

10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY


PRESS START

H515M536.WMF


4-23

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.25 OPTIONAL G3 BOARD MODEM SOFTWARE DOWNLOAD

NOTE: The optional G3 board must be installed in order to do this procedure.This procedure copies the V.34 modem software of an optional G3 unit from thedata copy board to the machine's MFCE.




NOTE: Insert the EPROM (4 Mbits) with the V.34 software in the socket 6 .The switch [D] on the tool must be at the OFF position.


4. then immediately

5.

H515M551.CDR




_

H515M501.WMF

RAM TEST NO:

0.SRAM 1.DRAM

2.COPY

_

H515M533.WMF

= OFF

[A][B][C]

[D]


4-24H551 SM

6.

7.


9. Finish :

10. Turn off the machine, disconnect the tool, then turn the machine on again.

COPY NO:


2.MDM ROM

_

H515M534.WMF

COPY


PRESS START

H515M536.WMF


4-25

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.26 SAVING DATA PROGRAMMED IN IC CARDS

If the machine has an optional Function Upgrade Card or Fax On Demand Card,the card has to be removed from the IC card slot before performing any of thefollowing procedures:

• Downloading/uploading software• Replacing the MFCE• Replacing the MFDU or other components

Also in this case, System Switch 16 - bit 0 should have been set to 1 as explainedin section 3.3.9, to prevent the data inside the IC card from being initializedaccidentally.

So, do the following procedures to prevent data from being erased from the card.

NOTE: The data in the SAF memory card or hard disk will be erased if the card orthe hard disk interface is removed from the machine.

When downloading/uploading software

1. Make sure that System Switch 16 - bit 0 is set to 1, and that the battery switchon the IC card is turned on.

2. Turn off the machine, and remove the IC card.

3. Connect the data copy tool and data copy board or MFCE, and do the requiredprocedure as explained in section 4.1.20 to 4.1.25.

4. After the downloading/uploading operation has been finished, turn off themachine and disconnect the data copy tool.

5. Put back the IC card as it originally was, then turn on the machine.

6. Make sure that all the programmed data in the IC cards can still be used.

CAUTIONIf the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower ICcard slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and allthe data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.

When replacing the MFCE

When replacing the a defective MFCE, the new MFCE installed in the machinemust have the same SRAM data as the defective MFCE had, before the IC card isput back.


2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the MFCE.Do not turn on the machine at this point.


4-26H551 SM

3. Connect the data copy tool and the defective MFCE as explained in section4.1.22, then turn on the machine.

4. Copy the SRAM data from the defective MFCE outside to the new MFCEinside, as explained in section 4.1.22.

5. After the SRAM data has been copied successfully, turn off the machine anddisconnect the tool.

6. Put back the IC card in its original position, and turn on the machine.

NOTE: If the machine is accidentally turned on without the IC card at this point, goback to step 3 again.


When replacing the MFDU or other components

When the MFCE must be removed to access or remove other components insidethe machine, follow the procedure below.


2. Turn off the machine, remove the IC card, and replace the requiredcomponents inside the machine.

4. After replacement has been completed, put back the MFCE and the IC card asthey originally were, then turn on the machine.


CAUTIONIf the machine is turned on without the card being put back in the lower ICcard slot, the machine recognizes that the card has been removed and allthe data programmed in the card will not be accessable any more.


4-27

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.27 SERVICE STATION FAX NUMBER (FUNCTION 13)

1. then immediately

2.

3. Input the telephone number of the servicestation that will receive Auto Service callsfrom this machine.

To use a G4 number, press the “G4” key.To erase the telephone number: press


Cross ReferenceUsing a User Function Key as ISDN Subaddress Input

- Function 36, Code No = 10

4.1.28 SERIAL NUMBER (FUNCTION 14)

This function will allow the operator to record the serial number of the machine intothe RAM memory. The recorded serial number is used during the feature of placingan auto service call. The entered serial number is listed on the System ParameterList.

1. then immediately

2.

3. Enter the machine's serial number at thekeypad.To correct a mistake:





_

H515M501.WMF

S.S.NO. ENTER FAX NUMBER

<G3> NO TO CANCEL

_

H515M538.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

SERIAL NO.

_

H515M540.WMF

SERIAL NO.

64997244292

H515M541.WMF

S.S.NO. YES OR CLR . NO

<G3>

212-555-1234


4-28H551 SM

4.1.29 HARD DISK INITIALIZATION (FUNCTION 16)

NOTE: Do this procedure when installing the hard disk unit.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. If the initialization was completed without error, OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will be displayed.




_

H515M501.WMF

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

H515M543.WMF

FILE INITIAL

PRESS START

H515M544.WMF


4-29

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4.1.30 HARD DISK FORMATTING (FUNCTION 16)

NOTE: This procedure is not necessary at hard disk installation.

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. Formatting the hard disk takes more than30 minutes.If the format was completed without error,OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will bedisplayed.

4.1.31 HARD DISK TEST (FUNCTION 16)

1. then immediately

2.

3.

4. If the test was completed without error,OK!! will be displayed.If there was an error, NG!! will bedisplayed.




_

H515M501.WMF

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

H515M543.WMF

HD FORMAT

PRESS START

H515M545.WMF




_

H515M501.WMF

HD NO:

0.INITIAL 1.FORMAT

2.TEST

_

H515M543.WMF

HD TEST

PRESS START

H515M546.WMF


4-30H551 SM

4.1.32 G4 PARAMETER PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 17)

1. then immediately

2.

Refer to the service manual for the ISDN G4 option for further details of the G4parameter programming procedures.

4.1.33 PRINTING CONFIDENTIAL FILES

If the customer forgot the confidential ID number, print the confidential messageswhich has been received in the machine's memory using the following procedure.

1. .

2. Enter as confidential ID, then press . The machine will print all theconfidential messages in the memory.




_

H515M501.WMF

G4 NO: OR NO

01G4_ISW 02G4_PSW

03ISDN_IP 04G4_SN1

_

H515M547.WMF

BIT SWITCHES

4-31

Ser

vic

e T

able

s

SM H551

4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNINGDo not adjust a bit swi tch that is described as "Not used", as this m aycause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is notaccepted b y local regulations. Suc h bits are for use onl y in other areas,such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to theSystem Parameter List printed by the machine.

The switches that have been changed from the previous model (FX4) are shaded.

4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS0

1

RAM Reset

Bit 1 Bit 0 Reset Level0 0 No reset0 1 Reset Level 21 0 Reset Level 31 1 Not used

Reset Le vel 3: Erases all image data files storedin the SAF memory and communication files (e.g.polling rx file). This setting is recommended foruse when it is necessary to clear the SAF.Always use this reset level after the software hasbeen updated by a remote diagnostics system.(This reset is not necessary after local softwareupdate.)Reset Le vel 2: In addition to those items erasedby Reset Level 3, the following items are erased:own telephone number, bit switches, RTI/TTI/CSI,report data, programmed telephone numbers(Quick/Speed/ Groups, service station, etc.), NCUparameters, personal codes.

After erasing, the machine changes these two bitsback to 0 automatically.No reset: Normal operation

Cross referenceRAM Reset Le vel 1 (Factory reset):Change the data in RAM address 480005(H) toFF(H), then turn the machine off and on. Inaddition to those items erased by Reset Level 2,the clock and scan/print registration settings areerased.

NoteAfter a RAM reset level 1, initial toner supply willautomatically be done for 90 s.

BIT SWITCHES

4-32H551 SM

System Switch 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS2 Technical data printout on

TCR (Journal)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal code, the following dataare listed on the TCR for each analog G3communication.

e.g. 32 V34 288 M 01 03 00 02 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

1) First number: Symbol rate used (for example, 32 means 3200 bps)2) Second number: Used modem type3) Third number: Final modem rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)4) Letter M or L:An M indicates that is error rate, and an Lindicates Rx level. This is selected by the bit 3setting below.5-6) Fifth and sixth numbers: Line quality data.If an error rate is selected (when “M” is indicated),a larger number means more errors.If Rx level is selected (when “L” is indicated), theleft hand figure is the high byte and the right handfigure is the low byte.7) Seventh number (rx mode only): Total numberof error lines that occurred during non-ECMreception.8) Eighth number (rx mode only): Total number ofburst error lines that occurred during non-ECMreception.The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at 00for transmission records and ECM receptionrecords.

How to calculate the rx level listed on the Journal

Example: 32 V34 288 L 01 A0 00 00

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of Nby -16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 01A0 [H]) is 416.So, the actual rx level is 416/-16 = -26 dB

3 Line quality data outputmethod0: Measure of error rate(during image datatransmission only)1: Rx level

This bit determines the data type to be printed onthe Journal when technical data printout isenabled by bit 2 above.

4 Line error marks on receivedpages0: Disabled1: Enabled

If this bit is 1, a mark will be printed on the leftedge of the page at any place where a line erroroccurred in the data. Such errors are caused by anoisy line, for example.

BIT SWITCHES

4-33

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

System Switch 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS5 G3/G4 Communication

parameter display0: Disabled1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the keyparameters (see the next 2 pages). This isnormally disabled because it cancels the CSIdisplay for the user.Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6 Protocol dump list outputafter each communication0: Off 1: On

This is only used for communicationtroubleshooting. It shows the content of thetransmitted facsimile protocol signals. Alwaysreset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.

7 Amount of protocol dumpdata in one protocol dump listprintout operation0: Up to the limit of thememory area for protocoldumping1: Last communication only

Change this bit to 1 if you want to have a protocoldump list of the last communication only.

BIT SWITCHES

4-34H551 SM


Mode DCS: ITU-T standard NSS: Non-standard G3Modem rate 336: 33,600 bps 168: 16,800 bps

312: 31,200 bps 144: 14400 bps288: 28,800 bps 120: 12000 bps264: 26,400 bps 96: 9600 bps240: 24,000 bps 72: 7200 bps216: 21,600 bps 48: 4800 bps192: 19,200 bps 24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots per mm)D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots per mm)F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots per mm)21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)

Compression mode MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compressionJBO: JBIG (optional) compressionJBB: JBIG (standard) compression

Communication mode ECM: With ECMSSC: Using SSCEFC: Using EFCNML: With no ECM, SSC, or EFC

Width and reduction A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line25: 2.5 ms/line 5: 5 ms/line10: 10 ms/line20: 20 ms/line40: 40 ms/line

BIT SWITCHES

4-35

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


Compression mode MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compression

Resolution 21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)24: Fine (200 x 400 dpi)

Width and reduction A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction (tx only)A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction (tx only)

Transfer T: Transfer- : Other

Confidential C: Confidential- : Other

Other parameters The following information is shown in 6-bit format. Bit 1 is thefirst bit from the left, and bit 6 is at the right end.Bit 1 - Smoothing 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled

(Smoothing is disabled in halftone mode.)Bit 2 - CIL printing 0: Enabled, 1: DisabledBit 3 - 1: Not usedBit 4 - mm/inch conversion 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5 - Engine type 0: mm, 1: inchBit 6 - Resolution unit 0: mm, 1: inch

System Switch 01No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 PM call

0: Disabled1: Enabled

This bit switch determines whether the machinewill send an Auto Service Call to the servicestation when it is time for PM.


BIT SWITCHES

4-36H551 SM

System Switch 02No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Memory file transfer


1: All messages in the memory (includingconfidential rx messages) are sent to the faxnumber which is programmed as the servicestation.Always reset this bit to zero after transfer.Cross referenceService station number programming: Function 13

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings.4 Automatic reset (during

communication)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Machine automatically returns to the standbymode when a communication of one pageexceeds a timer (default setting is 60 min).This timer could be adjusted by the RAM settings(RAM address 480378 and 480379).When the optional G3 or G4 unit is installed, themachine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit everyperiod of this timer (default setting is 15 min). Thistimer could be adjusted by the RAM settings(RAM address 48037A and 48037B).When this timer expires during communication,the machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unitimmediately after the communication is finished.Cross referenceService RAM Addresses, section 4.5.

5 Not used Do not change the setting.6

7

Memory read/write by RDSBit 7 6 Setting

0 0 Always disabled0 1 User selectable1 0 User selectable1 1 Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are lockedout, but the user can temporarily switch RDS onto allow RDS operations to take place. RDS willautomatically be locked out again after a certaintime, which is stored in System Switch 03 (seebelow). Note that if an RDS operation takes place,RDS will not switch off until this time limit hasexpired.(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access themachine.

System Switch 03No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Length of time that RDS istemporarily switched on whenbits 6 and 7 of System Switch02 are set to "Userselectable"

00 - 99 hours (BCD).

This data is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of SystemSwitch 02 are set to "User selectable".The default setting is 24 hours.

BIT SWITCHES

4-37

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


1

2

LCD contrastBit 2 1 0 Contrast

0 0 0 Brightest0 0 1 ↓

↓ ↓1 1 0 ↓1 1 1 Darkest

Use these bit switches to adjust the contrast ofthe LCD on the operation panel.

3 Dedicated transmissionparameter programming0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit must be set to 1 before changing anydedicated transmission parameters.

4 Inclusion of the Start key inKeystroke Programs0: Not needed1: Needed

0: The user does not need to press the Start keywhen operating a keystroke program.

5 Drum replacement level0: User1: Service

0: The machine asks the user to replace the drumat 30,000 print intervals (default interval).After the user replaces the drum, the machineasks the user if the drum has been replaced ornot. If the user answers yes, the machine resetsthe OPC counter to zero. The drum replacementinterval is programmed at addresses 4803D2 to4803D5(H). Refer to section 4.5 for more details.1: The machine will not ask the user to replacethe drum.

6 G3 CSI/G4 Terminal IDprogramming level0: User level1: Service level

1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only beprogrammed using a service function.The Terminal ID can only be programmed if aGroup 4 option is installed.

7 Telephone line typeprogramming mode0: User level1: Service level

1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial orpulse dial) can only be programmed using aservice function.

BIT SWITCHES

4-38H551 SM

System Switch 05No FUNCTION COMMENTS0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.2 Display of both RTI and CSI

on the LCD0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: An RTI will be displayed until phase B of theprotocol sequence, and a CSI will be displayedafter phase C.

3 Not used Do not change the settings.4 Hard disk option

0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 when installing the hard diskoption.


System Switch 06No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Use of the Stop key during

memory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Memory transmissions can be stopped bypressing the Stop key. However, users mightaccidentally cancel another person's memorytransmission in progress.

1-4 Not used Do not change the setting.5 PC Fax Expander option


Change this bit to 1 when installing the PC FaxExpander option.

6 Not used Do not change the setting.7 On-screen function list

0: Disabled 1: EnabledIf this feature is enabled, the most frequently usedfunction numbers will be displayed for quickreference whenever the user presses theFunction key.


Date of monthly Fax OnDemand report printout

00 - 31 (BCD).[00 (BCD) - 1st day of the month (default setting)][01 - 31 (BCD) - Programmed day of the month]This setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printoutenabled).

BIT SWITCHES

4-39

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


Time of monthly Fax OnDemand report printout

00 - 23 hours (BCD).00 (BCD) - 0 am (default setting)01 (BCD) - 1 am

↓23 (BCD) - 11 pmThis setting is only valid if bit 1 of User Parameter04 is set to "1" (monthly FOD report printoutenabled).

System Switch 09No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Addition of part of the image

data from confidentialtransmissions on thetransmission result report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the firstpage of confidential messages will be printed ontransmission result reports.

1 Inclusion of communicationson the Journal (TCR) whenno image data wasexchanged.0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications which reached phase C(message Tx/Rx) of the T.30 protocol are listedon the Journal (TCR).1: Communications which reached phase A (callsetup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.This will include telephone calls.

2 Automatic error reportprintout0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed.1: Error reports will be printed automatically afterfailed communications.

3 Printing of the error code onthe error report0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.

4 Listing of Confidential IDs onthe Personal Code List0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Confidential IDs registered with PersonalCodes by the users will appear on the PersonalCode List.

5 Power failure report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: A power failure report will be automaticallyprinted after the power is switched on if a faxmessage disappeared from the memory when thepower was turned off last.

6 Not used Do not change the setting.7 Priority given to various types

of remote terminal ID whenprinting reports0: RTI > CSI > Dial label >Tel. number1: Dial label > Tel. number >RTI > CSI

This bit determines which set of priorities themachine uses when listing remote terminal nameson reports.

Dial Label: The name stored with theQuick/Speed Dial number by the user.

BIT SWITCHES

4-40H551 SM

System Switch 0ANo FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Not used Keep this bit at 0.1 Default communication mode

0: G31: G4

These bits determine the machine's standbydefault communication mode if a G4 option hasbeen installed.

2 Not used Do not change the setting.3 Continuous polling reception

0: Disabled 1: EnabledThis feature allows a series of stations to bepolled in a continuous cycle.

4 Dialing on the ten-key padwhen the external telephoneis off-hook0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while theexternal telephone is off-hook. Use this settingwhen the external telephone is not by themachine or a wireless telephone is connected asan external telephone.1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key padwhen the handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.

6 Line used for G3transmission0: PSTN 1: ISDN

If an ISDN kit has been installed, this bitdetermines whether G3 transmissions go out overthe PSTN or the ISDN.

7 Line used when the machinefalls back to G3 from G4 ifthe other end is not a G4machine0: PSTN 1: ISDN

This bit switch has no effect if CommunicationSwitch 07 bit 0 is set to 0.

System Switch 0BNo FUNCTION COMMENTS01

Automatic reset timerBit 1 Bit 0 Timer setting

0 0 1 minute0 1 3 minutes1 0 5 minutes1 1 No limit

(1, 1): Automatic reset is disabled.(Other): The machine returns to the standbymode when the timer expires after the lastoperation.

23

Energy Saver mode timerBit 3 Bit 2 Time Limit

0 0 1 minute0 1 3 minutes1 0 5 minutes1 1 No limit

(1, 1): Automatic Energy Saver mode is disabled.(Other): The machine goes into an Energy Savermode when the timer expires after the lastoperation.


BIT SWITCHES

4-41

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)System Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0FNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Country code for functionalsettings (Hex)

00: France 10: Canada01: Germany 11: USA02: UK 12: Asia03: Italy 13: Japan04: Austria 14: Hong Kong05: Belgium 15: South Africa06: Denmark 16: Australia07: Finland 17: New Zealand08: Ireland 18: Singapore09: Norway 19: Malaysia0A: Sweden 1A: China0B: Swiss 1B: Taiwan0C: Portugal 20: Turkey0D: Holland 21: Greece0E: Spain0F: Israel

This country code determines the factory settingsof bit switches and RAM addresses. However, ithas no effect on the NCU parameter settings andcommunication parameter RAM addresses.

Cross referenceNCU country code: Function 08, parameter C.C.


Threshold memory level forparallel memory transmission

Threshold mount = N x 64 kbytesN can be between 00 – FF(H)Default setting: 04(H) = 256 kbytes

System Switch 11No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 TTI printing position

0: Superimposed on the pagedata1: Printed before the dataleading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprintsinformation that the customer considers to beimportant (G3 transmissions).

1 CIL printing position0: Printed before the dataleading edge1: Superimposed on the pagedata

Change this bit to 1 if the CIL overprintsinformation that the customer considers to beimportant (G4 transmissions).

2 Label Insertion position0: Left end 1: Right end

Change this bit to 1 if the inserted label overprintsinformation that the customer considers to beimportant.

3-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

BIT SWITCHES

H551 4-42 SM

6 Conditions for memoryreception if no RTI or CSI isreceived

0: Memory reception is available only when themachine receives RTI or CSI.1: Memory reception is always available unlessthere is a printer (mechanical) error. If there is aprinter error, memory reception becomesavailable only when the machine receives RTI orCSI.This function becomes effective in combinationwith the user parameter switch 05 bit 1.

7 Use of parallel memorytransmission with G4transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit determines whether parallel transmissioncan be used with a G4 transmission or not..




08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.This setting determines the print start position forthe TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. Ifthe TTI is moved too far to the right, it mayinterfere with the file number which is on the topright of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL ismoved over by more than 60 mm, it mayoverwrite the page number.


1

Remaining memory threshold foractivating the hard disk filingsystemBit 1 Bit 0 Threshold

0 0 25%0 1 50% (default)1 0 75%1 1 Not used

If the remaining hard disk space is belowthe threshold value, the hard disk filingsystem cannot be used. Adjust thethreshold value to meet the customer'srequirements.

2 Not used Do not change the factory settings

3

4

Files that can be stored in the harddisk filing systemBit 1 Bit 0 Files

0 0 All files0 1 Received files only1 0 Transmitted files only1 1 Not used

The default setting is (0 0).Change the settings to limit the files thatcan be stored in the hard disk filing system.

5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

Rev. 11/98

⇒⇒⇒⇒

BIT SWITCHES

4-43

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


Wait time between pages inprinter mode (with an optionalprinter interface unit)

05 to 64 (H) (5 to 100s) - This setting determinesthe machine's wait time between pages in printermode.A longer setting forces the fax machine to waituntil the end of printer interface output beforeprinting any incoming fax message.A shorter setting allows the fax machine to printincoming fax messages while printing from acomputer. If the controller takes more than thespecified time to process a page of data from thehost computer, the fax machine releases theprinter resources for fax output.Default setting: 0A(H) = 10 s


System Switch 16No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Function Upgrade Card or

Fax On Demand Card0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 after installing a FunctionUpgrade Card or a Fax On Demand Card in themachine's lower IC card slot.0: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a FaxOn Demand Card is installed in the machine'slower IC card slot before power-off, all the data inthese cards will be initialized if the machine doesnot detect the card at the next power-on.1: When either a Function Upgrade Card or a FaxOn Demand Card is installed in the machine'slower IC card slot before power-off, the machinewill not start up unless the machine detects the ICcard or the data copy tool at the next power-on.This prevents the data inside the card from beinginitialized while replacing PCBs or downloadingsoftware.

1-7 Not used. Do not change the default setting.

System Switch 17No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Not used. Do not change the default setting.1 Dialing without inserting a

document in the ADF0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing when a document is notplaced in the ADF.

1-7 Not used. Do not change the default setting.

BIT SWITCHES

4-44H551 SM


Default communication line fortransmissionBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 PSTN 1 or PSTN 20 1 PSTN 1 (Standard G3)1 0 PSTN 2 (Optional G3 unit)1 1 ISDN (G4 unit required)

These bits determine the machine’sstandby default transmission line if anoptional G3 or G4 unit has beeninstalled.


System Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)System Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

4-45

Ser

vic

e T

able

s

SM H551

4.2.2 SCANNER SWITCHES

Scanner Switc h 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 MTF

0: Disabled 1: Enabled1 Text/photo separation in

halftone mode0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Normally keep this bit at 1 to get a good halftonequality.

23

Maximum transmittabledocument lengthBi t 3 2 Setting

0 0 600 mm0 1 1200 mm1 0 14 m1 1 Not used

If the user wants to send very long documentssuch as well logs, select 14 m or a higher setting.

4 OR processing for immediatetx and copying (Standardresolution)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The machine scans the document in 3.85line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.1: The machine scans the document in 7.7line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processedbefore transmission or making copies. Toner maybe used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.

5 OR processing for immediatetx and copying (Detailresolution)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The machine scans the document in 7.7line/mm steps, then transmits or makes copies.1: The machine scans the document in 15.4line/mm steps. Each pair of lines is OR processedbefore transmission or making copies. Toner maybe used up earlier if OR processing is enabled.


Scanner Switc h 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Scanner Switc h 02No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Normalsetting

The value can be between 00 to FF. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0E(H)

Scanner Switc h 03No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Lightensetting


BIT SWITCHES

4-46H551 SM

Scanner Switch 04No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Contrast threshold withhalftone disabled - Darkensetting

The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0C(H)


Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Normalsetting



Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Lightensetting

The value can be between 00 to 0F. For a darkerthreshold, input a lower value.Default setting - 0D(H)


Contrast threshold withhalftone enabled - Darkensetting



Contrast threshold for textareas when halftone isenabled

The value can be between 00 to 0F.This setting is ignored if Scanner Switch 00 bit 1is at 0.Default setting - 08H

Scanner Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)Scanner Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

4-47

Ser

vic

e T

able

s

SM H551

4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Print er Switch 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Page separation mark

0: Disabled 1: Enabled0: No marks are printed.1: If a received page has to be printed out on twosheets, an "x" inside a small box is printed at thebottom right hand corner of the first sheet, and a"2" inside a small box is printed at the top righthand corner of the second sheet. This helps theuser to identify pages that have been split up.

1 Repetition of data when thereceived page is longer thanthe printer paper0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where theprevious page left off.1: The final few mm of the previous page areprinted at the top of the next page.

2 Not used Do not change the setting.3 Cleaning mode after bypass

feed0: Disabled1: After each page is fed fromthe bypass feed slot

0: Cleaning mode is not done at all if bypass feedis used.1: Cleaning mode is done every time after a sheetof paper is fed from the bypass feed slot.

4-6 Not used Do not change the setting.7 mm-inch conversion when

printing0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Printing is always done in inch format.1: If the other end has scanned the document inmm format, the machine converts the data to inchformat before printing.

Print er Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings)Print er Switch 02 - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

4-48H551 SM

Printer Switch 03No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Length reduction of received

data0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Incoming pages are printed without lengthreduction.Cross referencePage separation threshold: Printer Sw. 03, bits 4to 7.1: Incoming pages are reduced in the lengthdirection when printing.Cross referenceReduction ratio: Printer Switches 04/05

1-3 Not used Do not change the settings.4to7

Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled in switch 03-0 above)

If the incoming page is up to x mm longer than the copy paper, the excess portionwill not be printed. If the incoming page is more than x mm longer than the copypaper, the excess portion will be printed on the next page.The value of x is determined by these four bits.

Hex value of bits 4 to 7 x (mm)0 01 1

and so on untilF 15

Cross referenceLength reduction On/Off: Printer Switch 03, Bit 0

BIT SWITCHES

4-49

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Printer Switches 04 and 05No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Reduction ratios used for different paper sizes (with reduction enabled in switch03-0 above)

If reduction is enabled, the data will be reduced in the length direction beforeprinting. These switches determine the maximum reduction ratio for each papersize.

Switch 04/05 US Europe AsiaBit 0 Not used A5 sideways A5 sidewaysBit 1 Not used Not used Not usedBit 2 LT lengthwise Not used Not usedBit 3 Not used A4 lengthwise A4 lengthwiseBit 4 Not used Not used F/F4 lengthwiseBit 5 LG lengthwise Not used Not usedBit 6 Not used Not used Not usedBit 7 Not used Not used Not used

The available paper sizes depend on the machine's country version.


Printer Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)Printer Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

COUNTER R / W NO:0. COUNTER 1. PM COUNTER2. CTM COUNTER 3. PCU COUNTER

_

BIT SWITCHES

4-50H551 SM

4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communic atio n Switch 00No FUNCTION COMMENTS01

Compression modesavailable in receive modeBi t 1 0 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be declared in phase B (handshaking) of theT.30 protocol.

23

Compression modesavailable in transmit modeBi t 3 2 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be used in the transmission and to be declaredin phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.

4 Not used Do not change the setting.5 JBIG reception mode

0: Standard mode only1: Standard and optionalmode (default)

If this bit is 0, JBIG optional mode is switched offfor reception.

6 Priority for JBIG mode usedfor transmission0: Standard mode1: Optional mode (default)

This bit determines the priority for thecompression mode used for JBIG transmission.

7 Closed network (reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code ofthe other terminal does not match the ID code ofthis terminal. This function is only available inNSF/NSS mode.

Communic atio n Switch 01No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 ECM

0: Off 1: OnIf this bit is 0, ECM is switched off for allcommunications.


Wrong connection preventionmethodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 None0 1 8 digit CSI1 0 4 digit CSI1 1 CSI/RTI

(0,1) - The machine will not transmit if the last 8digits of the received CSI do not match the last 8digits of the dialed telephone number. This doesnot work for manual dialing.(1,0) - The same as above, except that only thelast 4 digits are compared.(1,1) - The machine will not transmit if the otherend does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission willalways go ahead.

BIT SWITCHES

4-51

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Communication Switch 01No FUNCTION COMMENTS4 Operator call if no response

is received in reply toNSF/DIS0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 if the user expects to receivephone calls at the same number which themachine is connected to.


7

Maximum printable pagelength availableBit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 No limit0 1 B4 and A41 0 A41 1 Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informedto the transmitting terminal in the pre-messageprotocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).

Communication Switch 02No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Burst error threshold

0: Low 1: HighIf there are more consecutive error lines in thereceived page than the threshold, the machinewill send a negative response.The Low and High threshold values depend onthe sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpiLow settings 3 6High settings 6 12

1 Acceptable total error lineratio0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio of a page exceeds theacceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the otherend.

2 Treatment of pages receivedwith errors during G3reception0: Deleted from memorywithout printing1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.

3 Hang-up decision when anegative code (RTN or PIN)is received during G3immediate transmission0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PINis received.1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if itreceives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or ifECM is being used.


Communication Switch 03No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Maximum number of pageretransmissions in a G3memory transmission

00 - FF (Hex) times.This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.Default setting - 03(H)

BIT SWITCHES

4-53

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Communication Switch 0ANo FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Point of resumption of

memory transmission uponredialing0: From the error page1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page wheretransmission failed the previous time.1: Transmission begins from the first page.

1-6 Not used Do not change the settings.7 Emergency calls using 999

0: Enabled 1: DisabledIf this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you todial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTTrequirement in the UK and some other countries.

Communication Switch 0BNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Use of Economy

Transmission during aTransfer operation to EndReceivers0: Disabled 1: Enabled

These bits determine whether the machine usesthe Economy Transmission feature when it iscarrying out a Transfer operation as a TransferStation.

1 Use of EconomyTransmission during aTransfer operation to theNext Transfer Stations0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2 Use of Label Insertion for theEnd Receivers in a Transferoperation0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit determines whether the machine uses theLabel Insertion feature when it is carrying out aTransfer operation as a Transfer Station.

3 Conditions required forTransfer Result Reporttransmission0: Always transmitted1: Only transmitted if therewas an error

0: When acting as a Transfer Station, themachine will always send a Transfer ResultReport back to the Requesting Station aftercompleting the Transfer Request, even if therewere no problems.1: The machine will only send back a TransferResult Report if there were errors duringcommunication so that one or more of the EndReceivers could not be contacted.

4 Printout of the messagewhen acting as a TransferStation0: Disabled 1: Enabled

When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,this bit determines whether the machine prints thefax message coming in from the RequestingTerminal.

BIT SWITCHES

4-54H551 SM

Communication Switch 0BNo FUNCTION COMMENTS5 Action when there is no fax

number in the programmedQuick/Speed dials whichmeets the requestingterminal's own fax number.0: Transfer is Disabled 1: Transfer is Enabled

After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine compares the last N digits of therequesting terminal's own fax number with all theQuick/Speed dials programmed in the machine.(N is the number programmed in communicationswitch 0C.)0: If there is no matching number programmed inthe machine, the machine rejects the transferrequest.1: Even if there is no matching numberprogrammed in the machine, the machine acceptsthe transfer request. The result report will beprinted at the transfer terminal, but will not be sentback to the requesting terminal.


Communication Switch 0CNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0to4

Number of digits compared tofind the requester's faxnumber from theprogrammed Quick/SpeedDials when acting as aTransfer Station

00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine compares the own telephone numbersent from the Requesting Terminal with allQuick/Speed Dials programmed in the machine,starting from Quick Dial 01 to the end of theSpeed Dials.This number determines how many digits from theend of the telephone numbers the machinecompares.If it is set to 00, the machine will send the reportto the first Quick/Speed Dial that the machinecompared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, themachine will send the report to Quick 01. If QuickDial 01 through 04 are not programmed andQuick Dial 05 is programmed, the machine willsend the report to Quick 05.Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits


BIT SWITCHES

4-55

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Communication Switch 0DNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

The amount of remainingmemory below which ringingdetection (and thereforereception into memory) isdisabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 kbytes(e.g., 0C(H) = 24 kbytes)One page is about 24 kbytes.If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detectringing signals and go into receive mode even ifthere is no memory space left. This will result incommunication failure.

Communication Switch 0ENo FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Minimum interval betweenautomatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)This value is the minimum time that the machinewaits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0FNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Minimum number of timesthat a destination will dialedwhen TRD is being used

01 - FF (Hex) times


Memory transmission:Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FF (Hex) times


Immediate transmission:Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FF (Hex) times


Memory transmission:Interval between dialingattempts to the samedestination


BIT SWITCHES

4-56H551 SM


Immediate transmission:Interval between dialingattempts to the samedestination


Communication Switch 14No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Inch-to-mm conversion

during transmission0: Disabled (default)1: Enabled

0: Transmitting is always done in inch format.1: If the other end only has mm-based resolutionfor printing, the machine converts the scanneddata to mm-format before transmission.

1 Inch/mm format informed tothe other terminal duringtransmission0: Always in inch format1: Dependent on the otherterminal (default)

0: The machine always informs the other terminalthat the resolution is in inch format and transmitswith the inch format.1: The machine informs the other terminal that theresolution is in mm - format and transmits with theinch format if the other end only has mm - basedresolution.

This setting is informed to the receiving terminalin the pre-message protocol exchange (in theDCS/NSS frames).

2-5 Not used Do not change the factory settings.6

7

Available unit of resolution inwhich fax messages arereceivedBit 7 Bit 6 Unit

0 0 mm0 1 inch1 0 mm and inch

(default)1 1 Not used

For the best performance, do not change thefactory settings.



Available resolution forreceiving fax messagesBit 0 1: 200 x 100/8 x 3.85Bit 1 1: 200 x 200/8 x 7.7Other bits: Not used

For the best performance, do not change thefactory settings.


BIT SWITCHES

4-57

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Communication Switch 16No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Not used Do not change the factory setting.1 Optional G3 unit


1: Change this bit to 1 when installing the optionalG3 unit.

2 Optional G4 unit0: Not installed1: Installed

1: Change this bit to 1 when installing the optionalG4 unit.


Communication Switch 17No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 SEP (selective polling)

reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Disables the selective polling signal reception.

1 SUB (sub-address) reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Disables the SUB (sub-address) signalreception.

2 PWD (Password) / SID(Sender ID) reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: The machine automatically disconnects the linewhen the PWD or SID signal is received (defaultsetting).


Communication Switch 18 - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 19 - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1B - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1C - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

4-59

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

G3 Switch 02No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 G3 protocol mode used

0: Standard and non-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end canonly communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used innon-standard mode communication)

1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.5 Use of modem rate history for

transmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dialsalways start with the highest modem rate.1: The machine refers to the modem rate historyfor communications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6 AI short protocol(transmission and reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about AI Short Protocol.

7 Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about Short Preamble.

G3 Switch 03No FUNCTION COMMENTS0 DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)0: 11: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives thesame DIS frame twice.1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait forthe second DIS which is caused by echo on theline.

1 Not used Do not change the setting.2 Use of V.8 protocol


0: V.8 protocol is disabled.The machine communicates in accordance withthe T.30 protocol.

3 ECM frame size0: 256 bytes1: 64 bytes

1: ECM reception is disabled, which enlarges theSAF memory.

4 CTC transmission conditions0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)

When using ECM, the machine will choose aslower modem rate after receiving PPR once(Ricoh mode) or four times (ITU-T mode).ITU-T: New acronym for the CCITT.

5 Modem rate used for the nextpage after receiving anegative code (RTN or PIN)0: No change1: Fallback

1: The machine's tx modem rate will fall backbefore sending the next page if a negative code isreceived. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

6-7 Not used Do not change the setting.

BIT SWITCHES

4-60H551 SM

G3 Switch 04No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to3

Training error detectionthreshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bitsIf the number of error bits in the received TCF isbelow this threshold, the machine informs thesender that the training has succeeded.



Initial Tx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k

Other settings - Not used

These bits set the initial starting modem rate fortransmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if youneed to change this for specific receivers.

4to5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or7.2 kbps (transmission).Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 V.290 1 V.171 0 Not used1 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and7.2 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at thesespeeds.


BIT SWITCHES

4-61

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


Initial Rx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k

Other settings - Not used

The setting of these bits is used to inform thetransmitting terminal of the available modem ratefor the machine in receive mode. Use a lowersetting if high speeds pose problems duringreception.

4to7

Modem types available forreceptionBit 7 6 5 4 Setting

0 0 0 1 V.27ter0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.290 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29,

V.330 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,

V.33, V.170 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,

V.33, V.17, V.34

Other settings – Not used

The setting of these bits is used to inform thetransmitting terminal of the available modem typefor the machine in receive mode.

G3 Switch 07No FUNCTION COMMENTS0

1

PSTN cable equalizer(Tx mode)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 None0 1 Low1 0 Medium1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length of wirebetween the modem and the telephoneexchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or moreof the following symptoms occurs.• Communication error• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

BIT SWITCHES

4-62H551 SM

23

PSTN cable equalizer(Rx mode)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length of wirebetween the modem and the telephoneexchange.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or moreof the following symptoms occurs.• Communication error with error codes such as

0-20, 0-23, etc.• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

4 PSTN external equalizer forV.27ter, V.29, V.33, V.17, V.8(Rx mode)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: This bit enables the external (modem)equalizer for reception. Enable this equalizer ifthere is signal loss.

5 PSTN external equalizer forV.34(Rx mode)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: This bit enables the external (modem)equalizer for reception. Enable this equalizer ifthere is signal loss.


G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

BIT SWITCHES

4-63

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551


ISDN cable equalizer(tx mode)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length of wirebetween the modem and the telephoneexchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or moreof the following symptoms occurs.• Communication error• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

23

ISDN cable equalizer(rx mode)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length of wirebetween the modem and the telephoneexchange.




G3 Switch 0AFUNCTION COMMENTS

0

1

Maximum allowable carrierdrop during image datareceptionBit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)

0 0 2000 1 4001 0 8001 1 Not used

These bits set the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 isfrequent.

2-3 Not used Do not change the settings.4 Maximum allowable frame

interval during image datareception.0: 5 s1: 13 s

This bit set the maximum intervals between eachEOL signal (end-of-line) or intervals betweeneach ECM frame from the other end.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 isfrequent.


BIT SWITCHES

4-64H551 SM

G3 Switch 0AFUNCTION COMMENTS

6 Reconstruction time for thefirst line in receive mode0: 6 s1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by acomputer, there may be a delay in receiving pagedata after the local machine accepts set-up dataand sends CFR. This is outside the T.30recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set thisbit to 1 to give the sending machine more time tosend data.Refer to error code 0-20.

ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line shouldcome within 5 s of CFR.


G3 Switch 0BNo FUNCTION COMMENTS0 Protocol requirements:

Europe0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine does not automatically reset thesebits for each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.Change the required bits manually at installation.

1 Protocol requirements: Spain0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2 Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3 Protocol requirements:France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4 PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5 PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

6 Not used Do not change the settings.7

G3 Switch 0CNo FUNCTION COMMENTS01

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Normal (P=N)0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)1 0 Sweden (N+1)1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Numberdialed.

2to7


BIT SWITCHES

4-65

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)G3 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)

NCU PARAMETERS

4-66H551 SM

4.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and units of calculation of theparameters that the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automaticdialing. The factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must bechanged by RAM read/write (Function 06), but some can be changed using NCUParameter programming (Function 08); if Function 08 can be used, this will beindicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless(BCD) is included in the Unit column.

Address Function Unit Remarks480600 Country code for NCU

parametersUse the Hex value to program thecountry code directly into this address,or use the decimal value to program itusing Function 08 (parameter 00)

Country Decimal HexFrance 00 00Germany 01 01UK 02 02Italy 03 03Austria 04 04Belgium 05 05Denmark 06 06Finland 07 07Ireland 08 08Norway 09 09Sweden 10 0ASwitzerland 11 0BPortugal 12 0CHolland 13 0DSpain 14 0EIsrael 15 0FUSA 17 11Asia 18 12Hong Kong 20 14South Africa 21 15Australia 22 16New Zealand 23 17Singapore 24 18Malaysia 25 19

480601 Line current detection time 20 ms Line current is not detectedif 480401 contains FF.

480602 Line current wait time480603 Line current drop detect time480604 PSTN dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain

FF(F), tone detection isdisabled.

480605 PSTN dial tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

NCU PARAMETERS

4-67

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Address Function Unit Remarks480606 PSTN dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain


480607 PSTN dial tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

480608 PSTN dial tone detection time 20 ms If 480408 contains FF, themachine pauses for thepause time (address48040D / 48040E)

See Note 2 (Italy).480609 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)48060A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)48060B PSTN dial tone continuous tone

time48060C PSTN dial tone permissible drop

time48060D PSTN wait interval (LOW)48060E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)48060F PSTN ringback tone detection

time20 ms Detection is disabled if this

contains FF.480610 PSTN ringback tone off detection

time20 ms

480611 PSTN detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (LOW)

20 ms

480612 PSTN detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (HIGH)

20 ms

480613 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480614 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480615 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


480616 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

480617 PABX dial tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480618 PABX dial tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480619 PABX dial tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


48061A PABX dial tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

NCU PARAMETERS

4-68H551 SM

Address Function Unit Remarks48061B PABX dial tone detection time 20 ms If 48041B contains FF, the

machine pauses for thepause time (480420 /480421).

48061C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)48061D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)48061E PABX dial tone continuous tone

time48061F PABX dial tone permissible drop

time480620 PABX wait interval (HIGH)480621 PABX wait interval (LOW)480622 PABX ringback tone detection

time20 ms Detection is disabled if this

contains FF.480623 PABX ringback tone off detection

time20 ms

480624 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (LOW)

20 ms

480625 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tonedetected (HIGH)

20 ms

480626 PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)


480627 PABX busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)

480628 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)


480629 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

48062A Busy tone ON time: range 1 20 ms48062B Busy tone OFF time: range 148062C Busy tone ON time: range 248062D Busy tone OFF time: range 248062E Busy tone ON time: range 348062F Busy tone OFF time: range 3480630 Busy tone ON time: range 4480631 Busy tone OFF time: range 4480632 Busy tone continuous tone

detection time

NCU PARAMETERS

4-69

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Address Function Unit Remarks480633 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles

required for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detectionBits 3 and 2 - Not used. Keep these bits at 0.Bits 1 and 0 - Tolerance (±)

Bit 1 00 0 75%0 1 50%1 0 25%1 1 12.5%

480634 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (high byte)


480635 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (low byte)

480636 International dial tone frequencylower limit (high byte)


480637 International dial tone frequencylower limit (low byte)

480638 International dial tone detectiontime

20 ms If 480438 contains FF, themachine pauses for thepause time (48043D /48043E).

See Note 2 (Belgium).480639 International dial tone reset time

(LOW)48063A International dial tone reset time

(HIGH)48063B International dial tone continuous

tone time48063C International dial tone permissible

drop time48063D International dial wait interval

(HIGH)48063E International dial wait interval

(LOW)48063F Country dial tone upper

frequency limit (HIGH)Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain


480640 Country dial tone upperfrequency limit (LOW)

480641 Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (HIGH)


NCU PARAMETERS

4-70H551 SM

Address Function Unit Remarks480642 Country dial tone lower frequency

limit (LOW)480643 Country dial tone detection time 20 ms If 480443 contains FF, the

machine pauses for thepause time (480448 /480449).

480644 Country dial tone reset time(LOW)

480645 Country dial tone reset time(HIGH)

480646 Country dial tone continuous tonetime

480647 Country dial tone permissibledrop time

480648 Country dial wait interval (LOW)480649 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)48064A Time between opening or closing

the DO relay and opening theOHDI relay

1 ms See Notes 3 and 6.Function 08 (parameter 11).

48064B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3. Function 08(parameter 12).

48064C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3. Function 08(parameter 13).

48064D Time between final OHDI relayclosure and DO relay opening orclosing

1 ms See Notes 6. Function 08(parameter 14).

48064E Minimum pause between dialeddigits (pulse dial mode)

20 ms See Note 3. Function 08(parameter 15).

48064F Time waited when a pause isentered at the operation panel


480650 DTMF tone on time 1 ms Function 08 (parameter 17).480651 DTMF tone off time Function 08 (parameter 18).480652 Tone attenuation level of DTMF

signals while dialing-dBm x

0.5Function 08 (parameter 19).See Note 5.

480653 Tone attenuation valuedifference between highfrequency tone and lowfrequency tone in DTMF signals

-Nx0.5(dB)

Function 08 (parameter 20).See Note 5.

480654 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuationlevel after dialing

-dBm x0.5

Function 08 (parameter 21).See Note 5.

480655 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuationlevel after dialing

-dBm x0.5

See Note 5

480656 Not used Do not change the setting.480657 Not used Do not change the setting.480658 Not used Do not change the setting.480659 Grounding time (ground start

mode)20 ms The Gs relay is closed for

this interval.

NCU PARAMETERS

4-71

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Address Function Unit Remarks48065A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open for

this interval.48065B International dial access code

(High)BCD For a code of 100:

48045B - F148065C International dial access code

(Low)48045C - 00

48065D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited for eachpause input after the PSTNaccess code. Up to 7 ofthese can be input. If thisaddress contains FF[H], thepause time stored inaddress 48044F is used.

48065E Bits 7 to 5 - Progress tone detection levelBit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm

0 0 0 -25.00 0 1 -35.00 1 0 -30.01 0 0 -40.01 1 0 -49.0

Bits 4 and 3 - Not usedBit 2 - International dial tone detection method

0: Detect by time parameters1: Detect by cadence parameters (Belgium - See Note 3)

Bit 1 - Not usedBit 0 - PSTN dial tone detection method

0: Detect by time parameters1: Detect by cadence parameters (Italy - See Note 3)

48065F Bit 7 and 6 - Not usedBit 5 1: Polarity detection enabled for rx (detection time = 500 ms)Bit 4 1: Polarity detection enabled for tx (detection time = 500 ms)Bits 3 to 0 - Not used

480660 Not used Do not change the setting.480661 Not used Do not change the setting.480662 Not used Do not change the setting.480663 Not used Do not change the setting.480664 Not used Do not change the setting.480665 Intercity dial prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

480465 - FF480466 - F0

480666 Intercity dial prefix (LOW) BCD480667

to480671


480672 Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 1, upper limit

1000/ N(Hz).

Function 08 (parameter02).

480673 Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 1, lower limit


NCU PARAMETERS

4-72H551 SM

Address Function Unit Remarks480674 Acceptable ringing signal

frequency: range 2, upper limitFunction 08 (parameter 04).

480675 Acceptable ringing signalfrequency: range 2, lower limit


480676 Number or rings until a call isdetected

1 Function 08 (parameter 06).

480677 Minimum required length of thefirst ring

20 ms See Note 4. Function 09(parameter 07).

480678 Minimum required length of thesecond and subsequent rings


480679 Ringing signal detection resettime (LOW)


48067A Ringing signal detection resettime (HIGH)


48067Bto

480680


480681 Interval between dialing the lastdigit and switching the Oh relayover to the external telephonewhen dialing from the operationpanel in handset mode.


480682 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection timeBit 1 0 Setting

0 0 200 ms0 1 800 msOther Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection timeBit 3 2 Setting

0 0 200 ms0 1 800 msOther Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used480683 Bits 7 to 5 - Not used

Bit 4 - DTMF detection0: Disabled1: Enabled

Bits 3 to 0 - Not used

Do not change the setting.If bit 4 is set to 0, Fax OnDemand and Transferoperation using DTMF aredisabled.

NCU PARAMETERS

4-73

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Address Function Unit Remarks480684 Bits 7 to 5 - DTMF On detection time

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting0 0 0 30 ms0 0 1 40 ms0 1 0 80 ms0 1 1 140 ms

Bits 4 to 2 - DTMF Off detection timeBit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting0 0 0 30 ms0 0 1 40 ms0 1 0 80 ms0 1 1 140 ms

Bits 1 and 0 - Not used.480685

to4806A0


4806A1 Acceptable CED detectionfrequency upper limit (high byte)


4806A2 Acceptable CED detectionfrequency upper limit (low byte)

4806A3 Acceptable CED detectionfrequency lower limit (high byte)


4806A4 Acceptable CED detectionfrequency lower limit (low byte)

4806A5 CED detection time 20 ms ± 20 ms

Factory setting: 200 ms

4804A6 Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency upper limit (high byte)


4806A7 Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency upper limit (low byte)

4806A8 Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency lower limit (high byte)


4806A9 Acceptable CNG detectionfrequency lower limit (low byte)

4806AA CNG detection time 20 ms ± 20 ms

Factory setting: 200 ms

4806AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms4806AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms

NCU PARAMETERS

4-75

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Address Function Unit Remarks4806BE

to4806D9


4806DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s

Notes

1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium onlyRAM address 48065E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.Bit 2 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)Bit 1 Not usedBit 0 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses arechanged.480608 (if bit 0 = 1) or 480638 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off stateduration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address480633.48060B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)48060C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48064A to 48064F) are the values for 10pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the timespecified by this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:High frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 dBmLow frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 + N480653) dBmNote: N480652, for example, means the value stored in address 480652(H)

6. 480644A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Dsclosing and Di opening48064D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Dsopening and Di closing

DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

4-76H551 SM

4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has four bytes of programmableparameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experienceproblems, store that terminal's fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, andadjust the parameters allocated to that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the four bytes will bedescribed.

4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 1.

2. Either use Function 31 (for a Quick Dial number) or Function 32 (for a SpeedDial number)Example: Change the Parameters in Quick Dial 10.

1.

4. Press Quick Dial key 10.NOTE: When selecting Speed Dial 10 with Function 32, press at the ten

key at the ten key pad.

5. Press four times.

6. The settings for byte 0 are now displayed. Press a number from 0 to 7corresponding to the bit that you wish to change.Example : Change bit 7 to 1: Press 7

7. To scroll through the parameter bytes, either:Select the next byte:

orSelect the previous byte: until the correct byte is displayed. Then go back to step 6.

8. After the setting is changed, press .


10. After finishing, reset bit 3 of System Bit Switch 04 to 0.


4-77

Ser

vic

e T

able

s

SM H551

4.4.2 PARAMETERS

The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters aredisabled.

Switch 01FUNCTION AND COMMENTSITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting ,adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by1 second.Range:1 to 127 s (01h to 7Fh)00h or FFh – The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.Do not program a value between 80h and FEh.

Switch 02FUNCTION COMMENTS

0to4

Tx levelBit 4 3 2 1 0 Sett ing

0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 1 -10 0 0 1 0 -20 0 0 1 1 -30 0 1 0 0 -4

::

0 1 1 1 1 -151 1 1 11 Disabled

If communication with a particular remoteterminal often contains errors, the signal levelmay be inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level forcommunications with that terminal until the resultsare better.

When disabled, NCU parameter 01 setting isused.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed on theleft.

5to7

Cable equalizer Bi t 7 6 5 Setting

0 0 0 None0 0 1 Low0 1 0 Medium0 1 1 High1 1 1 Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss athigher frequencies because of the length of wirebetween the modem and the telephone exchangewhen calling the number stored in thisQuick/Speed Dial.





4-78H551 SM


0to3

Initial Tx modem rateBit 3 2 1 0 Setting bps)

0 0 0 0 Not used0 0 0 1 2,4000 0 1 0 4,8000 0 1 1 7,2000 1 0 0 9,6000 1 0 1 12,0000 1 1 0 14,400

1 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings:Not used

If training with a particular remote terminal alwaystakes too long, the initial modem rate may be toohigh. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate usingthese bits.


4to7



0 Inch-mm conversion before txBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Inch-mmconversionavailable

0 1 Inch only1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

The machine uses inch-based resolutions forscanning. If ”inch only” is selected, the printedcopy may be slightly distorted at the other end ifthat machine uses mm-based resolutions.

23

DIS/NSF detection method Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 First DIS orNSF

0 1 Second DIS orNSF

1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line areinterfering with the set-up protocol at the start oftransmission. The machine will then wait for thesecond DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.

4 Not used Do not change the setting.5 Compression modes

available in transmit mode0: MH only1: All available compressionmodes

This bit determines the capabilities that areinformed to the other terminal duringtransmission.

6

7

ECM during transmissionBit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 Disabled0 1 Enabled1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

For example, if ECM is switched on but is notwanted when sending to a particular terminal, usethe setting of (0, 0).


4-79

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

Switch 05 - Optional ISDN G4 kit requiredFUNCTION COMMENTS

0to3

Data rateBits 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 64 kbps0 0 0 1 56 kbps1 1 1 1 Disabled

When disabled, the setting of G4 parameterswitch 2 (bits 0 and 1) setting is used.

4to7



0to3

Link ModulesBits 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 Modulo 80 0 0 1 Modulo 1281 1 1 1 Disabled

When disabled, the setting of G4 parameterswitch 3 (bit 0) setting is used.

4to7



0to3

Layer 3 protocolBits 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 ISO 82080 0 0 1 T.70 NULL1 1 1 1 Disabled


4to7

Packet modulesBits 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 Modulo 90 0 0 1 Modulo 1281 1 1 1 Disabled


Switch 08 - Not used

SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

4-80H551 SM

4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTIONDo not change the settings whic h are marked as “Not used” or “Readonly.”

006003 to 00600B(H) - ROM part number and suffix ( ASCII)Example : The part number is H5517210A

006003(H) - 48(H)006004(H) - 35(H)006005(H) - 35(H)006006(H) - 31(H)006007(H) - 37(H)006008(H) - 32(H)006009(H) - 31(H)00600A(H) - 30(H)00600B(H) - 41(H)

480001 to 480004(H) - ROM version (Read onl y)480001(H) - Revision number (BCD)480002(H) - Year (BCD)480003(H) - Month (BCD)480004(H) - Day (BCD)

480005(H) - RAM Reset Le vel 1Change the data at this address to FF(H), then switch the machine off and on toreset all the system settings.Caution: Before using this RAM, print the settings of all the system parameters(System Parameter List) and RAM settings (RAM dump list) for scanner/printerregistration settings.Note: Initial toner supply will be carried out automatically after the reset. Thisshould take about 90 seconds.

480006 to 480015(H) - Machine's serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

480018(H) - Total program checksum (low)480019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

48001A(H) - Boot program checksum (low)48001B(H) - Boot program checksum (high)

48001C(H) - Main program checksum (low)48001D(H) - Main program checksum (high)

48001E(H) - RDS program update counter

480020 to 48003F(H) - System bit switches480040 to 48004F(H) - Scanner bit switches480050 to 48005F(H) - Printer bit switches480060 to 48007F(H) - Communication bit switches480080 to 48008F(H) - G3 bit switches480090 to 48009F(H) - G3 bit switches for the optional G3 unit


4-81

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4800C0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00)Bit 0: Stamp home position 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 1 and 2: Scanning contrast home position

Bit 2 1 Setting0 0 Normal0 1 Lighten1 0 Darken

Bit 3: Do not adjustBits 4 and 5: Scanning resolution home position

Bit 5 4 Setting0 0 Standard0 1 Detail1 0 Fine

Bit 6: Transmission mode home position 0: Memory tx, 1: Immediate txBit 7: Halftone home position 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800C1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01)Bits 0 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Settings return to home position after transmission 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800C2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Center mark printing on received copies 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 2: Reception time printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 3: TSI included in transmitted messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 4: Checkered mark printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 7: Not used


4-82H551 SM

4800C3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic reportprintout)Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not usedBit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Journal (TCR) 0: Off, 1: On

4800C4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR04: Automatic report printout)Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Fax On Demand report output 0: Off, 1: OnBits 2 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On

4800C5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05)Bit 0: Substitute reception 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Memory reception if no RTI or CSI received 0: Possible, 1: ImpossibleBits 2 and 3: Not usedBits 4 and 5: Restricted Access

Bit 5 4 Setting0 0 Disabled0 1 Enabled at all times1 0 Enabled during Night Timer periods only1 1 Not used

Bit 6: Fusing lamp control during energy saver mode0: Lamp off, 1: Standby temperature (80 °C)

Bit 7: Not used

4800C6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06)Bit 0: TTI/CIL printing 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not usedBit 2: Closed network for transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Not usedBit 4: Batch transmission (memory card required) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Partial image scanning during memory tx 0: Off, 1: OnBits 6 to 7: Not used


4-83

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4800C7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07)Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Reduction before transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBits 4 and 5: Not usedBits 6 and 7: Fax On Demand

Bit 7 6 Setting0 0 Disabled0 1 Enabled without password (Remote ID)1 0 Enabled with password (Remote ID)1 1 Not used

4800C8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08)Bit 0 and 1: Multi-copy reception (optional memory card required)

Bit 1 0 SettingX 0 Disabled0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this

feature are multicopied.1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this

feature are multicopied.Bits 2 and 3: Authorized reception

Bit 3 2 SettingX 0 Disabled0 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for

this feature are accepted.1 1 Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified

for this feature are accepted.Bits 4 and 5: Specified cassette selection


feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette.1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this

feature are printed on paper from a specified cassette.Bits 6 and 7: Forwarding (optional memory card required)


feature are forwarded.1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this

feature are forwarded.


4-84H551 SM

4800C9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09)Bits 0 and 1: Memory lock (optional memory card required)


feature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID isentered.

1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for thisfeature are kept in the memory until a memory lock ID isentered.

Bits 2 and 3: Hard disk filing system(optional hard disk and the function upgrade card required)

Bit 3 2 SettingX 0 Disabled0 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified are for this

feature kept in the hard disk for filing.1 1 Faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this

feature are kept in the hard disk for filing.Bits 4 to 7: Not used

4800CA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)Bit 0: Reverse order printing 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: 2 into 1 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 2 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Halftone type 0: Error diffusion, 1: Dither

4800CB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)Bit 0: Transfer request using DTMF tone signals 0: Not accepted, 1: AcceptedBit 1: Method of transmitting numbers after the "Tone" mark over an ISDN line

0: UUI, 1: ToneBits 2 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station

0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit

4800CC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C)Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Toner saving mode 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 3 and 4: Printout image density (Fax mode)

Bit 4 3 Setting0 0 Normal0 1 Lighten1 0 Darken1 1 Not used

Bits 5 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Copy operation 0: Possible, 1: Prohibited


4-85

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4800CD(H) - PSTN access method (SWUSR_0D)Bits 0 and 1: PSTN access method from behind a PABX (standard G3 unit)

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 PSTN0 1 Loop start1 0 Ground start1 1 Flash start

Bits 2 and 3: PSTN access method from behind a PABX for the optional G3 unitBit 3 2 Setting

0 0 PSTN0 1 Loop start1 0 Ground start1 1 Flash start

4800D7(H) - PSTN access number for loop start (Optional G3 unit)(SWUSR_17)

Access number Hex value to program (BCD)0 F0Ø Ø0 F0

00 00Ø Ø

99 99

4800D8(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_18)Bits 0 and 1: File retention time

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 Disabled0 1 24 hours1 0 Disabled1 1 72 hours

Bits 2 to 7: Not used

4800D9(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_19)Bit 0: Night timer 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 1 to 3: Not usedBit 4: RDS operation 0: Not acceptable

1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch03

Bits 5 and 6: Not usedBit 7: Daylight saving time 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

4800DA(H) - User function 62 settings (SWUSR_1A)Bit 0: Not usedBit 1: Dialing type (Standard G3 unit)

0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialingBits 2 to 4: Not usedBit 5: Dialing type (Optional G3 unit)

0: Pulse dialing (10 pps), 1: Tone (DTMF) dialingBit 6 and 7: Not used


4-86H551 SM

4800DB(H) - PSTN access number for loop start (Standard G3 unit)(SWUSR_1B)

Access number Hex value to program (BCD)0 F0Ø Ø0 F0

00 00Ø Ø

99 99

4800F0 to 4800FF(H) - G4 Parameter Switches(Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)

480100 to 48011FF(H) - G4 Internal Switches (Refer to the ISDN G4 option service manual for details.)

480120 to 480133(H) - RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.480148 to 48015B(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

48015C to 48016F(H) - CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) for the optional G3 unit480170 to 480183(H) – ISDN G3 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)

480184 to 4801A3(H) - TTI (Max.32 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.

4801C4(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex)4801C5(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex) for the optional G3 unit4801C6(H) - Number of CSI characters (Hex) for the ISDN G3 CSI

Note : If the number of characters are less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 forTTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.

4801C7 to 4801D5(H) - Service station's fax number (Service function 13)See 48024C(H) for the type of network used for thisnumber.

4801E5 to 4801F3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN/ISDN G3) (User function 61)4801F4 to 480202(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) (User function 61)

480203 to 48023E(H) - ISDN subscriber numbers (Read only)480203 - 480211(H): ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Main)480212 - 480220(H): ISDN G3 Subscriber Number (Sub)480221 - 48022F(H): ISDN G4 Subscriber Number (Main)480230 – 48023E(H): ISDN G4 Subscriber Number (Sub)

480240(H) - ID code (low - Hex)480241(H) - ID code (high - Hex)

480242(H) - Confidential ID (low - BCD)480243(H) - Confidential ID (high - BCD)

480244(H) - Memory lock ID (low - Hex)480245(H) - Memory lock ID (high - Hex)

480248(H) - Remote ID (low - BCD)480249(H) - Remote ID (high - BCD)


4-87

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

48024C(H) - Network type used for the service station number00(H) - G3 (PSTN)01(H) - G4 (ISDN)

48026C to 480273(H) - Last power off time (Read only)48026C(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour

clock (PM)48026D(H) - Year (BCD)48026E(H) - Month (BCD)48026F(H) - Day (BCD)480270(H) - Hour480271(H) - Minute480272(H) - Second480273(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

480280(H) ) - Optional equipment (Read only)Bit 0: Memory card 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 1: Hard disk 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 2: Function upgrade card 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 3: Not usedBit 4: 100 sheet cassette 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 5 to 7: Not used

480281(H) ) - Optional equipment (Read only)Bit 0 Paper feed unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 1: 1st paper feed unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 2: 2nd paper feed unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 3: Not used:Bit 4: Printer interface unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 5: Not usedBit 6: ISDN G4 unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 7: Not used

480282(H) ) - Optional equipment (Read only)Bit 0: Fax on demand 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 1 to 2: Not usedBit 3: Optional G3 unit 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 4 to 7: Not used

480292 to 480294(H) - Tx counter

Address High Low480292(H) Tens digit Unit digit480293(H) Thousands digit Hundrets digit480294(H) Hundred thousands digit Ten thousands digit

Note: The following counters have the same data format as above.

480296 to 480298(H) - Rx counter

48029A to 48029C(H) - Scan counter


4-88H551 SM

48029E to 4802A0(H) - Print counter

4802A2 to 4802A4(H) - Printer interface output counter

4802B2 to 4802B4(H) - Paper feed counter (standard cassette)

4802B6 to 4802B8(H) - Paper feed counter (1st optional paper feed unit)

4802BA to 4802BC(H) - Paper feed counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)

4802BE to 4802C0(H) - Paper feed counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)

4802C2 to 4802C4(H) - Paper feed counter (bypass feed)

4802CA to 4802CC(H) - Scanner total jam counter

4802CE to 4802D0(H) - Printer total jam counter

4802D2 to 4802D4(H) - Paper jam counter (standard cassette)

4802D6 to 4802D8(H) - Paper jam counter (1st optional paper feed unit)

4802DA to 4802DC(H) - Paper jam counter (2nd optional paper feed unit)

4802DE to 4802E0(H) - Paper jam counter (optional 100 sheet cassette)

4802E2 to 4802E4(H) - Paper jam counter (bypass feed)

4802EA to 4802EC(H) - Fusing exit jam counter

4802EE to 4802F0(H) - Registration jam counter

4802F2 to 4802F4(H) - PM counter

4802F6 to 4802F8(H) - PM call interval (default 60,000)

4802FA to 4802FC(H) - Copy counter

4802FE to 480300(H) - OPC (drum) counter

480306 to 480308(H) - OPC (drum) replacement interval (default: 30,000 prints)If bit 5 of system bit switch 04 is 0, the machine asks the user to replace the drumat this interval.

48030A to 48030C(H) - CTM counter


4-89

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

480312 to 480321(H) - Excessive jam call parameters

Parameters Address (H) Initial Sys. Para.ADF Printer Settings List

DEC (1 - 255; 0 = Disabled) 48031A 48031E 10 (H) XCALL (3 - 15; 0 = Disabled) 48031B 48031F 06 (H) YCLR (Low) 48031C 480320 30 (H)

(High) 48031D 480321 00 (H)

Counters Address (H) Sys. Para.ADF Printer List

JAM: Jam counter used toplace a service call

480313 480317 Z

NO-JAM1: Counter used forJAM counter decrement

480312 480316

NO-JAM2: Counter used forclearing the JAM counter

480314 (Low) 480318 (Low)

480315 (High) 480319 (High)

48033E to 480349(H) - G4 NSC code

48034A to 480361(H) - G4 terminal ID (ASCII - Max. 24 characters)

480362 to 480365(H) - ISDN IP

480366 to 480369(H) - ISDN G3 sub-address

48036A to 48036D(H) - ISDN G4 sub-address

48036E to 480372(H) - CiG4 board ROM information48036E(H) - Suffix48036F(H) - Version (BCD)480370(H) - Year (BCD)480371(H) - Month (BCD)480372(H) - Day (BCD)

480373 to 480374(H) - Modem ROM version (standard)480375 to 480376(H) - Optional G3 unit modem ROM version

480378 to 480379(H) - Reset timer during the communication480378(H) - Low byte480379(H) - High byte

The machine automatically returns to the standby mode when a page transmissionexceeds this timer.When the setting is 0000 to 04FF: The timer is set to 1 hour.When the setting is 0500 to FFFF: The timer is set to N x 500 ms

(10.7 min to 9.1 hours)


4-90H551 SM

48037A to 48037B(H) - Reset timer for the optional G3 or G4 unit48037A(H) - Low byte48037B(H) - High byte

The machine resets the optional G3 or G4 unit to the standby mode every period ofthis timer.When the setting is 0000 to 04FF: The timer is set to 15 min.When the setting is 0500 to FFFF: The timer is set to N x 500 ms

(10.7 min to 9.1 hours)

480387(H) - Number of copies for multi-sort document reception (User function 83)

480388(H) - Daylight saving time settings (User function 62)

480389 to 4803B2(H) - Night timer period (User function 72)480389 to 48038B(H) - Setting #1 for Monday48038C to 48038E(H) - Setting #2 for Monday48038F to 480391(H) - Setting #1 for Tuesday480392 to 480394(H) - Setting #2 for Tuesday480395 to 480397(H) - Setting #1 for Wednesday480398 to 48039A(H) - Setting #2 for Wednesday48039B to 48039D(H) - Setting #1 for Thursday48039E to 4803A0(H) - Setting #2 for Thursday4803A1 to 4803A3(H) - Setting #1 for Friday4803A4 to 4803A6(H) - Setting #2 for Friday4803A7 to 4803A9(H) - Setting #1 for Saturday4803AA to 4803AC(H) - Setting #2 for Saturday4803AD to 4803AF(H) - Setting #1 for Sunday4803B0 to 4803B2(H) - Setting #2 for Sunday

Program formatFirst byte - Hour (BCD)Second byte - Minute (BCD)Third byte - 00(H): Timer start time, 01(H): Timer end time

4803DB(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)4803DC(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)

4803DD to 4803E4(H) - Last RDS operation (Read only)4803DD(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour

clock (PM)4803DE(H) - Year (BCD)4803DF1(H) - Month (BCD)4803E0(H) - Day (BCD)4803E1(H) - Hour4803E2(H) - Minute4803E3(H) - Second4803E4(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday


4-91

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4803EC to 4803F3(H) - Last Fax On Demand report printout (Read only)4803EC(H) - 01(H): 24-hour clock, 00(H): 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H): 12-hour

clock (PM)4803ED(H) - Year (BCD)4803EE(H) - Month (BCD)4803EF(H) - Day (BCD)4803F0(H) - Hour4803F1(H) - Minute4803F2(H) - Second4803F3(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

4803F6 to 4803F7(H) - Length (mm) of the non-scanning area from the leadingedge for partial image scanning

4803F6(H) - Low byte (BCD)4803F7(H) - High byte (BCD)

In the US, the user input value is in inch format. The machine converts this into mmformat and stores the converted value here.

4803F8 to 4803F9(H) - Length (mm) of the scanning area for partial imagescanning

4803F8(H) - Low byte (BCD)4803F9(H) - High byte (BCD)

4803FA(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)4803FB(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)4803FC(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)4803FE(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)4803FF(H) - Key acknowledgement tone volume 00 - 07(H)

480400(H) - NCU country code setting

480401 to 480405(H) - Periodic service call parameters480401(H) - Call interval: 01 through 15 month(s) (BCD)

(00: Periodic service call disabled.)480402(H) - Year: Last two digits of the year (BCD)480403(H) - Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)480404(H) - Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)480405(H) - Hour: 00 to 23 (BCD)

48040B to 48040D(H) - Effective term of automatic service48040B(H) - Year: Last two digits of the year (BCD)48040C(H) - Month: 01 to 12 (BCD)48040D(H) - Day: 01 to 31 (BCD)

480600 to 4806DA(H) - NCU parameters (Refer to section 4.3 for details)


4-92H551 SM

480800(H) - Print top margin (standard cassette)480801(H) - Print top margin (1st optional paper feed unit)480802(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)480805(H) - Print top margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)480806(H) - Print top margin (bypass feed)

48080B(H) - Print left margin (standard cassette)48080C(H) - Print left margin (1st optional paper feed unit)48080D(H) - Print top margin (2nd optional paper feed unit)480810(H) - Print left margin (optional 100 sheet cassette)480811(H) - Print left margin (bypass feed)

4808CD(H) - Print bottom margin (bypass feed)NOTE: Please refer to section 5.12.3 of the FX4 service manual for how to

adjust above parameters.4808C7(H) - Fusing unit failure details01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 °C while printing.02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 °C before starting printing.03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standbymode (when fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standbymode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 °C while in standby mode(when fusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature went below 140 °C during printing08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 °C09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected

Note:When a service call was caused by a fusing unit failure (codes 01 - 09):After fixing the problem, reset the data at this address to 00(H), then restart themachine to clear the service call. (Refer to address 4808C9(H) for other hardwarefailures.)

4808C8(H) - Excessive jam alarmBit 3: Scanner excessive jam alarm 1: An alarm has occurredBit 4: Printer excessive jam alarm 1: An alarm has occurredEither or both of these bits will change to 1 when an excessive jam alarm occurs.Reset each bit to 0 when you have solved the problem. The machine will not beable to detect excessive jams in future if you do not reset these bits.


4-93

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4808C9(H) - Details of the service call (hardware error)01(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed above 175 °C while printing.02(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not reach 150 °C before starting printing.03(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standbymode (when fusing lamp OFF was selected for energy saver mode)04(H) - The fusing lamp temperature did not go down to 80 °C while in standbymode (when fusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)05(H) - The fusing lamp temperature stayed below 80 °C while in standby mode(when fusing lamp Standby [80 °C] was selected for energy saver mode)07(H) - The fusing lamp temperature went below 140 °C while printing08(H) - The fusing lamp temperature exceeded 250 °C09(H) - A fusing thermistor error was detected11(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit wasactivated12(H) - Charge leak current was detected while the charge corona unit was notactivated21(H) - The laser synchronization signal was not detected during printing31(H) - Polygonal mirror motor startup error32(H) - Polygonal mirror motor error during printing41(H) - Main motor startup error42(H) - Main motor error during printing

When a service call was caused by a fusing lamp failure (codes 01 - 09):The same code is stored at address 4808C7(H).After fixing the problem, reset the data at address 4808C7(H) to 00(H), then restartthe machine to clear the service call.

When a service call was caused by another hardware failure (codes 11 - 42):If the problem remains after restarting the machine (power off/on), fix the hardwareproblem. The service call condition is cleared after power up.

4808CD(H) - Print bottom margin when bypass feeder is used.

4808E0(H) - Initial Toner SupplyBit 3: Initial toner supply 0: Off, 1: OnWhenever the development unit is replaced, do the following procedure.

1. Make sure that the drum, CTM, and the new development unit are correctlyinstalled.

2. Turn on the machine and change this bit to 1.


4. Turn on the machine. The machine starts filling up the empty development unithopper with new toner. (This bit is reset to zero automatically.)

5. Make test copies or test patterns to check the print quality.

⇒⇒⇒⇒


4-95

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

4B9C5E to 4BA365(H) - Latest 20 error communication records (Read only)

One error communication record consists of 90 bytes. The format is as follows:

1st byte - HeaderBit 0: Communication result 0: OK, 1: NGBit 1: Document jam 1: OccurredBit 2: Power down 1: OccurredBit 3: Not usedBit 4: Technical data printout instead of personal codes 0: No, 1: YesBit 5: Type of technical data 0: Rx level, 1: Measure of error rateBit 6: Error report 0: Not printed, 1: PrintedBit 7: Data validity 0: Not valid, 1: Valid

2nd to 6th bytes - Date and time when the communication started2nd byte - Year (BCD)3rd byte - Month (BCD)4th byte - Day (BCD)5th byte - Hour (BCD)6th byte - Minute (BCD)

7th and 8th bytes - Communication time7th byte - Minutes (BCD)8th byte - Seconds (BCD)

9th byte - Not used

10th and 11th bytes - Number of pages transmitted or received9th byte - Low byte (Hex)10th byte - High byte (Hex)

12th and 13th bytes - Personal code or number of total/burst error linesIf bit 4 of the 1st byte is 0: 12th byte - Personal code (low - BCD)

13th byte - Personal code (high - BCD)If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1: 12th byte - Number of total error lines (Hex)

13th byte - Number of burst error lines (Hex)

14th byte - File number (low - Hex)15th byte - File number (high - Hex)

16th and 17th bytes - Rx level or measure of error rateIf bit 5 of the 1st byte is 0: 16th byte - Rx level (low - Hex)

17th byte - Rx level (high - Hex)If bit 4 of the 1st byte is 1: 16th byte - Measure of error rate (low - Hex)

17th byte - Measure of error rate (high - Hex)

18th byte - Final modem rate


4-96H551 SM

Bits 0 to 3: Final modem speed

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8k0 0 1 1 7.2k0 1 0 0 9.6k0 1 0 1 12.0k0 1 1 0 14.4k0 1 1 1 16.8k1 0 0 0 19.2k1 0 0 1 21.6k1 0 1 0 24.0k1 0 1 1 26.4k1 1 0 0 28.8k1 1 0 1 31.21 1 1 0 33.6kOther settings - Not used

Bits 4 to 7: Final modem type

Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting0 0 0 1 V.27ter0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.290 0 1 1 Not used0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.170 1 0 1 V.27ter, V29, V.17, V.34Other settings - Not used

19th to 21st byte - Not used

22nd to 45th byte - Remote terminal's ID (RTI, TSI or CSI) (ASCII)

46th byte - Communication mode #1Bits 0 - 1: Resolution used

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 Standard1 0 Detail1 1 Fine

Bit 2: Communication Protocol 0: G3, 1: G4Bit 3: ECM 0: Off, 1: OnBits 4 to 7: Communication mode used

Bit 7 6 5 4 Setting0 0 0 0 Normal0 0 0 1 Confidential0 0 1 0 Polling0 0 1 1 Transfer0 1 0 0 Forwarding0 1 0 1 Automatic Service Call0 1 1 1 Transfer using DTMF/UUI1 0 0 0 Fax On Demand


4-97

Ser

vice

Tab

les

SM H551

47th byte - Communication mode #2Bit 0: Tx or Rx 0: Tx, 1: RxBit 1: Reduction in Tx 0: Not reduced, 1: ReducedBit 2: Batch transmission 0: Not used, 1: UsedBit 3: Send later transmission 0: Not used, 1: UsedBit 4: Transmission from 0: ADF, 1: MemoryBit 5: Not usedBits 6 and 7: Network type used

48th byte - Not used

49th byte - Number of errors during communication (Hex)

50th to 53rd byte - 1st error code and page number where the error occurred49th byte - Page number where the error occurred (low - Hex)50th byte - Page number where the error occurred (high - Hex)51st byte - Error code (low - BCD)52nd byte - Error code (high - BCD)

54th to 57th byte - 2nd error code and page number where the error occurred58th to 61st byte - 3rd error code and page number where the error occurred62nd to 65th byte - 4th error code and page number where the error occurred66th to 69th byte - 5th error code and page number where the error occurred70th to 73rd byte - 6th error code and page number where the error occurred74th to 77th byte - 7th error code and page number where the error occurred78th to 81st byte - 8th error code and page number where the error occurred82nd to 85th byte - 9th error code and page number where the error occurred86th to 89th byte - 10th error code and page number where the error occurred

70001E to 700025(H) - Hard disk informationIf the data in these addresses do not match the following values after installing anoptional hard disk, format the hard disk and check these addresses again.

70001E(H) - 50(H)70001F(H) - 00(H)700020(H) - FF(H)700021(H) - FF(H)700022(H) - 00(H)700023(H) - 00(H)700024(H) - 00(H)700025(H) - 80(H)

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

5-1H551 SM

Pre

vent

ive

Mai

nten

ance

5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

5.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

• Flash/SRAM data copy tool (P/N: A1939353/H5159100)• Flash/SRAM data copy board (P/N: A1939351/H5159500)• Scan line adjustment chart (P/N: H5159300)• 200 dpi test chart (P/N: H0829020)• SBU adjustment knobs (P/N: H0129300)

5.2 PM TABLE

Scanner

Item 30K 60K 90K 1 year NotesExposure Glass C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterR1 and R2 Rollers C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterWhite Shading Plate C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterMirrors C CADF Roller Assy R R R C (user) P/N:H5151204Separation Pad R R R C (user) P/N: H5521355

Printer

Item 30K 60K 90K 1 year NotesPaper Feed Roller C (user) Soft cloth and waterRegistration Roller C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterThermistor R P/N: H5525015Hot Roller Strippers R P/N: H5152181Hot Roller R P/N: H5162110Pressure Roller(Fusing)

R P/N: H5162111

Cleaning Pad R (user)Replaced when a new CTM is installed.

A cleaning pad isenclosed in the CTM.

Development Unit R P/N: H5159570Transfer Roller isincluded.

100 Sheet Cassette (Optional)

Item 10K 30K 60K 1 year NotesFeed Roller C (user) Soft cloth and water

PM TABLE

H551 5-2 SM

Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Item 10K 30K 60K 1 year NotesRelay Roller C (user) C (user) C (user) C (user) Soft cloth and waterFeed Roller C (user) Soft cloth and water

NOTE: C: Clean R: Replace

REPLACEMENT AND ADUSTMENT

SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SM H5516-1

Rep

lace

men

t a

nd A

djus

tmen

t

6. TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

If the Call Service indicator is lit, one of the following conditions has occurred.

Symptom Error Code Sub-code SC-codeCharge leak current detected while thecharge corona unit was activated.

9-17 11 1-11

Charge leak current detected while thecharge corona unit was not activated.

9-17 12 1-12

Laser diode failure 9-20 21 2-21Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at hightemperature during printing)

9-22 01 0-01

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp not atprinting temperature after warm-up)

9-22 02 0-02


9-22 03 0-03


9-22 04 0-04

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at lowtemperature in power saver mode)

9-22 05 0-05

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at lowtemperature during printing)

9-22 07 0-07

Fusing unit failure (fusing lamp at anextremely high temperature)

9-22 08 0-08

Fusing unit failure (thermistor error) 9-22 09 0-09Hexagonal mirror motor startup error 9-23 31 3-31Hexagonal mirror motor error while printing 9-23 32 3-32Main motor startup error 9-24 41 4-41Main motor error while printing 9-24 42 4-42

To find out which problem has occurred, either:

• See the Auto Service Call report that was sent to the service station by themachine. This report lists a sub-code, as well as the error message; this sub-code may help you find the problem.Or, check the sub-code stored at RAM addresses 4808C7(H) and4808C9(H).

• Check the error code history using service function 03.• Try to clear the service call condition (for failures which are not related to the

fusing unit): switch the power off, wait 10 seconds, then switch back on.• An SC-code is displayed on the LCD panel when the error occurs.

ERROR CODES

H551 SM6-2

6.2 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try tofix the problem as suggested below. Note that error codes 4-00, 01, 02, and 10only appear in the error code display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-00 DIS/NSF not detected

within 40 s of Start beingpressed

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.The machine at the other end may beincompatible.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.

0-01 DCN receivedunexpectedly

The other party is out of paper or has a jammedprinter.The other party pressed Stop duringcommunication.

0-03 Incompatible modem at theother end

The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not receivedafter modem training

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the MFCE or NCU.The other terminal may be faulty; try sending toanother machine.If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may bea bad line.

0-05 Unsuccessful after modemtraining at 2400 bps

Check the line connection.Check the NCU - MFDU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.Replace the MFCE or NCU.Check for line problems.Cross referenceSee error code 0-04.

0-06 The other terminal did notreply to DCS

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may be defective or incompatible;try sending to another machine.Check for line problems.Cross referenceSee error code 0-04.

ERROR CODES

SM H5516-3

Rep

lace

men

t a

nd A

djus

tmen

t

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-07 No post-message

response from the otherend after a page was sent

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may have jammed or run out ofpaper.The other end user may have disconnected thecall.Check for a bad line.The other end may be defective; try sending toanother machine.

0-08 The other end sent RTN orPIN after receiving a page,because there were toomany errors

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The other end may have jammed, or run out ofpaper or memory space.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other end may have a defectivemodem/NCU/MFDU; try sending to anothermachine.Check for line problems and noise.

0-14 Non-standard postmessage response codereceived

Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Incompatible or defective remote terminal; trysending to another machine.Noisy line: resend.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Cross referenceSee error code 0-08.

0-15 The other end does nothave the confidential,transfer, or SEP/SUB/PWDfunction

The other terminal does not have the confidentialrx or transfer function, or the other terminal doesnot have SEP/SUB/PWD function.The other terminal's memory is full.

0-16 CFR or FTT not detectedafter modem training inconfidential or transfermode

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other end may have disconnected, or it maybe defective; try calling another machine.If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a lineproblem.Cross referenceSee error code 0-08.

0-17 Communication wasinterrupted by pressing theStop key

If the Stop key was not pressed and this errorkeeps occurring, replace the operation panel orOPU.

ERROR CODES

H551 SM6-4

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-20 Facsimile data not received

within 6 s of retrainingCheck the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Check for line problems.Try calling another fax machine.Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the firstline and/or rx cable equalizer setting.Cross referenceReconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)

0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line)from the other end notreceived within 5 s of theprevious EOL signal

Check the connections between the MFDU, NCU,& line.Check for line noise or other line problems.Replace the NCU or MFCE.The remote machine may be defective or mayhave disconnected.Cross referenceMaximum interval between EOLs and ECMframes - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

0-22 The signal from the otherend was interrupted formore than the acceptablemodem carrier drop time(default: 0.2 s)

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU or MFCE.Defective remote terminal.Check for line noise or other line problems.Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Cross referenceAcceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch0A, bits 0 and 1

0-23 Too many errors duringreception

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Replace the NCU, MFDU or MFCE.Defective remote terminal.Check for line noise or other line problems.Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/orrx error criteria.Cross referenceRx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits0 and 1

0-24 Printer failure occurredwhile the memory was fullduring non-ECM reception;negative responsereturned

There is no memory space available, or substitutereception is disabled.Try asking the user to add optional extra memory.

ERROR CODES

SM H5516-5

Rep

lace

men

t a

nd A

djus

tmen

t

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action0-30 The other terminal did not

reply to NSS(A) in AI shortprotocol mode

Check the line connection.Check the MFDU - NCU connectors.Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.The other terminal may not be compatible.Cross referenceDedicated tx parameters - Section 4-4

0-52 Polarity changed duringcommunication

Check the line connection.Retry communication.

0-70 V.8 sequence (TX/RX) -modulation mode was notdetermined after CM/JMexchange

0-74 V.8 sequence (TX) –fallback to T.30 protocolafter transmitting CI

0-75 V.8 sequence (RX) –fallback to T.30 protocolafter receiving CI

0-76 V.8 sequence (TX) - JMnot detected and fallbackto T.30 protocol

0-77 V.8 sequence (RX) - CJnot detected and fallbackto T.30 protocol

0-79 V.8 sequence (RX) - CIdetected while waiting forV.21 signal

Check the line connection.Check for line noise.Check the connection between the NCU and theFDU.

The other terminal may be defective orincompatible.Adjust the TX level.

ERROR CODES

H551 SM6-6

0-80 V.34 communication - timeout during line probing

0-81 V.34 communication - timeout during equalizertraining

0-82 V.34 communication - timeout during control channelstart-up sequence (Phase4)

0-83 V.34 communication - timeout during phase D controlchannel start-up sequence

0-84 V.34 communication - errordetected in the phase Bcontrol channel

0-85 V.34 communication - errordetected in the phase Dcontrol channel

0-86 V.34 communication - adata rate which cannot bedetermined from thesymbol rate is selected

0-87 V.34 communication -modem status goes backto control channel beforereceiving RCP

0-88 V.34 ECM - PPR received9 times (TX) or PPRtransmitted 9 times (RX)

Check the line connection.Check for line noise.Check the connection between the NCU and theFDU.The other terminal may be defective orincompatible.Adjust the TX level.

1-00 Document jam Incorrectly inserted document or unsuitabledocument type.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.

1-01 Document lengthexceeded the maximum

Try changing the maximum acceptable documentlength.Divide the document into smaller pieces.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.Cross referenceMax. document length - Scanner switch 00, bits 2and 3

1-10 Paper at the scan linewhen the power wasturned on.

Remove the paper.Check the scan line sensor.

1-17 Document jam in the feed-out area

Clear any debris from the sensor actuator.Check the ADF drive components and sensors.

1-20 Paper did not reach thefusing exit at the end ofprinting

Remove the paper.Check the printer drive components and sensors.

ERROR CODES

SM H5516-7

Rep

lace

men

t a

nd A

djus

tmen

t

1-21 Paper present at the fusingexit after printing

Remove the paper.Check the printer drive components and sensors.

1-30 Paper ran out duringprinting


1-34 Paper ran out after printing Add paper in the cassette.1-71 The cover was opened or

the cassette was pulled outduring printing

Close the cover or put back the cassette.

2-10 The modem cannot entertx mode

Replace the MFCE.

2-11 Only one V.21 connectionflag was received

Change the MFCE.

2-12 Modem clock irregularity Replace the MFCE.2-20 Abnormal coding/decoding

(cpu not ready)Replace the MFCE.

2-50 The machine reset itself If this is frequent, replace the MFCE.3-00 G4 interface board reset Replace the G4 interface board or MFCE.3-10 Disconnection during ISDN

G3 communicationCheck the other terminal and the ISDN line.The other terminal may dialed a wrong number.

3-11 Disconnection during ISDNG4 communication

Check the other terminal and the ISDN line.

3-20 A SAC signal was receivedduring ISDN G4communication

The operator at the other terminal may haveinterrupted the communication.

3-21 A CSA was sent duringISDN G4 communication,because the Stop key waspressed

The local operator has interrupted thecommunication.

3-30 Mismatched specifications(rx capability)

Check the receive capabilities requested from theother terminal.

4-00 One page took longer than8 minutes to transmit

Check for a bad line.Try the communication at a lower resolution, orwithout halftone.Change the MFCE.

4-01 Line current was cut Check the line connector.Check the connection between MFDU and NCU.Check for line problems.Replace the MFDU or the NCU.

4-02 The other end cut thereceived page as it waslonger than the maximumlimit.

Split the page into smaller pieces, or ask the otherend to change their maximum receive lengthsetting, then resend.

4-10 Communication failedbecause of ID Codemismatch (ClosedNetwork) or Tel. No./CSImismatch (Protectionagainst WrongConnections)

Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIsprogrammed correctly, then resend.The machine at the other end may be defective.

ERROR CODES

H551 SM6-8

4-80 Start mark not detected atthe top of the OMR sheet

Check the ADF/scanner mechanisms.Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.Check if the document guide was not adjutedcorrectly.Check if the sheet was dirty.Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.

4-81 OMR sheet placed in theADF the wrong way

Place the sheet in the correct way.

4-82 Skew detection mark notdetected

Same as 4-80.

4-83 Skew was detected beforescanning the OMR datafield

Check the ADF mechanisms.Check if a photocopy of the sheet was used.Check if a cut-off portion of the sheet was used.Check if any adhesive tapes on the sheet.

4-84 Guide mark not detectedwhile scanning an OMRsheet

Same as 4-80.

4-85 Skew was detected whilescanning the OMR datafield

Same as 4-83

4-89 End mark not detected atthe bottom of the OMRsheet

Same as 4-80.

4-90 Reduction rate in the mainscan direction notacceptable while scanningan OMR sheet

Check if a reduced photocopy was used.Adjust the scanner correctly (refer to section5.11).

5-00 Data reconstruction notpossible

Replace the MFCE.

5-10 DCR timer expired Replace the MFCE.5-20 Storage impossible

because of a lack ofmemory

Temporary memory shortage.

Test the SAF memory.Replace the MFCE or optional IC card.

5-21 Memory overflow5-22 Mode table overflow after

the second page of ascanned document

Wait for the messages which are currently in thememory to be sent or delete some files frommemory.

5-23 Print data error whenprinting a substitute rx orconfidential rx message

Test the SAF memory.Ask the other end to resend the message.Replace the MFCE or IC memory card.

5-24 Memory overflow after thesecond page of a scanneddocument

Try using a lower resolution setting.Wait for the messages which are currently in thememory to be sent or delete some files frommemory.

5-25 SAF file access error Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, or thehard disk.

5-30 Mode table for the firstpage to be printed was noteffective

Replace the MFCE, the IC memory card, thefunction upgrade card, or the hard disk.

ERROR CODES

SM H5516-9

Rep

lace

men

t a

nd A

djus

tmen

t

6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signalwas received

Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.

6-02 G3 ECM - EOR wasreceived

6-03 G3 ECM - non-standardV.21 code received

The other terminal may be defective.

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC notdetected

Check the line connection.Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.

6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile dataframe not received within18 s of CFR, but there wasno line fail

Check the line connection.Check connections from the NCU to the MFDU.Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.Replace the MFCE, MFDU or NCU.Try adjusting the rx cable equalizerCross referenceRx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN), G3Switch 08 (PABX)

6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decodingerror

Defective MFDU.The other terminal may be defective.

6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PINreceived in reply toPPS.NULL

The other end pressed Stop duringcommunication.The other terminal may be defective.

6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received Check for a noisy line.Adjust the tx levels of the communicatingmachines.See code 6-05.

6-10 G3 ECM - error frames stillreceived at the other endafter all communicationattempts at 2400 bps

Check for line noise.Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or thededicated tx parameter for that address).Check the line connection.Defective remote terminal.

6-11 G3 ECM - printingimpossible because of amissing first line in theMMR coding

Check for problems in the printer mechanism.

6-21 V.21 flag detected duringhigh speed modemcommunication

The other terminal may be defective orincompatible.

6-39 V.21 signal not stoppedwithin 6 s

Replace the MFCE.

9-07 Paper non-feed or jam atthe cassette entrance

If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.

9-08 Paper jam inside thedevelopment area


9-09 Paper jam in the fusing exitarea


9-10 Toner end detected Replace the CTM.9-12 Cover open detected

during printingClose the cover, or check the cover sensors.

ERROR CODES

H551 SM6-10

9-17 Charge corona unit failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.

9-20 Laser diode failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.

9-22 Fusing lamp failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.

9-23 Hexagonal mirror motorfailure


9-24 Main motor failure If the problem persists, replace the MFDU.

9-40 CRC error while receiveinga frame

Check and adjust the host PC's RS232C portsettings.

9-41 Command 3rd try failed Check if a proper cable is used and connected9-42 DCN received

unexpectedlysecurely.Check if the application is working correctly.

9-43 Unexpected framereceived

If the problem persists, replace the MFCE.

9-44 Response time over Note: The optional RS232C interface may not be9-45 Frame transmission error available in some countries.9-50 Paper non-feed or jam

inside the upper paperfeed unit

Check if the recommended types of paper isused.Check if the paper guides are aligned to the papercorrectly.Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.

9-51 Jam at the paper exit of theupper paper feed unit.


9-52 Paper non-feed or jaminside the lower paper feedunit

Check if the recommended types of paper isused.Check if the paper guides are aligned to the papercorrectly.Check the paper feed mechanism in the unit.

9-53 Jam at the paper exit fromthe lower paper feed unit.


9-80 Bypass feed - paper non-feed or jam at the entrance

Check the registration roller and sensor.

9-81 Bypass feed - paper lengthexceeds the maximum limit(600 mm)

Check the paper feed mechanism and sensors.

9-82 Optional 100 sheetcassette - paper non-feedor jam at the cassetteentrance


9-83 Optional 100 sheetcassette - paper lengthexceeds the maximum limit(600 mm)


Rev. 11/98

Control Channel (Post Message – SH) Rev. 11/98

6.4 ROM HISTORY

H551 SM6-16

6.4 ROM HISTORY

6.4.1 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

H551 FIRMWARE MODIFICATION HISTORY

Description Of ModificationFirmware

LevelProduction

DateCorrects the following :

1. When only a name was registered in a Group it couldnot be erased.

2. Memory Tx through PCFAX could not be done whenprogrammed in quick dial for use by PC in the H551

H5517210 B N/A

Correction of the following minor software problems:

1. RDSProgrammed telephone dials at Speed Dial no. 35 to99 could not be cleared by RDS.

2. NCU parameters could not be initialized by Level 2RAM clear mode.

3. G4 modeType of network (ex. CiG4) was not printed on theservice monitor report if an error occurred beforestarting the transmission of the first image data.

4. G4 modePolling transmission was not successful when the IDwas not matched but OK was printed and thesymbol of the polling mode did not appear on theTCR.

5. PCFE When PC memory reception was set andover 64Kbyte data per page was received, thereceived data could not be sent from the FR4 to thePC. (with Win98 / Winphone)

6. PCFEIn the PC memory transmission mode, transmissionwas not done if the number of dial digit is over 35.(with WinFAXPRO8.0)

7. G4 modeWhen the transfer request with department codewas done, name of the department was not sentwith the transmitted documents.

8. G4 modeSystem was reset when the communication wascontinued over one hour.

9. G4 mode

Own CIL clock information was printed on thereceived pages when the year 2000 was set at thetransmission terminal.

H5517210 C N/A

⇒

Rev. 07/2000

SM H5516-17


Description Of ModificationFirmware

LevelProduction

Date

Corrects the following :

1. Quality improvement of the dial tone detection

2. For the new FCC Standard, Redial # 4 ! 1.

H5517210 D Dec. 1999Production

PARTS CATALOG

PARTS CATALOG

7-1

Par

ts C

atal

og

SM H551

7. PARTS CATALOG

The following parts for the H551 are different from the H515.

Index H515 H551 Description Remarks

3- H5158600 H5518600 Operation Manual - FR4 Ricoh (Brand Kit)

H5518620 Operation Manual - FR4 Gestetner (Brand Kit)

H5518630 Operation Manual FR4 Savin (Brand Kit)

5-4 H5156013 H5516011 PCB - MFDU (FR4) - USA

5-5 H5155320 ---- Motor Harness

5-6 H5155311 ---- Motor Harness - TX

5-7 H5155310 ---- Motor Harness - RX

5-8 H5165308 ---- Driver Harness

5-9 H5165318 H5515356 Harness - Power Pack FDU CN21

5-10 H5165302 H5515339 Harness - LDDR FDU CN22

5-11 H5165322 ---- Relay Harness - Fusing Unit

5-13 H5153140 H5513140 Spacer - 8 mm

5-14 H5156282 H5516120 PCB MFCE (FR4) - USA

5-15/ 13/1

H5152042 H5522042 Laser Plotter Unit

5-19 H5215309 H5215339 Harness - NCU

5-21 H5185400 H5515400 PCB - PSU - 115V

5-23 54886020 54886030 PCB - NCU - USA

5-24 H5153146 H5513120 PSU Cover

5-26/ 13-4

H5155323 H5525310 Harness - Polygon Mirror Motor FDU CN14

5-27 H5155314 H5515338 OPU Harness FDU CN20

5-30 H5155085 H5515353 Harness - 100 Sheet Cassette FDU CN71

5-31 H5165314 H5515316 Safety Switch Harness

7-12 H5154202 H5514204 Operation Panel Ass’y

7-27 H5154312 H5514312 Operation Panel Sheet - Ricoh (Brand Kit)

H5514301 Operation Panel Sheet - Savin (Brand Kit)

H5514303 Operation Panel Sheet - Nashua (Brand Kit)

H5514304 Operation Panel Sheet - Gestetner (Brand Kit)

7-32 H5154252 ---- Decal Case

13-5 H5155040 H5525040 Polygon Mirror Motor

PARTS CATALOG

7-2H551 SM

13-7 H5152715 H5522715 Laser Diode Unit

21- H5162100 ---- Fusing Unit Ass’y

21-2 H5155015 H5525015 Thermistor - Fusing

23-8 H5153142 H5513142 PIF Bracket 1

23-10 H5153143 H5513143 PIF Bracket 2

23-12 H5153141 H5513141 NCU Bracket

27-2 H5163157 ---- Bushing - 66

27-3 H5153122 H5513122 PSU Bracket

27-10 H5153374 H5153182 Holder - FDU

27-37 H5165301 ---- Harness - Paper Size

27-38 H5155318 H5515341 PFU Harness FDU CN75

29-33 H5163583 H5513584 Decal - Bypass Feed

H5513189 Ground Plate - FCE

H5513190 FCE - Holder

H5514010 Quick Reference Guide Holder

H5515310 Harness - TX/RX Motor FDU CN17

H5515311 Relay Harness - Fusing/Paper Size FDU CN6

H5515312 Harness - Main Motor FDU CN15

H5515314 Harness - Driver FDU CN16

H5515315 Harness - Mech. Counter FDU CN76

H5518690 Quick Reference Guide

H132 INTERNET FAX OPTION FORH551

SERVICE MANUAL

OVERALL INFORMATION

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

SPECIFICATIONS

SM H5511-1


1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

TypeLAN board option for FR4

ConnectivityLocal area networkEthernet 10base-T

Connection10base-T direct connection

ResolutionsMain scan: 200 dpiSub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi

NOTE: To use 400 dpi, a LAN bitswitch setting must be changed.

Transmission Time9 s (through a LAN)Condition: ITU-T #1 test document

(Slerexe letter)MTF correction: OFFTTI: NoneResolution: 200 x 100 dpiCommunication speed: 10 MbpsCorrespondent device: E-mail serverLine conditions: No terminal access

Document SizeThe message is sent in Max.A4/Letter width by default. To use inB4, A3, Double Letter width, a LANbit switch setting must be changed.

E-mail File FormatSingle/multipartMIME conversionImage: DCX format

TIFF-F (MH) format

Protocol(supported by TCP/IP protocol)

Transmission:IETF RFC821 SMTP procedureReception:IETF RFC1725 POP3 procedure

Data rate10 Mbps (10base-T)

Power SupplyUSA: 115 Vac, 60 HzEurope/Asia: 187 ~ 276 Vac,

50/60 Hz

Power Consumption(with LAN board installed)

Standby: 50 WTransmit: 60 WReceive: 300 WCopy : 330 W

RemarkThe machine must be set up as an ae-mail client before installation. Anyclient PCs which are connected tothe machine through a LAN mustalso be e-mail clients, or somefeatures will not work(e.g., Auto routing).

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

SPECIFICATIONS

SM H5511-1


1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

TypeLAN board option for H551









TIFF-F (MH) format





50/60 Hz


Standby: 50 WTransmit: 60 WReceive: 300 WCopy: 330 W

RemarkThe machine must be set up as ane-mail client before installation. Anyclient PCs which are connected tothe machine through a LAN mustalso be e-mail clients, or somefeatures will not work (e.g., Auto-routing).

Rev. 01/00

⇒

FEATURES

H551 SM1-2

1.2 FEATURES

KEY: O = Used, X = Not Used,

Communication Features - E-mail Transmission


Batch transmission

Broadcasting

Closed network

Confidential transmission

Direct fax number entry

Double sided documenttransmission

ECM

Economy transmission

File transfer

Forwarding

Forwarding mark

Immediate transmission

Memory transmission

Multi-step transfer

OMR

Page retransmission times

Partial image transmission

Polling transmission

Send later

SUB/SID

Transfer request

Transmission deadline (TRD)

Communication Features- E-mail Reception

Authorized Reception

Closed network

Confidential reception

Center mark

Checkered mark

Group transfer station

Into one

Multi-copy reception

Manual reception

Memory lock

Night timer

Page separate reception

Polling reception

Communication Features- E-mail Reception

Reception time printing

Reverse order printing

Substitute reception

TSI printing

Reports - for e-mailError mail notification

Error report (mail)

Journal

Personal code list

Transfer result report

OthersLAN fax

200 dpi Printing

200 dpi Scanning

Auto routing

Internet fax

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-3 H551

1.3 NETWORKING

1.3.1 OVERVIEW

This model, the F64G, is also known as the NIC fax.

The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the F64G cansupport.

The NIC Fax at [email protected] receives a G3 fax message from a G3 faxmachine inside Japan (dotted line in the diagram). The NIC Fax then relays it toanother NIC Fax in the USA. This NIC Fax then passes the message on to a PC([email protected]).

The NIC Fax in Japan can also send the message to the PC in the USA directly,via the internet, by dialing its e-mail address (unbroken line in the diagram). Themessage will be stored in the network server at the remote end, until the PC picksit up.

The rest of this section outlines each of the network features individually.

G3 FaxMachine

011-1-212-555-3456#8888

P S T N

NIC Fax

03-3123-4567

Japan

n i c f a x @ x y z . c o . j pLaser Pr in ter

Server

Router

n i c f a x @ a b c d . c o m

n a m e @ a b c d . c o m

Internet

NIC Fax

n i c f a x @ a b c d . c o mP e r s o n a l C o d e 8 8 8 8 = n a m e @ a b c d . c o m

Ethernet

Paper

Paper

Paper

PC display

RouterServer

Laser Pr in ter

Ethernet


USA

n i c f a x @ a b c d .c o m

H132V551.WMF

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-3 H551

1.3 NETWORKING

1.3.1 OVERVIEW

This model, the H132, is also known as the NIC fax.

The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the H132 cansupport.




G3 FaxMachine

011-1-212-555-3456#8888

P S T N

NIC Fax

03-3123-4567

Japan

n i c f a x @ x y z . c o . j pLaser Printer

Server

Router



Internet

NIC Fax


Ethernet

Paper

Paper

Paper

PC display

RouterServer

Laser Printer

Ethernet


USA


H132V551.WMF

Rev. 01/00

⇒

NETWORKING 1 June, 1998

H551 1-4 SM

1.3.2 LAN FAX

FeatureThe LAN fax feature allows a client PC to send a G3 fax message to the NIC faxover the LAN. The NIC fax will then send the fax message to the destination, whichcould be either a PSTN G3 fax or an e-mail address.

Operation1. PC fax software and the IC COM Redirector utility must be installed in the client

PC in advance. IC COM Redirector must be running.

2. Quick dials, speed dials and group dials stored in the NIC fax can be used.

Advantages1. A fax message can be sent by a client PC. The NIC Fax can be shared by all

PCs on the LAN as a G3 fax modem and PSTN line.

2. No paper is required at the transmitting side.

G3 FaxMachine

G3 Fax Message

PSTN

NIC Fax


PC to Fax Machine

NIC FaxServer

Laser Printer

PC FaxApplication

G3

Fax

Mes

sage

H132V552.WMF

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-5 H551

1.3.3 200-DPI PRINTER

FeatureThis provides a convenient but low-resolution LAN printer. The feature is alsoknown as “Convenient Printing”.

Operation

1. PC fax software and the IC COM Redirector utility must be installed in the clientPC in advance. IC COM Redirector must be running.

2. To print a file, the user dials “0000” with the PC fax application.

Advantages1. Provides a convenient 200-dpi LAN printer.

2. Computer files can be printed out through a PC-based fax application.

PC to Paper

NIC Fax

ServerLaser Pr inter

PC FaxApplication

H132V553.WMF


H551 1-6 SM

1.3.4 200-DPI SCANNER

Features1. This provides a convenient but low-resolution network scanner. The feature is

also known as “Convenient Scanning”.

2. The NIC fax sends the scanned image to the client PC as an image fileattached to an e-mail message.

OperationThe user scans the original at the NIC Fax (not at the PC), and sends it to the e-mail address of the required PC.

Advantages1. Provides a convenient 200-dpi network image scanner.

2. Images are stored as e-mail in the mail server for the client PC to pick up.

Paper to PC

NIC Fax

ServerLaser Printer



H132V554.WMF

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-7 H551

1.3.5 AUTOROUTING

FeatureThe NIC fax routes incoming fax messages to client PCs on the same network,based on the code included in the SUB signal.

Operation1. The sender specifies a sub ID when sending a fax message. This ID is

transmitted using the SUB protocol signal.

2. Personal codes are stored in the receiving NIC fax in advance, and associatedwith e-mail addresses on the same LAN. If the code in the received SUB signalis the same as one of the stored personal codes, the NIC fax routes theincoming message to the address that is stored with that personal code.

Example: If a received message has a SUB code of 5555, it is forwarded to [email protected]

3. The client PC receives the fax as an e-mail message with an image fileattached.

Advantages1. Fax messages are delivered directly to the mail server for the client PC to pick

up.

2. No paper is used.

G3 FaxMach ine

PSTN

NIC FaxSUB Code:

5555

Fax Machineto PC

NIC Fax Server

Laser Printer

n a m e 2@ a b c d . c o m

P e r s o n a l C o d e 8 8 8 8 = n a m e 1 @ a b c d . c o m

P e r s o n a l C o d e 5 5 5 5 = n a m e 2 @ a b c d . c o m

n a m e 1@ a b c d . c o mSUB Code:

8888

G3

Fax

Mes

sage

G3 Fax Message

H132V555.WMF


H551 1-8 SM

1.3.6 FORWARDING

FeatureThe NIC fax routes incoming fax messages to client PCs on the same network,based on the contents of the RTI or TSI. In this way, a message from a certainsender can always be forwarded to a certain location.

Operation1. The sender must have a TSI or RTI programmed.

2. RTIs and TSIs of expected senders are stored in the receiving NIC fax inadvance, and associated with e-mail addresses on the same LAN. If thereceived RTI or TSI is the same as one of those stored, the NIC fax routes theincoming message to the associated address.

Example: If a received message has an RTI of FRED, it is forwarded to [email protected]

3. The client PC receives the fax as an e-mail message with an image fileattached.

Advantages1. No SUB code is required for forwarding (some machines cannot send SUB

codes).

2. Fax messages are delivered directly to the mail server for the client PC to pickup.


G3 FaxMachine

PSTN

RTI : FREDFax Machine

to PC

NIC Fax Server

Laser Printer

n a m e 2 @ a b c d . c o m

Forward ing by TS I : Fo r 1234 , send to name1@abcd .comForward ing by RT I : Fo r FRED, send t o name2@abcd .com

n a m e 1 @ a b c d . c o m

TSI: 1234

G3 FaxMachine

H132V556.WMF

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-9 H551

1.3.7 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PAPER)

FeatureSending and receiving fax messages through the Internet.

Operation1. An e-mail address is specified when sending a fax message.

2. The fax message goes through the Internet to the receiver, and is printed.

NOTE: The time required to send a fax over the Internet depends on the trafficconditions at the time of transmission. Also, the sending machine has noway to know whether the message arrived intact at the other end.

AdvantagesCost-saving

NIC Fax

Japan

Laser PrinterServer

Router

In ternet

Router

NIC FaxServer

Laser Printer

Ethernet

Ethernet

USA

To: [email protected]

[email protected]


H551 1-10 SM

1.3.8 INTERNET FAX (PAPER TO PC)

FeatureSending fax messages directly to a client PC through the Internet.

Operation1. An e-mail address is specified when sending a fax message.

2. An e-mail message is sent to the client PC with the fax message attached.

Advantages1. Cost-saving.


NIC Fax

Japan

Laser PrinterServer

Router

Internet

Router

NIC Fax

ServerLaser Printer

Ethernet

Ethernet

USA

T o : n a m e @ a b c d . c o m


f a x 1 @ a b c d . c o m

H132V558.WMF

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-11 H551

1.3.9 TRANSFER REQUEST THROUGH THE INTERNET

FeatureA fax message can be transferred over the Internet and then forwarded to a G3facsimile, using the NIC fax as a transfer station.

Operation1. The sender specifies the end receivers using the quick dials, speed dials, and

group dials that are stored in the transfer station.

2. The fax message is sent to the transfer station over the Internet and the LAN atthe remote location. Then it is transferred to the destination over the localPSTN.

AdvantagesCost savings for long-distance communications.

G3 Fax Mach ine

NIC Fax

Japan

Laser PrinterServer

Router

Internet

RouterNIC Fax(Transfer Stat ion) Server

Laser Printer

E thernet

Ethernet

USA

To: Qu ick D ia l 01 s to red inf a x 1 @ a b c d . c o m f a x 1 @ a b c d . c o m

206-936-1234

PSTN

Q u i c k d i a l # 0 1 = 2 0 6 - 9 3 6 - 1 2 3 4

H132V559.WMF

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132

INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

SM 2-1 H551


2.1 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

2.1.1 MAIL TRANSMISSION

ProcedureScanned documents are sent as electronic mail (e-mail).

All messages are sent using memory transmission. When a backup mail address(Bcc address) has been stored with the NIC Fax user settings, the machine alsosends all the messages to the Bcc address.

All e-mail transmissions are controlled using Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)procedures. There must be an SMTP server on the same LAN as the sendingmachine, or the machine will not be able to send e-mail (it is not necessary to setup an SMTP account).

Data FormatsThe scanned data is converted into a DCX or TIFF-F formatted file (only MHcompression can be used). The file format depends on a user setting.

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field ContentFrom Mail address of the senderReply-To Mail address to be repliedTo Mail address of the destinationBcc Backup mail addressX-Mailer ICFAX Version 1.0 (ICFAX is a Ricoh mail utility - IC

means Image Communication)Subject Fax message no. xxxx (file number) from the TSI (see the

notes below this table)Content-Type Multipart/mixed

Attached files: image/tiff, application/octet-streamContent-Transfer-Encoding Base 64

NIC Fax SMTPServer

E-mail

L A NRouter

Router

InternetNIC FaxPOP

ServerE-mail

L A N

Sending Terminal

H132D551.WMF


H551 2-2 SM

Field ContentMessage Body MIME-converted DCX or TIFF-F (MIME standards specify

how files are attached to e-mail messages)

NOTE: 1) The message no. will exist in the subject field if no TSI or RTI isregistered.

2) The label of the personal code and RTI will appear at the end of thesubject field, if the personal code is entered.

3) The file number can be checked on the TCR/Journal.

ErrorsAn error report will be generated if an error occurs during the communicationbetween the machine and the SMTP server. However, it is possible that the senderwill not receive notice of errors that occurred between the SMTP server and thereceiving terminal.

The interval between attempts to resend mail to the same destination when anSMTP error occurs is the same as for G3 fax transmission.NOTE: The interval programmed with LAN switch 0A determines the minimum

required interval between mail transmissions when there are no errors.For what happens when an error occurs when the machine is receiving, refer to theMail Reception section.

ResultsThe transmission result is listed on the TCR/Journal. The file list for e-mailtransmissions is created in the same way as for G3 memory transmissions. TheTTI for the mail message includes the word “Mail” at the head of the information inthe TTI column.

Selectable Options

1. With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.Inch-mm conversion before tx depends on the machine setting. Detailresolution will be used if Fine resolution, unless Fine resolution is enabled withLAN bit switch 07.

2. The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memorycapacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.

3. The default compression is TIFF-F format.

4. The following options are available when sending a fax by e-mail:• Personal code• Send later• TTI• Economy transmission• Partial image area scanning• Transmission deadline• Destination check• Store double sided

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-3 H551

When optional features which are not available for e-mailing are selected, themachine will work as follows.

Example: Using personal code with confidential ID in a broadcasting operation

If the personal code is selected first, e-mail addresses cannot be input, becausethe e-mail key is disabled.

However, if the e-mail addresses are input first, then the personal code, then theG3 addresses, the mail will be sent to all addresses. However, personal code withconfidential ID will only be used for the G3 transmissions in the broadcast.

Cross reference:LAN bit switch 01 - Various e-mail transmission settingsLAN bit switch 07 - Acceptable paper widths for sendingLAN bit switch 0A - Minimum interval between e-mail transmissions


H551 2-4 SM

2.1.2 MAIL RECEPTION

ProcedureThere must be a POP (Post Office Protocol) server on the same LAN as the NICfax, or it cannot receive e-mail, and an account must be set up for the fax machine.

The machine calls the POP server at a regular interval to check if any e-mail hascome in (three minutes is the default interval; the interval can be adjusted from 1minute to 60 minutes in one-minute steps).

If the POP server is holding several e-mails for the NIC fax, the machine picks upthe e-mails one at a time.

E-mail reception is done in accordance with Post Office Protocol version 3.0(POP3) procedures.

Errors during reception

Errors during POP3 proceduresWhen an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and the messagestays in the server. After a certain interval, the machine calls the server and startsto receive, starting with the interrupted message. If there is an incompletelyreceived message in the machine’s memory, it will be erased.

Abnormal filesWhen an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands theserver to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report out andsends information about the error by e-mail to the sender’s address (in the “From”or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incompletely received message inthe machine’s memory, it will be erased.

The machine prints an error message when it fails to send a message after acertain number of attempts.

NIC FaxSMTPServer

E-mail

LANRouter

Router

InternetNIC Fax

POPServer

E-mail

LAN

ReceivingTerminal

H132D562.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-5 H551

Abnormal files are as follows:

1. The e-mail has an unsupported MIME header.Supported types of MIME header

Header Supported TypesContent-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff,

application/octet-streamCharset US-ASCII, ISO-2022-JP, Others are determined to be

US-ASCII.Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit

2. MIME decoding error

3. The machine cannot recognize the file format as DCX or TIFF-F.

4. The resolution, document size, or compressed type cannot be accepted.

Remaining SAF capacity errorThe machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAFcapacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on LAN Switch 08). The e-mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, aftersubstitute reception files have been printed).

Also, if the capacity of the SAF memory goes down to zero during reception, themachine acts in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to‘Abnormal files’).

Paper Size

1. The maximum paper width for a received message depends on the paper sizein the machine (max. B4). An error will occur if the received message is largerthan B4 width. The procedure is the same as when receiving an abnormal file.

2. When the machine receives a B4 document but there is only A4 and B5 paperin the machine, the machine reduces the data automatically and prints it on A4paper.

Printing

1. The machine detects whether it has received a DCX or a TIFF-F format image,then prints it.

2. Text in either US-ASCII or ISO-2022-JP format can be printed. When a line oftext is longer than the paper width, the excess data will be deleted.

Multi-partWhen a multi-part e-mail message contains several text parts and binary files, themessage will be divided with boundaries. Then, each part will be printedseparately. If the machine cannot determine where the boundary is, it will generatean error report and print, then send error information e-mail back to the sender.

Cross reference:LAN bit switch 02 - Various e-mail reception settings


H551 2-6 SM

2.1.3 MAIL BROADCASTING (E-MAIL AND G3 FAX ARECOMBINED)

The machine can send the same message to several destinations in one operation.Some destinations can be G3 fax and some can be e-mail. For the G3 faxtransmissions, each address has to be dialed separately. However, all the e-mailaddresses can be sent with the message to the SMTP server in one transmission.The SMTP server then sends the message to each destination.

The following example for broadcasting to three e-mail destinations and two G3 faxdestinations shows how G3 fax messages are each sent individually, but the e-maildestinations are all sent to the server at the same time.

• Order of inputting the addresses at the operation panelG3 fax (1) - mail (1) - G3 fax (2) - mail (2) - mail (3)

• Order of transmissionG3 fax (1) - mail (1), (2), (3) - G3 fax (2)

The SMTP server cannot broadcast the message if a feature included individualinformation for each terminal in the transmitted data (such as label insertion). If thistype of feature was used, the machine sends the e-mails to the server one by one.

With the default settings, up to 200 destinations (including both e-mail and G3 fax)can be dialed for one broadcast. The maximum number of e-mail destinations in abroadcast depends on the mail server’s limits.

Cross Reference:Bit 2 and Bits 5 to 7 of LAN bit switch 01 - Various e-mail transmission settings

Broadcasting will not work if batch transmission is disabled with user switch 06.

E-ma i lt ransmiss ion

L A N

G3 Transmiss ions( P S T N )

NIC Fax

E-mai l T ransmiss ions(LAN/Internet )

SMTPServer

H132D552.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-7 H551

2.1.4 TRANSFER REQUEST

Operation at the Transfer Requester

Request by Mail

The requesting terminal dials the transfer station, and requests it to transfer themessage to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in thetransfer station. A quick dial number is indicated by a “#” and two digits, a speeddial is indicated by “#’, “*”, and two or three digits, and a group dial is indicated by“#” and “**” and two digits.

The machine can request transfer to a maximum of 30 destinations for eachtransfer station. The destinations can be a mixture of e-mail and G3 fax addresses.

The transfer request goes to the SMTP server as an e-mail message. Thequick/speed/group dials (and the ID code) are included in the mail body field of thee-mail as text. The message arrives at the POP server of the transfer station.

The transfer station sends the message to the end receivers (see Operation at theTransfer Station for details).

The transfer station sends back a transfer result report. The original may beattached to the transfer result report, depending on the G3 settings of the faxmachine. For transmissions to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report onlyindicates whether the message was successfully transmitted from the transferstation to its SMTP server.

When making a transfer request, the machine can send the same message tomore than one transfer station (each transfer station may transfer the message to amaximum of 30 destinations). All addresses dialed by the requesting terminal mustbe transfer stations.

SMTPServer

E-mail

LANR

POPServer

E-mail

E-mail

LAN

Individual G3Transmissions

(PSTN)TransferStat ion

NIC Fax

TransferRequester

G3 End Receivers

NIC Fax

SMTPServer

Individual E-mailTransmissions

E-mai l EndReceivers

R

(several destinations,one transmission)

R: Router

E-mail (one transmissionfor each destination)

H132D553.WMF


H551 2-8 SM

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field ContentFrom E-mail address of the requesting terminalTo Destination address (transfer station’s address)Bcc Backup mail addressX-Mailer ICFAX version 1.0Subject Fax Message No. xxxx (file number) from theTSIContent-Type Multipart/mixed

Text/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff orapplication/octet-stream (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)

RELAY: #01#*01#**01….Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F or DCX

Request by G3 Fax

The procedures are the same as for a normal G3 fax machine.

The requesting terminal dials the transfer station, and requests it to transfer themessage to end receivers stored as quick dials, speed dials, and group dials in thetransfer station.

Using NSF, the machine sends an ID code and the machine’s own telephonenumber. Up to 30 end receivers can be requested.

End receiver destinations can also be selected using tonal signals, in the sameway as for other recent fax models. E-mail address can also be selected in thisway, as end receivers and as the destination for receiving the transfer result report.

The receiving NIC fax machine receives the transfer request on the PSTNconnection. It then handles the transfer request in the same way as explained in“Request by Mail’.

LAN

TransferStation

E-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

RequestingTerminal

G3 Transmission (Report)

G3 End Receivers

SMTPServer

E-mail EndReceivers

NIC FAX

NIC FAX

H132D554.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-9 H551

Operation at the Transfer Station

Request by Mail

The NIC fax polls the POP server at regular intervals, as mentioned in a previoussection. If a transfer request has come in, it receives the e-mail from the server,then sends the message to the end receivers by G3 fax or e-mail, depending onthe type of end receiver address.

The NIC fax sends each G3 fax as an individual transmission. However, for the e-mail, the NIC fax sends the message to the SMTP server once, and the serverbroadcasts the message to the e-mail end receivers one at a time.

The transfer station sends back a transfer result report to the address in the Fromfield of the received e-mail. If an administrator's address is registered, the resultreport is also sent to that address. The original may be attached to the transferresult report, depending on the G3 settings of the fax machine.

For transmission to e-mail end receivers, the transfer result report only indicateswhether the message was successfully transmitted from the transfer station to itsSMTP server (the transfer station does not know what happens to the messageson the way to the end receivers).

If a communication error occurs between the machine and SMTP server duringresult report transmission, the machine prints the result report.

Cross reference:LAN bit switch 03 - Transfer station settings

SMTPServer

E-mai l

L A NR

POPServer

E-mai l

E-mai l

L A N

Indiv idual G3Transmiss ions

( P S T N )TransferStation

NIC Fax

TransferRequester

G3 End Rece ivers

NIC Fax

SMTPServer

Ind iv idual E-mai lT ransmiss ions

E-ma i l EndRece ivers

R

(several dest inat ions,one t ransmiss ion)

R: Router

E-mai l (one t ransmiss ionfor each dest inat ion)

H132D555.WMF


H551 2-10 SM

Request by Fax

When the machine receives a transfer request by G3 fax, it sends the message tothe various e-mail and G3 end receivers in the same way as for a request by mail.

The machine sends back the transfer result report to the requesting terminal’stelephone number, which it specified in the NSF signal. The machine prints theresult report if it cannot be sent.

The NIC Fax can accept end receiver destinations and transfer result reportdestinations that were sent from the requester as DTMF tones. This applies for e-mail or PSTN G3 addresses.

LAN

TransferStat ion

E-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission (Transfer Request)

Request ingTermina l

G3 Transmission (Report)

G3 End Receivers

SMTPServer

E-mail EndReceivers

G3 FAX

NIC FAX

H132D556.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-11 H551

Transfer Result Reports for Multi-step Transfer

If All Links are by MailAfter it has passed on the transfer request to the next transfer station, each transferstation sends a transfer result report back to the previous transfer station in thechain by e-mail.

The bottom part of the drawing shows details of the route from Transfer Station Aback to the requesting machine.

The procedure is as follows.

1. The requesting terminal requests transfer station A to transfer a message.

2. Transfer station A passes the request on to transfer station B.

3. Transfer station A sends a transfer result report back to the requestingmachine.

4. Transfer station B passes the request on to transfer station C.

5. Transfer station B sends a transfer result report back to transfer station A.

6. The broadcasting station (transfer station C) sends the message to its SMTPserver (e-mails) and to the G3 destinations.

7. Transfer station C sends a transfer result report to transfer station B (for e-mailend receivers, it only indicates whether the message was successfully passedon to transfer station C’s SMTP server).

NOTE: The requesting machine’s own telephone number is not included in atransfer request message by e-mail, so the transfer station at the end ofthe chain cannot send a report back directly to the requesting machine.The requesting terminal only receives a report of how the communicationwent between transfer stations A and B.

Request ing Terminal(NIC Fax)

Transfer Stat ion A(NIC Fax)

e-mai l Transfer Stat ion B(NIC Fax)

e-mai l Transfer Stat ion C(NIC Fax)

e-mai l

SMTPServer

e-mai l

L A N

POPServer

SMTPServer

Transfer resul t repor t

L A N

NIC FAX TransferStat ion A

NIC FAX

POPServer

SMTPServer


Request ing Terminal


H132D557.WMF


H551 2-12 SM

If Some Links are G3 FaxThis example shows that even if there is only one e-mail link in the chain, thetransfer result report from the final transfer station cannot get back to therequesting terminal.

(The bottom part of the drawing shows details of the route from Transfer Station Aback to the requesting machine.)

The procedure is exactly the same as for a request by e-mail, as described on theprevious page.

However, if there are two or more consecutive PSTN links in the chain, the transferstation at the end of the PSTN chain will be able to send a transfer result reportback to the machine at the start of the PSTN chain.

For example, if only the link between transfer stations B and C is e-mail, transferstation B will be able to send a report all the way back to the requesting terminal.

G3 Fax

LAN

NIC Fax TransferStation A

SMTPServer

PSTNRequesting Machine

Transfer resultreport (G3 tx)

Requesting Machine(G3 Fax)

Transfer Station A(NIC Fax)

PSTN Transfer Station B(NIC Fax)

e-mail Transfer Station C(NIC Fax)

PSTN

H132D558.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-13 H551

Example of a Transfer Request and Result Report

The steps of the transfer request are as follows:

1. G3 Fax 1 sends a transfer request to NIC Fax 1 by G3 fax ( in the diagram).

2. NIC Fax 1 sends e-mail to E-mail Server 1 ( in the diagram).

3. E-mail Server 1 sends e-mail to E-mail server 2 ( in the diagram).

4. E-mail server 2 sends e-mail to NIC Fax 2 ( in the diagram).

NOTE: Steps 2 to 4 assume that NIC Fax 1 sends the transfer request to NIC Fax2 by e-mail, and not G3 fax.

5. NIC Fax 2 sends a G3 fax message to G3 Fax 2 ( in the diagram).

The steps for sending the transfer result report and any mail reporting errors is asfollows:

1. NIC Fax 1 sends a transfer result report [A] to G3 Fax 1 after in the diagram.

2. When an error occurs at , e-mail server 1 sends e-mail reporting an error [B]to NIC Fax 1. Error mail is also sent to the administrator if the address hasbeen registered in NIC Fax 1.

3. When an error occurs at , e-mail server 2 sends e-mail reporting an error [C]to NIC Fax 1. Error mail [C] is also sent to the administrator if the address hasbeen registered in NIC Fax 1.

4. NIC Fax 2 send a transfer result report [D] to NIC Fax 1 through e-mail server 1and e-mail server 2 after transferring the message to the end receivers (after in the diagram).

L A N

Japan

PSTN

Transfer result report

G3 FAX 1

Internet

Europe

G3 Fax 2 PSTN

L A N

Router

Router

Error mai l

E-mail Server 1(SMTP/POP)

E-mail Server 2(SMTP/POP)

NIC Fax 2

Error mai lTransfer result e-mai l

NIC Fax 1

H132D559.WMF

[A][B]

[D] [C]


H551 2-14 SM

2.1.5 AUTOROUTING

When a G3 fax message is received with a SUB code (four digits), the machinecompares the SUB code with the personal codes stored in the machine with e-mailaddresses. If there is a match, the machine routes the message to that e-mailaddress by e-mail.

A communication failure report will be printed if a transmission error occursbetween the machine and the SMTP server.

Conditions

1. E-mail addresses for autorouting must be registered in the machine withpersonal codes. (One e-mail address can be stored with each personal code.)

2. Confidential reception does not work if a SUB code is received.

3. The RTI or CSI of the forwarding machine is indicated in the subject field of theforwarded e-mail. The format is “Fax Message N.xxxx from RTI (or CSI)”.

Cross Reference:LAN bit switch 04 - Autoroute

G3 Fax

LAN

NIC FaxSMTPServer Forwarding by

e-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission with SUB code

H132D560.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132


SM 2-15 H551

- Example -

1. The sending terminal sends a fax message [A] with a SUB code “1111” to theNIC Fax.

2. The NIC Fax finds the same code among the personal codes, makes an e-mailout of the message, then sends the e-mail to the address registered with thepersonal code.

G3 Fax

LAN

NIC FAXSMTPServer

e-mail

PSTN

G3 Transmission

SUB code: 1111

ClientPC

E-mai l address:a b c @r icoh.com

Personal Code 1111:a b c @r icoh.com

H132D561.WMF

[A]

LAN FAX TRANSMISSION

H551 2-16 SM

2.2 LAN FAX TRANSMISSION

With the LAN Fax feature, a client PC on the same network can send a G3 fax tothe NIC Fax using the LAN and ask it to send the fax by G3 or by e-mail. PC faxsoftware must be installed on the PC.

The client PC can not receive G3 fax messages through the NIC Fax.

1. Required hardware and software - the Com Redirector utility can only work withthe following (Com Redirector is a Ricoh utility; it is explained later in thissection)1) Hardware

• IBM PC/AT compatible, running Windows 95

2) Acceptable fax software• Windows 95 standard fax application (MS-FAX)• Bitware 3.25.05 (Cheyenne)• Bitware 3.30f (Cheyenne)• Win Fax Pro 4.0&7.0 (Delrina)• Sopwith 1.1(4)• WinFax 4.04 (BVRP)

2. Operation1) Com Redirector must be installed in the client PC.2) Quick dials, speed dials, and group dials registered in the NIC Fax and

numbers stored in the PC fax application can be used as destinations.3) E-mail addresses in the quick dials, speed dials, and group dials can be

used.4) When the PC fax application dials “0000”, the NIC Fax prints the message

instead of transmitting it (this is the 200-dpi printing feature, also known as“Convenient Printing”).

5) Communication failure reports and TCRs/Journals printed by the machinecannot be delivered to a PC.

6) The range of client PCs that can use the NIC Fax can be controlled byprogramming the Access Control and Access Mask parameters. These areuser and service adjustments. If “0.0.0.0” is stored as the “Access Control”setting, any PC can use the NIC Fax for a LAN Fax operation.

7) Two PCs can connect to the machine at the same time. The third PC willreceive a busy signal from the machine.

ClientPC NIC Fax

Request tosend fax

LANe-mail

G3 Transmission

SMTPServer

PSTN

PC fax applicationinstalled

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132

LAN FAX TRANSMISSION

SM 2-17 H551

3. Com RedirectorThe fax message made by the PC fax application is sent to a COM port in thePC and routed to the NIC Fax over the LAN by the Com Redirector utility. Theuser must do the following to install Com Redirector in a Windows 95 system.

1) Install IC Fax Port using the Windows 95 hardware wizard.2) Connect IC Fax Port to a COM port using the modem properties settings. An

appropriate COM port is selected automatically.

Cross Reference:LAN bit switch 06 - LAN Fax settingsLAN bit switch 09 - LAN Fax settings

IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES

H551 2-18 SM

2.3 IC FAX APPLICATION UTILITIES

The IC Fax Application is bundled with the machine. It includes the followingutilities: IC Fax Monitor, Com Redirector and IC Viewer.

Com Redirector was discussed in the LAN Fax Transmission section. The othersare explained below.

2.3.1 IC FAX MONITOR

With this utility, the status of the machine can be monitored at a client PC, andsome user data can be programmed.

Status items that can be monitored

• Whether the machine is connected to a LAN or not• Whether one of the machine’s covers is open• Whether paper has run out• Whether toner has run out• Confirmation of a Tx and rx.• TCR/Journal• Files in a memory• LAN parameters

User data that can be programmed

• Quick dials• Speed dials• Group dials• Personal codes• Addresses for memory forwarding

The utility has a user mode and an administrator mode. A password is needed toenter administrator mode. User mode can be used to view the data, but to programthe data and back it up to a PC, administrator mode must be used.

2.3.2 IC VIEWER

The fax message file attached to an e-mail message is in either TIFF-F or DCXformat. It can be opened, edited, and saved with the viewer software.

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132

IMAGE DATA PATH

SM 2-19 H551

2.4 IMAGE DATA PATH

2.4.1 TIFF-F FORMAT

Reception

The software module [A] receives TIFF-F data from the memory [B] on the NICboard. After decompression, the directory information for the data (resolution, filesize) and image data are transfered to the DCR buffer [C] in blocks. The data isthen MH compressed.

The MH compressed image data in the DCR buffer is decompressed to bitmapdata in the QPCR30 [D] and transfered to the line buffer [E]. The data is MMRcompressed in the QPCR30 then stored in the SAF.

Memory

TIFF-FCompression

andDecompression

Module

DCRBuffer

LineBuffer SAF

NIC FCE

Sof tware M H M M R

QPCR30 QPCR30

BITMAP

H132D564.WMF

[B] [A] [C] [E]

[D]

IMAGE DATA PATH

H551 2-20 SM

Transmission

Data from the SAF data is decompressed into bitmap data in the QPCR30 andstored in the line buffer. Then, it is MH compressed in the QPCR30 and transferedto the DCR buffer.

The software module makes a TIFF-F formatted file with directory information fromthe image data, then transfers this file to the memory on the NIC board.NOTE: The TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) was developed by Aldus and

Microsoft as an extensible common file format for the exchange of imagefiles.

In order to increase the portability of TIFF files, various classes of TIFFfiles have been defined in order to clarify the requirements of readers andwriters to ensure compatibility.

Class F TIFF files are used for the exchange of fax images and are asubset of Class B (bi-level or black & white) TIFF images.

MH, MR, and MMR compressions can be used to make a TIFF-F file. Thismachine uses MH compression.

Memory

TIFF-FCompression

andDecompression

Module

DCRBuffer

LineBuffer SAF

NIC FCE

Sof tware M H M M R

QPCR30 QPCR30

BITMAP

H132D565.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132

IMAGE DATA PATH

SM 2-21 H551

2.4.2 DCX FORMAT

Reception

The software module [A] receives DCX data from the memory [B] on the NICboard. The DCX file is divided into PCX images (one PCX image for each page).The data is decompressed into bitmap data, then transferred to the line buffer [C].

The data is MMR compressed in the QPCR30, and stored in the SAF [D].

Transmission

Data from the SAF is decompressed into bitmap format in the QPCR30, and storedin the line buffer. The software module makes PCX and DCX data and headersand transfers these to the memory on the NIC board.NOTE: The DCX format was developed by Microsoft. It is an enhancement to the

PCX format which allows multi-page images.

Memory

DCXCompression

andDecompression

Module

LineBuffer SAF

NIC FCE

Sof tware M M R

QPCR30

B I T M A P

H132D566.WMF

Memory

DCXCompression

andDecompression

Module

LineBuffer SAF

NIC FCE

Sof tware M M R

QPCR30

B I T M A P

H132D567.WMF

[B] [A] [C] [D]

NIC BOARD

H551 2-22 SM

2.5 NIC BOARD

The NIC controls protocols for communication with a LAN and for handshaking withthe FCE. The NIC also converts data to a MIME format for e-mail.

• CPU (MC68340) : 32-bit CPU to control the NIC board.• DRAM : 16-Mbit DRAM for main memory.• EPROM : 4-Mbit EPROM for the software.• LAN Controller (Am79C960) : LAN interface

CPUMC68340PV16

16.777MHz

EPROM4 Mbits

ASICGate Array

MBCG24243DRAM

FCEI/F

Data Bus CD (0-15)

Address Bus AD (0-20)

DD (0-15)

MA (0-9)

Data Bus CD (0-15)

XA (2-15)

D (0-7)

XA (2-17)

XD (16-31)

SA (1-3)

PRDB (0-7)PROM

32 words x 8bits

LAN Contro l lerAm79C960

LAN I /FConnector

Address Bus SA (0-19)

LAN

FCE

H132D503.WMF

Det

aile

dD

escr

iptio

nsH

132

NIC BOARD

SM 2-23 H551

- Signal Table -

Pin Address Signal Remarks Pin Address Signal RemarksA1 +24 V +24 V B1 COM1 GNDA2 +24 V +24 V B2 COM1 GNDA3 /MRD Read B3 NC Not connectedA4 /MWRL Write B4 D0A5 D1 B5 D2A6 D3 B6 D4A7 D5 B7 D8

Data Bus

A8 D7

Data Bus

B8 COM1 GNDA9 A0 B9 A1

A10 A2 B10 A3A11 A4 B11 A5A12 A6 B12 A7A13 A8 B13 A9A14 A10 B14 A12A15 A13

Address Bus

B15 A14

Address Bus

A16 /G4CS Chip Select B16 N.C Not connectedA17 /INTG4 Interrupt B17 COM1 GNDA18 N.C Not connected B18 /DPWAT WaitA19 N.C Not connected B19 N.C Not connectedA20 N.C Not connected B20 N.C Not connectedA21 N.C Not connected B21 COM1 GNDA22 N.C Not connected B22 N.C Not connectedA23 /RESET RESET B23 A11 Address 11A24 N.C Not connected B24 COM1 GNDA25 N.C Not connected B25 N.C Not connected

INSTALLATION

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

Rev. 9/21/98

SM H5513-1

3. INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD

CAUTIONBefore installing the NIC FAX Board:1. Obtain a copy of the completed "Configuration Sheet for H132-41

Internet Fax" Form from the User's Network Administrator because theUser's LAN information must be programmed into the machine. Refer tothe sample form on page Appendix C-1.

2. Print out all messages stored in the memory.3. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter

list.4. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plug.

3.1.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws),and the left cover [B] (3 screws and thePFU connector cover. Then remove thesmall cover [C] from the rear cover asshown.

2. Remove the PIF brackets [D] and [E].Bend the flat cable [F] as shown andconnect it to the FCE (CN4) and theinterface board [G].NOTE: Make sure that the core [H] is

placed by the FCE as shown.Make sure that the marksface each other at each end.

H143I501.WMF

H551I009.WMF

[D]

[E][F]

[G][H]

[A] [B]

[C]

INSTALLING THE NIC FAX BOARD

H551 SM3-2

3. Attach the inner bracket [I] (3 screws) andthe grounding plate [J] (3 screws) asshown.

4. Connect the LAN board [K] to the interfaceboard [G]. Then, secure the LAN board tothe machine with 2 screws and thesupport holder [L] (1 tapping screw).

5. Re-install the PIF brackets [D] and [E]which were removed in step 2.Attach the ground plate [M] to the outerbracket [N]. Then attach the outer bracketto the machine (5 screws).NOTE: Align the ground plate with the left

edge of the outer bracket.

H551I505.WMF

H551I011.WMF

H551I005.WMF

[I]

[J]

[G]

[K]

[L]

[D]

[E]

[M

[N]

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2


SM 3-3 H551

6. Re-install the rear cover and the leftcover.NOTE: Make sure that the grounding

plate does not come off whenreplacing the rear cover.

7. Attach three decals as shown.

8. Download the new software to themachine.(Refer to the H551 service manual,page 4-13 for details.)Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit with part numbers inascending order from sockets 1 to 4.

NOTE: Print out the RAM dump for the following addresses beforedownloading the new software. Refer to the H551 service manual, page 4-5.480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print top margin48080B (H) to 480811 (H): Print left marginThis is because the machine will automatically perform the RAM reset level 1immediately after downloading the new software.

9. Reprogram the following items.• Clock• Print top margin and print left margin in the above RAM addresses

10. Attach the core to the LAN cable asshown and connect the LAN cable tothe machine.

11. Perform the initial settings with servicefunction 20. Refer to section 3.2 ‘InitialSettings’.

H551I510.WMF

Inst

alla

tio

nH

132


SM 3-3 H551




NOTE: Print out the RAM dump forthe following addresses before down-loading the new software. Refer tothe H551 service manual, page 4-5.480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print topmargin 48080B (H) to 480811 (H):Print left margin. This is because themachine will automatically performthe RAM reset level 1 immediately after downloading the new software.

8. Download the new software to the machine. (Refer to the H551 service manual,page 4-13 for details.) Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit withpart numbers in ascending order from sockets 1 to 4.

NOTE: RDS (Remote Diagnostics System) can be used to read the H551’sprogrammed dial data and write it back to the machine after the RAM reset level 1occurs. RDS must be enabled locally at the H551 by using the On/Off Switches(Function 62) or by changing System Switch 02 bit 7 to 1. RDS cannot be used toread system data (counters, bit switches, RTI, TTI, CSI, etc.) and write back to theH551.




H551I510.WMF

Rev. 01/00

⇒

⇒

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-4

3.2 INITIAL SETTINGS

3.2.1 PROGRAMMING ITEMS

NOTE: NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail serverbefore installation. The information listed below must be obtained from theUser's Network Administrator.

• IP address• Host name• Mail account and the password

Items to Program Programmable Functions RemarksIP address User Function 61/Service Function 20Subnet mask User Function 61/Service Function 20Default gateway User Function 61/Service Function 20Access control Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor VoluntaryAccess mask Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor VoluntarySMTP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorPOP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorHost name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor VoluntaryMail address Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorDomain name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor VoluntaryLogin name Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorLogin password Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorAdministrator mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor VoluntaryBackup mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Voluntary

NOTE: NOTE: When the machine is installed as a standalone fax because themail server is not ready, program the only the following items.

• IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1• POP Server: NULL (nothing to input)

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-4



NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server beforeinstallation. The information listed below must be obtained from the User'sNetwork Administrator.


Items to Program Programmable Functions RemarksIP address User Function 61/Service Function 20Subnet mask User Function 61/Service Function 20Default gateway User Function 61/Service Function 20Access control Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalAccess mask Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalSMTP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorPOP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorHost name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

* See Note 2Mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorDomain name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

* See Note 2Login name Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorLogin password Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorAdministrator mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalBackup mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

NOTE: 1. If the machine is installed as a standalone fax, or if the mail server is notready, program only the following items.• IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1• POP Server: NULL (nothing to input)

NOTE: 2. Depending on the Mail Server, these items may be mandatory. Ifmandatory, the host name and domain name must be spelled correctly.

Rev. 01/00

⇒

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

INITIAL SETTINGS

SM 3-5 H551

3.2.2 INITIAL PROGRAMMING

To enter the LAN initial program mode, press the following sequence of keys.

then immediately

Then press .

Press .

Storing the IP (Internet Protocol)address

1. After entering the LAN initial programmode, press .

2. Input the IP address.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Press Clear to delete one digit.Press to delete all digits.

3. Then .Press to exit the service mode. Storing the Subnet Mask

Storing the Subnet Mask

1. After entering the LAN initial programmode, scroll through the programitemswith or




_

H132I501.WMF

LAN TEST NO:

0.LAN SWITCH 1.LINK

2.LOOP BACK 3.LAN

_

H132I502.WMF

IP Address

TO SET PREVIOUSTO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I503.WMF

IP Address

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I504.WMF

IP Address

YES TO END

. 222 . 222 . 222222

H132I505.WMF

SUBNET MASK

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I506.WMF

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-6

2. Press .

3. Input the subnet mask.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the nextcolumn.Then press .

Storing the Default Gateway

1. After entering the LAN initial programmode, scroll through the programitems with or .

2. Press .

3. Input the default gateway.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Then press .

Storing the Access Control


2. Press .

SUBNET MASK

TO END

. . .

YES

H132i507.wmf

SUBNET MASK

TO END

. 255 . 255 . 0255

YES

H132I508.WMF

DEFAULT GATEWAY

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I509.WMF

DEFAULT GATEWAY

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I510.WMF

DEFAULT GATEWAY

TO END

. 222 . 222 . 222222

YES

H132I511.WMF

ACCESS CONTROL

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I512.WMF

ACCESS CONTROL

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I513.WMF

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

INITIAL SETTINGS

SM 3-7 H551

3. Input the access control.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Then press .

Storing the Access Mask


2. Press .

3. Input the access mask.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Then press .

Storing the SMTP(Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) Server


2. Press .

3. Input the SMTP server.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Then press .

ACCESS CONTROL

TO END

. 222 . 0 . 0222

YES

H132I514.WMF

ACCESS MASK

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I515.WMF

ACCESS MASK

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I516.WMF

ACCESS MASK

TO END

. 222 . 0 . 0222

YES

H132I517.WMF

SMTP SERVER

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I518.WMF

SMTP SERVER

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I519.WMF

SMTP SERVER

TO END

. 222 . 0 . 0222

YES

H132I520.WMF

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-8

Storing the POP (Post Office Protocol) Server


2. Press .

3. Input the POP server.If the address is less than 3 digits,press to scroll to the next column.Then press .

Storing the Host Name


2. Press .

3. Input the host name. Then press .

Storing the Mail Address


POP SERVER

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I521.WMF

POP SERVER

TO END

. . .

YES

H132I522.WMF

POP SERVER

TO END

. 222 . 0 . 0222

YES

H132I523.WMF

HOST NAME

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I524.WMF

HOST NAME

H132I525.WMF

HOST NAME

NIC FAX

H132I526.WMF

Mail ADDRESS

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I527.WMF

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

INITIAL SETTINGS

SM 3-9 H551

2. Press .

3. Input the mail address. Then press.

Storing the Domain Name


2. Press .

3. Input the domain name. Then press.

Storing the Login Name


2. Press .

Mail ADDRESS

H132I528.WMF

Mail ADDRESS

[email protected]

H132I529.WMF

DOMAIN NAME

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I530.WMF

DOMAIN NAME

H132I531.WMF

DOMAIN NAME

ricoh.co.jp

H132I532.WMF

LOGIN NAME

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I533.WMF

LOGIN NAME

H132I534.WMF

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-10

3. Input the login name. Then press .

Storing the Login Password


2. Press .

3. Input the login password. Then press.

Storing the Administrator Mail Address


2. Press .

3. Input the administrator mail address.Then press .

LOGIN NAME

NICFAX

H132I535.WMF

LOGIN PASSWORD

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I536.WMF

LOGIN PASSWORD

H132I537.WMF

LOGIN PASSWORD

password

H132I538.WMF

ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I539.WMF

ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS

H132I540.WMF

ADMIN.Mail ADDRESS

[email protected]

H132I541.WMF

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

INITIAL SETTINGS

SM 3-11 H551

Storing the Backup Mail Address


2. Press .

3. Input the backup mail address.Then press .

BACKUP Mail ADDRESS

TO SET PREVIOUS

TO CANCEL NEXT

YES

NO

H132I542.WMF

BACKUP Mail ADDRESS

H132I543.WMF

BACKUP Mail ADDRESS

[email protected]

H132I544.WMF

INITIAL CHECK

H551 SM3-12

3.3 INITIAL CHECK

Perform the following procedures for the initial check after installation.

3.3.1 CHECKING THE LEDS

Check that the orange (LED1) and the green (LED2) LEDs light when the LANcable is connected after the machine is turned on.If either (or both) LEDs do not light, the following conditions may be causing aproblem.

The orange LED does not light:

• The LAN board may be defective or it may not be connected to the interfaceboard.

The green LED does not light:

• The LAN cable may not be connected to a HUB.• The LAN cable may be defective.• The LAN board may be defective or if may not be connected to the interface

board.

3.3.2 LINK CHECK

The Link Check checks the link pulse communication between the machine (LANboard) and the HUB. If the link pulse is correctly received from the HUB, themachine displays “OK.”

1. Enter the LAN service mode. thenimmediately Then press .

2. Press .

3. Press .

If “NG” is displayed, follow the troubleshooting procedures in section 5.

LAN TEST NO:

0.LAN SWITCH 1.LINK CHECK

2.LOOP BACK 3.LAN PARA.

_

H132I502.WMF

LAN LINK CHECK

PRESS "START"

H132I545.WMF

LAN LINK CHECK

OK!!

H132I546.WMF

Inst

alla

tion

H13

2

INITIAL CHECK

SM 3-13 H551

3.3.3 LOOP BACK TEST

This mode checks the internal status of the LAN board.

1. Enter the LAN service mode. thenimmediately Then press .

2. Press .

3. Press .

If the result shows any codes other than “0000”, follow the troubleshootingprocedures in section 5.

If the results of all the tests are successful, test the communication with the serverby sending mail from the machine back to the machine’s own address.

LAN TEST NO:



_

H132I502.WMF

LAN LOOP BACK

PRESS "START"

H132I547.WMF

LAN LOOP BACK

RESULT CODE = 0000

H132I548.WMF

SERVICE TABLES

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2


SM 4-1 H551


4.1 SERVICE LEVEL FUNCTIONS

In this section, frequently used keys are referred to with the following symbols. - Start key - Stop key - Function key - Yes key - No key - Up arrow key - Down arrow key - Right arrow key - Left arrow key

4.1.1 LAN BIT SWITCH PROGRAMMING (FUNCTION 20)

1. thenimmediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the bit switches.Increment bit switch: Decrement bit switch: Example: Display bit switch 3: x 3

5. Adjust the bit switch.Example: To change the value of bit 7,

press

6. Either:• Adjust more bit switches - go to step 4.• Finish -


01BIT SW. 02PARA. LIST


_

H132M501.WMF

LAN TEST NO:



_

H132M502.WMF

LAN SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000000

SWITCH00: 00000000

H132M503.WMF

LAN SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000001

SWITCH03: 00000001

H132M504.WMF

LAN SWITCH

DEFAULT : 00000001

SWITCH03: 10000001

H132M505.WMF


H551 4-2 SM

4.1.2 LINK CHECK (FUNCTION 20)

This test checks the connection from terminal to HUB.

1. thenimmediately

2.

3.

4. To start a test: If test is successful, the display shows“OK!!”.If test is unsuccessful, the displayshows “NG!!”. :

Check the cable connection.Replace the cable.




_

H132M501.WMF

LAN TEST NO:



_

H132M502.WMF

LAN LINK CHECK

PRESS "START"

H132M506.WMF

LAN LINK CHECK

"NG"

H132M507.WMF

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2


SM 4-3 H551

4.1.3 LOOP BACK TEST (FUNCTION 20)

This test checks the connection of the FCE and the Network Interface Card (NIC).

1. thenimmediately

2.

3.

4. To start a test: If test is successful, the display shows“RESULT CODE= 0000”.If test is unsuccessful, the displayshows “RESULT CODE= XXXX”

(excluding “0000”).Reinstall the NIC.Replace the NIC or FCE.




_

H132M501.WMF

LAN TEST NO:



_

H132M502.WMF

LAN LOOP BACK

PRESS "START"

H132M508.WMF

LAN LOOP BACK

TEST RUNNING WAIT

H132M509.WMF


H551 4-4 SM

4.1.4 LAN PARAMETERS (FUNCTION 20)

1. thenimmediately

2.

3.

4. Scroll through the parameters using or .To change a value, enter the new valueat the keypad, then press

Ask the LAN administrator for the LAN parameters below.

Items to program CommentsIP ADDRESS IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxSUBNET MASK Subnet mask: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxDEFAULT GATEWAY Default gateway: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxACCESS CONTROL Restriction on communication for LAN FAX:

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxACCESS MASK Restriction on communication of LAN FAX:

xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxSMTP SERVER SMTP server IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxPOP SERVER POP server IP address: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxxHOST NAME Host name of this terminal.E-mail ADDRRESS E-mail address of this terminal: [email protected] NAME Domain nameLOGIN NAME Login name of this terminal.LOGIN PASSWORD Login passwordADMIN. E-mail ADDRESS Administrator’s e-mail address: [email protected] E-mail ADDRESS E-mail address to backup for sending: all e-mails

5. To finish : .




_

H132M501.WMF

LAN TEST NO:



_

H132M502.WMF

IP ADDRESS

YES TO SET PREVIOUS

NO TO CANCEL NEXT

H132M510.WMF

IP ADDRESS

YES TO END

. . ._

H132M511.WMF

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2

LAN SWITCHES

SM 4-5 H551

4.2 LAN SWITCHES

WARNINGDo not adjust a LAN switch that is described as "Not used," as this maycause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is notaccepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in other areas,such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to theSystem Parameter List print out.

LAN Switch 00 Not Used (Do not change the factory settings.)

LAN Switch 01 E-mail TransmissionNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Tx e-mail file format0: DCX1: TIFF-F

Use the DCX setting when sending to aninternet fax model that does not use TIFF-F(these will be earlier models, introduced beforestandardization). It is also possible to changethis setting with the IC Fax Monitor utility.

1

Compression modes forTIFF-F0: TIFF-F(MH) standard mode1: T.4-MH mode

This bit is effective only when TIFF-F is selectedas the tx e-mail file format (LAN switch 01, bit 0).RTC is added to the end of the image data whenbit 1 is set to “1”. A few non-standard modelsmay require this bit to be at 1 for successfulcommunication.

2

Inclusion on the Journal of thenumber of e-mail addresses ina broadcast0: Disabled1: Enabled

This bit is effective only when user parameterswitch 06, bit 0 is set to “1”.

3-4 Not used Do not change these settings.

5-7

Maximum number of broadcastdestinationsBit 7 6 5 Setting

0 0 0 2000 0 1 1500 1 0 1000 1 1 501 0 0 301 0 1 101 1 0 51 1 1 0 (Disabled)

The maximum number of broadcast destinationsalso depends on the SMTP server.

LAN SWITCHES

H551 4-6 SM

LAN Switch 02 E-mail ReceptionNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Text e-mail header0: Disabled1: Printed

The header appears as follows:************** E-mail INFORMATION *************From: xxxxxSubject: xxxxxxxxxxx****************************************************

1

Action when printing a faximage file attached to an errorreport e-mail0: Print the first page only1: Print all pages

Note that the text part of the error report e-mailis always printed out completely, regardless ofthe setting of this bit.


LAN Switch 03 Transfer RequestNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Printout of the message whenthe machine is acting as atransfer station0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: After broadcasting, the machine prints out thefile.

1

Transfer result reporttransmission0: Always transmitted1: Only transmitted if an error

occurs

1: The machine will only send back a Transferresult report if there were errors duringcommunication.

2

Action taken if there is a syntaxerror in one or more of thedestination addresses0: Transfers to correct

destinations1: All destinations aborted

1: When a programmed end receiver destinationis not a valid e-mail address or otherwiseincorrect, the machine will not transfer to anydestinations.

3

Polling ID required for transfer0: Polling ID required1: Polling ID not required

0: If polling ID does not match the otherterminal, the machine will not execute thetransfer.

1: The machine will not check the polling ID.4-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

LAN Switch 04 Autorouting and ForwardingNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Treatment of file with incorrectrouting ID when a routingrequest is received0: Received and printed1: Rejected

1: If the machine receives a routing ID that is notprogrammed, the machine rejects thereception.

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2

LAN SWITCHES

SM 4-7 H551

LAN Switch 04 Autorouting and ForwardingNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

1

Treatment of file when acommunication error occursduring routing0: Printed and then cleared1: Cleared

1: When a SMTP server error occurs duringrouting, the machine deletes the file afterprinting it. It then sends an error notificationby e-mail.

2

Treatment of file with incorrectrouting destination0: Printed1: Rejected

1: When the destination programmed with thepersonal code is blank, not a valid e-mailaddress, or otherwise incorrect, the routingmachine rejects the reception.

3

Which RTI/CSI is passed on tothe receiving PC in the e-mailsubject during autorouting andforwarding.0: Received in the e-mail from

the sender1: Stored in the receiving

machine

This determines which RTI/CSI appears in thesubject of the received e-mail at the destinationPC.


LAN Switch 05 Utility SoftwareNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Programmed data editing anddeleting by utility software0: Disabled1: Enabled

If this bit is changed, the machine must beturned off and on to make the new settingeffective.0: The PC utilities cannot be used to change the

programmed data1: Programmed data can be changed, but only

from the administrator mode.1-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

LAN Switch 06 LAN Fax TransmissionNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0CSI transmission (LAN Fax)0: Programmed CSI1: Dial ATD number

1: The machine uses the ‘own telephonenumber’ programmed in the PC faxapplication.

1

Treatment of files if there is aprinter error (PC printing)0: Store the file in the in SAF1: Send an error/busy signal to

the PC

0: If a printer error/busy condition occurs, themachine stores the data in SAF. Afterrecovery, the machine prints the data.

2

Treatment of files with errors(LAN Fax)0: Send good data (before

errors)1: Delete the file

An error during PC fax communication indicatesa SAF memory overflow or PC-fax disconnectionduring communication.

LAN SWITCHES

H551 4-8 SM

LAN Switch 06 LAN Fax TransmissionNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

3

Treatment of files with errors(PC printing)0: Print file without error pages1: Delete the file

An error during PC fax printing indicates a SAFmemory overflow or PC-fax disconnection duringprinting.

4Batch transmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: User parameter switch 06 bit 0 must also beenabled to perform this function


LAN Switch 07No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1

Attached file width (Tx)Bit 1 0 Setting

0 0 A3, B4, A4, LT, DLT0 1 B4, A4, LT1 0 A4, LT1 1 Not used

If the document is larger than this setting, themachine automatically reduces it.

2-3

Transmission attached fileresolutionBit 1 0 Setting

0 0 200 x 400, 200 x 200, 200 x 100

0 1 200 x 200, 200 x 2001 0 200 x 2001 1 Not used

If the user selects a higher resolution thanenabled with this setting, the machineautomatically converts the file to the highestresolution that is currently enabled.



0-7Amount of remaining memorybelow which e-mail receptionfrom the server is disabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit 2 kbytes(e.g., 0C (H) = 24 kbytes)


0-7Amount of remaining memorybelow which LAN faxcommunication is disabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit 2 kbytes(e.g., 0C (H) = 24 kbytes)

LAN Switch 0ANo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-3Minimum interval betweenaccessing the server forsending

01 to 0F (Hex), unit 2 sThis is the minimum interval betweentransmissions.

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2

LAN SWITCHES

SM 4-9 H551

LAN Switch 0ANo FUNCTION COMMENTS

4-7E-mail transmission: Maximumnumber of sending attempts tothe same destination

01 ~ 15 (Hex) timesInterval between accessing server attemptswhile re-sending.

LAN Switch 0BNo FUNCTION COMMENTS

0

Acceptance of 8-bit text data(e-mail) without generating anerror report0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: Japanese text is 8-bit. If this is received by anon-Japanese system, it will appear asgarbage, but no error will be generated.

1: When the machine receives 8-bit text data,rejects the data and replies with an error e-mail notification.

1

Command time out for LANFax transmission0: 30 second1: 60 second

If the AT command is not received from the PCapplication within this duration, the machinetimes out.

2

LAST command sending to thePOP server0: Enabled1: Disabled

The LAST command is sent to the POP serverby the machine during POP procedures. Thereply from the server informs the machine whiche-mail to start receiving from.If POP server responds abnormally, set the bit to1. The machine will always receive from the firste-mail on the list in the server. This will benecessary if the POP server still contains old e-mail that cannot be deleted.

3

Decipherment of e-maildescribed as Quoted-Printable0: One-byte codes1: Two-byte codes

This bit is only effective if the encoding type isQuoted-Printable.When this bit is set to 0, the e-mail is decipheredas one-byte codes (suitable for some Europeannon-ASCII characters). When this bit is set to 1,it is deciphered as Shift-JIS code (for Japanesetext). If Japanese text is received with this bit at0, it will be deciphered as one-byte code and willappear to be a string of non-ASCII Europeancharacters.


LAN Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)LAN Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)LAN Switch 0E - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)LAN Switch 0F - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

LAN SWITCHES

H551 4-10 SM

The followings are used by the model in common with FR4.

System Switch 00 bit 4 - Line error marks on received pages.System Switch 00 bit 5 - Communication parameter display.System Switch 06 bit 0 - Use of the Stop key during memory transmissionSystem Switch 06 bit 4 - Use of the Stop key during memory transmission (Guidance

appears)System Switch 11 bit 0 - TTI printing positionSystem Switch 11 bit 2 - Label insertion positionSystem Switch 12 bit 7-0 - TTI printing position in the main scan directionCommunication Switch 0B bit 0 - Use of Economy transmission during a transfer

operation to end receivers.Communication Switch 0B bit 1 - Use of Economy transmission during a transfer

Uoperation to the next transfer station.Communication Switch 0B bit 2 - Use of Label insertion for the end receivers in a

transfer operation.User Parameter Switch 0E bit 2 - TTI printing during PC-fax memory transmission.

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2


SM 4-11 H551


!CAUTIONDo not change these settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Readonly.”

480005 (H) - RAM Reset Level 1 (Common use with H551)Change the data at this address to FF (H), then switch the machine off and on toreset all the system settings.

4800A0 to 4800AF (H) - LAN Switches

480286 to 480288 (H) - E-mail Tx counter

Address High Low480286 Tens digit Unit digit480287 Thousands digit Hundreds digit480288 Hundred thousands digit Ten thousands digit

NOTE: The following counters have the same data format as above.

48028A to 48028C (H) - E-mail Rx counter

48028E to 480290 (H) - LAN FAX counter

4BFC01 to 4BFC07 (H) - NIC ROM version (Read only)

4BFC28 to 4BFC47 (H) - Password for administrator mode (max. 31 characters -ASCII)

NOTE: If the number of characters are less than the maximum, add a stop code(00 (H)) after the last character.

4BFC4C to 4BFC4F (H) - IP address

e.g. 133.139.24.3

4BFC4C (H) 1st address: 133 85 (H)4BFC4D (H) 2nd address: 139 8B (H)4BFC4E (H) 3rd address: 24 18 (H)4BFC4F (H) 4th address: 3 03 (H)


4BFC50 to 4BFC53 (H) - Subnet mask information

4BFC58 to 4BFC5B (H) - Default gateway address

4BFC5C to 4BFC5F (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX(Access control)

4BFC60 to 4BFC63 (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX(Access mask)

4BFC64 to 4BFC67 (H) - SMTP server IP address

4BFC68 to 4BFC6B (H) - POP server IP address

⇒

Rev. 01/00


H551 4-12 SM

4BFC6C to 4BFCAB (H) - Host name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)

4BFCAC to 4BFCEB (H) - Own domain name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)

4BFCEC to 4BFD2B (H) - POP server login name (max. 63 characters - ASCII)

4BFD2C to 4BFD4B (H) - POP server password (max. 31 characters - ASCII)

4BFD4C to 4BFDCB (H) - Own e-mail address (max. 127 characters - ASCII)

4BFDCC to 4BFE4B (H) - Administrator’s e-mail address(max. 127 characters - ASCII)

4BFE4C to 4BFECB (H) - Back up e-mail address

4BFECC to 4BFECF (H) - Interval between automatic login to the POP server toreceive incoming mail (min. 0A [H] = 10 s)

e.g. 60 min. = 3,600 sec. = 0E10 (H) sec.

4BFECC (H) 00 (H)4BFECD (H) 00 (H)4BFECE (H) 0E (H)4BFECF (H) 10 (H)

4BFED4 to 4BFEE7 (H) - CSI during LAN Fax Transmission(max. 20 characters - ASCII)

4BFEEE to 4BFEEF (H) - DIS information during LAN Fax Transmission(Read only)

The format is as follows:4BFEE8: Resolution 0: 200 x 100 dpi 1: 200 x 200 dpi4BFEE9: Modem rate 0: 2.4 kbps 1: 4.8 kbps 2: 7.2 kbps

3: 9.6 kbps 4: 12.0 kbps 5: 14.4 kbps4BFEEA: Document width 0: A4 1: B44BFEEB: Document length 0: A4 1: B4 2: No limit4BFEEC: Compression 0: MH (Do not change these settings.)4BFEED: ECM 0: Disable (Do not change these settings.)4BFEEE: BFT 0: Disable (Do not change these settings.)4BFEEF: I/O rate (200 x 100 dpi/200 x 200 dpi)

0: 0/0 ms. 1: 5/5 ms. 2: 10/5 ms.3: 10/10 ms. 4: 20/10 ms. 5: 20/20 ms.6: 40/20 ms. 7: 40/40 ms.

4BFEF6 to 4BFEF7 (H) - Difference from Greenwich Mean Time4BFEF6: Low - Hex4BFEF7: High - Hex

Examples

USA: -5 hours = -300 min. x -1 = 300 = 012C (H)4BFEF6: 2C4BFEF7: 01

Japan: +9 hours = 540 min. x -1 = -540 = FDE4 (H)4BFEF6: E44BFEF7: FD

TROUBLESHOOTING

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2

ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION

SM 5-1 H551

5. TROUBLESHOOTING

5.1 ERROR CODES FOR LAN COMMUNICATION

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try tosolve the problem as suggested below.NOTE: The errors which are marked with a “*” in the column to the left of the error

code will appear with “NETWORK ERROR (ERROR CODE)” on the LCD.

Code Meaning Explanation SuggestedCause/Action

Error isinformed

from

10-00

The NIC is resetbecause of a timeoutduring handshaking.

No response is receivedduring handshakingbetween NIC and FCEafter a certain interval,so the NIC is reset.

FCE software procedureerror or abnormal e-maildata.

10-01The user pressedthe Stop key.

Processing isinterrupted because theuser pressed Stop.

10-02Transmission testfailed during the LANtesting procedures.

Transmission erroroccurred during theloop-back test.

The NIC board may bedefective.

10-03Reception test failedduring the LANtesting procedures.

Reception erroroccurred during theloop-back test.

The NIC board may bedefective.

10-04

The NIC is notready.

The NIC is not readyafter reset. The orangeLED on the NIC boarddoes not light.

The NIC board and/orROM on the NIC boardmay not be connectedcompletely. Re-installthem. If that doesn’twork, replace the NICboard.

10-05

The NIC was resetbecause of a requestfrom the NIC.

When an abnormalprocedure occurs, theNIC sends a resetrequest to the FCE, thenthe FCE commands theNIC to reset.

NIC and/or FCEsoftware may beworking incorrectly.

10-06

An abnormalcommand causedthe NIC to reset.

The NIC was reset as afailsafe, because thehand-shaking betweenthe NIC and the FCEwas incorrect.

FCE software may beworking incorrectly.

10-07

Transmission wasinterrupted becausethe NIC was resetduring tx dataformatting.

The NIC was resetduring the scanning ofan original.

The NIC was reset byan error occurring in ajob elsewhere.

FCE


H551 5-2 SM


Error isinformed

from

10-10

A file with anunsupported formatwas received.

A decoding error duringreception. The machinechecks only thedescriptions in theheader of the e-mail, notthe actual data in the e-mail.

The received file wasnot compressed usingDCX or TIFF-F.

10-11

DCX encoding error An encoding erroroccurred while thescanned file was beingconverted using DCXduring transmission.

FCE hardware may bedefective and/or FCEsoftware may beworking incorrectly.

10-12

DCX decoding error The received e-mail hada correct header, but anerror occurred while theDCX file was beingdecoded.

Incorrect DCX dataand/or FCE may bedefective and/or FCEsoftware may beworking incorrectly.

10-13

TIFF-F encodingerror

An encoding erroroccurred while thescanned file was beingconverted using TIFF-Fduring transmission.

FCE hardware may bedefective and/or FCEsoftware may beworking incorrectly.

10-14

TIFF-F decodingerror

The received e-mail hada correct header, but anerror occurred while theTIFF-F file was beingdecoded.

Incorrect TIFF-F dataand/or FCE may bedefective and/or FCEsoftware may beworking incorrectly.

10-15

E-mail reception wasinterrupted becausethe machine couldnot store the returnaddress.

The machine cannotcreate a temporary fileto store the “fromaddress”, because themaximum number oftemporary files havebeen already created.

The e-mail will bereceived again after aregular interval whenthere are fewertemporary files. If sometemporary files aredeleted manually, it willbe possible to createnew ones.

10-16

The machineinterrupted datareception from a PCduring LAN faxtransmission,because the addressof the destinationcould not be stored.

The machine cannotcreate a temporary fileto store the “fromaddress”, because themaximum number oftemporary files havebeen already created.

The PC will receive abusy signal and the PCfax application will sendthe data again. If sometemporary files aredeleted manually, it willbe possible to createnew ones.

10-17

Document size andresolution of thereceived e-mail wasover the limit.



FCE

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-3 H551


Error isinformed

from

10-20

The machinerejected an incominge-mail forautorouting, becausethe ID code in theincoming e-mail didnot match a personalcode registered inthe machine.

Incorrect ID code. Ask the sender tocorrect the ID code, orchange the setting ofLAN bit switch 04 bit 0.

10-21

The machinerejected an incominge-mail forautorouting, becausean incorrect addresswas registered withthe personal code.

Incorrect address Correct the address, orchange the setting ofLAN bit switch 04 bit 2.

10-22

The machinerejected an incominge-mail for transferrequest, because theID code in theincoming e-mail didnot match the IDcode registered inthe machine.

Incorrect ID code. Ask the sender tocorrect the ID code, orchange the setting ofLAN bit switch 03 bit 3.

10-23

The machinerejected an incominge-mail for transferrequest, because itspecified aQuick/Speed Dialthat contains anincorrect address.

Incorrectly formattedaddress stored in theQuick/Speed Dials.

Correct the addressesstored in the QuickDials, or change settingof LAN bit switch 03 bit2.

FCE

* 10-30

NIC EPROM error Checksum error. The EPROM on the NICboard may be defective.Replace the NIC boardand/or EPROM if thiserror keeps appearing.

* 10-31

NIC memory error The result of thechecked memory valuewas incorrect

The DRAM on the NICboard may be defective.Replace the NIC boardif the error keepsappearing.

* 10-32

NIC serial moduleerror

The hardware for theserial module in theCPU on the NIC boardmay be defective.

Replace the NIC boardif the error keepsappearing.

* 10-33

NIC timer moduleerror

The hardware for thetimer module in the CPUon the NIC board maybe defective.


NIC


H551 5-4 SM


Error isinformed

from

* 10-34

Error on the interruptline connecting NICto FCE

The hardware for theinterrupt line betweenthe NIC board and theFCE may be defective.


* 10-35Network controllererror

Network controllerhardware error on theNIC board


* 10-40

IP address notstored in themachine

The machine checks ifthe IP address is storedwhen the NIC board isreset.

Store the IP address ofthe machine.

* 10-41

IP address conflict The machine’s IPaddress conflicts withanother machine's. Themachine check for IPaddress conflict usingARP procedures whenthe machine is turnedon.

Change the IP address.

* 10-42

Abnormal TCP/IPsocket procedure

Error during the internalchecking procedure ofthe NIC software runswhen the machine isturned on

The NIC board and/orNIC ROM may bedefective, or the NICsoftware is workingincorrectly.

10-43

Timeout during handshaking

Error while the machinechecks the handshakingbetween NIC board andFCE when the machineis turned on


10-44

Sequence errorduring handshaking

Error while the machinechecks the handshakingbetween NIC board andFCE when the machineis turned on


* 10-50

Connection with thePC through a LANwas interruptedwhile receiving datafrom the PC (LANfax transmission).

The PC was turned offor there was too muchtraffic on the LAN.

Check the power switchof the PC and reducethe traffic on the LAN.

10-51

AT commandsequence errorduring LAN faxtransmission.

An AT commandsequence error occurredduring data receptionfrom the PC faxsoftware. The NICreceived unexpected ATcommands or no ATcommand.

Unsupported PC faxsoftware or the NICboard may be defective.Use supported PC faxsoftware or change theNIC board.

10-52

Unsupported ATcommands werereceived.

The NIC receivedunsupported ATcommands from the PCfax software.

Unsupported PC faxsoftware or the NICboard may be defective.Use supported PC faxsoftware or change theNIC board.

NIC

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-5 H551


Error isinformed

from

10-53

Command time-outoccurred whilereceiving data fromPC fax software.

The NIC did not receiveAT commands from thePC at the correct time.

The PC fax softwaredoes not work correctly.Delete the software andreinstall it if the errorkeeps appearing.Otherwise, COMRedirector does notwork correctly. Deleteand reinstall COMRedirector if the errorkeeps appearing.

10-54

Command forinterrupted requestwas received

The user interrupted PCfax software proceduresduring LAN faxtransmission.

Caused by the user

10-60

POP server IPaddress notregistered

The IP address of thePOP server is notregistered in themachine.

Register the IP address.

* 10-61

POP server cannotbe found

The machine cannotfind the POP server onthe LAN.

Make sure that the IPaddress of the POPserver is correct andcheck the traffic on theLAN.

* 10-62

Logging into POPserver is disabled.

The machine finds POPserver, but logging in isdisabled.

Delete the user nameand password of thePOP server in themachine, then input itagain. Otherwise, calladministrator of thePOP server.

* 10-63

Disconnection fromPOP server.

The machine received amessage from POPserver that it willdisconnect thecommunication.

Check the traffic on theLAN. Otherwise, call theadministrator of thePOP server to check ifthe server is turned off.

10-64

MIME decoding error Error during MIMEdecoding on the NICboard during reception.

Abnormal MIME data.Replace the NIC boardif the error occurs duringreception from severalsenders.

10-65

E-mail withunsupported type ofheader was received

The machine decideswhether the e-mail is asupported type or anunsupported type by theheader of the e-mail.

The machine receivedan e-mail with a headertype other than“text/plain” and “base64”.

10-66

Received e-mailformat error

This is indicated thereceived e-mail is notstandard. There is noboundary between partsof the e-mail.

Sender must send e-mail under regulation.

NIC


H551 5-6 SM


Error isinformed

from

10-67

The machine did notreceive a responsefrom the POP serverat the expected time.

The POP procedureswere interrupted by theserver during reception.

The POP server is notworking properly. Callthe administrator of theserver.

* 10-70

No IP addressstored for the SMTPserver

The IP address of theSMTP server is notregistered in themachine.

Enter the IP address inthe machine.

* 10-73

SMTP server cannotbe found

The machine cannotfind the SMTP server onthe LAN.

Check the IP address ofthe SMTP server andcheck the traffic on theLAN.

* 10-74No e-mail address isstored.

The e-mail address ofthe machine is notstored in the machine.

Enter the e-mail addressin the machine.

10-75 The e-mail addressis too long.

The length can be up to127 bytes.

Delete the address andenter it again.

10-76

No destinationaddress was enteredfor transmission.

A temporary file iscreated to store thedestination address fortransmission. Themachine checked thesize of the file and theresult was zero bytes.

Enter the address again.

10-77

Incorrect destinationaddress

The destination addressdoes not exist in theserver. The serverdetermines whether theaccount of thedestination is inside oroutside the server bythe domain name of thee-mail address. Theserver informs themachine during the POPprocedures when thereis no account in theserver even though thedomain name indicatesthe account should beon the server. When it isclear that the account isnot on the serverbecause of the domainname, the server has noway to know if theaddress is correct.

Enter the address again.NIC

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-7 H551


Error isinformed

from

10-78

Too manydestinations

The server informs themachine during SMTPprocedures when thenumber of destinationsin a broadcast is overthe limit of the server.

Divide the broadcastinto two or moreoperations. Use LANswitch 01 to change themaximum number ofbroadcast destinationsto match the server’slimits.

10-79

SMTP server harddisk full

The SMTP serverinforms the machineduring the SMTPprocedures that theserver hard disk is full.

Call the administrator ofthe server.

10-80

SMTP servershutdown

The SMTP server tellsthe machine during theSMTP procedures that itis shut down duringcommunication.


10-81

SMTP server busy The SMTP serverinforms the machineduring the SMTPprocedures that itcannot handle the databecause of a problem,such as a locked mailspooler.


* 10-82

SMTP server turnedoff

When the server isturned off, the machineis informed by TCP/IPprocedures thatconnection between themachine and the serveris interrupted.

Check whether the LANis congested or if acable has beendisconnected, or call theadministrator of theserver.

10-83

Report format error One line in the text datawas too long when themachine created text e-mail for an error report.

Abnormal softwareprocedure

10-84

The machine did notreceive a responsefrom the SMTPserver at the correcttime

The machine sentcommands to the SMTPserver duringtransmission, but theserver did not answer atthe correct time

Abnormal SMTP serverprocedures. Checkwhether the LAN iscongested or whether acable has beendisconnected, or call theadministrator of theserver.

10-85

Unexpectedresponse from theSMTP server.

The SMTP server sent aresponse to machinewhich had anunexpected value.

Abnormal SMTP serverprocedures. Checkwhether the LAN iscongested or whether acable has beendisconnected, or call theadministrator of theserver.

NIC


H551 5-8 SM


Error isinformed

from

10-90No encoded line inthe e-mail duringtransmission.

An error occurred whileencoding scanned data.

The FCE software is notworking properly.

10-91

Number of encodedlines does not matchthe number ofscanned lines in thetransmission.



10-92

Value of encodedoff-set does notmatch the scannedlines in thetransmission.



10-93Non-standard data inthe e-mail.

The received e-mailcontains non-standardimage data.

Abnormal e-mail data.Inform this to thesender.

FCE

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2

LAN TEST FUNCTION

SM 5-9 H551

5.2 LAN TEST FUNCTION

5.2.1 LINK CHECK

A machine and a hub send and receive link pulses to each other to check theconnections to the LAN at regular intervals. The machine lights the green LED onthe NIC board when the pulses are received successfully.

When the link check is performed, the machine checks for a link pulse. Themachine indicates “OK” on the display when the link pulse is received successfully.

Check the LEDs both on the NIC board and on the hub to see if the connectionthrough the LAN cable is active. This is because the link check uses receiving data.NOTE: While the machine is on, the orange LED on the NIC board is lit if it has

been initialized successfully.

5.2.2 LOOP BACK

When the loop back test is performed, the FCE sends test data to the NIC board.The data is sent back to the FCE using the loop-back function of the NIC. The FCEchecks if the test data is the same as the data returned from the NIC. When theyare the same, the FCE indicates “RESULT = 0000’ on the display, which meansthat the NIC board test was successful.NOTE: The machine does not send test data out of the machine on the LAN during

the loop back test. The result is indicated even if the LAN cable is notconnected to the NIC board.

When the NIC board is defective, one of the error codes in the following table willappear. In this case, re-install the NIC board and/or cable, or change them if theloop back test is still not successful.

- LOOP-BACK TEST RESULT CODES -

Code Meaning Code Meaning0000 The test finished without errors. 0008 Data delay error

0001 Defective IC network controller onthe NIC board

0009 Carrier loss

0002 Test data did not meetregulations.

000A Data is not processed at thecorrect time

0003 Data collision error 000B No data received

0004 Buffer overflow while receivingdata

000C Data frame error

0005 Memory error 000D Data overflow0006 Memory error 000E CRC error

0007 Received data did not reach thebuffer at the correct time

000F Receiving data buffer error

TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

H551 5-10 SM

5.3 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

5.3.1 OVERVIEW

To resolve problems, a basic understanding of networking is required.

The drawing shows the route used for the various features used by this machine.

• LAN fax tx: -• 200-dpi printer:

• 200-dpi scanner: -• Autorouting: --• Forwarding: --

• Internet fax (paper to paper): -• Internet fax (paper to PC): -• IC Fax Monitor:

• IC Viewer: On PC only

NIC FAX Overview

PSTN

NIC FAX

Mail ServerG3 FAX

Client PC

NIC FAXMai l Server

Cl ient PC

Internet

H132T511.WMF

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-11 H551

5.3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part ofthe network is causing the problem.

CommunicationRoute Item Action Remarks

1. Connection with theLAN

• Check that the LANcable is connected tothe machine.

• Check that the LEDs onthe NIC board and thehub are lit.

General LAN

2. LAN activity • Check that otherdevices connected tothe LAN cancommunicate throughthe LAN.

G3communication

Refer to G3 faxtroubleshooting1. Com Redirector • Check the modem

settings in Windows 95• Check the port setting in

Windows 95• Make sure that the IP

address registered inthe machine is the sameas the address stored inCom Redirector.

• Is the target NIC faxrunning?

• Is the modem set up inWindows 95 controlpanel set up the sameway as described in theoperation manual?

• Are the printerproperties in Windows95 control panel createdby the fax applicationsoftware set up as in theoperation manual?

2. Application faxsoftware

• Check the transmissionport setting.

• Check whether a PSTNaccess number isrequired.

• Refer to the operationmanual for theapplication.

3. Network settings onthe PC

• Check the Windows 95network settings on thePC.

• Is the IP addressregistered in the TCP/IPproperties in theWindows 95 networksetup correct? Checkthe IP address with theadministrator of thenetwork.

4. Check that PC canconnect with themachine

• Use the “ping”command on the PC tocontact the machine.

• At the MS-DOS prompt,type ping then the IPaddress of the machine,then press Enter.

Between NICFax and PC

5. LAN settings in themachine

• Check the LANparameters

• Check if there is an IPaddress conflict withother PCs.

• Use “LAN parameters”in service function 20.

• If there is an IP addressconflict, inform theadministrator.


H551 5-12 SM


1. E-mail applicationsoftware

• Use the application tocheck if transmissionand reception arepossible withdestinations other thanthe NIC fax machine.

• When an error messageappears in theapplication, solve it first.

• Inform the LANadministrator of theproblem so that it canbe dealt with.

2. Network settings onthe PC

• Check the PC’sWindows 95 networksettings.

• Is the IP addressregistered in the TCP/IPproperties in theWindows 95 networksetup correct? Checkthe IP address with theadministrator of thenetwork.

3. E-mail account onthe server

• Make sure that the PCcan log into the e-mailserver.

• Check that the accountand password stored inthe server are the sameas in the machine.

• Ask the administrator tocheck.

Between PCand e-mailserver

4. E-mail server • Make sure that the clientdevices which have anaccount in the servercan send/receive e-mail.

• Ask administrator tocheck.

• Send test e-mail withthe machine’s ownnumber as thedestination. Themachine receivesreturned e-mail whenthe communication isperformed successfully.

1. LAN settings in themachine

• Check the LANparameters

• Check if there is an IPaddress conflict withother PCs.

• Use “LAN parameters”in service function 20.

• If there is an IP addressconflict, inform theadministrator.

Betweenmachine and e-mail server

2. E-mail account onthe server

• Make sure that themachine can log into thee-mail server.



Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-13 H551


Betweenmachine and e-mail server




1. E-mail account onthe Server

• Make sure that the PCcan log into the e-mailserver.






3. Destination e-mailaddress

• Make sure that the e-mail address is actuallyused.

• Check that the e-mailaddress contains noincorrect characterssuch as spaces.

4. Router settings • Use the “ping”command to contact therouter.

• Check that otherdevices connected tothe router can sent dataover the router.

• Ask the administrator ofthe server to check.

Between e-mailserver andinternet

5. Error message by e-mail from thenetwork of thedestination.

• Check whether e-mailcan be sent to anotheraddress on the samenetwork, using theapplication e-mailsoftware.

• Check the error e-mailmessage.

• Inform the administratorof the LAN.

SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

H551 5-14 SM

5.4 SYMPTOMS FOR TROUBLESHOOTING

Internet fax machines, LAN fax transmission, and the PC utilities use procedureswhich are not the same as the fax machines we are familiar with. The following canhelp solve problems in the field.

5.4.1 INTERNET FAX

Decoding error during reception (1)

- Possible Cause -When the machine receives e-mail with attached files that are not in TIFF-F orDCX format, a decoding error occurs because the machine cannot decode thefiles. The error occurs even if a text file is attached.

- Explanation/Action -ITU-T and IETF require a TIFF-F formatted file to be attached for an internet faxmessage. The sender should send the e-mail again, with a TIFF-F formatted fileattached.

Decoding error during reception (2)

- Possible Cause -The received e-mail has an attached file that has an unsupported resolution orpage size. Messages of up to A4 width and up to 200 x 200 dpi resolution can bereceived.

- Explanation/Action -ITU-T and IETF specify a maximum size of A4 width for an attached file. Thesender should resend the e-mail, with an A4 size file attached. The paper size isnot negotiated during Internet fax handshaking.

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-15 H551

The machine can send e-mail even though the host name and domain nameare not stored in the machine’s LAN parameters

- Possible Cause -During transmission to the SMTP server, the host name and domain name storedin the machine are used in the argument of the SMTP “HELO” command.However, the SMTP server can receive the "HELO" command without theargument, so the machine does not check whether the host name and domainname are stored.

- Explanation/Action -At installation, the host name and the domain name are not required if they areunknown at the time. If incorrect names are stored, the SMTP server does notaccept the HELO command and the machine cannot send e-mail to the SMTPserver. Then, the machine fails to resend the correct number of times and printsan e-mail transmission error report.

An error occurs in the first part of the e-mail transmission procedure

- Possible Cause -There is no domain name in the destination e-mail address (e.g., “123” is usedinstead of an e-mail address).

- Explanation/Action -When an e-mail address is sent to the SMTP server without a domain name (theaddress is blank is after the “@” symbol), the server searches for the same username in the local server. The server fails to find the user name then thetransmission is rejected in accordance with SMTP procedures. This is done in thefirst part of the e-mail transmission SMTP procedure.

NOTE: The following describes what happens if the domain name of thedestination is correct but the user name of the destination is incorrect.1) When an e-mail with a domain name which is different from the local

domain name is sent, the SMTP server accepts the transmission andforwards the e-mail to the next SMTP server even if the user name ofthe e-mail address is incorrect. The local SMTP server cannot checkuser names in a remote server.

2) After that, the destination SMTP server checks the user name to see ifthat user has an account with the server. If there is no account, theserver creates an e-mail error report and sends it to the sender, and thisreport is printed by the machine.


H551 5-16 SM

LAN parameters are not listed on the system parameter list after the NICboard is replaced

- Possible Cause -Poor electrical contact between NIC board and machine

- Explanation/Action -When the machine does not recognize the NIC board, the NIC board does notinitialized and LAN parameters are not listed. The NIC board should be installedagain.

A communication error is indicated on the operation panel because the e-mail server is down

- Possible Cause -The machine attempts to receive e-mail from the POP server by POP proceduresat a regular interval. When the machine cannot contact the server, a POP erroroccurs in the machine. A POP error also occurs if the LAN cable is pulled out ofthe machine or if the network is down.When there is a POP error, a communication error is indicated on the display andthe communication error LED is lit.

- Explanation/Action -The machine recovers from a POP error when either the next POP procedure orthe next SMTP procedure with the server is performed successfully. The userdoes not have to press the Stop key.

When a number of e-mail addresses separated with commas are stored fortransmission, a transmission error occurs. (eg. [email protected],[email protected], [email protected])

- Possible Cause -An SMTP error occurs in the above case.

- Explanation/Action -When storing more than one e-mail address, the user must press the Yes keyafter storing each address.

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-17 H551

5.4.2 IC FAX MONITOR

The user forgot the password for going into administrator mode

- Possible Cause -The administrator password is stored in the machine, not in the PC. Thepassword is not reset if the user re-installs the utility. The administrator passwordcan changed with the utility, but the current password is needed.

- Explanation/Action -A new password can be stored as follows.

• Use “rifmaint” as the administrator password for the utility.• Change the password using “rifmaint” as the current password.

“Rifmaint” is always available even after a new password is stored.

Error after the user restores backed-up data

- Possible Cause -Data must be backed up before resetting the RAM.

- Explanation/Action -Restore backed-up data with IC Fax Monitor after the RAM in the machine hasbeen reset.

NOTE: 1) The following data can be backed up in the PC.• Quick dials• Speed dials• Group dials• Personal codes• Address for memory forwarding

2) The following data cannot be backed up in the PC.• Administrator password• RTI/CSI/TTI• Own G3 telephone number• Polling ID• Bit switch settings• LAN parameters• Administrator e-mail address


H551 5-18 SM

When an administrator logs into the machine, some functions cannot bedone at the operation panel and “BUSY! PC COMMUNICATING” appears onthe display.

- Possible Cause -When IC Fax Monitor is being used in administrator mode, user functions 21 to25, 31 to 36, 41 to 46,and the functions that require a password of “2222” cannotbe used at the operation panel. This is to prevent stored data in the machine frombeing changed simultaneously at the PC and the fax machine.NOTE: If any of the above functions is being used at the machine, the

administrator password cannot be used to log into the machine with ICFax Monitor.

- Explanation/Action -Use the above functions after logging out of administrator mode.

5.4.3 COM REDIRECTOR

A Windows 95 error occurs when Com Redirector is reinstalled.

- Possible Cause -When Com Redirector is uninstalled while it is still running, some files are notremoved from the PC. The error occurs because the files are not overwrittenduring reinstallation.

- Explanation/Action -The following are required to reinstall.

• Shut down Windows 95.• Start Windows 95 again.• Stop running Com Redirector and all applications.• Uninstall Com Redirector• Reinstall Com Redirector.

The PC cannot send a message to the machine using LAN fax transmission.

- Possible Cause -Two PCs can send a message to the machine at once. The third PC receives abusy signal from the machine and cannot send the message. Another cause maybe that the PC was rejected as a result of the stored access control/access mask.

- Explanation/Action -The user at the third PC must resend the message after the first or second PChas finished.

Tro

uble

shoo

ting

H13

2


SM 5-19 H551

The Windows 95 COM port cannot be used after Com Redirector and faxapplication software were both installed.

- Possible Cause -The fax application software does not supported COM 5 or higher because theapplication is a 16-bit application.

- Explanation/Action -When Com Redirector is installed, it automatically looks for an available COMport starting from COM3, then uses this port. Com Redirector offers this COM portto the fax application. When Com Redirector offers COM5 or higher, because thelower ports are already taken, a 16-bit fax application cannot use it.

Remove the application software that uses COM 3 or COM 4, then release theCOM ports. Then install the 16-bit fax application again.

NOTE: 32-bit fax applications can use COM 5 or higher. Microsoft Fax, thestandard Windows 95 fax application, is a 32-bit application.

APPENDIX A

App

endi

x A

H13

2

LAN CONFIGURATIONS

SM APPENDIX A-1 H551

1. LAN BASICS

1.1 LAN CONFIGURATIONS

1.1.1 OVERVIEW

A LAN (Local Area Network) links computers within an installation such as abuilding or factory. It consists of communications hardware such as interfaceboards and cables, and software for the computers that are to be connected.

1.1.2 BASIC TYPES

The following three configurations are available for linking computers. The differentwiring configurations are often referred to as ‘topologies

With all three topologies, signals sent from one computer go to all other computers.An address is included at the start of the data so that it is ignored by all computersexcept the destination.

Bus ConfigurationOne central cable is installed, with computers connected to it in branch fashion. Alldata is sent via the central cable.

a) Bus Connection

b) Star Connection

H132X502.WMF

Network Topology

Star Configuration

A central hub is used, with computersconnected around it. All data is sentfrom the central hub.

LAN CONFIGURATIONS

H551 APPENDIX A-2 SM

Ring ConfigurationComputers are connected in a ring.

Because the data sent by one computer reaches all the others, only one computermay send data at any one time, or there will be a collision of data on the circuit. Ifone computer continues sending data, it will occupy the LAN to the exclusion of allothers. To prevent this problem, data is limited to a length of a few kbytes. Thesesmall units of data are referred to as ‘packets’ or 'frames'.

1.1.3 AVOIDING DATA COLLISION

Collisions occur when data is sent from a number of computers simultaneously.Two methods are employed to prevent this.

(a) The computers detect whether there is any data on the LAN, and only sendwhen the LAN is free. There are several ways to do this. A typical method isCSMA/CD, which is used with Ethernet applications.

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sensing Multiple Access/Carrier Detection)A method by which multiple computers have access to the transmission route(referred to as ‘multiple access’). The computers monitor the transmission routefor data (carrier sensing), and send data if none is currently being sent. If a datacollision is detected, the data is resent after a randomly determined wait time.

(b) Token passing, in which collision of data is avoided before the event. Tokensensure that the data only goes to the intended computer.

The various connection configurations and ways of avoiding data collision haveresulted in a number of different types of LANs. The different types areincompatible when directly connected to each other, thus requiring the use of relaydevices.

c) Ring Connect ion

H132X503.WMF

App

endi

x A

H13

2

LAN CONFIGURATIONS


Main LAN Types and Their Characteristics

TypeCable

connectionconfiguration

Transmissionspeed Cables

Accesscontrol

(collisionavoidance)

Remarks

10Base-5 Bus 10 Mbits/s Thick coaxial CSMA/CDThe originalEthernetconfiguration

10Base-2 Bus 10 Mbits/s Thin coaxial CSMA/CDA simplifiedversion of10Base-5

Ethernet

10Base-T Star 10 Mbits/s Twisted-pair CSMA/CDCurrently themain type inuse

Token ring Star 4 Mbits/s or16 Mbits/s Twisted-pair Token passing IBM standard

LAN

FDDI Ring and star 100 Mbits/s Optical fiber,twisted-pair

Tokenappending

Used primarilyfor trunk lines

Local Talk Daisy chain 230 kbits/s Twisted-pair ProprietaryFitted asstandard toMacintosh PCs

* The NIC fax uses 10Base-T.

ETHERNET


1.2 ETHERNET

1.2.1 OVERVIEW

Ethernet is currently the commonly-used LAN. It was originally developed by DEC,Intel, and Xerox. The original Ethernet standard incorporated what is now knownas the 10Base-5 specialized Ethernet coaxial cable.

The IEEE802.2 standard was based on the Ethernet standard. Specifications forhardware components such as cables, were revised.

IEEE802.3 was then developed for use with media other than 10Base-5. 10Base-2, 10Base-F, and the most widely used 10Base-T, were subsequently developed.

In contrast to the Ethernet standard data transfer speed of 10 Mbps, IEEE802.3allows data transfer at speeds between 1 and 20 Mbps.

1.2.2 ETHERNET FRAME STRUCTURE

Ethernet frames consist of the addresses of the source and destination computers,an identifier for the type of protocol used, the data, and finally the FCS (which isused to check whether or not the data has been correctly sent and received).

Compare the Ethernet frame type and the IEEE802.3 frame type in the followingdiagram.

Data (46 ~ 1,500 octets)Ethernet frame

Frame Type (2 octets)

Source Address (6 octets)

Dest inat ion Address (6 octets)

FCS (4 octets)

LLC Frame(Data, 46 ~ 1,500 octets)

IEEE802.3 frame

LLC Data Length (2 octets)

Source Address (6 octets)

Dest inat ion Address (6 octets)

FCS (4 octets)

H132X551.WMF

App

endi

x A

H13

2

ETHERNET


• FCS (Frame Check Sequence):A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is employed to check whether or not thereceived data is correct. The receiving device (receiving node) reconstitutesthe FCS from the received data. If it does not match the sent FCS, that frameis discarded as corrupted.

• Identifier:Indicates the type of data that follows. The identifier is referenced by thereceiving node to determine the type of protocol used to send the data.

• Octet:A unit employed to indicate network data size. 1 octet is 8 bits (1 byte).The term is used to make a clear division into 8-bit units from a continuousstream of 1s and 0s with no inherent division into bytes.

• LLC (Logical Link Control):The name of the data frame defined in IEEE802.3.

• NodeA computer or printer connected to the network.

1.2.3 MAC ADDRESSES

To allow each node in the network to communicate with others, it must have aunique identifier. In the Ethernet standard, a 48-bit address known as the MAC(Media Access Control) address is assigned to each computer. Each data framecontains the MAC addresses of the source and destination computers.

The MAC address is a fixed physical address that is set on the network card. It issix bytes in length for the Ethernet standard. The first three bytes are a headercode which is controlled and allocated by the IEEE, and the last three bytes are acode independently controlled with each header (to prevent duplication). Thisensures that the physical address of each Ethernet card is unique.

Under the Ethernet standard, frames are sent and received using these addresses(see ‘Ethernet Frame Structure’).

LAN HARDWARE


1.3 LAN HARDWARE

1.3.1 OVERVIEW

The basic LAN configuration consists of four hardware items.

• Interface boards - also known as LAN boards or Network Interface Cards(NICs):Convert digital data into electrical signals, prevent data collision, and transmitdata on cables

• Cables:Primarily unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) and optical fiber cables

• Hubs:Distribute signals

• Relay devices:Connect LANs for the transmission of data to remote locations

LAN devices are regulated by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and ElectronicEngineers) standards.

In addition to hardware, the following types of software are also needed.

• Transmission protocol software that can transmit data via a variety of relaydevices

• Applications (database, e-mail), to provide the data in a format usable bythe operator

1.3.2 RELAY DEVICES

Relay devices are required to expand LANs. These devices do the following.

Extending the Connection DistanceLANs allow high-speed transmission of data, achieved by sending high frequencysignals over the cables. High frequency signals are considerably attenuated whentransmitted over the cables, and signal waveforms are easily distorted, resulting indifficulties when transmitting over long distances (the maximum distance fortransmission using twisted-pair cables to connect the hub and terminals with10Base-T is 100m).

When expanding a LAN, relay devices are used to amplify the attenuated signals.Distorted signals are first converted back to digital format and regenerated toremove the distortion.

To cover even more remote locations, telecommunications companies providededicated lines, PSTN lines, and ISDN lines for connection to remote LANs.

App

endi

x A

H13

2

LAN HARDWARE


Connection between Networks of Different StandardsAs the types of cable used, and the signal and data format differ between differentLAN systems, such systems cannot be connected directly. When a LAN systemhas to be connected to a different system, a relay device that can convert betweenthe two systems is employed.

Conversion between different LAN systems involves first converting the signalsback to digital format, and resending them in a format appropriate for thedestination LAN.

Control of High-speed Transmission RoutesAs the network grows, the number of connected computers increases, and so doesthe volume of data transmitted. There is a limit to the amount of data that can betransmitted on the network. When this is exceeded, the flow of data is impeded andcommunications are no longer possible.

There are a number of ways to increase the speed of data transmission on a LAN.A high-speed LAN may be used to prevent network congestion when the amount ofdata to be transmitted is large. When connecting LANs of different transmissionspeeds, relay devices are required that can convert between the two LAN types.

By-pass circuits may be installed when connecting LANs with relay devices. Whenthere is a complex web-like interconnection of networks, there are a number ofroutes to the destination, so that busy parts of the network can be by-passed.

FilteringThere are also relay devices that can check the data on the network and remove allexcept that which is necessary. This is referred to as 'filtering'.

Controls which pass only specific protocols (used for the transmission of data andvoice between terminals on networks such as TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk) areused to alleviate congestion in the relay circuits.

As the number of users increases, the network is used for greater variety ofpurposes, resulting in the entry of data through illegal access. Relay devices to limitaccess and to maintain security become necessary.

TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS


1.4 TYPES OF RELAY DEVICES AND GATEWAYS

Relay devices may be of various types - repeaters, bridges, switches, routers -depending upon their purpose and principles of operation.

Types of Relay Devices and their Functions

Function Repeater Bridge Switch RouterCable extension

Connection with remote sites

Connection with different LAN types

Avoiding congestion

Restricting access

1.4.1 REPEATERS

A repeater amplifies signals. It is normally connected to a number of LANs, andamplifies signals from one LAN (one segment) and outputs it to another LAN(another segment).

It is considerably cheaper than a bridge or router, and does not require specialsetup. After power is switched on, the repeater connects to the two networks.

As distortion occurs when signals are amplified, the number of repeaters is limitedto two with Ethernet.

Repeaters have no ability to store data, and are unable to prevent collisions whensending signals. Therefore, they have no effect on relieving congestion in anetwork.

Amplifies the signal

Signal

Becomesweaker

LAN

Repeater

LAN

H132X504.WMF

App

endi

x A

H13

2



1.4.2 BRIDGES

In the same way as a repeater, a bridge converts received electrical signals back todigital format, and then regenerates the original electrical signals for transmission,thus preventing signal distortion.

Bridges can also filter out unnecessary data, and can act to alleviate congestion onthe network. The bridge records the source MAC address in the header of thearriving data packets. In this way, the bridge builds up a picture of the location ofeach node (PC and printer).

In the example shown below, data sent from A to B also reaches the bridge. Thebridge automatically records this data and remembers that A is located in the left-hand segment. When data is subsequently sent from B to A the bridge does notrelay it to the right-hand segment. This process is referred to as filtering.

The bridge does not require special setup. After power is switched on, the bridgeconnects to the two networks.

Signals to node B are nottransferred to the right-hand side.

Left Side Right SideA CB

Bridge

Signals to node C are transferredto the right-hand side.

A B C

A CA → C

A BA → B

H132X505.WMF



1.4.3 SWITCHES

Switches have the same filtering function as bridges, however they also supportsimultaneous connection of multiple LANs, and allow parallel relaying.

Relay processing time is reduced in comparison to bridges, and operation istherefore faster.

Switch

H132X506.WMF

App

endi

x A

H13

2



1.4.4 ROUTERS

A router checks the destination information in the headers of the data packets onthe network and determines which LAN it has to be sent to. The router contains atable which records the destinations.

In contrast to repeaters and bridges, simply switching power on and connecting tothe networks does not make ready the router for operation. Software appropriatefor the communications protocol must first be installed, the network configurationchecked, and the setup completed.

While filtering with bridges is implemented primarily by the checking of addresses,filtering with a router is implemented by the communications protocol.

Depending upon the application protocol, the router may be set to pass e-maildata, but not to transfer files.

Routers support considerably more sophisticated functions than bridges. Forexample, they may be set up to allow high priority data to be passed more quickly(priority control). Different LAN types have different formats for the destinations.The router makes sure that the destination is in the correct format for the nextnetwork.

When there are multiple routes to the destination, bridges and switches cannot beemployed to reduce congestion since the data is sent via all routes. Routers, onthe other hand, employ a number of routes set beforehand in accordance with theamount of data to distribute the load throughout the network (while bridges divide

A

B C

D

E

Router

Router

Router

Router

Up

RightLef t

Right

Lef t

A

CB

D

E

Data going to LAN segment A is t ransferred to the upper route.Data going to LAN segments B or E is t ransferred to the lef t-hand route.Data going to LAN segments C or D is t ransferred to the r ight-hand route

H132X507.WMF



up the network with MAC addresses, routers achieve this, in the case of a TCP/IPprotocol, by analyzing IP addresses and sub-nets).

The router is a device central to the configuration of the network, and as suchrouter functions are implemented in software in PC LAN servers and UNIXmachines.In the NIC fax, the device setting the IP address as the default gateway is in

practice a default router. When data is sent from the network belonging tothe local machine to other networks, the device at the exit from the networkis referred to as the default router.

1.4.5 GATEWAYS

While repeaters, bridges, and routers are available as dedicated hardware fornetwork use, gateways are available as server and client software packages. Theyanalyze all network communications protocols, and convert data, thus allowingconnection of different networks. The Netware Gateway Service supplied with theWindowsNT Server is an example of this software.

App

endi

x A

H13

2

NETWORK PROTOCOLS


1.5 NETWORK PROTOCOLS

1.5.1 OVERVIEW

Network protocols are standard procedures for transmitting data over a network.There are different protocols for different stages of the communication.

1.5.2 DATA TRANSMISSION

Data is sent using the following procedures.

(1) Finding the destination(2) Determining the route to the destination(3) Sending the data

A number of protocols must be used in combination in order to execute eachprocedure. The TCP/IP protocol used with the Internet, the Netware IPX/SPXprotocol, and the Macintosh AppleTalk protocol, are combinations of protocolsdesigned to achieve various specific procedures.

Protocols used for steps (1), (2), and (3) listed above are referred to as (1) thename service protocol, (2) the routing protocol, and (3) the transfer protocolrespectively.

The roles of the protocols

Network

Target PC

Transfer protocol

Name ServerDirectory Server

Router

Routing protocol

Name service protocol

Sending PC

H132X508.WMF

NETWORK PROTOCOLS


1.5.3 NAME SERVICE PROTOCOL

A computer name is normally assigned to the computer. However, for the purposesof transmitting data, the name is converted to an address indicating its location onthe network. The name service protocol provides lists of all names when thedestination computer name is unknown.

The address is an identifier used in distinguishing between terminals and nodes onthe network. The most common addresses are IP addresses and MAC addresses.

An IP address consists of a network address (to identify the network to which theterminal belongs) and a host address (to identify the terminal within the samenetwork), both of which are set by the user.

A MAC address is registered in the memory of the network interface board by themanufacturer. Each MAC address is unique (no two are alike throughout theworld).

1.5.4 ROUTING PROTOCOL

The routing protocol is used in determining the route used to transmit the data. Apreset network route may be necessary, or it may be determined automatically bycommunication between routers.

If relay devices are to be added or moved, it is convenient to have a method ofautomatically determining new routes. The routing protocol provides this ability.

1.5.5 TRANSFER PROTOCOL

The transfer protocol is used in the transmission of data. It first checks for errors inthe received data, and resends it if an error is detected. It also controls the rate atwhich data is transmitted, by communication between the source and destination.

In addition to these basic protocols, there are also various other protocols whichprovide for notification of network congestion, notification of errors, and so on.

App

endi

x A

H13

2

NETWORK PROTOCOLS


Protocols Used with Different LAN Types

Name ServiceProtocol

RoutingProtocol

TransferProtocol

Protocols used withthe Internet (TCP/IP) DNS RIP

OSPF

IPTCPUDP

Protocols used withNetware (IPX/SPX)

SAPNDS

RIPNLSP

IPXSPX

Protocols used withMacintosh (AppleTalk)

NBPZIP

RTMP DDPASP

DNS: Domain Name Service NLSP: NetWare Link State ProtocolRIP: Routing Information Protocol IPX: Internetwork Packet ExchangeOSPF: Open Shortest Path First SPX: Sequenced Packet ExchangeIP: Internet Protocol NBP: Name Binding ProtocolTCP: Transmission Control Protocol ZIP: Zone Information ProtocolUDP: User Datagram Protocol RTMP: Routing Table Maintenance ProtocolSAP: Service Advertisement Protocol DDP: Datagram Delivery ProtocolNDS: NetWare Directory Service ASP: AppleTalk Session Protocol

TCP/IP


1.6 TCP/IP

1.6.1 OVERVIEW

TCP/IP is the standard Internet protocol, and is supported as a standard byWindows 95. It allocates 32-bit network addresses (IP addresses) to the nodes. Asthe addressing system does not depend upon physical media, TCP/IP provides forconsiderable flexibility in selection of routes.

The use of TCP/IP is not limited to Ethernet, but allows use of a variety of physicalmedia.

TCP/IP is a combination of the TCP protocol and IP protocol.

1.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS WITH IP PROTOCOL

The IP protocol divides data into packets. When the destinations may be onseveral different LANs, the router selects the appropriate route for each packetbefore it is sent. This process is repeated until all data arrives at the destinationnetwork.

1.6.3 IP ADDRESS

Communications with IP protocol requires that network devices such as PCs androuters using TCP/IP be assigned a 32-bit IP address as a means of identification.

When used in a single closed network, the IP addresses (referred to as privateaddresses in this case) may be used freely. However, when connected to theInternet, global addresses which are unique throughout the world must be used.Global addresses are managed by the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority(IANA), and are assigned upon receipt of an IP address.

1.6.4 IP ADDRESS FORMAT

IP addresses are 32 bits in length, and are normally converted to decimal notationin four 8-bit blocks as shown below.

Example of IP Address Notation

133. 139. 212. 11Host portion (16 bits)Network portion (16 bits)

The IP address consists of host and network blocks as shown above. The networkblock represents a logical collection of hosts (a network), and the host blockspecifies a unique host within the network.

In the example above, a maximum of 65,534 (the maximum number ofcombinations of 16 bits) hosts may be allocated to that particular network block.

App

endi

x A

H13

2

TCP/IP


As TCP/IP involves the routing of packets using the address in this network block,the network block must be unique (no two can be alike throughout the world). Onthe other hand, the address within the host block is up to the user.

1.6.5 SUBNET AND SUBNET MASKS

Subnet masks divide the host block into sub-nets. In the example above, there are65,534 possible host addresses, and it is difficult to manage all with one network.

The host address block is therefore subdivided into the upper and lower 8 bits, withthe upper 8 bits handled as a logical group address. In this way, the IP addressesassigned to a company for its networks can be divided up into sub-nets of about250 hosts for ease of management (each department of the company can beallocated a different logical group number, for example).

Example: Sub-net

133. 139. 212. 111 ~ 254 ... 254 hosts

Logical groupHost block (8-bit)

The final part of the IP address (the host block) cannot be 0 or 255.The dividing is done using a parameter known as the subnet mask. The subnetmask blocks off addresses, only permitting certain addresses to be used in asubnet.

A logical AND operation is done using the subnet mask to find the range of allowedsub-net addresses.

If your computer has the IP address 210.145.159.11, and the subnet mask is255.255.255.0, the server can recognize that machines with an IP address of210.145.159.* are on the same LAN, so messages are sent to it directly. Any IPaddress with a different value at the start has to be accessed through a router.

The following diagram shows how the AND operation can be used to limit the sizeof the subnet to a few IP addresses.

TCP/IP


1.6.6 TCP AND UDP

While data is formatted into packets and sent to the desired node on the Internetusing IP, communications applications (eg e-mail) do not control data transmissionin packets.

The host requires a procedure for passing IP packets to the desired application.This requirement is satisfied with TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) and UDP(User Datagram Protocol).

1

IP address and Subnet mask

IP Address (4 octets)

1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

210 145 159 11

1

Subnet mask

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

255 255 255 240

28 bits

14 hosts are avai lable

The address "0000" and "1111" cannot be used

Logical Network Address

H132X552.WMF

APPENDIX B

App

endi

x B

H13

2

PRINCIPLES

SM APPENDIX B-1 H551

1. E-MAIL BASICS

1.1 PRINCIPLES

1.1.1 OVERVIEW

Electronic mail (E-mail) is a system by which messages in the form of digital dataare sent and received between computers. A variety of types of electronic mail areavailable - Internet e-mail, Microsoft Mail as used with the exchange client underWindows95, and Lotus Notes Mail.

E-mail works as follows.

• Messages are stored at some location.• Users generally have equal privileges, and are able to both send and

receive messages.

A telephone system requires that users are able talk to each other simultaneously.In the case of e-mail, the user first receives the message, and may then read it atany time, and send a reply if necessary.

1.1.2 SENDING AND RECEIVING

E-mail generally supports the following functions.

• A UA (User Agent) for creating e-mail and displaying received mail.• An MTA (Message Transfer Agent) to handle transfer of messages.

The mail created by the sending UA is sent from the sending MTA to the receivingMTA, and displayed by the receiving UA.

The simplest e-mail system is one in which messages are stored at a locationaccessible by all users. Each user has his/her own mailbox, and the sender putsmessages in the recipient’s mailbox. The recipient checks his/her mailbox toreceive mail.

The mailboxes are normally at one location, often referred to as a “post office”, andthe process of sending e-mail approximates that of sending mail at the post office.

When the post office is accessible from all computers connected to the network,the system constitutes an e-mail system.

User Agent Message Transfer Agent

User AgentMessage Transfer Agent

H132X553.WMF

PRINCIPLES 1 June, 1998

H551 APPENDIX B-2 SM

Microsoft Mail as used in Windows95, and Lotus Cc: Mail employ this system, asdoes the UNIX local mail system (i.e., not connected to the Internet, etc.).

1.1.3 E-MAIL NETWORKS

As the number of users increases, and geographically distant users are connectedto the network, multiple post offices must be established, and users are no longerable to use the same post office for sending and receiving mail. A system whichconnects post offices for the purpose of exchanging mail (a transfer system) thenbecomes necessary.

In this case, the destination of mail is checked at the post office, separated into thevarious destination post offices, and passed it to the transfer system. The transfersystem then communicates with the transfer systems of other post offices, andtransfers the mail to the appropriate post offices. Mail sent from other post offices issorted into the appropriate mailboxes at the receiving post office.

The above is a general description of an e-mail system. These functions areimplemented with the exchange server software packages for Microsoft Mail andCC: Mail using optional gateway software.

The fundamental principles of Internet mail are the same, and are implemented inthe UNIX SendMail program under UNIX.

App

endi

x B

H13

2

PRINCIPLES


The following diagram shows what happens when somebody sends mail from a PCto a receiver with an account in the same post office and to a receiver with anaccount in another post office.

Machines A and B both have accounts in mail server 1. Machine C has an accountin mail server 2.

When machine A sends the message, it goes to the local mail server using SMTPprotocol. SMTP is based on TCP/IP. The post office transfers the message toreceiver B’s mail box. Receiver B picks the mail up from there, using POPprocedures (POP is also based on TCP/IP).

To get to receiver C, the server sends the mail to mail server 2, using SMTPprocedures. Mail server 2 puts the incoming mail into receiver C’s mail box.Receiver C picks it up using POP procedures.

Some more detail on SMTP and POP follow later in this section.

Sender AClient mail software

Mail server 1

Mail server 2

SMTPProcedures

SMTPProcedures

Receiver BClient mail software

POPProcedures

POPProcedures

Receiver CClient mail software

H132X509.WMF

INTERNET MAIL 1 June, 1998


1.2 INTERNET MAIL

1.2.1 OVERVIEW

Internet e-mail (hereafter referred to as Internet mail) is a system for creating textmessages in accordance with a set of standards, the messages then being sent todestinations using SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol).

SMTP is a protocol for sending and receiving mail as defined in RFC821. It wasoriginally developed for sending and receiving mail between servers. However it iscurrently used for sending mail from client environments using POP (Post OfficeProtocol – discussed in a separate section).

1.2.2 CHARACTER CODES

Messages consist of a header and the main text, both being subject to restrictionson usable character codes.

Specifications for data exchanged on the Internet are determined within theorganization of the Internet, and do not necessarily conform to ISO (InternationalStandards Organization) requirements. However, these organizations have codifiedthese specifications to the extent that they are now the default standardsorganizations.

For example, the main text of a message created Japanese using JIS charactercodes must satisfy a particular set of requirements for transmission on the Internet.However, if it is to be sent on a network within a particular company, the uniquerequirements of that system may mean that the JIS codes are not always used.

1.2.3 MESSAGE ADDRESS NOTATION

The UA attaches the required header to the main text and sends it to the MTA. TheMTA then adds to or changes the header as required to ensure that the messagetransfer route is recorded, and that the addresses of the destination and sender arecorrect.

Internet mail employs an 'address' to specify the message destination. The addressformat is generally as follows.

user name @ domain name

The mailbox name is generally employed as the ‘user name’.

The MTA uses the ‘domain name’ to check the destination IP address with theDNS, and then sends the mail using SMTP.DNS (Domain Name System) is a service which enables the IP address to be

obtained from the host name under the TCP/IP network environment.

Ap

pen

dix

BH

132

INTERNET MAIL


1.2.4 DNS AND DOMAINS

The IP address allows destinations within the Internet to be identified. This IPaddress is, however, a string of numbers not easily remembered by the user. Toresolve this problem, a corresponding name is added so that the user need onlyspecify the name in order to identify the destination.

DNS was developed for this purpose. Internet domain names are distributedamong organizations in a hierarchical manner, with lower order domains beingmanaged by the higher order domain. All organizations participating in the Internethave a domain name. The domain name first identifies countries, and issubsequently further divided in a tree structure to identify organizations.

The name server (DNS server) located in each domain holds the information aboutthe domains and hosts under its management. When the client communicatesusing a host name or domain name, an inquiry is made to the DNS to obtain thedestination IP address. Note that this domain name structure is independent of thephysical structure of the network. The items in brackets below are examples ofdomain and mail addresses.

H132X510..PCX

Rev. 01/00

⇒

INTERNET MAIL 1 June, 1998


1.2.5 TRANSFER OF INCOMING MAIL

In some cases, incoming mail may be transferred to another server using SMTPand then stored on another mail server.

The UA used by the user receiving this mail detects its arrival by some method(e.g., by monitoring the contents of the directory designated to contain mail) andinforms the user of this fact.

The UA then extracts the mail in accordance with instructions from the user anddisplays it.

The mail stored on the server is transferred to the user's PC using POP.POP (Post Office Protocol) is a protocol used in reading the content of the mail

spooler using TCP/IP protocol. It is specified in RFC1725 (see a latersection for more details).

The mail address consists of a host name (mailbox name) and domain name. Mailis distributed by first finding the IP address of the destination with the DNS, andthen transferring the message using SMTP.

1. The mail destination within the relevant domain is checked using the domainportion of the mail address.

2. The MTA then connects to the destination mail server using the mail addressthus obtained.

3. The mail is transferred to the destination MTA using SMTP.

4. Depending upon the size of the organization, the message may be furthertransferred to an internal MTA (not visible from outside the domain).

E-mail transration

DNS

MTA

DNS

MTA

MTASMTP

SMTP

n a m e@ aaa. ccc. ddd

user name domain name

H132X554.WMF

App

endi

x B

H13

2

INTERNET MAIL


1.2.6 VERIFYING INCOMING MAIL

Arrival of mail at the intended destination on the Internet is not guaranteed. In theworst case, it may disappear at some unknown location. Furthermore, it isimpossible to verify whether sent mail has been read or not.

Mail sent on the Internet passes through multiple servers and networks, andcomputers used within the Internet are of a variety of architectures. The networktherefore contains a wide variety of hardware environments, in addition to the widevariety of software employed for mail transfer.

While there are no problems in most cases, it is obvious that arrival of mail cannotbe completely guaranteed within this complex environment.

MESSAGE HEADERS


1.3 MESSAGE HEADERS

1.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS

The basic protocols used for transmission of messages on the Internet are definedin RFC822. RFC822 primarily defines the header information for e-mail, with thedetails of the main text of the message being defined in MIME (RFC2045 - 2047).

NOTE: 1) An RFC (Request For Comments) is a document formally released bythe Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). The IETF has released awide variety of RFCs on technical matters (e.g., network protocols)related to the Internet environment.

2) MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a protocol whichremoved such restrictions as the number of characters per line, and themaximum size of an e-mail transmission. It also made possible thetransmission of non-character data (e.g., programs and bitmaps).

1.3.2 HEADER FORMAT

The header of an e-mail message consists of a header and the main text. A blankline is inserted between this header and the main text (the blank line is not includedin the header).

The header is defined as a collection of fields, with the field format as follows.

field name ”:” content

An example of the ‘To’ field, indicating the destination, is as follows.

To:[email protected]

Header Example:

Received: from H132.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)

id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST

Return-Path: <[email protected]>

Message-Id: <[email protected]>

Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900

X-Mailer: ICFAX Version 1.0

Mime-Version: 1.0

Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary = “--ICFAX_60670AE6CB--”


From: [email protected]

Subject: Fax Message NO.0003 from “+81454771786”

(“RICOH SERVICE”)

⇒

Rev. 01/00

App

endi

x B

H13

2

MESSAGE HEADERS


1.3.3 HEADER TYPES

While a number of header fields are possible, the following three must be present.

• Date• From• To

Message Header Table (fields defined in RFC822)

Field Field name Meaning Description

Date Date Date that the mail wascreated

Date and time in specified formatSyntax: <address>

Personsubmitting

mailFrom

Person submitting mail Mail address (including comments)Syntax: <address>

Sender Person sending mail Mail address (including comments)Syntax: <address>

Reply-ToDestination when areply is sent

Mail address (including comments)Syntax: <address>

To Mail destination Mail address (including comments)Syntax: <address>

Cc Destination of carboncopy


Address

BccDestination addresseesnot covered by To andCC


Message-Id Message ID Message identificationIn-Reply-To Source of reply Message ID of original mailReferences Referenced mail Message ID of referenced mailReference

KeywordsKeywords for searchpurposes

Any character string

Subject Mail title (summary) Any character stringComments Mail comment Any character stringOtherEncrypted

Encryption algorithmspecification

Defined word (defined in separateRFC)

Return-Path

Route for return of mail Mail address

RouteReceived

Transfer record addedby MTA

Describes transfer destination,transfer source, and protocol etcwith From, By, With, etc

User definedFields defined by user Field names beginning with X-.

May be any character string,definition is up to the user.

* Other fields are available defined by separate RFCs (e.g., MIME).

MESSAGE HEADERS


1.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL

From FieldThe From field indicates the person sending the mail. The difference between theFrom and Sender fields is that between ‘the person creating the message’ and ‘theperson actually sending the message’. These two fields are used when the twodiffer. When the From field is omitted, the Sender field is added automatically.

When a error occurs, a error notification is sent to the destination in the Senderfield. When the Sender field has been omitted, the notification is sent to thedestination in the From field.

Fields containing mail addresses may also include real names as a comment (thesame applies to the Person Sending Mail and Addressee fields). In both casesbelow , ‘IC FAX’ is handled as a comment, and [email protected] is recognized asthe address.

Example 1 From: IC FAX <[email protected]>

Example 2 From: [email protected] (IC FAX)

Multiple mail addresses may be delineated by commas, and both address formatsmay be used together.

Reply-To FieldReply-To clearly specifies the address to which the reply is to be sent. As this fieldmay be omitted, it is possible that mail may be sent with this field blank. In suchcases, the mail is returned to the address in the From field.

When both the From and Reply-To fields are used, the latter has priority.

The Return-Path field appears to have a similar function at first glance,. However itis not for return of mail, but is automatically added by the transfer system to specifythe person submitting the mail, and is used to investigate the mail route when anerror occurs.

1.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS

To FieldThe To field specifies the addressee for the mail. As with the From field, multiplemail addresses may be delineated with commas. The To field differs from the Ccfield in that only the name of the person sending the message is specified.

Cc FieldMail is sent to the addresses in the Cc (carbon copy) field in the same way as tothe address in the To field. The difference only with the To field is whether thename is in the To field or the Cc field of the received mail.

⇒

Rev. 01/00

App

endi

x B

H13

2

MESSAGE HEADERS


Bcc FieldBcc means Blind Carbon Copy. The Bcc field is deleted in mail sent to theaddressees in the To and Cc fields. It is most commonly used when the address ofthe person sending the mail (the user in the From field) is to be entered in order toleave a copy of the sent mail.

As some mail software saves a copy of the sent mail, it may not be possible tospecify the Bcc field in some cases.

ExceptionsThe addressee fields do not always contain the addressee’s name when mail isreceived. This is because since the actual addressee for the mail is specified bythe MTA, when an alias is used to create a virtual addressee (in a local system, forexample), the virtual address remains in the To field. This also occurs in casessuch as mailing lists in which mail is sent to all on the mailing list.

NOTE: 1) An alias is a group address. Mail sent to the group address is sent to allmembers in the group.

2) A mailing list is a form of electronic conference using e-mail. E-mail sentto a mailing list is transferred to each member of the list. As such, itprovides the same service as available with a PC-based centralizedhost-type bulletin board system in a distributed network environment.

1.3.6 DATE

The Date field indicates the date on which the mail was created (not the date it wassent). The date is in the following format.

Day, date month year hour: minute: second zone

Zone indicates the local time used in the system in which the mail was created, andis expressed as GMT+/-hhmm.

1.3.7 MISCELLANEOUS

Received FieldThe Received field is used by the MTA sending the mail, to record the status of themail. This field shows the route over which the mail was sent, and the computerswhich handled it prior to delivery.

In addition to information showing when and where the mail originated, and whereit was sent to, some systems add further information (e.g., host IP address,software version) as a comment.

Message-Id FieldInternet mail adds an internationally unique message ID. This ID is createdautomatically, and is normally a combination of the time the message was sent andthe name of the mail server.

SMTP 1 June, 1998


1.4 SMTP

1.4.1 OVERVIEW

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used as the protocol for communicationbetween Internet mail MTAs. It is defined in RFC821, which covers 8-bit datacommunications and message size negotiation, etc. SMTP is expanded upon inRFC1651 and RFC1653 as ESMTP.

SMTP uses text-based commands and responses between the client and server. Inpractice, it is a protocol used under TCP/IP, and data is therefore sent andreceived under TCP. Retry processing with communications errors is thereforehandled at the TCP/IP level, and SMTP therefore needs only to handle sendingand receiving of data, and command errors.

1.4.2 SMTP COMMANDS

SMTP commands are sent, and responses received, between the client and serverwhen sending Internet mail. This communication involves sending of the domainname, sender's name, destination name, and main text etc to the server, and userverification.

Sender AClient mai l software

Mai l server 1

Mai l server 2

SMTPProcedures

SMTPProcedures

Receiver BClient mai l software

POPProcedures

POPProcedures

Receiver CClient mai l software

H132X509.WMF

App

endi

x B

H13

2

POP


1.5 POP

1.5.1 OVERVIEW

E-mail on the Internet was originally transferred between hosts using SMTP, withthe computer receiving the mail being operated all day long under the control ofSMTP.

In practice, the use of dial-up IP connections to connect to the mail server viatelephone lines, and the fact that the power supply may be switched off when theuser returns home in the case of PC clients, means that mail cannot be transferreduntil the user connects to the server.

POP (Post Office Protocol) servers are used in such cases, i.e., when theconnection is not permanently established.

1.5.2 POP SERVER CONFIGURATION

The POP server is a computer which receives user mail using SMTP. The mail forthe user includes a setting to ensure that it is directed to the POP server.

Following connection to the Internet, the user receives e-mail directed to the serverwith POP procedures.

As with SMTP, POP is text-based, and as such sends command lines and receivesresponses, as well as sending instructions for user identification by clients,transmission of passwords, acquisition of mail, and deletion of mail on the server.

MIME 1 June, 1998


1.6 MIME

1.6.1 OVERVIEW

Audio messages and image files cannot be sent without further processing, if mailis restricted solely to characters.

MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a specification for the inclusion ofvarious types of data in e-mail, and currently supported by almost all e-mailsoftware for attachment of files.

MIME is defined in RFCs 2045 - 2049.

1.6.2 MIME FUNCTIONS

MIME supports the following functions.

• Inclusion of multiple objects in e-mail. other than text, each able to behandled at the receiving end.

• Binary encoding.• Insertion of non-ASCII code characters (eg names in Japanese) in the

header.

As MIME is a set of conventions which dictate how the main text of the message isto be handled, it employs a character string, referred to as the MIME header, tospecify the content and method of encoding used, and to identify whether or notMIME is used in the mail.

1.6.3 MIME HEADER

Messages using MIME contain a header field as follows.

MIME-Version: 1.0

The use or not of this field determines whether or not the main text of the messagefollows the MIME conventions. Currently, only Version 1.0 of MIME exists.

MIME Header

Header Meaning FormatMIME-Version Indicates that the message uses MIME MIME-Version: 1.0Content-Type Message data type Content-Type:

Type/Subtype [;parameter]Content-Transfer-Encoding

Encoding method used when sendingdata

Content-Transfer-Encoding:Encodingtype

Content-ID A unique data ID. Uses the message ID. Content-ID: Message IDContent-Description

Data description Content-Description:“This is MIME Data”

Content- MIME header for future expansion —

App

endi

x B

H13

2

MIME


[Content-Type] is added to the header to indicate that a message is in MIMEformat. The [Content-Transfer-Encoding] header is also added as necessary toindicate how the data has been encoded. As some types of data do not requireencoding, the [Content-Transfer-Encoding] header is not always required.

The [Content-Description] header is used when including comments. The contentof this header is interpreted as comments referring to the content of the message,and has no effect on operation of the software.

1.6.4 DATA TYPES SUPPORTED WITH MIME

The following data types may be specified in the [Content-Type] header.

• Text: Information consisting of characters. The ISO-2022-JP charactercode set is used in Japan, while US-ASCII is used for ASCIIcodes.

• Image: Still images such as GIF and JPEG data.• Audio: Audio information.• Video: Digital animation such as animation and MPEG.• Application: Various application files and standard data formats.• Multipart: Main text which includes multiple objects. A MIME header is also

added within the message to record other messages. Use of thisdata type allows sound, animation, and messages to be includedin the same e-mail message.

• Message: Text message information.

1.6.5 MULTIPART

A data type which allows inclusion of multiple data items (objects). It allows for theinclusion of text and attached files in messages, and is the most commonly usedtype.

Multipart indicates the inclusion of multiple parts (data) in the main text, while theContents-Type header indicates how the individual parts are handled.

Multipart supports the following sub-types to indicate the relationship between theindividual parts.

• Mixed: The message consists of multiple independent parts.• Alternative: The message consists of multiple parts of the same content, but

in different format.• Parallel: The message consists of multiple parts which are reproduced

and displayed simultaneously.• Digest: A collection of RFC822-format messages in digest format.

MIME 1 June, 1998


Example: Received Multipart Mail Header

Received: from f64g.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)

id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST



Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900


Mime-Version: 1.0


To: [email protected].

From: [email protected] Mail headerSubject: Fax Message NO.0003 from “+81454771786”


text message here

----ICFAX_60670AE6CB--

Content-Type: image/tiff; name = “FAX.TIF”

Content-Transfer-Encoding: base64 Part headerContent-Discription: “FAX.TIF”

SUkqAAgAAAARAP4ABAABAAAAAgAAAAABBAABAAAAwAYAAAEBBAABAAAAggQAAAIBAwABAAAAAQAAAAMBAwABAAAAAwAAAAYBAwABAAAAAAAAAAoBAwABAAAAAgAAABEBBAABAAAA6gAAABUBAwABAAAAAQAAABYBBAABAAAAggQAABcBBAABAAAA7FwAABoBBQABAAAA2gAAABsBBQABAAAA4gAAACQBBAABAAAABAAAACgBAwABAAAAAgAAACkBAwACAAAAAAABADEBAgAEAAAAICAgIAAAAADIAAAAAQAAAGQAAAABAAAAAICWUG1JAYCWUG1JAYA6XQlVNAqxa5L5Sa8AgEktODg4IWwuCCGOPMJQpVUFgSUU0risFhyDBBMRXPRSM0czZRVlJhLoRid2yafCjODgCNYmUCHEpR8AgEmxOC7H5ThDwcdZLzHXqpfk9bOjWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBgLJZAYCyWQGAslkBAA==

----ICFAX_60670AE6CB----

A Multipart message contains multiple parts, with the strings which delineate theseparts being specified with the boundary parameter.

Each part is delineated with

--boundary_string

and the final part is indicated with

--boundary_string--

App

endi

x B

H13

2

MIME


1.6.6 BINARY DATA ENCODING

The binary data must be encoded as character strings in order to insert a binary fileinto a text message. In Internet mail, non-ASCII data such as single-byte Katakanain Japanese is not sent correctly.

This encoding method is indicated in the [Content-Transfer-Encoding] field in theMIME header. The following encoding methods may be specified in the [Content-Transfer-Encoding] field.

• 7-bit: 7-bit code (8th not used)• 8-bit: Full 8 bits used• Binary: Binary data• Base64: Encoding of binary data in base64 notation• Quoted Printable: Encoding of character subject binary data

Of the above, only 7-bit, Quoted Printable, and Base64 are normally used with e-mail. Other encoding methods cannot be used unless they are supported over thenetwork.

1.6.7 BASE 64

Base 64 is commonly supported in e-mail application software for the transmissionof binary data.

This method of encoding takes each six bits of the original binary data andconverts it to numbers between 0 and 63, each of these numbers being assignedto one of 64 characters (26 upper case characters of the alphabet, 26 lower casecharacters of the alphabet, the numbers 0~9, and the + and / symbols).

APPENDIX C

AP

PE

ND

IX C

H13

2

H551 APPENDIX C-1 SM

Date:________________

Configuration Sheet for H132-41 Internet Fax

Customer Information:

Company Name : __________________________________________________________

Address : ________________________________________________________________

System Administrator Name : ______________________________ e-mail address: ___________________

Phone: ________________________________ Fax: _______________________________

Required Network Environment(These are the Network/PC requirements for the installation of the H551 Internet Fax. Please make sure you have all of the following.)

1. Local Area Network: ! Ethernet ! 10 Base-T ! TCP/IP Network OS : _______________________

2. Internet e-mail Server: ! SMTP Server ! POP3 Server

3. PC(Client) : ! Windows 95 Client running on the LAN The number of Users : ______________

Please note that Dial-up Connection and DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not supported.

Network Information

Prior to installation, please assign an IP address, email address along with a Login Name and Login Password for theH551 Internet Fax. In order to configure the machine during installation, please make sure you make the followinginformation available.

Internet Mail Settings

SMTP Server __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ SMTP SERVER IP address

POP3 Server __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ POP3 SERVER IP address

Host Name * ______________________________________ Host Name assigned to Internet Fax

e-mail Address ______________________________________ e-mail address for the Internet Fax

Domain Name * ______________________________________ Domain Name for Internet fax

Login Name ______________________________________ Login Name for Internet Fax

Login Password ______________________________________ Login Password for the Internet Fax

Note: Depending on the mail server, the host name and domain name may be mandatory. The names must bespelled correctly.

⇒

Rev. 01/00

SM APPENDIX C-2 H551

TCP/IP Settings

IP Address __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __IP address to be assigned for the Internet Fax

Subnet Mask __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __Subnet Mask IP address

Default Gateway __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __Gateway IP address

Access Control* __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __This can be omitted.

Access Mask* __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __This can be omitted.

Note: Access Control and Access Mask can be used to specify client PCs that can access to PC-Faxing functionby TCP/IP. *Leave these settings at 0.0.0.0 if you don’t need to use it. (Refer to the NIC Card operator manualPage. 43 for details.)

Other Settings

Admin. Mail Address* ______________________________________ This can be omitted.

Backup Mail Address* ______________________________________ This can be omitted.

Note: * Refer to the NIC Card operator manual Page. 44 for details.

Detail Information on your Internet e-mail server

Please provide the following information below for better technical assistance:

Network OS: Windows NT NetWare UNIX OS/2 VINES Other ( )

Network OS Version Number : ____________________

Internet Service Provider (ISP) name : _________________________________________________

SMTP Server POP3 Server

Brand (i.e. Compaq, Dell, etc) ___________________________ ___________________________

Model Number ___________________________ ___________________________

E-mail Server Software ___________________________ ___________________________

Software Version number ___________________________ ___________________________

Connection Method to ISP Dedicated Line Dedicated Line Other ( ) Other ( )

Is there Size Limitation set on the e-mail server? If so, what is the limitation size?

Yes No Yes No__________ MB __________ MB

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 176FAX

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER: H132 – 001 01/06/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – INTERNET FAX OPTION for 9878 RICOH - INTERNET FAX OPTION for FAX4800L SAVIN - INTERNET FAX OPTION for 3695

SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG CORRECTIONS

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all H132 Parts Section. Please update your PartsCatalogs with the following information.

REFERENCEPART NUMBER OLD DESCRIPTION NEW DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H1326010 PCB – IFAXF64G PCB – IFAXH132 1 3 4H1323188 Guide – F64G Guide – H132 1 3 7H5516020 PCB – OPIF64G PCB – OPIH132 1 3 9

No

te: This copy is intended as a m

aster original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

! P

AR

TS

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES CONTROL NO. 176FAX


BULLETIN NUMBER: H132 - 002 01/06/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – INTERNET FAX OPTION for 9878 RICOH - INTERNET FAX OPTION for FAX4800L SAVIN - INTERNET FAX OPTION for 3695

SUBJECT: SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒.

• 1-1 Updated Information (Specifications)• 1-3 Updated Information (Networking)• 3-3 Updated Information (Installing NIC FAX Board)• 3-4 Updated Information (Initial Settings)• 4-11 Updated Information (Service RAM Addresses)• B-5 Updated Information (DNS and Domains)• B-8 Updated Information (Message Headers)• B-10 Updated Information (Fields for Sending E-Mail)• C-1 Updated Information (Configuration Sheet)

No

te: This copy is intended as a m


! S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

SPECIFICATIONS

SM H5511-1


1.1 SPECIFICATIONS

TypeLAN board option for H551









TIFF-F (MH) format





50/60 Hz


Standby: 50 WTransmit: 60 WReceive: 300 WCopy: 330 W

RemarkThe machine must be set up as ane-mail client before installation. Anyclient PCs which are connected tothe machine through a LAN mustalso be e-mail clients, or somefeatures will not work (e.g., Auto-routing).

Rev. 01/00

⇒

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

H13

2

NETWORKING

SM 1-3 H551

1.3 NETWORKING

1.3.1 OVERVIEW

This model, the H132, is also known as the NIC fax.

The above drawing outlines some of the network operations that the H132 cansupport.




G3 FaxMachine

011-1-212-555-3456#8888

P S T N

NIC Fax

03-3123-4567

Japan

n i c f a x @ x y z . c o . j pLaser Printer

Server

Router



Internet

NIC Fax


Ethernet

Paper

Paper

Paper

PC display

RouterServer

Laser Printer

Ethernet


USA


H132V551.WMF

Rev. 01/00

⇒

Inst

alla

tio

nH

132


SM 3-3 H551




NOTE: Print out the RAM dump forthe following addresses before down-loading the new software. Refer tothe H551 service manual, page 4-5.480800 (H) to 480806 (H): Print topmargin 48080B (H) to 480811 (H):Print left margin. This is because themachine will automatically performthe RAM reset level 1 immediately after downloading the new software.

8. Download the new software to the machine. (Refer to the H551 service manual,page 4-13 for details.) Mount the EPROMs packaged with the optional unit withpart numbers in ascending order from sockets 1 to 4.

NOTE: RDS (Remote Diagnostics System) can be used to read the H551’sprogrammed dial data and write it back to the machine after the RAM reset level 1occurs. RDS must be enabled locally at the H551 by using the On/Off Switches(Function 62) or by changing System Switch 02 bit 7 to 1. RDS cannot be used toread system data (counters, bit switches, RTI, TTI, CSI, etc.) and write back to theH551.




H551I510.WMF

Rev. 01/00

⇒

⇒

INITIAL SETTINGS

H551 SM3-4



NOTE: Make sure that the following items are registered in the mail server beforeinstallation. The information listed below must be obtained from the User'sNetwork Administrator.


Items to Program Programmable Functions RemarksIP address User Function 61/Service Function 20Subnet mask User Function 61/Service Function 20Default gateway User Function 61/Service Function 20Access control Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalAccess mask Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalSMTP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorPOP server Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorHost name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

* See Note 2Mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorDomain name Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

* See Note 2Login name Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorLogin password Service Function 20/IC Fax MonitorAdministrator mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor OptionalBackup mail address Service Function 20/IC Fax Monitor Optional

NOTE: 1. If the machine is installed as a standalone fax, or if the mail server is notready, program only the following items.• IP address: 127. 0. 0. 1• POP Server: NULL (nothing to input)

NOTE: 2. Depending on the Mail Server, these items may be mandatory. Ifmandatory, the host name and domain name must be spelled correctly.

Rev. 01/00

⇒

Ser

vice

Tab

les

H13

2


SM 4-11 H551


!CAUTIONDo not change these settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Readonly.”

480005 (H) - RAM Reset Level 1 (Common use with H551)Change the data at this address to FF (H), then switch the machine off and on toreset all the system settings.

4800A0 to 4800AF (H) - LAN Switches

480286 to 480288 (H) - E-mail Tx counter

Address High Low480286 Tens digit Unit digit480287 Thousands digit Hundreds digit480288 Hundred thousands digit Ten thousands digit


48028A to 48028C (H) - E-mail Rx counter

48028E to 480290 (H) - LAN FAX counter

4BFC01 to 4BFC07 (H) - NIC ROM version (Read only)

4BFC28 to 4BFC47 (H) - Password for administrator mode (max. 31 characters -ASCII)

NOTE: If the number of characters are less than the maximum, add a stop code(00 (H)) after the last character.

4BFC4C to 4BFC4F (H) - IP address

e.g. 133.139.24.3

4BFC4C (H) 1st address: 133 85 (H)4BFC4D (H) 2nd address: 139 8B (H)4BFC4E (H) 3rd address: 24 18 (H)4BFC4F (H) 4th address: 3 03 (H)


4BFC50 to 4BFC53 (H) - Subnet mask information

4BFC58 to 4BFC5B (H) - Default gateway address

4BFC5C to 4BFC5F (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX(Access control)

4BFC60 to 4BFC63 (H) - Restriction on communication of LAN FAX(Access mask)

4BFC64 to 4BFC67 (H) - SMTP server IP address

4BFC68 to 4BFC6B (H) - POP server IP address

⇒

Rev. 01/00

Ap

pen

dix

BH

132

INTERNET MAIL


1.2.4 DNS AND DOMAINS

The IP address allows destinations within the Internet to be identified. This IPaddress is, however, a string of numbers not easily remembered by the user. Toresolve this problem, a corresponding name is added so that the user need onlyspecify the name in order to identify the destination.

DNS was developed for this purpose. Internet domain names are distributedamong organizations in a hierarchical manner, with lower order domains beingmanaged by the higher order domain. All organizations participating in the Internethave a domain name. The domain name first identifies countries, and issubsequently further divided in a tree structure to identify organizations.

The name server (DNS server) located in each domain holds the information aboutthe domains and hosts under its management. When the client communicatesusing a host name or domain name, an inquiry is made to the DNS to obtain thedestination IP address. Note that this domain name structure is independent of thephysical structure of the network. The items in brackets below are examples ofdomain and mail addresses.

H132X510..PCX

Ver. 01/00

⇒

MESSAGE HEADERS


1.3 MESSAGE HEADERS

1.3.1 REQUESTS FOR COMMENTS

The basic protocols used for transmission of messages on the Internet are definedin RFC822. RFC822 primarily defines the header information for e-mail, with thedetails of the main text of the message being defined in MIME (RFC2045 - 2047).

NOTE: 1) An RFC (Request For Comments) is a document formally released bythe Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). The IETF has released awide variety of RFCs on technical matters (e.g., network protocols)related to the Internet environment.

2) MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) is a protocol whichremoved such restrictions as the number of characters per line, and themaximum size of an e-mail transmission. It also made possible thetransmission of non-character data (e.g., programs and bitmaps).

1.3.2 HEADER FORMAT

The header of an e-mail message consists of a header and the main text. A blankline is inserted between this header and the main text (the blank line is not includedin the header).

The header is defined as a collection of fields, with the field format as follows.

field name ”:” content

An example of the ‘To’ field, indicating the destination, is as follows.

To:[email protected]

Header Example:

Received: from H132.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp ([133.139.167.30]) by bb.shinyoko.ricoh.co.jp(4.1/2.8Wb-91Jan07)

id AA15193; Sun, 15 Feb 98 14:53:50 JST



Date: 15 Feb 1998 14:54:06 +0900


Mime-Version: 1.0



From: [email protected]

Subject: Fax Message NO.0003 from “+81454771786”


⇒

Rev. 01/00

MESSAGE HEADERS


1.3.4 FIELDS FOR SENDING E-MAIL

From FieldThe From field indicates the person sending the mail. The difference between theFrom and Sender fields is that between ‘the person creating the message’ and ‘theperson actually sending the message’. These two fields are used when the twodiffer. When the From field is omitted, the Sender field is added automatically.

When a error occurs, a error notification is sent to the destination in the Senderfield. When the Sender field has been omitted, the notification is sent to thedestination in the From field.

Fields containing mail addresses may also include real names as a comment (thesame applies to the Person Sending Mail and Addressee fields). In both casesbelow , ‘IC FAX’ is handled as a comment, and [email protected] is recognized asthe address.

Example 1 From: IC FAX <[email protected]>

Example 2 From: [email protected] (IC FAX)

Multiple mail addresses may be delineated by commas, and both address formatsmay be used together.

Reply-To FieldReply-To clearly specifies the address to which the reply is to be sent. As this fieldmay be omitted, it is possible that mail may be sent with this field blank. In suchcases, the mail is returned to the address in the From field.

When both the From and Reply-To fields are used, the latter has priority.

The Return-Path field appears to have a similar function at first glance,. However itis not for return of mail, but is automatically added by the transfer system to specifythe person submitting the mail, and is used to investigate the mail route when anerror occurs.

1.3.5 ADDRESSEE FIELDS

To FieldThe To field specifies the addressee for the mail. As with the From field, multiplemail addresses may be delineated with commas. The To field differs from the Ccfield in that only the name of the person sending the message is specified.

Cc FieldMail is sent to the addresses in the Cc (carbon copy) field in the same way as tothe address in the To field. The difference only with the To field is whether thename is in the To field or the Cc field of the received mail.

⇒

Rev. 01/00

AP

PE

ND

IX C

H13

2

H551 APPENDIX C-1 SM

Date:________________

Configuration Sheet for H132-41 Internet Fax

Customer Information:

Company Name : __________________________________________________________

Address : ________________________________________________________________

System Administrator Name : ______________________________ e-mail address: ___________________

Phone: ________________________________ Fax: _______________________________

Required Network Environment(These are the Network/PC requirements for the installation of the H551 Internet Fax. Please make sure you have all of the following.)

1. Local Area Network: ! Ethernet ! 10 Base-T ! TCP/IP Network OS : _______________________

2. Internet e-mail Server: ! SMTP Server ! POP3 Server

3. PC(Client) : ! Windows 95 Client running on the LAN The number of Users : ______________

Please note that Dial-up Connection and DHCP(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is not supported.

Network Information

Prior to installation, please assign an IP address, email address along with a Login Name and Login Password for theH551 Internet Fax. In order to configure the machine during installation, please make sure you make the followinginformation available.

Internet Mail Settings

SMTP Server __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ SMTP SERVER IP address

POP3 Server __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ . __ __ __ POP3 SERVER IP address

Host Name * ______________________________________ Host Name assigned to Internet Fax

e-mail Address ______________________________________ e-mail address for the Internet Fax

Domain Name * ______________________________________ Domain Name for Internet fax

Login Name ______________________________________ Login Name for Internet Fax

Login Password ______________________________________ Login Password for the Internet Fax

Note: Depending on the mail server, the host name and domain name may be mandatory. The names must bespelled correctly.

⇒

Rev. 01/00

H132

PARTS CATALOG

This section instructs you as to the numbers and names of parts on this machine

2H132 Parts Location and List

PARTS LIST (H132)

F64G.WMF

3H132 Parts Location and List

PART LIST (H132)IndexNo. Part No. Description Q’ty Per

Assembly 1 H1323183 Shield Panel - Option 1 2 H1324561 Sheet - Operation Panel (US) 1

H1324570 Sheet - Operation Panel (EU) 1 3 H1433335 Earth Clip 1 4 H1326010 PCB – IFAXH132 1 5 H1435300 Flat Cable - OPIF G4 1 6 H5153186 Ground Plate - G4 1 7 H1323188 Guide – H132 1 8 H1328650 Operation Manual - Viewer - ENG (US) 1

H1328600 Operation Manual (US) 1 9 H5516020 PCB – OPIH132 1

IndexNo. Part No. Description Q’ty Per

Assembly101 09513006B Philips Screw With Flat Washer - M3x6102 04523008Z Bind Tapping Screw - M3x8103 16070576 Sleeve Core (US)

16070627 Ferrite Core (EU)

Rev. 1/6/00

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINBULLETIN NUMBER: FAX4700L-001 DATE

APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L

SUBJECT: PRINTER DRIVER

GENERAL:Up to two (3) Optional Cassettes can be installed on the FAX4700L. The Printer Driverdoes not allow for three cassettes at the same time in the printer mode. Therefore, beforeprinting, the cassette you would like to use should be chosen as the optional cassette inthe user program mode. Select the cassette in accordance with the following procedure.

PROCEDURE:1.Press Function 6 0 2 2 2 2 6 and 2.

2.Press the Key until "CASSETTE FOR PRINTER SELECT" is displayed."OPEN CST CST1 CST2" are displayed in this screen, if three (3) cassettes areinstalled.

3.Press the Key until your choice is selected.

4.Press the YES Key to confirm your choice.

Cassette 2Option Type 140F or S

Note: This copy intended as m

aster of original for reproduction of additional bulletins.

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP

F S

M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PA

RTS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

Side CassetteOption Type 100

Cassette 1Option Type 140F or S

TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINBULLETIN NUMBER: FAX4700L-002 03/25/96

APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L w/ PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F

SUBJECT: MULTI-FEED, PAPER SKEW OR BROKEN /DISLODGED PAPER FEEDROLLER

SYMPTOM NO. 1: Multi-feed or paper skew with the Optional Paper Feed Unit Type 140F.

NOTE: This symtom will not occure with the PFU 140S

SYMPTOM NO. 2:At installation, when the Paper Feed Unit is removed from the box, you may notice thatthe Snap Ring and/or Bushing (0805 3385) may have detach from the Paper Feed Rollerduring shipping. In some cases, the Paper Feed Roller is broken on the left side wherethe Snap Ring (H006 2383) attaches. This symptom has only occurred during shippingand should not occur under normal operating conditions.

CAUSE FOR SYMPTOM NO. 1:The paper releases from the corner separators when the PFU cassette is forcefullyclosed.

CAUSE FOR SYMPTOM NO. 2:In an effort to quickly remedy Symptom No. 1, a modification was put into production. Themodification corrected symptom 1 but is causing symptom 2 during shipping.

Continued...




F S

M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PA

RTS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

Broken Area

E-Ring and BushingLoose or Dislodged

Technical Service Bulletin FAX4700L-002Page 2 of 7

PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE FOR SYMPTOM NO. 1 and 2:The Paper Feed Unit Type 140F has been modified so the Paper Feed Unit Cassettecannot be forcefully closed. Also, the paper is now lifted in two small stages rather thanone large stage. Refer to the Field Countermeasure for full details of the modification.

NOTE: Step 14 of the Modification Procedure has been added to correct Symptom No. 2.Refer to the Units affected below for the machines that may exhibit Symptom No.2 , as some machines were shipped with the original ProductionCountermeasure (No step 14).

UNITS AFFECTED: Paper Feed Unit Type 140F’s manufactured between serial numbers M5451200150 andM5460100000 had the original modification kit installed during production. Thesemachines should not exhibit symptom 1 but may exhibit Symptom No. 2 during shipping.

Paper Feed Unit Type 140F’s manufactured between serial number M5451200000 andM5451200150 and after M5460100000 will have the updated modification kit installedduring production. These machines should not exhibit either Symptom 1 or 2.

FIELD COUNTERMEASURE FOR SYMPTOM 1:A Paper Feed Unit modification kit is available. The Kit consist of several parts that mustbe installed by utilizing the procedure on the following pages of this bulletin.

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION

H515 9600 Paper Feed Unit Modification Kit

Based on machine shipment records, one (1) Modification Kit will automatically be sent forevery two (2) Paper Feed Units your dealership has purchased. Additional kits will besupplied upon request.

Ricoh will exchange Paper Feed Units that have not been installed, are new in box andare within the Units Affected. Contact your local Ricoh Region Operations Group forexchange instructions.

FIELD COUNTERMEASURE FOR SYMPTOM 2:Replace the broken Paper Feed Roller. Utilize the existing E-Ring and bushing. Thissymptom has only occurred during shipping and should not occur under normal operatingconditions.

If the Paper Feed Roller is not broken but the E-Ring and/or Bushing has come off,reattach them.

A Paper Feed Roller can be acquired at no charge by completing the form on the lastpage of this bulletin.

Continued...

Technical Service Bulletin FAX4700L-002Page 3 of 7

PAPER FEED UNIT TYPE 140F MODIFICATIONPROCEDURE

UNIT TYPE 140F MODIFICATION (KIT P/N H515 9600)

Kit Contents

NO. DESCRIPTION QTY.

1 Spring - Corner Separator 1

2 Link Ass’y Rear 1

3 Link Ass’y- Front 1

4 Cassette Rack 1

5 Bottom Guide 1

6 Bottom Stopper 1

7 Lock Release Guide 1

8 Spacer 1

9 Guard Plate 1

10 Guide Plate - Cassette 1

11 Oil Damper Bracket 1

12 Oil Damper 1

13 Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3x6 2

14 E-Ring -JRE4 2

15 Film - Bottom 1

NOTE: This procedure requires attaching parts which utilize peel and stick tape. Ensureall surfaces are clean prior to attaching the tape.

STEP 1Remove the Cassette from the Paper Feed Unit and turn the Cassette over.

STEP 2Assemble and install the Rear LinkAssembly to the bottom of theCassette.

a. Attach the Spring on the Rear LinkAssembly as illustrated. Side (B) of thespring should be formed so that it cannotcome off. Side (A) of the spring shouldstay as is.

b.Remove the peel and stick tape from theback of the Rear Link Assembly and attachit to the Cassette as illustrated.

Continued...

Paper Cassette Bottom

AB

Rear Link Assembly

Fit

Push

Paper Cassette

PushFit

Technical Service Bulletin No. FAX4700L-002Page 4 of 7

STEP 3Remove the peel and stick tape from theFront Link Assembly and attach it to theCassette as illustrated.

STEP 4Remove the peel and stick tape fromthe Cassette Rack and attach it to theright side of the Cassette as illustrated

STEP 5Remove the peel and stick tape fromthe Bottom Guide and attach it to thefront left edge of the Cassette BottomPlate as illustrated.

STEP 6Remove and discard the (2) two SidePlate Covers from the Right Side Platein the Paper Feed Unit.

STEP 7Remove the peel and stick tapefrom the Bottom Stopper andattach it to the front left side ofthe Paper Feed Unit asillustrated.

CassetteRackCassette

Right Side Plate

Push

Side Plate Covers

Front LinkAssembly

Push

PushFit Fit

CassetteBottom Plate

Fit Edge OfThe Hole

BottomGuide

CassetteBottom Plate

On Line

Bottom Stopper

RightSide

LeftSide

Push and Fit

Continued...


STEP 8Remove and discard the Lock ReleaseGuide from the Base of the Paper FeedUnit. Install the new style Lock ReleaseGuide utilizing the same mounting screws.

STEP 9 Attach the spacer to the Bottom Plate.

a.Carefully peel the front side of themylar off the Bottom Plate in thePaper Feed Unit as illustrated.

b.Remove the peel and stick tapefrom the Spacer and attach itBottom Plate as illustrated.

c.Reattach the Mylar.

STEP 10Remove the peel and stick tape from theGuard Plate and attach it to the Right SidePlate in the Paper Feed Unit as illustrated.

STEP 11Remove the peel and stick tape from theGuide Plate and attach it to the Right SidePlate in the Paper Feed Unit as illustrated.

STEP 12Remove the Right Side Cover from thePaper Feed Unit. Remove the peel andstick tape from the Oil Damper Bracketand attach it to the Right Side Plate asillustrated.

Lock ReleaseGuide

TappingScrew

Base

Front

Screw

CenterSpacer

Center

Peel OffMylar

Spacer

Base

Mylar

Guard Plate

Push and Hit

Guide Plate

PushFit

Right Side Plate

Oil DamperBracket

Continued...


STEP 13Attach the Oil Damper to the Paper Feed Unit.

a. Insert the Cassette into the Paper Feed Unit leaving approximately 12 inchessticking out.

b.Loosely attach the Oil Damper onto the Oil Damper Bracket by utilizing the twosupplied screws.

c.Line up the teeth of the Cassette Rack with the Oil Damper gear teeth then tightenthe screws.

d.Open and close the Cassette several times and check the movement of theCassette.

STEP 14Replace the Paper Feed Roller E-Ring with (2) new type E-Rings.Check operation and make adjustments if necessary.

Continued...

Cassette Rack

Oil DamperBracket

Screws

Oil Damper

Oil DamperBracket

X2OLDE-RING

NEWE-RING X 2

Tech Service Bulletin No. FAX4700L-002Page 7 of 7

SUBJECT: PFU140F PAPER FEED ROLLERFax this entire page in "DETAIL" mode ATTN: Technical Services - Facsimile

FAX Number: (201) - 244-2634

Each serial number given will represent a request for one Paper Feed Roller.

PFU140 F - Serial Number (s)

1

2

3

4

5

All serial number information will be verified before shipment is made. Your PFU140Fmust be within the Units Affected to receive these parts at no charge.

RETURN SHIPPING LABEL - PLEASE TYPE OR PRINT CLEARLY.

FROM: Ricoh Technical Services, 155 Passaic Avenue, Fairfield, NJ 07004

NAME:

ADDRESS:

CITY: STATE: ZIP CODE:

ATTENTION: PHONE # :

DEALER ACCOUNT NUMBER:

This exchange procedure isvalid now through Aug. 31, 1996



SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

GENERAL:This information should be incorporated into all existing Ricoh FAX4700L Parts Catalogdocumentation.

••UPDATE NO. 1 - To reduce electrical noise, a Filter was added to the Upper PFUHarness.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE INDEX

H515 5333 H516 5332 PFU 140S Harness - Upper 1 0 1-5 23

PFU 140F Harness - Upper 1 0 1-5 19

UNITS AFFECTED:All PFU Type 140 F and S units manufactured after serial numbers M5451000000 and M551000000 respectively will have the filter added to the Upper PFU Harness duringproduction.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:

0OLD and NEW parts can be used in bothOLD and NEW machines. 2

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLDmachines. OLD parts can be used in OLDand NEW machines.

1NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEWmachines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used inNEW machines.

3OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEWmachines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used inOLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufacturedafter the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...




F S

M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PA

RTS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L


••UPDATE NO. 2 - Correct the Part Catalog as follows:

Correct the following Part Numbers. REFERENCE

INCORRECTPART NO.

CORRECTPART NO.

DESCRIPTION PAGE INDEX

H516 5012 H515 5324 Ground Wire - Image Sensor 1-11 21

H515 3376 H516 3380 Film Stay 1-25 28

Delete the following parts from the Parts Catalog. REFERENCE

PART NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE INDEX

H516 3407 Cassette Base - A4/LT 1-29 5

H521 3151 Sponge - Base - Upper Left 1-25 6

Correct the following description. REFERENCE

INCORRECT DESCRIPTION CORRECT DESCRIPTION PAGE INDEX

Cassette Cassette Base - LT 1-29 5

Safety Switch JFA1I-AA20 Interlock Switch - Fail 1-23 109

••UPDATE NO. 3 - To meet safety standards, Contact Glass Holders have been added.

REFERENCE

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE INDEX

H515 1090 Holder - Contact Glass - Left 1 1-11 46*

H515 1091 Holder - Contact Glass - Right 1 1-11 47*

* DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0451200000 will have theLeft and Right Contact Glass Holders installed during production.

Left Contact GlassHolder

Added

Right Contact GlassHolder

Added



SUBJECT: COPY QUALITY

GENERAL:To reduce ozone emissions and improve Tx and copy quality, Sponges have been addedto and removed from the Main Frame and ADF as illustrated on page 2 of this bulletin.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE INDEX

H515 3192 Sponge - Duct - Upper 0-1 1-25 40*

H515 3193 Sponge - Duct - Middle 0-1 1-25 41*

H515 3195 Sponge - Duct - Rear - Right 0-1 1-25 42*

H515 3198 Sponge - Duct - Upper - Left 0-1 1-25 43*

H515 3170 Sponge - ADF - Rear 0-1 1-9 29*

H515 3171 Sponge - ADF - Rear 2 0-1 1-9 30*

H515 3172 Sponge - ADF - Right 0-1 1-9 31*

H515 3173 Sponge - ADF - 2 0-1 1-9 32*

H515 3174 Sponge - Lock 0-1 1-9 33*

H515 3175 Sponge - ADF - Rear - Front 0-1 1-9 34*

H515 3176 Sponge - Fan 0-1 1-23 29*

H516 3150 Sponge - 3 1-0 1-25 37

H516 3152 Sponge - 5 1-0 1-25 39

* DENOTES NEW ITEM

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0451100000 will have theSponges added to and removed from the Main Frame and ADF during production.

Continued...




F S

M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PA

RTS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L


ADF Sponge-Rear Front(H515 3175)

ADF

ADF Sponge-Rear 2 (H515 3171)

ADF Sponge-Rear (H515 3170)

ADF Sponge-2 (H515 3173)

ADF Sponge-Right (H515 3172)

Lock Sponge (H515 3174)

Development Unit Spacer(H515 3116)

Duct Sponge-Rear-Right(H515 3195)

Duct Sponge-Middle(H5153193)

Duct Sponge-Upper (H515 3192)

Duct Sponge-Upper Left(H515 3198)

Fan Sponge(H515 3176)

Cooling Fan(H516 5041)



SUBJECT: MIRROR CLEANING TOOLS

GENERAL:Cleaning Tools for the First, Second and Third Mirror are now available. Follow theprocedure below when utilizing the tools. The tools can be acquired through normal NSPCchannels.

NOTE: A Cleaning Tool for the Scanner Mirror is not available at this time.


H515 9350 Cleaning Tool - R1: 1st MirrorCleaning Tool - R2: 2nd MirrorCleaning Tool - R3: 3rd MirrorFelt for the Cleaning Tool

1st, 2nd and 3rd Mirror Cleaning Procedure:1. Attach the felt pad to the Cleaning Tool.

2. (For the 1st Mirror and 2nd Mirror) - Remove the Exposure Glass and clean the 1stand 2nd Mirror as illustrated in below.

3. (For the 3rd Mirror) - Remove the Lens Cover and the Shading Pate and clean the3rd Mirror as illustrated below.




F S

M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

ALITY

PA

RTS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

R2UPCleaning Toolfor the 2nd Mirror

2nd Mirror

Felt Pad

R1UP

Cleaning Toolfor the 3rd Mirror

3rd Mirror

1st Mirror

Cleaning Toolfor the 1st Mirror

Felt Pad

Felt Pad


APPLICABLE MODEL: FAX4700L w/ ISDN Interface Type 140

SUBJECT: ISDN INTERFACE INSTALLATIONPRECAUTION

SYMPTOM:The Board Bracket Screw is too long and comes in contact with the IC Card Guide andpossibly the IC Card.

CAUSE:The thickness of the Board Bracket is too thin.

FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:Do not use the screw that is packaged with the Kit. Use a short screw (Tapping Screw -M3x6 P/N 08025205).

ISDN Interface Type 140 Kits shipped with a Green Mark on the Carton have the shorterscrew packaged with the Kit.

PRODUCTION COUNTERMEASURE:The thickness of the Board Bracket has been increased.

No

te: This copy intended as m



F

S M

T

RA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PAR

TS

PAP

ER

FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

TH

ER

E

LE

CTR

ICA

L

Tapping Screw

Board Bracket

IC Card Guide



SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

GENERAL:The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s)supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 sets of replacement page(s).

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow. ⇒4-32 Updated Information

No




F

S M

T

RA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PAR

TS

PAP

ER

FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

TH

ER

E

LE

CTR

ICA

L





••UPDATE NO. 1 - To improve paper size selection, a Mark and Blind have beenadded to the Paper Cassette Type 100 Paper Tray as illustrated.

The part number for the Paper Tray has not changed and the oldand new style Paper Trays are interchangeable.

••UPDATE NO. 2 - Please correct your Parts Catalog as follows.

REFERENCE

INCORRECTPART NO.

CORRECTPART NO.


H515 1322 H516 1263 Seal 2 1-9 4

PFU Type 140 F Section

H515 0101 H515 3611 Side Fence Assembly 1-7 1

PFU Type 140 S Section

H515 0101 H515 3611 Side Fence Assembly 1-7 2

No




F

S M

T

RA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PAR

TS

PAP

ER

FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

TH

ER

E

LE

CTR

ICA

L

Blind

Mark



SUBJECT: FCE ROM UPGRADE

GENERAL:The FAX4700L FCE ROM has been upgraded to Rev "C". The upgrade will address thefollowing symptom.

SYMPTOM:Incorrect Page numbering when using the Auto Document Feature.

When an Auto Document is attached to two (2) original pages, the page numbering will beincorrect.

Page 1 will show 1/2 Page 2 will show 2/2Page 3 will show 3/2.

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460200000 will have FCEROM Rev. "C" installed during production.

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINES FIRMWAREAs you should already know, replaceable ROM’s are no longer used in the new family ofRicoh Facsimile machines. To upgrade your machine’s firmware you must take advantageof one of four new service tools (RDS, RRW, EPROM PCB, or a Like Model FCE). Referto Publications Bulletin PUB-069 for a full explanation of the FLASH ROM/SRAM CopyTool.

To upgrade your machines with firmware:

1. Acquire the new version firmware. Download the ROM data or RDS files via theRicoh Technical Services BBS (BBS No. 201-882-5243) or via RDS.

If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS or RDS, one master ROM can beacquired by contacting the Facsimile Hotine.

2. Once you have the ROM, ROM data or RDS Files, transfer the data to yourmachines via one of the four above mentioned service tools.

No




F

S M

T

RA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PAR

TS

PAP

ER

FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

TH

ER

E

LE

CTR

ICA

L





••UPDATE NO. 1 - PAPER CASSETTE TYPE 100 - The Paper Tray has beenmodified as illustrated. The modification will increase the strengthof the paper tray and prevent the spring from detaching if the traystopper is broken.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE INDEXH515 3533 H516 3531 Spring - Gear Arm 1

3/S31 13

There is no part number change for the new style Paper Tray Type 100 P/N H5163510. This modification has been implemented in May 1996.

1 3 27


0OLD and NEW parts can be used in bothOLD and NEW machines. 2

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLDmachines. OLD parts can be used in OLDand NEW machines.

1NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEWmachines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used inNEW machines.

3OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEWmachines. NEW parts CAN NOT be used inOLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufacturedafter the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Continued...




F S

M

TR

AN

SM

IT / RE

CE

IVE

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

P

AR

TS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

[Paper Tray]

Hole for Spring

StopperRounded

OldSpring

Added

NewSpring

Added


••UPDATE NO. 2 - PFU 140F and S - Make the following Parts Catalog Correction.

REFERENCE

INCORRECTPART NO.

CORRECTPART NO.


H515 3790 H110 3851 Joint Bracket 140F 1-3 11

H515 3790 H110 3851 Joint Bracket 140S 1-3 22

••UPDATE NO. 3 - The Development Unit has been modified to improve toner flowand prevent vertical gray bands.

REFERENCE


H5162401 H5162408 Development Unit - A4 1 1 1-15 6

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460500000 respectively willhave the new style Development Unit installed during production.



SUBJECT: ADF PAPER MISFEED

SYMPTOM:The Rubber of the Separation Plate Assembly may dislodge.

CAUSE:Insufficient length of the Pressure Plate "Hook".

SOLUTION: The Pressure Plate has been modified as illustrated.

REFERENCE


H515 1205 H515 1355 Separation Plate Ass’y 1 1 1-7 25

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460700000 will have themodified Separation Plate Assembly installed during production.




F S M

TRA

NS

MIT / R

EC

EIV

EC

OP

Y Q

UA

LITYPA

RTS

PAP

ER

FEE

D M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

OTH

ER

1.5mm

Rubber

Plastic Hook increased by 1.5mm

Side view of the Separation Plate Assembly




GENERAL:The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s)supplied. Each bulletin package contains 1 sets of replacement page(s).

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow. ⇒3-13 New Information - Transportation Procedure




F S

M

TR

AN

SM

IT / RE

CE

IVE

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

P

AR

TS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

3.4 TRANSPORTATION The FAX4700L and its optional components must be packaged according to the followingprocedure. Failure to follow the instructions may result in damage to the machines or theiroptional components.

If the FAX4700L and its optional components are being shipped, check each step as theyare performed and have the person responsible for the packaging sign-off at the end ofthe procedure. Include one checked / signed sheet for each machine and each optionalcomponent. If the unit is received back at Ricoh damaged due to packaging faults, yourdealership/district may be responsible for the full amount of the unit. Please understandour position, as many units are received damaged and deemed unusable due topackaging neglect.

MACHINE OPTION CONFIGURATION (Check all that apply):

FAX4700L Handset Bracket PC FAX Expander

Paper Feed Unit (s) Printer Interface Unit Hard Drive

Handset Optional Cards

TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE:

1.Turn "OFF" the machine power and then unplug the machine.

2.Remove the following components (if applicable):

Phone line Copy Tray(s)

Power cord Handset

Printer cable Handset Bracket

Document Tray Serial Cable

3.Remove the Paper Feed Unit.

4.Remove the CTM and place it on a protected surface as toner scatter may occur.

5.Vacuum all the toner from the Development Unit.

6.Do not reinstall the CTM. This component must be packaged separately.

7.Apply adhesive tape over the Development Unit openings as illustrated. This is toprevent any possible toner spillage. To prevent from damaging the foam seals, usetape with a light adhesive.

Continued...

DRUM

Apply adhesivetape over theseholes.

Toner may escapefrom these holes.

8.Secure the Copy / Document Trays.

9.Tape all covers shut with Strapping Tape.

10. Note any machine defects prior to shipment and/or list any comments at this time.

11. Pack the FAX4700L in its original box. Ensure the correct serial number is indicatedon the outside of the box.

NOTE: If the original box cannot be found, a box and packing material of original size andweight should be acquired and used.

12. Individually pack all the accessories and CTM in their original box. Ensure thecorrect serial numbers are indicated on the outside of the respective box.

NOTE: If the original box cannot be found, a box and packing material of original size andweight should be acquired and used.

13. Ensure all the boxes are properly labeled (e.g. 1 of 2 - 2 of 2).

14. Number of pieces shipped (e.g. Base Unit, CTM,1 Accessory = 3).

Number of pieces:

15.

Technicians Name (Please Print):

Technicians signature:

Date:



SUBJECT: FUSING SEPARATION HOOK

GENERAL:The following Parts Catalog correction should be incorporated into all existing FAX4700LParts Catalog documentation.

INCORRECT

REFERENCE

PART NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE INDEX

H515 2148 Left Lock Lever 1-21 6

CORRECT

REFERENCE

CORRECTPART NO.

CORRECT DESCRIPTION

PAGE INDEX

H515 2181 Separation Hook - Fusing 1-21 6




F S

M

TR

AN

SM

IT / RE

CE

IVE

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

P

AR

TS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L



SUBJECT: HORIZONTAL WHITE BANDS

SYMPTOM:Horizontal white bands (in even intervals) on the copied or received image. This can occuron new out of box machines.

CAUSE:Adhesive secures Gear (7) to the Drum. A small amount of the adhesive evaporates andsettles on the Drum Shaft. The adhesive on the Drum Shaft causes an incomplete chargefrom the Drum to ground through the Shaft.

FIELD COUNTERMEASURE:Clean the Drum Shaft by following the procedure below.

DRUM CLEANING PROCEDURE:NOTE: Never touch the drum surface with bare hands.

1.Cover the drum with a piece of paper.

2.Remove E-Ring (1).

3.Remove Green Lever (2).

4.Remove E-Ring (3).

5.Remove Gear (4).

6.Pull the Drum Shaft completely out (5).

7.Clean the Shaft with alcohol and a soft cloth (6).

8.Re-assemble the drum and test machine.

NOTE: Ensure the shaft is completely cleaned as the adhesive does not come off easily.




F S

M

TR

AN

SM

IT / RE

CE

IVE

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

P

AR

TS

PA

PE

R FE

ED

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

O

THE

R

ELE

CTR

ICA

L

(1) (2)

(3)(4) (5)

(6) (7)(7)

(6)

(5)

Pull the shaft completely out





••UPDATE NO. 1 - The Development Unit is now available as and assembly. Theindividual parts of the Development Unit can still be acquiredseparately.

The Rubber Roller Assembly will no longer be available as anassembly. The individual parts of the Rubber Roller Assembly canbe acquired separately.

REFERENCE

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE INDEXH516 2408 H515 9570 Development Unit Assy 1 1-15 6

••UPDATE NO. 2 - To prevent the paper dust from dropping onto the scanner mirror, aseal and two spacers have been added.

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY

H515 1239 Seal - Scanner 1

H515 1241 Spacer - Scanner - Middle 4

H515 1242 Spacer - Scanner - Side 4

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0460500000 will have theSeal and Spacers installed during production.

No




F

S M

TR

AN

SM

IT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PA

RT

S

PA

PE

R F

EE

D

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

OT

HE

R

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L

3

6

Scanner Seal H515 1242

Scanner BaseBottom View

H515 1242H515 1241

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number



SUBJECT: FCE ROM UPGRADE

GENERAL:The FAX4700L FCE ROM has been upgraded to Rev "F". The upgrade will address thefollowing symptom.

SYMPTOM:• The number of pages were not printed correct when the documents were over

100 pages.

• Misspelling in Power Failure Report (Failuer - Failure).

UNITS AFFECTED:All FAX4700L machines manufactured after serial number M0461000000 will have FCEROM Rev. "F" installed during production.

UPGRADING YOUR MACHINES FIRMWAREAs you should already know, replaceable ROM’s are no longer used in the new family ofRicoh Facsimile machines. To upgrade your machine’s firmware you must take advantageof one of four new service tools (RDS, RRW, EPROM PCB, or a Like Model FCE). Referto Publications Bulletin PUB-069 for a full explanation of the FLASH ROM/SRAM CopyTool.

To upgrade your machines with firmware:

1. Acquire the new version firmware. Download the ROM data or RDS files via theRicoh Technical Services BBS (BBS No. 201-882-5243) or via RDS.

2. Once you have the ROM, ROM data or RDS Files, transfer the data to yourmachines via one of the four above mentioned service tools. SUBJECT:

No




F

S M

TR

AN

SM

IT / R

EC

EIV

E

CO

PY

QU

AL

ITY

PA

RT

S

PA

PE

R F

EE

D

ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

OT

HE

R

EL

EC

TR

ICA

L

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEK NFfFLfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0

SUBJECT: SEAL-B & SEAL SHEET

GENERAL:

The following Parts Catalog Corrections are being issued for all FAX4700L Parts Catalogs. This informationshould be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.

Please delete the following items from the Parts Catalog.

REFERENCE

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H5152535 Seal - B 1 0 1 - 15 18

H5155396 Seal Sheet 1 0 1 - 15 56

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

O

TH

ER

Note: T

his copy intended as master of original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.

S

M

CO

PY

QU

ALIT

Y

PAR

TS

Delete item #18 & #56

18

56

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEL NHfEHfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0

SUBJECT: FAX4700L WITH PC FAX EXPANDER (PCFE) TYPE 140

SYMPTOM:

1. No Multiple transmission from a computer via the FAX4700L-PCFE. This problem occurs only when the FAX4700-PCFE, Hard Drive and the Function Upgrade Card (orFunction Upgrade Card plus NEST) options are all installed.

2. FAX ON DEMAND does not function after installing the PCFE firmware. This problem occurs onlywhen using the FOD function prior to installing the PCFE. In this case, the FOD files stored beforePCFE installation will not be accessible after installing the PCFE firmware. This means that theseFOD files will not be able to be polled from a remote terminal.

CAUSE:

1. Firmware.

2. This problem is caused by the difference in the file structure between the original FAX4700L firmwareand the PCFE firmware.

SOLUTION:

1. The firmware has been updated (Rev B, ver 2.00).

2. To prevent this problem from occurring, the previously stored FOD files should be deleted before thePCFE firmware is installed. We strongly recommend a level-3 initialization (System Switch 00, bit 1 = 1) be used to delete these FOD files before installing the PCFE firmware.

ORDERING PROCEDURE:

FAX4700L PCFE ROMs or RDS Files can be acquired via the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. Reference the.TXT file attached to the downloaded ROM/RDS files for additional information.

BBS No. 201-882-5243 - Please refer to Service News and Information No. 147.

If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS, contact the Facsimile Technical Services Hotline.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

ý O

TH

ER

Note: T



F

S M

ý C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

ýý PA

RT

S

TR

AN

SM

IT / R

EC

EIV

E

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NEM NHfEHfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0

SUBJECT: AUTO SERVICE CALL 0-05

SYMPTOM:

1. Auto Service Call 0-05 (Fusing Unit Failure).

2. Constant "Add Toner" condition.

CAUSE:

Evaporated Silicon Oil from the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad may chemically react with the 24V contacts of theinterlock switch. This results in a black deposit forming on the switch contacts which interrupts the 24Vpassing through the switch.

SOLUTION:

If the above mentioned symptom(s) occur:

1. Replace the Interlock Switch (12042334).

2. Clear the Service Call indication by changing the data at RAM Address 80033C[H] from "05" to "00."

3. Ensure that the new style* Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad is installed.

* The type of Silicon Oil used on the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad has been changed since September, 1995. To reflect this change, the color of the Cleaning Pad has been changed from black to green.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

ý O

TH

ER

Note: T



F

S M

ý C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

ýý PA

RT

Sý T

RA

NS

MIT

/RE

CE

IVE

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')##&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<#HKNN0#g#NFN NHfEHfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0

SUBJECT: GRAY VERTICAL BANDS ON PRINTED IMAGE

SYMPTOM: Vertical gray bands appear on the printed image.

CAUSE:

Defective Development Unit as a result of randommanufacturing error. A Mylar Film located inside theDevelopment Unit may not be installed at the correctposition.

FIELD COUNTER MEASURE:

1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the CTM andDevelopment Unit. Example: CTM Seal not completely removed.

2. Replace the Development Unit.

EXCHANGE PROGRAM PROCEDURE:

For Development Units that have failed prematurely.

1. Print the System Parameter List from the affected machine. The machine’s Serial Number and sample ofthe gray vertical band must appear on the report.

2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOH’s National Spare Parts Center.


H5159570 Development Unit Assembly - A4

NOTE: National Spare Parts Center Phone No. 1-800-524-0199

Continued...

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

O

TH

ER

Note: T



S

M

CO

PY

QU

ALIT

Y

PAR

TS

Received Copy

Gray Vertical Band

Technical Service Bulletin FAX 4700L - 20Page 2 of 2

3. Fill out an Limited Warranty Claim Report in addition to the following information:

DEALER NAME:

DEALER ACCOUNT NO.:

MACHINE SERIAL NO.:

INSTALLATION DATE:

PROBLEM DATE (1st Occurred):

PRINT COUNTER:

Note: Refer to the “Dealer Service Policy Manual” for information regarding the Limited Warranty Claim Report.

4. Attach this page to the Limited Warranty Claim Report and System Parameter List.

5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for consideration of exchange credit approval.

Note: All required information and image samples must be complete and accurate or you may not becredited for the new Development Unit.

Production Counter Measure:

The Mylar Film was modified to insure installation at the correct position on the Development Unit.

UNITS AFFECTED:

All FAX 4700L machines manufactured after Serial Numbers M0460600000 respectively will have modifiedDevelopment Units installed during production.

NOTE: THIS CREDIT PROGRAM IS VALID THROUGH 9/30/97 ON UNITS PRODUCED PRIOR TO THE SERIAL NUMBER CUT IN STATED ABOVE.

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NFE NJfFFfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0


GENERAL:

The following error codes are missing from the Field Service Manual.

The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow ⇒

• 6-36 Additional Information Addition of Error Codes 9-30, 9-31 & 9-32

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

O

TH

ER

Note: T



F

S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RT

S

TR

AN

SM

IT/R

EC

EIV

E

ERROR CODE DESCRIPTION

9-30 Hard Disk Drive Error

9-31 Disk Controller Error

9-32 Disk Memory Error

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<HKNN0#g#NFF NJfFFfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0

SUBJECT: HARD DISK DRIVE CHANGE AND SOFTWARE UPDATE

GENERAL:

The Hard Disk Drive has been changed. When installing the new style HDD, you must also install the newstyle Spring Plate and Bracket. These parts are available as a kit (H1303010).

SOFTWARE:

When installing the new style Hard Disk Drive, the software for the FAX4700L must be upgraded to versionH5157210G (or later).

NOTE: The new HDD does not function with the older software. However, the old HDD does function withthe new software.

UNITS AFFECTED:

This new software has been applied from the May, 1997 production.

ORDERING PROCEDURE:

The new style HDD can be acquired through normal NSPC channels. The updated software can be acquiredvia the Ricoh Technical Services BBS. Reference the .TXT file attached to the downloaded ROM/RDS filesfor additional information. BBS No. 201-882-5243 - Please refer to Service News and Information No. 147.

If you are unable to take advantage of the BBS, contact the Facsimile Technical Services Hotline.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PAT

H

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

O

TH

ER

Note: T



F

S M

C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

PA

RT

S

TR

AN

SM

IT/R

EC

EIV

E

Hard Disk Drive

Bracket

Spring Plate

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U###*%<#HKNN0g#NFG NMfEKfMK#

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0

SUBJECT: PART CATALOG CORRECTION

GENERAL:

The following Part Catalog Correction is being issued for all FAX 4700L Parts Catalogs. This informationshould be incorporated into all existing FAX 4700L Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE

NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H5163476 Spacer - Stay-1 1 1-29 40


0OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

1NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3

OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/SMust be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PA

TH

E

LEC

TR

ICA

Lý O

TH

ER

Note: T



S

Mý C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

ý PA

RT

S

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U###*%<HKNN0#g#FH NMfEKfMK#

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<HKNN0

SUBJECT: PART CATALOG CORRECTION

GENERAL:

The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all FAX4700L Parts Catalogs. This information shouldbe incorporated into all existing FAX4700L Parts Catalog documentation.

REFERENCE

INCORRECT. CORRECT DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H5435701 H1435701 ISDN Harness 1-1 0 1-33 3

UNITS AFFECTED:

Serial Number ins not available at time of publication.


0OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

1NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3

OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/SMust be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PA

TH

E

LEC

TR

ICA

Lý O

TH

ER

Note: T



S

Mý C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

ý PA

RT

S

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U####*%<#HKNN0#g#NFI NMfEKfMK

%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *%<#HKNN0

SUBJECT: EXHAUST FAN

CAUSE:

To enable the replacement of the Interlock Switch (REF. PUB 85), the Exhaust Fan must first be removed.There have been reports indicating that the Exhaust Fan was reinstalled facing in the opposite direction,which led to a rise in the temperature inside the machine.This causes poor toner circulation and resultes inVertical Black Bands. If this problem is not rectified, Vertical Black Bands may reoccur even if theDevelopment Unit is replaced.

SOLUTION:

Check the machines that are experiencing Vertical Black Bands to see if the Interlock Switche had beenreplaced in the past. If so, please make sure that the Exhaust Fan has been installed correctly. The label onthe Exhaust Fan (shown below) should be facing outward. After the Exhaust Fan has been installed, please confirm that the air is blowing out of the machine.

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

PA

PE

R PA

TH

E

LEC

TR

ICA

Lý O

TH

ER

Note: T



S

Mý C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

ý PA

RT

S

8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U *%<#HKNN0#g#NFJ NEfGNfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U *%<#HKNN0

SUBJECT: ISDN OPTION

GENERAL:The following Parts Catalog Corrections is being issued for all Fax 4700L Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H5435701 H1435701 ISDN Harness 1 1 - 33 3H0826036 H0826034 Fax Control Board – 115V 1 1 - 33 1

'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394

Note: T



C

OP

Y Q

UA

LITY

S

M

ELE

CT

RIC

AL

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

P

AR

TS

P

AP

ER

PA

TH

O

TH

ER


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIg#NNE NHfFFfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#2f%####6-'3,#*%<#h#HKNN0####7%:-2#h#2f%

SUBJECT: GRAY VERTICAL BAND ON PRINT

SYMPTOM:

Vertical gray bands appear on the printed image.

CAUSE:

Note: T

his copy is intended as a master original


P

Received

Gray Vertical

An unwanted build up of toner in the middle ofthe Development Unit causes the TonerMetering Blade [A] to bend in an irregularfashion. As the Metering Blade bends, tonerpasses between the deformed blade and theToner Application Roller [B]. This toner ispulled onto the Development Roller [C] and ispassed onto the Drum [D] causing gray verticalbands on the documents.

[D]

The chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the H515 series.

Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner N/ARicoh 026Savin N/A

ED IMAGE

Continued…

AR

TS

[A] [B]

[C]

Technical Service Bulletin H515 – 001Page 2 of 3


1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the CleaningToner Magazine (CTM) and Development Unit. Example: CTM seal may not have been completely removed.

2. Replace old Development Unit with new modified Development Unit.

NOTE: The old style Development Unit (P/N H5159570) which was modified to correct this problem maystill fail in some high volume environments. Therefore, additional modifications have beenimplemented, resulting in a new Development Unit (P/N H5159571).


H5159570 H5159571 Development Unit Assy 1 1-13 6

MODIFICATION:

Continued…

[E]1. The length of the toner entrance [E] hasbeen changed from 30mm to 18mm to preventtoo much toner from dropping into theDevelopment Unit.

2. The Toner Hopper Film has been modified topush more toner back up into the CTM.

NOTE: You can distinguish the modified Development Unit by the lot number on the label. (See Figure 1)

(Back side of Casing)

Technical Service Bulletin H515 – 001Page 3 of 3

CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:

For Development Units that have failed:

1. Print the System Parameter List from the affected machine. The machine's Serial Number and sample of the gray vertical band must appear on the report.

2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOH's National Spare Parts Center.

Part Number DescriptionH5159571 Development Unit Assembly – A4


3. Fill out a Limited Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:

NOTE: Refer to the Dealer Service Policy Manual for information regarding the Limited Warranty Claim Report.

DEALER NAME:


MACHINE SERIAL NO.

INSTALLATION DATE:

PROBLEM DATE (First Occurred):

PRINT COUNTER:


5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for exchange credit approval, be sure to have the Limited Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.

NOTE: All required information and image samples must be complete and accurate or you may not be credited for the new Development Unit.

UNITS AFFECTED:

All facsimile machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new styleDevelopment Unit installed during production.

MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERRICOH FAX 4700L M0480300001

NOTE: This Credit Program Is Being Extended Until Further Notice.


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIg#NNE#6)-779)#+ NIfFEfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL####6-'3,#*%<#h#HKNN0####7%:-2#h#GJMN

SUBJECT: GRAY VERTICAL BAND ON PRINT

SYMPTOM:

Vertical gray bands appear on the printed image.

CAUSE:

Note: T



P

Received

Gray Vertical

An unwanted build up of toner in the middle ofthe Development Unit causes the TonerMetering Blade [A] to bend in an irregularfashion. As the Metering Blade bends, tonerpasses between the deformed blade and theToner Application Roller [B]. This toner ispulled onto the Development Roller [C] and ispassed onto the Drum [D] causing gray verticalbands on the documents.

[D]

The chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the H515 series.

Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner 005Ricoh 026Savin F-089

ED IMAGE

Continued…

AR

TS

[A] [B]

[C]

#'328630#23T#EHM

Technical Service Bulletin H515 – 001 Reissue ++++Page 2 of 4


1. Check for and remove any obstruction which may prevent the normal flow of toner between the CleaningToner Magazine (CTM) and Development Unit. Example: CTM seal may not have been completely removed.

2. Replace old Development Unit with new modified Development Unit.

NOTE: The old style Development Unit (P/N H5159570) which was modified to correct this problem maystill fail in some high volume environments. Therefore, additional modifications have beenimplemented, resulting in a new Development Unit (P/N H5159571).


H5159570 H5159571 Development Unit Assy 1 1-13 6

MODIFICATION:

Continued…

[E]1. The length of the toner entrance [E] hasbeen changed from 30mm to 18mm to preventtoo much toner from dropping into theDevelopment Unit.

2. The Toner Hopper Film has been modified topush more toner back up into the CTM.

NOTE: You can distinguish the modified Development Unit by the lot number on the label. (See Figure 1)

(Back side of Casing)


RICOH CORPORATION CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:



2. Order a new Development Unit from RICOH's National Spare Parts Center.



3. Fill out a Limited Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:

NOTE: Refer to the Dealer Service Policy Manual for information regarding the Limited Warranty Claim Report.

DEALER NAME:


MACHINE SERIAL NO.

INSTALLATION DATE:


PRINT COUNTER:


5. Contact your Regional TSM, RPS, or ATS for exchange credit approval, be sure to have the Limited Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.


UNITS AFFECTED:


MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERRICOH FAX 4700L M0480300001


Continued…


SAVIN CORPORATION CREDIT PROGRAM PROCEDURE:



2. Order a new Development Unit from the Savin Spare Parts Ordering Center.


3. Completely fill out a Warranty Claim Report and submit the following information requested below:

DEALER NAME:


MACHINE SERIAL NO.

INSTALLATION DATE:


PRINT COUNTER:

4. Attach this page to the Warranty Claim Report and the System Parameter List.

5. Contact your Technical Support Representative for exchange credit approval; be sure to have the Warranty Claim Report and the information requested above.


UNITS AFFECTED:


MODEL NAME SERIAL NUMBERGestetner 9768 9188030001Savin Fax 3690 1880300001



U IEIhNNFNJfNJfML

U

hMKJL

hHKNN

hGJMN

SUBJECT: RACK GEARS

GENERAL:

The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESH5151282 Rack Gear – D

H5151282 Rack Gear – DH5151349 Rack Gear – D

Note: T



The chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the ( product code) series.

Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner N/ARicoh 001Savin 137

515 Parts Catalogs

REFERENCECRIPTION QTY. PAGE ITEMocument Guide 1-9 13ocument Guide - Right 1 1-9 13ocument Guide - Left 1 1-9 13

P

AR

TS


U IEIgNNG NJfNJfML

U

hMKJL

hHKNN

hGJMN

SUBJECT: HARNESS - NCU

GENERAL:

The following Part Correction is being issued for all H515 Par

OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPH5215309 H5165305 Harness - NCU

Note: T



The chart listed below shows the Last BulletinNumber issued for the ( product code) series.

Bulletin Cross ReferenceRicoh Group Companies Last Bulletin No.Gestetner XXXRicoh 002Savin 137

ts Catalogs.

REFERENCETION QTY PAGE ITEM

1 1-5 19

Q P

AR

TS


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEI#g#NNH NJfFFfML

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#*%<#MKJL####6-'3,#h#*%<#HKNN0####7%:-2#h#*%<#GJMN

SUBJECT: FUSING UNIT

GENERAL:

The following parts have been registered as spare parts. The following Parts Corrections are being issuedfor all H515 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCENEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H5162100 Fusing Unit – 115V 1 4 33H5162101 Fusing Unit – 220V 1 4 33

Note: T



33

#

PA

RT

S

CONTROL NO. 151


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEI#g#NNI NJfFFfML


SUBJECT: OPERATION PANEL

GENERAL:

The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.

H515 Operation Panel (Parts Catalog Page 1-6)

REFERENCE PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEMH5154253 Ricoh /Case -LCD 1 1-7 31H5154253 Savin/Gestetner Case -LCD 1 1-7 31H5154252 Ricoh/Case-Quick Dial 1 1-7 32H5154233 Savin/Gestetner Case-Quick Dial 1 1-7 32

Note: T



P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 151


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEI#g#NNJ NJfFFfML


SUBJECT: SEPARATION HOOK - FUSING

GENERAL:

The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.


H515 2148 H5152181 Separation Hook - Fusing 1 - 1 1 - 21 6

Note: T



P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 151


UIEIfIIEgNNK NLfGEfML

U

hf

hHKNN

hGJMN

SUBJECT: AUTO SERVICE CALL 0-05

SYMPTOM:

1. Auto Service Call 0-05 (Fusing Unit Failure).

2. Constant "Add Toner" condition.

CAUSE:

Evaporated Silicon Oil from the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad may chemically react with the 24V contacts of the interlock switch. This results in a black deposit forming on the switch contacts, which interrupts the 24V passing through the switch.

SOLUTION:

If the above mentioned symptom(s) occur:

1. Replace the Interlock Switch (H5219610)..

2. Clear the Service Call indication by changing the data at RAM Address 4805AF[H] from "05" to"00."

3. Ensure that the new style Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad (see note) is installed.

NOTE :The type of Silicon Oil used on the Fusing Unit Cleaning Pad was changed September,1995. To reflect this change, the color of the Cleaning Pad has been changed from black to green.

Note: T



ME

CH

AN

ICA

L

PA

RT

S

CONTROL NO. 158


U IEIfIIEhNNL NLfGEfML

U

hfMLKL

hHKNNfHLNN

hGJMNfGJMI

SUBJECT: FAX ON DEMAND INSTALLATION CAUTION

GENERAL:

Explanation of the Fax On Demand option differences between the new model H551 and the H515 series.The Fax On Demand option can be used in both the H551 and H515, however, the FOD connector isdifferent on each model.To avoid any confusion during installation please be aware of the following.

• The connector used in H551 is CN7 on the FCE.

• The connector used in H515 is CN73 on the FDU.

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE:

1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), and the IC card slot cover [B].

2. Remove the NCU cover (1 screw) and replace it with the cover for the Fax on Demand

option [C].

Then, connect the harness [D] to CN7 on the FCE for the H551 model, or connect theharness [D] to CN73 on the FDU for the H515 model.

3. Install the battery on the IC card and turn on the battery switch.

Note: T



ELE

CT

RIC

AL

[A] [B][C]

[D]

CONTROL NO. 158


U IEIfIIEhNNM EFfNKfML

UGJMNfGJLI HKNNfHLNN MKJLfMKKL


GENERAL:The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the pages(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains 1 set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

• 1-3 Updated Information• 1-4 Updated Information• 1-5 Updated Information• 2-1 Updated Information• 3-6A Updated Information• 4-42 Updated Information• 4-52 Updated Information• 4-58 Updated Information• 4-75 Updated Information• 4-94 Updated Information• 5-35 Updated Information (H515 page)• 6-11 Updated Information• 6-12 Updated Information• 6-13 Updated Information• 6-14 Updated Information• 6-15 Updated Information

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒

No



n

SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

CONTROL NO. 161

1-3SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

1.2 FEATURES

1.2.1 FEATURES LIST

KEY:O = Used, X = Not Used,A = With optional memory 2M/4M onlyB = With optional memory 80M (HDD)

onlyC = With optional function upgrade

card onlyD = With optional Fax On Demand kit

onlyE = With optional 100 sheet cassette

onlyF = With optional paper feed unit onlyG = With optional counter onlyH = With optional handset only (US

only)I = With optional printer interface unit

onlyJ = With optional G4 kit only

EquipmentADF OBook scan XBuilt-in handset XBypass feed: 1 sheet OCabinet XCounter GCutter XHandset HHard disk BManual feed mechanism(ADF)

X

Marker (Stamp) OMonitor speaker OOptional cassette: 100 sheets EOptional Fax On Demand kit DOptional paper feed unit(up to 2 units)

F


Video Processing FeaturesContrast OHalftone(Basic & Error Diffusion)

O

Video Processing FeaturesMTF OReduction before tx (B4 -> A4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> B4) OReduction before tx (A3 -> A4) OScanning Resolution -Standard

O

Scanning Resolution - Detail OScanning Resolution - Fine OScanning Resolution -Superfine

X

Smoothing to 400 x 400 dpiwhen printing

O




O

AI Redial (last ten numbers) O

Answering machine interface XAuthorized Reception OAuto-answer delay time XAuto dialing (pulse or DTMF) OAuto Document OAuto image density selection XAuto paper size selection XAutomatic Voice Message XBatch Transmission (max 6files)

O

Broadcasting OChain Dialing OCommunication Result Display XConfidential ID Override OConfidential Reception OConfidential Transmission ODirect Fax Number Entry OEconomy Transmission OFax on demand DForwarding O

⇐

⇐

⇐

⇐

⇐

Rev.11/98

FEATURES

1-4H551 SM


Free Polling OGroups (7 groups) OGroup Transfer Station OHold XID Transmission OImmediate Redialing OImmediate transmission OKeystroke Programs OLength Reduction XMemory transmission OMulti-step Transfer ONext Transfer Station XOMR OOn Hook Dial OOrdering Toner XPage Count OPage separation mark OParallel memory transmission OPersonal Codes OPersonal Codes with Conf. ID OPartial Image Area Scanning CPolling Reception OPolling Transmission OPolling tx file lifetime in theSAF

O

Quick Dial(Standard: 64 stations)

O

Reception modes (Fax, Tel,Auto)

O

Remote control features XRemote Transfer ORestricted Access OSecured Polling OSecured Polling with Stored IDOverride

O

Secure Transmission XSend Later OSilent ringing detection XSpeed Dial(Standard: 100 stations)

O

Telephone Directory OTonal Signal Transmission OTransfer Request OTransmission Deadline (TRD) OTurnaround Polling X


Two-step Transfer XTwo in one OVoice Request (immed. txonly)

X

Communication Features -Service Selectable


OJ


O

mm-inch conversion whenprinting

O

Page retransmission times OProtection against wrongconn.

O

Resolutions available forreception200 x 100 dpi200 x 200 dpi200 x 400 dpi400 x 400 dpi

OOXX

Resol’n stepdown overrideoption

X

Short Preamble XWell log O

Other User FeaturesArea code prefix XAutomatic service call ServiceCenter mark OCheckered mark OClearing a memory file OClearing a polling file OClock OConfidential ID O ⇐

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒

Rev.11/98

FEATURES

1-5SM H551

Ove

rall

Info

rmat

ion

Other User FeaturesCopy editing(Erase Center/Margin)

X

Copy mode OCopy Mode Restriction OCounters ODaylight Saving Time ODestination Check XDirect entry of names OFile Retention Time OFile Retransmission OFunction Programs OHard Disk Filing System B, CID Code OLabel Insertion (“ From xxx” ) OLanguage Selection OLCD contrast control ServiceMemory Lock A or BMemory Lock ID OModifying a memory file XMulti Sort DocumentReception

O

Multicopy mode OOwn telephone number OEnergy Saver (Night Timerand standby mode)

O

Print density control OPrinting a memory file ORDS on/off OReception Mode SwitchingTimer

X

Reception time printing OReduction/Enlargement XRemaining memory indicator ORemote ID OReverse Order Printing ORTI, TTI, CSI OSecure ID XService Report Transmission OSpeaker volume control OSpecified Cassette Selection FSubstitute reception on/off OTelephone line type OToner Saving Mode OTTI/CIL on/off OUser Function Keys (5 keys) OUser Parameters O

Other User Feat uresWild Cards O

Reports - AutomaticCharge Control Report XCommunication Failure Report OConfidential File Report OError Report OFax On Demand Report DMemory Storage Report OMode Change Report XPolling Clear Report OPolling Reserve Report OPolling Result Report OPower Failure Report OTCR (Journal) OToner Cassette Order Form XTransfer Result Report OTransmission Result Report O

Reports - User-i nitiatedAuthorized Reception List OCharge Control Report XFile List OForwarding List OGroup List OHard Disk File List B, CPersonal Code List OProgram List OQuick Dial List OSpecified Cassette SelectionList

B

Speed Dial List OTCR OTransmission Status Report XUser Function List OUser Parameter List O

Service Mode FeaturesAuto Paper Select test XBack-to-back test OBit switch programming OBook mode test XBuzzer test OCable equalizer O

⇒

⇒

⇒

⇒⇒

⇐

⇐

⇐

Rev.11/98

When the machine is initially used only with the PSTN, the line type programmed with phone numbers inQuick Dials and the Speed Dials is stored as PSTN G3.Later, if the line connection is changed so that G3 is to be used only with the ISDN, the communication portfor all stored Quick and Speed Dials must be changed to ISDN G3.This feature allows the communication mode and port to be changed for all stored numbers at once.

Procedure:1) Change the data in the following RAM addresses.

4B5846(H) - Current line type setting.4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after this procedure.NOTE: The default setting for the above addresses are FF(H).

2) Turn the main switch off and on.Then, the machine checks all phone numbers stored in Quick Dials, Speed Dials, AI Redial, andForwarding Stations. If the communication mode and the port setting for a number is the same asspecified for the “current setting” in the above address, the machine changes these to the newsetting.

3) After this procedure, the data programmed automatically returns to FF(H).

SETTING:Bit 0 and 1: Communication mode Bit 1 0 Setting

0 0 G30 1 G41 0 Not used

Bit 2 to 4: Communication portBit 4 3 2 Setting

0 0 0 PSTN1 (Standard G3)0 0 1 PSTN2 (Optional G3 unit)0 1 1 ISDN1 0 0 Any available port

(This setting can be used only when an optional G3 or G4 unit is installed in the machine.)Other settings - Not used

Bit 5 to 7: Not used

Example:If you wish to change the port setting from PSTN G3 to ISDN G3,Change the data to 00(H) (0000 0000) in the address 4B5846(H)Change the data to 0C(H) (00001100) in the address 4B5847(H)

NOTE: Do not use this procedure if there are any files stored in the memory awaiting transmission.

H551 3-6A SM

Rev. 11/98INSTALLING OPTIONAL UNITS

BIT SWITCHES

H551 4-42 SM

6 Conditions for memoryreception if no RTI or CSI isreceived

0: Memory reception is available only when themachine receives RTI or CSI.1: Memory reception is always available unlessthere is a printer (mechanical) error. If there is aprinter error, memory reception becomesavailable only when the machine receives RTI orCSI.This function becomes effective in combinationwith the user parameter switch 05 bit 1.

7 Use of parallel memorytransmission with G4transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit determines whether parallel transmissioncan be used with a G4 transmission or not..




08 to 92 (BCD) mm. Input even numbers only.This setting determines the print start position forthe TTI and CIL from the left edge of the paper. Ifthe TTI is moved too far to the right, it mayinterfere with the file number which is on the topright of the page. On an A4 page, if the CIL ismoved over by more than 60 mm, it mayoverwrite the page number.


1

Remaining memory threshold foractivating the hard disk filingsystemBit 1 Bit 0 Threshold

0 0 25% 0 1 50% (default) 1 0 75% 1 1 Not used

If the remaining hard disk space is belowthe threshold value, the hard disk filingsystem cannot be used. Adjust thethreshold value to meet the customer’srequirements.

2 Not used Do not change the factory settings

3

4

Files that can be stored in the harddisk filing systemBit 1 Bit 0 Files

0 0 All files 0 1 Received files only 1 0 Transmitted files only 1 1 Not used

The default setting is (0 0).Change the settings to limit the files thatcan be stored in the hard disk filing system.

5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

Rev. 11/98

⇒

BIT SWITCHES

4-58H551 SM

4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES


Monitor speaker duringcommunication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Disabled0 1 Up to Phase B1 0 All the time1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all throughthe communication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B inthe T.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is onall through the communication. Make sure thatyou reset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.

3-6 Not used Do not change the settings.7 Back to back test

0: Disabled 1: EnabledSet this bit to 1 when you wish to do a back toback test.115 V model: Be sure to connect jumpers JP5and JP6 on the NCU before doing the test.220 V model: Be sure to apply dc voltagebetween wires L1 and L2 on the NCU.

Back-to-Back Connection:The dc power supplies should be adjusted so thatthe line current to the NCU are about 30mA.

G3 Switch 01No FUNCTION COMMENTS0-3 Not used Do not change the settings.4 DIS frame length

0: 6 bytes1: 4 bytes

1: The 5th and 6th bytes in the DISframe will not be transmitted (set to 1if there are communication problemswith PC-based faxes which cannotreceive the extended DIS frames).

5 Not Used Do not change the settings.WRONG CORRECT COMMENTS6CED/ANSam emission0: Disabled1: Enabled

CED/ANSam emission0: Enabled (Default)1: Disabled

Do not change this settingunless any communicationproblem is caused by theCED/ANSam (V.34)transmission.

7 Not Used Do not change the settings.

Rev. 11/98

⇐

4806BE Not used Do not change thesettings.

4806C7 Protocol dump list format (standard NCU)Bit 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: Protocol dump list format 0: Simplified list 1: Complete listBit 5 to 7: Not used

4806D9 Not used Do not change thesettings.

4806DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s4807C7 Protocol dump list format (optional G3 unit)

Bit 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: Protocol dump list format 0: Simplified list 1: Complete listBit 5 to 7: Not used

Notes1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium onlyRAM address 48065E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.Bit 2 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)Bit 1 Not usedBit 0 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses arechanged.480608 (if bit 0 = 1) or 480638 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off stateduration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address480633.48060B (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)48060C (if bit 0 = 1) or 48063C(if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 48064A to 48064F) are the values for 10pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the timespecified by this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:High frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 dBmLow frequency tone: - 0.5 x N480652/480654 + N480653) dBmNote: N480652, for example, means the value stored in address 480652(H)

6. 480644A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Dsclosing and Di opening48064D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Dsopening and Di closing

4-75 4-75 SM

⇐

⇐

NCU PARAMETERSRev. 11/98


4-94H551 SM

480A10(H) - Scanning top margin adjustment480A14(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Standard)480A16(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Detail)480A18(H) - Scanning bottom margin adjustment (Fine)

NOTE: Please refer to section 5.12.2 of the FX4 service manual for how to adjust aboveparameters.

4A5EBA to 4A71F1(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick Dial 01 - 64 and Speed Dial #00 -#99.Each set of dedicated tx parameters consists of 30 bytes, only the first 8 of which are used.

4A5EBA to 4A5ED7(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 014A5ED8 to 4A5EF5(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 024A5EF6 to 4A5F13(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 03

×4A661C to 4A6639(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Quick 644A663A to 4A6657(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #004A6658 to 4A6675(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #014A6676 to 4A6693(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #02

×4A71D4 to 4A71F1(H) - Dedicated tx parameters for Speed #99

4B5846 to 4B5847(H) - Line type change4B5846(H) - Current line type setting4B5847(H) - Line type to be used after the procedure (Refer to page 3-6A).

4B6606 to 4B6785(H) - Latest 64 error codes (Read only)

One error record consists of 6 bytes of data.

First error record start address – 4B6606(H)Second error record start address – 4B660C(H)Third error record start address – 4B6612(H)

: : :64th error record start address – 4B6780(H)

The format is as follows:1st byte - Minute (BCD)2nd byte - Hour (BCD)3rd byte - Day (BCD)4th byte - Month (BCD)5th byte - Error code (low) [If the error code is 1-23, 23 is stored here.]6th byte - Error code (high) [If the error code is 1-23, 01 is stored here.]

⇒

Rev. 11/98

5.11. SBU ADJUSTMENT

5.11.1. Replacement

Remove the rear cover, then remove the NCU [A], the rear bracket [B], andthe SBU [C].

Note: After the SBU is replaced, perform the following adjustment procedure.

5.11.2. Tools Required

• Scan line adjustment chart: P/N H5159300• 200 dot-per-inch test pattern: P/N H0829020• Test lead: P/N H5159301• SBU adjustment knobs: P/N H0129300

5.11.3. Preparation

1. Set the oscilloscope scale to 0.2 V/unit (vertical) and 0.5 ms/unit(horizontal).

2. Connect the test lead to H515-CN 6 or to H551-CN8 on the MFCE.

3. Connect the oscilloscope probe to pin 2 (blue wire) and the ground to pin4 (black wire)

4. Clean the white pressure plate with a soft cloth and alcohol.

5. Light the xenon lamp (see section 4.1.15)

⇒

Rev.11/98

[C]

[A]

[B]

H515R509.wmfA: NCU (3 screws)B: Rear Bracket (3 screws)C: SBU (2 screws)

RE

PL

AC

EM

EN

T&

A

DJU

ST

ME

NT

SM 5-35 H515

Control Channel (Post Message – SH) Rev. 11/98


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIf,IIE#h#NEN NFfEKfMM

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#MKJLfMLKL####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0fHLNN0####7%:-2#h#GJMNfGJMI

SUBJECT: HARD DISK DRIVE (HDD)

GENERAL:

The following Parts Corrections are being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEOLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H1303010 H1303012 HDD Kit 1-1 1 35 3H5155356 H5515370 Harness – HDD – 44P 1-1 1 35 3H5155358H5515364H5157119 A8537000 HDD 1-1 0 35 5

The new HDD kit includes the new HDD and the new Harness.

When replacing an old HDD with a new HDD the new Harness H5515370 must be used.

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW machines.2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in orpreviously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Note: T



P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 163


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIf,IIE#h#NEE NFfEKfMM

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0####7%:-2#h#GJMN


GENERAL:

The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the pages(s) supplied. Each bulletinpackage contains one set of replacement pages.

PAGES:

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒

• 4-29 Updated Information

Note: T

his copy intended as master original


S

ER

VIC

E M

AN

UA

L

CONTROL NO. 163

System Switch 04


5

Master drum replacementlevel0:Service 1: User

0: The machine will ask the user to replace the drumat 30,000 print intervals (default interval).After the user replaces the drum, the machine will askthe user if the drum has been replaced. If the useranswers yes, the machine will reset the OPC counterto zero. The drum replacement interval is programmedat addresses 480228 to 48022A(H). Refer to section4.5 for more details.1: The machine will not ask the user to replace thedrum.

6

G3 CSI/G4 Terminal IDprogramming level0: User level1: Service level

1: The CSI and Terminal ID can only be programmedusing a service function.The Terminal ID can only be programmed if a Group 4option is installed.

7

Telephone line typeprogramming mode0: User level1: Service level

1: Telephone line type selection (tone dial or pulsedial) can only be programmed using a service function.

Rev.01/99

⇒

SE

RV

ICE

TAB

LES

&P

RO

CE

DU

RE

S

SM 4-29 H515


8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIf,IIE#g#NEF NJfEIfMM

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#MLKL####6-'3,#h#*%<HLNN0####7%:-2#h#GJMI

SUBJECT: LD ERROR 2-21

SYMPTOM:

LD error (code 2-21) happens when the power is turned on during the installation.

CAUSE:

The connection between the fiber optics cable and the FDU Board may have loosened during transportation.

SOLUTION:

Reconnect the fiber optics cable to the FDU Board with the following procedure below.

1. Remove the backside cover (4 screws).

2. Locate a gray color cable over the FDU.

3. Pull it lightly. You can feel the condition of the connection.If it is removed easily, the connection was not completely inserted.

4. Reinstall the connector completely and assemble the cover.

NOTE: You should feel a click when reinserting the connector if it is being set correctly.

Note: T



ELE

CT

RIC

AL

CONTROL NO. 165

Note: T




8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2

&900)8-2#291&)6U ,IEIf,IIE#g#NEG NLfEGfMM

%440-'%&0)#13()0U####+)78)82)6#h#MKJL####6-'3,#h#*%<HKNN0####7%:-2#h#GJMN

SUBJECT: PCB - MFCE

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 Parts Catalogs.


H5156282 H5156292 PCB - MFCE - US 1 - 1 0 4 14

INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW machines.2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or

previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 170



BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - 014 03/06/2000

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – 9878 RICOH – FAX4800L SAVIN – 3695

SUBJECT: INTERNET FAX OPTION INSTALLATION

GENERAL:

When the Internet Fax Option is installed in the H551, the Firmware must be upgraded to support this option.To upgrade the H551 Firmware, four (4) EPROM’s that are shipped with the Internet Fax Option must beused in conjunction with the EPROM Board (P/N: H515 9500) and Flash/SRAM Data Copy Tool(P/N: H515 9100). Please refer to page 4-13 of the H551 Field Service Manual for information ondownloading software to the MFCE.

When the Internet Fax Option Flash ROM data is downloaded locally using Service Function 12, allprogrammed data is erased, (i.e. quick dials, speed dials, RTI/TTI/CSI, etc). To prevent this from happening,contact the Technical Support Division and request that the Internet Fax Option software to be downloadedremotely using RDS (Remote Diagnosis System).

Note: T



GE

NE

RA

L IN

FO

RM

AT

ION

CONTROL NO 180FAX





SUBJECT: SERVICE PARTS FOR G3 AND ISDN OPTIONS

GENERAL:

This parts information is for the model H551 optional G3 unit and ISDN unit. The following items listed areavailable as service parts.

G3 INTERFACE UNIT (H133)

Continued…

Note: T



P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO 181FAX

Tech Service Bulletin No. H551– 015Page 2 of 3

G3 INTERFACE UNIT (H133) continued

PART NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE ITEM

H5515319 Harness - Connector 1H1334011 Bracket - Connector 216070576 Sleeve Core - SFC - 8 3

H5153183 Stay - G4 4

H1433335 Earth Clip 5

H5516022 PCB - OPIF - SG3 6

H1335300 Flat Cable - OPIF G3 7

H5235350 Telehpone Cable (USA model only) 8H1333184 Decal - Line 2 9

54886032 PCB - NCU G3 Option - USA 10

54886052 PCB - NCU G3 Option - EUR/Asia 10

54886072 PCB - NCU G3 Option - FRA 10

H5153186 Ground Plate - G4 11

H1336030 PCB - SG3 V34 - USA 12

H1336032 PCB - SG3 V34 - EUR/FRA/Asia 13

H1333182 Stay SG3 V34 14

H5215309 Harness - NCU 1 (15 pin) - USAH5215339 Harness - NCU 1 (15 pin) - EUR/FRA/AsiaH5515362 Harness - NCU 2 (5 pin) (Not used in the USA model.) 1509513006B Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3 x 6 101

NOTE: EUR:= Europe model, FRA =: French model

Continued…

Tech Service Bulletin No. H551– 015Page 3 of 3

ISDN UNIT (H143)

PART NO. DESCRIPTION PAGE ITEM

H1435701 ISDN Harness 1

H5153183 Stay - G4 2

H1433335 Earth Clip 3

H5516020 PCB - OPIF 4

H1435300 Flat Cable - OPIF G4 5

H5134102 Decal - ISDN 6

H5153149 Board Bracket 7

H0826034 G4 Board - USA 8

H0826035 G4 Board - EUR/FRA/Asia

H5153186 Ground Plate - G4 9

H5155014 Ground Harness 10

H1433333 Board Stay - G4 11

H5155203 Interface Board - G4(Used only when installing this option in the FX4.)

12

H5153184 Stay - G4 - 2

(Used only when installing this option to the FX4.)

13

04523012Z Bind Tapping Screw - 3 x 12 101

09513006B Philips Screw with Flat Washer - M3 x 6 102





SUBJECT: HARD DISK OPTION PROBLEM

SYMPTOM:

Memory transmission is not possible. After the Hard Disk Drive Option is installed.Memory transmission is possible if the Hard Disk (HDD) is removed.

CAUSE:

The control signals, which are positioned between the FCU and the HD, are affected by electromagneticnoise from the Data Bus. Due to these conditions there are cases where the data in the HD cannot beloaded correctly.The data bus and signal lines should not be placed in parallel and if possible not close to each other.

SOLUTION:

Replace old style HDD Harness (P/N H55115370) with the new style Harness (P/N H5515372). The two typesof Harnesses can be differentiated by the following characteristics:1. The old style Harness has 4 Ferrite cores2. The new style Harness has 2 Ferrite cores.

Note: See the attached 3 pages for the new installation procedure


H1303012 H1303014 HDD Kit 1 35 7H5515370 H5515372 Harness – HDD – 44P 1 35 3

Note: T



EL

EC

TR

ICA

L

M

EC

HA

NIC

AL

CONTROL NO. 182FAX

INSTALLATION MANUAL


This option can be installed in the following models:- H551 seriesThis installation must only be done by qualified service personnel.

NOTE: If the optional G3 unit (G3 Interface Unit Type 140) is also to be installed,install this option before installing the G3 unit.

CAUTIONDo the following before installing an optional unit:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the system parameter list.3. Turn off the main switch, and disconnect the power plug.


1. Remove the rear cover [A] (4 screws), leftcover [B] (3 screws and the connectorcover), and the IC card slot cover [C].

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the hard diskunit [E] (4 screws). Hook the groundingplate [F] on the bracket and secure thehard disk unit to the machine (2 screws).

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]

3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCU bracket[G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screwfor USA model.)NOTE: The grounding plate [H] is not installed in

the USA models.

4. Connect the HDD harness [I] and the harness [J] to thehard disk interface card [K].

5. Turn on the battery switch [L] on thehard disk interface card. Then insertthe hard disk interface card into theupper card slot [M].NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin

harness [J] to the FDU at thistime.

6. Lead the harness containing the corewith the black marking [N] behind theNCU bracket [G].

Important:This is to avoid the hard disk data bus from interfered by the hard disk drive signal.

7. Connect the HDD harness to the hard disk unit [O].

8. Turn on the main switch and enter the service mode. Then do the following: Set system bit switch 05 bit 4 to "1", system bit switch 00 bit 1 to “1”, then exit the

service mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3. Enter service function 16 and select “0” (INITIALIZE) to initialize the hard disk.

If “OK” is displayed, exit the service mode and turn off the main switch.

9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the hard disk interface card to CN73 on theFDU.

[G]

[H]

[I] [J]

[K]

[G]

[L]

[M]

[N]

[J]

[O]

10. Replace the screws which were removed in step 3.(3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw for USA model.)

11. Keep the core [O] and the harness as shownand put back the rear cover and the left cover.

12. Turn on the main switch and enter the service mode.Print the memory dump list (service function 06) of the following addresses anddata.


If any of these addresses contain a different value, format the hard disk (service function 16).

End of Procedure

CAUTIONThe hard disk interface card contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosionexists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.

[O]


TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINTECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H515/H515/H515/H551 - 017H551 - 017H551 - 017H551 - 017 05050505/08/2000/03/2000/03/2000/03/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER - GESTETNER - GESTETNER - GESTETNER - 9878987898789878 RICOH – FAX4800L RICOH – FAX4800L RICOH – FAX4800L RICOH – FAX4800L SAVIN - 3695SAVIN - 3695SAVIN - 3695SAVIN - 3695


GENERAL:

The Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied.Each bulletin package contains 1 set of replacement pages.

Upgrade:1) For the new Flash ROM chips which will be installed in future production units. (The upgrade

schedule for the new chips is not yet determined.)2) Data cannot be input from the ten-key and quick dial keypads while some other key is being

pushed. (Data from a key being pushed could be input while other keys were being pushed.)3) The following condition is added for the stamp. No stamping when in PC scan mode.4) Dial tone detection is not effective. (This function was effective according to the regulations of

the Netherlands.)

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas.

PAGES:

• ii Table of Contents• 6 - 17 Updated Information (ROM History)• 6 - 18 Updated Information (ROM History)

No

te:T

hiscopy

isintended

asa

master

originalfor

reproductionofadditionalbulletins.

SE

RV

ICE

MA

NU

AL

Control No. 184FAX

⇒

H551 ii SM

4.1.12. Modern Detection Test (Function08).....................................................4-84.1.13. Ringer Test (Function 08) .....................................................................4-94.1.14. Operation Panel Test (Function 09)… .................4-94.1.15. Xenon Lamp Test (Functio10)..….......................................................4-104.1.16. ADF Test (Function 10)… ...................................................................4-104.1.17. Printer Test Pattern (Function 11) 4-114.1.18. Scanner and Printer Mechanism Test –Free Run (Function 11).........4-114.1.19. Ram Test (Function 12)..….................................................................4-124.1.20. Software Download (Function 12)..… .................................................4-134.1.21. Software Upload (Function 12)…........................................................4-154.1.22. SRAM Data Download (Function 12) .............................................. …4-174.1.23. Modem Software Upload (function 12)................................................4-194.1.24. Optional G3 Board Software Download ..............................................4-214.1.25. Optional G3 Board Modem Software Download .................................4-234.1.26. Saving Data Programmed in IC Cards................................................4-254.1.27. Service Station Fax Number (Function 13) .........................................4-274.1.28. Serial Number (Function 14)...............................................................4-274.1.29. Hard Disk Initialization (Function 16) ..............................…………..…4-284.1.30. Hard Disk Formatting (Function16)..… ...............................................4-294.1.31. Hard Disk Test (Functin16)…..............................................................4-294.1.32. G4 Parameter Programming (Function17)… ......................................4-304.1.33. Printing Confidential Files…................................................................4-31

4.2. BIT SWITCHES…………………………..….....................................4-314.2. System Switches… .............................................................................4-314.2.2. Scanner Switches…............................................................................4-454..2.3. Printer Switches… ..............................................................................4-474.2.4. Communication Switches… ................................................................4-504.2.5. G3 Switches… …................................................................................4-584.3. NCU PARAMETERS….......................................................................4-664.4. DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS… .............................4-764.4.1. Programming Procedure… .................................................................4-764.4.2. Parameters…......................................................................................4-774.5. SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES… ........................................................4-80

5. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE…..........................................................5-15.1. Special Tools and Lubricants… .............................................................5-15.2. PM Table…............................................................................................5-1

6. TROUBLESHOOTING…..........................................................................6-16.1. SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS… ..........................................................6-16.2. ERROR CODES….................................................................................6-26.3. Modem Status Codes in V.34 Protocol Dump… ..................................6-126.4. ROM History….....................................................................................6-17

7. PARTS CATALOG……………………..…..................................................7-1

Rev.04/2000

SM 6-17 H551

6.4 ROM HISTORY


Description Of Modification FirmwareLevel

ProductionDate


1. When only a name was registered in a Group itcould not be erased.

2. Memory Tx through PCFAX could not be done whenprogrammed in quick dial for use by PC in the H551

H5517210B


Correction of the following minor software problems:1. RDS

Programmed telephone dials at Speed Dial no. 35 to99 could not be cleared by RDS.

2. NCU parameters could not be initialized by Level 2RAM clear mode.

3. G4 modeType of network (ex. CiG4) was not printed on theservice monitor report if an error occurred beforestarting the transmission of the first image data.

4. G4 modePolling transmission was not successful when the IDwas not matched but OK was printed and thesymbol of the polling mode did not appear on theTCR.

5. PCFE When PC memory reception was set andover 64Kbyte data per page was received, thereceived data could not be sent from the FR4 to thePC. (with Win98 / Winphone)

6. PCFEIn the PC memory transmission mode, transmissionwas not done if the number of dial digit is over 35.(with WinFAXPRO8.0)

7. G4 modeWhen the transfer request with department codewas done, name of the department was not sentwith the transmitted documents.

8. G4 modeSystem was reset when the communication wascontinued over one hour.

9. G4 mode

Own CIL clock information was printed on thereceived pages when the year 2000 was set at thetransmission terminal.

H5517210C

Rev. 04/2000

H551 SM6-18


Description Of Modification FirmwareLevel

ProductionDate


1) Quality improvement of the dial tone detection

2) For the new FCC Standard, Redial # 4 1.

H5517210D Dec. 1999Production⇒

Rev. 04/2000



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - 018018018018 09/29/200009/29/200009/29/200009/29/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER 9768/9878 GESTETNER 9768/9878 GESTETNER 9768/9878 GESTETNER 9768/9878 RICOH FAX4700L/4800L RICOH FAX4700L/4800L RICOH FAX4700L/4800L RICOH FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN 3960/3695 SAVIN 3960/3695 SAVIN 3960/3695 SAVIN 3960/3695

SUBJECT: HARD DRIVE & HARNESS

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalogs.


H1303012 H1303014 HDD Kit 1 0 35 7*H5515370 H5515372 Harness – HDD-44P 1 0 35 3

* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

NOTE: Refer to TSB H515/H551 – 016 for additional information on the Hard Disk Drive.

Note: T



! P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 190FAX



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - 019H515/H551 - 019H515/H551 - 019H515/H551 - 019 10/23/200010/23/200010/23/200010/23/2000


SUBJECT: POLYETHYLENE SHEET & NEEDLE ROLLER BEARING

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalog.


H5151342 Antistatic Brush 1-0 -- 7 33H5511342 Polyethylene Sheet 0-1 0 7 33

08053386 Bushing 8mm 1-0 -- 10 110H5151348 Needle Roller Bearing 4x8x8 0-1 1 10 110


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.

OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.

1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.



Note: T



! P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 191FAX



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - 020H515/H551 - 020H515/H551 - 020H515/H551 - 020 12/11/200012/11/200012/11/200012/11/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER – 9768/9878GESTETNER – 9768/9878GESTETNER – 9768/9878GESTETNER – 9768/9878 RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN – 3690/3695SAVIN – 3690/3695SAVIN – 3690/3695SAVIN – 3690/3695

SUBJECT: HD OPTION

GENERAL:

The following parts update is being issued for both H515/H551 Parts Catalogs and Service Manuals.


H1303014 H1303016 HDD Kit 1-1 0 35 7H5516060 HD-IF Board 0-1 35 8 *

Note: An * denotes a new Item.Note: A small HD IF PCB has been added to the HDD Kit. See the attached Installation Manual page 3 of 4item “O” (The board now comes packed with the HD Option).

UNITS AFFECTED:

All H515/551 units manufactured after the September production run will have the new style HD Optioninstalled during production.


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD andNEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.


1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.



Continued…

Note:T

hiscopy

isintended

asa

master

originalfor


!P

AR

TS

!S

ER

VIC

EM

AN

UA

L

HD Interface board

CONTROL NO. 191FAX

Tech Service Bulletin No. H515/H551 – 020Page 2 of 2

GENERAL:

The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin packagecontains 1 set of replacement pages.

An arrow has highlighted the revised areas ⇒.

PAGES:

• 3-3, 3-4, 3-5 Updated Information (FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M III)


SM H5513-3

Inst

alla

tio

n

3.3 FEATURE EXPANDER TYPE 140 80M IIIThis option can be installed in the following models:- H551 series

ONLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MAY DO THIS INSTALLATION.

!CAUTIONDo the following before installing an optional unit:1. Print out all messages stored in the memory.2. Print out the lists of user-programmed items and the System Parameter List.3. Turn off the Main Switch, and disconnect the power plug.

NOTE: • Refer to the Operator’s Manual for the user installable options.• For the Function Upgrade Card and Fax on Demand Card, be sure to read section

3.3.9, after installation.


1. Remove the Rear Cover [A] (4 screws),Left Cover [B] (3 screws and theconnector Cover), and the IC Card slotCover [C].

2. Attach the bracket [D] to the Hard DiskUnit [E] (4 screws). Hook the GroundingPlate [F] on the bracket and secure theHard Disk Unit to the machine (2screws).

H130i501.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[F]

Rev. 11/2000

!


H551 SM3-4

3. Remove three screws to loosen the NCUbracket [G]. (3 screws for Europe/Asiamodels, 1 screw for USA model.)NOTE: The Grounding Plate [H] is not

installed in the USA models.

4. Connect the HDD Harness [I] and theHarness [J] to the Hard Disk InterfaceCard [K].

5. Turn on the Battery switch [L] on the HardDisk Interface Card. Then insert the HardDisk Interface Card into the upper CardSlot [M].

NOTE: Do not connect the 2-pin Harness [J] to the FDU at this time.

6. Lead the Harness containing the core with theblack marking [N] behind the NCU bracket [G].Important:This is to avoid the Hard Disk Data Bus frominterfering with the Hard Disk Drive Signal.

7. Connect the HDD harness to the InterfaceBoard [O], then connect the InterfaceBoard to the Hard Disk Unit [P].

8. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode. Then do the following:• Set the System Bit Switch 05 bit 4 to “1”, and System Bit Switch 00 bit 1 to “1”, then

exit the Service Mode. The machine then does the RAM reset level 3.• Enter service function 16 and select “0” (INITIALIZE) to initialize the Hard Disk.

If “OK” is displayed, exit the Service Mode and turn off the Main Switch.

9. Connect the harness [J] (2 pins) from the Hard Disk Interface Card to CN73 on theFDU.

10. Replace the screws, which were removed in step 3.(3 screws for Europe/Asia models, 1 screw for USA model.)

[G]

[H]

[O]

[N]

[P][G]

Rev. 11/2000

[L]

[I][J]

[K]


SM H5513-5

Inst

alla

tio

n

11. Keep the Core [Q] and the Harness as shown and replace the Rear Cover and the LeftCover.

12. Turn on the Main Switch and enter the Service Mode.Print the Memory Dump List (service function 06) for the following addresses and data.


If any of these addresses contain a value different from the above list, format the Hard Disk(service function 16).

CAUTIONThe Hard Disk Interface Card contains a Lithium Battery. The danger of anexplosion exists if a Battery of this type is incorrectly replaced.Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by themanufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstructions.

[Q]

Rev. 11/2000



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - 021021021021 12/11/200012/11/200012/11/200012/11/2000

APPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODELAPPLICABLE MODEL:::: GESTETNER – 9768/9878 GESTETNER – 9768/9878 GESTETNER – 9768/9878 GESTETNER – 9768/9878 RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN – 3690/3695 SAVIN – 3690/3695 SAVIN – 3690/3695 SAVIN – 3690/3695

SUBJECT: SCANNER

GENERAL:

The following parts corrections are being issued for all H515 and H551 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCEINCORRECT NO. CORRECT NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H5151062 H5151080 Bushing – R1/R2 Roller 2 - 2 1 11 14

Note:T

hiscopy

isintended

asa

master

originalfor


!P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO. 192FAX


!"" !"" !"" !""

# # # #

SUBJECT: SUB DEVELOPMENT UNIT

GENERAL:A new Sub Development Unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58are not included with the Sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 PartsCatalogs.

NOTE Item number 30 on page 17 of the parts catalog is also included withthe Sub Development Unit – A4


H5159810 H5159811 Sub Development Unit – A4 1-1 15 5NOTE

Note: T



P

AR

TS

5EXCLUDES

ITEM # 58 & 32

CONTROL NO.196FAX



BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER:BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - H515/H551 - 022 REISSUE 022 REISSUE 022 REISSUE 022 REISSUE ! 11/20/200111/20/200111/20/200111/20/2001



GENERAL:A new Sub Development Unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58are not included with the Sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 PartsCatalogs.

NOTE Item number 30 on page 17 of the parts catalog is also included withthe Sub Development Unit – A4


H5159810 H5159811 Sub Development Unit – A4 1-1 15 5

Note: T



! P

AR

TS

5EXCLUDES

ITEM # 58 & 32

CONTROL NO.200FAX


!

"##


GENERAL:A new sub development unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58 arenot included with the sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.



NOTE The sub development unit dose not come with the main motor assembly, rubber roller assembly, orthe transfer roller assembly. The part number for the complete development unit assembly isH5159571.

Note: T



P

AR

TS

CONTROL NO.203FAX


07/10/2002

!

"##


GENERAL:A new sub development unit has been registered as a spare part. Please note the item number 32 & 58 arenot included with the sub unit. The following part addition is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.



NOTE The sub development unit does not come with the main motor assembly, rubber roller assembly, orthe transfer roller assembly.

Note: T



P

AR

TS



BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 - 022 REISSUE 03/17/2003

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – 9768/9878 RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN – 3960/3695 SUBJECT: SUB DEVELOPMENT UNIT GENERAL: The sub development unit has been discontinued as a spare part. Please note that the complete development unit assembly is available as a service part. The following parts catalog correction is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY PAGE ITEM

H5159811 Sub Development Unit – A4 1-0 15 5 H5159571 Development Unit Assembly –A4 1 15 6

Note: This copy is intended as a m


PA

RTS

Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.



APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – 9768/9878 RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN – 3960/3695 SUBJECT: TONER END SENSOR GENERAL: To improve reliability the toner end sensor has been changed. The following parts update is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H5155050 H3125062 Toner End Sensor 1 1 25 12


0 OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and NEW machines. 2 NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.


1 NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines. OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines. 3 OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.


3/S Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.

Note: This copy is intended as a m


PA

RTS

12


Copyright 2003 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 2


APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER –9878 LANIER – NA RICOH –FAX 4800L SAVIN – 3695 SUBJECT: SC3 - 31 GENERAL: When installing for the first time, be sure to replace the new motor and Mylar together as a set. The Polygon Mirror Motor itself has not been changed. The new P/N (H5529100) consists of the same motor plus the new Mylar. SYMPTOM: Polygon Mirror Motor error: SC 3-31. CAUSE: The edge of the Polygon Mirror Motor shaft can sometimes contact the Mylar, affixed to the underside of the laser unit (H5522042), causing a reaction between the Mylar’s adhesive and the oil inside the shaft, triggering SC3-31. ACTION: Production line: The shape of the Mylar has been changed to ensure a gap between the Mylar and motor shaft. In addition, the adhesive is not applied to the center of the Mylar (the area just below the shaft). In the field: Replace with the modified Polygon Mirror Motor, which includes the modified Mylar.

PA

RTS

Tech Service Bulletin No. H515/H551–024

Page 2 of 2

The following parts updates are being issued for all H515/ H551Parts Catalogs.

MODEL H551 REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H5522042 H5522045 Laser Plotter Unit 1 3/S 1-13 1 H5525040 H5529100 Polygon Mirror Motor 1 3/S 1-13 5

NOTE: Replace the new Motor and Mylar together as a set.








Copyright 2004 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1

BULLETIN NUMBER: H515/H551 – 025 02/24/2004

APPLICABLE MODEL: GESTETNER – 9768/9878 LANIER – LF7560/LF7570 RICOH – FAX4700L/4800L SAVIN – 3960/3695 SUBJECT: LASER UNIT GENERAL: The adhesive material for the Mylar on the underside of the Laser Unit has been changed to further ensure that the polygon mirror motor oil does not react with the adhesive. The following part update is being issued for all H515/H551 Parts Catalogs.

NOTE: The following change is an additional measure to ensure that the SC3-31 (See TSB H515/H551 – 024) does not occur, since contact between the Mylar and motor shaft is already prevented in the older units by the gap between the two parts.

REFERENCE OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO. DESCRIPTION QTY INT PAGE ITEM

H5152045 H5152047 Laser Unit 1 1 13 1 UNITS AFFECTED: The serial number cut-in information was not available at time of this publication. INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:






PA

RTS

4700L service manual

Documents

Transcript of 4700L service manual